Le Nouveau Testament
Les quatre Evangiles - (la vie de Jesus de
Evangile seion Matthieu
Evangile seion Marc
Evangile seion Luc
Evangile seion Jean
les Actes des Apotres,
Epitre aux R o m a i
Premiere epitre aux Corinthiens
Deuxieme epitre aux Corinthiens
Epitre
Epitre ai_.. _
Epitre aux Philippiens
Epitre aux Coli
Premiere epitre aux Tl
Deuxieme epitre a
Premiere epitre a Timothee
Deuxieme epitre a Timothee
Epitre a Tite
Epitre a Phile"""-
L' Epitre ai
iere epitre de Pierre
Deuxieme epitre de Pierre
liere epitre de Jean
Deuxieme epitre de Jean
Troisieme epitre de Jean
Epitre de Jude
the :ncew
THENEWTestament
03- Gospel of Luke
04 - Gospei of John
n5 - Acls of Apostles,
06 - Epistle to the Ro
07 - First Epistle to the Corinthians
08 - Second Epistle to the Corinthians
" 1- Galatians
10- Ephesians
14 - II Thessalonian
15-1 Timothy
16- II Timothy
17- Titus
THE BIBLE
INJIL I MUQADDAS,
ya'xe,
HAMARE SBUDiWAHD AUS NAJAT-DENEWALE
YISU' MASIH
KA KATA 'AHD-NAMA:
ll TAWUKA TCNASf 7.UBAN BE ZUEAN I PRIitf MEK
BASABAB TBAN5T.ATIOK COMMlTTEE BE K1YA GATA,
J1SE TAS,HlM KABKE AB fiSGBwJ V
BAR CHHAEWiTE HAIK.
II
LONDON:
THE BBITISH AND FOBEIGN BIBLE SOCJTSTY.
1878.
INJIL I MUQADDAS
MATI KP INJIL.
MARQUS KI INJIL.
LU'QA KI INJIL.
YU'HANNA KI' INJIL.
RASULON KE A'AMA'L.
PULUS RASUL KA' KHATT
RU'MION KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' PAHLA'
KHATT gUKINTI'ON KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DUSEA'
KHATT QUEINTION KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT
GALATION KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT
AFSlON KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT
FILIPPION KO.
PULUS EASUL KA' KHATT
CJULUSSION KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA
KHATT TASSALUNIOJ'ON KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA DU'SEA
KHATT TASSALUNIOJ'ON KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA* PAHLA
KHATT TIMTAUS KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA
KHATT TIMTAUS KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT
TITUS KO.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT
FILEMU'N KO.
TBEANI'ON KO KHATT.
YA'QU'B KA KHATT I 'A'MM.
PATRUS
KA PAHLA' KHATT I 'AMM.
PATEUS
KA' DU'SRA' KHATT I 'AMM.
YU'HANNA
KA PAHLA' KHATT I 'AMM.
Y'UHANNA
KA' DU'SRA' KHATT.
YU'HANNA KA TI'SRA KHATT.
YAHU'DA'H
KA' KHATT I 'AMM.
YU'HANNA' FAQIH KE
MUKASHAFAT KI KITAB.
INJIL I MUQADDAS,
ya'sz,
HAMARE KHUDAWAND AUB KAJAT-DEKEWALE
YISU' MASIH
KA NATA 'AHD-NiMA:
IS KA TABJCMA T^HASf ZUBAN EE ZTIsAs I UHBU MEN
BASAEA8 TltAUST.ATIO^ COSIM1TTEE SE KITA GATA,
jisk TASjHiK kabke ab PANcirwis
UAR CilHAPWATE HAIK.
THE DBITISH AND FORE1GN BIBLE SOGIETT.
1878.
PtihM Ti'jil ki lahat
RU'MI'ON, I.
hy&n fcwi '.
PU'LUS KASU'L KA' KITATT
BU'MION KO.
I BATI.
PU'LUS, Yisii' Masih ki bnodn, nur
chunA hiii rasul, jo KhudA ki
Iniil ke liye alas T^iy* g»y*>
2 Jis kA wa'da ua ne Age se apne
nabion ke wasile pAk nawishton mon
kiyA,"
3 Apne Bctc hamArc Khiulawand
Tisu' Masih ke h»qq men, jo jism ki
nisbat DAiid ki nasi se hnA,
4 Magar quddiisi ki rdh ki nisbat,
nudrat ke sAth, us ke jl uthne lii se,
KlnidAkalJot/iHfibithuA;
5 JU ki ma'rifat se bam ne fazl aur
HsAlat pfti, tA ki m ko nAm ku wAuto
ham sab cjamurm ke, (min lii w, i'ar-
inAnbardAr bone ke bA'is thuhmj ;
6 Jin mon ne tum bhi Yisii' Masih
ke chune hde lio:
7 Un sab ko, jo Rum mon KhudA
ke piyAro aur chune lnie mugaddas
hain, iikhtd hal: UnmArc BAp KhudA
aur KbudAwand Yisu' Masih ki taraf
se tuni par fazl aur snlAmati hon.
8 Puhle main Yisii' Masih ki i
rifat tirai sab ke liye apne KhudA kA
oliukr kartA min, ki tumhArA imAn
tamAm dunyA inon mnshhur hai.
9 Aur KhudA, jis ki 'ibAdat maifl
apni nih se uh ke Bete ki Injil men
kartA han, inerA gawah bai, ki kis
tarah main bila-ndga. apni du'Aog nun
hamesha tumhArA zikr kartA;
195
10 Aur darkliwAst kartA hun, ki
agar KhudA ki raarzi lio, to main ttfat
bakhairkarko thori nmddat ba'd tum-
hAre pAs A paliunchiin.
11 Kyiinki main UinihAri mulAqAt
kA nipat muslitAq hfin, ia ki koi
ruhAni ni'ainat tumben pahmicha diin,
ki tum ma/.but lio jAo;
12 Ya'ne, ki main tumliare dar-
miyan hoke tuniliAre sAth, Apas ke
imAn ko Babah, jo tum men aur mujli
men hai, tasalli pAiiii.
13 JShaio, main nabin thAhtA ki
tum is se nA-wAqif rsho, ki mjtig ae
barha riiniiiAi'e jms ane kA iraila |;iy;l,
lA ki jaisA aur qaimu>n ke darmiyan
phai ]>AyA, waisA hi kuchh tumhire
darmiyan bhi paim ; pnr aj tak rukA
raha,
14 Ki main Y'iinanion aur Barbar-
Son, datiAon aur nadAnou ka, qarzdar
hmj.
15 So main tum ko bhi jo lliini
men lio, maqdiir libar Injil kl khabar
dene pnr taiyar hnn,
16 Kyiinki main Masih ki Injil se
sharmAtA nahin : is liye ki wuh bar
ek ki najAt ke wAste, jo iman lAtA,
pahle Yahudi, phir TtinAni ke liye,
KhudA ki qudrat hai.
17 Is wistc ki wuh rasti jo KhudA
ki taraf se hai, m ius men zdhir hai :
ki imAn so hai, ia ki bom imAn lawen ;
Khvd& ki 'addlal.
BU'MI'OE, II-
H Imhaf,
j«iaA ki likha hai, ki ItastMz imdn bc
[■::, ijIh.'/M.
18 K.yunkl Khudd ka jjazab main
ki tamdm be-dtnf aur nd-risti par, jo
ki saebdi ko rni-rdsti Ke rok dete Iiuin,
isnidn sn E&hir hai ;
19 Ki Khuda ki bibit k) kuehh
ma'lurn ho -sakti un nwn aalikarH. hsi ;
kyrinki KbuJd nc us ko uu par ash-
kdra kiyi.
20 Is liyo ki ws ki sifaten jo dckline
mwj nahi'n atiu, ya'ue, uh ki azali
tjiidrat, aur khudai, dtuiyd ki paidabh
ke waqt BO, khiluat ki chizon par
f;i ih fcarne men, aisi aaf ma'liini hotin,
i ud kr> kuchh "UBT nahin ;
'.'l Kyrinki unhorj ne agarehi Khu-
da ko pahchdna, tau bhi khudai ke
liiq uh kt buzurgi aur shukrguzari na
ki : baiki apne khiydloij meg be-huda
gaye, aur un ke na-fabru di l tii.iik
boj
yy±
22 W« Sp ko dana thahrake nadan
hb rayej
23 Aur gairfini Khudd ke jaldl ko
fdnf £dmf, aur chiriyon, aur chaimay-
on, aur kiro-makoron ki rnrirat ec bad-
ai ddla.
24 Ia wdsto Khudd ne bbi un ke
dilon ki khwahish \m nnhen Dipaki
tiien chhor diya, ki apne badanou ko
dpaa men be-hurumt «aron :
25 Unhoij ne Khuda ki aachai ko
jhiith so badai dala, aur bananowale ki
nisbat bb (jn hamesha sitaish ke ldiq
hai, A'mfn!) banai htii nhi/.otj k i
ziyada paras tiuh aur liandagi ki.
"2fi Ia eabab se Khuda ne ud k<
gandi ahahwatog meg chhor diya; k
un ki 'auraton ne bbi apni taba'i adat
ko us se (a tsbfftt M kliilaf hai badai
ddld:
27 Yrinhi mard bhf 'auraton se
apne tab'ai kam chhorke apni shahwat
se dpas meii jale ; mard ne mard ke
sdth ru-aiyahi ke kira kiye, aur apni
giitnnthi ke !diq phsl apnc rrten p!ii:
28 Aur jis hal ki unhon ne pasand
19G
i ia kiya ki Kliudi ki pahehaii ko MlV.
kar rakhcrj, Khuda uo bhi un ko 'aul
ki be-tamizi men. clilior diya, ki na-
lili(| k:iin kareri :
29 Wo sah (arah ki nd-risti, haram-
kan, bad-khwahi, lalach, badzati sc
bhar gaye; aur ddh, klu'm, jhagra,
dagabazi, bad-khoi h pur hue; kana-
pbfisi baniewiie,
30 TnlniiiiUapanewalo, Khuda we
'adawat-rakhnowile, ta'na-xani-kanie-
wale, ghaniandi, li&an, badbm ke
l>ani, ma biji ke na-farm&nbardir,
;il Bo imtiya», bad-'ahd, be-dard,
kinawMV, be-rahio biie:
32 Aur agarclii wa Khuda ki hukrn
jicfce, ki aise kam kaniewale qatl ke
laiij liaiij.ua fatjal wo ap wuhi kain
karte, baiki aiso karnewibn ko man-
■/,\\r bhi karte.
II BA-B.
PAS, ai adrni, koi kyun na lio ju
'aib lagita, tujh ko kuchh 'iwr
nabin ; ky6ijki jis hal ki tu diisrc par
'aib TagAta, Zp ko gunahpftr thahriita
hai ; ig Jjye ki tti jo 'aib lagaia, kliud
twhl kam karIA hai.
2 Lekin ham jante hain ki aiae
kdm-karuewalon par Khudi ki taraf
m saza ki Imkui hai]<| ke mutabit]
hai.
3 Ai insdn, tu jo aise kiin-kanu--
walon jrar 'aib la^ata, aur khud welil
karta" kyi yib kbiykl kart.i hai ki
Khuda" ki 'ad'alat se ijacb niklegaV
4 Ya tti us ki mihrbani, aur bar-
daaht, aur muhlat k! kasrat ko haqir
jdnta? aur naliiu samajhta, ki Khudd
ki mihrbdnf isi maqsad se bai ki tu
tauba ki taraf mdil bo jie ?
5 Baiki tu. npne aakht aur be tauba
kiyo dil we ua din ki khdtir, jis ineii
qahr aur Khudd ki 'addlat i haqq
Kabir liogi, apue liye gazab jam a
karti hai ;
6 Wuh bar ek ko us ke kamoti ke
muw4&| badla degi;
7 Un ko jo nekokdri i>ar aabr ke
H bagair turqfitari U nU'MI'OX, III. htii
sdth qdim rahke buzurgiaur 'iazat aur 20 Aur nddanon kd rikhlinewihi,
haqd ke tdlib hairj, hanieshaki zindagi aur larkon kd ustad, aur ki wufa |j&U-
degd
8 Magar un par jo fasddi hain, aur
sachdi n tdbi' nahin hote, baiki nd-
risti ke tabi' hain, qabr aur gazali
toga;
8 liar ck adml ki jdn, jo burdi
kartu lini, ranj aur 'azdh men paregi,
paale Vuliuili ki, phir Yiindni ki:
10 Par har tik ko jo blialai harta hai,
buznrgi aur'izzat aur ^:ilain:iti milcgi,
palile Yahudi ko, phir Yunani ko :
11 Kyunki Khudd ke h uzur kisi ki
tarafddri nahiij lioli.
12 Ia liye ki jinhon ne bagair sha-
ri'at pde gunah kiye, ira bagair Hhari'at
ke halak honge ; aur jinhon ne shari'at
pake gunah kiyo, un ki sazd shari'at
ko mawdtiq hogi ;
13 (Kydnki Khudd ke nazdik sha-
ri'at ke minnewale rastba/. nahiu tlia-
Jii»rt .-. kliki sliari'.u \ :i.r 'amal knna--
wdle rdstbdz thahrenge.
14 Ia liye jab gur-qaumen, jo sha-
ri'at. naliin rUEb.tin.aB» tabi'atsc sha-
ri'at ke kini karti hain, ao we sliari'at
Ba rukbta hii« apnt liye dp hi apni
shari'at bain.
15 We us kain ko, jin ae Hhari'at kd
maqsad hai, apne dilon men likha hiia
dikhate hain ; un ki tamiz hhi gaw&hi
j*tH, was un ko khiyal apa» men ilzdm
dete, yd 'uzr karte hain. ;)
1G Vs din men jab Khudd mori
Injil ke mutdbiq YisiV Masih ki
ma'rii'at ddniion ki poshida bdton ka
hisdf karegd.
17 Boleh, tn Yahudi kahhitd, aur
shuri'at par takiya kartd, aur Khudd
par fihfchi karta hai,
18 Aur us ki marzi jdnta, aur ttha-
ri'at ki ta'Hin pdke mukhtalif chizon
merj imtiydz karno jdntd;
19 Aur dp par i'aliqad rakhtd hai,
ki niain, andhon kd rdh-dikhldnewdld,
aur uii ki jo andhere ruuu bain rosbni
hun,
197
lasa 'ihn o satliai kd, jo shari'at men
hai, iuore pds maujud hai.
.; 21 Pas, kyd tfijo auron ko sikbldtd
hai, dp ko nahfn nikhiitu ? tii jo wa'z
kartd hai, ki Chori na karna, dp hi
chori kartd?
22 Tn jo kahta, ki Zind ria karsa,
kyd dp hi zind kartd 'i td jo buton -■■
nalVat r;ikbtd, kyd dp hi 'ibadat-khdn-
onko luttd hai V
~23 Tii' jo .shari'at par fnkhr kartd
hai, shari'at ko 'udiil fcame 86 Kiut<i:i
ki be-'izzati kartd?
24 Chundru-lii likhd hai, ki Tui.i-
hdrc aabab gair-qaumon mtn Khudd
ke iidtn ki takfir ki jdti hai.
2.r> Khulna faidainand to hai, taat
td Hhari'at pai 'amal kare ; lekiu jo tfi
shari'at ke barkhildf uhahiewdld hm't,
to terd kbatna-nd-makhtuni t.hahra.
'1<\ Pas agal nd-iuakhtiin shari'at
ko hukmon par 'amal karen, to kyd
un ki na-niakbuiid khatua na gini
jdogi?
27 Aur ag:u- zati Dd-uiakhttm sha-
ri'at ko purd karen, to kyd tujhe, jo
bdwujdd kitdb aur khatua ke, shari'at.
se barkhildf chalti hai, gunahgar na
thabrdenge '}
28 Kydrki wuh Yahiidi nabin 'y
zdbiri men hai; aur wuh kliatna
naliiii jo zdbiri ii^m men hai:
2G Baiki Yahudi «uni jo batin H
ini; aur khatua wuhi jo dil H bo,
ruriant, na ki lafidj jis ki ta'rif ad-
niion se nahin, baiki Khudd ki taraf
ao ho.
III BA'B.
PAS Yahiidi ko kyd fazilat? vd
khattia kd kyd fdida hai ?
2 Al hatta hai larab se 1-aliut lini :
khaaskar yib, ki we Kbuda ke kalam
ko amdnatddr i ■':■■.
3 Pbir agar ba'zo iman na Ide, to
kyd un ki btr-iiiiani Khudd kd i'atibdr
liiitil kar ?akti bal?
Shari'at par 'amal hurne se TVU'MI'ON, III. koi ritslhiz itahiii UtaltaHa,
4 Aisd na howc : baiki Kbudd saeh- j shari'at farmAti, shari'atw&lon W se
cha thahre,agarcbiharek idtui jhuthd'kahti hai: td ki sah ki mu£.h band
lio; chunAnchi likha, hai, ki Tu apci
batun meg. rdst thahrc, aur 'addlat
men jit jac.
6~ l'nr agar hamili nd-rdsti Kbudd
kS rasti ko zahir karti hai, to ham k ya
kahen? kyd Khuda na-rdet hai, jo
qahr na/.il kar'ld? (malu to insan ki
urah lmlta bun)
6 Aisd na howo : warna Khuda
kyunkard'.inyd ki 'addlat karegd"?
7 Pbir agar niero jliiitb ko sabab
Khuda ki aachdi us ke jalai ke liye
ziyada Kabir bui, to mujh pur kyug
gunahgdr ki tarah bukm hotdhai?
8 Aur ham kyiin burii un kuren, td
ki bbuldi uiklcV (uhuninchi yih tuh-
toi/t b*M liar ki jdti, aur ba'ae bolte
ki ham yun kabtu,) uiaon par sa/.A kd
hukm hacjt] bah
9 l'askyd ham na Re bihtar bain r
Hargiz naluri : kyiinki baui dge da'wd
kar cliuke. ki kyd Yahudi aur kya
Yunani, sab ke sab guuah ke talo dabe
ham ;
10 JaisA iikhd hai, ki Kol rdstbdz
naliin, ekbhi nabin:
11 Koi Bamajbnuwdtd naliin, koi
Khudii kd tdlib nahin.
12 Sab gunirdh hain, sah ko sab
nikamme bain ; koi nekokdr nahin,
i' k bhi naliin.
13 Un ka gald kbuli bui gor hai;
unlion no apni Kuban sc fareb diyi
h;ii ; un ko honthog. mci) bdmpon k;i
zahr hai:
11 Un ko munh men la'nat aur
kafivdh.it bhari bain;
16 Un ke qadam khuu karun men
tez bain :
16 Un ki rdhou. meg tabdhi aur
pareshani hai :
17 Aur uubon ne ualdmatf ki rah
nahin ]iahclidni r
18 Un ki drikhun ke sdmhne Khu-
lid ka kbauf naliin.
19 Abham jduto hain ki jo kucbh
198
lio jde, aur adri dunyd Kbudd ke
aimhne gunahgdr thahre.
20 Pas koi admi shari'at par 'amal
karne se us ke sdmhne raatMl na
tbahrega; kyurjki shari'at ke waaile
se guiiiih ki pahahaD bi hai.
21 Par ab Kbudd ki rastb&zt fdia-
ri'at ke bagair zdhir bui, jis par sha-
ri'at aur nabi jawabi' deto bain;
22 Ya 'n o, Kbudd ki wuh rdstbdzi,
jo Yisn' Masih par imdu ldne m milti
hai, aur un sab ke liye aur un sab men
hai, jo inidn Idte hain : kyunki kuchh
t'an | nabin ;
23 Is liye ki sabhon ue gunah kiyu,
aur K liuJd ke jaldl se mahrum bain ;
24 So we ub ke fazl se us makblasi
ke sabab, jo Masih YiBti' so hai, rnuft
rdstbdz gine jati) hain :
25 Jiae Khuda M pwh kiya ki ok
kafdra bo, jo us ke labu par iman lane
so kim dwc, ta ki wuh apu i rdsti
aglc waqt ko ^nmUion H saiir Ilahi ko
bais tarah dene men zdhir kare,
26 Aur ifi waqt ki bdbat bbi apni
rautt zabir karo; td ki wuh dp hi rdst
rahOj aur usc jo YiwV ^t iman lawe,
iasibd7, tbabrdwe.
27 Phir ab ghamand kalidg rahd?
Us ki tnijnh hi na rabi. Kia sbari'at
bo? Kyd a'aradl ki shari'at te 1 Na-
bin ; baiki irudn ki shari'at se.
faj Kyi'mki ham no yih natija nik-
dld hai, ki admi inidn bi se, be-a'amdl
sbari'at ke, rasr.bd« llialiartd hai.
2i) Kyd wuh s'irf Yahudion kd
Kbudd hai V aur gair-ijaumog kd na-
bin ? Albatta, wuh gair^jaumoij kd
bbi hai :
30 Kytiuki ok hi Kbudd hai, jo
makbtunon ko iman se, aur na-nmkh-
tiinon ko bin (mdn hi ko wasile rdat-
bii^. tliahrdwege.
31 Pas kyd ham shan'at ko iman
H l>atil karte bain? Aisa na bowe;
baiki hain to sbari'at ko ijdhn karte.
Abiraliam ki imun us ke liye IWMr
IV BA'B.
P HIU ham kyi kahen, ki hamrire
bip Abirahim nu jism ki bdbat
kuchh | u i ya ?
2 Kyunki agar Abb-ahiin a'amil
ki rah ae rastbaz gini gayi, *° us ^°
faklir ki jagah hai; lukki Khudi ke
ag"
UiLltill )i:l
3 Is liye ki nawishta kyi kahti
hai? Yibi, ki Abiraham Khudi par
Imin liyi, aur yili ua ke liye rdstbizi
gina gaya.
i Ab kim-karnewile ko mazduri
ili'ua bakhahish uahiii, baiki us ki
haqq hai.
5 Far ub ke liye jo kain nahin kar-
ta, baiki us par jo gunnhgir ko raat-
haz thahriti iman lata liai, uni ka
iman ristbizi gina jati.
6 Chuninchi Daud bhi us idmi ki
Tifkbakhti ka zikr karta hai, jis ko
Khudi bagair a'amil ku raatbaz thah-
rata,
7 Ki Mubarak wo jin ke gunih
bakhaUe gaye, aur jin ki kliataen
dkimpi gayin.
8 Mubani.k wili sliaklia jis ke gu-
nahon ka hisab Khudiwand na lega.
9 Pas kyi yili uckhikhti makhtiin-
on hi ke liye hai, yii ni-innkhtiinoii
ke liye bhi ? Ham to kah chuke, ki
Abirahaiu ke liye ua ka imin rasthiz;
gini gaya.
10 Pax wuh kyunkar gina gaya?
makhtiim, ya ua-makhtuni ki hilat
men? Makhtiini men nabi u, baiki
na-makhtuui men.
11 Aur ua ue khatna ka nishin
paya, ki us iman ki nistbazi ki muhr
bn. Jo KM ui-niakhtuni men mili Uii:
ta ki wuh ua sab ki jo ni-niakhtimi
me» iman late hain bip ho, ki un ke
liye bhi ristbizi gini jit :
12 Aur luakhtunoii ki bip ho, na
UD ki jo sirf uiakhliiu ham, lialki jo
hamdre bip Abirahim ke imiu ki bhi,
i 'o use ni-makhtuni men *ha, pairaui
;arte hain.
190
ON, IV. riittbazi gina jtiiti,
13 Kyunki wuh wa'da, jo Ahira-
him aur ua ki nasi ke sith tliiy ki 'Lu
dunyi ki waris hogd, ho shari'at ke
waaile m nahin, baiki imin ki rist-
bizi ke wasile ac tfai.
1-1 Kyiinki agar shari'at-wale hi
wiris hain, to imin bc-faida, aur wa'-
da la-haml ;
15 Ki shari'at qahr ki vilnili hai,
is liye ki janin shari'at nahin, wahfm
n n- firman i bhi nahin.
16 So is liye imin ae Mi, ki wuh
fazl ki thahre, ti hi woli \ibd Maaira
nasi ke liye qiim rahe : na «irf us
nasi ke liye jo shari'atwaii hai, baiki
us ke liye bhi jo Abiraliam ki si imin
rakhti; wuh ham sablon ki bip lini,
17 fChuninchi likhi hai, ki main
ne tujlie bah u t qaumon ka bip iini-
qarrar kiyi,) ua Khudi ke simhne,
jis par wuh imin laya, aur jo murdon
ki jiliuuwili, aur un chizou ki jo
maujud nahin yiin zikr karti goyi ki
maujud hain.
18 W uli ni-urnmedi ki jagnh men
ummed ke sith imin lava. La ki wuh,
us kalam ke niuwifiq, ki Teri nasi
aibi hogi, bakul qaumou ki bip ho.
19 Wuh 8UHt-i'atiqad na thi, aur
na us ne apne murda se badan ki, jo
sau baras ke qarib ki thi, aur Dft
Sarah ke rihm ki, jo khushk ho gayi
thi, kuchh khiyil kiyi:
20 Aur wuh be imiui se Khndi ke
wa'de men fibakk na layi, baiki i'ati-
qid men mazbiit hokar us ne Khuria
ki barii ki ;
21 Aur uso ka.mil yaqin hua, ki jo
kuchh us no wa'da kiyi, so use piiri
karne jar bhi qidir hai.
22 Isi wiste y i b us ke liye nirithizi
gin i gaya.
23 Aur sirf us ke liye nahiri likhd,
ki yih us ke wiste gina gayi ;
2-1 Baiki hamiro liye bhi, jin ke
wiste gini jiegi, agar liaiti us par
imiu liwen, jis ne hamdre Khudd-
waud Yisu' ko mui'doij men se jiliyi;
/ , ■■■'m let sabab nistbaz K1j'M1'0>-
26 K i wah hamavi kkataoii ke i
mddte liawilla kar diyii gaya, aur
[ifiirki: jildya #i)'a, tii ki ham r&tbaz
liulm'h.
V HA'it.
PAS jub ki iiiuu iman ko sabab
rasi .bdz timbre, to haru tm'ij aur
Khudd iih'h haluan1 Ktmddwaud l'isi'i'
.Ma-ah ke wasilo uiel hud.
^ kur ua hi ko wasilo so hani ua
tazl roerj jis par tji'iim haiu iman ke
lafasb iluklil pati', aur Khudd ke jalai
ki mnaod par fokhi buro bain.
3 Aursirf yibi iwliiij : baiki muak
hiton meii bal fakhi karte, yili jdu-
kar ki musibat ao sabr j>aidii hoti
[ Aur sate M tajiibu-kdri";
tajriUt-kaii aa ummed :
5 Aur ummed suamunda nahin
bartt; kyiiiiki Kuli i Q,ud» ku wasile
H jo liamen di nyi, Khudd ki
habbat haru&rc dtl menjari hai.
9 Kyiinki jiib haru hauoz kamzor
tbe, Masih 'diii w*qt pu bedfuog ke
liye mita.
7 Ab nuwlikil su kUi niistkdr ke
liye koi opoi jdu degd: par ahdyad
kisi mes yih jub&t fio, ki kiwi dme-
<>kiir ke Tiyi.' iftal ka dc.
s I.i'kiu Kiiii'la ua apui muliabbat
ham. par yii« zdhif ki, ki jali lunu
guudhgdr timbre tbe, Masih hamarti
wdate rana.
9 So ab, ki ua ke lalui he sabab
iiuni rirtfrria thaltre, to kitnd ziyiula
ua ku ivasile aur K haob raLenge.
10 Kyi'njki jab Kliuda uo haru
jis *ut ki hatn lUishnian tim, a;
Bete ki maut ko sabab mel kiyii, pas
bam ab mol pakar ua ki zindagi ke
suhab kitu.i bi ziyaila bach j. n
11 Aur airf yilii uabin, baiki apno
KIuhUwhihI lisii' Masih ko wasile,
jis ko sabab ab ham uo milap paya,
Khudd par I'akiir blii kartu hain.
12 Pu« jis tarub ek Adrai ke waaile
^■;i<ah dunyd HMU iyi, &ar ganih ka
sabab maut di, isi «u» h. maut sah ad-
200
thnh'trr.t ie/awdid.
niion nicn pliaili, uj liyo ki sab no
gundu kiya :
13 C^yuS^i (fhaii'at ke xaliir hoM
tak Runili duuyd meij ihd; par jahin
shari'at nahin, guudii giud uabin jata.
14 Tati bhj maut ne A'dam so Mrt-
h& tak uu par bhi iiubuti uo A'duin
k;L Eii guuah na kiya, ju dnowalo ka
uishati tiiii, bidsbaiiat ki.
15 far yih nabirj, ki jis qadr kha-
ta, isi qadr bakbahiEh. Kyiinki jab
i'k hi ki khata ke sabab bahur, ar. mar
gaye, to ek lii ddmi, ya'no, Yisti' Munih
U «sefle bb, Kbudri ki fazl, aur fazl
«e bakhshiah, bahuteron ko liyc kitui
Kiyada lit'ii.
lfi Aur ua ki jalsd ek ke ma6h
karuo ka anjiru hud, ao muai bakh-
uhish: kyiinki ok hi khatd ke uA»b
aaza kd bukm bua, par rd&tliaz houo
ke liye Uibut khataon ki bak lis hi* h \uu.
17 Kyiinki agar ek ki kliaUi ke
sabab maut no ek hi ko waaile sa bad-
sbiihat ki ; to wo jo nihdyat fikd ;un*
M.stbazi ka iu'aiu pate hain, ek, ya'ne,
Yi«u' Masih ko wasile, Kindasi uieii
kitna /iyada bddahiiliat karenge.)
18 Pas jftiftd ek khata ko sabab sab
ddiniou par «ay.A ka hukra hiid, waidd
bi raHtbazi ke ek kam ko anbah aah
dduii rdatba/. thaharke zindwgj p&waa.
19 Kyuijki jaiso ek fliakha ki ud-
farindtibiuddri se balmt log gunabgdr
thahre, wai^o hl ek ki fannaiibnrddii
ko sabab bahut log raHtbdz thahrenge.
20 Aur shari';it darmiyaii ai, ki
khatd ziyada lio. Par jahan gunah
djida hud, fazl us so bhi nihftyut
ziydda hud hai :
lii Ohuudnchi jai«« ijunih na maut
se bddsbahat ki, walau hi iazl buinare
Kluuliiwaud Yinu' Masih ko wasile
hamutha ki zindagi ko liye rastbazi
ae badslidhab karega.
VI BA-B.
PAS huni kya kafaaQ ? Ky;i Kasih
karte rabeii/ ta k) fa/.l ziyddu hor
2 Aiad ua iiowe. Ilam to jo gunah ki
Tadiim kafarz ki pak hon. RU'JATON, VII.
Oiunilt ki
tUri
mite hain, pliir kyiinkar usltiyar nieij Main, baiki tari ke ikKtiy;u
iudagi giiKraaeri1
3 KyA tum nahin jtote ki ha»
meri sc jitnon nc Masih Yiau' ka hap-
tlmui pavA, ua ki maut ki bapti
pi.vi?
i Pas maut ko baptisma n UMb
uh ku sath garu gaye : IA ki jsiise
Masih mmrlon men se 13dp ke jalai
ke wiiiiile sa uthdyA gayA, waise hi
ham bhl uayi zindagi mm qadam
uiaivij,
o Kyiinki jis hAl ki ham us ki maut
ki muflha babat, mag shamil ho gayo,
to albatta ji uthne meii blii honge ;
b' Ki ham jdnte hain, ki bamari
purani inaAniyat us ku sAth salib p»
khiiichi gayi, ta ki gmiah ki badan
ncsfho jAe, ki ham Ago ko gunah ke
gulstm ua rahen.
7 Kyiinki j» tiitiA, ao gunAh m
Clliiutii hai.
a Pas agar ham Masih ke sAth
Bius, to hameii y a. i i u hai ki us ke
sath jioijgc blil ;
B, Yih jauko ki Masih imu-ilnu men
se ji utha, phir nahin marnc ka~; aur
maut pliir ua par ikhtiyar nahiii
rakhti.
10 Kyiinki wuh jo muA, 80 gunib
ki nisbat ek liar miiil; pliir jo jitA
hai, 10 Kluida ki nisbat -jitu hai.
Ll Isi tarah tum bhi tip ko gunAh
ki nisbat murdfl, par KhudA ki tiUbat
hamaro KhuoAwand Yisii' MasUk ki*
itnSe /.inila Kamjiio.
113 Cas gunah tunihare fani badan
par saltanat na kare, ki tum ua ki
uliahwatoii men us ke ('armAnbardAr
bo ralio.
13 Aur ua aptio 'azii <rimali ku ha-
wAle karu, ki nA-rasii ko hatbyAr
lumuri, baiki apne ta.iu ia tarah Khu-
dA kn sompo, jaiBe niarko ji uthe ho,
aur apne 'a/,u Kkudd ko supurd. karo,
ta ki rasti ke hathyar banen.
U b liye ki matt taat par galib
na boga; kvi'iuki tum shari'at ke ik.li
201
men ho.
15 Pas ta, kya ham guuAh kiyi'
ksrBn, is liye ki ham shari'at ke ikh-
tiyar meri nahin, lialki fazl ke ikhti-
yar men baiii ? AisA na howo.
lfi KyA tum iiahiri jinte ki jia ki
tabi'dari meri tum Ap ko gulam ki
man inci sompte ho, usi ke gulim ho
jis kt tAbiVliiii karto y kliwah "imnli
kt, jis kA anjSm maut hai, kliwau
CannAubardAri ki, jis kA phal rwtbazi
tud r
17 Tar uliakr KhudA kA, ki tum jo
igo guuAh ko gulim the, dil se u» tft'-
liiu k<', .jia ke sancbo men tum illnvl i
gaye tbe, faraiAnbanlAr hde.
18 Aur gundh ne chhutkar rAstbA/'t
ko bando Itiie,
V.) Main tumhSro jism ki kamzori
ke wabab aiiiui ki taruh bayAa kaiti
lifin : so jaise tum ne apne 'azii nA-
paki aur hbarArat ki gulAmi nieij
aompe tbe, tdki shaiiirat kareD, wat»
hi ali ajiue 'azii ntstbaKi ki gulilmi
incn pak hone ko wdsto sotnpo.
'Jb Kyiirjki Jab tum E0HU ko gu-
IAtu tbe, raatiiay.i mu iaU the,
21 Pas tum no un kilinon hc, jin se
ab shanuinda ho, kyA phal p4y&?
kyiirjlii mi ka anjam maut hai.
'12, Par ab tuai gunali se chbtitkar
Khudd ke bando hoko pdkiKUgt kA
phal lAtc ho, avtr Akhir bamesim ki
7-indam' hai.
'^;i Kyiitiki gumih ki maadirl maut
baj ; pai' Kin.i.iA ki. bakJulush hamAre
Kluulawaiiil Yisii' Ma.-ih ke wa.^ilo
hamualia ki /Jndagi hai.
TII UA'B.
Al bbAto, kyA tum nahin iifite,
(main to un se kahtd hiin, jo
shari'at ne wiqit haiti,) ki fcof Admi
jab tak jitd hai, us par shari'at ki
lnikm hai '.'
'J, Kyi'ujki byAM 'aurat sbari'nt ke
nniH'jiiiq apne khasam ki Kindagi tak
us ki baud men hai ; par agar khasaiu
Oimah ke usahar'a ht baiat, RU'MI'ON, VIII. jo lamare 'az&on mm hai.
14 Kyiinki hnmjantc ham ki sh»-
ri'iiL rfinim hai : par main jismani,
t gunAh ko h&th bik
16 Ki
maro, to wuli apu a khasam ki band se
rlil.'i'it. jiti hai.
'.i Pas khasam ke jite ji uli wuli
(Mara ki ho jawe, to Baniy* thahregi;
par agar khasam mar gaya, to wah
ii3 band so chluifc gnyi, ki agar dusre
ui:ird ki hu jawe, to zaniya na hogi.
4 Su, ai incro bbalo, tum bhi Ma-
s.ih ke badan ko sabab shari'at ki nis-
bat mar gayo ho, ki tum dusre ke bn
jio jo murdon merj se uthaya gaya,
ta ki ham KhuM ko liye ph»] liiwtjg.
5 Kyunki jab ham jismani thc
gunah ki khwa.hisben, jo ahari'at k<
sabab thin, hamare band baml men
maut ko phal laun ko aaar karti thin.
6 !':ir ab jo ham mar gaye, to
shari'at so, jia ki qaid metj the, chhdt
gaye, aiss ki nih ke naye taur se, na ki
harf ke purane taur se, handali karun.
7 l'iiir hiun kyii Icalien | Ivya
shari'at gunah. hal? Aisa na huwe.
Baiki bagair shari'at ke main gunah
ko n alun pahchanta ; kyiirtki main.
\aW,\v V« n* Vbrt&\ «•??« Bnai\*it na.
8 Par gunah nc shari'at ke sabab
qabd pakar mujh mou bar tarah ka
lalach paida kiya. Kyunki Bhari'nt
ke bagair guiuili 1 1 ■ u r< 1 : t hal,
I) Ki nuiiij tige be-shar'a hoke jita
Uni: par jab bukm liyi, gunah ji
ut.hd, aur ujiiiij mar gaya.
10 Ydn mujhe ma'lum ho ;:iv.i, bj
wuli bukm, jo zindagi ke liye tbti,
maut ka sabab hal
11 Kyiinki gurnih ne hukm ke wa-
sile qabi; pakar mujhe bab kaya, aur
usi ke wasiiu mar dahi,
12 Pas shari'at to pak hai, aur
bukm piik, aur baqq, aur khub hai.
13 Pas jo cliiz klmb hai, kya wuhi
mere liye maut tbahri? AiBa na
bew& Baiki gunnh no, ta ki ub ka
gaya htin.
karta hdu, so main janti
nahin: kydgki jo main chahta, eo
nahin karta ; baiki jis m mujhe nafrat
hai, wubi karta hdu.
16 Paa jab main wubi karta htin,
io nahin chahta, to main tjulu'il kartu
lilin ki Bbari'at khub hai.
17 So ab main us ka karnewali
nahin, baiki gunah jo mujh men basta
hai.
18 Kyiinki main janta biin ki
vmijh mcQ, (ya'ue mere jiam men,)
koi achcbhi chi'a naliin basti: ki
kliwAbish to mujh men maujud hai ; MI
jo kuchh achchha hai karne naliin pati.
10 Ki jo neki main chahta htin,
nahin karta i baiki wuh badi, jisemain
naliin chahta, so bi karta hfirj.
20 Pas jab ki main jisc naliin chaa-
ta, wuhi karta biin, to pbir main ub
ki karnewali naidn, baiki gunah jo
.«\Ul\U mft%\yiaU.'\\&\,
biin, ki jab maiji neki kiyA cbalita
huij, to badi mujh pas maujiid hai.
'"- Kyunki main batini insaniyat
se Khu.da ki slmri'at men magan luin;
2-\ Uagar diisra shar'a apne 'aauon
men dekati hun, jo meri 'aql ke sh:u'':i
se lartd, aur mujhe tu gimih ke Khar'a
ka, jo mere 'azuori men hai, girifiar
karti.
21 A'b ] main to kharab-kbasta ad-
mi hun 1 ia maut ke badan se mujhe
kaun chhurAwi 'j:iY
25 Khuiia ka shukr karta hun, ha-
niare Khudawand Yisii' Masih ke wa-
aile «e. Garaz, main to apui T;n-| L s.
Klmda ke sbar'a ka banda hiln ; par
jism se gunah kcahar'a ka.
VW BA'B.
PAS ab un par jo Masili Yisd' met
gunah hona zahir lio, aehchhi chiz ke
wasile maut ko mujh men paida kiya,' Jf ham, aur jism ke taur par nah
ki gunah bukm ke wasile uihayat hi j baiki Rdli ko taur par chalte, saza Y
buni ma'ldm ho. bukm nahin.
202
iion iri ummed
! Kjnnki m Mh
VIII. ki htky&d.
pAi, ki phir daro ; baiki hpalak hone
ki Ruh pAi, jts sn bnm AbbS. ya'uc,
Ai Riiji, pukw pukat tahta bilg,
16 Wuhi Ruh hamdrf ruh ke sita
jawabi doti, ki bani KhudA ke farzand
hain :
17 Aur jab farzand hiie, to wAris
bhi, ya'ne, KbudA ke waris, aur miris
men Masih ke diarik.; hasbarte ki
hain ub ke siith dukh ulfhAweij, tA ki
ke sith jalai bbi pAwcn.
18 Kyfinki meri aamajh men m\-
laano i bal kedukb dard islAiq nahin,
T) Kyiinki w'i' jo jism ke taur par ki us jaiAl ke, jo ham. par zihir hone-
hain, ua k~A DUSaj jtemani hai ; par wc wili hai, muqAbil bon.
| Ruh ke Uur par hain., uii ki misi) 19 Ki khilqat kamal Bffiu se Khu-
nUiiiiii lisi L. jdA ke farzandon ke zahir hone ki rah
6 Ki jiainini nii/ij maut hai ; par takti hai.
RU'Ml'ON
Undagi ke
«bar 'a ne, jo Masih Yihu' DMQ lini,
mujhe guudb aur maut ko ahar'a se
chhurA di y, i.
3 ia liyc ki jo shari'at sc jism k!
karazori ke sabab na ho saka, so Khu-
dA se hAA, ki us ne apne Reto ko
praahgar jism ki surat men gnnih
ko sabab bhcjkar gunah par jifim. men
aazA ka Imkm kiyi:
4 T A ki shari'at ki risti hmn
jo jism ke taur par nahin, baiki riih
M taur par chaltu hain, puri lu
riilisuii uiizAj zindagini aur saJAmati.
7 Is iiye ki jimiiiiui mizaj KhudA
ki dushman hai; kyirnki Kliudii ki
sliariW ko tAbi' nahin, aur na ho
sakti.
8 Aur ]0 jismlni hain, Khuda ku
hAni ho, ba-ah'art* ki KhudA ki Uiih
tum men basti hai. Par ji» men Ma-
sih ki Ruh nahin, wuh us kA nahin.
10 Aur agar Masih tum men hai,
tn badan gunih ke mabab murda hai,
|iar Riih rasl.bii/i ke sah» b /.inda.
11 Phir agar us ki Ruh, jis ne Yisti'
ku murdon men. sc jildyA, tum men
base, to Masih ka jilanowAla tumhare
murdo badan ko bhi apni us Itdk ke
wasile, jo tum men batiti hai, jilawega.
12 Pas, ai bhAio, ham kuchh jism ke
Iarzdar nahin, ki jism ke taur par zin-
agi kAteu.
13 Kytinki agar tum jism ke taur
par zindagi karo, to marom : pai aMr
Um Kuli se badan ki buri 'adaton ko
icAro, to jiogo.
14 I» liye ki jitoo KlitidA ki Ruh
ki hidayat «e cbalte, wu hi Kiiudi kt-
(urzand liain.
15 Ki tum ne giildmi ki ruh nal
203
20 Is liye ki kbi]qat balalat ke
laht men Ai, apni khunhl se nahin,
baiki us ke aabab jo use tabt mi^ri liivd
hai, is ummed par,
21 K\ khilqat bhi khaiibi ki gula-
mi se obbutkeKhudA ke far/.and<m ke
knil'iiit milke ab tak chikheri mArti,
ir use piren lagi hain.
23 Aur &qat wvSt nahin, baiki ham
bhi, jinhen Riih ke pahle plial inilu,
apne rnen karAhte hain, aur lepalak
hone ki, ya'ue, apne jismon ki riliai
ki r;ih takte hain.
24 Ki ham ummed sc bach gaye
haig; par ummed ki liui chiz jab da-
kld jAwe, tu iiniiTicd u;; rabi; kyiinki
jo ehia koi dekbta hai, tm kA umtucd-
wir kis tarah ho ralia hai ?
25 Par jimi ham nahin [lekhte,agar
ham us ke umraedwar ham, to sabr se
us ki ra.li takte hain.
M Isi tarah Riih bhi hamAri kam-
zorion men hamari madad karti hai :
kyiiyki jaisA cliahiye ham nahirj jAnte
ki kyA dua mAngen, par wuh Ruh
aisi Ahen bharke, ki jin kd bayAu na-
hin ho saktA, hamAri silarish karti
liai.
'ItitKin ld duimi bharoaa. BU'Ml
27 Aur wah jn ililoii ka janchno-
wala hai, jelita hai ki Kuh ka kyd
matlab hai, ki wnh Khuda- ki
ke iiji.nri.biij muojMidta l^on ku Bye
shafa'at karti liili.
28 Aur ham jdntc Lain, ki sari chi'
■/.•■n 00 ki bhalai ke Jlyo, jo Kbuda so
Oiuhabbat rakjita bniri, milku l;iida
hakiisliti L;un; y t.' w n Tisiiii jo KIiluU'
ke Irade ko mtiwiliq bulao gaye.
29 Ki jiiibeit m ne [«hio sc pab-
chdna, unhen age «e (liahraya, ki as
ke Bete ko haui-sbakl hon, li ki wuh
babut sc bh:i.um mori jialauthA thahre.
30 Aur jiuhoii 0| M iga «B nui-
qarrar kiya, lis ne un ku bulaya lilii :
aur jinhen bulaya, un ko rdstbaz bhi
tluihntya; aur jin korfotb&Z [halilaya.
mi ko jalai bhi bakkaha.
31 Pas baiu La bdton ki bdbat kya
kaherj'r Agar Khuda hamiiri taraf I mi,
tci kaun hamard uiukbalif hoga ?
32 u ne ;l|'mc Ij-'Ii.' bj ku oWag
kiya, baiki use hati* sab k<- kulit! bawdla
kur diya, to wuh ub ke sath wali chiwn
bhi liamen kyiinkar na bakhs!
33 Khuda kechuaehaoB jiar da'wa
kami karegdV Khudd hi hai, jo ui
ko rastbdz thahrata.
M Kaus saza ki hukni dcgd
Masih jo mar gaya, baiki ji lilii utlia,
aur Khuda ki dahni M taraf bai t ha
hai, wub to havndri sifdrish karta hai.
35 Kaun ham ko Masih ki iniihab-
batse juda kare-ga ? liuieibat.ya tangi,
ya zulni, ya kal, ya nangai, ya khatra,
yi talwar?
36 Chunanchi likbd hai, ki Ham
teri khatir din bbar haldk kiyo jatti
ham: nur zabh ki blierun ke bardbar
giuo jate hain.
37 Baiki ham iu sab ehizoii mm,
us ke waaile, jin as ham se mubabbat
ki, har galib par galib hain.
38 Kyiinki mujb ko y:w|in liai, ki
na maut, na ssindagi, mi firishk1, na
huknmaten, na riydsaten, aur na hal
ki, na istiqldl ki chizen,
204
ON, IX. ia,vdah.
39 Ka bidandi, na pasti, aur na koi
d isra. makhliq, ham ko Khuda" ki o»
muhabtuit se, jo hamare Khuddwand
Ma.-ili Visii* meg hal, judi karsakog4
IX BA'B.
MAIN Masih luen lioko sacn bolti
hiiij, jlnitli uaLin kalita, aur
mera dil Lhi Ri'i'h i Qud« ki Dia'rilat
mord Eawith bai,
2 Ki rutijhu bara gam aur nicrc dil
ka har dam ranj lini,
3 Ki niiiirj yahirj tak cbdhti tha,
ki agar ho sake, to apne bhdion ke
\wi}<:, jo jisni ke ni ao mera qariibati
hain, Masih se mahrdm houij :
i Wo Isnieli hain ; aur farzaudi, aur
jahil, aur 'ahden, aur sliuri'at ki 'iii,i>u,
aur'ibadatuii, aurwa'de, unhi ke hain;
6 Aur bapdddo uu hi men ke hain,
aur jimij ki nisbat Masih bhi unhin
men se hiid, jo ia)b kd Khuda hamebLa
mubarak bai. A'miti.
l'. Lukiu ai>a naliiij ki Kbuda ka
kahhu batil bo gaya. lu liyo ki aab
jo Israel rnen h hain, Israeli nahifl :
7 Aur na is sabab ae ki we Abira-
bam ki nasi hain, sab farzand hain :
kydnki fa r maya hai, ki Iz,hac[ hi ee
lori nasi kahlaegl
8 Ya'ne,Wawo joji.<m ku U-U: ludij,
Kbuda ko farzand ham ; baiki we hi
farzand, jo wa'du ke hain, nasi gine
jate hain.
0 Kyuiiki wa'de ki bat yihi hai, ki
Main isi waqt dungd, aur iriaraii ko ok
beta boga.
10 Aur sirf itna hi nahin, baiki
Kibqab bhi, jab ek se, ya'ne, hamare
bap Izjhdti au, hamila bui ;
11 (Aur jab hanoz larke paidd na
hile, aur ua nek amv bad ke fd'il the,
t;i ki i;hii:iiie mcii Khudii ka irdda, jo
kamon par nahin, baiki buldnewale
par raauti'il' bai, qaim rabe ;)
12 'l'ab hi us as kaha gayii, ki Bara
chhote ki khidmat karegi.
13 Jaisd likhd hai, ki Main ne Ya'-
jitpar rahm kiya cJtdhe UU'Ml'
^nb se muhabbat nikhi, aur Esau se
l! rawhamkydkab.cn? Kyd Kim-
ia ke yahan bc-iusdii hai? Aisd na
10 Kiwuh Musa sckahtd hai, Main
jis por ralim kiyd chahtd hun, «s par
■ Linu karun;;:!., aur jia por tnihr karne
ehahti hiiu, uh pir milir karurjgd,
]■■ Pas yih DI chahuewdle, na
daurnawdlc par, baiki Khuda e rahim
]«ir m»uquf hai.
17 Kyiinki kitab men vnih Fira'iin
k kahta. hal, ki Mam ne isi liye tujhe
harpa kiya hal, ki tujh parapni qudrat
tihir karun, aur ivera ndm tamam '
• tamin pir mnshhur howc.
1-5 Pasvuh jis naf chahtd hai rahm
karri hai; aur jiB6 chahta hai stikht
kiirta hai.
19 Pas tu yih nmjh se kaluti, }ihir
wuh kyun ilzt'uii det& hai? Kis ne
ke irdde kd muqdbala kiya?
20 Ai adili!, tu kaun hai jo Khuda
se takrar kariA hai? Kya kirigari
karigar ko kah sakti hai, ki Ti'i
nuijhe kyiitj aisd baoaya?
•}] Kr:l kmnliAr ka mitti par ikh-
tiydr nahin, ki wuh ek hi ionde
se ek bartan 'iswsat ki, nur diisrd be-
!izzat ka bamlwe?
22 Pas kya ta'ajjub, a«;ar Khuda is
irdde ae, ki apne gusse ko /alur kari',
Lrat ko dikhawe, qa.br ke bar-
tanon ki, jo tabah karno ke ldiq tiie.
nihiyat bardftsnt ki:
K3 Aur apne Wwiihdyat jalai ku
rahm ke bartanojj par, jo ua ne haah-
ruat ko liyo dge taiyar kiye tho, Kabir
'J 4- Ya'ne, hom par, jinhcn na faqat
Yahi'uliim mm se, baiki gair-qauinorj
men se blii, buldya, to kya hnd?
2~5 Chunanohi Hiisi'a ki kitab men
yuij kahta hai, ki Main gair-qaum ko
.; i kalmngd; auruscjo piydrf
u thi, piyari kahiinga.
'J(j Aur aisd boga, ki jis jagah yih
205
UI par rahm kanw.
un se kaha gaya, ki Tam mori naum
nahin ho, usi ja^ah we ziud& Khuda
ke farzaud kahlawpn'je.
27 Aur Taa'aiyah Iardel ki bdbat
pukdrtd hai, ki Agarehi l-ant Isrdvl
shuvnar men daryd ki ret ko hambar
haig, k'kin uu men ae thore bach
jdeoge :
Kyiinki wuh. kalam ko pura
karoga, aur rdsli se uae jald khatm kar
doga: ki Khudawand apuc infisal ke
kalam par sarzamiu meu jald 'amal
karega.
2!) ChunAnchi Yan'aiyah ne age
kaha, Agar Habb-ul-Bfwaj bamare liye
nasi bai]i na chhorta, tu bam findi'im
ki maniiul aur 'Amurah ke baraliar
hote.
30 Pas ab ham kya kahen ? Ki
^:iir-i|a,Liiii.ii_i Mfjorfftbfad ki talash
na karti tliin, lastbazi hdnil ki, ya'nr,
wuh rastbazi jo iman ae hai :
.11 Par Israel, jo rdstbAz! ke shar'a
ki talash kart-a tlul, raetbdzi ke shar'a
tak i nihili piihunclia hai.
32 Ki» liye? Is liye, ki unhon ne
iman se nahin, baiki guys sharl'at ke
karoon hfsBulki talash ki. Kyiinki
udIiuij ui' 0> Iliukar-khilanewAle pat-
thar se thokar kbai ;
33 Cliunanchi likhA hai, ki Ddcrio,
main Saihrin men ek thes-khilanewald
paithar aur thnkar-kbilanewali ehatiin
rakhta hiin: aur jo kni us par iman
lata hai, ho sharminda na boga.
X BA' 1 1.
Al bhaio, inere dil ki khwdMsh, aur
Khuda sc mori d'u'a Israel ki
lidbut yih hai, ki we najdt pdwen.
2 Kyflnki main uu ka gawdh hi'iii,
ki wo Khudii ki babat gairatmand to
hain, par danai ke adth nahin.
3 Is liye ki we us rdstbdzi ko, jo
Khudd ki taraf ae hai, na j.inke, aur
koshish karku ki apni ristbiKi qdim
karen, Khudd kt nlstMzi" ke tdbi' na
hiic.
Jitnc iman hiwtn,
RU'MI'OV, XI. un M&foa *o wtfU *£ ft<wirf.
4- Ki shari'at kl giyat yih hai, ki ' Ai KhudAwaud, kaun hamdre paigam
M sisih har ek imAridAr ki rAstlw.i ho,
5 Ki wuh raetbdzi jo sharPat ki hai,
Miisa u8 kA zikr yon kartA hai, kl Jo
insan yehi kara kiyA kare, wuh un ke
sabab jitA rahega.
6 Par wuh rdstbAzi jo iman so hai,
yiin kaht-i hai, ki Tu npno dil meii
mat kah, ki AsmAn par kaun charhe-
ga ? ya'ne, Masih ko utir lAne ko :
7 YA, GahrAo imii kaun utregi?
va'ne, Masih ko murdon incii sc uthi
lAne ko:
8 Phir wuh kyA kahti hai? Yih.
ki kalam tcre nasnlik, tero munh, auc
tere dil men hai: yih wnhi kalam
ini Ani hai, jis ki ha.ui nianadi kartc
hai n :
9 Ki agar tu apni /.uban so KhudA-
wand Yisii' kA iqrAr kare, aur apno dil
sc iman lAwe, ki KhudA ne uso phirke
JUAyA, to tu najAt pAwegA.
10 Kyuiiki rAatbdzi ke liye insan k->
dil sc iman lAnA hai, aur najat ki k ha-
tir munh ne iqrAr karnA hai.
] 1 OhunAnchi kitAh men yih kabtd
hai, ki Jo koi u* par irtiAn lAtA hai,
sharminda na hogA.
12 Kyiinki Yahiidion aur YiinAnion
men kuchh tafAwut na rahA: ia liye
ki wnhi ju sah ka KhmlawiLiid hai,
sab ke wAste jo us ka nAm lete hain,
datdat-rakhnewdlA hai.
lit Kyrinki har ok jo KhudAwand
ki nAm legA, najAt pAwsgA.
14 Par jie pnr wo SmAn nahin lAe,
ns kA nAm kyi'njkar lewen ? aur jis
kii siikr imhon ne nahin sunA, ua par
kyunkar imAn lAwon? aur manAdi-
karncwAle ke bagnir kyuykar sunon ?
16 Aur agar bheje na jAwen, to ky-
unkar manadi karen V eh un Anehi yih
likhA hai, ki KyA hi khushnumA hain
un ke qadam Jo aalAmati kl baahArat
dete, aur achchhi ohizon ki khush-
kiiabari sunati; hain t
IB Lekin sah ne yih khushkhalwi
niAn na 11. Ki Yas'aiyAh kahtA hai,
206
par iinan lAyA?
17 Pas imAn eun lono so, aur sun
lend KhudA kf bAt kahne se, AtA hai.
18 Par main kahtA lilin, kyA unbog
no nahir, suni? Alhatta, un ki jiwa?.
tamAm rii e suimin par, aur un ki bAt-
en dunyS ki haddon tak, pnluinoMn.
"19 Phir main knhlA hiiij, KyA IsiaH
Aj-Ah na huA? Miisa no to pahle
kahA, ki Main un se, jo qaum nahin
hain, tum ko gairat dilAiin^A, aur
qaum i nAdAn ee tum ko gusus par
IAAngA.
20 Par Yaa'aiyAh l«rA bc-parwA hai,
aur kahti hai, Jiuhoji ne mujhe na-
liin dhundhi, mujb ko pA gaye ; aur
jinhon no mntfafl nahin puchhA, un par
main zAhir hdA.
21 Lckin wuh IsrAel ke har;q meg
ytin kahti hai, ki Main apne hAth dio
bhar ek qaum ko liyp, jo iii-faniian-
liardAr aur hnijali hai, harhaelule lnin.
Xi BATI.'
PAS main kahtA Mo, KyA KlmdA
ne apni qautii ku kliarij kar diyA?
AisA na liowe. Kyrinki main hhi Is-
rAtli, AhirnhAm ki nasi, aur Binyauun
ke finje 96 hi'in.
2 KhudA ne apni us qaum ko, jise
iis no pahle so jAnS, kharij nahfij kiya.
KyA tum nahin jAnte ho ki lliyai l;r
haqq inen kitAb mon wuh kyA Farm AtA
hai ? ki wuh kyiinkar KhudA se IsrAel
par faryAd karke kahtA hai,
3 Ki Ai Klnnlawand,unhon ne tere
nabion koqat,l kiyA,aur liiri qiirnAngi-
hon ko rth A diya; ab main akola baqi
lion, aur we meri jin ki bht fikr inea
hain.
4 Par kalAm IlAhj jawab men u-
ko kyA kahtA hai? yih, ki Main ne
apne liye srit hastir idml bkOni rakhe
hain, jinhon ne Ba'al ke Age ghutni
nahin tokA.
C Pas isi tarah ia waqt bhi kitne
hi fazl se barguzida hoke bAqi nihe
hain.
Agy&r ka fakhr hama.
6 Phir agar fkzl se hai, to a'amdl se
nahin; nahin to fazl ftizl na rahcgd.
Avit &stftr a'amdl se hai, to (a/A phir
kuchh nahin : nahin to 'amal 'amal na
raliega.
7 Pas kyd hdd? YU>,W Israel jis
clifp; ki tnldsh kartd hai, wuh uu ko na
miii; ]wr chuue Mon ko mili, aur
bdqi andhe kive gayc.
8 Chundnchi likhd hai, ki .Khudd
ne aj tak unhen utighnewali nih, aur
«isi anklien ki na dekhoti, aur aiso bin
ki n» aiinen, diyc hain,
9 Aur Daud kahtd hai, ki Un kd
dastarkliwan jal, aur phaitda, aur tho
kar khdne ka bd is, aur un ki jazd ka
sabab howe.
10 Un ki ankhen tdrik ho jdwerj,
ki we na dekhon, aur tii un ki pitli
ku hamosha jliukd rakh.
11 Pas main kahtd luln.ki Kyd un-
hon ne aisi thokar kliai ki gir paren 'i
A isi Tia ho; inagar un ku girne ke
bd'is najdt goir-qauinon ko miii, td ki
unhen un se gairat ftwc.
12 Pw agar nn kd ginid dunyd ke
liys daulat Inid, aur un ki ghitli ^nir-
qaumi>n ke liye daulat, to un ki kamil
r i. t i kilni lii Kiydda daulat na hogi 'i
13 Main gatr-qaaiuon kd rasul lio-
kar tuni eair-qaumwa1<>ij «o boltd hdn,
■UT apni khidmat ki larai kartd hun ;
14 Td ki main kisi tarah m apni
«jaumwdton k" gairat dilauti, aur un
I Mg m b&'zon ko b&chinn :
15 Ki agar un kd k h Ari j ho jina
^han ku maqbtil honc kd bd'is hai, to
n kdamilnakaisAkuchhhogd? hdn,
,»isa roimion ee ji uthna?
IH K y liuk i agar pahld phal pdk,
to taindm pbal wnisd hi hogi : aur
I agar jar pak ho, to dalian bhi \\:\\>\ hl
■'j-i-
17 So agar diliati mon se ka! ek tol
tiyiii, aur tu" jo jangli zaitun thd, un
ia paiwand hui, aur zaitun ki jar aur
MfflD uien sharik hfid.
18 To tti un ddlion par fakhr niat
207
RU'MI'OV, XI. gair mumitih thahatna.
kar. Aur agarchi fakhr karc, tau bhi
td jar ko Bambhaltd' nahin, baiki jar
tujh ko.
1!> Phir tu kahegd, ki Ddlido. ia
waste toritj gayijj, td ki main paiwanu
hoiin.
20 Achchhd; we be-fmani ke sabit b
ton gayin, aur tii iman ke sabab qiim
hai. Pas garur mat kar, baiki dar:
21 Kyiinki jis hal ki Khudd ho asli
shakhon ko na chhord, to ahdyad tujli
ko bhi na chliorc.
22 Pas Khudd ki narmi aur sakhti
ko dekh: sakhti un par, jo gir gayo
hain, aur narmi tujh par, agar tii
narmi par qahn raho ; nahin to ttl bhi
katd jdegd.
23 Aur we bhi, agar be-imdn na
rahen, to paiwand kiyc jdenge: ki
Khudd qddir hai, ki unhen dobdra
paiwand kare.
24 Is Hya ki td jab us zaitiin ke
darakht se, jia ki asi jangli hai, kini
gavd., aur hiirkhildf asi ke aehchhe
iMiti'ui k;i paiwand hud, to wo jo iisli
rjdlidn hain, kia qadr ziydda apne hi
zaitun men paiwand na ki jdongi ?
2.ri Ai bhdio, td na howe ki tum
apne ta,in 'aiilmand sanijho, main
chdhtd lilin ki tum is bhed so ni-
w;ii|if na raho, ki lerdel ko ok hisae
par andhlipan d pard hai, aur jab tak
ki gair-qaumon kikullKhumdr shdmil
na howe, yibi rahcgd.
2U Aur is tarah tamam Isriel bach
jiegd ; clitindnchi liklid hai, ki Chhu-
riucwdld Saihiin so uiklegd, aur bediui
ko Ya'qub bc dafa karegi :
27 Aur ruerd yih 'ahd un ke sitli
hogd, jab main un ke gunahuii ko
rnitd diingd.
■i$ We to Injil ki babat tumimro
sabab se dushman hain ; lekin bar-
guzidngi ki bdbat bdpdidon ke aabab
piydre hain.
29 la wdste ki Khudd ki ni'aimiren
aur buldbat badalnc ki nahin.
30 Kyiinki jis tarah tuuiage Khudd
Siri ntH karne
ke na-fariuan thfl, par nb un ki na-
farmini ke «abah (mu par rahm huAj
UI Waisa hi we bhi nit-farinin hiie,
ia ki U8 rahm k» sabab se jo tum par
bui, un par bhi lahra tonra,
32 Th lij-e ki FCIiikla ne sah feo nit-
farmani ki qaid men ohhofa, ta ki Bab
par rahm farmawc.
33 Wah! Khuda k: daulat o hik-
mat aur «Mnisli k i kaisi ^ulinii hai! us
ki 'adaJateii daryaft «'.' kya bi paro,
aur ui ki riheg p&tf mUne u kya hi
dur hairi !
34 Ki kis ne Khudawimd kl 'aql ko
jatii hal? ya, kami ua ka aalahkar
rabi?
3o Td kia ne pahlo use kucbh diya
hai, ki use pbir diya jaega. '{
3G Kyrmki ub( se, aur usi ke sabab,
aur naf ke tive, siri cliizen bui hnirj :
abad tak u*! ki huzurgi ho, A'niiii.
XII BA'B.
PAR, ai bhain, main Khuda" ki rak
matou ka wasta dcke tum w;
iltimae karta min, ki timi apne badan-
nrj ko guzri.no, ta ki ek ziuda qur-
bdnf, muqadrlas, aur Khuda ke liye
Masami id a hon, ki yiii tum liari V|Ii
'ibAdat hai.
2 Aur is jahin ko ham-sbak! mat
bo: baiki apne dil ke uayc bone bc
.ijuii ihaki '.»; « kil drilo, ta ki tum
Khuda- ke us iradc ko, jo klmb, aur
pasandida, aur kamii hai,' bakluibi
jano.
3 Main us faal se, jo mujhe 'irjayat
adi hai, tum men se liar ek ko kahta
lilin, ki apni unidr us se ziyAda jis ka
jauna munAsib hai na jjnej baiki
'iatidiil ko sSth apna martaba aiwt
«uujlie, jaisa Klmda ne bar ek shakks
ko and&z ae iman diya.
4 Kyuijki jaiaa hama-rc ek badan
mcn bahu t M 'aan bain, aur har ek
'aao ka ek bi k4m iiahiij ;
5 Aise hi bani, jo babat ne bain,
Masih men hoke ek badan huo haiti,
aur Apas nierj ek ddsrc ke 'azu.
BU'Ml'OS, XII. Mmi{ltatq
6 PaB hani ne us faal ke rnuwAfiq.
jo bamerj 'inayat hua, alag aiag ni'a-
maten pilin; so agar wuh oubtiwaj
hai, to huni iman keandas ko nimvAnVj
nobdwat karen ;
7 Aur agar khidmat hai, to khid-
mat men rahi'n ; ajjar kol ustAd howe,
to ta'lim par ;
8 Aur nasiliat-kariiPWiila, naiiiliat
mi'ii tiiuwligiil rahf : wuli ji> khaMl
l'aiitt/i. hai. baf-dili sc bante ; aur sar-
dar koabiah se sardiiri kiire; wuh jo
rahm kartii hai kbushi ee rahm kare.
i> Muhabbat i'«>-riyi howo. Badi- »e
nafrat karo : nek i «e mile raho.
10 BirAdanina muhabbat bc ek dusre
ko piyir karo; 'izzat ki rah se ek
ddare ko bihtar sainjKo,
11 Koshish m«Q susti na karo; nih
se sargarm ho: JKlmdiwaud ki ban-
dajti mcn rabo;
12 Ummed mcn kbuKb, taklif men
bardiisht-kariiBwale, du'a mingne par
miista'idd raho;
13 Muqaddason ki ilitiyaj nu|
Hharik ho ; musafir-parwari men mash-
giil raho.
14 Un ke Jiye jo tumben Bata"!*
hairj, harakat chaho; khair tuiLiian,
aur la'nat na karo.
lfj KhiiBhwaqton ke satli khuah-
waqtraho; aiu: ronewalori kesa'tb roo.
Iti A'jias men ek ea mizaj rakho.
Bare baro khiyiil niat, haadiio, baiki
gariboa ke satb garibf karo. ApM
ta,in 'aqlmand na samjho.
17 Badi ke 'iwaz men kisi sc badi
na kiivo. Jc batfl| Bab logOQ ke riaz-
dik bhall bain, un par diir-andesh
raho.
IH Agar ho Bake, to maqdur bliar
bar iuwtn ke satii mile raho.
10 Ai 'azizo, apini intiqam mat lo,
baiki gusse ki rAh cbhor do; kyiinei
yih likhA hai, ki Khud'awand knhti
hal, [i:ii.|iiiii lemi mera kam hal
ain lii badla liinga.
20 Pas agar tora dusbman blnikhi
Sabkahaq<i RTJ'MI'ON, XII/, XIV. ada karmi chaniye.
ho, ua ko khitd; agar piy.iaa ho, usol 10 Ki inuhabbat wuh hai, Jo. ipne
pdnide: kyuuki yih karkc u» ku gir jnirtJ.si se bodi nahin karti : h wame
par Ag k« angniW Vi dlirr lagawt^i. iniiliabbat rakhna ahari'at kd pura
21 Badi 1U miwlub na ho, baiki kami hai.
badi par nuki se galib ho.
XTlT BA'R
H Alt ek tihakhs hakimon ke tabi'
rahe. Kyi'mki aisi koi hukumat
nahin, jo Khuda ki taraf ae na ho :
aur jitni hukuumten bara, so Khuda
ki taraf ho nmqarrar hai n.
2 Pas jo koi hukumat ki samhna
karta hai, so Khuda ki mutpirrari bar
ka mukhalif hai ; aur wu jo mukhdlif
li.uri, so ap hi saza piiwenge.
'l Ki hakim iwkokavon. ko nahin,
baiki bsdkaron kn khauf kd bd'is hai.
Pan agar t u chdho ki hukfimat ac ni-
dav vahe, to ueki kar, ki -wuh teri
ta'rif karagd.
4 Kyiinki wuh Khuda ki khddim
teri bthtari ke liyo hai. Par agar tu
burd kare, to dar ; ki wuh talwar 'aba»
nahin liyephirtd: ki wuh Khuda ki
khadiia hai, ki 'adalat karke badkar
ko saza de.
5 Pas tibP rahni na sirf gazali ke
ssibab, baiki ramin ko bd'is bhi.zarur
hai.
6 Kynnki ih liya tum kliiraj hhi
dete ho,kIweK.huddke khddim haiij,
jo ua kim nicri mashgul rahtd.
7 Paa sah ka haqq ada karo ; jis ke
khirdj ehdhiye, kiiirdj ; aur jis ko
mahsiil cbahiye, tnahsul do; aur jis so
dara ehdhiye, daro ; aur jis ki 'izzat
kiya chahiye, 'izzat karo.
8 Sivaapns ki niuhabhat ko kisi ke
oar/.ddr na rabo; kyi'mki jo auron se
muhabbat rakhtd hai, ua ne abari'at
ko pfird kiya hai.
9 Is waste ki ve hukm jo hain, ki
Tu zina na kar, $atl na kar, Obati
kar, Jhiithi gawahi na de, Lalach na
kar, aur jo hnkm im kfl mw;i hog, KU
k(t khulasa im «k bal men hai, ki Tu
apne partisi ko uisa piyar kar, jajsd dp
ko kar la hai.
11 Aur wa<jt kojAnke yi'm hi karo,
ia liye ki ghari ab d pahuuchi, ki huni
nind ao jagon.: kyiinki jis waqt hara
i m flu Ia>, ua waqt ki nisbat se ab
haruan riajdt ziyada nazdik hai.
12 tidt bahut gu/ar gayi, aur subh.
nazdik hdi : paa ham andhere ke
kdmon ko tark karun, aur roshni ku
hathydr bandhi;n.
13 Aur jaisd dia ko ilastiir hai,
durust chalan ao chaleij ; na ki aubdshi
aur inasti sc, na ki haraiakation aur
bad-parhozion ae, na ki jluigro aurdah
14 Baiki Khudiwand Yisu' Masih
mulabbaa ho, aur jiam ki khwa-
hiahoti ku liyo tjuibir na karo.
XIV BA' H.
UST-i'atiqad ko dp mon shdmil
k»r lo, par shubhoa ki takrir ko
raf'a karun ku liye ualiiti.
2 Kk ko i'ati(]ii.i hai, ki har ok chiz
kd khand rawti liai ; par jo suNt-i'ali-
4dd hai, bo airf aag-pil klidta hai.
3 Paa wuh jo khdta hai, use jo
nahin khdtd, haqir na jdno ; ai-r wuh
io natin khata, ua par to khdta hai
'aib na lagdwo; kyiinki Khudd uo us
ko qabdl k iya hai.
4 Paa tu kaun hai, jndiisre ke nau-
kar par hukm kartd hai ? wuh to
apne khudawand ko dgo kharf y;i
para hai. Baiki wuh khafd i:
is waKt.o ki Khudi ua ke khara kune
S'
par i|adir hai.
5 Koi ek dm ko dusre din so bihtar
Jintihai; aur kui sab dinon ko btird-
bar jdtitd hai. Har ok apno apno di!
nifii piini i'atiqdd rukhe.
6 Aur wuh jo din ko mnitta hai, eo
KlindiiwantS ko liyu minta hal; aur
jo diti ko nahiu iuaru,a,so Khuddwand
keliyenahitiindiita hai. .lo khdtihaJ,
so Khudawand ke wiste khatA hai,
0
f<tut-i'atiijad m
lUJMI'ON, XV. nek-ntMi h»
-. hifon
kyfmki wuh Khuda kii shukr kartd
hai: aur jo nabin khatd, so Khudd-
wand ke wdste naliltj khala, aur
Khudi ki ahukr kartd hai.
7 Ki kof ham men se apne waste
iviiiiij jitft, aur kol apne waato nahin
martd.
8 Ki agar bani jito ham, to Khudd-
waild ko wisu .iiu- haifl; aur agar ' liain ; par wuh chiz us insan ke Hy
hain, to Khudawartd ke wiate kh&se thokftl khitA faal buri bal
IH Pasjokoiin hi bdtoij taet Ma-
sih ki baudagi karld dai, Khuda ki
nniqbul, aur jiilmion ki pai-andida hai.
l'.I Psw aisi bdton ki, ki jin si: sulh
ho, aur ck diWe ki taratpp ho jai*,
rjaini ii k aren.
20 Khane ke liye Khuda ke kain
ko mat bigAro. Sari chizen to pik
marte kaiti; ia ttye ham, jite marte
Klmdawand hi ke hnirj.
9 Ki Masih isi liye uitia, aur uthd,
aur jiyd, ki murdorj aur Etndojj ka bhi
Khud'ftwand ho.
10 Par tii kis liye apne bhdi par
'aib lagald hai? aur tf kis tiyu apnc
bhai ko haair jArita hai V kyunki baui
sab Masih ke iakht i 'addlai ke tige
kharo hoijgi'.
li Chunancbi yih Hkkd hai, ki
Kbuddwaiul kahni hal, kiapnj hayat
ki qasam, har ek gbutnd tnerc dge
jbttJwgA, aur liar ek zubau Khuda ke
samline iqrar kari'gi.
12 Pas» liar ek ham men se Khuda
ko apnA apria hisab degA.
13 Pas chdhiye ki ham dge ko ck
dfiwro pir 'aib na lagdwen ! baiki yih
tajwiz k aren, ki wuh ebi/, jo tliokar
yi rima ka bA*)i hawa, apne bhui ko
wunliii'' na rakben.
14 Mujhe Khudliwand Ylsfi'M rruT-
bim hiia, aur main D« Tacdn karke
jana, ki koi chia ap BMu nahin :
lekin jo us ko iidpAk jantsi, tu k>: liye
tiapak hai.
1» Par agar tera bhai tore khane
se di<jq hotA hai, to tii muhabbat ke
taur par nnliin ciialti. Tu apne kkdue
se us ko, jis ke wAstc Masih m mi,
haJiik unit kur.
16 l'aa tumhari neki ki badnauii na
howe:
17 Kyunki Khuda ki Mdshdhat
khdiiA pin A nahir, bulai risti aur
mati, aur Riih i Qnds ae khUskwaqti
hai.
210
UI lihalii yih hai, ki tu guaht U4
■ .!-,-.,■. n .ii n. i plwe, iiru- tiai kam oa
kare, jia se tera bhai diiukkd y& tho-
kar khlc, ya BUKt ho jae.
'S2 'lui'atii]ad rakhia hai? W ajun:
liye aie Khuda ke huziir tua/bu t rak b.
Mubarak wuh jo apne ta,in us kara
ko sabab, jise wuh nmuaZib jauke
kartd hai, malduiat na kare.
_;> Par ju ki>i chi/. un'ti shubha
rakhti hai, agar khawe, to gUHahgil
t'aaiir.'L, is wiate ki wuh l'atiqid u
nahin khdtd ; aur jo kuohh i'atiqad ee
niiliin, bo L-unah hai.
XV BA'B.
PAS ham ko jo zordwar haiij,
chdhiye ki kamzorop ki suBtion
ki barddRht karen, aur knud-paaanul
kaieg.
I Har koi ham men so apne partisi
ko ua kl bhaldi ke wastu khusli kare,
td ki us ki taraqqi h".
S Kyunki Masih bhi apni khuahi
tu obaiU ilid, baiki jaisd likbd hai,
ki Tere maldmat-kaniewilloB ki mald-
maten mujh par d ]irinrj.
4 Ki jo kuchh &ge Jikhd gayd. so
hamdri ta'h'in ke liye likha gayd, ii
ki ham ftabr se, aur kitdbon ki tasalli
se, ummed rakhen.
5 Aur Khuda, jo sabr aur tasalli ki
bani hai, tum ku yih bakhshe, ki tua
Itaalh Visi':' ki tuah ipaa mt:n ek^.il
raho;
(i Td ki tum ek <1U aur ek kuMr
hoke KhuiU ki, ]<• hamaru Khudawand
yiafi" 'Masih kd Udp hai, barai karo,
7 ls wiete tam men se liarek diisre
i'iiffis ki tdMd,
ko qabi.il kare, jaigA ki Masih ne bhi
ham ko qabiil kiyA, tA ki KkudA kA
8 Main kanta huii, ki Yisu' Masih
Khuda ki saeliAi ke liye iimkhtiinoii
k'd khiiilim bibi, U ki mi wa'don ko,
jo bapdidon se kiye gaye, |iurA karu
0 Aur ki £air-qaumen bhi rahui ke
Babah Khuda ki bitAish karen ; chn-
nAncbi likhA hai, ki Ia waatB main
g&lUnorj ko bieh tera iqrAr karung»,
aur tera naui gAiingi.
10 Aur wuh phir kahta hai, ki Ai
),r:ur-i|aiimo, Mi ki qautn ke sAth
Khusbi karo.
11 Aur phir yili, ki Ai uari qauuio,
KhudAwaud ki hamd karo ; aur ai
toao, tum Bab us ki sitalah karo.
12 Aur jiliir Yas'aiyAh yih kahtd
hai, ki lasa! ki jar maujud rahcgi,
aur ek ihakht gair-uaumon par hukri-
Uiat karne ko utliegA ; iuri par gair-
caumeri bliaiosA rakhengi.
13 Ab KhudA, jo uiumcd kA hAni
hai, tumben u min laue ke bd'is sari
khushi aur salaruati su bhar de, tAki
liiiii i Q'nls ki qudrat se tumhAri uiti-
lutd KiyAdatar boti jAwe.
1+ Aur, ai mere bhAio, main bhi tu
khud tumhArc haqq men yih yaqin
rakhtA lilin, ki tum nuki ae mamur,
aur tamani danai se bhare ho, aur
ajjaa buq nasihat bhi kar aakte ho.
15 Par, ai bhAio, main ne jo yad-di-
lii ke taur par thorA sA tumben likh
blu'jii, BO U* inen ziyada jur.at ki,
kviinki KhudA ne mujh ko is liye fazl
bakhshahai,
18 Ki main gair-qaumon ke wtfate
Yisu' Masih "ka kbadiin hoke kahiu
ki tarah Khuda ki Injil ki khidinat-
pu/.ari karun, laki gair-qaumoii kA
hadya ke liyo gnr.rafi nt inaqbiil howe,
ki Kuli i Qudti w pak kiyA gaya" hai.
17 Pai main lid baton mtn jo Kliu-
dA 30 'ilA(ja rakliti hain, Yisu' Masih
ki l>Abal lak lir kar Kakui lniii.
16 Ki mairj yih jur,atuahiii rakhta,
211
IU"M1'0\, iV, ki sal ek-dil howm.
ki un kAmon men se kisi ko, jo Masih
ne mere wasile, khwAh qaul, khwAh
fl'al se,
ly KhwAh karAmatnn aur mu'ajizo-n
ki quwat 60, khwah Khuda ki Kiih ki
3uiinii W, ;;air-qaimion k.- larmAubar-
Ar hone ko na kiyA ho, bayAn karun :
yahAn tak ki main ne Yarimlam se le
ehaugird llhiriqum tak Masih ki Injil
ki puri manAdi ki.
20 Baiki main us hurmat ka inusli-
tiq tlia, ki JhIiAij jahan Masih kA dAih
nahin liyA gayA, wahAn Injil suiiAun,
tA na howe ki inairi du&re ki neo par
radda rakhurj :
21 TA ki jaisA likhi hai, ki Wa jin
ko us ki khabar nahin pahunehi, dc-
khenge; aur jinhon ne nahig eunA
samjhengo, waisA hi howe.
22 Isi sabsb main hArliA tumhAre
pai ane M ruka raliA hdn.
23 Par ab w liye ki in mulkon meri
ja-yili bAqi na rahi, aur tmuhari inula-
qat kA bhi bahut baraon se mushtaq
huii i
24 SojablsfatiiyakorawAnahtirigA,
tum pAs A jAiingA; kyurjlsi umined
rakhtA hiirj ki main udliar jdte hue
tnmhen dekh liinga, aur inmliAri mu-
iaqac «; kuchh kaAtir-jam'a hoke tum
se udhar ki turai' riiwana kiyA jAdngA.
25 Par bilfi'al main Yartisulam ku
tnuqaddasori ki khidmat karne ke liye
jAta h u n.
26 Kyunki MaqadAniya aur Akhaia
ke logori ki mar/.i yiin hai, ki Vaniwi-
iam ku muflis motjaddaaon ke liye ek
khass ehandA kan-n.
27 Yih to in ki marzi lidi ; aur ye
un ke qaradar bhi hain. Kydnki jab
gair-oautneg ruiiAni baton men nn ke
shavik hiii ~hain, to liizim hai ki ye
jisiiiini bdU'fi men un ki khidmat
karen.
2H Pas ma'm ub kdm ko tamAm
kark.\ aur ye mewa un ke hAth
sompke, tum pAs «e hokar I^faniya ko
jAungA.
Ounah ke us shar'a hi babat, nU'Ml'ON, VI7T, jo hamare 'aziim »
niare, to wuh npne khasam ki band bc
chhuj jAti hai.
3 1'ftM kkifliwi ke jitf? ji agar wuh
dtisre ki ho jiwe, to zdniya thahrcgi;
par agar khasam mar gaya, to wuh
us band bd cbhfit gayi, ki agar uiisre
inard ki lio jiwe, to zaniya na hogi.
■i So, ai men bbtto» tum bhi Ma-
sih ke badau ku subab shari'at k! nis-
kit tnai gftffl ho, ki tura duare ke ho
jio jo murdorj men so uthiyi gaya,
la ki ham Khudi ke liye phal liwen.
5 Kyink'i jab ham jismint the,
giraih ki khwahishen, jo ehari'at ke
sabab thin, hamire band band men
maut Iv plml liioe ko asar karti tbin,.
C Par ab Jo ham mar gaye, to
fdiari'&t se, jik ki qaid men lho, crihut
trayc, «isi ki nih ke nayo taurse, na ki
naif ke purA.no taur w>, bandagi katen.
7 Phir ham kya kahun V Kya"
shari'at giniih. hai? Aisa na feowo
Baiki bagair shari'at ke mnin gunih
ko nabin pahchinti ; kyiinki main
lilach ko na, janta, agar shari'at na
kahti, ki Tulalach U kii r,
8 Par gunab ne shari'at ko sabab
qdbd pikar mujh meg har tarah ki
Ubah paidi kiyi. Kyurjsi Bhuri'at
ke bagair punah murda lini.
9 Ki matu ago bo-sliar'a hoke jiti
tbi: par jab bukni aya, guiiah ji
utba, aur rnairj mar gayi.
10 Yiin inujho maliitu ho gayi, ki
wuh hnkm, jo zmdagi ke hyu tbi,
maut ka gabah hal
11 Kyiinki gurah ne hnkm ke wa-
sile qabu pikar mujhe bahkayi, aur
usi ko waafte mar dala.
12 Pas shari'at to pak hai, b
hnkm pak, aur liaqq, aur kliiib hai.
13 Paajochli kln'L ku, kya wuhi
mere liye maut thahri? Aisi na
howe. Baiki guuih. uc, ti ki ua ki
gunih bumi ziihir ho, udichhi cliiz ke
wasile maut komujh men pnidi kiyi,
14 Kyiinki ham jinte ham ki sh*-
at ruhini hai: par main jlsrnani,
aur guiiah ke hith biJt gayi hun.
15 Ki jo kartd hun, so main jinti
nniiin : kyiinki jo main chahta, so
nahin karti ; baiki jis se mujhe rtofrat
hai, wuhi karti hi'm.
Ki Pas jab main wuhi karti hflrj,
[ o nahin chahta, to main qabul karta
ii'm ki shari'at khdb hai.
17 So ab main uh ka kamcwali
nahin, baiki gunah jo niujh men basti
hai.
IH Kyiirjki miurj janta hfin ki
inujri incn, (yu'nc mere ji*m men,)
koi achchhf chiz nahig basti : ki
khwahish W mujh men rnaujiid hai ; par
jokuchh achehiia hai karne nnliiii pati.
11) Ki jo nvki main chihti hdn,
naiiin karti; baiki wuh badi, jiscmain
nahin chiibti, so hi karta hrin.
20 Pas jab ki mam jisc nahin chih-
ta, wuhi karti hnn, to phir main us
ki kfirnewilA nahin, baiki gunih jo
uujh men basti hai.
21 Garaz, main yih shar'a piti
hiin, ki jab main niki kiy;i chahta
huij, to badi mujh pas maujiid hai.
Kyurjki main batini insiniyat
ne Khudi ki shari'at mu n magan hiin;
23 Ma^ar dusri shar'a apoa 'aziion
dMO di kbti hiin, jo mari 'aql ke ehar'a
m larti, aur niiijhe ua gunih ko shar'a
ki, jo mere 'azuon men hai, giriftar
karti.
24 A'h 1 main to kharib-khaata ad-
1111 hi'm ! is maut ke badan se uiujhe
kaun ohhariveei!
'J.j Kiimiii ka sbukr karti hiin, ha-
mirc itliudiwand Yisd' Masih ke wa-
sile se, Garaz, miiin to apni 'aql se
Khudi ke shar'a ki benda hiin ; par
jism N gunih ke.shar'a ka.
VlU BA'l'..
)AS ah un par jo Masili Yisii' men
hain, t
r jism ke taur par nahin,
ki gunih hukni ku wusilu uihayat hi | baiki Ruh ke taur par chalto, sazi ki
bura mn'liim ho.
20^
hnkm 1 irili itj.
'i ki ummed
2 Kjunki us Ruh i
■har'a ne, jo Masih Rsff men hai,
mujhe gunih aur maut ke shar'a se
chhuri di y a,
3 ts liye ki jo shari'at m jism ki
kamzori ke sabab na. lio saki,so Kbu-
da se hna, ki ua ne apne Beta ko
■ timi ki surat men gnnah
ke sabab bhejkar gunah pai- jl«D men
sazi ki hukm kiya:
4 Ta ki shari'at kl riati ham men
jo jism ke. taur par nahin, baiki ruh
ke taur pai clialte hain, puri ho.
5 Kyilnki we jo jism ke taur par
hain.un ka mizaj jisroiiii hai; par we
jo Ruh ke taur par hain, un ka niiy-aj
nihini hai.
6 Ki jismini inizaj maut hai ; par
nihani mizaj zindaganf aur salimati.
7 Te liye ki jismini mizij Khuda
ki dushman hal ; kyunki Khudi ki
BBsri'at ke tabi' uahin, aur na ho
sakti.
8 Aur jo jismini hain, Khuda ko
pasand nahin a sakte.
i) Par tum jismini nahin, baiki ni-
hini ho, ba-sharte ki Khudi ki H u h
tuin men basti hii. Par jis men Ma-
glb ki luih nahin, wnh u.s ka nahin.
10 Aur agar Masih tuui men hai,
to hadis gimah ke ttbftb mnrda hai,
par Kuli ristbazi ke sabab Kinda.
11 Phir agar us kl Roh, jis ne Yisu'
ko imirdog mes s* j'^iya, tum men
base, to Masih ka jilanewili tunihare
inurde badan ko bhi apni ua Ruh ke
wasile, jo tum men basti hai, iiliwegi.
12 Pas,aibh£io, hanikuchli ji-sm k k:
qarzdar nahin, ki jism ke taur par zin-
dagi kate n.
13 Kydnki agar tum jism ko tam-
pn ziiuhcii kain, t*> maroge: par agar
tum Ruh so badan ki buri 'idaton ko
maro, to jioge.
14 Is liye ki jitne Khudi ki Ruh
ki hidayat «e chalte, we hi Khudi ke
fiuv.aiid kain.
15 Ki tum ne gulimt kf nih nah;
203
RU'MI'ON, VIII. M hmydd,
ndagf ko pai, ki phir daru ; baiki lepUak hone
i Ruh pii, jis se ham Abba, ya'ne,
Al Uap. pukir pakir kahte hain.
16 Wuhi Ruh bamiri roh ke sath
wahi dcti, ki ham Khuda ke far/.and
hain:
17 Aur jab far/and hiie, to waris
bhi, ya'no, Khudi ke waris, aur miris
men Masih ko sharik ; basharte kl
ham us ke silih dukb uthiweji, ta ki
us ke sith jalai bhi piwen.
18 Kydnki nieri samajh men za-
mine i hal ke dukh dard is laiq nahin,,
ki us jalai ke, jo ham par Kabir hone-
wala hai, niuqibil hon.
19 Ki klulipit kamil fesd se Khu-
di ke farzandon ke zihir hone ki rih.
takti hal
20 Is liye ki khilqat batilat ko
taht men ai, apni khushi se nahin,
baiki us ke sabab jo uae taht men Uyii
hai, is iinii'i icd par,
21 Ki khilqat bhi kharibi ki gula-
mi so chhutke Khuda ku tar/andon ke
jalil ki ClMMf men dakhil howe.
'l'l Kyrinki ham'jant.e hain k i siri
khikjat miike ah tak chikheri niirti,
aur use plrcn lagi hain.
23 Aur fiiqat wuii nahin, baiki ham
bhi, jinhen Rih ke pahle phal mile,
apne men karihto hain, aur lepalak
hone ki, ya'ue, apne jiwnon ki rihai
rah takte hain.
24 Ki ham ummed se bacli gaye
hain; parunimwi kiluiichizjab de-
khi jiwe, to ummed na ralii : kydnki
jo obiz koi deklita hai, us ka ummed-
wir kis tarah ho raba hai?
25 Par jisc ham nahin dekhto, agar
ham us ke ummedwAr hain, to sabr se
as ki rah takte hain.
26 Isi tarah Ruh bhi hamari kam-
zorion men hamiri nuulad karti hai :
kydnki jaisi chihiye ham nahin jinte
ki kyi du'i mingen, par wuh Ruh
aisi ihen bharke, ki jin ka bayin na-
hin ho sakti, hamari sifirisk kaiti
hai.
Pulus apiie irade RUIII'ON, XVI. bayan kartd.
8 Aur Ampliaa ko, jo KhudAwand
men hoke mcrd piydrd hai, sulam kaho.
D Aur TJ'rbdnus ko, jo Masih ko
kAmon men merA h am -khidmat hai,
jiur mere 'aziz Stakhtis ko, salam
kaho.
10 Aur Apalles ko, jo Masih mpn
maqbul hai, sulam kaho. Aur Arisfcd-
bulus ko logOj) ko salam kaho.
11 Aur mere rightsdir Horodion ko
salAm kaho. Aur Narkissus ke logon
ko, jo KhudAwand meti Lain, sabiin
kaho.
12 Trufina aur TrufosA ko, jo Khu-
dawdnd ke wAsto mihuali hain, salAm
kaho. Aur 'aziza I'aisis ko, jis uu
Khuddwand ke liye bubut mihnat ki
hai, salam kaho.
13 Aur RnfiiB ko,jo KhudAwand ka
barguzida hai, aur ns ki uiA ko, jo
meri bbi mA hai, salAm kubu,
14 Aur Asunkritus, aur Flagun,
aur Harmas, aur PatrubAs, aur Harmes,
aur un bhAion ko jo un ke sAth hain,
salam kaho.
15 Aur Filulufrus, aur Yulid, aur
Nerius, aur us ki bahin ko, aur
Ulumpds, aur sdre mucjaddasori ko, jo
un ke sath hain, salam kaho.
lli Aur tum Apaa men pdk bosa
lcke ek diisrc ko salam karo. Masih
ki kalisiyden iuiiihcn salam kahti
hain.
17 Ab, ai bhAio, main tum ee yih
iltimis knrla hi'nj, ki lum un logog
par, jo uh ta'lim ke barkhilAf, jo tum
ne pii, phdt parno aur thokar khdue
ke ba'is hain, Jilid» rakho, aur un se
kiuare rahn.
18 Kyiinki jo aise hain, so hamrire
Khudawaud liati' Masih ki ■ nahin,
baiki npue pet ki baiidagi karto hain ;
aur chikui bdton aur du'A e khairon se
Siiila-iiili.ii ko fareb dctc hain.
19 Kyiinki tumbdri iarmanbarddri
sab nun niashhiir hiii hai, Is waste
main tum se khushhun; lekin-maiij
yih cbahtA hun ki tum nuki aum
29 Aur main jAritA hiin ki jah main
tumhdre pas ai'm, to merA An:i Masih
fei Injil ki kamAi barakat se hogd.
30 Aur, ai bhAio, main apno Kbu-
jJdirand Yisd' Masih ki, aur Riih ki
muhabbat kd wdstd deke, tum se ilii-
maa kartd hiin ki tum mere liye
KhudA se du'aen mdngne men dil se
mere sath koshish karo;
31 TA ki main Yahiidiya ke be-
iminon kg badiA rahiin ; aur nteri wuh
khidmat jo Yarusalaiu ke liye hai, so
iiiiiiiadujL.. logon ko panand jare.
32 To Khudd chdhe, main tumhdre
pas kh.ut.hi se Afm, aur tumhAre sAth
taza-dam ho jddn.
33 Ab aaJaiuati ka Khudd tum sab
ke Bath ho. A'min.
XVI BA'B.
MAIN tum so Ftbe ki ilfirltb
kartd hiin ; wuh hamari babin
hai, aur sha.hr i QaukhriA men kalisiye
ki khadima hai ;
2 Tum ub ko KhudAwand ke wdste
y uii qabdl karo, jaisa muqaddason ke
lain hai ; aur jis jis kain men wuh
tumhari muhtij ho, tum us ki madad
karo; kyiinki wuh bahdton ki, baiki
ineri bhi madadgdr thl.
3 PrhKpllA aur Annhlko mcrd salAm
kaho, ki we Yisu' Masih ki khidmat
men mere sAthl hain :
4 Aur unhon ne meri jdn ke Ttadle
apnd sir dhar diya: aur na sirf main,
baiki gair-uaumon ki edri kalisiyaen
un k! ihsAumand hain,
5 Aur ua kalisiye ko, jo un ke ghar
men hai, saldm kaho. Mere pljAn
Apainatusko.jo Masih ke liye Akiiuia
kd pahld j>hal hai, saldm kaho.
6 Aur Mariyam ko, jis no liamAre
wdste bahut mihnat ki, salam kaho.
7 Aur Andrunikus aur YiiuiA ko
salam kaho; we mere rislitadar hain,
aur qaid-khaue men mere aharik the,
aur rasiilog men nAmdAr hain, aur
mujh se pahle Masih men Boimil hue.
212
1 QURINTI'ON, L mlAm kahtd.
jid-warpf sih kd faal Lum Bab ko edth howo
Pulut ba'z logon ko
wdqifkdr ho jdo, aur badi
raho;
20 Aur Kalimat! U Khudd Sbaitdnj 2fl Ab uni ko, Ih ki otidrat hai ki
ko tumhdre pdnwn tale Jald koohla- , tumben mori Injil, (iur Yisu' Masih ki
wegd. Hama™ Khuddwand YM' manadi ke muwafirj gdim rakbe,
Masih ki fazl tumhare «ith liowe. I ya'oe, us bhed ko izhdr ke mutdbiq(
A'min. \ jo qadim zarofinon se poahida rahd ;
21 Mcrd ham-khidmat Timttus, 2ti Miirat nabion ki kitabon ke
aur mere rfehtadat Luqms, aur Ydsnn, waaile K duda e abadi ke liukm ke
aur Sosipatrus, tumben salam kahte | inutdbiq ab zabir bui, aur Bab gair-
ha.r' u - m k*W0M*B men imdn ki farmaiibanlan
22 Main Tartms, $0 k klinU ka ke live mashhfjr kiyd gayd;
likhneivdld hun, tum ko Khuddwand. 27 D(rt wdhidddnd Khuda ko Yisu'
men hoko ealdm kalitd hfin. ; Masih ke wasile «e, fiamesha 'hamd
2;) Aur Gaius, jo mera aur sdri pahunehd kare. A'min,
kalisiye kd mihmanddr hai, tumbeni T Yih khatt Tliimion ke ndm par
salam kahta bai. Aur Aras tua, ah&hr
ki kbazanebi, aur bhai Quartua, tum
ko saldm kahto Lain.
24 Hamare Khuddwand YiBii' Ma-
Qurinl,us mori likhd tha.aur Pibe
ke hath bhejd gaya, jo Qankhriai
kalisiye ki khddima tbi.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' PAHLA'
KHATT QURINTI'0N KO.
I BA'R
PU'LUS, jo Khuda ki marci se
Yisu' Masib ke rasul lume ki
liye buldyd hud bai, aur bhai Sostanea
k i tara! se,
2 Khuda kf kalisiye ko jo Qurintus
men hai, ya'ne, uu ko jo Masib Yisd'
men hok« ndk hue, aur bulau hde ki
muqaddas hon, un sah samet jo har
makdn men Yisd' Masih kd n&in, jo
hamdri aur un ka Khuddwand hai,
liyd karte h/iin :
"3 Hamare" Bdp Klmdd ki, aur
Khuddwand Yibu' Masih k i, taraf se
fazl aur salamatf tuuihare liye howe.
4 Main Khuda ke us i'azl ki babat,
•dia'
jo Masih Yisd' so tum ko 'indyat hi'id,
tumhdre liye hainesha apne Khudd ka
sliukr karta hun;
5 Ki Luin us men hoke harbdt ..
k h wah sab tarah ke bayan men, kir
sarc 'Hiu tam, gani hoj
6 Chimiitidn wah gawdhi, jo Masih
ke hnqq men bai, tum meij sabit bn i ;
7 Yahdri tak ki tum kisi ni'aaiat
men kani Bahfaj baiki Iiamdre Khu-
ddwand Yisu' Masih ko zahir hone ki
rib tiikte ho:
B Wuhi tumben dkhir tak qaim
bhi rakbegS, ti ki tum hamare Khu-
ddwand YiniV Masih ke din b'e'aib
thahru.
Jmiaion tos fiogj men. I QUBINTI'ON, W. Masih fabttt&ikioft !:i Btftaft
yitn huft ki dirnya ne apni hikmat. &•
Khuda ko na pa Indian A, to Khuda ki
yih maui lu'ii, ki inai.ailS ki be-wuqufi
ae iman lanewalon ko bachAwe.
22 Chim&tiehi Yahudi fcoi nishan
cliAbtc, aur Yunani hikmat ki taU&h
men haiii :
28 l'ar bani Masih ki, j n maslub
hua, mamidi karto hain ; wuh Ya-
hi'idfoTj ku Hyo thokar-khilancwala
patthar, aur Yiinanion ke liyo bo-
wuqufi hai ;
24 Lekin uu ko liye jo bulae gaye
hain, kya Yahudi, kya Yunani, Masih
Khuda ki qudrat aur Khuda ki hikmat
hai.
25 Kyiinki Khuda ki br-wuqufi
admion ki hikmat ki banishat hik-
matwAli hai; aur Khuda ki kamzori
admion ke zor ki baniubat zorftwar hai ,
21 A i bhAio, tuni apni bulAhat par
nigAh karo, ki uh rnen dunya ke lialmt
se hakim, aur bahu t maodi'irwAle, aur
bahut ashraf, sliAinil nahin hain :
27 Magar Khuda ue dunya ko bc-
wucpilbn ko uhim liya, ta ki hakimon
ko sharrninda karo ; aur Khuda ne
dunya ke kamzoron ko cium liya, ta
ki zorawaron ko sharminda karo j
28 Aur dunya ke kaiiiiiion, o ha-
qiron ko, aur un ko jo shumar uien
nahiii A t o, Klm.hi nu rhim )iyA, ta ki
unheti jo shumiir meii hain, nachiz kai-
dah-:
29 Kikoibaahar uskeage ghaimmd
na kiir v.ikv.
30 Lekin tuna Yiflu' Masih men
hokc m ko lio, ki w uh haniarc liyo
KhudA ki taraf M hikmat, aur rastlra/i,
aur pakizngi, aur khalasi hai :
;U Ta ki jaisA'ki likha hai, ki Jo
fakhr kare, so Khudawand par fakhr
9 Khuda, jis n c nimheu apno Beto
hamArc KhudAwand Y isu' Masih ki
rifAqat mori bulaya, wafadir hai.
10 Alj, ai bhAio, main lum so Yisii
Masih ko iiftm ke waste, iu hamara
Khudawand hai, il tunas karta hiin
ki turn Bab ek hi bat bolo, aur jiidaiarj
tam men na hon : baiki tum sab ok
dil aur ek saniajli hoke kaiuil bano.
11 Kytinki, ai bhaio, mujhe Khloe
ke logon se tumhari babat yiin raa'Ium
hiia, ki tuin mcn jhagre hain.
12 Mera niatlah yih hai, ki tum
men so har ek kahta bai, ki main
Pul us ka, main Apulhis ka, main
Ki-:.i- ka, main Masih ka hun.
13 To kya Masih bat gayA? yd
Pulus ti.imiiti.re wasl.o galft par khiticliA
gaya? ya tum ne Pilus ke mim so
baptiuma paya?
14 Main Khuda ka shukr karta
lnin, ki main ne tum men so kisi ko,
Krispus aur Gaius ke siwa, bapUsmft
nahin diya;
15 Na howo ki koi kabe, ki us ne
apne uim bc baptisma diya.
lti Aur main no Sta'auas ke khdu-
din ko blii baptisma diya; aur siwa
un ke main nahin j.inta ki main ne
kisi aur ko buptisma diya.
17 Kyiinki Masih ne inujhc bap-
tisma dene ko nahin, baiki Injil su-
nino ko bhej*: par kalam ki hikmat
fo tiahi'n, na ho ki Masih ki salib be-
Uisir thahre.
IH 'Ki salih ki kalam balak hone-
walon ke nazdik be-wuqiin bat; par
ham Dajat-pdncwalon ke liye Khuda
ki quiiat hai.
H) Kytinki likhii hai, ki main
hakimon ki hikmat ko nest, aur
siimajhuewalon ki samajh ko becb
kariinga.
20 Kabin hakim? knhan faqih ?
kah.in is jahan kA bahs-karm-wjhi'.'
kya KhudA ne is dunya ki hikmat ko
be-wuqufi nahin thahraya 'i
2L Is liye kf j'ab hikmat i Ilahi se
211
kat
II BA'B.
AUK, ai bhAio, jnt> main Khmki ki
gawAbi ki khabar detd hua tum-
liare pas iyd, tab kaiam ki lasdhat aur
hikmat ke sath nahin .iya.
,ll„.:r.^ ki babat, jo
- Kyunki main ]
Yisii' Masih aur a& ke maah'ib bono ke
t.iwA, aur kuchh ttuuhdre darniiyan D»
j.iiu';ii,
'A Aur main kamzori, aur dar, aur
nihdyat kapkapi ki hiiiat rnen hoku
tumhdro darniiyan rahd.
4 Aur rocra kaldm aur meri ma-
nddl insdut hikmat ki lubhdnewali
bdton se nahiri, baiki Ruh ke burhan
o qudrat no thi ;
5 Ta ki tumhdrd iman insan ki
hikmat par nnhin, baiki Khuda ki
crudnj par mauqtit' ha
i; I'is pai bhi kamiloij ke darniiyan
ham hikmat ki bat bolle hain : magar
b Jahili ki, aur ia jahan ko fand-bo-
jdnewdle surddron ki hikmat nahin. :
7 Baiki ham Kbuda ki wuh posbjda
hikmat bayan kartu hain, jo ttt ke
Mir.li thi, j!M Khudd ne zamanon se
pahle hamare jalai ke waste muqarrar
kiya:
8 Jiflo is jahan ke sardannj Btwg
kisi ne na jami : kyunki agar janto, fa)
jalai ke Kbudawand ko rnoslub
kart<?.
9 Baiki jai.ia ki likhd hai.ki Khudd
ne apne piyar-kaniewahm ke liye we
chizerj taiydr kin,, jo na aukhoij M
dekhig, na kduon ne suniri, aur na
ddmi ke dil men. diri.
10 Lekln Khudd ne DO koapni Riili
ko wasile so ham par Kabir kiya, ki
lliili airi chi/.uu ko, baiki Khudd ki
gahri bdton ko bhi, darydft kar leti
hai.
11 Ki admion men se kaun admi
kdhdljdnta hai, magar idini ki nih,
io uh mou bui? isi tarah Khuda ki
Ruh ke siwa Khudd kd ahwdl koi
nahin jantd.
12 Ab ham ne dunyd ki nih nahi_
baiki wuh Ruh, jo Khudd ki taraf se
hai, pai ; td ki ham un chi/ori ko, jo
Khudd ne hameu bakilah! hain, jdnei).
13 Aur yihi cbineii baui insan ki
hikmat ki sikhdi Kiii bdton se nahin,
215
{ QURINTI'ON, IH. Qurinthn men hit ih<:
yih thdni, ki baiki Biih 1 Quds ki sikhdi htii bat™
M, fatnm, riibani haten nihaiii logon bo
baydn karte hain.
14 Magar nafsdni ddmi Khudd ki
Ruh ki bdton nahin (jn.biil kartd : ki
we us ke dge be-wuqdfian hain : aur
na. wuh unlum jdi> Mbtd rial, kyuijki
wc rlihdni taur par brijhi jati rwin.
lf) I.ekiti wuh jo riihini lini M Bab
baion ko darydft kartd; par dp kisi se
duryift nahiu kiya jdtd hai.
16 Is liye ki Khudawand ki 'aql kn
kis lir siiinjlia. ki us ko KHnjluiwi'?
magar Masih ki samajh ham uaij lud.
III BA'B.
AUR, ai bluiin, main tiiro sc yiirj na
bui saka, jaise nilidnion se, par
jaise jismaniun si', baiki jaise un se, jo
Masih uicn bachche hatn.
2 Main ne tumben goght na khi-
ldya, par diidh pilava: kyunki tum
ko Li-jiii na thi, baiki ab bhi tdcuit
nabin.
'A Kyunki tum abbi jismdni lio ; isi
byt^ ki jali dah, aur jhagra, aur junaian,
tum men hain, to kya tum jismani
nabin lio, aur adini ki ehdl par naliiii
cbalto ?
4 ls liye ki Jafa ok kahtd hai, ki
main Pulus ka luin, aur ilusrd, ki main
Apulliis kd htm, to kyd tum jismdni
nabin V
G Tulus kaun, aur Apulli'iK kaun
uii, magar khidmat-karnewale, jin ke
ivasile se tum imdn ldc? no bhi itna,
ii'nd Kbudawaud ne bar ek ko bakb-
shd.
fi Main no darakht laplyd, aur
Apnlbi-i no bineka, [>ar Khuda mi
b;irhay:i.
7 Pas lagdnewala kuchh eliin nabin,
aur na .siiieliut'wala; magar Kliuda jo
barhdncwald hai.
fe Ijagaiiewild aur linohnewdld don-
on ek hain : aur bar ek ftpni mihnat ko
iniiwafiii apnaajr pdwegd.
9 Kyunki ham Kliudi ki kiiidmat
Musik ke kliddimon
I QURINTI'ON, IV.
ki ha/fqi gadt.
men ham-khidmat hain : ttim Khuddj maut, aur kyd hdl kf phizcn, aur kya
ki kheti, aur Khudd ki 'imdrat ho.
10 Main ne Khudd ke fazl ko
wdfiq. jo mujhe 'indyat ht'id, *aqlmand
lai'anidr ki manind neo riali, aur dusrd
«is par mdda dhartd hai. So liar ek
f aur kiire, ki wuh kia taur se ua par
harta hai.
11 Kyiinki siwd uh neo ke, jo pari
hai, koi diisri neo dai uahiri aaktd ;
wuh Ybm' Masih hai.
12 So agar koi uh neo pir soue,
rupe, beshuimat pat.tliar, lakri, ghat
paus ka raddd rakhe ;
IH To har ek ka kdm zahir Imjd,
ki wuh diti uh ku xdhir kar riegd,
kyiinki wuh A-j. so zdhir hota hai, aur
liar ek k:i kdm jaisi ki hai ag hi
;.;ill- I, i!:.:i.
14 Jis ki kdm, jo uh ne us par
Ivinayd, qaiiu rahegd, wuli ujrat pa-
WCgd.
15 Aur jis kd kdm jal jdwcgd, wuh
miqsd.ii uthdwegd : lekin wuh ap bach
jawegd ; par aisd, jaisa dg so.
16 Kyd linu nahin jante ki tum
Khuda ki haikal ho, aur ki Khuda ki
Kiih tum men hasti hai ?
17 Agar koi Khudd ki haikal ko
khardb Efll, to Khuda tu ko kharal.
karega; kyiinki khuda ki haikal pak
lini. aur w uli i tum ho.
18 Koi dp ko fiu-L» na dewe. Jo
koi tunihdre darmiyan ap ko is jahdn
mrii haldm samjhe, to bewuqif banc,
ta ki hakim ho jdwe,
] S) Kyiinki is jahdn ki hikmat Khu-
da ke HtB l«-wnqiifi hai. Ki likhd
hai, ki Wuh hakimon ko un hi ki
chaturdion m c n phansdtd hai.
20 Aur"yih,"ki Kliudawand hakim-
on ke qiyisoji ko janta hai ki batil
istiqbdl ki; sah tumhdri hain;
2H Aur tum Masih ke lio; aur Masih
Khudd ki hai.
IV BAU.
AT>MI' ham ko aisd jane jaise Masih
ke kkidmat-guzar, aur Khuda
ke bhedon ke niukhtdrkdr.
2 Phir muk li tar men is bat ki ta-
]ash hot.i hai, ki wuh diyanatddr howe.
3 Lokin mujh ko kuchli us ki par-
wa nahin, ki tum ya aur koi adini
mujh ko parkhe; baiki main ap bhi
apue ta,in iialiin parakhtd.
4 Kyunki main a] mu men khass
badi nahin jdntd ; j>ar mait) kuchh is
se rdstbdz nahin thahar jatd; mori
parakhniwdhi Khtiddwand hai.
& Ih wdste jab tak Khudawand na
dwe, tum waqt so pahle 'addlat karke
faisnla na karo ; wuh tdriki ki poshida
bak n roshan kar degd, aur dilon ke
mansiibe zdhir karegd : lab Khuda k!
taraf sc liar ek ki taVif hogi.
6 Aur, ai blidio, main ne in bdtoij
inen tumhari khatir apnd aur ApuUiis
ka zikr misdl ke taui par kiyd; ta ki
tum haru ro siklio, ki us se jo likhd
hai, kini ki bdkit siiydda na samjho ;
aisd na ho, ki tum ek ke liye diiere ki
ziddmen phiilo.
7 Kaun tujh men aur dB8re mori
faii] karta hai? aur tere pda kyd hai
jo tu ne diisre se iiahin pdyd ? aur jab
tii ne diiaru so puyii, to kyiiii ghamand
kartd hai, ki goya nahin paya V
8 Tum ab to dafida hiiy, aur ab
daulatmand ho gaye, aur hamdre ba-
gair saltanat ki ; aur kish ki tum
saltanat karto, to ham bhi tumhdrc
Miith saltanat karte.
Kyunki meri ddnist men Khndd
i sab rasiilon ko pichhle karke
21 I'as ddmion pir koi ghamand qall-liouewdk>n ki tarah zdhir kiya;
na kara Ki edri chfzen tumhdn ki ham dunyd, aur firishion, aur
hain; I ddmion ke iiye, ek tamashi thahre
•fl Kyd Pulus, kyd ApiilMs, kyd|hain. ~
Kefds, kvd duova, kyd zindagi, kva' 10 Ham Masih ke sabab bo-wuqiif
216
Ek haram&ar
I QURISTTON, V.
M iamhih.
hain, par tum Masih men hokc'aqi-' wdlon men hhi zikr nahin, ki koi ftpno
mand ho ; iiam kamzor, tum zordwar _
tum Isiaitw&le, hiim be'izssat Imiij.
11 Ham is glwri tak bb&klic, piydse,
Magfl hai n : mar kliatv, aur awnra
phirte haig ;
12 Aur Rjme hdthorj bo mihnaton
kartel we burd kahtc, ham bhald
mandte hain; we satite, hara sahte
hai 11 :
13 We galian detfl, ham pir^inite
hain: ham diinyA mm kiiro aur sah
chi/.on ki jhdraii ki mdnind :ij tak
luiin.
14 Main tiinihnn slianninda ksrne
ke Ujrfl yih bdten Lahiri likbla, baiki
apne piyare farzandon ki tarah tum ko
nasihat karta hun.
15 Kyiinki agarchi tum bo Mani h
men hoko hazArorj ustad rakhe, par
tunibdre brip hahutse na hue : ia iiyc
ki main hi Injil ko wasilc so Masih
Yiau' men tumhdrd bap hiia.
J 'l Pas main tum so rnintmt kartd
hun, k i tum mere namune par 'amal
karo.
17 Ia wdste main ne TimtAua ko, jn
ki Khuddwand men merd farzaud i
'a/a/, uar diydimtddr hai, tum ]^as
hheja, ki w uh meri rahen, jo Masih
men hain, jis tarah main liar kabin
har ek majlis men batldtd hun, tum
ko ydd dildwe.
18 Ba'z yili samajhke phiilte hain,
ki main lumhdre pas nahin auc kd.
19 Par agar Khuddwand chAhe, to
main tunihiire pfct jald dungA, aur na
shekhi-karnewdion ki hdtoii ko, baiki
un ki oudrat ko darvdft kaningA.
20 Kyiinki KhndA ki b&dshahat
bdt se nabi n, baiki qudrat ee hai.
21 Tum kyd ehahte ho, ki main
tumhare pas cuhari leke don, ya mu-
habbat se, aur ruh ki inulavamat se V
V DA'li.
AKSARON se eunte hain ki tum-
hare hich harduikdri hoti hai,
aur Risi harAnikdri jia ki gair-gaum-
217
bdp ki joru ko rakhe.
2 Aur tum phulte ho, aur jaisd ki
chahiyu gara nahin karte, td ki jis ne
yih kain kiya wub tum men nn nikahi
jawe.
3 Ki main ne to, jism se gair-hAzir,
par nih se h/i»ir h.ike,isi tarah ki goyA
hazir liiin, us par, jia ne aiaa kiya, yih
bukm dlyi hai,
4 Ki tata aur nih jo meri hai, ha-
mdre Khudawand Yiau" Masih ki qud-
rat ke sdth milkar aise shkkhs ko
ha.mdre Khudawand Visii* Masih ka
ndtn leke,
5 Shaitdn ke hawai n karo, ki jiem
ke dukh uthdwe, td ki us ki nih Khu-
dawand Yiau* ke din hachai jdwe."
C Tumhara ghamand karnd khfib
niiliin. Kyd tum nahin jduto ki t'bord
aa khamir sari' loi ko khamir kar dAltd
hai?
7 Paa, tum purano khamir ko nikdl
phenko, IA ki tum td'za loi bano, jis
tarah «e ki tum bc-khainir ho. Is liye
ki hamdrd liiii fasah', ya'ne, Maaiii lia-
mdrc liye qurban Md:
8 Ab do, ham 'id kareij, purdne
khamir ho nahin, aur na badkhwdhf o
shardrat ke khamir ao; baiki be-riydi,
aur sachdi ki be-kbamir roti se.
9 Main ne khatt men tum ko yih
liklid, ki tum harAmkaron men mat
mile raho :
10 Lckin na yih, ki hilkull dnnyA
ko hardmkdron, yd Idlchion, yA luter-
orj, yA butparaaton ae na milo; nahin
U> tumben dunyiafl nikalnd zarur botA.
11 Par main ne ab tunihen yih li-
klia hai, ki ftzai koi bbdi kalildke ha-
rAmkdr, yd Jdlchi, yA butparaat, yd
gdli-denewdld, yd shardbi, yd JuterA
ho, to ua se subhat na niklind, baiki
aise ke sdth khdne tak na khdnd.
12 Kyiinki mujho kyA kdiu hai, jo
bdbarwAlon par bukm karun? kyd mm
un par jo tum men abdinil hain, hukm'
nahin kaiteV
Bhai-myar I QURINTrON, VT, VIT. n&IM M i-.™ -.
13 Par un par jn bdharhaii}, Khuda chizon more liye rawi hain, pir mai:.
lniktu kartd hai. Garnz, tum n» bure kisiehiK ke ikhliydr uien na Ininya.
ddmi ko apno darmiyan se nikdl do. I 13 Khdue pet ke live hain. itu pt-;
VT IlA'Tl l..l,,( „.-.., 1-.. R» .' ,.«^ VI,. .AA 1- bv> U
VI BA'B.
K YA' tum men se Iuri ka hiwdo
paria* hai, ki dusre se mu'amala
rakhke ta.isa.la ke liyo bo-dinog pan
jawe, na ki mi^addason pan?
2 Kya tura nahin janto, ki muqad-
dai log jahdn ki 'aduat kareggo? Pas
agarjaban ki 'adalat tum H ki jiwo,
to kya chboto qaziyoQ ke faisal karne
ke ldiq nahiri ho?
3 Kya tum nahin jdnte, ki hani
firishton ki '.iiliil.it karenpa? to kya
is zindagi ko mu'araale foisal nakareij?
4 Pas, agar tum men ia Kindai>i k?
qaziye hon, to kalisiye ke un shakhsoij
ko jo liaqir haiu 'adalat kariio ke liye
miwarrar karo.
o Main yih ia liyo kahta hrio, ki
tum snarn.inda ho, Kya sisa Ind, ki
tum men ek 'aqlmand bin nahin, jo
apno bhdion ka ntuqailuama nasal kar
afcke?
6 Ki bhdi bhdi se qaziya kartd hai,
anr so hhi be-dinon ke age.
7 Yih tumhara hara qusiir hai, ki
timi dpas ki dad faryad kiya kartc h<\
Zulin uthdnd kyuiinahin bihtar jdnte?
apnd nti(|san kyiiii nahiu qabtil karto?
8 Baiki tum bJ to zulrn aur zabar-
dasti kart.o ho, so bhi bhaiori par,
9 Kya timi nahin jdnte, ki ndrdst
Khudd ki Mdshahat ko waria m
tioweiige? Fareb na khdo: kyunk
haram kar, aur but.parast, aur sini-
karmnvdle, aur 'aiydsh, aur iMJodftbaS,
10 Anrclior, aur Idlchi, aur sh'arahi,
aur gdli-lmknewdle, nur lutere, Khuda
ki bddsiidhat ke waris na hjOOgi
11 Aur ba'ne t-timhdre darmiyan
aisetho; par Khmiiiwatid Yisii' kenam
se, aur hamaro Khuda ki Mh se, gusi
dilao gaye, aur pak Lnc, aur rdstbdn
bbi thabre.
12 Siri chizen mere liyo rawa hain,
par sab chizen niauq'a nuhin : sari
218
kbaniFTi ke liya : par Khudd i» ko aur
un ko Best itaregA. Uagai badan
haramkiri ko liye nahin, baiki Khu-
ddwand ku liye hai; aur Khuddwanrf
badan ki' Mye.
1+ Aur Khudd ne Khudaivatul tcfl
jildyd hai, aur baui ko bui apni qudrat
so jilawega.
18 Kya tum nnhin jdnte, ki tum-
haro badAD Masih ko 'Azd hain ; pai
kya main Masih k« 'aza lekar kauhl
'iy.A. bjindiinV Ai^a, na bowo,
Ki Kya tum ko khabar ualiin, ki
jo kui katibi no sulibat kari a hai, so us
ek tan hud? kyunki wuli kahtd
hai, ki Wi; doai ii ok tau hoflge.
Par wuh jo Ehwtimnfl se mila
hiia hai, so us ke sath ek nih hiid hai.
I K Ii:Liainkdri so bha^o. Jo jo
gundh ddmi kartd hai, wuh badan ke
lniluir bui ; DM /ina-kariiewald apno
badan kii pUtAf/h hai.
llt Kyd tum nahin jdnte, ki tum-
hdra ba<lan Kiih i Quds ki haikal bui,
jo tum men basti, jis ko tum ne Khu-
dd so pdyd, aur tum apne nahin ho?
20 Kyunki tum ddmi.n se kimriile
gaye ; pas tmn apne tan so aur apni
nih se, jn Klmdd ke hain, Khuda ki
buzurgi karo.
Vtl BA'B.
JIN baton ki babat tum ne mujhe
liklid, ho mard ko liye yih ach-
chlid hai ki 'aurat ko na olibiio.
2 I.okin Imnimkdri so bach rahne
ko, bar mard apni jorii, aur bar 'aurat
apnd khasam raUte.
3 Khasam jorti kd haqq jaisd chd-
hiye add kare, aur miM bi j»rii khasam
kd.
i Jord apne badan ki mukhtar na-
hin, baiki khasam mukhtdr hai: is
tarah khasam blii apne badan ka mukh-
tdr nahin, baiki joru.
6 Tum ek diisro se judi na ralio,
Aru kkavtm
magar rliori muddnt apus ki razamaruli
se, ta ki rossa aur du'a karnc ke waste
faragat pin, aur phir dpas nun tk-j;i
lioo, taki Shaitin tam ko tumliari be-
zabti ke «aliah imtihdn mei; na ddlc.
6 PaT yih main ija/.at ki rdh se, na
hukm ki nih Be kaluti hun.
7 Ki main chahta, ki jaisd main
hun, aise hi sab Admi howen. Par
har ck tic npna apnd in'am Khudd se
paya, ek nc yau, aur diisre no wi'm.
8 So main hm-hydhon aur bewon
H yih kuhi.A hun, ki Un ke liye nch-
Abi hai ki we aise rahen, jaisA main
hiin.
i) Lekin agar wc zrtht na kar sakerj,
to bydh karen ; ki bydh kania jal jinc
se bihtar hai.
10 Tar un ko jin kd bydh lui» hai,
main nahin, lialki Khudawand hukm
karta hai, ki Jorii' apne khasam ko
na ohhoft :
11 Aur agar chhor chuki ho, to wuh
hemkah rahe, ya apne khasam
mol karc : aur khasam apni jorii k»
chhor na de.
12 Par bdqion ko Khudawand na-
hin, main kahtd ht';n : ki Agar kisi
U;ai ki jorii be-iman ho, aur wnh DI
ke sath rahne ko razi ho, to wuh ub
ko na chhore.
13 Ya kisi 'aurat ka khasam b*
iman huwc, aur wuh us ke Siith rahni
ko rdzi ho, to wuh u» ko na chhore.
14 Kyi'mki be-imdn khasam apni
jorii ke sabab se pak Inia, aur be-iman
S-ii khasam ko ba'is pak hiH hai ; ua-
u to tumlulro farzand ndpik liote,
par ab pak hain.
15 Par agar be-iman ap ko juda
kare, to karc. Koi lihai bahin aisi
halat men paband nahin,; par Khuda
ne liam ko mildp ke liye bulaya hai.
1C Kyiiriki, ai 'aurat, kydjaniye tii
apue khasam ko bachawu ? aur, ai
imiril. kya janiyo, tii apni jurii ko
bachawo ?
I QUR1NT1'0£, VIL kdfarz.
biasa mila, nur jis tarah Khuda ne liar
ck tso ini.iiy:i, wuh waisa bi tdiale.
Aur main airi kalisiyAou men. aisd hi
itoarrai kartA hdn.
1« Agar kui niakbtiin hokar buliyA
gaya, to na-makhtun na ho. Aur agar
kol mi-makhtuni men bulaya gaya, to
oiakhtiin na howo.
l'.) Khatna kuchh naluri, aur na-
inaklinini blii kuulih nabin, magar
Khuda ke hukuion par chalna hi sah
kuchh hai.
20 Har ck jis halat men bulaya
gaya, wuh usi men' rahe.
21 Kya tii gtuhnl ki halat tin-j .
bulaya gaya, to "aiidusha na kar: par
acar tii Aaad hojane sakti hai, to use
ikhtiyar kar.
' 'A'A Kyiinki wuh gulam j« Khudd-
■and men hoke buli>d gaya, Khu-hi.-
wnnd kd azad kiya hiia hai; aur isi
larah wuh jo azdd'i ki hdlat nn-rj aoka
bnl:iy:L i'aya, Masih ka gulim hai.
23 Tura dannm so kbaride gayo ho ;
admirnj ku guldm na bano.
24 OaraK, ai bbdio, har ek, jis halat
un bulaya gaya, usi halat men Khu-
da ke siit.li rahe.
25 Par ki'imvdrinr; ke haqi^ men
KlroMwmd ki koi hukm mnj)i paa
nahin; lekin jaisddiyanaMar houc ke
liye mujh par Khuddwand ki taraf se
rahm hud, waisd hi main apni rde Ka-
bir kartii hiin.
26 S<> oiera yih guman hai, ki ia
waqt ki taklifon par nazar karkfl yih
bihtar hai ; ya'ne, admi ke liye bihtar
hai, ki jnisa hai, waisa hi rahe.
27 Agar tii joru ke band men hai,
to uh se chhutkdra mat chdh. Aur
agar tii jnrri sn ulihutd hai, to phir
joru mat dhundh.
28 Lek'iri agar td bydh karc, to
gundh nahin kartd; aur agar kvirjwd-
n bydhi jdwc, to wuh giniah nahin
karti. Par also log jism ki taklif
pawimge; aur main tumben bachatic
17 U agar jaisa Khudi se har ck koIofaihU hun.
219
Haaid ke akkam Idkiron I QtlRINTrON, "VIII. ke byaJiejtine ki bohat.
29 Par, fti bhAio, main tum tua yih
kahta. hurj, ki waqt tang hai : is w.iste
chAhiye ki joruwAlii ftiW howen, jaise
ki mi ki joruan nahin. ;
30 Aur ronewAlu aiao, jaise we
nahin roto ; aur khu.shi-karnewAle
aise, jaise Wfl khuuhi nahin kart«; aur
kharidnewale aUe, jaise wc mal nahin
rakhtc ;
31 Aur ih liurnya ke kArobari aise,
jaise dunya se kim nahin rakhki;
kyi'nikJ dimyA kA raJJg-nijj guziirta
chala jrtta. Jiai.
32 Bo ruain yih chihta hiiij, ki
tum bc-.irxi<'slia ralui. W uh jo bin-
byAhA, «> Khudawand ke liye aude-
shamaiid rahtA liai, ki wuh kyunkar
Khudawand ko rAzi kare:
33 Par wuh jo byah A hai, go dunya
ke wastu andeshamaiul liai, ki kyiin-
kar wuh apiti jorfi ko razi kare.
34 Bydhi aur bin-byahi men bhi
yih farq liai. Ki bin-byahi KhudA-
wand ku liye amicsliaiiiaiid raliti hai,
ki wuh badan aur nih men, muqaddas
bane ; par byahi hui dunya ke liyi
aodi .■■-liaiuaiid ruhti hai, ki kytiykar
wuh apne khasmu ko razi kare.
35 Par yih tumharo fAide ke wAste
kahta htin, mi ki uiain tumben phaude
men dalun; baiki us ke lihaz se jo
?,cb detA hai, aur tA ki tum Khuda-
wand ki bandagi men khatirjam'ai ee
msshgtil raho.
36 Aur agar koi apiti kunwari larki
ke haqq inen jawAni se dhal jan:i mi-
imiudsib jAne, aur yilii aanir samjhe,
to j» chahe so kar le, ki wuh guuah
nahin kartA: we byah kareg.
37 Par jo koi zarur na samjhe, bai-
ki apne dil men rnazbiit rahtA, aur
apne iride ko unjAm dene par uAdir
hai, aur dil men yih thanc ki main
apni larki ko bin-byahi rahtie dtitjg;f,
to wah tohobhi kartA hai,
3H Garaz, wuh jo byah deta hai,
achcbha kartA hai ; aur jo byah nahin
deta, so bihtar kartA hai.
jali'
3'.) 'Aurat nhar'a ki pAband hai, jab
tak us ka khasam jita rahe ; par agar
ui ka khasam mar jae, lab wuh ar-ad
hai, ki jis se chahe, byah kar le .
magar sirf Khudawand men.
40 Par agar biu-byiihi rahe, to wuh
meri datiist men aiyada sa'Adatmand
lini ; aur main jAutd luin ki Khuda
ki lliih mujh men bhi hal
VIII BA'B.
A B babat im c.hizon ki jn buton
par qurbani ki j;ici hain, so bata
yih jante hain, ki hiu. sab 'iii'au
rakhte hain. 'lrfan phulald. par mu-
habbat baruati hai.
2 Cimnanchi agar koi guman kare
ki kuchh jauUi liai, to jaisd jAnna
chAhiye, wuh ab tak kuchh nahin.
ta.
:i Ijekin jo koi Khuda se muhab-
bat rakhta hai, wuh us se pnb.chAr±A
jiti hai.
4 So un chizon ke khAne ki bAbat,
jo buton par qurbaai ki jati hain, ham
jante hain ki bu t niullaij kuchh i'hiz
Irinya mori nahin, aur koi Khuda
nahin magar ek.
Kyiinki harchand ailAk o zamin
men bahut hain jo khuda kahlate
hain, (chunAnchi baliutere khudA, aur
haliutoro khudawand hain,)
6 Ijekin hamarA ek KhudA hai, jo
BAp hai, jis so «Ari chizen luim, aur
usi ke Hye hain : aur ek Khuda-
wand hai, \" YisiV Masih hai, jis ke
sabab se sari chizen liuin, aur huni usi
t wasile ■■>■ hain.
7 Lekin sab ko yih 'irfdn nahin ;
baiki kitne hi but ko kuchh cfafo jau-
kar buton par ki qurbfini aj tak klidte
hain ; aur un kA dil za'if hokar Aiiida
ho jatA hai.
H Lekin kbAnA hamen KhudA se
nahin milatA ; kyiiiiki ngiir khiwon,
hamAri kuchh barhti nahin; aur jo
na khawon, to tihatti nahin.
0 Par khabardAr raho, ki tumliArA
Rasul apnd ikhtiy&r
I QURINTI'ON, IX.
■i par jata deli.
yih ikhtiydr kainzoron ko thokar kkil-
ine k'ii ba'is iia howe,
10 Kyi'iiiki agar kol tujhc jo 'irfan
rakhta hai, batkhinfl mim kbato do-
khe, to kyd w uh jis kd dil za'if hai
buton ki gurbiini kluinu par diier na
boga"?
11 Aur terd wuh kamzor bbdi, jis
ke liye Masih mild, toru 'irlUn so balak
na hoga?
12 Pas tum bhdion ke yun gunah-
gar boke, aur mi ke za'if dil ko »ha-
yai k a rku, Masih ke g u nal iga r thahar-
teho.
YA So n^ar koi kliurak mcrc bhdi
ko thokar fchildwe, to main ahad tak
kabhi gosht na kliaungd, ta na howe
ki apne bhai ki thukar ka sabab huuij.
IX IJA'B.
K YA' main rasul nahin hfin ? kya
main a'zad nahin? kya main iu
Yiaii' Masih ko, jo hamara Khuda-
wand hai, nahin dckha? kya tum
Khtidawand men mere baude hile na-
hin ho?
2 Hurehand main diisroii ke liyu
rasul nahin, tau bhi tumhdre liye to
albatta hiin : kyiinki tum Khudd-
wand men hoke mori risalat par muhi
ho.
3 Jo nitijha parakhto hain, un ko
liye merd yili jawab hai.
4 Kya hamen khane pine ka ikh-
tiyar nahin ?
5 Aur kya h am ko yih iotidar na-
hin ki kisi dini hahin ko byah kar
liye pbiron, jaisc- aur rasul, aur Khti-
dawand ke bhai, aur Kefds, kartc
hain ?
6 Ya airf mujhe aur Barnabds ko
ikhtiyar nah i» ki nubuat na karen?
7 Kaun aumi khardi kurke nipah-
gari karta hai ? kaun angiir ka bdg
lagata hai, ki us ka phal nahin klia-
ta? ya kaun galla charati hai.jo us
galle ki kuchh diidh nahin pita "
18 Kya main aisi baten bolta hiin,
221
fauat ia liye ki yih insani rawaj hai ?
ya aliari'at bhi yili nahin kabti?
9 Kvurjki Musa ki shari'at men to
yiin likha hai, ki Daoto hiiu bail ka
tunnh niat baudhiyo. Kya Khuda ko
bailon hi ki parwd hai ?
10 Ya wuh khasa barndra wasto
yiin kahtd? Han, yih hamare waste
be-ahakk likhli hai: kyiinki nmnasib
hai ki jotncwald ummed ae jote, aur*
daonewala hissa pane ki unuiiod so
dawe.
11 Ho agar ham no (umhdro liye
nihdni chizen boi hain, to kya yih
hari bat hai, ki ham turohari jiamani
cLiikoti katen?
12 Agar auron kd tum par yih ikh-
tiyar hai, to hamara kya ziydda na
hoga? Leki» ham yih ikhtiyar kdm
men na Ide, baiki sari babon sahte
na howe ki ham Masih ki lujil
ke muzahim bowea.
13 Kyd tum nuhin j&uto, ki jo hai-
kal ka karobar kavte, so haikal mt;n
xc khiiic haiu? aur jo (jurharigah men
ba-zir hia kartt', ao ipirbangah se biasa
lete hain?
14 Yiin hi Khtidawand no bhi far-
miiyd hai, ki jo Injil ke Bundnewale
hain, Injil ae anbab i zindagi pdwenge.
15 Par main un merj se kuchh
'amal men na liya r aur main no is
garaz se yih nahin liklid, ki raore
wdato yiin kiya jawc: kyiinki us sc
ijlie nianid bihtar hai, ki koi mere
lakhr ko kho dewo.
16 Is liye ki agar main Injil ki
khabar diiii, tu kuolih itura fakhr na-
bjn j kyiinki nmjiu! /.anirat pari hai,
baiki inujh jtar wdwaila. hai, agar
main Injil ki khabar na diin !
17 K i agar main yih khusM so
karun, to phal paitnga : par agar na-
khushi .sk, tau bhi niukhtari mujhe
aompi gayi hai.
1M Pan to mujhe kyd phal milt»
hai'? Yih, k i jab main Injil ki ma-
nddi kariin. Masih ki khuahkliabari
Matihion par sari bit'paraatil Qt'RlNTI'ON, X. tark karne l.afnrz
ko he liiualid-i diiij, ta ki main apne islthc, aur wo sah samundar men se ho-
ikhtiydr ko, jo Injil ki babat hai, boji kar nikal gaye
tani- |,;ir isti'omal na kanin.
! Aur snbhon ne us badai aur mun-
Lfl Kyi'njfci main ne, Mwujiide ki'dar roen Miisd ka l>aptisma paya ,
sah Ke azdd iiiiri, ap ku aa'b kd guldml 3 Aur sabhon ne ek hi ruhani
liiahrdyd, ta ki main bahutun ko nafa kburdk khai ;
men paiiii.
20 Main Yahr.dion ko darmiydc
Yahiidi sa tha, ta ki main YalnidioTi
ko tufa mag priiin ; shariatwdion men
main ihari'fttwili baua, ta ki shari'at-
walon ko naf 'a men pddn ;
21 Aur bo-shari'at logon men be-
Bamrfot si, (iiarcliaud rnam Kbujulu
IlMHift 1'e-sha.ri'at ujiltiij luia, Imlk
Masih ki sbari'at kd tahi' tha,) ta ki
main bu-shari'at logon ko nafa men
j.dun.
Tl Kaiu/.oron men main kamzor sa
tlii, ta ki kamzorori ko nnfii mutj
1 '.'l ii 1 1 ; main sah ddmion ke waate sab
knclih bani, ta ki bar ok tarah
kiinon ko bachdun.
88 Aur main, y ih Injil ke waste
karldhiiii. Id ki main luinhdre sdtli us
Coep sharik hoiiQ.
84 Kya tum nahin jante ho,
maiddn men jali daurte hain, to Bab
daurte hain, par bazi ek hi la jdid hai 't
l'ttw tum niwA dauro, ki tum bi jito.
2o Aur liar ek kushligir sah bdton
kd parhez rakbta hai. tio <n us taj
k o liyr jb l'aui hai y ih karte hain ; par
hara wuh tdj pa.no ko liye, jo gairfdui
hal
20" So main daurtahim, par be thik-
dne nahin; main jchuse larta bi'iii, par
us ki mduind nahin jo hawa ko mdrtd
hai :
27 JEialki main apne badan ko pi.se
diiltti Liiii ; aur use bdndhke ghaait
liye phirta Ini n, na liowc ki main aur-
un ko manddi karka ap na-niaqbiil
thahnin.
S BA' D.
PAR, ai bhdio, main nahin chdbtd
ki tum i» bu ndwaqil' raho, ki
hamdre bapdade i
222
kb badai ke nichej parnsti se bhago.
■i Aur sabhon ne ek hi rdhiinl pdm
piya: kviinki unhon ne *in ruhdui
Uhatan men n, j" un ke satb chali,
pdni'piyd: magar wuh Chatdn Masili
thi.
5 ParunmcnbahutoQseKhuddriizl
na thd; aur wo baya ban men inare pare,
b' Ye edre majarc hamdre was'te
namuna hiia, td ki ham buri chizon ki
khwdhish na karen, jniae imhon ne
bhi ki.
7 Aur tum butparaat na bano. jis
tarali un men kai ek tho, jaisd likhd
liai, ki Yih qaum khdne pine baithi,
phir ndchne uilii.
H Aur ham hardmkdri na karen, jin
tarah u u mim ne kai ek ne ki, aur ek
lu diri map, teis liazir mdre pare.
9 Aur ham Masih kd imiihdn na
karen. chuTiinchi un men se bhi ba'zon
ne kiyd, aur sdmpon se haldk biie.
10 Aur tum mat kurkurdo, chu-
ndnclii un men ae bhi kai ek kurkurde,
lialik kiirnuwdle se haldk kiye
gaye.
1L Ye sab w&ii'at jo un ko hriin,
namuna hiiin : aur Immdrl na-ilmt ke
waste, jo akhiri zamdne men hain,
likbl gayirj.
! Pas Jo koi ap ko qdim samajhta
so khabai'dar ralie, aM na ho ki
rare.
I '! 'hiu kiri imtihdn men, siwd us
_ j aur insdn se kiya jdta hai, nahin
pare; aur Khudd warddarhai, ki wuh
tum ko tuitiiiari taqat se /iydda imti-
hdn men parne ua tlegd J baiki wuh
itutihati ke sdtb nikal jam- ki Mh
bhi Ihahra dega, td ki tum bardisht
kar sako.
11 l'as, ai mere piyaro, tum but-
I QUR1N'1T0N, XT.
ki babat.
15 Main turn se yun bnltd lnin, 28 Tar agar ko! tumben kahe, ki
jaisf 'aqln]»n(J()Tj su; so jo main. kahtd Yih bu ton ki qurbdni hai, to us ki
niirho. " khdt.ir jis ne jntdvft, aur imtiydz i din
16 "Yih harakat kl piydla jis par ke sabah mat khdo : ki /.amin aur ua
bani harakat mangte lmiy, kyd Masih ki ma'muri Klnidawaml ki liai :
ko laini ki siiarakat nahiii V Viii ro|l 29 Iintiydz karud hai uni dfisre ke
I liaiu tiirt.'liaiii, kyd Masih ke badan liye aur na apne liye: ki kdhe ko
ki shnrdk'nt iiLiliin V , jdusre ki samajh meri dzddagi ko kha-
1" Kyiinki harehand bani bah w sc lal kare?
haiti, pir milko ck roti, aur ek tani 30 Aur agar main jhvkt karke
hain: ia liye ki ham bab ck hi roti khdtd liur, to jis t-h'y/. (>ar shukr karta
iiinu sharik hain.
38 Un pai jo jism ko ru so lsrdeli
hain, nazar karo j kya wejoqurbfaii-
kli;uii/w;ili> hain, fpurbdngdh ke sharik
IMhill V
ISI Pas main kya kahla ln'in? ki
but kuchh Oflla hai, yd buton ki qur-
bdni kuchh chiz hai V
20 Baiki yih kahtd, ki gair-qaumen
joqurbdni karti hain, Shayalin ke liye
karti hain, na Kluula ke liye : aur
main nahin chah'ta ki tum Shaydtin
ke sharik ho.
21 Tum Khuddwand kji piydla, aur
Shayatin kd piy4la.pl nahin aakt«;
tum Khudiwand ko dastar-khwdn ,
aur Shaydtin ke danlar-kliwan donon
jmr sharik nahin ho sakte.
2" Kya haru K h m ia w and ko gairat
, dildte hain 'i kya ham ua se zorawar
hain ?
23 Sab kuchh mere liyo haldl hai.
par sab kuchh rnauq*a naliirj : sal
kuchh mujhe haldl hai, par sab kuchli
temqqj nahin, bakhshtd,
24 Koi apni bihtari na dhundhc,
baiki liar ek diisrc ki bihtiiri chdko.
25 Jo kuchh qasai-n ki diikAiini)
men biktd hai, so khao, aur dini ini'
ti_Vii/ karke kuchh na puchho:
20 Kyunki zainin aur ua ki mi'
muri Khudiwand ki h; '
hiin, us ke sabab kia livu baduii
hiin 'i
31 Paa, tum khdla, yd pite, yd jo
kuchh karteho, sab Khuda, ke jahil ke
liye karo.
32 Tumna Yahiidion, na Yundnioii,
na Khudd ki kalisiye ko thokar ke
bi'is ho ;
("'hundnehi main aab bdtnn men
sab ko ra/.i rak h U hi'.tj, aur apnd
baiki babutoij kd Id'ula ilhundh-
td hurj, ta ki wu najdt pdwcn.
XI BA'IJ.
TUM mere nauninc par 'amal karo,
jaiac main bin Masih ke oamuna
par karta lit'in.
2 Par, ai bhdio, main tumhdri ta'rif
kartd hihi, ki tum har bat miuj mujhe
ydd rakhte ho, nur un riwdyatmj ko
hifz karte ho, jis tarah se main ne
tumben ^"|ii'' hain.
3 Par main chdhta hi'in ki tum jano
ki har ek mard kd sir Masih hai, aur
'attmt kd sir mird, aur Rlaaiii kS sir
Khndd.
i Jo mard du'd yinabuwei karte
waqt apne sir ko dhdmptd hai, wuli
apne air ko be-hurmat, karta.
5 Aur har 'aurat jo bagair sir
dhampe du'd yd uubuwat kaiti, M
anu eir ko be-hurmat karti hai, kyurj-
ki yih ua ke sir nnindne ku bardbar
27 Phir agar lie-imdnon men ae kol ] hal.
tumhdri da'wat kare, aur tum us ke 6 Kyunki apar 'aurat orhni na orhe,
yahdn jdne par rdzl ho, to jo kuchh !to us ki choti bhi kat jawi;1 ; [iur agu
tumhdresdmhnerakha jdwe.khao, nur 'aurat choti kdtne yd air mdndue ae
dini imtivdz karke kuchh na piichho. be-hurmat hoti hai, to orhni orlie.
2^d
'Asha, i linhh-'ini
I QURtNTI'ON, XI.
7 Mard ko na cbahiyc ki apne
ko dhdmpe, ki wnii Khudd ki aurat,
aur na kii jalai bai ; par 'amat mard kd
jaldl hai.
8 Ih liye ki mard 'aurat ac nahin,
baiki 'aurat mard se hai.
9 Aur mard 'aurat ko liyo nahin,
baiki 'aurat mard ko liyo paida hiii.
10 Pas chaliiye ki 'aurat tiris h ton
ke sabab apuo sir ko rlhamp rakho.
11 Magar Kluidawand incnuamard
Surat ke bagair hai, na 'aurat mard ke
bagair.
12 Kyunki jaisi 'aurat mard se hai,
waisa hi mard bbi 'aurat ke wasile so
hai ; par Bab Khudd m hain.
13 Tum ap hi tajwiz karo; kyd
m u n asi b hai k i 'aurat bagair air
dbampe Khudd se du'a mango?
14 Kya tabi'at ae tum ko naliin
ma'lum hota, ki agar mard chott rakhu
to u» ki bB-humiati hai ?
15 Par agar 'aurat ke lambo Ml
hort, to us ki zinat hai : kyunki bal
usc panla ke waste diye gaye.
16 Lekiu agar koi takrfiri ma'lum
ho, to Efthir howe ki na bamara, na
Khutla ki kaiisiyiion ka koi aisd dau-
tur hai.
17 Aur jo main ab tumhcn kaatd
lilin, isroon tumhfiri ta'rif nahin karta,
ki tum jali jam'a hot« ho, to us men
tumhfiri kuchh bhalai nahin, baiki
burdi bai.
18 Kyiinki auwal yih hai, ki main
snnta lit'in, ki jis \vaqt tum kaKsiye
mcn jam'a butB hn, tumhare bich
ikhtilaf hote hain; aur is ki haqiqat
ko main kuchh rafia bhi Ictii hntj.
1!) Kyunki y.anir hai ki tumhare
Moh li'nl'alin bhi ho jawcn, la ki we
jo tum men maqbul hain, zahir ho
jdwun.
20 Phir jo tum ok hi makan men
jam'a hota lio, yih 'Asha o Kabbini
kbdno ko liye nahin hai.
21 Kyunki kbane ke waqt bar ek
pahle a; n i(i ht khdna kha lelfi hai : aur
224
koi bhtikha rah jdta, aur koi mas t hut»
hai.
22 Kyd tumkhdnepfnekeliycgbar
naliin raklite ho ? ya Khiiila ki kalt-
siye ko niobi) jtinto ho, aur tinhen j<>
ghar nahin rakhtaahaniuudakartelio?
Ab niaig tum se kyd kahtin ? kya i$
men tumhfiri te'rff karun? Main timi-
h.iri ta'ril* nahin kartfi.
23 Kyiinki main ne yih hdt Khudd-
wand se pai, aur tumben hlii sompi.ki
Khudd wiuid Vinii' ne, jia rat ki pakar-
wdyd gayd, roti 1E :
H4 Aur slnrkr karke ton, aur kahd,
ki Lo, khdo, yih niera badan hai, jo
tumhare liye torajata hai: tum mori
yddgari ke liye yih kiya karo.
25 Aur isi tarah us ne kbdno ke ba'd
piyfiia bhi liya, aur kahfi, ki Yih piyal»
wuh naya 'ahd hai, jo mere lahii se
hai ; jab jab tum pio meri yddgari ko
liye yi'nj karo.
26 Kyunki jab jab tum yih roti
khiitc, aur yih piyfiia pite ho, to tuin
Khuddwand ki maut ko, jab tak ki
wuh awe, jatfite rahte ho.
27 Is waste jo koi nd-mundsib taur
ae yih roti khawo, yd Khuddwand
kfi piyfiia piwe, to wuh Khuddwan<?
ke badan aur lahii kfi gunahgar
!i":;:i.
28 Pas fidmi pahle dp ko jancho,
aur yi'mhi is roli men se khawe, aur is
piydlc se piwe.
29 Kyunki jo na-mundsib taur
khdtd aur pita hai, so Khuddwand
badan ka libaz na karke apni sa/4
khdtd aur pita hai.
30 Isi «abah se tum men bahutere
kam/.or aur biinar hain, aur kitno so
31 Agar ham apne ta,(n jdnchto to
su «d na pfite.
32 Aur Khiuldwand hamen sazfi
dake tarliiyat karta hai, td na howo
liam (lunya kosdlhsazlke hukm m
sharik howen.
33 Pas,aiinerebhaio, jubtumkhdne
r si
1 ke
h'iihaui nfamaton I QUK1NT
ke liye jam'a ho, to ek diwre ki rah
dekho.
31 Aur agar koibhiikba ko,toapne
ghar men khi-we, na ho ki tum sazd
pauc ko jam'a lio. Ab jo kuchh bikji
main aki' durtiMt karunia.
Ml JiA'B.
Al bhaio, main nahin chahta- ki
tam rohani ni'amaton ki babat
be-khabar raho.
2' Tum jinte bn ki fcunj gair-qauui-
wale tho, aur gunge buton se pichbe,
jis [arah chaliie gaye, cbahe the.
3 Pas main tumben jatai.a htin, ki
tol diiliiij, jo Khuda ki ttiih. se boltA,
Yi-i." ko ma'l'iin kahta hai: aur kni
hagair Klih 'i QuJs ke YisiV ko K huda-
wandkah nahin sakia hai.
4 Pas, ni'arnaton tarah tarah ki
hain, par Ruh ek hi hai.
6 Aur khidmatcn bit t tarah tarah
ki hain, pai Khudawand ek hi liai.
6 Aur tasircn tarah tarah ki hain,
par Khuda ek hi hai, jo sabhon men
sah kuchh karta hai.
7 Lekin Kuh ka zuhur, jo har ek
men kiya jata, faida i 'amin ke liyi
hai.
H Ek koIWhne hikmat ki bal inilti
hai ; aur duero ko us! Ruh 60 'ilin kf
liat;
9 Aur ek aur ko usf Riili se Imi
aur ek aur ku usi Ruh leohanga karun
ki ni'aniaten;
10 Aur kisi ko karamaton ki aud-
raten; aur kisi ko uubiiwat; aur kisi
ko nihon ki paluhan ; aur kiai ko tarah
tarah ki Bubaneo ; «urkisikoaiibanoii
ka tarjunia karna:
] l Lekin wuhi ek Ruh yih nah
kuchh karti hai ; par jaisa chihti, har
ek ko bantti hai.
12 Kyuriki jis tarah badan ek hai,
aur us ke 'azii bahut, aur ek badan
ke 'azii milkar, agarchi bahut, ek
badan hote hain, Masili bhi aisi hi
hai.
13 Ki hara sabn.',kya faMdi, kya
225
TON, XII. U hilal,
Yunani, kyagulam, kya anid, ek hi
Ruh se ek badan banne ke liye baptis-
mu paya; aur ham sab ko ek hi Hnb se
pine ko diya gaya.
H Kymjki badan men. ek 'azii na-
bin, baiki bahut se hain.
15 Aur agar panw kahe, is liye ki
main hath nahin, main badan ka na-
hin ; i') kya wuh U sabab sc badan ka
nahin hai P
16 Aur agar kan kahe, is liye ki
main aukli nahin, main badan ka
nahin ; to kya wuh is sabab se badan
k a nahin ?
17 Agar sara badan ankh hota, to
nna kahan hota? auragarsab aimna-
hota, to sunghna kalian i
18 Par ab Khuda no 'aziion men se
ek ek ko badan men apui marzi ke
muwafiij rak Ini.
19 l'ai agar we sab ek hi 'azii hote,
to badan kahar» hoia?
20 Par ab bahut se 'azti hain, lekin
badan ek nal
21 A'nkh hath. se nahin kah sakti,
ki main teri muhtaj nahin ; aursirbhi
panwon se nahiij kah sakta, ki main
tiiiiiluira muhiaj nahin.
22 BalU badan men we 'azii, jo
ziyada kamzor ma'luin hote hain, ba-
hut zarur hain :
23 Aur badan ke u n 'aziion ko, jin-
hen ham kniii-shaukatwale jiinte hain,
uuhin ko ziyilda 'izzat dete iiain : aur
hamare he-daul 'azii bahut khufli-daul
ho jdte hain.
21 Kyi'.nki hamare khush-daul azii
us ke muhtaj nahin; par Khuda ne
mi 'a.ziion ka, jin ki kaintj tlii, ziyada
liunnat dekc badan ko murakkab
kiya;
25 Ta ki badan men ikhtilaf na
howe, baiki aire 'azii djias men ek
<lusre ke ham-dard rahen.
2(i Aur agar ek 'azu kuchh dukh
jiiiia hai, to sare 'azii ua ke sath dukh
pate hain ; aur agar t- k 'azii 'iz^at pawe,
to sare 'azii ngkaaath kliunli hule hain.
S&Hni'amatonMniiibat I QUKIXTI'ON, XIII, XIV. muhabbat afzalhai.
unum-d rukhti hai, sab ki barddsht
k arti hai.
8 Mutiabbat kabhi j.itf nahfn rahti i
E\r MM uubiiwaten hain, tt> mauqftf
°BSi i Qgar zubanon hain, tu kiml
ho jaengl ; agar 'ilm hai, to Id-hdsil ho
jdega.
\> Kyiiiiki hainard 'ilm ndqis hai,
aurhaniari nubuwut nd-tamdm.
10 Par jab kamal awoga, to ndqis
neat ho jdegd.
11 Jah main larkd tha, tttb larkc
ke manind bolta tbd, aur larkc'ke
manind khiyal karta tha, aur' larke
ke iiid.jii.ud liujjat karta thd; par jab
jawan hiia, tab main ne larkai ae hath
utbayd.
12 Ki ab ham aino so dhundhla ea
dtklito kain ; par ub waqt rubaru
dekhecgc: ia waqt mori 'ilm ndqis
hai; par uHwaqtrnairj bilkull jdnun^a,
jis taraii ki main sarisar pahehand
gaya.
13 Ab to iuiao, ummed, muhabbat,
yo tinon maujud rahti hain ; par un
men jo barhkar hai, no muhabbat hai.
XIV IJA'B.
MUHABBAT ka pichka karo, aur
rtiiiani ni'amaturi ki arzfi r&kho,
khusuaan us ki, ki tum nubiiwat
karo.
2 Kyutjki jo begdna ■ruJbfia bait*
ii, wtih admion m nahin, baiki Khuda
bolta hai ; kyunki koi uahin. sa-
lajhta, agarchi wuh. ruh so bhed ki
bah1» bolta hai.
3 Par jo nubiiwat karta hai, bo ad-
minn ise, uu ki taraqqi, aur nasihat.
r tasalli ku liye, boltd hai.
4 Jo begdna zuban men bolta hai,
bo apni hi taraqqi karta hai; par jo
nubiiwat karta hai, kalisiyo ki taraqqi
karta hai.
5 'l.'au bh! main ekahtd hiin, ki tum
sab kai tarah ki zubdnen bolo, par
khas» karke chtihta hiin ki nubiiwat
karo : ki nubtiwat-karn&wdta uh se jo
tarah larah ki zubauen bolta hai bara
27 Ih tarah tum rnilke Masih ke
badan hu, aur judi juda 'azfl ho.
2tf Aur Khuda ne kaliaiyu inen kit-
non ko BHkUOtr kiya, pahle rasulon
ko, dusre nabion ko, tinro uatadon ko,
ba'd us ko karamat karne ki quwaten,
tab chungd karne ki ni'amalen,
dadgarian, peshwiiig, tarah tarah ki
zubdnen.
29 Kyd aab rasul hain? kyd aab
nabi hain? kya sab ustad hain 'f kyd
sab kardmaten dikhate '
30 Kyd sab ko changi karno ki
ni'amat hai r kyd tarah tarah ki zub-
dnen nab botte liain V kyd sah tnrjmua
karte h airi ?
31 Tum achchhi seachchhf ni'amafr-
on ko Dmhttg raho ; par
rdh, jo un m kabin bihtar hai, tuuihen
batldtd hiin.
XIII BAU.
AGAR main adrni yd firishtor. k!
zubaiicrj boliin, aur muhabbat na
ntkhili), Ut main ihautliandta pital, ya
jhaujhanal-L jlianjii tn'nj,
2 Aur IgW main nubiiwat karun,
aur Uni main gaib ki sab Laten aur
Sira 'ilm jdntin, aur merd iman kdim'l
im. ynlidii tak ki main jiahamn ko
sarkdke diir karun, paf inuhabbat na
raklnin, to main kuchh uahin hdn.
3 Aur a^ar main apna ^uru. mdl
kliairat men de ddl?iii, yd agar main
apna. badan d(in, ki jaldya jde, par
muhabbat na rakhiin, to mujhe kuchh
iaida nalu'rt.
4 Muhabbat babir hai, aur nmlaim
liai; mubabliat dali nahin karti ; imi-
liaiibai shekhi nabin karti, aur phiilti
mihiii,
ii bR-mauqa* kdni nahin kani,
khud-gnraz nahin, guaaaww uabin,
bad-gumdu naliiii ;
G -Nfi-r&sti se khusli uahin, baiki
oacbdi se khtish liai ;
7 Sab baton ko pi jati hai, sah
kuchh bawar karti hai, »ab uhiz ki
226
■pun m j mr r' i QUKiN'ri'ox, xiv,
hai, agar wuh tarjuma is liyo t» kare
ki kalisiya taraqqt pdwe.
6 Ab, ai bhdio, agar main tarah
taruh ki zubdnen boltd hri:i tumhare
pds aus, aur ilham, yd 'ilm, yd nuM-
wat, yA ta'lira kt bVuen Unti H na
kaburi, to tani ko mujb se kyd l'dida
7 Chundiichi 1w-j»ii diizen jin se
iwdzon nikalti hairj, jaisi Lanun ya
barbut, agar uu ke bolon men, tatawnt
ua ho, to jo phiinkd yd bajdyd jdtd hai,
kyrinkar bujbdjdcgd?
8 Aur agar naroinghe ke bol dnbdhe
ke sdth hem, to kaun ftp ko larai ke
liye taiydr karegd ?
S Waiaa hi tum bbi agar zubdu k
w&zih bat na bolo, to jo kuhd jatd hai,
kyiinkar samjhd jdegd ? timi hawa w
b;ik bak karuewaio thahroge.
10 Kitni zubdnen a!ag tarah ki
dunyd mm aglab na bongi, aur un
men sl koi be-iiia'ni nahin.
11 I'ar agar wuh zubdn mujhe na
dti ho, to main. bolnewdle ke dgo sj-
nabi thahnlngd, aur boloewdld rr.ere
dge djnabi t.hahregd.
12 Pasjabki tum nlhdni ui'amaron
ki arsui rakhte ho, toaiai barhti chaho,
td ki kaflsiyo ki t«raqni kar eako.
13 Chundnchi wnh jo begini /n hiu
men boltd hai, du'd mange ki tarjuma
bbi kar sako.
14 Kyiinki agar main hlcrl bogdnf
zubdn men du'd mdngiinrto meri nih
du'd mdngti hai, par merl 'aql be-kdr
hai,
15 Pas main kyd karun? main nih
se du'd mdngiingd, aur 'aql Bfl bW doM
maiigiingd: aur main nih se gaunga,
aur 'aql se bhi gdiinga.
lti Nahin tu,agar tii nih se harakat
ki bat bole, to wuli jo anparhc ki
jagah men hiiithd hai, teri shukr-
EUKari men A'min kyunkar kahegii ?
I I j" kut'hh tii kuliti hai, wuh
use nabin jdatd.
17 Td to achchhi tarah se shukr
h:itar hai.
karta hai, par dusrd tarahi naluri
pdtd.
18 Main apne Khudd kd shukr
karta hun, ki tum sabho.ii se ziyaMa
zabinen boH4 hun :
19 Lekin main kulisiyc men pduch
Mteri apni 'aql so bolnd, us niyat se
ki auroii ko sik iiann, un dan ha/dr
bdton se, jo kiai begdni zubdn men
bo] in, ziydda pawand kaita Wrj},
£0*Ai bhdio, turn 'aql men larke na
bane rabo ; tum ba-di iSen larke raho,
j«r 'aql men jawart ho.
'_'! ftbarfiM rwm likhihsi.ki Khii-
dawand kalitd hai, metin begani zuban
aur begane honthon sc is qaum ke
adth bohirjgd, tau bbi wc meri na
sunenge.
22 Pas tatali tarah ki zubdneu
iin;ti:djiri.m ke liyc nahin, halki be-
imanon ke wista ntohin Imin: par
nubtiwat be-imduorj ke liye nahin,
baiki imdudaron ke liyo hai.
:"■'■ i' .■■ aur siri kalfriya ek makan
men jam"» ho, aur sab ke snb tarah
tarah l;i /ubdnen bolen, aur anparhe
yd be-imdn log andar dwen, to kyd we
na kahenga, ki yo diwine liaiu *
'-' i I'ar agar sah nubiiwat karen, aur
koi be.-im,in, yd anparhoij men ho koi
andar d jdwe, to har ek ki bdt se qn.il
ho jaega, har ek se parakhd jacga :
ilo Aur yrin us ke dil ke bhed sah
Bibir hange; tftb «uh munh ke bhal
girke Kbudd ko sijda karegd, aur
kahegd, ki Khudd beshakk iinnhdre
hich hai.
26 Pas, ai bhdio, kyd hai? ki jab
tum ikattho hoto lio, to tum men har
ok ke s:itli /iil.rir, yi koi tVlim, ya
begdni Kubdn, yd ilhdm, yd tarjuma
hai. Ohahiye ki sah kuchh dindari
men t.anniqi ke liyv tur#ft
'J? Agar koi kiai zuhdn men boie,
to do do, aur nibayat ho, to tiri tin, ek
ek karke boierj; aur ek Bhakhs taf-
imiia kara,
28 Par agar koi tarjuma kaniewdld
Ih-intizami M ni-zchi. I Q.UIUNTi'OX, XV.
Qiyam'it ki bdba'
ho, to wuh kalisiye men chupkA 3 Kyiinki main ne auwal bAtoi
rahc, aur apne aur Khiuli
29 Nabion men se do ya tiii bolcn,
aur baqi tajwiz karcn.
30 Par agar koi bit dt'isre par jo
Miiini hai kliul jawc, to pohla cliupkA
rahe.
31 Kyiinki tum eab ko sal) ek ok
karke nubtlwat kar sakte ho, ta kl sab
sikhen, aur Bali tasalli pawen.
32 Aur nabion ki ruhen nabion ke
tahi' hain,
33 Kyiinki KhudA be-intizAmi kA
bdnl nahin, [iar sal Amati ka kai, jalai
muqaddas logon ki sari kalisiyaorj
ineij bal
84 Tiunhari 'auratcii kalisiye men
chupki rahcij, ki luiTieii bulne ka
bukm nahin hai ; baiki chahiye ki far-
nninUirdar nihi-n, jia tarah shari'at
men bhi tikhA hai.
35 Aur agar we kuchh sikhA chd-
Uen. to ghar men apne khasam se
l'ikhlum ; kyiinki aharm ki bat hai
ki 'auraten kalisiye men bolen.
36 Kya? KhudA ka kalAm tumliin
su niklaV vAskf tumkin tak pahuncha
hai?
37 Agar koi apne ta,in nabi yA rii-
Ldni jAne, to chdhiye ki wuh iqrdi
kara, ki yih Mten, jo main tumben
li.khi.ii luin, KhudAwand ke aiikain
hain.
38 Aur agar koi na jdne, to na jdne.
3f> Oaraz, ai bhiiio, nubtiwat karne
ki arzii rukho, lekin tarah tarah ki
zubdnen bolne se man'a na karo,
■JO SAH hateij durusri aur tartib ke
sdth lio WHO.
XV BA'B.
A B, ai bhAio, main tumhen ub!
Injil ki bat jatatA bnn, "j i b ki
Khusbkhaliari main ne tumhen di, aur
tum ne pAi, aur ub par qAim ho ;
2 U si ke sabab tum bach bhi jAte
ho, agar wuh khusbk babari, jo main
ne tumhen di, yAd raklio; nahin to
HtmhArA imAn lAnd be-fAida hai.
men wubi tum ko sompi, jo main r
bhi jiai, ki jaisa ki kitalion men likha
hai, Masih hamdre gunAhon ke wAste
niiiA;
4 AnrgArAgayA,aurtiaredin kit.ib-
on ke uiuwaf]q ji ut.hA :
5 Aur KefAa ko, aur ub ke ba\i
Uiniluai ko, dikhAi diyA:
(i B»\I ufl ku panch sau blidion so
ztyAda tlie, jinhen wuh ek-b:ira dikhAi
diyA; akear un men so nbtak maujud
hain, ]>ar kai ek so gaye.
7 Phir Ya'ciub ko dikhAi diyA:
phir sAre rasiilon ko.
8 Aur sah ke pichhe mujh ko bhi,
jo ndhura diuon kd paidA h-ftn, dikhtt
diyA.
y Ki mairt rasrilon men Bab se
clihutA hiln, aur is lAiq nahm ki rasdl
kahlaun, ih wAate ki main ne Khudii
kl kalisiye ku satAyA.
10 Par main jo kuchh hnn, KhndA
ko fazl se lilin ; aur us kA fax!, jo mujh
par huA, so be-fAida na huA ; par main
ne mi sah se ziyada mihnat ki; na
main ne, baiki KlmdA ke fazl ne, jo
BUS satli thA.
11 Pas kya main, kyA «ra, aill
manAdi kartc hain, aur tum waisA hi
imAn lAo ho.
12 Ab agar manadi ki jiti hai, ki
Masih murcioiL inen se ji lil.lia, to tum
men so kai ek kyun. kahte hain, ki
murdon ki qiyAmat na hogi ?
13 Jab murdon ki qiydmat nahin,
to Masih bhi nahin ji uthA.
14 Aur agar Masih naliiii ji utha,
to hantari manAdi 'abas hai, aur tuni-
hArA imdn bhi 'abas.
IB Baiki ham KbudA ke jhutln?
gawAh lihi thahre ; kyiinki ham ne
KhudA ki babat gawAhidi, ki us ne
Masih ko phir jilAyA hai : jia ko na
ne nahin uthAvd, agar murdo nahin
ithte.
16 Kyrinkiagar inurde nahin nthte,
to liulb hhi nahin ji uthA :
Qiydmnl H babat
17 Aur acar Masih nahirj utliii, to
t mutiara iman be-faida hui; tum ab
lak aprie gunahtin men girit'tir ho.
18 Phir wo bhi .jo Masih merj lioke
bo gayo hain, so nest hiic
10 Agar hain sirf isi zindagi "n"'
Masih se Binmed rakhto hain, tu hain
sini ddiniorj se kambakht hairj.
20 Par ab tfuffi tomurdofl, rum se
ji utha lini, aur uu nicn jo s<> gaye hain.
pahk phal hiii.
21 Ki jab ddml ke sabah se maut
hai, to idrni bi ke sabnb *>u murduii
ki alyamat bbi bai.
22 Kydrjki jaisi A'darn men shamil
hoke saf marto liain, waiml hi Masih
men shamil hnkc sab jilac jdt'Sg©.
L~3 Lckin bu ek apm apni nanbat
men : pabli phal Masih ; phir we jo
Masih ke bata, us ke iuc par.
24 liuM us ke akhirat hai, tali wuh
badahdlmt Khurtd'ke, jo Bip hal, so-
pani karegd, aur siri hukiimat aur
sirc ikhtiyar o quilrat ko ItMt kar
dega.
25 Kyunki jab tak ki wuh earo
ftodmaoog ko apm! panwim talo na
■ , u -i\r hai ki saltmuu kare.
26 Maut bhi, jo akhiri duslimaii
hai, nest hogi.
27 Ki us rto aabkachh us ke pdnw-
on talo kar diya hai. Magar jab k
wuh tahta hai, ki sab kuebh us ki
tihi* merj kar diya, to zdhir hai ki
wulii alag rahd, jis ne sab kachh ua
ke tibi' mejL kar diya,
28 Aur jab sab ktichh us ko tibi'
men awcgi, tab Beta ap hi uskitabi1
dar ho jawegA, jis no sah obizM (U ke
bftbl1 tam kai din, td ki Khudi sab
ihhj sab kuchh howe.
■J[\ Nuhin to we jo ki uinrdon ke
fau baptism» pate hain, so kya k&r-
, enge? agar murdo mutlaii na uthen,
:;■ t; murdon ke u par baptisuic
I QUUINTI/ON, XV. ki kyunkar hogi.
m Mujhc twnhAre ia t'akhr ki, jo
hiitiiAre Khudiwarui Masih Yi=>i.i" n
hai, qasarn, ki main bar KH mana
htin.
32 Agar maia iilmi ki taruh Afasus
darindoii ke sdth lara, to rnujhu
kya laidii, agar mavdfl na utheti? pas
ia, kbftweg, [i'wv-n, ki kal ke ain
baten. achehhi 'adatan ko bigdrii hain.
;il Tam ristJ kuna ke Bj» Jigo,
aur gundh na kani; ki kiLuoij men
Khudi ki pahchan nahiii hai: main
Unnht'ii tbara diiano ko yih kahla
hdn.
35 Sliiyad koi kahe, ki Murde kis
tarah uthte haiij ! aur kis jisiii kfl mb
dte liain?
U nddan, jo chiz til botd hai,
agar wuh na nian;, to kabhi jildi na
. . Aur yih jo tu botd hai, wuh jism
nahin hai jo howt-gd, baiki n iri ek
ddna bai, khwah guhi'm, khwab kuclili
aur ki :
38 Par Khuda us ko jaiiri
^liiiha ak |h)m iK'ia imi, aur har ek Mj
ku us kd khass jism.
39 Sab'g<wh!," ek tarah ke gosht na-
hin : baiki idraioij ka goslu i
obirpiyog kd gosht aur hai, rnachh-
lioii ka gosht aur hai, parindon kd
KOMlit aur.
40 Aur dsmdui jism bbi hain, aur
khaki bhi hain : par asruaiiioi» kd jalai
aur hai, khikiorj kd aur,
41 A'ftib ka"jaldl aur hai,aur mih-
idb ki jaldl aur, aur (diaron, ki jaiai
aur hai: ki sitara sitdre se Jalai ki
bani^liat Quq raklita hai.
■12 Murdon ki qiyimat bhi aisi bi
hai. Wuh tani men boyi jdti, kur
bui tnO)J uthtd hai :
14 Re-hurmatf hil-ii boyi jiti hai,
aur jalai men uthtd hai ; kamzotf DMQ
1 30 Aur phir hain kyun bar ghari Iboya jiitii hai^zoriwari men uthta hai;
khatre men pare hain? " \ M \aCd-wdla jiam boyi jati hai,
229
P*I>u 1 QURINT1'0N, XVI.
aur nihani jism u{bta hai. Kk nafs-
wali jiam hai, aur ek nibaui jism.
45 Chundnchi likhi hal, ki Pahli
ftdmi, ya'ne A'dam, jiti jan hud; aur
piohhhi A'diun j il iln u wali nih hud,
4(> Lekin nihani pahle jiathi, baiki
nafh-wali ; ba'd ub ke nihinl.
47 Pahld admi /.amin mi khaki hai :
uusra Admi Khudawand asniaii se hai.
48 Jaisti khaki, waise we bhi jokhd-
ki Lain : aur jaisi asmara, waise we
bhi jo awiiaiii '.r.uit-
49 Aur jis tarah hnni ne khaki ki
«urat pai hai, bara dsmdnf ki surat bbf
pj'iWIillJfe.
50 Ai bbaio, ma'm ah yih knhta lilin,
ki jisni aur khrin Khtidd ki bddslidhar
ku waris iialiin ho sakti', ai.ir na laini
baqi ka wdris lio sakta bai.
51 IJuklii), wa'vj tiimbcjiek bbed ki
bat kahta hiin ; ki bani sah soenge na-
bin, par ham sab badai jacnge
5« lik dani men, ek palrnen,pichh-
iii narsiuga plninkla waqt : ki narningd
to phiinki jaegi, aur murde uthke
gairi'ani kongc, aur liam bbi bada)
jaengr.
53 Kyiinki zarur hai ki yih tani
baiia ko pahiue, aur yih marnewdla
hamosha ki shjdagi ko pihitie.
54 Aur jab yih fdni gair-fani ko,
aur yih mamcwala hameslia ki ziu-
dagl ku, pahin chukoga, (ah wub bat,
.1' j Ilklii hai, puri hogi, ki Fath ne
maut ko nigal liya.
55 Ai maut, tera dmik kabin ? Ai
qahr, teri fath. kahan ?
56 Maut ki dauk gutiah hai: aur
gunali ki h» shari'at hai.
57 Par «hilir Khuda ki,jisacha-
irieii hamdre Khudawand Yisii* Masih
ke wasilo fath bakhsbi.
58 Pas, ai mere 'aziz bhAto, tam
sabit-iuulam aur paeddr rabo, aur
Khudiwand ke kain men haraesha
ura<mi kartc raho, yih jaukar ki turn-
hari mibnat Khudawand nun be-filda
(Lajbig hal
230
XVI BA'B.
A B Ub cbande ki babat jo muqaddai
logon ke wdste bai, jaisd main
ut Galanya ki kalisiyaon. ko bukm
kiya, waiaa tum bhi kara.
2 Ki har halte ko palile din tum
men se har kol apni amdani ku mu-
wi'ifiq, jahili tak fdida uthayd, kuckh
jam'a karkts apne pas rakho, td ki jab
main afin, to chandd karnd na pare.
3 Aur main ftkc unhen, jin ko timi
mu'atabar thahrauge, tumhare fai?, kd
phal khatt-on ke sath Yartisalam men
lejaiic ko bhcjungd.
4 Aur agar taerd hi jduA bhi mu-
ndsib hogd, to we meru sitli jdenge.
5 Aur jab main Waqaduniya men
hoko nikluugd, ki al hatta WiV]adiiiiiya
men sair karke jaiitigd, tab tuiuhdre
pas diingft.
0 Shdyad mairj tutnh&re pas tbali-
iiin, baiki jdrd bhi kdtiin, tdki' tum
tnujhe dge jahdn murd jand lio rawdna
kar do.
7 Ki main nahin chahtd ki ab rdb
hi inuii tumhari inuliiqit karon ; por
uminodwar hiin ki agar KiuuLlwarid
ijdzat de, to kuchb din tujnhdre pif
rabiin.
8 Aur main Pantekust ke din tak
Aiftsus men rabiinga.
9 Ki ek bara darwaza, jis so ck hare
kdiii mea dak'bl pala, im>re liyn kbula
hai, aur mukhalif halmt se haim
10 Tar agar Timtaus dwo, U> ub ki
khabar lo, ta ki wub Uimlnire pas be-
kliauf rabc; ki wub mari tarah Khu-
dawand ki kam karta bai.
11 Pas koi us ko baqir na jaue ;
haiki tutn ua ko ealdmafc idiiar ko ra-
kijiyo, ki mere pds paliniicbc :
kyiinki main rdh dekhtd ban ki wnh
bhiion siiuiut dwo.
12 Kahd Apulliis bhdi, bo maig m
us so hahut iltimas kiyd, ki wub tum-
haro ]>As bhiion ke sdth jae ; liar us ki
irdda ub ke mutlaq na tlui, ki jawe.
par jab fursat pdwegi, to jiwegi.
II QURINTTOX, I.
ki madnd fam n.
13 Jagte raho, iman men rjaim ho,
marddnagi k:iro, zorAwar ho.
14 Tamhari aib Iwitcn muhabhat ke
sath hem,
15 Ab, ai hbaio, main tum so 'ara
kart.i liur,, (ki tum Stalanas ke k i tan-
dan ko jinto ho ki wuh Akhaia ka
(«lili! phaJ hai, aur wo muq;nlil;t.s Jngurj
D khidmat, karne ko rimstn'idd ralic
16 So tum nisie logon ke aur liar ek
ko jo kim aur mihnat men hamari?
fiharik hun, t'amnahbardar raho.
17 Aur main Stafauas, aur l'iirhi-
natuN, aur AkhaJkus ko aue se khitah
hiin ; kyunki unliori ne tum H jo kain
hui, eo bhar liiyA.
IB K i imhon ne meri aur turohiiril
rtih ko taza kiya: h liye tum aigon ko
taiao.
10 Aur Asia ki kalisiyaen tiunlien
salam kahii haig,- aur Arjula nur
FrisrpiHa kalhuye namet, jo un ke
ghar tnon hai, ttiinlion Khudawand ke
w&mU' baliut bahut nalain kalite haiu.
20 Sare bhai lumlieu walam kahte
hak : tum pak bosa lekc Apa» nwg
sulam karo.
21 Salam fflujh Prihia ki apno hith
n.
22 Agar koi Khudawand YisiV
Masih so muhaubat nahiu rakhta,
wuh haram kiyrt, jawe: Khudawand
iiA hai.
23 Khudawand Yisii' Masih ka i'aal
hini par howe.
24 Meri muhahbat tum Bab ke sath
Masih Yist'i' men ho. A'min,
1 Yili |..Ui)a kh:ui. Q,i'niiii.iTj U
liklii liiia Filippi su Htafanas nur
l-Yirdinatus aur Akhiikus aur
Timt&uEi ke hiih liheja gaya.
PTJ'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA'
KHATT (JURINTION KO.
T BA'B.
PU'LUS ki, jo Khuda ki marzi se
Had' UmH) ka rasul hai, aur
bhai TimtauB ki janib se, Khuda ki
kalisiye ko jo Qurintus men hai, mi
lab niuipida» logon sainet, jo tatnam
Akhaia men ha i n :
2 Faal aur Kalimati bamarc B&p
Khuila aur Khudawand Yisii' Masih
ki tarnr'so tnmharo liyc liowi'n.
3 Mubarak hai wuh Khuda, jo ha-
mare Khudawand Yisii' Manih ka IUp,
aur rahmaton ki Baui, aur Hari tasalli
k» Khuda hai ;
' 231
i Wulii krairi hav ek musibat
men ham ko tasalli dota hai, ta lu ham
us hi tasalli ko tabab, jo harem Khu-
da bu milti hai, un ko bhi jo kini tarah
ki mustbttt men Jiain tasalli 'h flakerj,
5 K^'iinki jis tirah Mahild dul;h
ham par harhte jalc hain, uni tarah
hamari tasaili bhi Masih ke aabah h
barhtl hai.
6 Aur ham agar musiliat utluitc
hain, to tuinhdri tasalli aur najat ke
wiste hai, jo tumliare uohiii dufchon
ki, jbohafl ham bhi sahte bjiig, bar-
d a.sh t karne se a^ju- kitrti hai; aur
Pulus hiMa,}ad,iuiljamen II (iURINTIOK, It
agar ham tasalli patc hain, to tumhdri
tasalli aur najdt ke wdnto hai.
7 Aur hamdri ummed tumhdri bd-
bat mazbdt had ; k i hatu jante hain
ki jis taruh tam dukhon rueji sharik
ho, us M tarah tas.il li men bhi hoge.
8 Kyiinki, ai bludo, ham nahin
chihtu ki tum baindri us musibat ku,
jo Aaia men ham par pari, ndwduii'
raho, ki ham tduat yy bahar bahut hi
dab gaya, yahdn tak ki ham ne ziu-
dagi se bhi hath dhoyd:
!f Baiki apne lipar ijatl ka hukm
ya.jin kar chuke the, ta ki ham na
atma, baiki Khudd ka, jo murdon ku
jildtd hai, bharobd rakheii :
10 Us r n: ham ko aiwi ban haldkat
se chburdya, aur cbhurdtd bhi hai, aur
ham ko us m yih umniud hai, ki wut
dge ko bht ciihurawe^a j
11 Aur tum bhi milku du'a se ha-
mare madadgar Ih», ta ki us ni'ainat ke
sabab, jo bahut se logon ki du'd se ham
ko inili, bahut se log shukr bhi hamari
tata/ M karen.
12 Ryrjnki Iminard fakhr yiii hai,
ki hamdrd dJl gawdhi deta hai, ki ham
na Khudd ki safdi aur aachdi ke sdth_
jismdni hikmat se nahin, baiki Kliudd
ke fazl se, (kuna mefj guarin ki, khas»
kar tumbdre darmiydn.
13 Kyiinki ham aur batas turuhen.
nahin likhte, magar we hi jinlien tuui
parhta aur mdnto hoj aur mujhe
ummed hai, ki tum dkhir tak mante
rahoge ;
14 Chunduchi tum ne ham ko bhi
Bk twt parnidn liydhai.ki ham tum-
li:irt- t.ikhr hain, jaiae Khuddwaud
\ 'imi' ke din tum bhi hamare.
15 Aur main ne isi hharose par
pilih? tiuuharo pis dne ka Irdda kiyd,
ta ki tum diisri ui'amdt pdo.
lfi Aur phir tum pas hokar Maqa-
ddniya ko jdiin, aur MaqadiiEiyft se
phir tumhdre pds diirj, aur k i tum
mujho dgu Yahtidiya ko jv.dmncb.4 do.
17 Pas main no jo yih irdda kiyfi,
232
ja/at M tabah,
to kyd halkdpan se kiyd? yd jin chiz-
i>ri ka main irdda kartd rum, so kyd
jismdni taur par w u h irdda kartd huu.
ki hdii luiii, aur nahin oabin bhi meri
bdt men ho?
18 Par Khudd e barhaqq jdnta hai,
ki hamari jo bdt tum m thi, bo kau
aur nalihi na thahri.
III KfKhu'daka I3etd Yisii' Masih
jis ki luauadt ham ne, ya'ne, main ne
aur SilwdnuM aurTimtdus ne, tumhdre
bich ki, so ltan aur nahin tia tbahrd,
baiki uh men hiin thahra.
20 Kyiinki Khudd ke jitoe wa'de
hain, sab us mej har, aur us meu
A'min hain, td ki hamiro wasilo se
iylmdd ka jaldl zdhir bo.
21 Aur jo ham ko tumhdre satli
Masih meg qdim kartd hai, aur jis m
ham ko mamsith kiya, so Kbudii. hai ;
U2 Aur us neham jiarmulir bhi ki,
aur Uiih kd bai'dna hamdro dilon nn.ii
diyd.
23 Garaz, main Khudd ko apno dil
pai gawdh iatd hiin, ki main ne tum
par ralim liiyd, ki ab tak Quriimis
men na'tiin aya.
24 Lekin ham tuinhdro imdu par
khi'.d;l\\:nn]i nahin karte, baiki tnm-
hdri khushi ke madadgal hain ; kyun-
ki tum iman se (idini rahte lio,
II BA'B.
MAIN* ne apne dil mon yih thdnd,
ki main tumlLaropds phirgam-
gin hoke oa dtirj.
2 Kyunki agar main tutnhen gam-
gin karun, to kaun, siwd us ko jiso
main ne gamgin kiyd, inujhe khuwh
kariaktahal?
Aur main ne tum ko ythi likhd
hai, ta na howe ki main dkar urt se,
jin se chdhiye ki ma'm kliush hoi'in,
gamglB buiin; ki tum sabbon ki taraf
se inujhe yatjin hai, ki jo meri khushi
hai, so wuhi kbushi tum aafehon kf
ii.
4 Kytinki main ne bari musibat am
dilgiri .se bahut se ineu bahd babdkar
Eitli ki l-hi,Ual II QOBINT
ikkA; aur ia waste nahin ki
I i;.. gamgin bn, par is waste ki tum
i: n " ■.; ]i .; .i l' H- I-., !■■ I V I : ■
hai, jiilio.
■"i Aur agar kiai no gamgin kiya, to
ujn ku nahin gamgin kiya,
ek teur par (ki mata tuf iur
j -i . bojfa diilne naluri chalitA lilin,)
tuin «ib ko kiyA.
ii Pas, yih ilzam jo bahuterou se
uth&yA, uh ku waste bas hai,
7 So biktar hai ki tuin bar khilaf u»
ke ua ko mu'af karo, aur tasalli do, la
fciijiiii ai&A ua ko ki bahut gam u«w
kkA jao.
8 ia liye main tum »c 'arz kartA
luiti, ki tmu uske sAth apni imihabbat
sAbit karo.
t) Ki main ne i» waste blii Hkha
tlia, ki tumben janelu'm, ki tum sari
balon mcri larmAnbardar lio, ya naluri.
10 Jkse MU kuobh niu'al' karte h»,
uae main bbi mu'af karta. biin i kyon-
ki m:iin ne jiae kucbh mu'af kiya, tum-
hari k hilir se Musik kA qaim-muqAm
hokar mu'iif kiya ;
11 Ta na bowa ki ShaitAn bam par
ziyAdati kare; kyiinki ham us ki tad-
biron se na-waiiif nahin hain.
12 Aur jab main Masih ki Injil
eunAne ko Troasmcn Aya.aur Khiuhi-
wand se mujk par ok darwdza kkul
13 Tab inere dil ko arAm na rahA,
ki main im apne bhdi Titus ko na
paya ; aur un so rttk&flrt bakar wahij
se Maqaduuiya mon AyA.
U Ab shukr KhrnU kA, jo Masih
men ham kohamesha I'atkyab ki tarah
gusht karwaiA hai, aur u si ki pahehan
ki khushbu kata se hai ok jagab zAhir
karwata hai.
15 Kyiinki ham Khuda ke Age uli
ke liye jo bacb.le jate buin, aur OH ke
liyo jo balak kute kain, Masih ki
khushbu i hain:
1G Ba'zon ko marno ke liya maut
ki bii, aur ba'zon ko jine ko liye ziu-
233
I'OX, III. Solid jalai ke liith Uotl.
dagi ki bii kain. Aur kaun in bdtori
ke laiq bal ?
17 Ki ham bahutog ki maimid
Khuda ko kalam mm milauni nahin
karte ; baiki wichAi se, aur KhudA ki
taraf se, ham Khuda ko huz&r Masih
men hoke bolu: hain.
ITI BA/B.
K YA' bam phir apni neknami ja-
tAna shuru.' karte hain ? yAbam
auron ki tarab miibuij bain.ki nekuA-
ml ke khatt tumhAro pAs lAwen, ya
tum se neknAmi ke khatt kyAwen ?
a ITafiiara kkatt jo bamiro dilon
par liklui hai, tum hu, aur uso aare
Admi jaiUo, aai parliti-. hain :
3 Ki tum wakili Masih ko khatt ho,
jis ke taiyAr karno men ham kbidmat-
karnewAle hiic, aur wuh siyAki se
Kabin, baiki zinda Khmla ki Kuli se,
nur patthar ki takhtion pai nahin,
baiki iiil ki takbtion parjogosln ki
hain, likbii gaya hai
■1 Aur ham aisA bbarosd Masih ki
ma'rifat Klmdii pir rakkte hain :
5 lu liye nalnn ki ham lAiq bain,
ki Ap s» kutkk khiyal bhi kat aakag ;
baiki haruan liyaintt. Fyliuda te hal;
G Jis no ham ko yih liyaqat bbi di
hai, ki ham uaye 'abd ke khfidim
bowerj ; harf ko nahin, baiki liiili ko ;
kyunki harf mar dAltd, par E uh jilati
hai.
7 Aur agar maut ki wuh khidmat
jo harli aur pattbaron par kbodi gayi
tlii, aitw jalai ke Batb kiii, ki bani
Israel HiisA ko ckihie par, basabab il-i
jalAl ke jo uh ke cliilin:- [«ir i lui, aur
neat honewdli LhA, huklitibi Muai oa
kar saUen :
H To Kdk ki khidmat kitne ziyada
jalAl ko sAth na hogi?
9 Ki jab ibiAm-dilAnewAii khidmat
jalai hai, to nistbAzi ki klddmat ka
jalAl kituA ziyAda na hogA?
10 lialki wuh jojalali zaliir In'ui, is
bare jalalwiie ki uisbat se, jalai bi ua
takhta tka.
Puh<r. M ahari'ativalon ke> U QUItINTI'ON, IV. Injilwdlan se mifrind,
11 Kyilriki agar not honewdli chisi KhudA ki surat hiii,) jaldlwdli Injil ki
jalai ke fitth thl, to wuh jo cjdim roshni un par chauikc.
rahrewali hai, kitne hi ziydda jahil kc; 5 Ki ham iipni nahfn, baiki Masih
aath n a ho,
lYisu'
12 P;is hara aiai ummed rakhko hain;
bari bc-parwdi se bolto hain:
LS Aur ham Musa ki (arah 'amal
nahin karte, jin ne apne chihre par
parda dala, ta ki bani Israel us uth-
jancwAii ki gAyat tak bakMbi iir
(k'kheit ;
14 Lokin un ke falim tarik ho
B»yej kytjnki aj tak purane'ahdnAmc
ke paritne mon wiihi parda rahta hai,
aur uth nahin jdtd; ki wuh parda
Masih so jdta rahtA hai.
15 tu aj tak jab MiisA kt kitab
l'iirhi jiili bn, to vu parda un ke dil
par i>ara rahta hai.
1C Lckin jab Kbudawand ki taraf
phiregd, tab wuh parda bar larai' we
uth jaega.
17 AurKhudiwand wuhi Iiiih hai;
aurjahAn kahin Khuddwand ki lt u 1 1
hai, wahin dadua^ kai-
18 Par bara sab beparda kiye hiie
ebibn h Klmdiwaud ke jalai ko goyd
auia liifij dek h diklik», jaldl BO jalai
tak, Khuddwand ki Kiib ke wasile, us
hi surat, par bante jsi.tr h.iin.
IV BA'P..
PAS jls hal ki ham no jih khidmat
pAi, jaitta ki ham par rahm htid,
to ham «di» nahin hote ;
S Baiki ham ne sharm ke potfafda
kAmon m katiAra kiyd, aur dag&bAzi
ki c-liAl tiabirj cha.lte, aur na KhudA ki
bAt men milauni kart« hai'n, baiki
kalam i luuyi ke Kabir karne ne bar ek
Admi ke dil mon KhudA ko huziir apne
Hyfl jaga h karte liuin.
3 Aur luttu&ri Injil agar poshida
howe, to u» )ji par jiwhida hai jo
halAk hote haiii :
4 Ki is jahili ke khuda" ne un ki
'oqlog ko jo bc-imAn ha iri tArik kar
diy:i hai, li ra howe ki Mufli ki, Qo
Khuddwand ki maiiadi
aur apne ta'in Yisii' ko liy
liiuihnrc k b adi m zdhir karte.
6 Kydnki KhudA, jis ke hukm ke
mutAbiij l.Ariki se nwhni chamki, us
nc hamAre dilon ko rosbau kiyA, tAki
Khuda ke jahil ki pahcliAn kA nur
Yisii' Masih ke chihre ee hain nico
jalwagar ho.
7 Par liam yih khazAna mitti ke
bAsanon meri rakhte hain, tAki'zAhir
howe ki nudrat ki be-uihayat. buzrusi
hamAri taraf sc nahin, baiki KhudA ld
taraf ae hai.
S Aur ham to hnr taraf sc musibat
men hain, lekiii shikanje men nahiij;
bajeao hiin, par na-uinmed nahin;
9 SatAe jAtc Jmiri, par akole chhore
iiabin gaye ; girAe jite hain, par halak
uaiifTi luie;
10 Ki ham KhudAwand YW
Maeih ki maut ko apue badan men
hnmnah.1 liye phirte haiij, t-Aki Yisii*
ki zindagi bhi hamire jimn men zahir
howe.
11 Ki ham Jo zinda hain, Yisii' ki
kbAtir hamesba maut ke hawAla Uyfl
jAte hai?, tAki YiBii' ki aiudagi bhi
hamire Uni jism men zAhir howe.
12 Pan maut kA ham men, aur
aiuda«i kA tnm mt-ii, awar bntA hai.
13 Par ia wabah bu ki fmdii ki wuhi
nih ham men hai, jaiwd ]jk!id hai, ki
Main iman IAyd,aur is liye boU ; ham
bhi intAn ide, aur isi waste bolta bhi
hain;
14 Ki bara jdnte hain ki wuhi jie
ne KhudAwand Yisu' ko jildyA, «o
ham ko bhi Yisii' ke sAth jilAwegi,
aur tumhArc sAth apne huaar men
hizir kareffi.
15 Kyunki siri chizen tumhdre
waste ha!n, tjiki wuh fail yt u ih ayat
liiiii, KluulA ke jaldl ke liye habuton
ke wainle se shukrguziri barhAwo.
Pithis abculijul&l
II QURINTI'OX, V,
k! iniuiird riikhmi.
16 Is liyti ham udAs naLiij hote
Lain ; baiki harch&nd ki hamAri zahiri
insdniyat nest holi hai, lukin bati n i
v/. ba ros ti:i,vi,ni.ii.i jati hai.
17 Ki Lamin pai bhar ki baiki
musibat kyA hi be-nihdyat aur abadi
hhdrl jalai hamdre liye paidd karti
rahti hai ;
18 Ki ham na un chizorj par jo
dckhne men Ati hairi, baiki uu chlzon
pnr jo dckhne merj nahin Ati(j, nazar
kartehaiij; kyiinki jo chuuii dekhne
mcn »ti hain, chand roz ki ham, aur
w« jodekaot men nahin Atie, haniesha
ki Lain.
V BA'B.
KYl"XKI hara iantc bait» ki jab
hamara jib khaima si kkaki
gitar ujar jAwo, to ham ek 'i mirat
KhudA si; pdwenge ; wuh ek ghar
hai, jo hdtbon bo uahirj bani, baiki
abadi aur Auman par hai?
2 Ki ham U men Aliun khinchte,
aur bari Arzii rakbte hain, ki apne
AamAiil ghar sc niulabl)as huwen :
3 Is lihaz so ki ham hauii[atan
inulabbas honge, aur na ki nange pae
jAcogo.
4 Kyiiiiki ham to jab tak is khaime
mcn hain, bojh bo dabkar Aben khinch-
te hai)) : Jc-kin nahin chdhte ki i«
poabiah ko utdren, baiki yih, ki is ke
i'ipar use pahin Ion, tAki zindagi maut
ko nigul jAwe.
fi Aur jis uc hatu ko usi ko liye
taiyAr kiyA, tw KhudA hai, aur us hi
ue hamen Kiih kA bai'Aua bhi diyA.
fi Ih liye hamAri haniesha khutir-
jam'ai hai, ki jAnto hain ki jab tak
ham badan ke ghar men hain, bani
apne ghar se, jo Khudawaiid ko yabAn
hai, d lir hain.
7 (Ki ham iman so, aur na ki dekh
dekilku cbaltc hain:)
H Si> haraAvi kliAtir-jam'ai hai; aur
ham besktar chdhte hain, ki badan
men apne ghar se rawana Iiowctj, aur
235
Khudiwand kn yabAn. apne ghar merj
pahunehon.
9 Is lihdz so hain koshish kartc
Lain, ki kyd udzir howen, yd gair-hazir
hoiveri, us ko pasaud dwon.
10 Kyunki ham sab ko zarur hai
ki Masih kl masuad i 'addlat ke agc
hAzir howeBi tAki bar ck jo kuchh us
ne badan men hoke kiya, kyA bhala,
kya burA, inuwdfiq us ke pawe.
11 Is waste hain KhudAwand ko
khauf ko saiuajhkar admion ki minnat
kartc hain ; aur KhudA par hamdrA
LA1 zdhir hai ; aur ummed hai ki
tumhAre dilon par bhi zAhir ho.
l'i Ki ham phir apni nokudmf tum
par nahfn jatate hain, par tausben
MOin sabab fnklir karne ki jagah
dete hain, tdki tum un ko, jo zduir
par fakhr kartu Lain aur bAtin pjir
nahin, jawab de sako.
13 Kyunki agar ham he-khud haiij,
to yih KhudA ke wiste hai'; aur agar
honhydr hain, to yih tunibdre waste
hai.
14 Ki Masih ki mnhabbat Lain ko
kLim-hti hai; kyi'inkiham yih samjbe,
ki jab ek sah ke wdaLc mua, to «ab
nmnla t.liahre.
15 Aur wuh sab ke wdste mdd, ki
jo jite hftio, so dge ko apne liye na
jiweg, baiki us ke liye jo un ke wAsta
muA, aur phir ji ntha.
It) Pas ab se ham kisi ko jism ki
rAh bc nahin pahchdute hain; uh
agarchi ham ne Masih ko bhi jism ki
nih sc ]MvhohAnA hai, par ab uso phir
liam iijlIh'ii piihchAnte.
17 Is liye agar kol Masih men hai,
to wuh nayd makhliiq hai : p"urdni
chizcn guzar gayin ; dekho, siri ehbJOfl
nayi liuiti.
18 Aur yih sdri obizen KhudA ki
taraf te hain, jib ne Yisii' Masih ke
wasile ham ko Ap se milAyd, aur
milAp ki khidmat hamon di;
IB Ta'ne, KhudA ne Masih men
Lukt dunyi ko apnc silh yun mila
P&m kt» tarah Masih II QURTK"TI'
iiya, ki us Dfl uh ki hqt&Ofl ko un par
hisdb na kiyd: aur mel k;i kaldm
hameii sumpCL
20 Ia liye ham Masih keelchi hain,
goyd ki Khudd hamare wasile nilnnat
kartd hai : n nan) Masih, ke budli?
iltimaa karto kain, ki tum Khudd se
mol karo.
21 Kyiiijki ub ne us ko jo gunah
wduii' na tha, hamare. badlo gunah
tliahraysi, taki ham us iticii ahamil
)']i)kc Ilahi rastbazi thahren.
VI BA' I!.
PAS ham bah ani ham-khidrnat
hoko tuni se miunat bhi karte
hain, ki Khudd k& i'azl 'abas niat pdto
jao.
2 (Kyilnki wah kahtd hai, ki Main
ne uahriliyat ke waqt nicn teri suni,
aur uujat ke dia teri madad ki : dekbo,
ab qabiiliyat ki waqt hai; dekho, ah
najat ka din hai.)
3 Ham kisi ko thokar khiLiie ke
ba'i.-i nahin hote, td" ki yih khidmat
baduaui na ho :
i Par ip ko bar ek bat men Khudd
ke khuuim ki tarah zahir karto liain,
lari' bardaslit nc, musibaton se, ihti-
yajog se, tangion *«.
o Kore khane ho, qaid se, hangdmoii
se, niihnatoij so, ho-darion m, fanoTi m,
G Pakiaagi sv, rmi'rifai se, saur se,
mihrbAni se, l'ak Ku h M, be-riva nui-
habbat se,
7 Kalam i haqt| te, Khudd ki qudrat
W, ristbizi ke hathyarog se, jo dahine
Mag h;LJu,
8 'Izzat aur be-'istaati su, badnanii
aur neknanii se : dagabaz ki niunind
htiiti, tar Miilii-hv iiairj ;
ii uumsam ki manind hain, par
mftthhul liain ; marnewalog ki ma-
ulud hain, par d«kho, baru jite hain ;
lambih panew&lon ki iniiiind hain.
[iar balak nahiu ;
10 Gamgin ki manind kain, par
hamesha khush hain ; kangal ki ma-
uind hain, par bahu ton ko daulatmand
236
'OX, VT, VII. ki khidmat karta t!,a.
karte hain ; nd-dar ki manind hain,
par sab kuchb rakhte hain.
11 Ai Qurint(oJ hamari zuMn tum-
hari taraf kbuii, hamdra dil kushada
bo gaya,
12 Tum bamdre sabab se tang
nahfn, par apne hi dilon se tang h».
13 Pan, is ke badle men, (main tum
sc yt'm kahtd huri, jaiaa" t'arzandon bc,)
tum bhi kushiida-dil hoo.
14 Aur tum be-imdnon ke latb. na-
Idiij Me men linu. juti; jan; ki rasi: aur
Tia-rdsti men kaiui wa sajhabuiV aur
roshnl ko lariki se kaun sa tui'i hal '!
1"> Aur Masih ko Bali'al ke aath
kaun si muwafm]at hai? ya imandav
ka be-iman ke aath kya hissa hal?
16 Aur Khudd ki baikal ko bu ton
se kaun ai muwafartat hai? ki tnm (b
zinda Klmdd kihaikal ho; olnmaHobi
Khuda ue kabii hai, ki Main un men
rahunga, aur un men cliahingd, aur
main un ka Khudd liGnga, aur wb
mcro log honge.
17 Ih wasto Rhuderwand yih kahta
hai, ki Tum un ke darmiydu se uikal
ao, aur judd ho raho, aur napak ku
mat chbdo, aur main tum ko qabul
kaninga ;
18 Aur main tuuihara Bap hungi,
aur tiun miae bcto )>oliiij hoge ; yih
Khudawand Qadii' i mutlac| farmatii
hai.
VII BA'B.
PAS, ai 'tuizo, chahiye ki ham aise
wa'da pAkete ko liar tarali ki
jismdui aur nihani najaaat se pak
karen, aur Khudd ko dur so piikizagi
ko kiimil karen.
L' IIilni ko qabiil kar !o; bam M
kisi se be-iasafi nahiu ki. I I
khai-db nahin kiyd, kisi par kuulih
ziyidati i.abin ki.
'■'i Main il/iiui dflbfl ke Wdfltfl yih
ualiin kahti: kyunki dge hi kali
chukd biin ki tum hamdro dilorj men
liu, yaiui^i lak ki bam tum ek s&th
maren aur jien.
fefrtafcg ko targib dena, II QU1{INTI'0X, VIII. ki s&rinski kartn.
4 Mori haten ttimh;iri babat bahu t
bo-dh&mk hai]}, mujhe turohira sabab
bari l'akhr hai ; main to tasalli se
bharihua In'in, apni sab musibat men
nihayat khush lilin.
5 Kyu'nki jab ham Maqa.]iiniya
mori ie, hamarejism ko>kuchh arim
ca.tha, baiki Lain hai tarah ki musibat
men giriftdr the ; bahar Uraian, bbi-
tar dahshstoa.
li Lfkin Khudi ne, jo 'ajizon ko
dilasi doti hal, Titus kp S pahunchm:
sc hamorj tasalli bakhshi.
7 Aur ria sirf usi ko a jino sc, baiki
us tasalli so lihf, jo \in ne tumhire
biehrahkc pai, ki as ne tumhiri8hauq,
tuniliiira nlV>s, t umbari gairatniandi,
]■) meri babat tbi, liamari! i»e bayan ki,
yahin tak ki main ziyada khush
hai.
8 Jo main ne ua khatt se tumhen
;■ i: i, n' n k iya, us se main nahin pachh-
bhju main parhlitati thi; 'k
Hye ki lifkiita min, ki jo gamgini iis
khatt sc htii, thort hf muddat tak thi.
fl Ab main khush hiia huti, na is
waste ki tmn gamgiu kiye gaye, pnr
is waste ki tumhiro gam ki anjatn
tauba huii: kyiinki tura Khudi ke
liye gatngin kiye gaye, ta ki ham so
kisi bit men nuiisin na pio.
10 Kyiinki wtih garo jo Khudi ke
hye hai, aisi tauba paida karta lini, jis
Benajithotihai, aurussekudihpachh-
tiwi nahin lmii ; par dunya ki gam
RUMt paida karta hai.
11 Kyunki isi par lihi» karo, ki
tumhire gam ne, Jo Khudi ke Uye thi,
rum men kyi hi cha'lald, kyi hi 'uc,r-
khwahi, kya hi khafagi, kya hi
dahshat, kyi ki nri*mq, kya hf gairat,
kyi hi batil» leni paidii kiyi ! Tum ne
har tarah so nihil Kiyi, ki tum ia mu-
rjadikniemen pik ho.
12 Garaz, agarchi main ne tnmhon
likhi, j»r main ne na us ke liye jia ne
nndhor kiyi, aur na us ke waste jia par
nndher hui, baiki ia liye, ki hamiri
237
fikr, jn tumliiire liye Khtidii ke huznr
hai, linu par zibir howe.
13 Isi liye ham ne tumbirf tasalli
H tanlH pai; aur Titus ki khushi se
baliut ziyada khush hde, ki us ki nih
tum salmon ke sabab tana hiii.
U -\nr agu mata db us ka samhne
tiinihari babat, koral fakhr l;iyi, u<
sharminda nn.hin hi'm; par iaise B*r1
bdten, jo ham ne tum se kahin, sach
sach hairj, waise hi haruara i'akhr, jo
Titus ke samhne thi, sach thahri,
15 Aur us ki dili muhabbat tum
par ziyadatar hai, ki u» ko tum sab ki
farminbarelari yail liai, ki tuin ne
darte aur t.hartharite hue use r|nbul
kiyi.
1G Pas, main khush htAn ki har ck
bit men tmn sc meri k hitir-jama'i
hai.
VIII BATi.
AUR, ni bhiin, ham Khudi ke na
fazl ko, jo Maoadiiniya ki kalisi-
yion par kiya gayii hai, tuiuhen jatiik:
hai n ;
'l Ki musibat ki bari aKmiiish mi'ij
un ki khushi ki ziya'dali aur un ki
nihiyat. garibi ne ua ki sakhiwat ki
daulat ko bahut barhiyi.
3 Kyi'inki main' yih ^uvihi deti
lu'in, ki we maqdiir bliar, baiki maq-
dur se ziyada, ip se musta'idd the ;
4 Aur bari miunat ke sitli ham se
darkhwast ki, ki ham us bakhshish
fco Ikivi'ii, aur muinuhlasujii ke liye uso
pahunehine men shatik howerj.
5 Aur hamiri ommad hi ke mu-
wifiq nahtn, baiki apne ta,fn pahlc
Kbudiwand ko, aur phir Khudi ki
marzi se ham ko sompi.
6 Is wistc ham ne Titus bo yili
darkhwiHt ki, ki jaisi us ne ige ahnni'
kiya thi, waisi hi tnmhiro darmiyin
bhi us in'im ko puri kare.
7 Pas, jis tarah tum har ek hit
meo, iman, aur kalam, aur 'i!m, aur
b6b koshish, aur us mtihabbat men jo
ham m rakhte ho, sabqat Ie gaye ho.
MiKjadiiniim ki
II QUBINTTON, IX.
aakMunat ki ta'rlf.
waiae hi la m'auiat ki babat bibi tum
sabqat le jdo.
8 Maiij kiiflili hukm ke taur par
niiiiin, baiki auron ki sargarmi ko
Babah, aur tumhdri muhabbat
haqiqafc asun&ne ko liyo, yih kahta
lain.
'j Kyi'mki tunihamdre Khuddwand
Timi' Masih ke fazl ko jaute ho, ki
wuli daulat mand t ha, aur tumhdre
wdste muflis bo gaya,' ta ki tum ua
ki ruuflisi so daulatmand ho jdo.
10 Aur main is bat nit-n yih rao
zdhir kartd hiin ; kyiinki yihi tumliare
wdsto mundsib hai, ki tum ne na
faqat yih kdmkarndshuru'kiyd, baiki
ek baras age se us ku kaniu kd irdda
kiyii.
11 l'as ab tum use tamam bhf
karo ; ki jaise tum irada karne [tar
musta'idd tho, waisu lu* nmqdrir ke
muwatiq us ke tamam karne par bhi
ho.
12 Kyunki agar nek niyat pahle
ho, to ailmi, muwd£jq ua ko jo us pas
hai, maqbi.il hoga, na us ke muwah'ii
jo us pas uahin.
lii Ganus, yih nahiti ki auron ko
drdin, aur tumhen taklif ho :
1-1 Halki burdbari ke ta-ur par ho,
td ki ia waqt tumhdri jiiyddati un ki
kami ko pura kare, aur un ki ziyddati
(umbari kami ko : td ki barabari ho
jdwe :
15 Chundnchi likha hai, ki Jis ne
bahut jam'a k iya, ua ka kuchh barhd
tmhiij ; aur jis h tliord jam'a kiyd, us
kd kuchh gbatd nahin.
16 Ab KlnulA k A shukr, jis nt> tuni-
liiiri ban khair-khwdhi Titua ke dil
men dali.
17 Ki us m; to darkhwaet qabiil ki ;
baiki dp hi taiydr hokc apni khushi se
tiimliiin: pil nikal gaya.
18 Aur bam ne uh ke sdth ub bhdi
ko bhejd, jis ki ta'rif Injil ke sababadri
kalisi yji'in ko danniydn bai.
19 Aur sirf yihi nahin, baiki wuh
238
knlisiydojj ka chund hud bhi hai, ki
hamdrd ham-sat'ar hokc yih ni'aiuat
sdth le jac, jis ke ham khddim liaitj, td
ki Khuddwand hi ki silaiah ki jae.aur
tumhdri liinimal zaliir hi-we.
20 Ham is sukhabardar rahte hain,
ki is khuirat, i firawdn ku sabab, jin ku
ham khddim hain, koi hameg badnain
u a kare.
21 Ia liyc jo baten ki Birf Khudd-
wand lii ko iigo nahin, baiki ddmioii
ke dge bhi bhali hain, ham un ke liye
dur-andcshi karte hain.
22 Aur ham ne un ke sdth apne
ua bhdi ko bhejd, jisu ham ne bahut
si batiin men barha a/makar ciliklah
pdyd: nar ab us ha re bharoso ke aabab
.se, jo un ka tum nur bai, bahut ziyada
chAldk hai.
23 Baqi, Titus jo hai, wuh tuera
aharik, aur tumbaro wasto mcrd ham-
k hidui a t hai: aur hainaru tihfi 1o
baig,flO kalisiyai'ii ke raaul,aur Maaih
kti jithil hain.
24 Pas, tum apni muhabbat aur
hamare us fakhr ko, jo tumhdri l)abat
hai, un par aur kahsiydoi) ke samhne
wabit kiyd karo.
IX BA'B.
PAR us khidmat ki bdbat jo mti-
qaddas Uigua ke waste hai, men't
likhnd tum ku /.dtd hai :
2 Kyunki maii] tumhdri himmat
ko jiinra luin, aur is Babah se Maqa-
ddnion ke a^o t umbari bardi kartd
luin, ki Akhaia kd mulk pansdl se
taiydr tba;'aur tumhdri aar^arn.i nu
bah u ton ko u b hara.
3 Lekln main ne bhdion ko bheja,
ki haniari wuii bardi jo is bat uiun
tumhiiri bdbat tiii be-aal na tbahr^,
t;i ki; j:iisd main ne kahd hai, tum
taiydr ho raho :
1 K.iliiri aisd na howe ki agar
Ma^ad r. n iya ke \ag nun1 Batil ain'ij.
aur tmuhen taiydr na pawen, ham (to
ham nahi[7 kalilc, ki tumj is barai
Khainit karnc kefarz
uar 'iatimad karue
II QURINT1'0N, X.
skarminda
howen.
5 Ie wdstc main no bhaion se yih
darkhwa.^t kanta /.arur samjha, ki we
ftge tumkdre pas jawcn, aur tuinhdr;
ua sakhawat kti phal ko, jis ki pcsh-
tar barha zikr hda, ago taiyar kar
raklicn, ta ki wuh sakhawat ki tarah,
ua ki bakhili ki tarah, maujud raka.
6 Par bdt yih hai, ki jo dsu-eg kar-
ko bola hai, dareg se kdtcgd : aur jo
knsiui'lii dil hoke bota hai, kushada
dil w kategd.
7 Har ok, jis tarah apna 30 man
thabrai.L liiii, bVirei na ki dareg se,
ya tacharl se: kyiinki Khudd usi ko
JD khiuhf se deta hai piytir kartd hai.
8 Aur Khmla tum par har tarah ki
ui'amat barha saktd hai, [;U. i tum
bsm«ha saf) tarali ki kifayat rakhke
hai sitrat ki cekokan meij barhtejdo:
9 (Chunanchi likhd hai, k'i Us ne
Hkhriyi hai; us no kangalon ko diyi
hai ; us ki ristbdzi hatuesha "kt hai.
10 Ab jo boue ke liyc btj, aur
khaim ko roti bak h sriti hai, so tum
ki) botte ke li.ye b! j bakhshe, aur ziya-
da kare, aur tumhari rastbazi ke pluil
barhA de ;)
11 TA ki tum har bat ino.it gani
boke sab tarah ki sakhawat karu, ki
yili hainare wasilo se rvhuda ki shukr-
gusarl ka ba'is hotd hai.
12 Kyiinki is chandc ki khidmat
na rirf muoaddaeos ki ihtiyajon ko
dur karti, baiki Khudd tak pahiiDChti,
ki bahutorj ko warfta us ki rfrakr-
guzarian hotin.
13 Ki wo us khidmat ka hal taj-
wiz karko is liya Klunla ki aitalsh
karte, Iiairi, ki tum Masih ki Injil ke
tabi' iione ka irjriir karte ho, aur un
ki aur suu ki madati karne men sakhd-
wat karte ho ;
II Aur wo tumhare waste du'd
mdngte hairj, aur Khuua ku us kamal
fa/l ke liye, jo tum par hai, tumben
bahut clia'htc haiu.
239
15 Khudd ka us ki bakhshish par
jo bayan se babar liat ahukr ho.
X BA'B.
MA1JS Piilus to tumfcare ru-baru
tum mun baqir, aur pith piehhe
luui par diiur biin, Masih ki farotani
aur bardasht ka wa&ta deko tum ku
'ar« karti lnin :
U' Hagar yih blii darkhwist karti
Iii'lll, ki iiiaiu bazir hoko us istiqldl ke
sath diler na hoiin, jis se main un par,
jin kenaziiik hanidri chdl jisrudai hai,
diler hiia chahta htirj.
.'J. Kyi'mki ham agarchi jism uu-n
ebalte hain, par jism ko taur par na-
bi n lartfl i
4 ^ls liyo ki harairi larai ke batb-
jrat jLsmani nahin, par Khudi ko
sabah qil'aOJj ke dha deno par kargar
hain ;)
.'i K i ham tasauwuron ko, aur har
ek bulandi ko, jo Khuda ki pahehan
ko bai'khilaf dp ko ubharti hai, giri
dete hain, aur har ok khiyal konaid
karke Masih ki farmaubardar ka-rare
hain;
tl Aur ham musta'idd hain ki jab
tttraharl farmahbardari piiri ho, to
ham bar tarah ki nd-fariniubardari kd
badla lewen.
7 Kyi tum zahir par nazar karte
ho? agar kiei ko is kd yak|£n hai, ki
wuh ap Masih kd hai, to wuh yih bin
dp ^e ganr Itare, ki jalsa wuh Masih
ka. hai, wnise hain biti Masih ke haili :
8 Ki agar main is ikhtiyir par, jo
Khudawaud no baudne, ua tumhdro
dhd dene ko, hauum tiiya hai. kui bh
ziyada fakbr kaniri, to ehttOttnda na
hodwrf :
9 Main yih kalita lidn, na hom» ki
main aba zaliir limin, ki khatton ko
likbko tumheu darata hun.
10 Kydnki"koi fcahtd hai, ki us ke
khatt albatta bhdri aur aaar-hakh«h
hain ; par wuh dp jism se kamzor, aur
us kd kalam haair hai.
11 So aibd admi samajh rakhe, ki
P4ku majbitr hoke
II QURINTI'OX, XI.
apn-1 ta'rif knria.
iaise pith pichlie khatton mm hamil- bani bc Hawvvjih ko iliaiia. valn hj
1 i hiizir tiirnhdre dil bhi us salai ku j<> Masih
men hai phirke kharab ho jawen.
4 Ki agar kol akar diisre Yisii' l;i
man&di kartd, jis ki ham oe man&dj
iinliirj ki, ya ftjiar koi aur rfih, ji*e
tum ne na pdyd, pita, yi diiuri Ttijil
milti, jo tumben na mili thi, lo tuui-
hiri b&idaabt karnd khtib thd.
5 Kyiinki main apno ta,in «ih se
bara rasulon se kuchh kain nahin
sjiiNiijlita ln'nj.
G Aura^ar kalam man 'awdmm si
bim, ]iar 'ilm meii nahin ; lekin hara
to nah bdton men har tarah se tum
par zdhir hue hain,
7 Kya yih meri gundh liu:i, ki
main ne apne ta,in farotan kiyd, tiki
tum bulan d ho, kyiinki main ne tum-
ben Klniila ki Injil ki khushkhabari
muft sundi ?
H Main uo to diisri kalisiydon ko
luti, ki tumhdri khidmat ke liyo un
sc danndhd liyd.
9 Aurjab main tumhirc dnnniyan
thd, aur imihtij hui, tad hlii kini par
bojh na diyd, kyi'mki meri ihtivaj ko
un bhdion ne. jo Maoaduniya se ae the
diir kiyd: aur har ck bit men main
tum par bojh dene Be bdz rafia, aur
b&7, ralningd.
10 Masih ki sactidi bc,jii mujh men
hai, main kahtd htm, U yih fakhr
Akhaia ki nawdhi men mujh se judi
n a hoga.
11 Kis wdste? kyd ia wiata ki
main tum N muhabbat nahin rakhti'r"
Khuda janti hai.
12 Par main jo karld hiin, bo hi
kartd ralu'mgd, ki main un ko, jo qd-
bfi dhilndlit.e hain, qdbd pane na diiii,
td ki jis bdt men tv e fakhr karte hain.,
alse jaise hara hain pac jiwen.
13 Kyugki aise log jhiithe rasul,
dagdbdz kdrindc hain, jo apni suratan
k" Masih ke raaitton se badai (Ulu-
hain.
14 Aur yih ta'ajjub nahin, kyunki
n'» kalam hai, waisa hi jab h.
boQgo hamili kdm bhi Impi.
1^ Kyi'mki hai n iri yih jnr.at nahin,
ki li.im apno ta.iu un men flhumir
kanan, yd un men ko bVzog se nuupl-
bala karm jo ki apni ta'rif kartc
hain : lakil) we ipas men apni painia-
ish karke aur dp se apnd muqibali
karke iiddin tbaliaiie ha'm.
13 Tar haru paimdne se biliar jikc
fakhr na karcnge, baiki jia qaniin ki
paimdisb Khuda ne hamen birit di, jo
timi tak bhi pahunchti hai, ham usf
ko muwafiq fakhr karcnge.
14 Kyiinki ham hadd sg bdhar dp
ko nahin barhite, goyi tum tak na
pahoBcbe hoflj ll liyc ki ham Masih
ki Iujii suudte hfie tum tak bhi pa-
huncho haiQ :
15 Aur ham paimine ko bdhar
Sakai- auron ki mihnaton par fakhr
nahin karte: It'kin imuncdwar hain
ki tum apne imin men taraqql karke
ham ko hamdre oAinin ke muwdfiq
babut riyada harhi do ;
16 Ki hain tunihiin sarhadd ke us
pirjdko Injil pahunchawen, aur du«-
re ke qintin parjahdrj Bab taiyar hain
fakhr na koran.
17 Tar jo fakhr kartd hai, bo Khu-
ddwand par fakhr kare.
18 Kyuoki .i-tapiii ta'rif kart/i hai,
wub. nahiu, baiki jis ki ta'rif Kimda-
wand karta iiai, wuhi maqbul h'ai.
K
XI BA'B.
A'SII ki tum zarra meri bewu-
.piii ki bardiaht karo ; jiar yaqi-
nan tum to meri bardasht. karte lio.
2 Mujhe tumhdri bdbat Khudd ki
si gairat dti hai ; kyiinki main ne tum-
hdri mangni ek hi shauhar se ki hai,
tiki main tum ko pak-ddman kun-
wdri ki nianiiui Uaiih ke pis hizir
karun.
3 Par main dartd hiin, kabin aisd
na howe ki jaiao sdmp no apni dagi-
240
Puitis H azlgaten jo ut ne
Shaitan bhi apni surat ko niiri f
se badai dahi hai.
15 Is wdste agar us ke khadi
apnf Biirator: ko rastbiiKi ke kbddimur)
se badai diilcn, to yili kuchb bari bdt
iiiilnn ; paniri ka anjdm un ke kdi
ke muwafiq hogft,
16 Pliir main knbta lu'in, ki kol
mujho bewuqiif na earnjlic; aur naluri
to, bewuquf bhi saniajhke mujiiu
uabul k.irf, ki main bhi thord fakhr
karun.
17 Jo kucbh ki main kahtd hun, so
Khuihlwaud ki rdh so nahin, baiki
bewuqufi ki rdh ee, aur uh istiqldl sc jo
fakhr ke wath bola, kahta- luin.
18 Azbaski bahut m log jiemdni
tarah par fakhr kartc hai», lo main
bhi fakl.rkarunga.
19 Kyiinki tutn bewuqnfon ki bar-
d&sht khushi ac karte bu, ia livu ki ap
'aojniand b o.
20 Ki jab koi tnmhen jnildm bandta
hai, ya jab koi tumheu nigaltd hai. ya
jab koi tum se kuchli chbiri lotd hai,
ydjal) koi ap ko buland kartd hai, ya
jab koi tumhdre munh par taniancM
nidrtd hni, tali tutn btnUsht karte ho,
21 Main lie-hurmati ki bdbat boltd
luin, ki guyd ham kamzor hot«, Par
jiM hai men koi dilor hai, to main bhi
(tu;wuqufi ku yih kahta hiin,)dilerhon.
22 Kya m 'Ibrani hairi 'f main bhi
hun. Kya we Jaraeli hnin? main bhi
hun. Kyd wo Ahirahaiu ki nasi st
bain? main bhi hiin.
23 Kyd wc Masih kekhddim hain?
main (narldni ko kahta luin,)ziyddat;ir
hun; mihnaton men ziydda, kore
kbanp. men hadd se ziydda, qaid<jii men
beshtar, mauton men aksar.
21 Main ne Yahiidinn sc pdncu bdr
ok kam chdlis koro khdo. -
25 Tin bar chharion, se mdr khdi,
ek dafa pathido kiyd tfaya, tin
niartaha jalidu ke tiU js'uie ki bala
men pard, ck rdt diu eamuudar men
kit/L,
241
U QURINTIO£I, XII. Ma*ih ke liye uthtin.
26 Main safarnn men bahut, dar-
ydnri ko kbatri'O men, choron ke
khairon men, apu i qaiiniwabn se
kliainm men, gair-qaumwak>ii m
khatron tnerj, sbahr ke bfoh khalron
men, baydhdu ko bioh kh atrofi nun,
BMDUSCUt ke blch khatron mOQ,
jhiit.hu bhdion ke bich kbatron men,
rali.'L hi'ui ;
27 Mihnat aur mashaqnat meri,
bdrhd bedaritm men, bhiikh aur piyds
men, faqon men aksar, sardi aur nange
rahue ki baiat men bhi, raba hiin.
2B In bdharwali ciiKon ke siwa sdri
kali.siydon ki h'kr mujh ko har roz d
d a bati bai,
29 Kaim kamzor hni, ki main
knnizor nahin hun ? kaun thokor
khdtd, ki main nahin jaltd'?
.'10 A;;ar fakhr kiyd chdbiye, to
main apni kauizorion par fakbr kar-
un "a.
81 Hamare Khuddvvand Tisu' Masih
kd Kknrid aur Uap, jo hamewha mu-
bdrak bai, jaotd bai ki main jhiith
nahin kahia.
92 l'iiiii.d]q men ndzim ne, jo bdd-
shah Aratds ki taraf su tbd, ia iiade ae
ki lmijbe pakur h', DimMiqlon ke sbahr
[mr cliauki hit.lihii ;
33 Tab main khirki ki rah se ek
tokre men diwdr par se latka diyd
yayd, aur us ke hdthon ee bach nikla.
XII I'.A'i;.
BE-SHU11MA apna fakhr karnd
mujho mun asi lnialiin ; parmnirr
Khnddwanil ki n>ynton aur mukash-
afnn ka bayan kiyd chalud hiin.
2 Masih ku ok shakhs ko main
isntd luin, ki ohaudah bnraa guzre
lionge, ki (wuh yd to badan ke naib,
Ici yili inujh'- malam nahin. yi bagair
hmlan ke, ki yih hhi mujiio nia'ii'nn
nabiu, Khurid ko ina'bim hai;) tisre
dsman tak tkdek pahunrrhiiya Enyd.
'■'■ A'ir niiiin aiac hbakiis ,■ ■ ■:
in, ki wulii (va badan ke with, ya
«
riilutapn! kamzcm'onpar U QTJR1NTT'0N, XII
fakhr learta.
i'-i«i;in ke bagair, ki mujhe ma'Iura
n..]iin. Khucla kt. ma'lrim hai ;)
4 Firdaus tak ekAek pahunchAyA
aavi, aur ub ne wts bAterj Bunln, jo
kahno ki nahin, aur jin kA kalina
bashar ki maqdt'tr naliin.
5 Aise hi ddmi par main fakhr
kuningi; par main Ap par, siwa apni
kara KK ion ke, fakhr ua kariingd.
8 Ki agar main fakhr kiyd chAhiig,
f" main bewuipif na baiii'in, kyunki
aach bulunya ; par main ap ko bdz
rakhid hiiti, td na huwo ki kol rnujhe
uh sc, jaisd mujhe dekhti hai y.'i Jusi
mure haqq m™ aunta hai, ziydda jdr
7 Aur td ki main royaton ki ziya-
dati bb phiil na jdi'in, mere jisra men
kantA, jo MbaitAn ka pAyik hai, ki
mujhe ghilne ro&re, chubAyi gayA, td
ki main phiil na jAiin.
8 Uh ke liye main ne Khudawand
ee tin bir illimAa kiyA, ki yih mujli
uien «> diir lio jiiwe.
9 Par us lio yih raujh ae kahi, ki
Merd faz! tujbe kifAynt hai : kyunki
mori zor Itamzori nicu pnrd rmtd hai.
Pas main apni kamzorinrj parbahut hi
khuahi se fakhr kariingA, td ki Masih
ka zor mujh par sAya dSle.
10 So main Masih ko wAste kam-
zoriOQ men, maldnniton meri.ihtiyajon
meg, satde janc men, taugion men,
khuHhhiin; ki jab main kanizor lilin,
tabhi znrawar nun.
11 Main fakhr karne se bewuqfif
bani; Iuto hi uh mujhe nA-char kiya:
kyunki ldiq thd ki tum raeri ta'rif
kari e ; ia liye ki main sab so bare
l4]og n kiK-lih kumlar nahin, agarchi
main kuchh nahin hiin.
12 Rasul hune ke niahAn, kamAl
sabr se,aur nui'aji/.on, aur achambhon,
aur qu'iraton se, albatta tumhAre bich
zahir hiie.
18 Tum katin si ha t men aur
kaiisiydon se kawi lho, siwi m ke ki
main no tum [Kir bojh naddlA? meri
yih uA-insAfi ruu'Af kijiye.
813
14 Dekh.<.>, main phir tiuri bdr tum-
hare pAs Ane ko liye taiyAr hiin ; lekin
phir bhi tum par bojh na dilungii;
kyunki main tumhard kuchh jo lio bo
uae nahin, baiki tumliin ko dhundliti
hiin ; ki larkon ko md hAp ko liye
nahin, baiki mA Mp ko larkon ke liye
jnm'H kamA chahiye.
15 Aur main tumhdrf jAnon ke
wdate bahut khushi se kharch kar-
ilnjfA, aur kharcli kiyd jAuntrd, agarehi
main jitnS tumben ziyAda piydr kartA
hiin, iltui V.i kamtar piyarA hiirj.
16 Par agar ha m uidn lewen, ki
ain ne tum par bojh nahin ddid, lekin
Rhayad main ne hoshydri se tumben
fareh karke phansaya.
17 Khair, jinhcti main no tumhdre
pAa hhejd, un men se kisi ke waiule
main ne nara ku waste kuchh tuin par
ziyadati ki ?
18 Main no Tftua se iltimAs kiya,
aur ua ke sdth ek bhAi ku bhejA, To
kyA Titus ne tum par nafa ke liye
ziyddati ki ? kyA huni ek hi n'ih se
ek hi uaipm i qadam par na chalte
the?
19 Phir kyd tum gumdn karle ho
ki ham tum so 'uzr karte hain ? ao
nahin : ai piydro, ham Khudd ko Age
Masih men hnke yih sdri hdten tara-
h Ari taraqqi ke liyo kahte baig-
20 Main dartd luin, kabin aisd na
ho ki main Akar jaisd tumhen chdhtd
hiin waisd na- pai^n, aur mujhe bhi
jaisA tum nahin chdhfe ho waisd pao:
na ho ki qaziya, aur ddh, aur gnzab,
aur jhagro, aur gibaten, aur kdud-
phAsidn, aur sliekhian, aur hangdino
liowen :
'21 Aur na hoki jab main Aun, tab
merd KhudA mujhfl tumhAri babat
iiast kare, ki main un men so bah u ton
ke sabab jo guuah knr chuko hain, aur
ajmt uApAki, aur harAmkAH, aur Mhah-
wat-para,^ti ae jo un se hiii tauba na ki,
afsos karun.
With un ke tiyt Kkud& s
XIII liA'li.
Y IH tisrd mnrtaba hai ki main
tumhire pAs dt.A Win. Do yd
tin gawdhon ke munh sa liar ek bal
sabit ho jAegi.
2 Main ne i-oshtar kahA hai, nur
irirnij ip ko do-b.ira lia/ir janke age kt
khabar deke kahta Mg: aur ab, ki
gair-hazir In'iii, uu ko jinhon ne fi<--sh-
tar guniih kiye, aur baqi sabhon. ko
bhl, yih likbli hi'in, ti agar main phir
diin, tonachhorungd:
3 Ik wAute ki lum is bAt ki dali!
chahtc lio, ki Masih h i mujh merj
bnltd hai, jo tumhare waste kamzor
uahin, baiki rum men sofismu hai.
4 Ki igarehi wuli kuniati m ulin
pnr mara gaya, kkiu Khudaki qudrut
m wuh jiti, hai. Aur ham bhl us men
cliamil Imku kaiazor hain, par u b k>
wath Khuda ki qudrat se, jo tumhAre
haqq men hai, jicngc.
6 Tuna Ap ko jancbo, ki tutn iman'
men shamil hi'ir bn, ki mihin ; apiio
ta,[g parakbo. Kya tuni ap ku uahin
jiinto, ki Yisu' Masih tnni om h:u,
aur naliin to tum i]!\-mnqbul lio?
6" Par main ummed rakbtd hfiri ki
tum ma'lumkarogu ki ham na-maqbu)
uahin.
7 Aur main Khuda se- yih du'i
GALATI'ON, I. du'd mangta hai.
karo: wi na ia w As U; ki ham maqbii)
?.Ahir howen, par is wdste ki tum bha-
1A karo, agurcbi ham iiA-man.bul gine
jdwen.
8 KyiSnki ham eachdi ke barkhilrtr
kuehb uahin, par sachAi ke wasto aab
kucbb kar sakte haitj.
!) Kyi'mki jab Iiam kamzor aur tum
zordwnr ho, to ham khush hain ; aur
yih bhi c-hahte ki tum kdmil ho,
10 Ia liyo main gair-liazir hoke ye
bdten likktS lain, td ki main hAzir
hoke us ikhtiyAr ko muwiUiq, jo Khu-
dAwand nonuijln) biuidne ke waste, na
dhA di'tie ke waste, diyd hai, tum par
sakhti na karun.
11 Garaz, ai hhaio, khush ralho.
Kdmil ho, khAtirjam'a rsikho, ek dil
hoo, milo rahu ; ki Kbuda, jomuliabbat
aur salam ati kd Bani hai, tumhare
sdth hogA.
12 Tum dpas men pdk bosa leke
salAna karo.
13 Sdre muqaddas log tumhen Bft-
Idm kahte hain.
14 Ah KhudAwand Yisu' Masih ki
iazl.nur KhudA ki muhabbat, nurBuh
i Quda ki sumbat, tum sabhoii ke aatk
howe. A'niiti.
K Yih dusrA khatt Qurintion ke
iiiim par Mnqadr»iiya ke Filippi
ehahr men likhA hiid, Titus nur
mdngta hiin, ki tum kucbh badi na, LuqA ko hat-h bhejd gayd.
PULUS RASU'L KA' KHATT
GALATI'ON KO.
I BA'B.
PTT'LIIS, jn na a ■liiiirm ae, na ddml
ke wasile m, baiki Yisii' Miisih
aur Khudd Bip W, Jis ne us ko nmr-
dorj men se jilaya, rasill hai,
" 213
2 Aur fldre bhdion se jo mere sdth
hain, Galatiya ki kubiyinp ko,
3 Fazl aur saldmati, K budi IJdp
aur faam&n Khuddwand Yisd' Masih
ki taraf se, tumhare liye howen;
Dutri Ivftl ke manadi CSALATTON, II. karntwdlon par la'nat karnd.
4 JlS •.■■ ti.in ;i:-r- gUTljfh li ke 1 - 1 ■ 1 1 ■ ■
men apne ta,in diyi, la ki wuh ham
ko hamare Bap Khuda ki marzi ke
mutibiq ih kharab dnuyi su kimiawi
bakhshe :
5 Jalai i abadi uh ka hai. A'niin.
'i Main ta'ajjub karta hun ki tnm
itni jnliii us se, jin ne tumben Masih
ku fazl metj bulayii, phirke dusri Iujii
ki taraf mail lnii: :
7 So wuh ilusri to nahin : magar
ba'ze hain jo tuiu ko gbftbcitfl limu.
nur Masih ki Injil ulat. dene uhiihtu
liaig.
B Lekin agar ham ya dsman se koi
iiriBht», siwa uh Injil ku jo bani nc
tumben gunai, dueri Injil tunihen su-
uiwe, mo maTi'iu howe.
9 Jaisa ham ne age kaha, waihii
lii ah main jihir kahta hun, ki Agar
koi tumben kisi (baui Injil ko, si w a
us ke j'iBe mm ne paya, suniwe, wuh
inalVm liowe.
10 Kyanbmain admion, komanata
hun, ya Khuda ko? kya main admion
ko khush kiya chahta hun'? agar
main ah tak admion ko khush karta,
ty M a." i h. ki banda na hota.
1 1 Par, ai bhaio, main tumben ja-
tata hun, ki wuh Injil, jin ki main ne
khabar di, insan ke t aur par nahin hai.
i- Is liye ki main. ne us ko kini
lidmi so ua paya, na kiai nc mujbe
sikhayii, ;>:ir wub YihiV Masih ke
iihain se mujhe milf.
13 Tum ne mori agli chal, jab main
Yahudion ki tariq par chiilta tha, suni
lini, ki kyiinkar main Khuda ki ka-
Uatjra ku uiliayat satali aur wirau
karta tha:
14 Aur main dio i Yahndi men apni
qaum ku akwir ham-'umron tso barhkar
apne bapdadon kl riwayaton. l ar
/iyada wirgann iba.
15 Lekin jab Khuda ki rnar/i lini,
jis ne mujhe meri lua ke pet bi men
karc, la ki niirii us ki Injil gaii-qaum-
ki! iiiih «uuaiin ; tab i'auran main
jism aur lahu se salah na li :
17 Na YwnaalliB ko un pas jomujh
m pahln raM.il the gaya ; par niahj
'Arab ko gaya, phir wahan se IMmishq
ko pk i ia.
IfeS Tab ua ke tiu baras ba'd Patrua
se mulaqat karae ko Yariisalain nion
gaya, aur uh ke sath pandrah diri rah£
1!) I'ar rasnlon men se kisi diisre ko
na deklia, magar Khudawand ke bh;ii
Ya'qtib ko.
20 Ab jo baterj mairj tum ko likhta
luin, dekiio, Khuda ko ago kahta lilin
ki we jhiitlii lialim.
21 Ba'd" us ke main Suriya men aur
Qiliqiya ke niulkon men ayii.
22 Aur Yahudiya ki Ma^ihi kali-
siydun meri surat so waqif na thin :
23 Unhon ne sirf Huna tha, ki wuh
jo ham ko pahle satata tha, so ab ua
iman ki, jise wuh age barbad karta
iba, khusii-khabari deti hai.
24 Aur we meri babat Khuda ki
silaish kartu lho.
II BA'B.
P HIU chaudah. baras ba'd maiu
iiii-ii.il.il.:, ke suri Titus ko bfai
liye hue Yarusalam ko phir gaya.
2 Aur meri jiiua ilbiim se l.iia, aur
wuh Injil, jis ki manadi main gair-
ijiiuriiou men karta lain, un se bayan
ki; magar buzurgog su nirale men, ta
naho ki meri bal kiydagli daurdhdp
lie-fiiida howe.
3 Tar Titus ko,jo more aath tha,
aur TunanJ hai, khatua karwane ki
taklif na ki gayi :
4 Aur yih jhfitho bbaion ke sabah
H i- i rilupke ghus ae, ta ki ua ani-
dagi ko, jo hamen Yisii' Masih meri
mili hai, jasiisi karke daryaft karen,
t:i k i we hanum guliimi men hiwi'ti :
5 Jin ke ham dabel na hue, ki
gbati bhar hhi \in ke tabi'rahte;
se :Jag kiya, aur apne fa/.l se bulaya; ki Injil ki sachai tumhare darmtyan
lii Ki apno Bute ko mujh par zabir qaim rahe.
244
P,i(t-ws ko GALATI
6 Par un ao jo zahir nien busung
the, (so jaisc the, waiae the; nmjhu
kuchh kdm nahin ; Khudd kisi admi
ke zdhir par nazar nahin karLa:)
khair, un hi ki taraf sg, jo buzurg the,
luujhc kiiclilj. khans hasil nautlno, n»
lili a.
7 Lckin narkhiliif uh ko, jab unhon
ne dckhd ki nd-makhtunori ke liye
main Injil l;a amanatdar hiid, jaisa
Diakhtrun'ri ke liyo Patrus thij
8' (Kyunki jis ne makhli'mon ki
risdlat ke liye Patrus nien asar kiya,
U8 ne gair-qaumon ke liye nuijh ruer
bhi asar kiya;)
9 Aur jab YaVpibaur Kefds aur Yu-
hanna ne, ki goya kalisiye ke suLim
the, ih fazl ko jo uitijli par h ria tlirL
darydft kiyii, to inujh aur Baruab&a ko
shardkat ki rah se dahind haih iliya,
ki ha m gair-qaumoi) ke, aurwe makh-
lunoij ku pds jdwen.
lOMagar itna kaha, ki Gar! bon ko
yad rakho; so main bhi uh kdm ke
liye muuta'idd tfc*\
11 Par jab Patrus Antakiya men
;iy:i, l" main ne rubani ns M unn|:ib:il.i
kiya-; 'u liye ki wuli inalamat ke laiq
thd.
12 Kyrtnki wuli pesbtar us KO, ki
kaishakhs~Ya\p]b ki taraf se ae, gair-
q4Umwilon ke sdtli khayd karta tha;
]nvr jab we ae, to makhtiinon sc darke
tiililn. bata, arir alag ho gaya.
13 Aur baqi Yahi'idion De bhi ua
ke sath do-rangi ki, yahaii tak ki Bar»
nahas bhi dabkar un ki riya im'ij
(diarik hiia.
14 Jab maiij ne dekha ki wo Injil
ki saohiU par sidhi chal nahin ehaltu,
main ne sabhon ke siimhno Patrus ke
kaha, ki .lab tu Yahudi liokar gai
qaumon ki tarah, na ki Yabudion k t'
tarah, zindagi giisordnta hai, pas tu
ki» wanto gair-qaumon ko yib taklif
deta hai, ki Yahtidion ke taur par
cualen ?
15 tlam jopaidaifh se Yahudi bairj,
245 .
rON, IT1. malamat %mnn&.
aur gair-qaumon meii SC gunahgiu
naliin,
16 Yih jdnkar ki adral na Bhari'ai
ke kdmon se, baiki YisiV Mani h par
Iman lano so, rastbdz gind Jat^ bfti,
ham bhi Masih Yisu' par iman Ide,
la ki ham Muib pir iman lftua m, mi
ki shari'at ke kanion *e, rastba/, gine
UW6Q; kyuijki kui basbar shari'at ke
nmon u rastbdz gimi na jae^a.
17 Par ham jo Masih ko sabab se
rastlm» ginc jaie ki taUdl tneii liari,
agar ap hi gunahgar thahren, to kya
Masih gunah ka ba'is hai? har^i/.
naliin.
lfcl Kyunki jin chizon ko main ne
dha diya, a.^ar unhen phirke h:inaiiri,
to main apue ta,in khatakar thahraia
bnn.
lt> Is wasto ki main shari'at hi ke
wasiie se shari'at ki nisbat niuii, ta
ki main Khuda ki niabat ziuda ho
jili'nj.
990 M:!iij Masih ko sath salib par
khitieha gaya : lekin ziuda innj ; p«
(au blti main nahin, baiki Masih tnujli
ziuda hai: aur main jo ab jua
nien zinda hun, so Kbu^a ke Bf$t par
imdn lano se Etnd* hi'm, jis oe mujh
m muhabbat rakhi, aur ap ko mere
badle de diya,
21 Main" KhudA ke fazl ko batil
naliin karta; kyi'mki raslbazi agar
shari'at se milti hai, to Masili *vaut
miia.
Tn BA'B.
Al nadan Galat io, kis ki jadi'ibbari
ankhotj ne tmn ko mara, ki tum
■mMJ ke lannaiibardjlr na hiie,
bawujudo ti YisiV Masih tumbari
auUiwi ke aaoduM yin Bibir kiya
gaya, ki goyil luniharc darmiyan salih
par khineha gaya'?
•>. Main Birf yihi ttun se daryaft
kiya chdbti hun, ki Tum ne shari'at
par 'amal karne se, ya imiin ki bdi
isuiine ho. Ruh pai?
[ 3 Kya tum aise nddda ho? kya
T7ttdn Uine w GALAT
Kuli so shuru' karke ab jisra se kAmil
hiiA chAhte ho?
4 Kya tumneitni uhizoukibe-fflida,
bardAaht ki ? par shayad be-iaid!
nah iri.
5 Pas wuh jo tumheg Ituh bakhsh-
ti liai, aur tum men, mu'ajizo zdhir
kaiti hai, so kyA shari'at par 'amal
kanta so, yA ki sania'at imani se, aisa
kari A hai 'i
t> ChuuAuchi AbirahAiu KhudA par
hnau layii, aur yih us ke liye rAstbazl
g i u a gayA.
7 Pas jAuo, ki joimanwAIe hain, we
hi AbiraliAm ku farzaud hain.
8 Baiki kitab ne yih peshbini kar-
ke ki KhudA gair-^aunion ko iman ki
rih so rAstbiiz thahrawegA, AbiraliAm
k» ago hi yih kkusbkhabari di, ki Sari
gair-qaumen tore ba'is harakat pA-
wengi.
'J Pas jo iman w a! e hain, so imAndAr
Abiraham ko sAth harakat pAte hai».
10 Kyiinki we sah jo shari'at hi ko
a'amal par taki; a karte hain, so la'nat
ke taiit hain; ki likha hai, Jo koi un
sab baton ke karne par, jo ki ahari'at
ki kitAb'merj likhi hain, qAim nahin
rahta, la'naii hai.
11 Par yih bat, ki koi KhudA ke
nazdik shari'at se rAstbAz nahin
thaharta, m zAhir hai; kyiinki, Jo
imin se raatba/. bila, so hi jioga.
12 Par shari'at ko iman so kuchh
liisbat tiakin; baiki wuh adiiii ji.-i mi
us par 'amal kiyA, ao ua hi se jiegA.
£S Manik ne hamen mol lekar
shari'at ki la'nat so ckkurAya, ki wuh
haniAre badle men la'nat huA ; kyiinki
likha hal, Jo koi kAth, par latkaya
gayA, ao ia'nati Ijai ;
14 TA ki Abiraham ki harakat gair-
qaumon tak Yisii' Masih se puhunuhe ;
ki hain iman so us Ruh ko, jis ka
wa'da hai, pAwen.
15 Ai bhAio, main insAn ki tarah
bolta biin: 'Ahd ko, agarehi Admi hi
kA howu, tau bhi jab niuuarrar ho
VO$, III. nistkiz ka Ihahttrna.
gaya, to koi batil nahin kartA, aur na
us par kuchh baruAtA hai,
16' Pas Abiraham aur us ki nas! M
we wa'de kiye gaye. ChunAnchi wuh
nahin kahtA, ki Turi uaskm ko, jaisA
baJmti'ii ko wasto, baiki jaisd ek ka
wastc kahtA hai, ki Teri nasi ko; so
wuh Masih hai.
17 Aur main yih kahtA hiin, ki ia
'ahd ko, jo Masih ke haoq men KhudA
ne Ago muqarrar kiyA tha, shari'at, jo
ebic aau tis baras ke ba'd ai, bAtil
nahin kar sakti', ki wuh wa'da kAm
na Awo.
18 Kyiinki agar miras shari'at ko
wasile se hai, to phir wa'de se nahin ;
pai Klnulii no uso AbirabAm ko wa'do
hi se bakbshA.
19 Pas sliari'at kis wAste hai?
Wuh gunAhon ko liye izAfo men di
gayi, jab tak ki wuh nasi, jis se wa'da
kiyA gaya tha. na Awe; aur wuh
uri.shUin ko wasilo so ek darmiyAni ko
llAth -■ ijuii ■'■■ lu: : .
20 Ab darmiyAni ek kA nabig hota,
par KhudA ek hi hai.
21' Pas shari'at k ya KhudA ke
wa'don se barkhilaf hai? hargiz
nahin : kyiinki agar koi aisi shari'at
di gayi hoti, jo ziudagl baklish sakti,
to alUitta rastbdzi shari'at se hoti
22 I'ar kitAb no sab ko gunAh ko
taht shumAr kiyA, lA ki wuh wa'da jo
Yisii' Masih par imAn lAne ke wasile
se hai, imAnddron ko diyd jdwe.
i'.'; Latin iiuAii ko Aue se peshtar
ham shari'at ki band men qaid tke,
us iman tak, jo zAhir kouewdld tha,
ghero men raho.
24 l'as shari'at Masih tak pahuneh-
Ane ko li.imarA ustad thahri, tA ki
ham niiiin ti<: rastbax gino jawen.
25 Par jab iman A chukA, to ham
phir ustAd ke taht mon nahin haiQ.
2G Kyiinki tum sab ke sab us iinAu
ke subab, jo Masih Yisii' par hai,
KhudA ko i'arzaud ho.
1 Ki tum sab jiimm ne Masih
Jtaittb&ri thara' se GALATI
tiicii baptismu paya, Masih ko pahin
liya.
28 80 na Yahudi ua Yunani hai, na
gulim na izid, na mard na 'aurat:
kyiinki tum sah Masih Yisu' moa ck
ho.
29 Aur agar tum Masih ke ho, to
Abiraham ki nasi, aur wa'do ke
mutabiq wdris ho.
IV BAU.
PAR main yih kahtdhutt.ki Waris,
jab tak larki hai, ub men mir
gulim nicji farq nahin, agarchi wuh
sab ki mal i k bal ;
2 Ballti us waqt tak jo ISdp ne
muqarrar kiyd ataliqon aur mukh-
taron ke ikbtiyir nuiti hai.
3 So ham bhi jab larke the, tab tak
ua usili i 'iini ki.joisjahdu ka hai,
band men the:
4 Par jab waqt pura hiia, tab
Khuda iic apuc Hetti k<> bhejd, jo 'aurat
se paidi hoke ahari'at ke tabi' hiia,
5 Ta ki wuh un ku jo shari'at ke
Ubi' hain mul Ic, aur ham lepdlak
houc ki darja p&wem
6 Aur is liye ki tum bete ho, Khu-
da ne apne bete ki Itiih tumhdre dilon
men bheji, jo Aj Abbd, ya'ne Ai Bdp,
pukdrti hai.
7 Pas ab tii gulam nahin, baiki
beta hai ; aur jab ki beta hai, l"o " "
ke saliah Khudd ki waria hai.
8 Lekin tum dge jab Khuda ko
nahin jdnte the, un ki jo hauiqat men
Khuda iiiihin bandagf karto tho.
9 Par ab jo tum ne Khuda ko
pahchatia, baiki Khuda ne tum ko
[luhchana, to tum kyt'm doharn
sai'if aur adne usiil i 'ilm i dunydwi
ki taraf mdil hotc, jin ki guliini tum
phir kiyd chahta b.0?
10 Tum dinon, aur mahinon, aur
waqton, aur barason ko minte ho.
11 Main tumhdre haqq men dartd
liMii, aisd na ho ki jo mihuat main ne
tum par ki hai bo-faida- howe.
12 Ai bhdio, maui luruhan minn&t
247
ON, IV. nt&in ho sakit.
karti hiin ki tum men nianind ho
jao; kyiinki main bhi tumhdri ma-
ti ind hun : ttmi itu mori kuubli dliila
bigari nahin.
13 Tum jduto ho ki kyiiiikar main
ne pahlc jism ki kamzori men ton ku
Injil sunai.
11 Aur tum ne mero ua imtihdn ko,
jo mere jism men thd, liaqir ua jauii,
aur ua nairat rakhi, baiki mujho
Khudi ko firishto ki miuind, hdn,
Masih YisiV ki inatiitid, qabul kiyd.
15 Ua waqt tumhard kyd hi liari
klmshi kd iqrdr thd ! main to tumhdra
gawah hi'in, ki agar ho aaktd, to
tum apni aukhtn khod nikilke mujhe
16 Pas kyd ie sabab se ki main tum
sach bolta iiiiu, tumhdrd dushnmn
ho gayi 'i
17 We tumhdre dilios haiij, pai
bhaldi ko liye nahin : baiki we tumben
alag kiyd oliahte hain, ta ki tum un
ke dilaoz bane raho.
18 Par bhalai ke liye hamesha
diluoz ralind achehhd hai, aur ria iVupit
jab ki main tumhare pas hizir hun.
19 Ai ruere bachobo, jinku sabab
mujhe phir jannc kd dard hai, jab tak
ki Masih tum men surat na pakre;
20 Main chdhti hun ki ab tum
pda Aun, aur apni iwaz badhin, kyi'tnki
mujhe tumhdre haipg men shubh» hai.
21 Mujh se kaho to, timi jo shari'at
ke tdbi' hiia chdhte ho, kyd tum
shari'at ki nahin sunte?
22 Ki yih iikha hai, Abi rahim ke
do bete tho, ok lauudi se, diisrd dadd
se.
23 Par wuh jo lauudi hb thi, jism
ko taur jwir paidd htid ; aur jo azdd ee
thd, so wa'ila ke laur par.
24 Yih bdten tamsili hhi jdni jdli
hairj: is liyo ki yih 'auraten do 'ahd
hain ; ek to Sini panir par se jo hid;
wuh nire guldm jati t i hai, yili Hajkah
liai.
25 Kyunki Hajkah 'Arab kd koh
Masihi amdagi par (tALATE'OR
i Sind hai, aur nb ke Yariiaalam ka
.jawab hai, aur yihi apne larkou ko sath
ifulacui EDBB hai.
2li I'iir lipar kd Yarusalam. dzad hai,
£0 hi ham eab ki m. -i. hai.
27 Kyuijki likhi hal, ki Ai banjb Jo
januewdli nahin, ji lfm so kttuafa ho;
aur t£ jo janneka dard nahi'g janti, ah
Ehul aur qahqnho mdr; kyiinki be-
rbfl8Ufl ki aulad khasatmvaii ki aulad
b<j ziyaiia hain.
28 . Pan, ai" bhafo, ham Iz,hiq ki
tarah wa'de ke farzand bain.
21) Par jaisd ua waqt wuh, jis k
|p;ii'lai-ii jismaui thi, use, jis ki
uaidaish r ilham tbi, satata thd, waiad
ah blii h'iia bai.
30 Par kitab kyd kaliti hai? k:
I a'iiuii ko aur ua ke bote ko nikal :
kyunki laundi ka bctd av.ad ke beto ke
satu bstgifi wdris ua hogd.
31 Garaz, ai bhftio, ham laundi ke
bete nahin, baiki isA& ke hain.
V UA'B.
PAS ua dzddagi par, jia ae Masih ne
banmu d/.i.l kiyd bai, tum qdiui
Taho, aur guliiini ke jiio tale do bara
ua juto.
'i lJekho, main Piilus tum se kaht.A
hnn, agar tum khatna kanvao, to
Masih se tumben Ituuhh i'aida na h opa.
3 Main bar ek adui i par, jia k:i
khalna Ini» hai. |>liir gawahi deld. hiin.
ki use tamam siiari'at par 'amal kama
wajib hiid.
i Tum jo shari'at ke rti se rdstbd/.
bani chahtti ho, to Masih ae jiniti hue ;
tum bal ki nazar ae giro,
5 Ei ham to Kub ke sabab, iman ki
rah ae, rdstbazi ki ummed ke bar ane
ke rnuntam bain.
6 la liye ki Masih Yisu'nienruakh-
tiini aur ua-makhtuni se kudih garaz
nahin ; magar iman se jo muhabbat ki
rdh ae asar harta" bai,
7 Tum to achcbhi tarah daurte t&fl ;
kis ne tumben rol: a, ki tum aacbdi ke
tarmdnliardar na ho 'f
218
tfdim rahnz kafarz.
fi Yih )*fttiqad lumhdre buldutswdle
se nahin hai.
9 Tiiora ai khamir sari loi ko
khamir band detd hai.
10 Mujhe tumhari bdbat Khudd-
waod »e yaqin hai, ki tum aur tarah
ku khiydl na karoge; lckin wuh jo
tumben ghabrdtd hai, koi kyun na ho,
«uift aUiawcgd.
11 Aur, ai bhdio, main agar &b
kliatua ki manddi karti, to kahe ko
ab tak natdyd jatd? ki salib ki thokar
jati rabi hott.
1- Kdsh ki wo jo tum ko be-n&rdr
kar dule hain apne la,in kdt ddltel
13 Ai bhdio, tum to d/.ad'agi ke liye
buldo gayo ho, magar iis d^.ddagi ko
jism ke liye fursat mat Bamjho, baiki
miihabbat ee ek duiire ki khidmat
karu.
\i Is liye ki &dri shari'at isi ok bdt.
Tii.rj kliaini hai, ki Tu apne paroaf ko
aiaa piyar kar, jaisd dp ko,
lfi Par agar tum ek duBre ko kat
khdo, to khabanlar, na huwe ki tum
ok diisre ko nigal jio,
l(J Par main kahta hdn, ki tum
Huh so chdl ehalo, to tum jiaui ki
khwabisb ko piird na karoge.
17 Kyi'mki jism ki kbwfibish Riih
kl mukhdlif bai, aur Riiii ki khwabisb
jism ki niukhalif: aur yc ek'dusre ke
baiklnldf hain, yahaij tak ki jo kuchh
tum chdbte, so nahin kar eakte ho.
lti Par agar tum Bah ki biddyat eo
halte ho, to shari'at ki band men
labin.
lil Aurjiam ke kdm to Kahir bain,
yihi. Zina, hardmkari, ndpaki, shah-
wat,
iiO ])ut].nr&!ttf, jddngari, dusbma-
:irj, 'in/avEi, raahk, gazab, jbagre,
judaidB, bid'ateti,
21 l.'dh, khiin, mastian, aubduhidn,
aur jo kitn ki un ki mdnind bain ; aur
un ki lialiac men tumben dge «e jatdti
hiin, jaisd main ne ua waiit bhi dge ae
jatd «iya, ki aise kdm-karnewdle
Paius M"eih par GALATI
Khuda ki badshahat ke wAris ua
taoge.
22 Par Itiih ki pha) jo hai, so mu-
babbat, khimUi, salamati, sabr, khair-
khwahi. neki, imandari,
23 Faruttmi, parbccgarl ; aise aise
kamon ke mukhiilif km shari'atnahirj.
24 Aur unbon ne,jo Masih ke hain,
jism ko u» ki buri khaalakm aur
khwahishun saniet salib par kriincha
hai.
25 Agar ham Ruh se zinda hiio, to
chahiye ki Ruh se chai bhi chalen.
2\> Ham jliutlia fakhr na kang, ek
di'isrc ko ua chirawe, ek diare par daJi
t ia karo,
VI ItA'R.
Al bhdio, agar kol fchnf kisi khata
men iiaiiahdn giriJ'tjir ho jawe, to
tum jo niham ho, aise koriili i farotanf
ae sainbhalke bahal karo; aur apne
Apu lihiz rakh.ki td bhi iuitihdunien
na pare.
2 Tum ek drtsre ko bojh uthd lo,
aur isi tarah ao Masih ki ahari'ac ko
pura karo.
;i Kyunki agar koi &p ko kticbli
ebi/. samjhe, halanki wuh kuclili
nahin hai, to wuh apuo ta,,in dhokha
duta hai.
4 1. 1 km bar ek apuc hi kain ko
janehe, tah fakhr ka subab apne hi
men pawega, diisre men nahin.
& Kibar ek apna hi bojh ut.hdwega.
6 Jokoi kalam sikho, ttiklilanewale
ko airi ni'amatog men aharik kara,
7 Tuni daga" na khdn; Khuda
ihattliun men nahin uraya. jala;
kyiinki admi jo kucbh bota hai, ho hi
k%ga.
H Is liye ki jo koi apne jinm ke liye
bota hai, so jism se kharibi lauwega ;
ON, VI. faJthr karUl.
aur jo Riih. ke liye l>ota hai, Hiih se
Ikuiii's1i;i ki zindagi pawega.
9 liainen chaliiye ki achcb.be kain
karno men sust ua boweg ; kyiinki
agar ham suat ua hoii, to bar waqt
kdtcrjge.
io Pas jahan tak ham dari w pdwen,
sab se neki karun ; khas» kar uu se jo
ahi i iman hain.
11 Tum dekhte ho ki main ne
tumben kaisii bara khatt upno hath ae
likhahai.
12 Jitne log jism ke b*aq mag
neknami ehdhla hain, we zabardasti
mruharn khatna karwdte hain, sirf
itne waste ki we Muaih ki salib ki
babat satasi na jai-n.
L8 Kyiinki we to jo khatna karwdle
tihari'at ko hifz nahin karto ; par
chdhtc hain ki tum khatna kurwiio.
la ki we tumbare jism ki Lahat lakhr
k aren.
14 Par bargiz na bowe ki main
fakhr karun, inagar apne Klimlawand
ViHii' Masih ki salib par, j;s se dunyd
■■'■■■■.■■ ii.p. ■ i.i, Liur ii lain diiuya
ke age.
lt> Kyimki Masih Yifid' men na
makhtuni kiu:hb iiai, ua na-nuikiiu'ini,
baiki navi paidaish sliart hai.
16 Aur jitne is qiuuin par chalte
hain, salitnati o rahm un par airr
Khuda ke larael par huwon.
17 A'go ko koi mujhi) taklif na de :
kviinkj m-i.in apne ludan ; ■ ( r Klimia-
wand YibiV ke se dag liye hue phirta
hun.
18 Ai bhaio, baman Khudawand
Tisii' Masih ka faal tuniba'ri nilion U
aith rahe. A'iuin.
1 Yih khatt. CJalation ko rasul ne
Rum so likb hheja.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' KHATT
AFSlON m
'<■•■■
±Jy
T BA'B.
PU'LUS, jo Khuda ki ruam
YiKir* Masih kA ra^dl hai, un
rauqaddas logon ko jo Afasus rneij
hain aur Masih Yisti men. imlndAr
ham:
2 Hamdre BAp Khuda, aur KhudA-
wand Y isu' Masih ki taraf se fazl aur
salAmati tum par howen.
3 Mubarak hai Khuda, aur hamdre
Khuddwand Yisti' Masih kA BAp,
ne ham ko Masih men AsraAni jagahon
ke <l:Lnrtiyan har tarah ki ruhani
harakat lwi.klis.lii :
4 Chunduchi ua ne hara ko hina
e'Alam ke peshtar us men ilmu liyi,
tdki ham us ke busu'ir mtihabbat nien
pak aur be-'aib howen :
5 Ki us ne pahle se hainAri babat
yon muqarrar kiya, ki ham us ke nek
irade ke mtiwAriq Yisu' Masih ke
' wasile uh ke le-gAlak howen;
G Ta lu us ke fazl ke jala-1 ki ta'rif
. howe, jis fazl ne uu nehuinen ua piyare
men qnb]iliyat bakhshi.
7 Ham us men hoke us ke khun
ke w:lmIc si.- elihutkara, ya'nu, gunihon
wki mu'afi, us ke fazl ki daulat ke
ii)iitabu| pAtc hain ;
'■6 Jiae us ne hamAri taraf kamal
hikmat o imliyAz ko sAth harhayA ;
9 Ki uh no apni marzi ke bhed ko,
apne nek irade ke muwAfitj, jo a^e hi
se ap iimn thahrdyd tbi, ham par ndhir
L^- kiyd:
10 Ki wuh waqton ke piiro hotie ke
1*50
iriti/dm par sab chizon ke sije, k h wah
we jo Aamanon par, khwdh wejozamin
par hain. Masih men milawe :
11 Jis men ham ne blii us ke irade .
ke muwAfiq, jo apni marzi o maslahat*
se sab kuclib karti hai, Agu bu muqar-
rar hoke roirds pai ;?>.:
12 TA ki ham, jinhon ne pable Masih
par bharuna kiyi, us ko jalai ki sitdisb.
ke ba'is howon,
13 Usi men tum bhi ah Amil biie,
jinhon ne kalam i haqq, jo rumliii-i
najat ki khushkhabari hai, «unA hai ;
aur us hi men bhi hoke tum ne, jo
iman lae, Ruh i Quda ki, jis kA wA'da
hiid, nmlir pai ;
14 Wtibi hamdre mirAs pAne kd
Iwii'dna hai, jab tak ki khande tuioij
ki khaldsf na ho, td kt us ke jaldl ki
siljiiwli hnwe.
15 ls liye main bhi us imdn kd hal
sunke, jo tum men Khuddwand Yihu'
par hal, aur us inuhabbat kA, jise tum
sab miiqaddas logon se rakhte ho,
1G Tiimhiiri babat shukr kara A, aur
apni du'Aon men tumheij yad karna,
nahin chhortA;
17 TA ki hamdre KhudAwand YisiV
Masih kA Khnrid, jo jalAl kA BAp hai, f
tumben us ki kdmil pahchAn mcy..
hikmat aur mukaslial'a ki ruh bakhfche:
IH Aur ki tumbilre dil ki Aukhen
roshan hojdwnn, ki tum sanijho kius
ke buldne men kj-A hi ummed hai, aur
us ki jalAlwAli mirds, jo muqaddasorj
ke liye hai, kyA hi daulat hai ;
ly Aur ham men jo iman lAo hat-j
mU kame
kyd hi u» kii kamal bani ssur hai
ki uh baji qudrat ki tdslr ke rauwarki,
20 Jo U8 ne Masih mep zahir ki,
jah uso nuirdon nion sg jildyd, aur
•I- n' 'liiliine aaindni makanon pai'
btthaya,
21 Aur sdri hukiimat, aur ikhtiyar,
»ur riydsat, aur khdwindi par, aur bar
«k ndm par jo ria elrf is jahdn men,
baiki dtiuwalo jahdn men bhi, liya jata
hai, buland kiya :
22 Aur aab kucbb us ke panwon
tala kar diya, aur U» ko kalisiyo ku
23 Wah us ki badan, aur us ki mn-
muri hai, jo sab kuohh sab men bharta
hai.
II B'AB.
AUR ub ne tumben bhi, jo khataon
aur guuahog ke sabab murda
tho, zinda kiya ;
2 Jin men tum dge ia jabau ki
ravish par, hawa ki hiikiiuiat ko sardar,
ya'ue, ua ruh ki tuah jo ab na-farmau-
lardar logon rneri t Ah i r karti hai, clialto
the:
3 Jin ko (krmiyan ham sab ko sab
apne jism k i sliuhwatori ko Bdtfa llndft
jaili guzrante, aur tan mari ki khwah
ishen puri learto the, aur diusron ki
aijiniiid tabi'at so gazab ke farzaud the.
4 Par Khudd ne, jo rabm men gani
hai, apnl hari inuhanbat se, jia
ne haiu ko piyar kiya,
5 Ilam ko, jo «undhon ke sabab
murda the, Al usili ko sath jilayi, (lum
fn?.l lii so bath gaye ; )
b' Aur us ne nun ko us ko sath
utbaya, aur Masih Yisii' mea tfautdJ
kiyo buu a-Hiiuiiij' makanan par us ke
tith bithaya:
T Ta ki wuh apni U3 mihrbani sn ju
Masih Yisii* men ham pir hai, ancwale
samdne men apno fazl ki bo-nikayat
daulat ku dik lui wo.
K Kyunki tuin fo-zl ke sabab iman
lako bich gaye ho: aur yih tuu sl-
nahin : Khudd ki baldisliish hai
251
AFST'ON, IL kd/arz.
9 Aur yih a'amal ko sabab se mihiu.,
ua lio ki ku i takrir kare.
10 Kyunki ham us kikarigarihain,
aur Masih Yisii' men buke achchhe
kdnion, ke wasto paida lule, jin ko liye
Khudd ao haincn age taiyar kiya tha,
ta ki haru unheu kiya kare n.
11 Is waato yad karo, ki tum ago
ism ki ni.sliat gaii-qaumwale the, liH
ti we jo dp ko Makhlun kahU) hatrj,
jin ka khatna jisnii aur bath se hiiii,
tum ko Na-mak htiin kahte thej
12 Aur yih, ki us waqt Masih se
juda, aur Israel ki jumhuri saltanat sq
;, aur wa'do ke 'ahdon se bahar,
na-ummedi, aur dunyd men bu
Khudd the :
13 Par ab Masih Tisu' men hoko
tum, jo age ddr the, Masih ke lahii ke
sabab se nazdik bo gaye.
14 Kyunki wuhi hamari sulh hai,
jia ne do ku ck kiya, aur us diwar ku,
jo darniiyan tbi, dhd diya ;
15 (Jbunanclii api ia jism dekadush-
inl ko, ya'ne, flbari'at ke bukmon
aur rnemon ko, kho diya; t» ki wuh
aulh kiirwiiku do se ap ineg ek naya
siin liiinawe;
10 Aur ap inen dushmani milakc
salib ko sabab se douon ke ek tan
banakar Khudd ao rnilawe :
17 Aur us no aku tumben jo diir
tim, aur uuhen jo nazdik the, sulh ki
klui*!ikliabari di.
18 Kyiioki us hi ko wasile ham
donon ck bl Ruh se Dap ke pas dakhl
patu bain.
10 0u ab tum begana aur musafir
iiiihin, baiki mui^uddiison kohamshahri,
aur Khudd ke gharano ko ho ;
20 Aur raeiilon aur nabios ki neo
p:ir, jabdn Visii' Masih dp kono ka
sira hai, radde ki tarah utbde gaya
ho;
21 Jis se siiri 'imiirat pk pdth jnrkar
muqadda» haikal Khudawand ku liye
utbi,i jdti hai:
22 Aur tum bhi us men hoko auron
U» hhtd ka khuljand, ki AFSI'ON,
ke sath banae jate ho, ta ki Ruh ko
wasile se Kkuda ke liye makan bano.
III BA'B.
I S waste main Putus tum gair-ii a uni-
on ke liye Yisii' Masih ka qaidi
liur,:"
2 Agar turn ne guna hn, ki mujlio
tumharc Uye Khuda ke fazl ki kar-
rawii di :;ni ;
3 Ki ua ne ilham m us bhcd ko
mujh par khola; (chunanchi main
B> KO i bofS DMg age likhi,
4 Jise tum parhke j;iu sak I» lio ki
main Masih ka bhed kis qadr samajh-
ta hun,}
5 Jo agle zamannij BMfl bani A'dam
ko ia tarah na ma'him hua, jis tarah
uh ke minpldan rasiilon aur nabion
par Ruh se ah zabir ho -jaya;
tt Ki gair-i]aumcn Injil ke wasile ee
miras ruen sliiirik. aur badan DUD
sharnil, aur us ke wa'de men, jo Masih
ke sabab.se hai, wijhi h<uj :
7 Aur Khuda ke fazl ke in'am Be, jo
uh ki qudrat ki tAsir so niujho inila
hai, main ia Injil ka khadirn liiin.
H Mujlw jo siir-e haqirtarin muqad-
dason ae haqir hi'iu, v ih fazl 'inayat
hua, ki main gair-q*umon ku darmiyan
Masih ki U:-qiyaa daulat ki kluishkha-
Iwiri diin ;
U Aur Bab paryih bat roshan karun,
ki us bhed men ibirkst kysokar boti
liiii. jn a/al ko Khuda men, jis ne sah
kuchh YiaiV Masih ae paidi kiya,
pnsliida tha:
10 'ia ki ab fealisiyo ke wasile se
Khuda ki gtifiigBB liikTimi liiikuiualoii
aur riyawiton par, jo asmani makanon
men hain, zahir howe,
11 Ds irade ke mu'abiq ji* ko us nc
hamaro Khuda wand Yisii' Masih lu
men azal se kiya:
12 Ohuninchi ham ua men hoko be-
parwA hrie, aur u« par iman lane se
bharose ke &at!i dukai !.>Li rakhte hain.
13 Pas main iniunnt karU hun ki
tum mori inuaibaton ko Babah, jo tuin-j
252
III, IV. gilir -'jtimncn najdt pawetyfe. I
hari khatir hain, su>t mathoo, kyunki
ye tumhare liye 'iz/ai. Kain.
14 Is waste main hatuare Khuda-
wariil Yisii' Masih ko Bap ku dge apne
ghutnc tekta hi'in,
U (Ki UI setamamkhandan saman
aur samin par kahlata hai,)
16 Ki wah apne jalai ki daulat ke
muwafiq tumben, yih de, ki (uin us ki
lliili se aplu l'dtini iusauiyat meii bahu t
lii zorawar ho iao ;
17 Aur ki Masih tumharedilon men
iman ke wasile se baso ; aur ki tum
nhabbat men jar rwida karke, aur neo
d.ilko,
18 Sara muqaddas logorj samet ba-
kiulhi Kumajh sako, ki us ki cliauran,
aur lamban, aur galirao, aui1 finoDU
kitni Uni ;
19 Aur Masih ki muhabbat ko, jo
jiiniic se bhi bahar hai, jin sako, ta ki
tum Klmdaki s;iri bfaarpmi tak bhar
jau.
20 Ab ur ko jo aisa qiidir hai ki jo
kuchh ham mangle, ya khiyil karte
hain, us se nihayat ziyada, uh qudrat
ke muwafii] jo iiuiu nieii tiisir karti, kar
sakbi hai,
'Zl Us ko kalisiye ke darnuyan
Masih YisiV men paeht dar pusht
ahad tak jalai howe. A'min.
IV BA3,
PAS main jo Khudawand ke liyp
qaidi ln'.n tum se iltimas karti
lilin, ki jis bulahat. se tum bulac gaye,
us ki< mnnasiD chalo,
'l Kamal khaksdri aur farotani ke
s4th, ?abr karke, muhabbat se ek dfisre
biirdftsht karo ;
3 Aur koidiish karo ki l!iih ki
yagdnagi sulh ke hand si- barui h i nihe.
1 Ek badan, aur ck Ruh hai, chun-
anehi tumben bhi, jo bulai' gaye b0)
apne bulae jane sc ek hi ummed hai;
S Ek Khudawand, ck iman, ek
bajitisiua,
B Ek Khudi jo aab ka Kap, aur sab
; W bu H/art. AF8I't% IV.
■ u|>ar, iiur siab ke danniyon, aur tum
■
7 Par Imm mcrj so har ek k<> Maafl)
n u ke Kwii ke muwafiq fa/.l
nayat h di hni.
S Ia wSate «uh knhta hai, ki Us ne
unche par charbku qaid ko qaid kiya,
aur idmiorj ko iu'am diye.
9 (Par tis ka ujiar charhna, siwa us
ke aur kya hai ki wuh pahlc zamin
ke niche mra?
10 Wuli Jo utra so wuhi hai jo sari;
iamanon [>ar cliarha, ta ki sah chizon
ku bharpar km.}
11 Aur uh no ba'zon ko rasul, aur
ba'zon ko nabi, aur baV.on ko Injil ke
tnanadi-kaniovr alc, aur ba'zon ko cthar-
wahe, aur ba'zon ko ustad uiuqarrtir
kar diya ;
; 12 Ta ki muaaddas log khidmat ke
kimmen irasta halo jawen, aur Masih
ki badan l'aulii jiie;
13 Jab tak ki ham sah ke sah iman
aur Khuda ke Befe ki pahcb.an k
reg&nagl tak, aur k'amil insan, ya'no
Kasih ke pura qadd ke audaz talak
na pahunihen:
11 T« k i ham rtpc kolarkenarubon,
ki ci'liiu \,i luiikkiiilif liitwiion co, auj
idniiorj ki pechbazi aur KiirDrah-karno-
wtilo manstibon ko baiidhne men ur
ki daginjUi kb, maujoii ki tarah, uch-
halte bahte phirerj ;
16 Baiki muhabbat ke pairan iiokr
u» men, ju sir hai, ya'no, Masih men
har tarah se barhte jawen.
](i Uh w airi badan, har pk 'azi
ko band ke jutne se khiib paiwaste
aur iuazbi.it hokELr, inuwaiiq us tasir
ke jo ba qadr har juz ko ni li hai,
kuil ko barhata hai, nur niuoabbal
men aptii taraqqi kartii jata" hai.
17 u Bye mu. n jrUl knhta hiin.aur
Klnida«and ke age gawah ki taruh
jata deti htln, ki tum ago ko aisi chal
na clialn, juiso aur gair-qaumcii apfiJ
i batil 'aql ke muwafiq chalti hain ;
IH Ki.uu kf 'aql tarik ho gayi hai,
253
NeM kirne ki t
lihat.
aur wo na jalialut ku sabah j.i uii meu
hni, nur apue dilorj ki sakiiti ke bi'is,
Kluulii ki ziudagi se juda imin :
11) Lisbon ue iud boke au ko shah-
wat-i>ari)sti ke supurd kiya, la ki har
taruh ku gandi kam h i re se karen.
20 Par tum ne Maaih ki aiai ta'lim
iiah'm M&i ;
2L Agar tum ne to us ki suni ho,
aur uh ae ta'lim pil ho, us sachai ke
mutabio, jo Visii' menlmi:
89! K i timi agle chalan ki babat us
purani tnsaniyat ko, jo inreb-daaewaH
ahaliwaton ke sabab se kJwib lnii aaf,
utaro;
23 Aur apni Hamajh aur tahi'at ki
nialmt nayo bano ;
24 Aur nayi insinlyat ko.jo Khuda
ke Q3uw4fiq nUtbaai wir haq!qi paki-
zagi men paida lii'ii. pahino.
26 Ts liye jhiith chliorkn har ek
shakhs a|>no parnsi se sach bole, ki
hain to apas m^n ek dilsro ko 'azu
hain.
-\i Ousse to ho, par gunah na karo ;
aisi na bo ki suraj duba aur Luni khafii
ke khata niho:
27 Aur Shainln kn jagah na do.
28 Cbori karrewaiii. phir chori na
kare, baiki achchba peaba iklitiyiir
karke haihon se rnihnat kare, ta ki
muhtaj ko kochh de sakp.
2i) Koi gandi bat tumhare inurih se
na nikle, baiki wuh jo zariiri taraqqi
ke liye iu'licbhi thahre, ta ki sunne-
walim ko l'iiida bakhshc.
30 Aur Khuda ki Ruh i mnqaddas
ko, jis se tuin par khaliai ke din tak
uuilir Inii, raiijida na karo.
31 Sari karwahat, aur gazah, anr
-'■•si. BUI gul, aur badgoi, laroam
badkhwahi tamet, tum se dur kiyu
ja\u;n :
3"J Aur tum ek dusre par mihrban
aur dardmand ho, aur ek dvkre ko
iiakhsha karo, chuuaiiehi Khttdi ue
hhi Masih ko liye tuinhorj bakhsha
Ii-jhat vtnfardiz M, AFSI'<
V BAU
PAS tum 'aziz farzandorj ki tarah
Khuda ke pairau ho;
2 Aur muhabbnt bc tdialo, jnise
Misili ne bhi liarri so ri5iili.il -1 ii ki
aur kbushbu ke liye hatnare 'iwaf
men apne ta,m Khuda ke Age nazr aui
rjurbau kiyd.
3 Aur hardmkdri, aur har tarah ki
ndpdki , yd Idlnch ka, tum men zikr tak
iia ho, jaisa muqaddas logon ko muna-
si b hai ;
4 Aur be-sharuii, aur behfida-gof,
ya thatthebdz! jo na-munisib hai, na
howe, l>alki bantat slnikriiuzari.
5 Kyi'mki (uni fco yih jante ho, ki
kisi haramkdr, ya ndpdk, ya ldlchi '
fa but-iiaraat hai, Masih aur Khudi ki
Ltfdaaunt rn«n mirat- tiahiii hai.
6 Kol tum ko belu'ida baton se
bhuldwA na de; kyi'mki aisi bdturj ke
sabab Khuda ka gazab mi-farmani ke
fiiv.aiidi'Ti par partd bah
7 Pas tum un ke sharik ruat ho.
H Kyt'mki tum a«j« tdriki llii', p.ir
ab Khuda men hoke mi r ho: eo nur
ke farzandon ki tarah chalo:
if (Ib liye ki Ruh ka pbal jo hai,
kamal khubi, aur niatbazi, aur aachdi
hai;)
10 Aur darydft karte tto ki Khu-
diwatid ko kya khush dtd hai.
11 Aur tri-riki ke lA-hasdl kamorj
men sharik mat ho, baiki beshtar mi
ko malAmat lu karo.
12 Kyimki un ke poshida kamoii
kd zikr bin karnd sharm hai.
13 Aur sdri chizen jo maldinat ke
Idiu hain, roahnl se zahir hotl hubj ;
fcyiinki har ek eliiz jo roshan karli,
roshni hai.
14 Ia liye wuh kabtd hai, Are d, tii
jo sotd hai, jd£, aur nnirdon mcn so
uthj ki Mawlli tujhe roshan karena.
15 Pas khabardiir, tum dekh bhalke
chalo, naddnon ki tarah nahfn, baiki
d;imi->n ki nidnind,
~2fi4
l±£> V, jojoru, o khasam jxir hc'r.
16 Aur W&qt ko ganimat jAno, ky-
drjki din bure hain.
17 Is wiate tum be-tamfz na rahu,
hilki HUnJho ki KhudAwand ki mani
kyd hai.
18 Aur shardb ptke matwdle na ho,
ki us meri kkarAbi hai ; baiki Riih w
bbar jdo ;
19 Aur dpas men zabur, aur git, aur
rrihdnf gazalen, gAyd karo, aur apne
dil men Khuddwand ke hye gdtc ba-
jdte rahu ;
20 Aur hamesha aab baton merj
bamdre Khuddwand Yisff Masih ke
nam se Khudd Bdp ke shukrgti/.ar
raho;
2 1 Aur K lnidd ke khauf se ek diisra
ki farmdnbard.lri karo.
22 Ai 'aura t o, npnc sbauharon ki
ajal farmdnbardar rabo, jaise Kliud:L-
wand k I.
23 Kyunki shauhar jord kd sir hai,
jaise ki Masih bhi kalisiye kd air, aur
wub badan kd bachdnewaia hai.
24 Tau bhi jaise kaiisiya Masih ki
furmaiibarddr hai, waisy hi jorudn bhi
har batmen apne ibauhirag ki haweg.
25 Ai mardo, apni jornori ko piyar
karo, jaisd Masih ne bhi kalisiye ko
piydr kiyd, aur apne ta,in ua ke badle '
diyd^
Td ki tib ko pani ke gusi se
kaldm ko sdth saf karkc mi^addas
karo,
27 Aur use apne p&s ck aisi jaldl-
wdli kaiisiya hdzir kar rakhe, ki jis
men ddg, yd chin, yd, kol aisi obi» uu
ho, luilki jo muqaddaa aur b^-'aib ho.
28 Yiin hi mardon par ldzlm hai,
apai jorflon ko aisd piyar karen,
isd apne badan ko. Jo apni jorii ko
piyar liartd hai, so ip ko piydr kartd
hai.
29 Kyfmki kisi ne apne jism re
kabni dushmani na ki; baiki wuh
use pdlti aur postd hai, jaifid Khudd-
wand bhi kalisiye ko ;
30 Kyilnki haru us ke badan ke
Muihton par AFSIt
't/A, aur us ke goslit aur haddion meii
se kain,.
31 UsI sabab so aiimi apne bdp aur
md ko chhorega, nur apui jon'i so inilii
rahegd, aur we donor ek tan honge.
32 Yih. bhed bara hai ; par main
Masih aur kalisiye ki bdbnt bolta ki'in.
33 Ba bar hal har ek tum men se
apni apni joni ko aisd piydr kare
i'aisd dp ko; aur 'aurat apne shauliar
id 'adab kara.
VI TU'It.
Al farzando, tum Kkuduwand kfl
liye aptio md bfip ke tabi' raho :
kyiinki yih wajib hai.
2 Tu apue md bap ki 'izsat kar; ki
yih pakla kukm bal, jia ku «atli wa'da
hai ;
3 Td ki tera likuid ho, aur zamiu
par teri 'unir daras howe.
4 Aur, ai baekehewalo, tum apne
Amaadog ko guna nmt dildo; par
Kkuddwand ki tarbiyat aur nasihat
karke un ki parwarisk karo.
5 Ai naukaro, tum uu ko, jo jism ki
nisbat tumharc kbawiiid hain, apne
diiuri ki sulUi se, darte aur thartharate
hiie, aise fanuanbardar ko, jaise Masih
ko;
6 Aur admi ke khushdmad-karnc-
walon ki tarah dikhano ko nahin,
baiki Masih ke handon ki mankid, dil
kc Khtidd ki mani par chalo;
7 Aur khushi se naukari karo, usc
Khuddwand ki jdnkar. na ki admiun
ki:
H Ki tum jdnte ho ki jo kol kuchh
nchchhd kam karega, kyd guldm kyd
dzdd, Khuddwnnd M waisd hi pftwcgd.
9 Aur, «i khdwinilu, tum bhi un se
sisa hi' karo, aur d b, -mi k i dene se bdz
ilo; kyi'mki tum jAste ho ki tumhard
bhi Khawiud dsinan par hai ; aur wuh
kisi ke zahir par nazar nahin kartd.
10 Baqi, ai mara bhtfo, Kbuddwand
aur us ki tpadrat ki qiiwat men zord-
war ban o.
255
VI. razm-peslia jo kota,
1 Khuddkendre kathydr bdndkn,
ta ki tum Sbaitdn ku manaubon ke
muqahil qaiiu rab sako.
1- Kyrinki hameo khnn nur jism w
kuakti kami iiabin, baik] hukumaton
su, aur riydsaton se, aur is dunyd ki
tariki ke iutiddrwdlon se, aur shardrat
ki ruhon se jo aflaki makdnon men
hain.
13 II wdste tum Khudd ke sdre
haihydrufckd lo, ta ki tum buro din
men mitaibaJa kw sako, aur sabkdm-
ori ko anjdm deke qdim rah sako,
14 Ib liye tum apni kamar saehal
se kaske, aur rdstbdzi kd bait tar pa-
bin)»,
15 Aur panwon men Kiilh-bnkhfih-
newdli Injil ki chaldki ko jiite bdnilhke,
16 Aur un sab ke lipar iman ki
sijtar lagake, jia so tum us shiirir ke
sdra jalte tiron ko bujbd aako, qdim
raho.
17 Aur luvjdt kd khod, aur Tti'ih k(
talwdr, jo Khudd kd kaldin hai, le
lo;
8 Aur kamdl drzd o minnat ke
adtli har waijt Rflb men d u 'd mdngo,
aur us ko liye sab muqaddason ke
«rasta nihdyat musta'idd hoke aur
minnat karke jdgte raho ;
10 Aur mere wdste bhi, tiki mujhe
kalam karne ki tauat 'indyat ho, ki
meri munb be-iiarwai po kliul jdwu, td
ki main is Injil ke bhed ko,
20 Jis ke liye zanjir ee jakra hud
elebi hiin, zdhir kn.riin : ki main us ko
bedkarak aiaa kahily, jaisd mujhe kah-
n.i .iiiv. hai.
21 Tur is libdz bc ki tum bhi nicre
ahwdl kojdnoj kimainkyiinkaraii^at-
bat-ari knrtd. liun. 'I'ukiiikus, jo piydrd
bhdi aur Klmddwand fed mu'alabar
khddim hai, tum ko sab baten batuega;
22 Jino main tie tumbdrc pds is
wdste bhejd, ki tum hamd.ro nhwdl ko
jdno, aur ki wuh. tumbdre dilon ko
taaalli do.
23 Bhdion ki salamati ko, aur Bdp
fuluB un H Hhit FILIPPJ'OEi, I. Khuda, ka thuh-r karfa.
Khudaki aurKhudawaiidYisiVMasihjruibbatrakhto jo mitnuke uabil nahm
ki taraf He iman koa.ith niuhabbat bbi hai.
howe. t Yih
24 Fazl un aab par howe jo Viamare
Khudawand Yisii' Manih se aisi mu-l
.... kliatt Afsion ko rasul ne
Riim se Tukhikus ko hath likli
Miuja.
PU'LUS RASUL KA' KHATT
FILIPPION KO.
I TU'il.
Y ISU" Masih ko bandim Puitis aur
Timtauski jiinih se Fili|i]>i sh.dir
ku tin sab nraaaddaBon ku, jo Masih
Yisu' men sliamil hairj, nigahbauon
aur khadimon saniet :
2 Fa/,1 aur salam&ti hamilre B<4f>
Khuda aur Khudawand Yisli* Kasih
ki taraf se tum par howen.
3 Main jabjab tumben yid karra,
apne Khuda ka slmkr baja lata hiin,
4 Aur apni har ek du'a men. khushi
Mehainenha timi sab ke livedu'iinatigrta
hiUj,
6 Ih liye ki tum aunal roz sg bj tak
Injil men sbarik raba ;
6 Aur luujhe >ih yaipn hai ki wul
jis ne tum mm nek kain sburu' kiya
hai, ao Yisu' Masih ke din tak kart.i
ehala jaega" :
T Chunanchi nmn:isih hai ki main
timi Bab ke huqrj mag aisa hi samjh-
iin ; kyi'mki tum mere dil men. ho,
aur mcri /.anjiron, aur Injil ki babat
mere "uzr men aur uno subiit pihtui-
chane men, tum sab men ui'ainat men
ahatik ho.
8 Ki Khuda" merS Mwih hai, ki
main Yisu' Masih ki si ullat rakhke
timi eab ka mushtaa hiin.
i) Aur main yih du'a karta nun, ki
256
tumharf muhabbat, danai aur kamal
«Wftr ke salk, siyada barhti chali
jawe;
10 Ta ki tum nn chizon men, jin
men farq hai, imtiytiz kur jauo ; aur
Masih ke din tak khalis raho, aur
thokar na kkao;
11 Aur raatbazf ko phalon se, jo
Yisii* Masih ke salmb se hain, lada
raho, ta ki Khuda ka jalai aur m ki
si titis h howe.
12 Aur, ai bhaio, main chahta rum
ki tum jano ki jo mujli |>arpuzra hai,
so Injil ki ziyiLda tara<jqi ke liye waqi'
bua;
13 Yaharj tak ki Q;iisarf sipahion
k! sari chhaoni aur baui sah logou
mon mashhur hna, ki main Masih ke
waste bandha hdti ;
14 Aur akearoa no un men so jo
Khudawand men bh&i hain, mori zan-
jiron se diler hoke Iw-khmif kalam
bolmt ki ziyada jur.at paida ki.
15 Ba'ze log to dan aur jhagre se,
a'ir ba'sa nukniyat se, Masih ki manddi
karte baio :
16 Jbagpflfi to saf dil se Masih ki
Injil nuhia sunate, baiki is khiyal se
ki meri zanjiron par aur ranj hajha-
17 Par muhablwtwale yih jankar
Ptdut unhen nasihat kartd, FILIPPI'Oli, H
Injil sunat* liain, ki main Injil sabit
kurne ke waste munarrar hi'ii lilin.
18 ras kyi hai? bar tarah &e Masih
ki khabar di jati Uni, khwih makkiri
hb, khwih sachai ee, aur main us moij
khu'sh hiin, baiki khush rahtingi bhi.
19 Kyi'mki main janti, ki tuinhiri
iln'a aur YimV Masih ki Ruh ki uiadad
se U ki anjam rncri uajit hogi ;
20 Chunaochi mori tawaqqii' aur
ummed yih hai, ki main kisi bit men
sharminda na htiijgi, baiki kamal
ililr-Ti so, hamcsha ki tarah ab bhi,
Masih mere badan so, khwih mere
jite, k h wah mere mfie par, buzuigi
piwegi.
21 Kyiigkizindagi mcroliye Masih
hai, aur maut nafa hai.
22 Par agar meri jism meii zirda
rahn&yihi meri niiliuat k» phal huwe,
lu niuiij nahin jauti ki kiso ikhtiyar
karun.
23 Ki main do bdton ki hand men
jnkrihun; mujhe araii hai ki rakhsH
pilin, aur Masih ke sith ja ruh uji ; ki
yih bahut bihtar hai:
24 Par jism men rahni tumhi i
khitir us so ziyada zarrtr liai.
26 Aur main yih yarpvi janti min
ki main rahiinga, aur t u m aab ke siih
rhahrungi, li ki tum Iman men barh-
te jio, aur khush raho ;
26 Ki tuinhiri fakhr, jo Masih
Visti* ki Libat, mere &abab se hai, su
mere tumhire pas phir ane se ziyada
howe.
27 Sirf Masih ki Injil ke muwdBq
guzrin karo; ta ki main khwih iiiri,
: itu tumben dekhtin, khwah na aun,
tumhara yih ahwal sumir, ki tum ok
riih mori qiim b» rahe, aur Injil ke
iiiiiiu ke liye ek-jan hoke kushish kar-
te ho;
■_8 Aur yih ki mukhalifon se kisi
bit men haul naliin khilo; kyunki
yih un ke liyo halakat ki, par tuU)
hiire wiste Khudi ki taraf se n&jib
ki, nisbi n hai,
257
Jri tm S'iJ ek-dil- rrihfn.
2» Kyiiiiki Masih ki bibat tumben
yih bakhshi gaya, ki tum na faqat u»
par iman lao, baiki yih ki us ki kha-
tir dukh bhi pio;
30 Ki tum us taur par jin-fishini
karte ho, jia taur par Luiu na mujho
karte dekhi, aur ab sunte bo ki main,
k arti hiin.
II BAT..
SO agar Masih men kuchh dilisi,
aur muhabhat ki kuchh iasalli,
aur agar Kuu ki kuchh ririqat, aur
agar kuchh rahm aur dardmandi hai,
2 To meri khushi ko piiri karo, ki
ok Ki mizaj rakho, ek si muhabbat
rakho, ek-jan hoo, ek-dil hoo.
3 Jhagro aur jhuthe fak.hr ae kuchh
ua karo, jiar khaksiri so ok diisrc ko
apue se bihtar jauo.
4 Tum men so har ek apne ahwil
par nahin, lialki har ek dusrun ke
ahwal par bhi libaz karc.
Pas timihard mi^ij wuhi howe
jo Masih Yimi' ki bhi thi :
6 Ki us ne, Khuda ki Biirat men
hoke, Khuda ko barabar huni gani-
uiat na jiiui :
7 Lckin us no iip ko nich kiyi, ki
khaditri ki surat pakri, aur insan ki
shakl bani :
8 Aur idmi ki Biirat mori zahir
hoke ip ko past kiyi, aur marne tak,
baiki salibi maut tak, farmiubanlar
rabi.
9 iBwasteKhudi ht ne usehalmt
nr&lil kiya, aur us ko asi nira, jo
sah mimon so buzurg hai, bakhsha:
10 TA ki Visu' ki nim leke har ok,
kyi ismaiii, ky» Kamitti, kyi we jo
zamin ke talo haitj, ghutni teke,
11 Aur har <■); /.ubati i'|tar kare ki
YW Mfiflfl) Klmdiwand hai, ti ki
Khudi liip ki jatil howe.
12 So, ai mere bbiio, jis tarah tum
hamesha farrnanbardiri karte ie ho,
usi tarah tum na sirf mori haziri mor.,
baiki ab meri ttir-himri mon, bahut
M
Putus ManOt ke Hye
pruppi'tw, in.
ziyada dart-a aur thartharate hde apiti ' kn \tye khadi
najat ke kAra kivo iao.
13 Kyt'mki KhudA M hai fa tam
men asar k arti, ki tum us ki nek
marzi ke mut&b\q chAho, aur kfeo bhi
karo.
14 Sah kAm be kurkurAo aur bin
takrir kiye ki
16 Ti ki tua be-ilzAm anr be-bad
lioku tirlii tirani pasat ke danniyao
Kiiudii ko be-'a-ib farzand bane raho
(jin ke bich tum nur ke manind jo
dunvi men hai chaniakie bo;
16 Ki zindagi ka kalam Hye hrfe
rahtc:) tA ki Masih ke diu meri barai
bo, ki meri daur aur mihnat be-faidf
ua ln'ii.
17 Par agar merA lahu bhi tumban-
iman ki cpjrbfini par aur ijb ki kbid-
inat men dhdlA jawe, tnu bhi main
khunh hun, aur tum Bab ke satEi
klaisbi karti hiin.
lrt Tum bbi waise M khuah ho, aur
mere bAUi khushi karo.
19 Aur imrjlto Khtidawand Yisd' se
yih ummed hai, ki Timtaus ko tum-
hAre pas jald bheji'm, ta ki tumhara
aiiwif daryAft karke meri bhi kiiatir-
jama'i h d.
20 Kydnki koi aieA ham-dil mere
sdth naiiiu, jo asaiatan tumkdre liye
likrmand huwe.
21 Ki 6ab apni apni cWnon ki ta-
taan men hain, ua un ki jo Yiaii' Masih
ki hain.
22 Lekin tum ue ki AzmAi lu'ii
kbijhi se waqif bo, ki jaise- b--ta baji
k« Mib, waiiso us ne mere s&iii Injil
ki khidmat ki.
23 Pas* main mnmedwar hun ki
jab apne fthwal kA aajfal dekbiiii, to
flJ/AUt u» Miej .hin.
-4 Aur mujhB Khudawand se ya-
ijiu hai ki mairj Sp hhf jali Aurj.
26 I'ar main ne Jpafmditus ko, jo
merA bhAi, aur haiu-kliidiiial., aur
ham-sipAbf, aur bomhAri blieja hria"
kaiinda, aur meri ilitiyuj r;ifa kanic
2n8
ntiqsdn ulkiUA.
hai, tum pas bhejr:A
zariir jaiia.
26 Ki wuh tum sab kA nipat musli-
rAq hni, aur ia wAste ki tum iie iis ki
bmiAri kii bal suiid thA, udAs rahta
tlil
27 Wuh to hiiuAri bo mame par
tba; par KbiiJA B* tu pai r;ibin kiyA,
aur faqat ua pnr iiahin, baiki innjli
|wir bhi, tA tia bowe ki main gam par
gam khAiin.
28 Somain ne uspbaro jatn BelihejS,
ta ki tum us ki do -bara m«JAqit bb
khiwh ho, aur mw» bhi jjam ghate.
::'-' Paa Hun m ko Kauttwand ke
sahab kaniAl khuslii bo qabi'\l karo,
ir aison ki 'iazat karo :
30 Is liye ki wuh Masih ko kdm
ke Waste tuarno par thA, baiki uh ne
apni Kindagi ko nacbfz jAnA, t A ki uh
kuini ko Jo nur'' iiium men uimliAri
khidmat men tl.i piirA kara.
" III HA'H.
BA'QI', ai mere bhAio, Khuddwand
meQ khuah raho. "Wuhi bAt
tumben pliir phir liklmA mere liye
taklif naliiij, aur tumhAre liye aalA-
matf kA ba'ia hai.
Kulton ge khabardAr raho, liad-
kAroQ se parhcz karo, katkiitkarne-
'41on so ohaakafl raho.
3 Ky i'iijki h;nji<]i kliahia hun heij,
jo nih i« KluidA ki 'ibadat karte hniri,
aur Masili ?hrf' par Kikhr karte haiu,
irjimu kA bharosA nahin rakhte.
4 Lekin main jiam kA hbarosA
rakh *akiA hun : agar aur koi jism
par bbarosi kar aake, to main ziyA<lft:
5 Ki merA khaina AthweB diu bna,
aur main Oawl ki anUd, liinyamin
ke flroe W, 'IbrAniou ka 'IbrAni, sha-
ri'at ki nislmt Fzriw him ;
'i liuiiat nun to kaluiyfl kA sati-
ui.'Willi'i, aur shari'at ki rAatbAzi men
be-'aib thA.
7 Lekin jitni chineii mero nafa ki
*Mti, main ne unhin ko Maaih ki
kbatir auqsui aamjhA.
JtminanMhi F [LIPIT
8 JJalki "min ab bb[ apne Kbuda-
wand Masih Vinil* ki pabchan ki
khubi ke sahab sab kuchh nuq^£.ti
samajhtd hi'm, jis ki khutir har chiz
ka nuq«an utlulysi, aur nnhen gambigi
5 'duta hnn, ld ki nudg Masih ko hiu)
9 Aur «s men paya jdun, npni is
rastbazi ke sdth nah i n jo sharfftt se
hai, baiki ih rastbazi ke sath jo Masih
par iman lauo se, 7**116, us rdstbazi
ke sath jo Khudd ki' taraf m iman ki
shart per milti hai ;
10 Aur ki rnain us ko, aur us ke ji
uthne ki qudrat ko, aur us ke sath
flukhon men sharik hono ko, daryaft
tanin, aur us ki maut so niuwafaqat
jutiili'i karun ■
11 Ta ki main kisi tarah se raur-
dou ke ji uthue ke darjc tak uahun-
chiin.
12 Aisa nabin ki main hanos pri
chuka, ya ab tak kami) dua : baiki
pieliha, kiye jati hi'm, td ki main us
chiz ko pakar bin, jia ke liye Visu'
Masih ue rnujbo pakrd.
13 Ai bbdio, inerd yib gumdn na-
hirj ki main pakar chuka hiin i par
itnd hai ki main un coizon ko jo
pichhe chhatin bhulke uu ke liyejo
igc liain bar h 4 Inia,
14 Sidba, nisbdn W taraf chala jdtd
hiin, ta ki main us sila ko, jis ke liye
Rhuda ne mujh ko Mo&ih Yisii' ki
ma'vifiit eo (ipar buldya, imun.
15 Pas haru men ee jitne kitmil
hain yihi khiyal rakhen ; aur agar
kisi bit men tumMra aur tarah kd
khjval lio, to KhudA use bhi tum par
iboi degi
1G Ba har h di jabati tak ham pa-
hunehe hait>, usi ke udrniu par qadam
mdren, usi ko khiyal karer..
17 Ai bhdio, tum ek sath meri
pniraui karo, aur im logon par, jo is
Utntine ke mtrwlfiq, ]o bain men
dekhte Im, chiilto hairj, gaur karo.
18 (K v Ariki bahuterc chalnewabs
259 ~
•ON, IV. H bdba(.
hiin. jin ka zikr main nc tum se bdr-
hii kiyi, aur ab ro roke kahtd bun, ki
we Masih ki salib ko dushman bain ;
10 Un kd BBJam haldkat hai, un
ka Klmda pet, un ka nang un ki bar-
ai hai, we dunya ki chizon par khi-
yal rakhte bain.)
20 Kyuriki hamdri mamlukat as-
mdu par hai, jnhan «i najdD-bakbsb-
newal» Kluidawand Yiea' Masih ki
rdh takte hain :
21 Ki mih apnl qudrat ki tdsir ke
mutdbiq, jis se wuh sab ko apno labi'
kar sakla liai, barndre kliaki badan ko
hadutke aptie jalali jiam ke mAniiid
Imndega.
IV RA'B.
I S waate, ai merc 'ada aur mnrgi'ib
bhain, jo meri khuwlii aur t aj bn,
ai piydro, tum Khvidawand men isi
tarah niazbul. rabo.
2 Main Yriodia so iltimds karta
hiin, aur Suntukhe se bbi.ki wo Khii-
ddwand men niuttafiq ur rie boweu.
3 Aur, ai sacbchc bam-kbidmat,
teri bhi minnat kartd hiin, ki ti'i un
'aura ton ki, jinhon ne mero eiih Injil
kl khidmat rneti koshisk ki, KkMnans
aur mere baqi hain-khidmatun sarnet,
jin ke irftm zindagi ko daftar men hain,
madad kar.
4 Khuddwand men bamesha khush
rabo : [iliir k'.iUla hiin, Khusb raho.
u Tuiuhdrd i'atidal sab ddmiori par
zabir ho. Kliiuldwaiid imzdik h;ii.
i! K'i.-i lat kd andesba na karo;
Uilki har ok bdt men tiiiubdri 'arz,
du'a. aur minnat we, Klmkrguzari ke
s;it.h, Ktunld H ki jdo ;
7 Aur Kbudd ki itmindn, jo sari
samajb se bahar hai, tumhdro dilog
aur khiydlon ki Masih Yisii' meg
nlmb-bini karegi.
5 Dd(|i, ai bhdfo, jitni chizen tacli
hain, aur jitni chizeri nnunisib hain,
aur jitni ehi/.eri riat baiu, aut- jttni
eliizen pdk bain. aur jitni diizou pa-
sandbla bain, aur jitui ebizofi bhali
Filippw
QULUSSrON, I.
i 'ini jati hain, agar kudih neki aur
:uchh ta'rif hai, to un batoti par gaur
karo.
9 Aur jo kuchh tura ne mujh se
sikha. aur qabtil kiya, Mi
dekhi, uh par 'amal knro; tab Kliuda,
jo snlli k:i Baui hai, tumhare satli
rahega.
10 Aur main Kbudawand men
bahut khitah hun, is waate ki mero
liye ab ittii muddat Ita'd tumhari fikr
phir sarsabz hui, jis ke irye tum agc
andeshamand the, j«r ditjw nahin
milt
11 Aisa nahin ki main muMaji ke
sabab kahta; kyiittki main ne y ih
sikbii, ki jia balut, men Ini n, usi par
risi rahim.
13 Main ghatna janta hun, aur
barhnabhi jauta hiin ; harek batmen
nur sah halaton iuuii, ser honc, bht'ikhe
rahne, bariuio aur ghatoe ki main ne
ta'lim pai.
13 Mnsihse, jomujhe taqntbakh.sh-
ta hai, main aab kuchh kar sakta hun.
14 Tau bhi tum ne bhala kiya, jo
dukh men msri rwadad ki.
lf> Pnr, ai Filippto, tum yih bhi
jante br>, ki Injil ki matiadi ke shurii'
nieti, jab mairi Maq>«lijniya se iiilf.il
aya, tab kisi kalisiye ne, siwa tum-
hari ke, dcno lene men mori madad na
ki.
16 Chunanchi Taasalunine men bhi
tum no ek do bar kuchh bhcja, ki
meri ihtiyaj raf'a ho.
17 Aisa nahin ki main in'am ch&hta,
baiki plial chahta hiin, jo tumhare
faida ke liye babut barh jiie.
18 Par mere pas nah kuchh, baiki
bahutaynt ke sath hai ; main bhara
hiin ; main ne tumhari bheji bui chiz-
ta IpafmditUB ko b&th se pain, ek
khushbu aur qurbani i maqbiil jo
Khuda k! pasancl hai.
lfi Ab mera Khuda apiti daulat ke
muwafiq jalai hi se Aiasih Yisti' men
tumhari har ok ihtiyaj raf'a karega.
20 Ilamaro K hu.lti aur Bap ka abad
ul abad jalai howe. A'uiiu.
21 Har ek nuiqaddas ko, jo Masih
Yisti' men hai, salam karo, AV e bhai,
£mere sath Itain, tumben salam kahle
tin.
22 Saro mufjatldas log, khusrisan wa
jo Qai«ar ke gbar ke hain, tum sab ko
salam kahte hain.
23 ilamare Kbudiwaiid Yisti' Masih
ka fazl tum sab par howe. A'min.
1 Yih khatt Filippion ko rasul ne
Inafruditus ke hath Rum se likh
bheja.
PULUS KASUL KA' KHATT
QULUSSI0N KO.
I B A 'B,
PULUS, jo Khuda ki marzi bb
Yisti' Masih ka rasul hui, aur
i'imtaus bhai, ki taraf se,
2 Un muqaddason aur Masih men
(mandar bhaton ko, jo Quloni meii
cair.; hainaro Bap Khuda aur Kliu-
260
dawand Yisu" Masih ki taraf se iazl
aur siiliiniati tumhare liye howeg.
3 Ham tumhari1 baqq men hamonha
du'a karke Khuda aur apne Khudi-
waad Yisii' Masih ke Bap ka' shukr
karte hain,
i (Jab ae ham ne suai ki tum
Pulut m» ke liyt du'd mangnc (JULUSSI'OiL, I- m 4o'j noAt» ti/ii.
i kydriyasatomkydmukhtdriyin, paidi
ki gayin ; ustri clnaon us sc, aur us ke
i liye paidd luiin :
Maaili Yind' par iman Ido, aur sab
inuqaddaa logorj ko piydr kartu lu s)
5 Us umined ke liye jo tirmhdru
wastc dsmdn par rakh dibori gayi hai,
{"ia kd zikr tura ne InjU ke kalam i
iaqq men sirna ;
6 Jo tum pas pahunchi, jaisc sdre
jahin men bhi, aur phal deti lini ;
uhundachi tumhdre daruiiyan l>li i , jis
din sc tum ne us ki suni, aur Khudd
ke Tazl ko sachchi tarah sc paaofatoa
hai:
7 Chunanehi tum ne haindre 'aziz
ham-khidinat Ipafras se, jo turuhdro
wdstc Masih kii diyanatdarkbadiin hai
aisd hi sikha;
H Usi ue tumhdri ruubabbat ku, jo
Kuli sp hai, ham par zaliir kiya.
9 So ham bM Jia diu se yih surid,
tumhdre wdste du'd mdngno sc, aur
yih 'ar/, k&rne se baz uahirj ate hairj,
ki tum tamam hikmat aur rdhini
samajb se us ki marzi ki pahchdu meri
kamal tak pahuncho;
10 Tdki tum Khudawand kl kdmil
razaroandi par laiq cha! «halo, aur har
ck nek kdiu men. phal late ralio, aur
Khudd ki pahchdu men tanqaj karo ;
11 Aur ub ko jalai ki tpidrat ke
mutabiq sab tarah ki mazbuti paidd
karo, U ki tam khushl ko sath har
surat se sabr a bafdasbt Uar sako ;
12 Aur Bap kd ahukr karte raho,
jis ne ham ko ia ldiq kiya ki mir meg
miujaddu logog ke adth miras kd hieaa
d4wbd :
13 Usi ue ham ko tdriki ke qabze
se chhuraya, aur apnu piydro Boto ki
bddshdhat lnen shdmil karayd;
11 Us men ham us ko labu ko sabab
se najdt, ya'ue, gundhon ki mu'dfl pdte
hain:
15 Wuh andokhe Khudd ki surat
hai, aur wuh sdri khilqat ka palauthd
hai :
16 Ky&nki usi se sdri ehfzon jo
asmdn aur zamiu par haiii, dekhi MH
au-dckhi, kvd takht, kyd hukuinateu,
261
17 A ui* wuh sab se dge hai, aur u?
se sdri chizon bahdl rahti hain.
18 Aur wuh badan, ya'ne, kalisiye
kd sir hai ; wuhi shurti' se hai, aur
murdon men mi palauthd hai, La ki .sab
bdton men us ka auwal darja ho.
19 Kyunki Bdp ko yih pasand aya,
ki sdrd kaind! us men base ;
20 Aur ki, us ke khtin ke sabab, Jo
salib par bahd, sulh kaike sdri obiaorj
ku, kyd we Jo samin par hai]), kya we
jo dmndn par hain, usi ke wasile apne
se mild le.
21 Aur tum ko bhi jo dge bcgdna,
aur bure kaiuim ke sabab dil se iTush-
man the, nb us ke jismdni badan sc
maut ke wasile mild liyd;
22 Td ki wuh tum ko muqaddas aur
lie-'aib aur bo-Uzam apuc h uzur ha/,:r
kare:
23 Ba-sharto ki tum basfl par bina
dalo htie sabit raho, aur us Injil ki
umined se.jisn tum ne stind, tal na
jao, jis ki mauddi har ek makhlilq ke
liye jo dsmau ke niche hai ki gayi ; aur
us lukd main Fi'iIuh khiidimTiug.
24 Ab main apni un musibattm si-
jo tumhdrewj^U- khiiiclita In'm kimr-h
iu'm, aur Masih ki uiiL-ukitcm ki kam-
tian us ke bidac ke, ya'nc, kafiatya
ke liye, apne jism se bhare detd bun :
25 Jia kalisiyp. kd main khadim
hua, chnnanchi yih mukhiari Khuda
ki taraf so mujbe tumhare liye mili,
td ki main Khudd ke kalam ko pura
aojdni ddn ;
26 Ya'ne, us bhcd ko jo agle za-
mduo se pu.sht ba pusht poshfda rahd,
par ab us ke muqaddas logon par
zdhir hiid:
27 Jin par Khudd ne zdhir karnd
chdhd, ki gair-qaumon ko liye nabbfld
ki bftahttut ki firdwani kyd hai: jo
yih hai, ki Masih tum men jaldl ki
uuimed hai :
M<wih ki pairaui men (Jl'LUSSl'ON, II.
lage rahnc hi/ny
2ti Jla ki khabar dtke bani har ofa
adui i ke na.tih.it kartu, aur bar ek
shakhs ko kaiii.il dii.uai m sikhate
haiti, ta ki ham har ek, ddmi ko Masih
Yisti' nierj kaoiil karko luizir karun :
2'.i Aur isi liye maio us ki us tasir
ke itiuwafiti, jo ijudrat ke sath mnjh
mm asar knrti hai, jan-fiehim m
iiiilmat karta hun.
II BA'B.
MAIN chahia lilin ki tiiro jano ki
tumhare aur uii ke wdslo Jo
Laudiqia men hain, aur un sah ke liye
jiuhon nc meri jismi sitrat nahin de-
khi, k ya hi jan-lishani karta. liun ;
a Ki un ke dilog ko tasalli fao, aur
we muhahbat so apaa meii gathe ra-
bun, ta ki we puri samajli ki tamani
daulat ko pahunebun, aur Khuda,
ya'ne, Bap, aur Masih ke bhud ki>
janun;
3 Jis men hikmat aur rna'rifat ke
sare khazane chhi|>e hain.
i Pa» main yih knhia hiin, ta na
howe ki kui adiui chikni ohupri batog
se tumben bhulawo.
5 Kyunki agarchi main jUui k
tiittbat eo diir, par ruh ki nishat a
tumliare pas not, aur tumhari tartib
baiat, aur tumliare imau ki niuzbiiti
ko, jo Masih par lsiye ho, dekhkt
kluish lniii.
6 Pas jaisa tiim ne Masih Vinil
Khudawand ko qabtil kiya, waisa h:
un men chalo :
7 Aur un men jar bandho, aur ua
par banae jiio, aur jaisi tum ne ta'liui
pai, iman men mas;bi.it lalio, aur us
ii.<:u nhuktgusSrf ke <saih taruqqi karo.
B Kliabardar, aisa na ho ki koi
failBiifi aur bchiidu fareb M jo Masih
ke r.iuwafiii nahirj, baiki bani Aiiniu
ki riw&yat aur dunjiwi 'ilm ke Uhtil
ke niuwafiq nun, tumben, h';t na le.
9 Kyunki Uliibiyat k,i sara kamal
us men mujassam lio raba.
10 Aur tum ub men, ju sari sardari
aur niukhtari ka sir hai, kiimil baue
lio:
11 Aur usi men tumhara aiia khst-
na hiiii, j<i hdth se uahiti, ya'ue, Masi-
bi kbatua, jfj jisimiui guualiun ku
badan u tar pheukua hai :
l'J Aur us ke sath baplisma men
garu ga-ye, aur usi nerj K.huda ki
qudrat lu par, ji.s uo us ko tuuidon
men ho jilaya, iman lake us ke sath
ji blii uthe ho.
13 Aur us ne tumhen, jo gunahon
aur apno jism ki iia-niakhtiiui h
rimrda tbe, us ko salh zinda kiya, ki
us ne tumhii.ru sah gumih bakk-sli
diyc ;
14 Aur hukmon ka daatawez, jo
haindra muklidlif tiia, liamiiri babat
mita dal.i, aur ua ko bich men so
uthake salib par kilen jarin ;
15 Aur hukumaton aur ri_v;isaton
ka i'jtidar chhin liya, aur unhen bar-
mala ruswa karke usi men un par
eliadiyana bajae.
Hi Pas kliane pine, ya 'id, ya naye
thaud, ya sabt ko din ki babat koi
tum par il/.am na lagaue pawe ;
17 Ki ye anewaii chinori ke saya
hain ; par badan Masih ka hai.
iy Kui tiam/niLiiidi uo jlnithi kliak-
sari nur firishton ki parastish karke
tum ko tumliare ajr se malu'uui na
karo, ki aisa sliakh-, apni jismaui 'aql
so 'abas phulke, un chi/.on men, jin-
hen us na nahin dekha, be-ja dakhl
karta hai,
19 Aur ua air ko nahin pakn/ raht.i,
i'is se sara badan bandon aur patthon
;o waalle Ke parwarish pake, aur ek
ttath |.Tiiwa:-i-a hoke, Khuda ki barhti
se barhta, hai.
20 Paa agar tum Masih ke sath
diinyawi 'ilm ke usul ki uisbat mar
m ho, tO tuni kyiln un ki uianind
jo dimyd men goyi zinda hain dastiir
ku pabaud hote,
21 (Mat chbuni; mat cbakhna;
mat hath lagana ;
Su,b p:'r }xik. kone ktifarz. (JLTMiSSl'ON, III. Jitu o kh'isrtm kafurz.
22 Ye sari cbizen, unhen kaui meii
lite hi, nest ho jati hain, ;) idmioi) ko
bukuion aur ta'litnon ko iiuiwaftq 'i
Uii Ye uhlserj Co, zakl-ul-farz *ibd-
dat, aur khaksaci, aur badani riyisat.
aur t ; l i l ki 'izzat na karni ki uh ki
khwahishen piiri howen, hikmat ki
siirat raklili hain.
IU IJA'IJ.
PAS a^ar tum Masih ke sdth ji
uthae gaya ho, to un ubiBon ki
talilah men raho, jo upar hai», jahati
Masih Khuda ke dahine haitha hai.
2 U'par ki chizog se dil lagau, na
uu chizun ao p samin pai hain.
8 Kyiinki tum mar gaya ho, aur
t umbari rindagi Masih ke satu Khuda
meg chhipi fam hai.
4 Jab Masih, jo hamari zindagi hai,
zahir kiyd jauga, tab timi bhi us ko
sath jalai men zahir kiyu jaoge.
5 la waste" tum npne 'azuotj ko jo
/amin par hain, yn'ne, haramkan, aur
napiiki, aur «balrw&t, aur bori khwah-
ish, aur lalatih ko jo butparasti hai,
kushta karo ;
6 Ki uu hi ke sahih se Khuda ka
gazab na-faruidui ko famauiUm pai
jiarta hai :
7 Aur age jab tum un ko bioh jite
tho, tum bhf un ki nih par uhalte ihe.
8 Par ab tum in aab ko bhf, ya'nc,
gussa, aur gazab, aur badkhwibi, aur
Oadgoi, aur bad-zubani, apue munh so
uikal phenko.
9 Ek di'isru se jhuth na bolo, kyun-
ki tum ne purini innAniyat ko us ke
li'alun sauiut utar phenki;
10 Aur ixayi iusaniyat ko, jo ma'-
rifat men apno pnida-knniewiili; ki
adrat ke muwdtiq nayi bau rabi hai,
pahiTia hai :
11 Wahan na Yunani hai, na Yahu-
di, na kbatna, na na-makhtuni, na
Barbari, na Squti, na guliin, na azad,
mi Masih sah kuchh, aur Bab men
12 ]
Khuda ke chui
maulud, jo BMiq&ddai aur piyare hain,
dardmaiiai, aur niihrbaui, aur larotani,
aur halimi, aur lanlasht ka libas
pahino ;
lil Aur agar koi kisi par daVa
rakhia ho, to ok diisre ki bardasht
karo, aur ik diWe ko bakhsho; jaisa
Ma»ib ne tumhcn bakhsiia hai, waisa
hi tura bhi karo.
14 Aur un sab ke (ipar muhabbat
pahin lo, ki wuh kauial ka kamarband
liai.
15 Aur Klmda ki ilminan, jis k*
rakhne ke liye tum ek tan hokar
bulae gave ho, tumhare diton par
bukumat katej aur tura ahukrguzar
raho.
H'. Masih ki kalam tum raen ba-
hutayat Ke rahe ; aur tum ek uusre
ko ka;nal danai m bi'lira aur nni-ihat
karo, aur zabiir aur git aur nihini
gazakm, shukrguzari ke nath, Khuda-
wand ke bye apne dilon se gao.
17 Aur jo kuchh kart* ho, kalam
aur kam, sabkuohh Khuda wand YisiV
ke nain se karo, aur u» ke wasile se
Khuda Dap ki Khukr baji lio.
18 Ai anrato, jaisa Khudiwand
nun linuiasib hai, apuo apue kbasaui
ki htrmanKirdari karo.
II) Ai ruardo, apui jon'n<n 1«» piyir
karo, aur un se karwe na ho.
20 Ai larzando, turn apue mi hip
ki har ok bit men farmanbardar ho,
ki Khudawand ko yihi pannd hai.
21 Ai bachchowilo, apue i'arzaudnn
ko mat chhero, na buwo ki we l>e-dil
ho jawen.
22 Ai naukaru, tum nu ke, jo duri-
ya men tiunhare khiwiud hain, sah
liitorj men farmiuliardar raho ; par
na khushamadi logon ki minind dikh-
ino ko baiki aaf dil bo Khudi-tarsog
ki tarah :
26 Aur jo kuchh karo, su ji w; aisi
karo jaisi Khudawaud ke liya karte
hain, na ki idmion ke liye ;
24 Ki tum jante ho ki tum Khu-
Pidua uvgairon kd QULUSSI'ON, IV. un h> salam hthna.
diwand 80 badle rnen miras pioge ; bai, aur Marqiis jo Bamabas k a hruin-
kyiiijki tam Kluidihvaiiu Masih ki ji h:ii,(jiski babat tum ne hukmpfej
khidmat baji lite ho. UH wuh tumbire pas iwe, to un ki
25 Par wuh jo bura k arti hai, apno khitir Wo ;)
k iya ke muwatiq burfif kamawcgi; ' II Aur Yisa' jo Justuskahliti hai,
aur kisi ki tarafdiri nahin hai. iya aab, jo makhtunon rnen n hai n,
IV BA'B. tum ko salam kabtc hain. Siri' y e hi,
I khawiiido, naukaron ke sitli jo Khudii ki bidshihat ke waste mero
A
: insaf karo, yih jankar ham-khidrnat the, mere liye tasalli
ki tumhiri bhi ok Khawind isrninjtho.
fi-ir hai. j 112 Ipafras, jn tum meg se Masih ki
2 Du'i mingno men mashgiil aurjbanda bai, tum ko salam kahti hai,
us men shukrguKiri ke aith boshyar.aur wuh tumhare wd3te du'i mingne
raho; mag hatueslia jin-flihini karta hai, ti
3 Aur sith uh ke hamire liye bhi ki tum Kiiudi ki mara ki bar ek bit
du'i karo, ki Klnuli hamire wAste'men kimil aur piire bane raho.
hulue k;i diirwa/.a khole, ki main Masih i l'A Main us par gawihi deta hun, ki
kebhed ko, jis ke satabqaid huihuiijwuh. tmuhuro aur un ko wasie j n
bayin kan'm : jLiudiqid men hain, aur jo Hiaripulis
4 Ta ki main uso aisa zahir karun, men Lain. butut sargarm hai.
jaisi mujite lazim hai. j 14 Luqi piyiri tabib, aur Dermis,
6 Tum waqt ko ganimat janko hi- tumben saldm kahte hai».
bar ke logon ko sith hoahyiri sc 15 Tum un bhaion ko jo Liudiqii
chalo. imen hain,aur Nuinfis ku, aur uskali-
fi Chahiyu ki tumhari kalim ha-lsiyo ko jo us ke giiar men hai, sal iri i
mesha fazl ResfethaaTDU»)d& lm, takiikaho.
tum jin» ki har uk kokyiinkar jawib. 16 Aurjab yih khatt tum menpar-
deni cbihiye. ihigayi ho, to ai.sa karo ki Liudiqfa
7 Tukhikus, jo piyiiri bhii, aur ki kalisiye men bhi pnrh&jio; aur ki
diyinatdar khadim, aur Khudawand tum bhi uh khatt ko, jo Liudiqii su
ki khidmat men sharik hai, mero adre hai, parho.
ahwil ki tumhoii khabar degi ; 17 Aur Arkhippus ackaho,ki Tu ua
5 Us ko mata uu is liye tumhiro khidmat men, jo tii ae Khiniawaud
pil bhrja lini, ki wuh tumhiri hil men jiii hai, hosbyir rah, ki use anjini
darydft kare, aur tuinharo diiuri ko de.
tumliide; I 18 Mujh Pulus ko Jiith se ealim.
y Aur us ke sith "Unasimus ko, jo Meri zanjiron ko yidrakho. Fay.l timi
diyanatdir aur piyari bhiii, aur tum par howe. A'min.
HiL-ri Bfl hai, hiiej diyi. We tumben 1" Yih khatt QuluBsiun ko rasul m>
yahin ki sari khabaren j.\ihur^hieijgi!. Kum no Tukliikns aur Unesimua
10 ArisiarkhiiH jo mero ^itlr qaid ke hath likh bbeji.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' PAHLA'
KIIATT TASSALUNI'QION KO.
I BA'B.
PTJTAJS, aur Silwaiius, aur Timtaus
ki taraf se, 'I'a3saluuiqion ki
kiilisiyi' k'», jo Ililji Kliiulii aur Khn-
ddwand Yiau' Masih men bu. Faal
aur saldmati hamare Uap Khuda aur
Khudawand Yisii' Masih ki taraf se
t.umhare liyo limve.
'l Ham tum sab ke wAste Khmld
kii sliukr hamssba bujti Ute bng, aur
apni du'don un tumhard zikr kartu ;
3 Aur apnc ISAp Khuda ko bnmu
tumhare iniAn ke 'amal, aur muhab-
bat ki inilmat, aur umnied ki paedari
ko, jo hamdre Kkudawand Yisii' Masih
ki taraf se hai, bila utiga ydd karte
hain:
4 Ki, ai bbaio, Khuda ke piydro,
ham iAnte haio ki tnm ohuoe hiie ho.
5 Kyujikj hamAri Injil mi faejat lafz
ae, baiki qudrat aur Itu h i Quds aur
piirc i'atiqdd ke sAth, tumhare pds
iiahuncbi ; chuuacehi tum jdnte bo
ki ham tumhare waste tum men kaise
thc.
6 Aur t mu hamare aur Khudawand
ke paintu hne, ki tum ue kalam ku hari
musibat ke diirmiyati Kiih i Quds ki
khushi kesatli qabul kiyd:
7 Yahan tak ki tum Maqadiiuiya
aur Akhaia ko sAie imanddroii ke liye
natnona kme,
8 Kyunki tum hi He Khud&wand
kd kalAm na faqat Maqa'duniya aur
Akhaia men sunayd paya, lialki bar
ek jagah tumhdro irndu ki, jo Khuda
Cr hai, ehuhrat nikli hai, yahdu tak
hamdre kahne ki kuchh hajat uahin.
265
9 Is wdste ki we dp hamdra zikr
karte hain, ki ham uo tum men kaisa
dakbl pAyd, aur tum kyiiukar buton
se khuda ki taraf pbire, tA ki Khurid
ki, jo ziuda aur sachcha hai, bandagi
kara;
10 Aur us ke Bete ki, jiae us ne
immluu men ho jilaya, nih tako, ki
asmau par se Awega, ya'ue, Yisii' ki,jo
ham ko dnewAlo gazab sc chlturAU
hai.
II BATI.
Al bhaio, tum to dp jdntc ho ki
hamAra- dakiil tum mcij be-fdida
ua thd :
2 Agarchi ham no dge sbahr Filip-
pi men bara dukh aur ruswdi uthAi,
ehundnchi tum is se wArjif bo, taubhi
apuo KhudA ke Babah be-parwdi ko
sath Khuda ki Injil bari jangojadal
kt; darmiyau tmaheg minate the.
3 Ki hamAri nasihat gumraki aur
ndpAki aur dagdbdzi sc na thi:
i Baiki jaisd Khuda no ham ku
iiiaqbiil jAuke Injil l;d araanatdar kiyd,
waisa hi ham bolto hain; Adiniori ko
nahin, baiki KhudA ko, jo ham&c dil
azuiatii hai, nus&mand karte hain.
5 Ki liam hargiz kfamhimaj ki hat
nahin bolte ihc, jaisd tum JdnU' ho, oa
lalacli kii parda mkhte the; Khuda
gawdh bai :
6 Aur na Admion se, na tum ne, na
diinron se, 'izzat chdhte the ; agarchi ie
aabab se ki ham Masih ku rasul hain,
tum par bojh dAI wakte the.
7 ISalki ham tumharu danniydu aise
Injil ki Tasmlu!,iqv>n ko I TAKSA LU. \TQ1'0>J, III. muai jane ka hal .
niuhiim rahc, jaine ddi jo apne bach-
ehog k» paitt Hai :
8 Waiae hi ham tumhdro dilflos
hoke iiii fiu|a(. Khudd ki Injil, baiki
apni jaii tak bhi tumben done lio rdzi
the, is waate ki tuiu hamare piydre Ihe.
H Kyiinki, ;.i bbdio, tum hanidt i
iiiilinut aur muhMCpt ku yad rakhte
ho, ki hnm ne, is liye ki tum mcn se
kisi par bdr na ho, r;ii din kaind
kamdko tumhen Khuda ki Injil ki
manadi ki.
10 Tum gawah bo, aur Khudd bhi
hai, ki tum nq jo iman Ide ham kya
hi pak i aur rdsti aurbe-'aibi se guzran
karte the :
11 Ohunanchi tum jdnte bo ki bani
tum men bar ek ki yi'm miiiiiat karte,
MIT dildsd dek1, aur nasihat kartu lho,
jaise bap apne bachehon ko,
12 Ta ki tum Khuda ke laiq chalo,
jis no tumhen apni badsbabi aur jalai
men bulayd.
13 Is wdstc bani bhi bila naga Khu-
da ke shukrpizdr hain: ki jab wuh
kalam jo Khuda ka hai, jino ham
Kunate ham, tum ko mihi, tum re use
ddmion ka kalam nahiu, baiki Khuda
ka kalam jaiikar, ki wuh haqiq»t m t' n
aisd in hai, qabul kiya, aur wuh tum
imatiddrim men asar kartd hal.
11 lu liye ki tum, ai bliai", Khuda
I- i kalisiydnn ke, jo Yahud ya men
Masih Yisd' ki hain, pairau hue
kyunki tum no bhi fcpae bjmwjaumor,
^e wr bi duk h pae, jo uuhon ne Yahii-
dion se pae tuo :
l.'i Jinlinn ne Khudawand Yisii'aur
apne nabion ko mar dala, aur hanien
satdke kbarij kar diya ; aur we Khuda
kokhush nahinate, aur sdre ddmion ke
luukhaiif hain :
16 Aur is garaz bs ki un ke gimdh
hatnttrl» kamal ko paimu eh t e rahen,
W6 hain ko man'a karie hain, ki haru
fj!ur-qaumon ko wuh kalam na sund-
wen, jis se UU ki najdt ho. I.ekin un
par g&Cfcfa iutilia ko uahimeha.
206
17 Par ham tia, ai bhaio, tum H
Ibnri iiiinliiat lak, dil M nabiii, /.;ihb
men, juda hoke kamal arzii se nihdyat
koutifth ki, ki Umiliara mim h dekhorj.
IS Is waste ham ne, ya'ue, niujli
Pdlus ne, ek ya do bar abah* ki tum-
hdre pa.t aiin ; par Shaitan ue hameu
rok a.
19 Kyiinki hamari unimed aur
klnudii aurl'akhr ka tdj kya hai? Kya
tum hi hamare Khudiiwand Yisii'
Masih ke tfdmhno u s ke dte waqt ua
hoge V
20 Tum to hamare jalai aur khushi
ho.
III BATI.
I S waate jab ham ziyada barddsht
kar ua tak r n, to baui ra/.i hue ki
Aleni ineij akel'.- rah jawen ;
2 Uhunanehi ham ne Timtaus ko jo
hamara bhai, aur Khuda ka khadim,
aur Masih ki Injil men hamara ham-
khidmat hai, is liyo bheja ki wuh lum
ku tumlidre imdn men mazbiit karc,
aur ta.HJtlli do:
;i Ta ki tum men koi in musibaton
se lagzish na khawe ; kyunki tum ap
janto ho ki ham un bi ko liye mu-
qarrar hue hain.
4 Aur jab ham ti'imhdre p&8 the, to
tumben dge se kahd, ki ham musibat
men parengc : efaunanehi aisa hiia, aur
tum jdute ho.
5 Is wdstc, jab main aur ziyada
bardasht na kar &akd, lab tumhdrd
imdn daryaft karue ko bheja, na liowe
ki imtihan-karnewale ne tumhara
imtihdn kiyd ho, aur haindri mihnat
be-faida ho piyi ta
C Par ab Timtaus, jab tumnari taraf
re iiainare pds dyd, aur tumhdre irnda
muhabbat ki khush-khahtri Idya,
yih kalid, ki tum hatndrd zikr i
a hamesha karte ho, aur tum
hamare dekhne ke kihut muaht&q ho,
jaiw; ki ham bhi' tumhSre hain :
" Is liye, ai bhaio, ham no apni adri
Dini taraqqi
muefbat aur ihtiydj nieii tunihdro
imau ko sabab timi ne tasalii pai;
B Kyunki ab liain t.o y.iudo r&hte
buin, agar tum Kbudawaud mag uaini
rah.o.
'J Ki ham kyiinkar tumhdre liye, i»
khushi ko' sabab jo haiuen tiimMri
babat apne Khml&'ke hUBSfir hiail lidi,
Khudd ki shukrguzdri kar saken?
' 10 Ki ham rdt din bahut ki du'd
niaugte rahte hain, ki ttimharu ivuinli
dokhen.aurtuuihare iman ki kaDitiag
puri karen.
U Tar Khudd liamani Bdp dp, aur
hamdid Khudawand Yisii' Masih uisa
kare, ki khairiyat ke sdth hamara
guzar tu.mb.ari taraf lwwe.
VA Aur Khudawand aisa kare, k
jis tarah se ham ko tum se muhabbiit
lini, tutnhdri muhabbat bhi, kya apas
nien, nur kya har ek ko sath, bajtte,
aur ziyada howe :
_ 13 Td ki jab hwnSra Khudiwand
YibiV Mawh apne «ah muqaddaKQ ko
sath dwc.tnbwuh tumhdredil bamdre
Bau Khudd ke sarnhne pdktzagi meg
bt>- aib kiyo hv'ie mazbdt kar de.
I TARSALUXI'QI'OJS, IV.
kdfare.
be-jd aur uh par ziyadati na kare :
kyuflM Khudiwand un sab kamon ka
badld icutiwala hai; chunducki ham
aetm bbl tuai se kahd,aur gawanJ di
7 Ki Khudd ne ham ko rnipaki ke
liyo nahin, baiki p&ki/.agi ke liyo
bulaya.
8 Ih wdstc Jo hiqarat karta hai, bo
dilmi ki nahin, baiki Khuda ki hiqanU
karta hai, ji.s ne haraea apui pak Kuli
bhl di.
9 Par bhai.m ki muhabbat ki babat
hajat Lalim ki tumben kuchh likluVn ;
kyunki tam ne £pu mag muhabbat
kami' ki rpmda M ta'liin pdi.
10 Chtiniaehi tum un uab bhdioii
se, jo tanuim MaqadUMy» men hain,
Wt lii kano bo; lokin, ai Miiio, ham
lumbari minnat karto hain ki tum
ziy.ida tnraqqi karo;
11 Aur jis tarah ham ne tumhea
hukm kiyd, tum garibi ke tith rahne,
aur ap apne kiroMl kume, aur apne
hathon ne kain karne ki 'izzat ko
chiihiicwiilo ho;
112 'fa ki tum un ke dge, jo bahar
hain, durusti «e i;lialo, aur kisi ohia ki
ibtiydj na rakku.
L3 Ai bhilio, main nahin cliahta
hun ki (uni un ke alivval so jo ho gayo
hain, na-wdqif raho, U ki tum auron
ki mdninil jo nd-unimod hain gam na
karo.
14 Kyunki ham ne jo yaqin kiyd,
ki Yisii' miia, nur ji uthd, to yili bhi
ynqin kiyd clidbiye, ki'h'huda unhcn,
jo liad' mo3 bo guye hain, ua ko sath
IV BA-B.
GARAZ, ai bhdio, ham tum bo
Kliuikiwand Yimi' inoii 'art aur
minnat karto hain, ki jaisa tum
ham se sikliii, ki kis tarah cbalnd,
Khudd ko khush karnd, zardr hai,
mon taraqql karo.
- Ki tum jante ho, ki ham no tum
ko Khudawand Tisu' ki taraf se kyd
hukm diye.
3 Kyunki Khudd ki murid tum-
hdri pdkizagi ae hai, ki tum haram-
kan se apne ta.in bftz rakbo :
4 Aur har ek tum men se apne
badan ku piilzagf aur 'izzat ke sdth
rakhnd jdno ;
5 Na shahwat ki badmasti mon,
£i\ir-{]aumon ki inanind jo Khiula ko
Dahin jantin;
C Aur koi kiai bdt men apno bhai «e ;hoke mue hain pable ji uthVng.
15 Ki ham tumben Khnddwand ke
hukm se yib kaLte hain, ki we jo ham
nien sc Kliudiwaiid ko ane tak sinda
ir baqi rahange, un m jo sogaye liain
bqat na te iasoga
lu Kyunki Kbiulawand dp dhiim
so muqnrmb finshta ki awdz ke sdth
Khudd ka narsinfrii phi'uik te hue dsmdn
utrega, aur we jo Masih men
Marifi ke do-bdra
17 BiiM ua ke bani men «e jo jite
clihuterjge u» samet budimu par ndgdh
uth j;lenge, td ki hawd mcn Khudd-
wand w ruiilaqdt kareri : 80 lum Khu-
dawnnd ko sdlh haniesha rahengc.
18 Pas tam ta bdton »e dpaa nien ck
dilsre ko taanlli do.
v ba'h.
PATI, ai bhdio, tumben us ki hajat
nahin ki waqton aur maiisimon
ki bdbat kuclih likhun.
2 Ia wdste ki tum dp khrtb
ho ki Khuddwand kd din U tarah
dwcgd, jis tarah rdt ko chor dtd hai.
3 .1 is waqt tpg kahte honge, ki Sald-
mati aur bc-khatri liai, tab, jis tarah
hamil» ku dard la;rt" hain, un par
ndgalidni haidkat dwegi, nur wo na
bnchenge.
4 .Par tum, ai bhdfo, tdriki men
nahin, ho, ki wuh din chor ki tarah
tum par d paro.
5 i'um aab nfir ko Farzand, aur din
ki auUd ho; ham rdt ki nabin, aur nu
tdriki ki hai n.
6 Ia wiste chahiye ki aurop. ki
tarah na sotn, baiki bc-ddr aur lioah-
ydr mhen.
7 Kyucki jo sote hain, bo rdt hi ko
Mtfl hairj ; nur jo matwaie hote, rdt hi
ko matwdle hotc hain.
8 Par ham jo diu ko hain, imdn o
muhabbat kd baktar (iur cajdt k i'
ummed kd khod pahinko parhezgdr
rahen ;
9 Kyunki K~buda no haru ko gazab
ke li.vc nahin, baiki U liye intiqarrar
kiya, ki ham apne Khudawand Y'tuA'
Masih se najdt hdsil k:
I TASSALUNrQI'ON, V. ant ka bayan.
karte hain ki tum un ko jo turahdrp
dumlyio mihnat karte, aur Khuda-
wand hi mcrj hoke tumhdro sardar
hain, nur tum ko nasihat karte hain,
mino;
13 Aur un ke kim ke Balab mu-
habbat so un ki bari 'iazat karo. Aur
tum dpati mcn mile raho.
14 Aur, ai bhdio, ham tuiuhdri
minnat karte hain, ki tum bajrauon
ko rmaUiEt karo, za'if-dilon k ■hl,--
do, kamzoron ko sambhalo, «tb ki
bardaaht karo.
] ES I Vkho, koi kiai ae badi ke 'iwaz
badi na kare; baiki tam liar waqt ck
dusrc se, aur sah se, khuahsuliiki karo.
Ih' JTamcsba khuah raho.
17 Nit du'a nidngo.
18 Uar ok bat men sbnkrgux4rf
karo; kyiinki Manih xUd' mim. tuin-
riiiri li/iliat KhudA ki yihi mar/.i hai.
19 Kuh ko mat bujhdo.
20 Iftrtrdwfttorj ki hiqiirat na karo.
21 Sari bdton ko dzmdo ; bihtar ku
ikhtivdr karo,
' 22 Har ek badi ki surat hi sc dur
raho.
23 Aur wuh jo saldmatl kd Khudd
hai, dp hi tum ko bilkull pak kare;
aur tuiobard 3ab kuclih, ya'nu, tum-
hdri nih, aur jan, o badan, hamdre
Khudawaud Yiau' Masih ko due tak
be-'aib saldmat rahen.
21 -Jis no tuudiL'ii buldya, wuh
sachchd hai; wuh aisa hi karcgd.
25 Ai hhdio, hamdre wilsto du'd
mdngo.
Sare bliiiou ko ]«k bosa lobe
sal d m karo.
27 Main tumhen Khudiiwand ki
10 Ki wuh haiiidre waste miid, td
ki ham, kyd jdgte, kyi aote, us kojqasam detd hiln, ki yih khatt adre
adth jien. mtiaaddaa bhdion men narhw&o.
11 Js Bye tum ek ek ko taaalli do, 28 Hamire Khudaw,m'd Visd' Ma-
NUT ek ifyft ki t.iraqqi ohdho ; chu- Bl'h kd fazl tum par howe. A 'min.
ndnohi tum karte bhi ho. ■ \ Yih pahld khatt Taa.siiluniqinr
12 Aut, ai bhaio, iiam tum se 'arz.' ko Tulus ue Atoni ao iikh bhejd."
PTJ'LUS EASU'L KA' DUSEA'
KHATT TASSALUNIQrON KO.
I BA'B.
PU'LUS aur Silwanus aur TimtAus
ki janib bc TassaluniqioTi "ki
kaliaiye ko, jo hamarc B&p Khuda aur
KlmdViwand Viau' Masih men hai:
" 2 L'azl aur salamati, liam&ro BAp
Khuda aur Khudawand Yisu' Masih
ki taraf se, tumliire iiyo lumen.
3 Ai bhaio, lazim lini ki ham
tumhare wAste hainesha Khuda ka
shukr kareu; ehimanchi muniafl) hai,
is liye ki tumhiri iman ziyada hota
jata hai, aur tum sab men bb har ek
k i muhanbat ap;is uien barhti jdti hai
4 Yahan tak ki ham ap Khuda ki
kalisiyaon men tumhare Mbafa G&khf
karto" liain, ki uu sab dukhon aur
musibaton men, jo tum aihte ho,
tumhara ra&r aur iman zahir hota
hai:
5 Tih to Khuda ke sachche insaf
ki aarih nishani hai, Uki tum Khuda
ki baduhuM ke laiq gine jiio, jis ke
liye t' m i d i ikh bhi uthale ho :
fi Basharte ki Khudikonazdik yih
insaf thahrc, ki jo tumhen aziyatdete
hain unhen a/iyat de ;
7 Aur tumhen jo aziyat pate ho
hamire sath aram de, us waqt ki
Khnddwand 'Sisi'i' Asmdn se apne
zabardast firishton ke sath,
8 Bharakti ag men zahir hogA, aui'
Uli se, jo Khuda ko nahin paliduinte,
aur hamarL» Khudawand Yisu' Masih
ki Injil ko nahin miate, badla lega.
9 Wo Khudawand kechihrc se, ai
us ki qudrat ke jalai se, abadi halakut
ki sa/a pawengu;
269
10 Ub din jah wuh AwegA, ki apnt-
mqadda»on men jala! ;>awe, aur un
sab men jo iman lae (kyiinki Lamari
gawAhi jo ham no tum ko di hai yaqiu
ki gayi,) ta'ajjub ka bii'w ho.
11 So ham tumhare liye sada du'A
bhi inangtu hain, ki hainara Khuda
tumben, is bulahat ke laiq jane, aur
ni'k-zdti ki siri khair audeahi ko, aur
imAn ke kdm ko, qudr:it se pura kans :
lli T a, ki bainare Khuda aur Khu-
ilAwaiid YisiV Masih ke fazl ke miiwa-
liq, hamaro Khudawand Yisu* Masih
ka nam tum men. aur tum uh men
jalil liu.
II BA'B.
P AH, ai bhaio, ham apne Khuda-
wand Yisu' Masih ko Anc, aur
apne us pas jam 'a hone ki babat tum
'nrz karte hain,
2 Ki tum is kliiyal se ki Masih ki
din a pahunchii hai, jald apne dil ki
dhdras mat kooo, aur na gnahrdo, ita
kisi r lili, na kisi kalam, na kisi khatt
se, yih soehkar ki wuh hamari taraf
ko hai,
3 Kol tumhen kisi tarah se fareb
nade; kyiinki wuh din nahin Awcga,
m agar jab tak ki pahilo bargashtagi
na ho, aur wuh guniih ka BhakbR,
ya'no haidku ka farzand, zahir na
howe;
4 Jo liar ek ka, ki Khuda ya ma'-
bi'id kahldta iiai, umkhalif hai ; aur
un se ap ko bani samajlita hai, yahdg
tak ki wuh Khuda ki haikal men
Khuda bnn bait Lega, aur ajme tn.iii
dikhawega, ki main Khuda Ini».
Pulut un ke liye
n TASSALUNTQIW, III. thukr aur oVd karti.
5 KyA tumben y 4d u;ihin, ki main I
tumbdre sath hote hiie tumhen yih
bdtcrj kahtd lliA/
6 Aur jo kuchh nb rofct.a hai, ta ki
wuh apno hi waq.tr par zdhir ho, tuni
jante h o.
7 Ki rdz i iiararat ki liat nb bbi to
tdeir karti jati hai : sirf itnd zarur bai,
ki wub jo ab tak roknewald hai bich
se dilr kiyd jao.
8 Tab wuh Sharir Kabir hoga, jise
Khudawaud apne ramin ke da
balak, aur apno anc ki tiyulli se nes
karegA.
9 Us kd and KhaitAn ka kiyo ke
muwark| sdre iotiddr, aur jhut.ho iii-
shan, aur achamblion,
10 Aur haidli-houewdlon ko dar-
miydn wliardrat ki kamal dagdbazi ke
Kiitti boga; is waste ki unhon ne rasti
ki muhabbat ko, ki jis so m najat
pAwen, Ikhtiydr na kiyri.
11 Aur ki Babab se Khuda un pas
tisir-karncwdli dagi bhejega, yaban
tak ki we jhiith ko sach jduenge
12 Ta ki eab jo sacliai par iman na
lae, baiki na-rdsti sa razi the, sa7.11
pawen.
13 rar, ai bhaio, Khudawand ke
piydro, lazim hai ki ham tumhare
waste hamesha Khuda ka wliukr
karen, ki Kluuhl no tumben shtird' se
chun liyd, ki tum Kiih ki pdkizagi
bn k bah tasir se, aur aachai par iman
l.lliv ■ . 'iU].kl | ■:!.!. :
14 Ji« ke liye us ne tumben hanni-
ri Injil ke wnsile buldyA, la ki t.um
bamdre Khudawand Yisii' Masih ka
jalai biail karo.
15 Pas is waste, ai bhaio, qaim
raho, aur un ta'limon ko, jinhen tum
ne munh zubAni se, ya haman; khatt-
m, sfklid tlia, thambe raho.
16 Ab hamdra Khudawand YisiV
Masih 'i)), aur linnidrd BA[> KlimU, ji*
17 Tumhare dilon ko dil&sa de«
aur tum ko liar ok achebho qaul aur
fl'al men inazbui ka»
111 BA'B.
BA'QI', ai bhaio, haman' haqq 1
yih du'A karo, ki Khudawand
kA kalam jald phail jdwc, aur aiad jalAl
pawe, jaiaA ki tmn rnen hai :
2 Aur yih, ki ham ni-ma'qiil aur
buri; Admion se chhutkdrd pdwen :
kyiinki sab inen iman uahtn.
3 Par Khuddwand wafddAr bal ;
wuh tum ko mazbut karegd, aur badi
se bacbacjd.
4 Aur tumhdri bSbftt Khudawand
rmr barnArd yaqfn hai, ki tum un
hnkraon par, jo ham 'tumben deto
l.niii, 'amal karte ho, aur karto raho™
bhi;
5 Par Khuddwand tumhare dilon
ko, Khuda ki muhabbat, aur Masih
ki sabr ki taraf, hidayat karo.
6 Ab, ai bhaio, ham apne Khuda-
wand Yisu' Masih ko ndm so tumhen
hukm karte hain, ki timi har ek bhai
jo kajraui ko sdth, aur us sompi
hrii hdt ke, jo ham -se mili, barkhildf
chalt.d hai, kanara karo.
7 Kyunki tum Ap jdntc ho, ki ha-
mari pairaui kyiinkar ki ehdhiyB;
ham to tumhare darmiydu kajraui ke
sdth chalto na the ;
8 Aur kiai ki roti muft na khdta
the, baiki mihnat inir inasba(|oiit ke
sdth rdt din kdm karte the, ta ki tum
men bc kisi par bojh na bowen :
9 Na ia wdste ki ham ko ikhtiydr
na tiri, par is liye ki ham ap ko
tumhare liye namuiia thahrdweri, td
ki tum hamari pairaui karo.
10 Aurjabbam tumhdre sdth the,
tab ham ne tumben yih hnkm I rj ■. .
ki jo koi mihnat ua kamd chaho, wuh
khdne ko na pawa.
1 I l'viijln ham Himte hain.ki tum
a hameg piyir kiya, nur hamerj fazl men se kai ek kajraui ke path chalte,
se bamesha ki tasalli aur achchhi aur kuchli kdm nahirj karte, baiki
umnied di, auron ke kain men dakhl karie hain.
270
Ta'lim htupii l TIMT
12 Aison ko ham npiifi KhmUwand '
Yisii' Masih sc hukm data ham, nur
nn kf rahmat karte hain, ki WB t-hur.-
cliip kini kurku B«d hi roti kliaeii.
13 Aur, ai bhaio, tum nok kim
karnc iiu-n saat na ho jfo.
14 Par agar koi kainiri is bit ko,
jo khatt mtn hai, na miac, to tiso jin
nikho, aur ua se milo na raho, ti ki
wuh sharminda kowe.
15 Lekio UU (lii^liman D* sariijlio,
baiki bhii jinke nasihat karo.
A'TTS, I. mtthabbat *e anj&m pdti.
! 16 Ab salimati ki Khudiwatul ap
lii tum ko hamesha liar tarah ho Ba-
humu i hakhslu:. Kkudawand tum
sau ke sith rabe.
17 Mujli rdlua ke hath pe salam;
yih liar u khalt nien olahan hai ; iisi
tarah main iikhti hun.
18 Hamare Khudiwand YisiV Ma-
sih ki fa/.l mm iftb pan ho. A'min.
^ Yih dusri khatt TaawloaioioB
ko Piilus ne Atom ho likii bhejii.
PU'LUS EASU'L KA' PAHLA'
KHATT TIMTAUS KO.
I RA'B.
PU'LUS ki jinib H, jo hamire
bachanewilc Kiunla, aur hamiri
MBmadgah Khudiwand Yi.su Misili
ke hukm Bo/YiBii' Masih ki rasul hai ;
2 Timtaiu* ko, jo iman mag farzand
haqiqi bai : fa/.l, ralnu, aur aalimatf,
hamire Bip Kbudiaur hamira Khu-
diwand YisiV Masih ki taraf se, tujh
par howen.
3 Main ne Maqadi'miya ko jiite
waqt tujh w iltimii kiyii tha, ki
Afasus m e n rahiyo, ta ki Lu bfl'sofj ko
takid karo, ki aur tarah ki tu'lmi nu
ihwni,
4 Aur kahinion aur bo-hadd nasab-
aimog par lihia na feareB: yih
kuchh takrir ki bi'is hoti hai, na ki
tarbiyut ilahi ki, io iman kg bai,
o Par ta'lim haqiqi muhabbat se
anjim piii hai, Jo ki pik-dili, aur
uokniyati, aur be-makr iman se hoti
hai:
271
6 Jin se ba'/u phirke belu'ida bak-
w&s ki tarnf mutawajjih hiie ;
7 Ki shari'at ko mu'allim bani
chihtii hairj, harcband w e nahin sa-
majhte ki kyi kahte, aur kin biton
|iar hujjat karte hain.
8 Par liain jinte hain ki shari'at
achchhi hai, basnarte ki koi nso Bhari'at
ke taur par isti'aimll kare ;
9 Yih avnaihka ki shari'at ristbia
ke wiste nahm, halki he-shar'a lugon
ko wiste, o ui-fiirniAubardin'ij o Im-
dinon, o gimahgiron, o iii-pikon, o
sbubdon, aur mi bip ke m;ir-d;ihir-
walon, aur khnnion,
l(f Aur iiaramkaron. aur laundo-
bttzon, aur barda-farL'Hhorj, aur jhiith
buliKiwAlfn, aur jhutbi ijasam khane-
wilon ke"wiste, aur un ke aiwi jo
kuuhh sahih ta'lim ko barkbilif howe,
us ke wiatfl l ii :
11 Us muhirak Khurld ki jalilwilS
Injil ke niuwaftq, jo mujho sompi
gayi.
Nigahb&n aur khddim ud I TIMTA'US, II, III. din H sifat M layan.
12 Anr main apne Kbuddwand
Masih YisiV kd, ji» no mujlu: iqti<l.'ir
diyd, Rluikrguzar hiin, ki us ne mujhi
aiuan&td&r aamajhkar is khidmat par
muqarrar kiya.
13 Main to agokufr-balttiewdld, aur
satdnewdla, aur jabr-karnewdli'
lekiu mujh par rahm hfid, ia wdste ki
raairj ne midani kihdlatmen be-imdni
se kiyd jo kiya _
14 Aur hamare Khuddwand ka
Jail, iman aur piyar samet, jo Masih
Yisti' men hai, bah u t ziyatla ln'ii.
15 Tih" diyanat ki bit, aur bilkull
pasand ke laiti hat, ki Masih Y isii'
fran&hg6roo ke badidno ko dunyainen
dyd; aur main un aab men bara gu-
nahfjar lifnj,
lti Lekin mujh par 1b liye rahm
Ini», ki Yisii' Masih mujhhare gnnah-
gar par kamal sabr zdhir kare, td k!
main un ke waste, jo us pai hamesha
ki zindagi ke liye iman Idiviii^i', u:t-
muna baniin,
17 Ab azali Badshdh, gair-fdni,
nadidani, w:ihid bakim Khudd ki
'i'/zat aur jalai abad ul abad huwe.
A'min.
18 Ai farzand Timtdus, main tujhe
un peshingoior; ke muwarjq jo dge teri
babat ki gayin, yihhukm dela hiln.ld
ki tii unkewasile seaclichhi larai lari?;
19 Aur iman aur neknivati par
qaim rahe; jikc ba'zon ce dur dftfa
karke iman ki naw turi:
20 Unhin men se Humanaius aur
Sikandar hain, jinlien main do Kliaitan
ke hawala kiya, td ki we tainbih pake
kufr na baken.
" J I BA'B.
A B main iltimds kartd hvin, ki aab
Be pahle raundjatcrj, aur du'iiotj,
aur sifiirisln-n, aur shukrguzAriAn, sdro
adtnSog ke liye ki jawen ;
2 Bddshdbon aur Tiiartuba-wdlog ke
liyc; td ki bani kamal dindari auri
i te, chaiu aur Aram ke a»lh,iaclichhA kiim chahta hai.
3 Kyiinki bamarrc NajAt-denowale
Khuda ko dgu yihi khiib aur paaandi-
da hai ;
i Ki wuh chdhtd hai ki sdre Admi
najAt pAwen, aur sachAi ki pahcban
tak pahunchen.
5 Ki Khuda ek hai, aur Khuda aur
adraion ke bic-h ek Admi bhi daniiiyani
hai; wuh Masih Yisti' hai;
6 Jis. ne ii|'iii> ta,in sal> ke kafd^e
men diya, ki bar-waqt us ki gawAhi di
jAwe.
7 Uh ke liye main manddi karne-
wAlA aur rasul muqarru hi'iii, (main
Masih men sauh bolta hun, aur jhutb
nnhm kahtd;) aur gair-qaumon men
iman aur sa^bai ka sikhlanewdld hun.
8 Pas main chdhtd hiin ki mard
har makan men 1* gussaaur be hujjat
pdk hdthon ko uthake dua mangen.
9 Aur yi'in hi 'auraten bhi shayasta
Uni par sharm aur tamu ke sath dp
ko sanwarun, na ki bdl gundhne, aur
sone, aur motion, aur q i mati libas se ;
10 Baiki (jaisa ki 'auiatog ko, jo
Kimdd-parasti ka lqrar kaiti hain,
iiiunasiu hai,) dp ko nek kauiorj se
sanwdren.
11 Chdhiye ki 'aurat clurpchap ka-
mdl farnidn barddri un sikbe.
12 Aur main panvdnagi nahin deta
ki 'aurat Bikhldwo, ya dp sliaiihar par
hakim ban baithe, baiki klitimoshi ku
sath rahe.
13 Kyiinki pahle A'dam bandyd
gayd, ba'd ua k« ilawwab.
14 Aur A'dam ueiarubuahinkhdya,
par 'aurat farob khdko gunah i&eD
phansi.
1C> Lekin yih bachcha-janno ko ea.
bab bach jaegf, basliarte ki wfl \xaia,
iialibal;, aur pakiza^i men, hoah
o taniia ke sath, pudar rahen.
III BATJ.
bdt sach hai, ki Jo kei kalisiy*
nigahWni ki arzti rakhta, I
Y'HJ
zindagani guzrduen :
2 Pas chdhiye kinigahban be-'aiK
tayiufchijrf U M&rf, I TIMTA'US, IV. jo n\Wii'ri »muf-na mg hegi.
ek joni kd shauhar, parhezgdr, odMli i rastl kd autiin aur ns kl bunydd lini,
tamiz, shdyasta, musafir-dosr, ta'li:
dene men qdbil ho
kyunkar guzran kiyd chdhiyo.
16 Aur lii)-iuitaq dir.diiii ki bhed
8 Na ki nhardl>i, ya mdrpit karne- 1 bard hai : yn'ne Khudd jism men zahir
!U ya na-rawanafa hasil karncwala:1 kiya paya, Ri'ih «e rast. thnhniyd gava.
foilki tahammul karuevrdld ho, takrdri
aur lilcbi na ho ;
4 Aur apne gbar ki bakhiibl Vian
duhast kare, aur katnal «lurus ti ke fcath
Inrkon ko iab'i men rakhe ;
5 Ki agar koi apnf hi ghnr ka ban-
do hast k ani d na jdne, wuh Khudd ki
kalisiyo ki khabarddri kyurjkar kar-
ega"
6 Aur nayd murfd na ho ; mabddd
wuh gurflr bo be-khud hoke Sbaitin
ki tarah azab men pare.
7 Aur chahiye ki wuh bdharwdlon
ke nazdik bhi uekndm ho; td ua ho
ki wuh malamat uthawe, aur Hhair.an
ke phande men phans jdwe.
8 Ini tarah chahiye k i khadim-ud-
dinbhi sanjida howen, ria ki do-zuMn,
ya shardbi, ya na-rawa nafa uthdne-
wale ;
9 Aur imdn ke bhed ko saf-dili so
yikl kar rakhcii. *
10 Aur ye pahle dzmao jdwen ; us
ke ba'd agar be-'uih tbahren, to khid-
mat karen.
11 Isi tarah 'auraten bhi sanjida
howen, aur na ki tuhmatiin, baiki
parhezgdr, aur sari balon incri diy&uat-
ddr howen.
12 Khddim-ud-dln ek ek joni ke
shauhar hon, aur apne hachchon aur
apne gharon kd bakhubt bandobast
karte bon.
13 Kyunki jinhorj ne achchhi tarah
dia men khidmat ki, bo apne liye
achchhd darja, aur uh iman mori jo
Masih y.isuV par hai, bahut si bimmat
paidd karte liaiij.
14 Main in ummed par ki jald rujli
pas aun, yih bdtcn tujhe likhta hiin ;
15 Par agar mtijh se deri lio jae" to
tu lu Ee jan sake ki Khudd ke ghar
men, jo zinda Khuda ki kalisiva, aur
273
firishton ko dikhdi diyd, /jair-qaurnoi_i
meiiUHkimanadi htf^hmyimenotpar
imdn Ide, jaldl men uthayd gaya.
IV BA'D.
RU'H saf fnrmdti hai, ki Akhiri ?.a-
mdne iii.'ti kitne log gumrtin-
karnewali r&hog aur dcwnn ki ta'lfni-
on se jd lipat ke imdn so btrgachta
honge:
2 Jo makr ee jhuth bolenge : jin ki
qiiwat i imtiydz goya tapte lolie *»■
jalai gayi haj ;
3 Aur we bydb karae se man'a
karenge; aur hukm karenge ki un
khdnorj se parkez kareii, jinhen Kliu-
dd ne paidd kiyd, ki irndtidar aur aach-
di ke jdnnewale shukrgiuari ke sdth
unhen kbdwen,
4 Kyunki Klmdd ki paidd ki hi'ii
bar ek chiz auhcbhi hai, aur inkdr ke
ldiq nahi'n, agar sliukr karke kbdweu;
5 Is wdHta ki wuh Khudd ke kaldm
aur du'd un pdk hoti hal.
So agar tu blidion ko yih bdU'ii
ydd dildwo, to tu imdn nur lis achchhi
ta'lim ki baton se, ji» men tn m-
pairaui ki hai," tarbfyat pdke YistV
Masih kd achchbd kliddiin band ra-
hegd.
7 Tar be-hi'ida aur burhiyon k i
kahdnion se munh mor, aiir dinddri
men riydzat kar.
H Ki badani riydzat kd fdida tbord
hai ; par dinddri sab bdUin ke wdste
fdidamand hai, ki al. ki aur dyande ki
/indahi kd wa'cta usi ke liye hai.
9 Yih bdt sach aur kamdl qabiil-
iyat ke laiq hai.
10 Kyunki hamdrd rrnbnat kanid
aur la'n ta'n aahnd is liye hai, ki haru
ne Kinda Khudd par, jo ttab ddmion kd,
khdfiskar imdnddron kd, bachdnewali
hai, bharosi kiyd hai.
S
BeWi'um aur buzurgon
I TIMTA'US, V.
ki biih
11 Ye baterj farma aur sikba.
12 Kisi ko luruhan: jawfini ki
hiqarat mi karne de : baiki bui chal,
aur muhabbat, aur nih, aur iman, aur
paki/.agi n imandaroiike liye tiauitiua
ban,
13 Jab Cak main na ian, tii parhid,
nasihat k arti, ta'lim dotd rah.
14 Tii us ni'ainat se, jo tiijb men
hai, aur tujho nubuwat ki rak se
buzurgon ki jama'at ke hfith rakhiie
ke sfith mili, gaSl na ho.
15 Un baton ko isti'amdl kar ; un
hi men mashgiil ho rah ; td ki teri
taraqqi uabhon par zdhir howe.
16 A p« i aur aptii ta'lim ki ohaukasi
kar; uu par qaim rah; kyiinki yih
karkc tii fip ko, aur un ko jo teri
suute hain, bachdegi.
V BA'B.
TU' kisi z'iyAda-'mnnv&lc ko mala-
mat na kar, baiki us ki us tarah
minnat kar, jis tarah bdpki karta hai;
aur jawatiun ki yun, jaise bh&ion ki ;
'i Aur '/iyada-'unirwalion ki yun,
jitise mS ki ; aur jawfin 'aura tim ki
yun, jaise bahinnn ki, kamal pakizagi
BBt
3 Bewdon ki, jo haqiqat men be-
waen hain, hurmat kar
4 Par agar kisi bewe ko bt-te yfi
pote bon, to m yih pahle sikhcn, ki
apoe ghar mag diniUri karen, aur
brindiidon ka haqq add karen ; kyiinki
yih bhala aur Kbuda ku rigo pasaudida
hai.
5 Par wub jo sachchi bewd aur be-
kas hai, so Khuda par hharosd rakhli,
aur rat din munajat aur du'don men
lagi rahti hai.
f> Magar jo 'aish o 'ishrat karti, si>
jite ji niurda hai.
7 Pas tii ye baten farma, tS ki we
be-'aib thabrcii.
8 Agar koi apron ki, aur khiss kar
apnehi ghnrkt, khabargiri na kare, to
iman «> mim kir, aur be-iuidn &e badtar
hai.
274
9 Wub bewfi fard men likhi jawe,
jo aatli bara* se kam ki na ho, aur ok
hi admi ki jon'i hiii ho,
10 Aur ih U k amen ke sabab uaui-
war ho ; agar us ne larkon ki tarbiyat
ki ho, agar musafiron ko apne yahfin
utdra hu, agar muqaddason ke pijiw
dhoe bon, agar musibatzadon ki madad
ki bo, agar har ek nok kam men
pairaui ki ho.
U Par javanbewAnn ku na-mait/iir
kar; kyi'.nki jab wt> Masih ke bar-
kliilaf uazakabm jatalian hairj, to bydh
kiya chahti hain ;
12 Jin par ilzfim hota, ki unhorj ne
apne agle imaii ko clihor diya hai.
13 Aur 6iwa u» ko we Alasi hoke
ghar ghar daurad phirna wkhti hain ;
aur faqat alasi uahin, baiki bakwam,
aur paraye ke kam men dakhl kuras-
wdli hoti hain, aur be-ja Hteii bakti
hain.
H Is waste meri marzi yih hai, ki
jawan bewaen byah karen, bachche
jauen, aur ghar ka kfir o bSr karen,
aur mukhalif ko la'n ta'n karne ki
jagah na dewen,
15 Kyuijki kai ek abhi ShaitAn ke
pichhe ho li hain.
16 Agar kisi i'mfindfir mard yfi
'aurat ki bewiieg hon, to wuhi un ki
k uuiak karo, aur kalisiye par bar na
bo ; ti ki wuh un ki, jo sach each be-
wtieri hain, mndad karo.
17 We buzurg jo achchhi tarah
penliwai karte hairi, khass kar aisi- jo
kalam aur ta'lim ruen mihnat karte
hain, di'ini 'i//,at ke laiq jine jawerj.
IS KyCmki kitfib yih kahii hai,
Dfione ke waqt tii bail ka tiiuijIi niat
bandh. Aur yih, ki Kfim karnewalfi
apni ma/.diiri ki haqqdar hai.
19 Jo da'wi kiwi buzurg par bo, la-
gair do titi gawahon ke niat sun.
ilO Unhen jo gundh karte hon sab
ke sfimbne malfirnat kar, tfi ki auron
ku liiii kliauf ho.
21 Main Kbudfi, aur Khudiwai
Naufear cAdfettr A-e/i
Yisii' Masih, aur bargindde firishton
ke igo, yih Imkm kartd lilin, ki tii in
bdton ko bagair pachli ke 'amal men
W, aur kisi ki tarafddri na kar.
22 ITith kifli par jnld na rakli, aur
na di'isrog ke gundhon. mori sharik hu :
apne ta'in pak rakh,
23 A'ge tfl sirf piiri na piyd kar,
baiki apne hizima atir aisar kam-
zoriog ke wdeto thori mai pi.
24 Ba'ze adraion ke gunah dge za-
hir htin, aur 'addlat men. palile hi
Kihunch jdtc hain ; aur phir ba'zon ke
ain, fa un ka pichha karte.
26 Isi tarah uck kain bhi Kain jo
sal» ke dge zahir Itairi ; aur wo jo aur
waz'a ke hain, clihip nahiri sakte.
VI BATI.
JJ.TNK ehikar jiie ko nichc hain,
apne khdwindon ki> kanidl 'izzat
ke ldiq jdnen, ta ki Khuda ke ndm aur
ta'lim ko ko! bura na kahe.
2 Aur we jin ko khawiud (mandar
hain, unhen, is waste ki bhat hairj»
nachiz na janen ; baiki ziydda ia liye
khidmat karen, ki we i mandar aur
'aziz, aur ni'arnat men sharik hain.
Ye bdten sikhla, aur nasihat kar.
■S Agar koi dusri ta'lim detd hai,
aur bamare Khudawand Yisu' Masih
ke sahih kalam, aur us ta'lim ko, jo
dindari se muwilaijat rakliti hai, qaWii
luihiij karti;
4 Wuh ghamaud roimdiibd hai, ;au
bbi kucbh riahm jiinta, baiki uhg bahs
aur lafzi takrar karnc ki imm bal, jin
se d Ah, aur tpuiye, aur badgoian, aur
bad-gurnanidn,
5 Aur idmion ki nit radd o badai
hnUn, jin ki 'a<ilen khatib ho gayi
hain, aur jo Bachii se khili hain, aur
gumin karte hain ki nafa jo hai,
wuhi dindari hai : tn waaaon se pare
rah.
(J Msgar dindiri to qana'at ke sitb
bara nafa hai.
7 Kyiinki haru duava men kuchh
275
I TIMTA'UH, VI.
Z&t idosti ki b-«ll.
na Ide, aur zahir hai ki kuchh Le ja
nahin aakte.
8 Pas agar ham ne kbdnd kaprs
paya, to yebi hamare liyo bas liong?.
y Far we jo daulatmand hiid chdh-
te hain, tso imtihdn aur phande men,
aur bahut si behuda aur khalat-karni-
wali khwahishon men jiarte lnuii.jo
adui ion ko tabihi aur hal aku t rneri
iluld drti hain.
10 Kyunki siar ki dostf sari buraion
ki jarhai ; iis ko ba'ze arziiiuaud Jinku
iman ki rah se bhatak gaye, aur ip
ko tarah tarah ke gamog se ohfccdi
hai.
11 Par tu, ai mard i KJiuda, in chiz-
on se bhag, aur rdstbfei, dindari, imdii,
muhahbat, snbr, aur larotani ka pichha
kar.
12 I'mdn ki achchbi lapii lar ;
bameaha ki zindagi ko pakar rakh, jis
keliyctu bulaydgayd,aur tune bahut
gawihorj ko age acbchhi iqrdr kiyd
hai.
18 Main Khuda ko sinihno jo har
ck cMz ku /jnda rakhtd hai, aur kasih
Yisil' ke huzilr jis uc Pantius L'iliiius
ke age achohhd iqrir kiyd, tujho tdkid
kartd htin ;
14 Ki tu «ft hukm ko be-ddg o be-
ii«dm hamdre Khudiwand Yisii' Masih
ke KiUiir hone tak liifz kar rakh ;
15 Jise wuh bar-waqt afibirkaraga,
jo mubarak :lur akcla Hakim, Idd-
chahon kd Bidshih, aur khmlawand-
otj ki Khuddwand hai:
10 Baqi faqat usi ko hai ; wuh us
nur iniiii rahta hai, \u tak k-n nahiri
pahnnth sakti, aur iwe kisi inaiu ne
na dekhi, aur na dtkh aakta hai ; usi
ki 'iz?.at aur qudmt abadi rahe. A'ndn.
17 ls jahili ke daulatioandim k"
hukmkar, ki buland-parwa^i nakarem
aur be-bunydd daulat pat bharond na
rakhen, baiki zinda Khuda. par, jis
ne liami'n sab kuchh bahntayat se
diya, ta ki khushi se guaran karen;
18 Aur yih ki we wkokari kang,
PiUut apiid piyar
11 TIMTA'UB, ]
aur bhalo kAm ea daulntrciand banen,
aur sakhawat par taiyar, aur bAntue
par musta'idd howeg ;
1 9 A ur Ayaiule ko apnu liye ok bhali
Imuydd jam'a kar rakheii, ta ki haine-
j>ha ki stindagi piwcfl,
20 Ai Tuutaua, uh amanat k o liila-
<vit bo rakh, aur be-dmi ki behu'da
biton sc, aur un takrarorj se jiulu'n
Timtaus par jalaid.
jhiHh-mtith 'ilm samajbie haiu.munb
pher :
U I .Tis kA ba'ze iqrar karkc iman ki
rab sc bhatak gayo iiain. Fasd tujh
par huwe. A'ruin.
% Yib pahla kbatt Timtaus kol'iihis
no LaudiijiA sq, jo Frugiya. Pokali-
yana kAd£r-ul-hukiimat hai, likh
baeja.
FU'LUS EASUL KA' DU'SEA'
KHATT TIMTAUS KO.
I lU'n.
PU'LUS ki jiinib se, jo KhudA kl
nuvrvA se Yisn' Masih ka rasul
iiai, us zimlagi ke wa'de ko nuinrafiq jo
Masih Yisa' men hai,
2 PiyAre beta Timtdus ko: fazL.
rahm, aur «il Amati, KhudA BAp aur
liamare Khudawiind Masih Y isu' ki
taraf sc howBfl.
3 KhudA kA main shukr kartahiin.
|ia ki handali hApdadon ko taur par
pik dil sc karti hiiii, ki apni du'Aon
uion rAt din bila nAga tpra zikr kartA ;
4 Aur tere ansiiraj ko yad karke
(ere dekhue ki ir/.u rakhtA hiin, tA ki
khushi se bhar jAfin ;
n Aur luiijho w u h tera be-riya iman
yAd hai, jo [jahit; teri mini Lois, aur teri
pai Yuiiike kA tbA, aur mujho yaqin
hai ki tujh mag bhi hai.
6 ls ubab sc maiji tujho yad dilAta
hiin, ki tii KhudA ki us ni'amat ko. jo
mere hAth rakhne ee tujhe mili, phirke
sulga.
7 Kyunki KbinU ne hameg dabshat
ki nih irnhin, baiki qudrat, aur mu-
habbat, aur hoshyAn ki, di bah
H ls wAste tu hamire Khudawand
ki gawAhi se, aur jnujh sc jo us kA
qaidi hiin, sbarmiuda na ho, baiki
276
KhudA ki ipidrat sc Injil ke dukhon
mcn (diarik ho;
t* Ki us lc hanien haebayA, aur pak
bulAhat se bulAyA ; na hatnare kim™
ke sabah se, baiki apne irAde hi, aur
us ni'amat se jo Masih Yisii' ke wdste
azal men hame n di gayi ;
10 Aur ab haniaro BachAnuwAb
Yisii1 Masih ke zuhur sc zAhir hiii,
ki jis ne maut ko nest kiyA, aur zin-
dagl aur baqA ko Injil se roshan kar
iliyA ;
11 Main us ke liye manAdi karne-
wAli, aur rasul, aur gair-qaumon kA
mu'allini, muuarrar hiia hiin.
12 Aur isi liyo main yih dnkh pAtA
hiin; lekin m n iri sharnidtA nahin, is
wasle ki use, jis par main ne i'atiaad
r.ikhA, jAntd >iun ; aur mujhe yaqin hai
ki wuh mori amAnat ki us din tak
hifilzat karsaktA hai.
13 Tii un sahih bAton kA naq-ha
jo tu ne mujh se sunin, us imAn aur
muhabbat ke sith jo Masih YisA' men
hai, bi& kar rakh.
14 Td us aclichhi amAnat ki, jo
tujh ko mili, Ruh i Quda ke waaile
se, jo ham men bastf hai, nigahbini
kar.
15 Tii yih jAntA hai, ki Asia ko sab
TJw khats takid
II TIMTA'US, II.
log, jin men Re Fujnllus aur liarmu -
janea hai n, mujh se phir gaye.
lf» Khuddwand Unosifarus ke ghar
par rahni kare; Ityunki us ne bah u t
bar inujhe tdai-dam kiyd, aur meri
/.anjir ae sharmiiida na lniri :
17 Baiki us no Rum men hote mujhe
koahiah ae dbi'mdhd, aur paya.
18 Khudilwand useyih bakhsho, ki
us din Khuddwand kd rabm ua par
bo; nur jo jo khidmaten uh ne Afaaus
men. kin, tu unJion Hiiib jdntd hai.
U BA'B.
PAR, ai mcre farzand, tu ua fazl &e,
jo Masih Yisii' men hai, mszbiit
lio.
2 Aur mori un baton ko, jo tu ue
bahut so caw&bon ke sdmbue suai
ha'rn, aise diydimtdir ddmion. ke supurd
kar, jo auron ko sikhd bhl saken.
3 Pas tri Yisu* Masih ke aehchhe
sipdhi ki mdnind dukh sah.
4 Jo koi sipdligari kartd hai, apuc
lu, ia dunya ke mu'dmalon men nahin
uljhdtd hai, td ki wuh us ko khush
kare, jis ne sipdhgari ke liye use chun
liya.
5 Aur phir agar koi kushti kare, to
iiij nahin pita, magur jab qd'ide ke
muwafii) kushtikare.
C Kisdn ko, jo mihnut karta, chd-
hiye ki phalon meij pahit: hisaa pawe.
7 Jo batin main kahta hiin, tri UU
ko Boch rakh ; aur Khuddwand tujhe
sah baton ki aaraajh dowe.
8 Yisii' Masih ko, joDadd kiuaslse
hai, ydd rakh, ki wuh imrrdon men so
ji utha, meri Injil ke mtiwdfiq :
9 Jisko liye main badon ki mauind
yahan tak dukh pala hun, ki . band
men hiin ; par Kuada, ki kalam band
Itilliili 1mU;L
10 So main ehuno huoti ke liye sab
h! kuchh saritd hiin, ta ki we us najat
ko, jo Yisii' Masih ne hai, hamesha ke
jalai samct hasil karcn.
11 Yih bat sach hai, ki Agar hnm
277
karna.
■u, toham ua ke eal'u
esdth m
jienge bhi:
113 Agar ham us ke sath dukh utliii-
wen, to us ke aath badslidhi bhi ittr-
engo : agar haru ua ka inkar karun, to
wuh bhi hamird inkai- karegd :
13 Agar ham bo-fmdn ho jawon, tau
bbi wuh wafaddr rahta lini ; wuh ip
apiia inkar kar nahin isafcta.
11 Tu yih bdten ydd dild, aur Khu-
ddwand ko sarohiie gawdh ki tarah im
par yiii jati do, ki we lafzon ki takr:ir
na karen, ki us so kuchh hasil nahin,
magar yib ki aunnewalo l>e-qardr kiye
jaweri.
15 Koslibdi karke t d apno ta,in
Kbudd kd maabul, aur aisd kdrigar io
aharmiuda nn ho, aur Haehai ke kaldm
ka durusti se tafnil karid ho, kar dikhld.
16 Par wdhi aur behi'ida baton se
parhez kar; kyiirjki we logziydda be-
diui ki taraf barhenge.
17 Aur un kd kalam khura ki tarah
klidta chala jdcgd, aur un men &e
Humanaius aur Filetua hain ;
18 We yih kahke ki qiyainat lio
cbuki, sachdi 3e phir gaye ; aur ba'zoii
kd imin ulta dete hain.
19 Tau bhi Khuda ki mazbut bun-
ydd qdiin rahti hai, aur us par yih
niuhr nai, ki Khudawaod unhen, jo us
ke hajn, palichdntd hai. Aur yih, ki
Uar ek io Masrh kd ndm letd hai, na-
rdati se bas! rahe.
20 I'ar bare ghar men faqat aone
riipe hi ke bartan nahiu ; baiki kdlh
.uiriiLifti ke bhi hote haiti ; aur ba'Ee
'izzat, aur ba'ze ziltat ke hjdo.
'H Ia liye agar koi apne ta.in in se
«df fearo, to wuh 'izzat kd bartan, pak
kiyd bfld, aur mdlik ko wasto inufi'd,
aur har ek aehclihe kam ko liye taiydr
hogd.
'22 Jawdni ki shahwaton se diir
bhdg, aur un sab ko sdth, jo pdk dil se
Khujdwand kd ndm leto hain, raat-
ba/i, aur imdn, aur muhabbat, aur
suili ki pairaui kar.
liu'zv bure hyon ki habat, II TIMTA'
2;J Par be-wuqufi aur ni-dani ki
hujjaton w; kinira kar, yih jduke ki
wu jhagre paidd karti hain.
24 Aur murjiaib nahin ki Khudi-
waud kii bandu jbagra kare, baiki sab
h nanui kare, aur siknlatio par musta-
*idd, aur duklion ki sahnewali howe,
25 Aur mukhlliftm ki farotaui se
ta'dib kare, ki' abayad Khudi vtnheu'
tauba bakushc, ta ki we aachii ko
pahchinen ;
26 Aur wc, jinhuii Sihaihin h jita
*bikir kiyd iiai, be-dar hojikar us ko
phaitde ae cbhiitcp,, ta ki Khuda ki
laar/.i ko baja liweu.
111 BA'B.
T U' yih jan rakh, ki akhiri dinon
men bure waqt awenge.
2 Kyiinki iilmi Irfiud-giiraz.zardoat,
lafzan, ghamandi, kulr-karuuwale, mi
bap kena-Iarminhirdar, na-fihnkr, na-
pak,
3 Be-dard, kinawar, tuhmati, bad-
parhez, be-rahm, neki ke dushman,
4 Dagabaz, be-libaz-phulnewrile,
Khuda ke chahne ki banisbat 'ishrat
ke ziyida chihnewale ;
5 Aur dlndiri ki surat men hoke ua
ki (jinirat ka infcar karenge: tu aison
se d i'i r rah.
6 Kyiinki n n 1111:5 se we hain, jo
gbaron muu ghuaa karto hnin, aur ua
cuhicliliori randiitnko, jugurtilion lale
dabi haig, aur tarab tarah ki ahahwat-
im ke bas tih'u phiins gayi bata
7 Aur hamasha ta'iiiu pati hain,
par sacbai ki pahchau tak hargiz
pabuucli ualiin saluin, girifiar karto
hain.
8 Aur jis tarah ki Yannes aur
YambroH no Miisa ki siuihna kiya,
nsi tarab ye Lbi aachii ke mukhilif,
kharab-'aql, aur iman ki babat na-
niaqbul hain.
9 Par we iigc na barbenge, ia wisto
ki un ki nadini mil) par zihir ho jiegi,
jia tarah ku un ki bhi bui.
10 Par tu ne nieri ta'Jim men, chil
278
US, III, IV. jo barpd honge.
cbaian, iradc, iman, sabr, muhabbat,
bardaMit men.,
11 Satie jdnc, aur dukh nthtiric ki
haiaton nwrj, jaise ki Antakiyd, aur
Iqunium, aur Luatra merj mujh par
pare, mcri paiiaui ki hai ; aur main
no aatayo jano ko kaise dukh sahc
hain ! par Khudawand ne mujhe un
sab se bacha liyi.
12 Baiki sab ke aab, jo Yiaii1 Masih
men dindiri ke aith guzriu kiya
chihte hain, satac jaerjge.
13 Par bure aur dhokhebiz idmi
fareb dekc, aur fareb kluVk-', badi men
Age barhte joogge.
14 Par tii un baton par, jo tu nu
sikhiri, aur jin ka yaqin tujhe dilaya
RayA, qiim rah ; ki tii yih janta Iiai
ki ki* ae Bikha hai ;
15 Aur ki tu larkdi se muqjuldas
kitabon ae waqiJ' hai, jo ki tujhe Mawih
Yiau.* par irain line ae najat ki danai
biildwh sakti luin.
i. i> Uar ek kitab jo ilham ae hai,
ta'lim ke, aur ilzom ke, aur audbariie
ko, aur rasttia/i DMfi tarbiyat karnc ke
wdste faidamand bhi hai :
17 Ta ki mard i K!huda katnil, aur
bar ok nek kam ke Jiye taiyar bo.
IV BAU
PAS main Khuda aur Khudawand
Yiau' Masih ke age, jo apuo
ziihir hofM ke waqt aur apni bddshtihi
niun ziudon aur miirdon ki 'adiilat
karega, takid karta htin ;
2 Ki td kalam ki martadi kar; wnqt
aur bc-waqt musta'idd rah; kamal
bardasht aur ta'lim hc> il/iiui de ; aur
malamat aur nasihat kiya kar.
'S Kyiinki aiaa w*aqt awega, jab M
sahih ta'lim ki bardiaht na karerige:
par kan khujlate hlie apni buri
khwahiahon ke miiwifiq ustad par
ustad bulicnge ;
4 Aur kanon ko anehi! ki taraf m
phcrke kahinion par lagiwunge.
5 Par tu siri baton men hoshya:
Pulut ki
ho: ilnkh m] i ; IftJfl-aun&iiWala kd
krim kar; npni khidmat ko pura kaj.
6 Kyiinki ab merd lahu dh&ld jAti
hai, aur mero kiicb ka waqt a paliun-
cliii hai.
7 Main achchhi lardi lar chukd,
main ne daur ko tamani kiyd, maig ne
iman ko qaim rakha :
8 Bdqi, rastbdzi ka taj mero liye
ilhara hai, jise KhudAwand, jo ki rast
hdkim hai, uh din mujhe degd; aur
faqat mujhe nabin, baiki mi Bab ko
bhi jo ua ko zdhir lione ko clidhte hain.
9 Tii koshisli kar, ta ki mere pas
jald awe :
10 Kyunki Demds no is jahan ku
paaand karke mujhe chhor diyd, aur
Tawaluniqe ko chald gayd ; Qre»qes
Galatiya men, aur Titus Dai ma t iya
men gaya.
11 Luqa akeld men sdtli hai. Tii
Hsnroj ko ajme sath Ic a, kyunki
wuh ia khidmat men mere ka'm ka
hal.
12 Main nr: Tiikhikus ko Afasus
men bbejd.
13 Wuli lubada jise main nc Trnas
men Qarpus ke yahin chhora, aur
kitabon, khiss kar rau,q ke tiiinrir, tii
let.e diyo.
14 Sikandar thathcre re mujb se
balmt badl ki ; Tfh.udawa.nd ub ko
kdmon ke muwafiti use badla do:
15 Uh se tii bhi khabarddr rah,
TITUS, I. akhiri tdkid.
kyi'inki us ne hamdri b&torj ki bahut
mukhdlalat ki.
1 tS Merd pabild 'u?r karte waqt kol
taati sathi DS tlia, baiki sahhon nc
mujhe chhor diya ; is ka hisab nnheii
1 ia pare.
Par Khudawund mere «Ath rabi,
aur us ne mujhe taqat bakhsW, ki
raeri rna'rifat se puri m andil i ki jawe,
aur eab gair-qaum aunen ; aur main
babar ke rnimh K chhuraya gaya.
18 Aur Khud&wand mujhe har ek
7,abun kam ko bachiWvegd, aur anni
dsmdtii bddshdhi tak mahfuz rakhegd ;
u s k a jalai abad ul abad howe.
A'min.
19 PriBqd aur Aqula ko, aur Unesi-
farus ke ghar ko saidm kah.
20 Aras t u s (Juri n t us men raba;
Trunmiis ko main ne Miletus men
bitnar chhora.
-1 Jaldi kar ki tii jdre se [eshtar
pahunehe. Yubulus, aur Pudnes, aur
Linus, aur Qlaudid, aur Bare bliai,
luihc saldm kahto bain.
22 Khudawaod Yisi'i' Masih teri
ruh ke sdtb rahe. Fazl tum logon
par howe. A'min.
TI Vih dtisrd khatt Timtim ko, jo
Afsion ki kalisiye ka pahla nigah-
bdn muqnrrar hud, Piihia ne Rum
se ub waqt likh bheja, jis waqt
wuh Q:iisar Nero ke sdmhne do-
bdra hazir kiya gaya.
PU'LUS KASU'L KA' KHATT
TITUS KO.
I BATI.
)U*LUS ki jftnib ee, jo Khndd kd
banda aur Yisii1 M;isfh ki nadi
ij Khadd ko bargur.idon ke iman,
279
aur wr sacliai ki pahchau ke waste, jo
ilindari ki ba'is hai;
2 Us hameshit ki ziudagi ki ummed
par, jis kd wa'da Khudd no, jo jbiSth
Tilas ki bdiut hi kyiui TITI
iiabin bolti, abadi zauauion ke dge
k iya hai ;
3 Aur \vaqt par apne kalam ko us
iiiaruiili w-, n I ia u ia re baehdnewdle
Khudi ku huktn se mujho sorapi gayi,
Kihir kiyd faal;
4 Titus ko jo 'amm i min ke ru ee
ineri fammd haijiin hai ; fail, ralun,
aur salamati, Uap Khuda aur hatnare
Baehdnewdle Khudawand Yisu' Masih
ki taraf se liowon.
5 Main ne tujhe is waste Qrete men
chhora, ti ki tii bdqi eliizen durust
kari;, aur bu/.urgon ku shahf lia sbahr
nmijarrar kare, jaisa main ne tujhe
hukm k iya hai.
C Agar koi ddmi be-ilziin ho, aur
ek hi jon'i rakhta ho, aur mi ke larke
imaiidar howeu, aur bad-chali
malaiuat aa pak lio n, aur uarkash na
howeg :
7 Kyiinki ehaliiyo ki Dtgfthb£a,jo
Khuda kakarimia hai, bo-ilzainho; us
ki khud-pnsaud, na gU6.sawar, iia aha-
rabi, na umrpiL-karuowala,nani-rawd
nafa lenewdld;
H Baiki muaitir-dost, neki ka
chdhuowdld, hoshydr, rdstkdr, pak
parhe^gdr;
9 Aur lalim ke muwdfui iman ke
kalam ku thauibhy rahe, ti ki wuh
tah ih ta'liui H nasihat kanie, aur
barkhilaf kahncwdlou ko ilzain dia
par magddr rakhe.
10 Kyiinki bahut se be-qaid aur
behilda-go aur dagAbaz hain, khd&tkar
makhtunon men «e;
U Jin ki muiili band kami zanir
hai, ki wu na-rawa nafa ke waste
jii bdton sikhlakc tamani gharinou ko
ulat piilni kar dilto hain.
I 'J 1 ' ii men se ek ne, jo un ki uabi
tha, knhfi, ki Qreti hamesha jhiitjm,
aur bure darinde, aur diikati petu
hain.
l-'i Yih gawdhi saoh hai; is wiste
ti'l unheri sakht oalimat kar, tiki
iiji.'in men sahih Ilmu ;
2H0
S, II. Qrete men chhora gaya.
14 Aur Yahudion, ki kabinion, aur
aise admiou ke hukmon par jo HOlttl
st; pbir gaye hain, mutawajjih ua
howen.
15 Tak logon ke liye sah kuchh
pak hai: par nd'pdkon aur be-iindnoij
ke liye kuchh pak nahin; baiki uii ki
V]l aur imtiydz karae ke dil uapdk
hain.
l(i Khuud ko pahchanne ka iijrar
to kartu hain, par kimori ki nih so us
ki inkir karto hain ; we nal'rat ke
iiiij, aur ni-farnidnljardar hain, aur bar
ek nek k&m ko liye na-maublil.
11 BATB.
P Alt tii wc bdton kah, jo sahih ta'-
liui ke munisib hain.:
2 Ki burho parliozgir, sanjkla,
Mihili i tanii/. Ihiti, aur iman, aur piyir,
aur sabr men sahih.
3 Aur usi tarah burhidn. bhi ai&i
ohdl chalcg, jaise muqaddason ke ldii{
hai, aur tuhuiut-kamewaliag na how-
eQ, aur bahut mai ke jal men na
[ihansen, baiki aclichhi bdton ki aikh-
lanewaii hog ;
4 Td ki jawan 'auraton ko hoshydr
karen, ki we apne khasamoQ aur
bacachog ko piyir karen,
u Aur chaukas, aur pik-diman, aur
ghar men rahnewdlidn, aur khuitli-
mizdj, aur apne k h asa moa ko kahe
mcti howun, ta ki Khuda ke kalam ki
baduimi na howe.
Yun hi jawanon ko bhi nasihat
kar, ki we hoshydr rahen.
7 Aur sdri bdton, meri apne ta.iij
nek kainon ka namilna zdhir kar do:
apui ta'lim men diyanatddri, aur san-
jiiia^i, aur kliulus «lili dikhldke,
H Aur aiai kalam bhi sunike jo
sahih ho, aur jis par koi 'aib na iagd
sake; ti ki mukhdlif hamen ilziiu
dene ki koi wajlt na ] akar t>lianninda
b o jiwe.
0 Naukaron ko sikhi, ki apne khd-
windon ki tdbi'diri karen, aur Sib
Naukaron kafarz. TT.TTJ
bdton tuen unkea khush rakhen, aur
khilaf bat oa kahen ;
10 Aur khiyaua-t oa karun, baiki
kamal diyanat-dari zahir karen ; la
ki we hamsire bachdiLuwdle KhuiU ki
ta'lim ku sari bdton. meu rauuaq
dewem
11 Kyrinki Khudd ka faal, jo saro
Admioit ko liyu najat-bakh.sh hai. Kabir
b i'i d hai,
12 Aur hanicn sikhlaUi lini, ki b*>
dini aur dutiya ki buri khwahiskon se
iukar karke ia jahdu mes hoshydri,
aur rdsti, aur dindarl ee /.imla-i guz-
raiii'ij ;
13 Aur iuri mubarak uinmed, aur
DUSUN Khuda, aur apnu backdncwale
YisiV Masih ko zuhur i jalil ka inti/ra-
ka run ;
14 Jis ne dp ko hamdre badle diyd,
td ki wuh banierj sab tarab ki bad-
kdrion 98 ehhurdwu, aur ok khas» um-
mat ko, jo nekokari uien sargarm
tiowen, apne liye pdk kare.
16 Vili bdteij kali, aur nasihat kar,
aur apnd tamdm ikhtiyar jatake ma-
lamat kar. Koi tujbu haqir iia jaue,
IH BA'B.
UNHEN yid tlila, ki sardarog aur
ikhtiydr-wdlon ko mahktim
howen, aur farnidnbarddri k aren, aur
bar ak nck kaui [mr musta'idd rabun,
2 Aur kisi ke liaqq mon bura ua
kaheii, bakheriyc na howen,, parnarin-
dil howen, aur sab admion ko sdth
halhui karen:
3 Kyiinki ham blti &gp, ndddu, ua-
farmdnbarddr, farcb-khancwalo, aur
rang ba rang ki shahwatoti aur 'ish-
ratOQ ke baa men the, aur badkhwdhi
aur ddh ku wilh guzrdn karie, aur
nafrat ke ldiq, aur apas men, kina
rakhte t lio.
4 Par jab hamaru liacbanewale
Khudd ki mihrbdni aur ddmion, par
ragbat zahir hui,
281
S, III. Di<i'atwQ ki tata.
S Uh ne ham ko, rastbdzi ke kauion
se oahin jo liam ne kiye, baiki apui
rahmat ke mutabiq, naye janaiu ke
ausi aur ituh i Qud» ke sar i nau
baudno ke Babab, bachdyd ;
b' Jise us ue haiudru Bauhdnewdle
Yiaii' Masih ki ma'rilat hain par
bahutdyat m dala ;
7 Td ki ham us ka fazl se r&atbaz
thaharkar uuimed ke mutdbiq hani-
esha ki i:iiidaj;i ke waris howen,
8 Yih bdt sach hai, aur main ohftb.-
td hun ki t u in bdton ko tikid se
kahd kar, td ki we jo Khudd par imdn
Ide ham, Utdfltha kar ke nokokdrf men
mawlifiul tahen. Ye chiKon bbali, aur
aduiion ke ir&ste laidaniaiid hain..
i) Par wdhi hujjaton, aur nasab-
ndmon, aur qaziyun, aur takrdron W,
ju phari'at ki babat hon, parhez kar,
ki we la-hdsil aur beltuda hain.
10 Us ahakha se, jo bid'ati hai, ek
do nasihat karke kicdro lio jd ;
11 Td jdutd hai, ki waisa ddmi bar-
gashta ho gaya hai, aur guuah kartd,
aur dp hi apne ta,in mulzam thahrdtd
hai.
12 Jab main Artaiaas ya Tukhikus
ko tero pas bhejiin, tab jaldi iar ki
tii mere pds Js'ikupulis mon dwa ; ky-
iinki main ne thdtid hai ki jdra wahin
kdtnii.
13 l''aqih Zenas aur Apalld^ ko
kiiabardari so paliiniohd de, ki we kiai
chiz ku inuhtdj ua howen.
14 Aurhamdi-e logbhi /.aniriydt ke
liye ai:ludibe pesha ikhliydr karen, td
ki we be-phal pa howon.
15 Sab jo mere sdth hain tujhu
saldm kalite hain. Un ko, jo imdn ke
sabab ham se muhabbat rakhtu hain,
salam kab. Tuni sab par fazl howu.
A'mln.
1 Yih khatt Titus ko, jo Qretion
ki kaliaiye ka pahld ni<;ahbaii
muqarrar bud, Piilus ua Maqadu-
uiya ke Nikupulis se likh bheja.
PU'LUS RASUL KA' KHATT
FILEMU'N KO.
PU'MJS ki, jo Masih SM' kA qaidi,
aur bhai TimtAus ki jAnib se
b'ilemi'in kn, jo bara piyaii aur hamora
ham-kbidrnat hai,
2 Aur piyari Afiya, aur Arkbippus
bamare ham-tipAh ko, aur us kalisiye
ko, jo term ghar inejj hai :
3 Fazl, aur aalAmati, hamAre Bfip
KhudA aur KhudAwand Yisil ' Mmu
ki taraf «e, tum par howe.
4 Main teri muhabbat kA hAI, jo
sare muqaddason ac hai,
5 Aur tere iman ki jo KhudAwaud
Yieu' par hai, sunke hamesha apni
du'Aon men tujhe ydd karta, aur apne
Kiudd kst nhukr kartA hfirj ;
6 Ki tere iman ki rifaqat, un sari
nekion ke man lene su jo tum men
ham, Masili Y\bu' ke vrAste bA asar ho.
7 Kyunki haru teri mubabbat se
bahu t khush aur kliAtir-jam'u. baiii, ki
tujh Re,' ai bhai, muqaddas lugoa ke jf
ne Aram paya hai.
8 So agaicbi main Masih ke sabab
bahu t be-dharak htirj, ki tujho jo
munAsib howe hukm karun,
9 Kukiri mujbe yih pasand aya, ki
mubabbat ki nih se ibimAa k arti n ;
kyiinki niairi ainA, gova Piilus hiirhA
hun, aur ab Tisu' Masih kA qaidi bhi.
10 So main apne farzand ki babat,
jo mere oaid lione ki halat roen mere
liye paidft MA, ya'ne, Unesituus ki
babat, tujh &e 'arz karta hun :
11 Jo Age tere tiye nikammd thd,
par ab tere aur mere liye bahut faida-
mand hna :
12 So main ne tit-c plier bheja bai
282
ub tii uh ko, ya'no, mere kaleje ke
tukrc ko, qabill kar.
13 Main ne chAbA tba ki use apne
hi pas rakhug, tA ki wah tere 'iwaz In-
jil ki zanjiron men meri khidmat kare :
14 l'ar teri marzi bagair main no
. chAhA ki kuchh kanin ■ ta ki tera
nek kAtn lAuhAri se ntihfn, baiki
lushi kg howe.
16 Kyrinki shAyad wuh tujh «e is
liye t bori der judA rahA, tA ki tU ham-
esha ke wAate uae pbir pAwe;
16 Magar ab se na gulam ki tarah,
baiki gulam se bihtar, ya'ne, bhai ki
tarah, jo 'aziz hai, khas» kar raujh ko,
aur kitnA bi /iyadu, jisrn ki nisbat aur
KhudAwand ke sabab, tnjli ko'aziz na
hogA ?
17 So agar tu mujbe aharik jAnta
hni, to us ko ia tarah qabiil kar, jis
tarah mujb ko,
18 Agar ue ne MrA kuchh nuqsAn
kiyA hai, yi kucbb teri dharAtA hai,
to use mere nira likh rakb ;
19 Main Pulus apnc hAth se likh
diuUA hiin, ki Main ap udA karurvgd:
par main tujh se na kahun ki siwi is
ke meri" qarz jo tujh par bai, n lu
khud hai.
20 Ran, ai bhii, mujbe tujh se
KhudAwand men naf'a ho; K""dA-
ivand men mere kftlejo ko tbandA kar.
21 Mairi ne teri farmAnbard'iri kA
yaqin karke tujhelikhA hai; aur main
j/LTitii htm ki tii us se bhi jo main
kabtA btin ziyAda karegA.
22 Is so sawi tiknc ki jacab i
liye UiiyAr kar; ki mujbe yih umiucd
Masih M baiat, ki 'IBRA/NI'ON, I, II. firishton w buzurg hai.
hai, H nmin tumhAri du'Aon ke wasile _ '25 Hamarc Khudawand Yisu' Ma-
se tnmhen diyA jai'm.
33 ApairAs:, )» Masih Yisu' ke waste
mcrc sAth qaid nion hai ;
Si Aur Marqus, nur Aristarkhus,
aur Deroas, aur Liiqi, jo mere hain-
khidmat hain, tujhe -salam kalite hain.
nih ke satu bom.
Tf Yih khalt Fileuiiin ko I'nlus nc
Rum se Unesimus chakar ke hiih
liku bkejA,
IBKANION KO KHATT.
I BA'B.
KIIUDA', jia ne agle zamaue men
nabion ke wasile bipdadon se
bir bar aur larah ba tarah kalam kiyA,
2 In akhiri dinoii men ham se B*: U;
ke wasi!c'boli,jis ko us ne sari chizon
ki waris thahrdyi, aur jis ke wanile
uh oe 'Alam banii' ;
3 Wuh IH ke jaldl k( raunaq, aur us
ki maliiyat kd naqsh hoke sah kutlih
inai lii qudrat ku kalam se sambhiltA
li;ii; wuh £p se hamiro ^imalmn ku
pak karke bulandi pai janah i 'ali ke
dahine ji baitbA.
4 Wah tirishton se is qadr buzurg-
tar thahri, jis qadr US ne mirAs men
un ki nisbat bilitar klutab pAya,
5 Kyunki us ne firishton. men ae
kis ko kabhi kahA, ki Td rucri Beti
hai, niaiu aj hi terA BAp hui? Aur
phir yilCki Main us ki BAp bunga,
aur wuh merA Beta hoyi?
6 Aur jab palauthe ko dunyi meu
phir ldyA, to k'ahi.'ki Khudi ko sab
tirishte us ko sijda karcn.
1 Aur firishton ki babat yiin far-
rnitA hai, ki Wuh apne hnshbm k(
ruhen, aur apue khadimon. ko Ag kA
«bu'ala banAUL hai.
8 Masar Be(e ki hibat kahta liai,
ki Ai Khudi, tcrA takht ahad tak hai ;
rasti ki 'asi teri bidshihat ki 'asi
hai.
D Tii ne rasti .se ulfat, aur badi se
'adawat rakbi; is sabab se, ai Khudi,
tere KbudA ne khushi ke tel se tere
sharikon ki baiiisbat tujbo ziyAda
mamsiih kiyi.
10 Aur yih, ki Ai Khudawand, tii
no ibtidA men zamin ki neo dili; aur
AamAn tere liath ki kirigart hain.
XI We nest ho jienge, par tu biqi
hai ; aur we sab posliik ki mAnind
purane horige;
12 Aur chadar ki tarah tii unhen
lapetegi, aur we badai jienge ; por tii
wuhi hai, aur tere baras jate na ra-
henge.
13 Phir us ne firishton men se kis
ko kabhi kahA, ki Tu mere dahine
haith, jab tak ki main (ere diiflh.rn «MM
ko tere pinwon ki ehauki kurun?
H Kya'wesabkhidiiiiit-^u/arri'ihrn
nahirj, jo najAt ke wArisun ki khidmat
ke liye bhcji jiti hain?
II BAU
I S liye chAhiye ki un bAton por jo
hain ne suiiin aur bhi di! lagike
S aur laron, tA aiai na ho ki ham un-
en kho dewen.
2 Chunkiwuh kalim jo firiKliton ki
ma'rifat kahA gavd mazbiit rahA, aur
Tisu' 'aziyat uthAke TBKA'Nl
liar ek 'udiil aur nA-farmanf no wajibi
badlA pAyA ;
3 To baut kytf.ukav bae.herjge, agar
itni bari najAt se gsifil rabo bon; jis
ka bayan pahle Khudawand se hfiA,
aur sunuewalun se tiam par sabit
h r. a i
4 KhudA Ap ua par nishAnoi), aur
karanmton, aur tarah tarah ku mii-
'ajizon, aur Mh i Quds ki ban t i hui
ni'anmlon se, apni inarei ke rnuwA5q,
gawahi dera rabi?
5 Us ne us 'aoibat ku, jis ki zikr
hai» kartu hain, firishtoyj ke ikhtiyAr
n ion nah I u chhora.
6 Par kisi ne gawAhi deke kahin
farrnAyA,ki Insan kya hai, ki tu us ki
yad rakhe? ya insan ka beta, ki tii
us par nigAh kans?
7 Tu ne u» ka martaba firiiditon K
thora kam thabrAyi; t u ne jalai o
'izzat ka taj ua par rakhA, aur apue
hath ke kamon par use ikhtiyAr bakh-
Bhi:
8 Ti\ ne Bab kuchh ua ke oadanion
ke niche kiya hai. Pas jis baiat
aab kuchh us ke tab'i men lAyA, to ua
no kof chiz na chhori, jo us ke tAbi'
men na laya. Pai- ab lak ham nahin
dokhre ki sah ebizen us ke tabi'
ki gayi hain.
9 Magar uae dekhte hain, jis kA
darja firishton se kuchh kam thA, ya'ne
Yisu' ke, ki us ne maut ki a/iyat ke
sabab jalai o 'izwit ka taj paya ; ta ki
wuh KhudA ke hz\ &e sah adraion ke
liye maut ka maza chakhe.
10 Kyiinki us ko, jis ke liyo sab
chizen hain, aur jia ko wasile sari
chizen hain, yih nmiiAsib thA, ki jab
babui. H farzandon ko jalai men lAwe,
uu ki najat ke peshwA ko aziyaton se
kAmil karo.
11 Kyunki wuh Jo pak karta, aur
wc jo pAk kiye jate, wib ek hi ke hain ;
is liyo wuh unhen bhai kahno se na-
hin sharmitA.
12 Ki wuh kahtA hai, ki Main tera
284
'ON, III. Masa se
nam apne bhAion. ko smiAi'vnga; niaj-
m'a men terA aauakhwan hoiingA.
18 Aur phir yih, ki Main us par
bharosA rakhungA. Aur yih bhi, ki
Dekh, main un larkon samet jinhen
KhudA ne tnujhc diyA.
14 Pos jis hAl ki larke gosht aur
kbiin men sharik hain, waiafi hi wuh
bhi un men sharik Inti; ta ki maut
ko wasile us ke, jia ko pas maut ka
Kor tha, ya'ne, ShailAu ku, barbAd
karo;
15 Aur unhen, jo 'umr bhar maut
ke dar se jjulami men gint'Lar ho rahe
the, chhurawe.
1(5 Ki wuh albal.ta liriishton ki na-
hin sath doti, baiki Abiraham ki nasi
ka sath detd hai.
17 Ia aabab se zarur tha ki wuh
liar ek bAt men apne hliaion ki iuu
riiod bane, tA ki wuh un bAton m*Q
jo KhudA se nisbat rakhtin logon ke
gunahon kA knfara karae ke waste ek
rahim aur diyanatdar BardAr kAhin
tbahic.
13 Ki jis hAl ki us ne Ap hi imtiban
men parke liukh paya, to wuh un ki,
jo imtiban mrn parte hain, madad kar
saktA hai.
III BA'B.
PAS, ai pAk bhAio, jo AsmAni da'wat
men aharik lnie, \is Rasul aur
SardAr kAhiu Masih Yisii' mr, jis kA
ham ii'irfir karte hain, gatu- karo ;
H Ki wuh us ko Agu, jis ne use rau-
qatrar kiya, aiuauatdar thA, jia tarah
MusA bhi apne sAro ghar meti thA.
3 Baiki wuh Musa se is rpidr ziyAda
'izzat ke laiq samjha gaya, jis <|adr
ghar se gharkd mAlik ziyAda 'izzatdir
bot a hai.
4 Ki har ek ghar kA kui banane-
wAla hai ; liar jis ne sab kuchh banAya,
so Kluida hai.
5 Aur MusA to apne sAre ghar men
kbadim ki tarah diyAuatdAr rabi, ki
uu bAton parfjo zAhir boiic ko tlii>_.
gawahi de ;
bihtar darja }«xta.
6 Par Masili bct.c ki manind apne
ghar ka muk h tar rahd ; aur uh kd
ghar ham Lain, bashartc ki apni lii
Miat aur umrocd ki fakhr akhir tak
<piim r;ii;ln'ij.
T Is waste (jaisa Hiih i Qudi
mati hai, Agar aj tum uh ki awdz
8 Apne dilon ko sakhl na karo, j U
tarah bayabdn nicu dznuiish ke dia,
gazalwiiigezi ko waqt, hud:
9 Jis waqt tumhare bapdidog nc
mujhc a/.maya, aur \inhun ne mujhe
parakhd,aur chdlis bara» se mere ki'
dekhte the.
10 lu liye main ne us nasi se aardz
hokc kahd, ki lu lojog ke dil bar
waqt gumrah hote bain: aohag
meri rdhon ko nahin pnhchdna.
11 Chunanelii main no apne gusse
mes qasarn kliaf, ki Ye mere aram.
men h&rgiz diikhil na hongc.)
12 Klialjardar, ai bhaio, ki tum
mag m kisi mm be-inuinl kd burddil
na lio, jo zinda Khuda se pbir jdwe,
13 Baiki tum har rOB, jab tak A'j
ke dia ka zikr liota hai, apas men ek
ddsro ku nasihat kara, ta ki tum men
8« km gundh ke fareb so aakht na ho
jawe.
14 Kyugki Iiam Masili men (diarik
ham, basharte ki apne shurd'ke i'ati-
qad ko akhir tak qdim rakherj ;
15 Jab jih kaha jala, ki A'j agar
tum uh ki awiz sunu, apne dilon ko
sakht na kuro, jaisa gazab-angezi ke
waqt hua :
16 Kyiinki wo kaua the, jinhon ne
Bunke gusea diliyi; kyd un sabhon
ne nahin, jo Mus* ke wasile Misr so
uikle?
17 Aur wufc- kin logon se chalis
baras tak uaran rana? kya un se na-
liin, jinhon no gunak kiya, aur un ki
liskan bayaban m «m pari rabi g ?
IH Aur kia ki babat us ne qasam
klidi, ki Wo mere aram men dakhil
na hongc, magar un ki jinhoji ne'ud-
farmaui ki?
'lBRA'NI'ON., FV. Masihion ka mbti aram.
18 Aur yun lu ham dekhle haiij,
ki we bo-imani ke sabab dakbil na ho
saken.
IV BA'B.
PAR, jab ki us ko aram meo da-
khil hone ka wa'da bdq[ hai, t o
chahiye ki ham daren, ta na howe ki
dekbne men ham mon. Be kol pichhe
rah jae.
2 Kyilaki hamen bhi khushkha-
bari di gayi, jaisi un ko : par jo kalam
anfcog ne mati, wuh un ko liye fdida-
bakbui na hud, ki Hunnewalofl men
iman ke sath m i la na tha.
.'{ Kyi'inki bam jo iman Ide aram
men dakhil batu hain, jaisa us ne ka-
ha, ki Main ne apnc gusse men qasam
khai, ki yih log mere aram men, da-
kbil na horjge : agarchi duaya ki
bunyad se sab kam bane the.
4 Ki ua ne satwen dia ki babat
k:diin yiiii farmaya, Aur Khuda ne
apac sare kamoa so Katwea dia aram
kiya.
5 Aur phir is maqilm mon bhi, k i
We mere ardm men dakhil na hongc.
6 Pas jis bal ki ua mes dakhil
hond ba'zon ke waste baqi hai, aur
we jin ke liye pahle khushlthaliari di
gayi thi, be-imini ke 'sabab so dakhil
na hue :
ririr ek khass din thahrdta hai,
jiso A'j kd din kahtd hai, ohtindnchi
wuh ilni ruuddat ba'd Daiid ki ma'ri-
fat iartmUA hai, ki jaisa likhd hai, ki
A'j agar tum un ki dwdz snno, to apno
ditojj ':o sakht, na karo.
8 So agar Yashii' no unherj Aram
len ddkhil kiya Iiotd, to wuh U8
/aot ke ba'd ek duore dia kd zikr
na karta.
HasiUi kalam, Khudd ko logon
ke wAate ek khdss sabi ko itiatma ba-
qi hai.
10 Kyurjka jo na ke drdm mon da-
khil hiid, us ne apne hi kdmon se
faragat pdi, jnisi Khudd ne apne
jkdmon so.
Masih H 'IBRA'Nl'ON, V, VI. faJUbwA
11 Paa do, hnm koshish loiren ki narfaraz na kiyji ki sardur kdhirt hafis;
us drdm men ddkhtl howen, IA aisd baiki usi ne kiyd, jis ne bm kahft, ki
ho ki us nd-farmani ke nami'me
piir koi 'amal karke gir pare. •
12 Kyunki Khudd kd kalam sunda,
BOT ti.sfr-karnew.4Ia, aur bar «k do-
ilh&ri talwdr se teztar hai, aur jdn.
aur n'ih, aur band band, aur gdde
gtide ko jiul.'i karke guzar jdtd, aur dil
ke kbiyalon aur iradon ko jdnchtd hai.
lS Aur koi makbluq us ae chhipd
nahfn : baiki jU ae ham ko kain hai,
sah kuchh us ki na/.aron nier. khuld
h<ra aur be-parda hai.
14 Fus, jis baiat men hiimdrd ck
aisd buzurg «arddr kdhin, Jo afl&k sc
guzar gayd, Khudd kd Beta Yisr? hai,
to chdliiyo ki ham apno iurir par
edbit-nadam rahcn.
15 Kyunki hamdra aisd sardir ka-
bin nahin, jo hamdri wuslkm men
ham-dard na ho «a ke; baiki «i.sa j"
sdri bdtori men hamdri mdnind k'.-
maya gaya, pai u» M gunah na kiya.
16 Is liye do, ham fazl ko takht k(
pds diiuri ke sdth jdwen, td ki haru
par rahm bowe, aur fazl, jo waqt par
madadgar ho, hasil kurcn.
V BA'B.
KYU'JTKI har ek sarddr kabin jo
ddmiun men we ehun liya jdtd,
admfou hi ke liye, un kdmon. ko wdste
jo Khudd se 'ildqa rakhte, mnnarrar
botd hai, ki nazr aur gunah ki qur-
banfan guzrano;
2 Atit wuh ndiUnon aur gumrahon
par sliafaqat karne ke cpibil ho; is
wdste ki wuh dp blii bamzorion men
giriftdr hai.
8 Aur ia sabab se zarnr hai ki jis
tarah wuh logon ke liye, usi tarah
apno liye bhi gunah ki qurbduian
cbarhawe.
4 Aur koi ddmi yih 'izzat dp
nahiri ikhtiyar karta, magar faipit jab
wuh, Harun hi ki maiiiiid, Khudd se
tabib kiyd jdwe.
5 Isi lurah Masih ne bhi dp ko
Ti'i nwra Beta hai, dj main tera »A|i
had.
6 Chutidnclii wuh diisro maqain
men bhi kulit* hai, ki Tu Malik i
Sidq ke taur par hameaha ko kdhin
hai.
7 Usi ne aprie rnujassani hrjBe ke
dinon men bahu t ro ro aur dnsii bahd
buliake us se, jo us ko maut se bacha
sakti thd, du'aen aur minaatrin kin,
aur tahammul ke sabab us ki suni
gayi.
K Agarchi wuh Betd thd, par un
iliiklion se, jo ub ne uthae, farmdn-
bardirf sikhi.
9 Aur wuh kdmil hokar apne sah
farmanbnrddron ke liye hameslia ki
najit kd bd'is hiid ;
10 Aur Khudd ki taraf se Malik
i Sirlq ki minimi sarddr kahin kah-
ldyd.
11 Us ki bdhat hamdri bahut m
l.'-n iiain, jin kd baydn kamd blu'
iishkil hai, is IJyo ki tumhdre kiin
bhuri liairj.
12 Kyunki waqt ke lihaz h Id'/.im
thd ki tum ustdil hote ; magar ab tak
tuai ia ke mubtdj ho, ki koi tumben
pbir sikiidwe, ki Kiudd ke kalam ki
pnhili usnlwdli bd'ten kauohain; aur
tumben diidh ciidliiye, na sakht
khurak.
13 Kytinki jo diidh pitd hai, wuh
■AstbdKi ke kalam nffl nd-tajriliakdr
hai ; is liye ki wuh baehcha hai.
14 Par sakht khurdk piiri 'umr-
wdlon ke wdste hai, ya'no, un ke
wdste jin ke hawass rabt se te£ lio
gaye hon, ki nek o bad mog imtiyiz
karen.
VI BA'B.
I S wdste Masih ki U'lim ki ibtidli
bdten chhorkar kamdl ki taraf
barhte chule jdwcri ; aur m orde kim-
on so tauba karne, aur Khudd p«»
itndn lane,
'iBRA'yroH, vrr,
fii'lim,
Iiargashta hone ki
2 Aur baptisroo_
hith rBUma, nur murdon ke ji uthi
aur hameaha ki 'addlat ki nco do- bara
n:i dalcn.
3 Aur Khudd ehdhe to ham yih
karonge,
\ Kyiinki we jo ek Mr roahan hiie,
aur asmdni bakhahish ki masa uhakh
gaye,aur lliiti i Quda men aiuirik hue,
G Aur Khudd ke 'muda kalam o
dyanda jahan ki qudratim lot BOMi
urd gaya,
B Agar gir jdwen, to oatuf) phir
uar i nan khara karua, t d ki wo tauba
karen, iia-murnkm hai ; kyunki 1111-
hon ne Khudd ke Beta ko apne Hve
do-bdra salib pai khinolikar /,alil kiyd.
7 Kyiinki jo zamiu ua nieuh ko, ki
bar liir ua par bareti, pt jati hai, aur
aisi sabzi, jo kishtkdron ko mut'id lio,
ldti hai, m Khudd se barakat pati hai:
8 Par wuh jo kanta nur lintkatare
paidd karti, na-maqbiil, aur nazdik
hai ki la'nati ho; jis ki anjam j.ilua
hogi.
9 Lekiiv ai piyiro, agarchi ham
yiiii bohe hain, tan bhi tunihiro haqq
nicn iu se biiitar aur najalwali bitoii
kd yaain rakhte hain.
10 Kyunki Khudd bc-insif nahin
hai, ki wuh tumhari; kain aur uh mu-
liabbat ki miana t ko, jo tiun ua ke
nim par inuqaddas logog ki kliidm,it
karte htio dikhldto ho, bhiil jdwe.
11 Par ham chdhte hain ki tum
men se liar ek kdmil ummed ku wastu
Akhir tak wuh i koahish zahir kiyd
kare:
12 Td ki tum aust na ho jao, baiki
un ke putra u bano, jo iman aur sabr
ki roh ae wa'don ke waria bue.
13 Ki Khuda ne Abiraharn sewa'da
karte hue, jab kisi ko apne n bara na
pdyd, ki us ki qasani khiwe, to apni
hi qasam khdknr kahd,
14 Yaqinati main tujho bamkaton
par barakateti diiriga, aur teri aulad
ko nihayat barbaunga.
haulndk anjam.
16 Aur wub yiin hf sabr karkc ua
wa'du tak paburicha.
LB l'i]haqiqat log baro ki qasam
khite hain : aur aibit karuo ko liye
ini ini^n har ak qaziyo ki hadd qa-sam
hai.
17 Pas Khudd ia irado se ki wa'do
ko wariBon par mazbiit dalil Be apni
marzi ki be-tabdili zihir kare, qaaam
ko darmiydu liyd :
18 Td ki do chizon so, jo he-tabdil
hain, jin men K kuda ka jhiithd honi
mumkin nahin, ham jo paaan ke liye
tlaure hain, ki usi umiued ko jo samh-
ne rakhi gayi qabzo men ldwen, piiri
tasalli pdwcn :
19 Ki wuh ummed hamiri jdn kd
goyd laugar hai, jo adbit aur qdirn aur
panla ke andar diikhil huLii hai ;
20 Jahin poahrau Visu' jo Malik i
Sidq ko (aur par hamesha ke liye aar-
diir kabin hai, bamaro wisle ddkhil
hr.a.
VII BA'B.
KYU'XKI yih Malik i Sidq Salam
kd bidahdh Khuda UVdld kd
kdhin thi, jia na Abirahdru kd, jab
wuh bdashahun ko mdrko phirii dti
thd, istiqbdl kiyd, aur ua ko liye hara-
kat chaiii ;
Jia ko AMrahdm tio aab chiznn ki
dahyaki di; wub pabiie apne ndm ke
ma'uon ke muwdEq Ras t i ki bMahah.
hai : aur phir Shdh i Salem, ya'ne,
Salimati kd liidtihdh ;
3 Yihbe-bip,be-tnd,be-riaaabnima,
jis ke na diuuii kd «huni', na ziudagi
ki ikhir; magar Khuda ke Boto ko
rmiKhAbih thahai'ke hainosha kabin
rahti hai.
4 Ab gaur karo, yih kaisi buzurg
thd, ki jis ko AbiraMin, hamiro d;idd
hi ue ItU ke mil so dahyaki di.
o Ab Liwi ki aulad ku, jo kabanat
kd kini pati hain, hukui hai, ki ldgOQ,
ya'no, apne bh&ion.ge, agarohi we
Abirahim ki pusht se paidi hde,
shari'at ko rau!ibiq dahyaki lowen.
Masih Hanini l-dhinon ac 'IBRA'NI'OK, VIII.
afvd thahartd.
6 Par us ne, bdwujudc ki ua kd
nasab un men gind nahin jati hai,
Abirahdm se dahyaki li, aur us ke liyc
jis s« wa'de kiye gaye harakat chiilii.
7 Aur ld-kaldm chhotd barc ae hara-
kat ptitd hai.
8 Aur ynhan marnewdle ddmi dah-
yaki lete hain : par wahdn wiihi letd
hni, jfa ke baqq men gawdhi <ii jati ki
iila hai.
9 Baiki ham aisa kahne eakte, ki
Ldwi ne bhi, jo dahyaki letd hai,
AHrahdm ke wasile se dahyaki di.
10 Kyunki jib waqt Malik i Sidq
Aliiniham ae a mild, wuh hauoz apne
bdp ki sulb mon thd.
11 Pas agar Ldwi-wili kahinat H
kdmiliyat hoti (ki uni ke taht mo-n
logon ne shari'at pdf bui,) to aur kya
ihtiyaj thi, ki diiara kdhin Malik i
Suli| ke tatir par liarpd ho, aur Harun
ke taur ]iar na kahldwe ?
1" Kyunki agar kahdnat hadal gayi
hoti, to bhan'at kd bhi badai ddlnd
zanir hfttd.
13 Kyunki jis ki bdbat yih bdtori
kahi jdtiii. wuh uvisre firije men shdmil
hai, ji« nien se kisi ne qurbdngdh ki
khidmat nahin kf.
14 Ki zdhir hai ki hamdrd Khudd-
wond 'Yahiidah aonikld; aur ua 6rq<
ke haqq rnfin Mi'iwi ne kahdnat ki ba-
bat ku. 'lili na kaha.
15 Yih aur bhi adf zdhir hai, ki
duard kabin Malik i 8idq ki roinind
Iwpd hotd hai,
16 Jojiamdni din kcqdnun ke mu-
wdfiq nahin, baiki gairfani Undagi ki
qudrat ke mutdbiq band hai.
17 Kyunki wuh gawdhi detd hai,
ki Tu Malik i Sidq ke taur par banw-
wha ko liye kdhin hai.
18 Pan a^ld i^nun, is liye ki kamzoi
aur be-fdida tM, uth gaya.
19 Kyunki shari'at ne kucbh kdmil
na kiyd, magar ek bihtar ummcd dar-
ruiydn ddkhil hni, ha ke. wasfle ham
Khudd ke huztir paliuncbt.e hain.
288
20 Aur chnijVi wuh bagai r qasam
khdne ke muqarrar na hud,
21 (Kyunki we kdhin to bagair
qasam khdc muejarrar hote hain ; par
yih qnaam khiitio ke sdth uni se kdhin
band, jis ne us se kaha, ki K hudawand
ijasani khaf, aur na badlepd ; ki Tu
Malik i r>idq ke taur par hainesha ko
kabin hai :)
22 Ia qadr lili' ek bihtar 'sihd kd
/.Amin hud.
23 Ub ke aiwd we jo kdhin hote hue
chale ae, hahut so the, ia wdste ki we
maut ke salwib rah na sukun ;
2+ Par yih is liye !:i hamesha tak
rahnewdla hai, aisi kahduat kd indlik
hud, ju dusre tak nahin pahunehti.
25 Ia liye wuh unbeg jo us ke wasile
Khudd ke hmsfjr jdto hain, akhir tak
badid sakti bai ; kyunki wuh un ki
Jariah ke liyc hameaha jitd hai.
S6 K>nnki aina sarddr kdhin Jia-
mdre ldiq thd, jo pdk, aur be-bad, aur
lie-'aib, aur gunahgdron se judi, aur
aBriiamnj w, bulaml hai;
27 Jo un sarddr kdhinon ki minind
nuiliiiij nabin ki har ruz pahile apne,
aur phir logim ke, gundhon ke wdste
qurbdnidn charhdwe; kyunki «k ne
ek hi lidr aiwd kiyd, jab ki apne ta,in
guzrdni.
28 Ki shari'at kamzor ddmion ko
sarddr kdhin thahrdtt hai ; par qasam
kd kaldm jo shari'at ko ha'd hud, Bete
ko jo hameaha ke liye kdmil kiyd gayd,
sarddr kdhin thahrAtd hai.
VI U BA-B.
PAS un biton mon se jo kahi jdtfn,
bari bit yih hni, ki Hamdrd ek
uisd sarrldr kdhin bai, jo dsmdn par
Jandh i 'A'lf ke Uiklit ke dahiue baithd
hai;
2 Jomuqaddaa niakdnon kd khddim
liai, nur us haqiqi kbaitne kd, jise
Khuddwand ne kbara kiyd hai, na ki
in.fdn no.
3 Kyiiuki har ek aarddr kdhin i*
wdste muqarrar hotd hai kl nazref
JJaruni kuhinai
'IBRA'NI'ON, IX.
niuu'tf hmui.
aur qurbdnrdn guzrdne ; so zartir hai
ki us pil» bhi guzrdnne ko kuchh ha
4 Agar wuh «amin par hotd, to har-
giz kdhin na hotd ; is wdste ki kdhin
to haig jo Bhuri'at ke inuwifiq qur-
hdnidn guzrante hain, I
5 Jo asisifiiii cbizun ke namiine
aur saya par khidmat kartu haiii ;
ehtindnchi Musa ne, jab wuh khaima
biuianepar tha, ilbam ae hukm paya,
ki Dekn, wuh faraiata liai, ki tii ub
oaashe ke mu(;ibiq jo tujhe pahdr par
dikh&ya gaya Bab ehizen bani,
6 Par ab uh ne is qailr bihtar khid-
mat pdi, )\s qudr bihtar 'ahd kd dar-
liiivilni thahrd, jo bihtar wa'dog se
baudha gaya.
7 Kyunki agar wuh paniki 'ahd be-
'aib hota, to diisre ke liye jagah ki
talash na hoti.
8 So wuh us kd 'aib batakar unhen
kahta hai, ki Dekh, Khudawand farni-
dtd hai, we dia ate litun ki main Israel
ke gharane aur Yahiidiih ke khdnddn
ke liyo ek nayd 'ahd bandhuggd :
9 Yih us 'alid ki manind na boga,
jo roaig ne un ke bdpdiidon so us di».
jab main tie uli k a hdth pakrd ki un-
l.r-n itruiiln i Misr Ne nik&l laun,
1 i:i i idhd ilia ; is wdste ki we inere 'ahd
par ijaini nahin rahe, aur nunij ne un
ka andesha na kiya, Kkuddwand farm-
atabai.
10 Kyunki wuh 'ahd, jo main Israel
ke ghardne ke sath un dinorj ke ha'd
bandhunga, Khuddwand farmata hai,
so yih hai, ki Main, apne qaniinon
ko un ki 'acjlon men ddliinga, aur un
ke diton par likhunga, aur main un
ka Khudd Mnga, aur we mere log
honge :
11 Aur koi phir apne hamsaya, aur
kui MM bhai ko, sikhlake na kahega,
ki T u Khuda ko pahehan ; kyunki un
men ke, chhote se bare tak, aab mujbe
pahchanorige.
12 Aur main un ki buraion par
rahm karungi, aur un ke gundhon
ko aur be-dinim ko kabhi yad na
karunga.
13 Aur jab un ne naya kaha, to
paljt; ku purana Ihalirdya. Par wuh
jo purana aur dini hai, u niitnu ke
nazdik hai.
IX BAU
SO pahlo 'ahd nion 'ibadat ka qdnun
the.aur ek duuyawi maqdis ihd.
'Z Ki lihaimu to bandya gaya ; pah-
la, jis tiuju sham'adan, aur mas, aur
nasir ki rutian thin ; aur use Pdk kali U;
hain.
3 Par diiare parda ke undur wuh
khaima thd, jo Paktarin kakldtd ;
4 Ua men sone kd bakhiirddn thd,
aur 'ahd kd sanduq, jo chdron taraf
sono se marhd bdd tha; na meg ek
soue kd bartau maun ae bhard, aur
Harun kd 'aad, jis men siidkhen phuM
thin, aur 'ahd-ndine ki taklnian.
5 Aur ub ke lipar jaldli Kariibi tho,
jo kafdragdh par saya karte the; in
baton kd mufaasftl baydn karni ab
Iftfor nahin.
6 Pas jab yih sab chiztm y6n taiyar
ho chukiu, tab pahle lihaimu mefl ka-
hin hiir waqt diklul hoke khidmat
bojd i;Ui: the.
7 l'ar diiare men sirf sarddr kdhin
sdl bltar meg ek bdr jati thd, magar
bagair lahu ke nahin, joapni aurqaum
ki kbatdou ke liyu giwrdutd thd.
H I» se Ruh i Quds yih sdhir karti
tbi, ki jab tak pahld kbaiina kliara
rahd, pdktarSu makan ki nih na khuli
thi.
'J Wuh khaima is waqt tak ek mi-
adl hai, jia men nazren aur gurbanidn
guzrdute, jo 'ibadat-karnewdie ko dil
ki nisbat. kamil kar nahin saktin ;
10 Ki we siri khane pine, aur tarah
tarah ke gutdon ke adth, jo jiamdni
raum hain, islah ke waqt tak n\uqarrar
thin.
11 Par jab Masih anewah ni'amat-
on kd aarddr kdhiu ho dyd, to buzurg-
tar aur kdiuiltar khaime ki rdh se jo
Masih H «fiat ourbdm, 'IBRA'NI'ON
hifhon i-a band naMu, ya'ne, is khil-
qat ka nahin ;
12 Na bakron na bachhron ka lahii
lekfl, baiki apnd hl lahri leke, pakfarin
iimkaa men ek bar dakhil hrid, ki uh
ne hamdre liyu hamesha ki khaldsi
hasil ki.
13 Kyunki agar bailon aur bakron
ka lahii, a'ur kalor ki nlkh, jab na-
iiakon par chhirki jac, badan ki safai
ki babat un ko pdk kur sakti hai :
14 To kitnd ziydda Masih ka lahii,
jis no be-'aib hoke abadi Ruh ke
wasilo dp ko Khudd ke snruhne qur-
bdni guzrdnd, tumhare di Ion aur 'aqli>n
ko inurda kdmou ae pak karegd, ti ki
tum zinda Khudd ki 'ibddat karo?
16 Aur isi sabab se wuh naye 'ahd
kd damiiydni hai, td ki jab pahlc 'ahd
ku gundhon ke chhurdne ke liye uae
maut wdqi' hiil ho, to we jo bu Ide
f ayo hain, abadi mirah kd wa'da hasil
areji.
16 Kyunki jabati wasivati 'ahd hai,
waban us ki maut, jis nc use kiyd hai,
zanir aanijhi jftti hai,
17 Ki wasiyat ijrd pati hai jab log
mar gaye; aur jab tak wasiyat kar-
newiia rfndft hai wub jari nahin. hoti.
18 la sabab se pahld wasiyati 'ahd
bhi hagaii labu ke nahin kiyA gayd.
l'J Kyiinki Jab Musa no tamani
qaum ko shari'at kd bar ek hukm kah
sundya, tab bachhron aur bakron kd
laini, jidni anr )il iin eiH ko satb
lekar, us kitdb aur »4re logeuj par
chhirakkc, kahd,
20 Ki Yih us 'ahd kd lahu hai, jis
ka hukm Khudd ne tumhen diyd
hai
21 Anr na ne isi tarah khaitiin par,
aur khidmat ki tamAiu chiason par, lahii
chhi'rkd.
22 Aur qarib Barichizen shari'at ke
rautAbiq lalui se pik ki jati hain ; aur
bagair lahii bahde mu'dfi nahin hoti.
23 Pas zarur tha ki asniani ohizon
ki 'aldmatcrt yfin pdk ki jdwen ;
£90
X. Slam'i ■jurMnion ke nvq*.
magur k h ml AsuiAni chizen, i n se
bihtar qurbdnu.'n M
2-i Kyunki Masih us pdk makan
men, jo hdthon *o bandyA gaya, aur
haqiqi makan ki 'alamat hai, dakhil
nahin lili A; baiki dsmdn lu men, ti
ki ;i}> n Khudd ke huziir bauiare liye
h Aku- rahe :
25 Par aiaa nahin, ki wuh dp ko
bar bar guarane, jaiso sanldr kdhiu
pdktarin nrakdn men bar hAI dfisre kd
fahu leke jdta hai ;
2f> Nahin to, zanir thd ki wuli
dunyd ko shurii' M bdr bdr mara
kartd ; par ab Akhiri zanidne nun tl
bdr zdhir hiid, td'ki apne ta.in qwMra
karno 80 gundh ko nest karo.
27 Aur jais» Admion ko liye ek bdr
marnd, aur ba'd na ke 'addlat muqarrar
hui,
26 Waisd hi Masih ek bdr Babhon
ke gundhon kd bojh utlidne ke Hya
dp ko guzrdnke, ddari bar bagair
gundh ko zdhir hogd, ta ki un ko, Jo
us ki rdh dokhte hain, najdt dewe.
X RA7B.
KYU'NKI ahari'at, jo dncwdlt
iii'aniatoii ki parchhdig hai,
aur un chizon ki haqiqi st'irat nadiii.
sil sdl un hi qurhdriion se jo wo
Inuncslia gnarante, un ko jo pds dtc
hain kabhi kdrnil nahin k ar sakti.
2 Nahin to, un qurbdnion kii
guwrdund mauqiif ua lio jatd ; kyi'iuL
'ibddat-karnenaleek bar pak hoke agu
ko apne ta,in gunahgdr na jdnte.
3 Par un uurbdnion se bara» baras
gundhon ki pbir yddgdri hoti hai.
i Kydnki ho nahin aakta, ki bailon
aur bakron kd lahu gundhon k»
tni t a wo.
6 ls liye wuh. dunyd men dte hr.f
kabtd hai, ki Zabiha aur hadyd tii ne
na chdhd, par mere liye ek badan
taiyar kiyd :
6 Sokhtani qurhdnion aur khata ki
qurbdnion so t& rdzi na hnd.
7 Tab main ne kah A, ! I
Mnrili ke kdmil
'IBRA'NI'ON, X.
stibiht H hibat.
main dtd hun, (mori balul kitab ke
daftar me» likhA lidi,) ta- ki, ai Khuda,
teri marai baja Idiin.
8 Pahle jab kahd, ki Zahiha aur
had ya, aur sokhtani qurbdni, aur
khatd ki q urban i ki khwdhish tit nc
jib rakhi, na un se khush hud, aur
yihi qurbdnian shari'at ke muwdfiq
guzrani jati liain ;
9 'l'ab us ne kahd, ki Dekh
Khnda, main ata hfin, ki teri mara t
baja laun. To wuli pahle ko mitata,
l;i ki dtisre ko sabit kare.
10 Ust marzi sc ham Yinu' Masih
ke badan ke ek bir q urban hone ke
nba-b pak hne hain.
11 Aur bar elt kahin roz roz khid-
mat karte hiie, aur ek lu tarah ki
qurbdnidu, jo hargiz guoah iiiitani? ki
qabil nahin hain, bar bir guzijante biie
kluira rahti :
12 Lukin yih, jab iH ne gnndhon ko
waste ek hi qurbdni hamesha ke liye
guzrani tiii, Khudi ke dahine ja
hai t. ha ;
13 Tab se intizdr karta hai ki us
ko dushman ua ke panwog ki cbauki
banen.
14 Kyiinki us ne ek hi qurbdni
puy.r.inne sk muqaddawn ko hamesha
ke liye kainil ktyd.
lf> Aur Ruh i Qurts. blii hnmare liye
gawillii deti: kyiinki jab us nc kahd
thd,
16 Ki Yih wuh 'ahd hai jt> main
in diuon ke ba'd un se bdDdhtingd"
Khuddwand farmata hai, ki main apne
(W*«0| ko un ke dil men dsUiinga,
aur un ki 'aqlon par unhen likhtinua ;
17 Aur un ke gunahon aur un ki
nd-rdstion. ko phir kabhi ydd na kar-
angi.
IB Ab jahari un ki mu'Afi hai,
wahag r u nah ke liye phir q urban i
^nvn'inna iia.lii.ri.
19 Pan, ai bhdlo, jab ki ham no
dileri hasil ki ki paktarin makan meu
IYiHii' ke lahu se ddkhil howen.,
291
20 Us nayi aur jiti rih se, jo us ne
parde ao hoke, ya'ne, apne jiam Be,
hamdro liye nikali ;
21 Aur jab ki hamard sarddr kdhin
hai, jo Kiiudu ke gbar ki mukhtdr
hai ;
22 To do, ham sachclie dil ke sdth
kdmil imdn se, aur apne dilon par un
ke ilzdm se rihai pane ko cbliirkao
karke, nazdik jdwen, aur apne badan
ko fidf pdni ^c ahoke,
23 Apni uniuied ke iqrdr ko maz-
Mti se thimbhe rahen ; (kyiinki wuh
jis re wa'da kiyd wafdddr hai;)
24 Aur ham ek dasrc |«r lilm/:
k aren, td ki ham ok d aura ko mu-
habbat aur nekokdri ki taraf uskd-
wen :
25 Aur dpas men, ikatthe hone se
baz na dwerj, jaisd ba'zon kd dasliir
hai ; baiki ek dtisre ko nasihat karerj ;
aur yih itna Kiydda, jitnd tuiri dekhte
hn ki wuh dua nazdik hotd jrlti hai.
26 Kydnki agar ba'd tu ke ki ham
ne soehai ki pahehan hasil ki lini juri,
biijhkc gundh karen, to phir gundhou
ke liye koi qurbani biqi nahin,
27 Masar 'addlat kd ek "haulnak
intizdr, aur dtashi ga/ab, jo mukhd-
lifon ko khd legd, bdqi hai.
28 Jis ne Muai ki nharPat ko nd-
chi/, jand, to rahmat, hb khdrij hoko do
tin ki gawdhi se indra jiita Ihd :
29 Pas khiydl karo, ki wuh shakhs
kitni ziydda saza ke laiq thahrega, ji«
ne Khuda ke liete ko jidmdl idyi, aur
'ahd ke lahii ko, jis se wuh pak hdd,
napdk jdni, aur fazl ki Ruh ko zalil
kiyi?
30 Kyiinki ham use jinte hain, jis
ne yih kahd, ki lntiqaru lend merd
kdm hai, main hi badld h'ingd, Khudd-
wanil Eajfmita hai. Aur phir yih, ki
Khudawand apne logon ki 'adalat
karegd.
31 Zinda Khuda ko hdthon mon
panid baulndk hai,
32 Par tum agle dinon ko ydd karo,
BApd&don ke
•mai'svos, tt
i h
jin men tum ne roshan hoke dukhon liyA thA: kydnki un ko uth jine i
ki bari kash-ma-kash ki bardAsht kf.
35 Kuchh to i» wAate, ki tum la'n-
ta'n aur musibaton ke bA'is angusht-
numA hue ; aur kuchk is liye, ki tum
uu ku, jin se yih bad-suluki huti thi,
sharik tho,
34 Kijis waqt main zanjiror; mcn
thA, tum mero hamdard hiio, aur apnc
mil kA lut jAnA khushi se qabul kiya ;
yih jAnke ki tumh&ro liye ek bihtar
mal AsmAn par hai, jo qAini rahegA.
35 Pas tum apnl himmat ko ruat
chhoro, ie liye ki us ka hari ajr hai.
86 Kydnj;i tumhen mn\r hai ki
snbr karo, tA ki tum Khudi ki ruam
par 'amal karko wa'de ke phal hasil
karo.
37 Ki ab thori si muddat hai, k
AncwAlA AwegA, aur der na karogA.
38 Aur rAstbAz iman ac jiegA ; le-
kin agar wuh hate, to meri ji ■*"
razi na boga.
3'1 Par ham un men se uahin jo
balak hone ke liye hat jSto ; baiki un
men so haiii jo jan bachAne ke liye
i mati [Ale i,: lin.
"XI RA'B.
A H Jmin uiMiiiL'd ki liiii cbizon ki
J\, goyA mihiyat, aur andekhi
chi/.on ka subiit hai.
2 Kyiinki us hi ki babat buzurgon
ke liye gawAhi di gayi,
3 I'man hi ke sabab se ham jAn
gaye ki 'alam Khuda ko kalam su bun
gaye; aisA ki we chizen k> dekb.ui'
men atin, un chizou se nahin banig,
jo dekbi jAtig,
4 I'man se HAbil no QAin se bihtar
qurbani Kliuda ko guzrAni ; usf ke
sabab us ke rAstbaz hone par gawAhi
di gayi, ki Khudi us ki nazron par
gawahi deta tha ; aur lisi ke wasile
wuh, agarchi mar gayA, tau bhi kalam
kartA hai.
5 I'man ke sabab Bfl Hantik utbaya
gaya, ta ki maut ko na dckbe : aur na
miU, is liye ki Khuda ne us ko utbA
202
peehtar uh par yib {jawabi di gayi, ki
wuh Khudi ko putad Ayd tha.
C Par bagair iman ke us ko razi
karnA mumkin nahin ; kyunki mnir
hai ki wub jo Khuda ki taraf ata yih
j-«qin k.tre, k) wuh maujud hai, aur
ki wuh apne dbnndlinewdlnn ku badS
deta hai.
7 I'man se Nuh ne, un chizon ki
babat jo us waqt nazar men na di
thiu, ilham piike khauf se kishti apne
gharAno ke baehao ke liye bauai, jis
se ue no dunya ko mulzam thahrAyd,
aur us ristbazi ki, jo imfai so milti
hai, waris hiia.
S I'inan bb Abiraham ne, jab hu-
UyA gaya, mau iiya, aur us jagah
cbali gaya, jiso wub miras men lene
par thA : aur bAwnjiide ki na jAnA ki
kidbar j A W hai, nikiA.
9 I'mAu se us ne wa'de ki sarzamin
men yiin maqAiu kiyA, jaise wuh sar-
KMB ua ki na thi, ki Iz,haq aur
VaVjiib aamct, jo ua ke sath us hi
wa'de ke wAris the, khaimon men
rahA kiyA :
10 Ki wuh aise sbahr pAne kd um-
tncdwar tb.i, jis ki bunyad hai, aur
jis k A banAnewAlA aur basAnewAlA
KbudA hai.
11 FmAn se Sarah ne bhi hAinila
hone ki tAqat pai, aur 'umr gosn pet
jani, is liyo ki us uo wa'da kamewAle
i sachchA janA bah
12 So ek 60, aur wuh bhi murda si
thi, AsmAu ke sitaron ki mAnind he-
nihAyat aur daryA ko kanire ki ret ki
manind be-shumAr paida liue.
13 Ye sab finiu men mar gaye,
aur wa'don ko na pahunche ; par ddr
unben dekhA, aur mu'ataqid hiie.
aur salAin ko jhuke, aur iqrAr kiyi
ki Iiatn zamiu par pardcsi aur m U «Alir I
hain.
14 Ki wo jo aisi bAteg kahnewik
hain, sAf zdhir karte ki ham ek wataa
dhimdiite hain.
15 Aur agar us niulk ko, jin se wu
nik.il Ae the, phir ydd ldte, to wahin
unhey pliir jiue kl fursat thl.
10 Par ab wo ek bihtar mulk ke,
io Asmini hti\, niunhtat] hain ; m
Klmiiil mi ho sharruatd nahiij, ki un
ka Klukla kulilai?; kyuyjki us ou uu
ke liye ek shahr taiyar kiya-
17 Abiraluiiu ne, jab azuiiyd gayd,
imun mi Is,haq ko qurbaui ke liye
charhdyd ; aur jis ne wa'dou ko paya
tbi, U8 ue iklaute ko guara.ua,
IH Jis h yih kalia gaya tha, k!
Iz,hibi bi n teri nasi kahldegi :
19 Kyiinki w u h «amjha, ki Khudd
iiiunlon men se bhi uthane par qadir
bui ; jahan se us ue us ko 'alamat ke
taiir par paya.
20 I'man te l/„ban uoanowdli chiz-
orj ki babat Ya'qiib aur 'Bsau ko
du'a di.
21 I'man soYa'tjiib ne, inarte waqt,
Yiituf ke douon beton ko du'a di ; aur
apne 'asa ke sire par jhukke sijda kiva.
22 I'man se Yusuf ue, jab marue
par tha, bani Iurael ke rn waria Jione
ka zikr kiya, aur apu i haddion ki
babat hukra kiya.
'Jii 1 'i nan se Mrisd, paidi hoke, tln
mahme tak apne mA bip so chhipiyi
gaya, kyunki unhon ne dukha ki lar-
ka khnbaurat hai; aur wo badsbab
ke h'ukin se na daro.
24 I'man se Musa ne, siydnd hoke,
FiraYm ki beti ka beti kahlane se
inkar kiya ;
25 Ki ub ne Khudd ke lo^on ko
sath dukh uthariA us s<> zi varia pusnnd
kiya, ki gunah ke sukh ko, jo chand-
roza hai, basil kare ;
26 Ki uh iir Masih ki la'n ta'n ku
Misr ke kli&zdnon se hari daulat jini:
kvunki ua ki nigah badla pano par
tbi.
-7 Firian se us n e bddshdh ke gusse
se kbauf na khako Mist ko tark kiya,
ki wuh audekhe ko goyi dekhke maz-
Ibut bani rahd.
293
'IBRA'NI'ON, XL ahwat.
28 I'man ac as ne faaah kaine aur
lahu chhimkne par 'amal kiya, aisii
na ho ki palan(bon ka balik knrm.-
wala unheu chlniwc
29 I'man se we Lal sanmiiilar men
boke yiin guzre, jaise kliushki par s e,
aur MisrwAle, jab ua r ah se jdnc kd
qaad kiya, diib gaye.
30 I'man se Varihii ki shabrpandh,
jab uao sdt din tak gher rakhi tha,
gir pari.
31 l'mdn se llahab, io fdhiaha tbi,
be-imduoii ku sdth balik na In'ii, l;i
us ne jasuson, ko saldoiat apne ghftt
ED6D u t Ari.
^2 Ab main aur kya kahi'in ? fur-
sat. nahin ki Jida'un, aur Barat], aur
Sarusrirt, aur Ifnili, aur Diud, aur
Sauniel, aur uabion ka abwdl baydu
karfirj :
33 Ki unhon ue iman se bddsbib-
aton ko maglub kiya, aur rdsti ke
kam kiye, aur wa'don ko hisil kiya,
aher i babar ke munh liand kiye,
34 A'g ki toEi ko bujhdya, talwar-
on ki dbdron sn bach nikk, kam/.ori
men zordwar huc, larai meii bahadur
baue, aur gairon ki la'.ijon ko hatd
diyi.
35 'Aumton ne apne murdog ko ji
uthe hiie pdyd: aur ba'ze pite gayi'.
aur chhufkard qabiil na kiya ; ta ki
liiiitar (pyamat tak |ialiuncheii :
3(i lia'Ke ua initihdn men paro ki
thatthon men urne gaye; kore khie,
aur «anjir aur qaid riicn plianuo;
37 Patthrdo kiye gaye, dro ae chire
gaye, ahikanje men kliini-ho gaye, tal-
wir se mare gaye : bheron aur bakri-
on ki khal orlie hue, tangi men,
muaibat men, dukh men mire pTiire ;
38 {Diinyd un ke ldiq na thi :) we
baydbinon, aur pahdron, aur gdron,
aur zamin ke garhon men kharab-
kbasta phirdkiyp.
39 Aur ye sab, jin ke liye imdn
bi ke sabab gawdhi di gayi, wa'de tak
na i>ahunehe :
'iBKANJ'OK, XII.
o ditulari ki >«\h.it
40 Ki KhudA 110 pcshbini karke
bamare liye i;k bihtar bit thahrai thi,
l;i ki wc ham Ani bagalr kaniil mi kiyc
jAwen.
XII BAU
PAS jab ki gawahon ke itne bare
abr ne hamcn a gheri hai, to
ham bht har ek bujh aur uljhAnewile
giinih ko utdrke, bardasht ko eath, us
daur merj.jo haiaare sdnihne & pari
hai, dauren;
2 Aur Yisu" ko jo iman ku shunV
aur kamil karut w ala hai, takte mimu,
fle M us khu*bl ko liye, jo ua ke
simhne Hii, sliaraihidugi ko ndchiz
jauke salib ko «aba, aur KhudA ke
takbt ke daiiine jA bait ha.
3 I s liye ttnn ua pir gaur knro, jis
ne gunabgaron ki taraf se itni bari
mukhAlafat k f bardasht ki ; (A na ho
ki tum pareshdn i khdtir hoke suat bu
jio.
4 Tum ne gmiAh ke muqdbale men
kosliish karko hanoz kbtin tak simh-
ni nabJfl kiyA,
5 Aur tum us nasihat ko, jo tum-
hcn jaisA farzandon ko ki jati hai,
liliiil gaye, ki Ai mero bcte, Khuda-
wand ki tanibih ko nachiz niat jiin ;
aur jab wuh tujhe maldmat karo, shi-
kasta-dil niat ho :
6 Ki KhudAwand, ji-^e piyar karta
hai, use tambih karta hai, aur bar ek
bcte ko, jise wuh qabul kcutA hai, pftta
hai.
7 Agar tum tambih men sabr karte
bo, to KhudA tum se jaind farzandon
n suluk karta hai ; ki kaun sA bot A
hai, jiBC bAp tambih nahin kartd?
8 Par agar wuh tambih, jis men
sab abarlk huohaiii, tum ko nakfjde,
: i Mim hardmzdde ho, larzand nahin.
9 Aur jab wc, jo hamAre jiwndni
bip the, tambih karte the, aur ham
no un ki ta'ztm ki ; to kyA ham us se
y.jydda rfihon ko BAp ko hiikm men
ria rahen, aur jien V
10 Ki we to Fbore diunii ke wdste
204
apnt aamajh ke muwdfio, tambih karle
the ; |«r wuh hamArl bihtari ke liye ;
ta ki ham ua ki pakizagi men sharlk
howen.
11 "Aur koi tambih bilfi'al khushi
ki hi'ia nahin nazar Ati, baiki afkc*
kA: magar pichhe unhen, jinhog ne us
se tarbiyat pai hai, rA&tbAzi kA phnl
chain ke sdth bakhsht! hai.
12 Ia wAsto riliilo hdth aur aust
ghutiion ko Hidlid karo ;
lli Aur apue pdnwon ke liye ham-
wAr raste bando, td ki W latigi'AtA hai
bhatak na jawe, baiki changa howe.
14 Sab se milo raho, aur plkffafil
ki pairaui karo, jia ke bagair Khudd-
wand ko koi na dekhegd.
15 Aur ba gaur dekhte raho, ki koi
KhudA ke fazl ke ware rah na jAwts ;
aur na howe ki koi karwi jar aabz
hoke taudi'a dewe, nur us ae bahutcre
iiApAk ho jAwcii.
10' Xa howe ki koi zauf, yA 'Esau
ki niAniud bcdin ho, jis ne ek khurdk
ke wdste apne palauthe hono kA haqq
bechA.
17 Kyiinki tum jdnte ho ki wuh
us ke ba'd, jab us ne chdlid ki harakat
kii waris lio, radd kiyA gayd : aur ua
ne pachhtAne ki jagnh na |'Ai, agarchi
us ne use Ansii laba bahak e dhiindhd.
18 Ki tum us pahAr tak nahin Ae,
jh-e chhii sako, na us ki dhadhakti dg,
aur kAli badli, aur tAriki, aur tufin,
19 Aur narsiugo ko ahor, aur kalam
ki Awdz ke pas, jise sunnewAlon ne
Btmktr darkhwdat ki, ki yih kaldni
phir ham se na kahA jAwe :
26 (Kyiinki we us nukni ki, jo un-
hen diyA gayA thA, hardasht na kar
saken, ki Agar koi jAnwar us pahdr ku
chhuwe, to patthrAo kiyA jAwe, ya
bbalc se chhedA jae :
21 Aur wuh jo nazar AyA aiai
daraund thA, ki MiisA bola, -Main
hairdn aur larzdn hiin:)
22 Baiki tum Saibiin ke pahdr, aur
zinda Khudd ke shahr men, jo Asmi&i
muiktabf nusihntm. 'IBRA'NI
Yarusalam hai, aur likbon firifthton
ke [>is,
23 Baiki un ki tamani jami'at ki
bich merj, aur palauthorj ki kalisiye
DWfi jin ke nira asuian par Hkhe
hain, aur Khudi ke pis, jo Bab ki
f dikira bui, aur kiruil kiye htie rast-
bazon ki nihon ke pas,
24 Aur Yisti' ke, jo naye 'ahd ka
darmiyini hai, aur us chhirke luii
lahu ko, jo Kaliil ki nisbat sc bibtar
baten bolti hai, pis ie lio.
25 Dekho, tara us farm&uowile se
gifil na raho. Kyiirjki agar we bhag
na nikle, jo us se jo zaniin par farmati
tha gifil rahe, to ham bhi agar us eo,
jo kamon ramin par «o farruiti hai,
munh nii.jru.kyuiikarbhagniklenge 'f
2tJ Uh ki awan ne zamin ko (U H«q
liila diya: par ah ub ne yih kabk
wa'da kiya, ki Pbir fk Mr main faqat
uinfn ko nahin, baiki asmin ko bhi
Lila di'mgi.
27 Aur yih 'ibarat, ki Phir ek bar,
lfi bit ko Bahir karti hai, ki we ohiz«Q
jo hilii jiti ham, hacii hiii chizon ki
minimi tal jitin, t,a ki we chizon jo
ialne ki nahin, niku raln-n.
28 1'aa, aisi bid»hihat ko, jo talne
ki nahin, p&ke liain irisan minor;, jis
tte Khudi ki bandagf pasandida taur
par adab aur dindari ke »atb karen :
29 Kyfinki yaqinan hamira Khudi
bhasani-karneivih ag hai.
XIII BA'B.
BinA'DAKA'NA muhabbat bani
rahe,
2 Musalir-parwari ko mat bhiilo j
kyi'mki usf se kitnon no bin jinu
firisliton ki uiilnnrtui ki hai.
3 Oaldion ko yiin yid karo, goyi
tam un ko sli t li qaid m.en sliarik ho ;
aur aisi hi un l;o jo ranj mon hain y&d
karo, ki tumhiri bhi unhfrj ki sd jiam
hai.
■1 Byih karnd sab men bhald hal,
aur bi-irar nindk nahin ; ]uir Khudi
295
0X, XIII. Mutettaiif nasihat™.
harimkdron aur ziniorj ki 'adilat
karibi.
o i'umhird cbalan lilnch ki im
howc; aur jo maujud hai, usi par
qaui'ut karo ; kyunki us ne ip kahi
hai, ki Main tujhe hargiz na chhor-
uoga, aur tujhe mutlaq tark na kar-
angi.
6' Ia wiste liam khdtirjnm'ai se kah
mk&e hain, ki Khuddwand merd ma-
dadgir hai, aur main na darunga; in-
san meri kyi karegi?
7 Tuni apne hadiorj ko, jinliou us
tuna se K hudi ki bit. kahi, yad karo ;
aur un ki' chil ko anjim ko gaur karko
un ke iman ki pairaui karo.
8 Yiau' Masih kal, aur aj, aur abad
tak, iiksiii hai.
S) Tuni rang i rang begana ta'limon
se idhar udliar daur U; na phiro. Ki
yih bhali hai ki dil fazl so mazbut
lio, na ki khurakon w, jiu se unhon
ue, ju im ke liye daurto plurte thc,
fiida na uthiya.
10 ITainiri to ek qurbangah hai, jis
se kliaime ki kiiidmat karaewalon ki
ikhtiyir nahin ki khiejj ;
11 Ki jin janwaron ki lahii sardir
kibin muqqadas makin merj guuih
ke kafara ko wdste lo jiti hai, un ko
badan khaimagih ke bahar jalie jite
hain :
12 Es wifite Yisii* ne bhi, U ki log-
otj ko apne lahti se pikizagi bakhahe,
phitak ke hihar hoke kashtuthif.
13 Pas io, ham us ki zillafc ke sha-
rik hoke khaimagih ne biliar ub pin
nikal ehalen.
M Kyiinki hamiri koi qiira rah-
newili whahr yahig nahin; ham to
us ahahr ko jo inewdii hai dhdndhle
hain.
15 Is Hye ham us ke wasilo se si-
tiisli ki rjorbiai, ya'ne, nn honthon ki
phal ju us ke nim ki iqrar karte iiain,
Khudi ke liye har waqt tliiirhaya
karen.
16 Par bhalii aur sakhiwat kami
Mu&htali/ nasihaten.
YA'QU'B, I.
Kkatm-kanitwitU dv'd.
na bhulo; is Hye ki Khudi aisl qur-[ 21 Tum ko bir ok nok kain men
binion h khuali bota hai. kamil karo, ti ki tum us ki marzi par
17 Tum apne hadion ko farman- chalo, aur jo kuchh uh ke huztir iiiyn
bardar aur tahi' raho : kyunki we, maqbiil hai Yiau' Masih ku wasile tum
uu ki niAnind jinhcn hisab d«sna mori kuro ; ua ki jalai hameaha haiuo-
l>arega, tnnibiri jiaon ko wasto jagte sha howe. A'min.
rahte hain, ta ki we khuahi so yih, 'l'l Ab,ai bhaio, main tum so Uti-
karcn, na ki gaiu m: kyunki wuhlmaa karta hun, ki tum nasihat ku
tunihareuyc iaidamaml uahiri hai. kalam ko mau lo: ki main pie to
18 IIiiTiidrt; wastedu'a mango; ky-: mukhtasar men tumhen likhi hai.
unki harayaqin jantekihamnekniyat| 23 Jduo ki'bhai Timtaus chlul^
hain, ki sari baton men neki ko aath. piya; a^ar wuhjaldiwe,to ua ke sath
guzrin kiya ohahto hain. i hoke main. bhi tum ko dekhunga.
19 Aur main tum 8« is ke karno ki 24 Tum apne sah hadion aur sari;
babat khass nasihat karta hug, ta" ki muqaddason, ko salam kaho. Jo Italia
main jald tum pis phir paliunchun. se hain, turuhen salam kahte hain.
20 Ab salimati ki Khudi, jo 25 Fazl tum sab par lio. A'min.
abadi 'ahd ke lahfi ke aabab se bheron f Yih khatt 'Ibriniori ko Timtaus
ke buzurg ganiriye, ya'ne, ham'irc ke hith so likhi h u s, l'iali* w
Khuiiiwand Yisii' ko, murdon men y» bheji gayi.
phir uthi layi,
YA'QUB KA' KHATT I 'A'MM.
I BA'B.
YA'QU'J! ka, jo Kimda aur Khuda-
wand YisvV Masih ka handa, hai,
uii harah firqon kojotittar bit tar hain,
salam.
2 Ai mere bbaio, jab tum tarah tarah
ki azmaiHhog nu'n. paro, to use kamil
khushi samjho ;
3 Yih jankar ki tumhiro iman ki
azmaiah sabr paida kaiti hai.
4 Par .sabr ka kam pura hone do, ti
ki tum kamil aur piire ho, aur ki>i bit
men uaqis na raho.
5 Par agar koi tum men se hikmat
men qasir howe, to Khudi se minge,
jo sab ko sakhiwat ke sitb dcti, aur
uh;.:, j uahin dcti hai, ki ua ko 'mayat
hogi.
296
G Par iman so ruiuge, aur kuchh
ehakk na kare. Kyunki sbakk-kar-
newata samuudar ki lahr ki manind
hai, jo hawi t>e takrai aur urai jati
7 Pas aisa shakhs hargiz gurnan na
kare ki Khuuawaud se kuchh pawegi,
8 Do-dila idmi apni sari rawiahon
me& be-qarar hai.
9 Bhii jo past-hil hai, apui bulandi
pnr fakhr kare :
10 Aur jo daulatraand hai, apui
pasti par; is iiye ki w uh ghas ke phiil
ki tarah jiti rahegi.
11 Kyunki jab stiraj nikahi aur liih
chalti, tab ghis ko sukha dcti, aur ua
ki phiU jhar jdta, aur us ke chihre ki
khdbsurati jati rahti; yiin hi daulat-
B*qiji dinddri YA'QU'B, H.
mand blii apDi rdhoii men niurjhd
JAegi.
12 MubArak wuh admi, jo AzniAish.
ki barddaht karta hai ; i« wasto ki jali
wuh AziudyA gayA, to eindagi ka taj,
jis ka KhudA ne apne muhabbat-rakh-
no w alun Ke wa'da kiya, pAwega.
13 Jab kui imtihAn mori plionse, to
wuh n a kalut, ki Main Khuda ki taraf
se imtihdn mm phan>a ; kyunki Khu-
dA badiou so na Ap AzmAyA jaLA, aur na
kini ku Azru&ta hai :
11 Magar har shakhs apni khwd-
ldshon so lubhAkar, aur j Al nicrj phane-
kar, imtihin men partd hai.
15 So khwdhish jab kamila hi';i, tab
gunAh paidd karti : aur guuAh jab
tainanii tak paliuucha, maut ku jauta
hai.
16 Ai mere piyAre bhaio, fareb na
khAo.
17 Har tik achohhi bakhshiah aur
har ok kdniil in'Ain u par lii se hai, aur
nuron ke Bani ki Laraf se utarta hai,
jis men badaluo aur phir jAua kA sdya
bld naluri.
IH Un ne apiio irado ke mutAWq ha-
men aachAi ko kalAm se paidA kiyA,
laki haru ua ke ruakhluqog men goyd
pahile phal thahren.
19 Is liye, ai mere piyAre bltAio,
har ek Admi sunne nian tez, aur U-l
uthnc rucn dhirA, aur gusaa karne men
dhiiuA howe :
20 Kyunki insAn ka gussa Khuda
ki ristbazi ke kain ko uujAui nahin
detA.
21 Is liye sari gandari aur badi ko
fuzldt pherikkar, us kalam ko, jo pai-
wand hotd, aur tumhdri jAn bacha
sakta hai, farotani se qabul kar lo.
22 Lekiu nun katAm par 'amal
karuewdle ho, na Ap ko fareb dekar
sirf sunnewAlo.
'-'.'i Kjiinki jo kol kalAm kA Biinne-
waii ho, aur us par 'amal karnewAlA
nahin, wuh us Admi ki inAniud hai, ju
apni munh ditie mey dekhtA :
297
ki babu t.
24 Is liye ki us ne Ap ko deklui, aur
chalA gaya, aur fauran bhul gaya ki
main kai.sd tha.
2o Par jo dzddagi ki kamil shari'at
par taktaki bAridhke us ku gaur men
rahtd hai, wuh aunkar bhulnewAla
ualiin, baiki 'anuti karnewAlA hoke
upne 'amal oieu mubarak bogd.
26 Agar koi tuinharo bioh Ap ko
diuddr saiujhc, aur apni zuban ko la-
gdin na de, baiki apno di l ko farob
dowe, to us ki dindari batil hai.
27 Wuh diudAri jo Khuda aur BAp
ke Age pAk aurbe-'aib h»i, so yibi hai,
ki Yntiwnrj aur bewoii ki mu3ibat ke
waqt un ki khabargiri karni, aur dp
ko iliinya so lie-dag bacha rakkna.
II BA'B.
A I mere bhaio, hamire Khudawand
Yisd' Masih kd, jo zu-1-jaldl hai,
iman zahir-paiasti ke sath mat rakho.
2 I. s liye Ei agar kui irama ki angu-
thi, aur barrAq poahdk pabinkar tum-
hAri jRini'iit men dwf, aur ek garib
blii mailo kuchelo feapro jiahino dwe ;
3 Aur tum us suthri-poijhAkwdle ki
taraf mutawajjih hokar ua se kaho,
A'p y ah Aji achehhl tarali se baithiye ;
aur garib so kaho, WahAn kbara rah,
vd, Yahdn mere pdnwoij ki ohauki fcdo
baitli :
i To kya tum no Apaa ki taral'ddri
lia ki, aur bud-guiuau iiakiiu ua bano i
5 Ai mere piyare bhaio, auno, Kya
KhudA no is janAn ke garibon ko na-
hin chunA, tA ki wo imAn ke daulat-
mand, aur nsi baduhaliat ke, jia kd us
ne apne piyar-karnewalon ue wa'da
kiyA, waris howen?
(i Lokin tum ne gariborj ko bo-hur-
iiiiit kiyA. Kya daulatmand tum par
jabr naldn karte, aur 'adalaliin men
tumben nahin khlnchwdte ?
7 KyA wo ua nchehho ndm ka, jo
tumhara raklia gaya, tliattlid nahin
karte ?
8 Par jo tum ua bdd&liahi shari'at
Murda i'
i ki htfatt.
YA'QL"B, III. Zuldn ke rokne U babat.
ko purd karo, jaisd likhd hai, ki T n
apne parasi ko tuBa piyar kar, jaiad dp
ko, tam achchhd karte ho ;
9 Lekin agar tutn zabir-parasti karo,
to gundh karte ho, aur shari'at ke
talnewdle thahrdc jdte Lo.
10 I» liyo ki jii koi «ari shari'at ko
mania, aur faqat ek bal talta hai, to
wuh sari bdton Icd guiia-bfitar lidi.
11 Kyunki jis ne kabd, ki Tri zitid
na kar, u ne yih bhi kahd, ki Tri
khtin ruat k.'ir. Pas BgU td ne zind
na kiyd, magar khtin kiyd, to tu
shari'at ka tdlncwdld hud.
12 Tutn uti ki tarah boto, aur 'amal
karo, jin ka insaf dzddagi ki shari'at
ke muwdfi<| hogd.
13 Is Jiye ki jis ne rahm nahin
kiyd, us kd insaf be-raliini se boga
aur rahm 'addiat par gdlib hotd hai.
14 Ai merc bhdio, agar kol kali!
ki main iniaiidar lilin, a,ur 'amal na
kartd ho, to kyi fdida? kyd aisd iman
use bachd aaktd hai ?
15 Agar koi bhdi ya bahin naugd
howej aur rozinc ki roli muyassar ua
ho,
16 Aur tutn men se koi unhen kahe,
ki Salamat jao, garm aur ser ho; par
tum unhen we chizen na do jo badan
ko zarrir hain, to kyd fdida?
17 Isi tarah iman bhi, agar 'amal
ke satli na ho, to akeld hoke murda
hai
13 Ltkin shdyail koi kahe, ki I'mdn
tujh inen hai, aur mero pas a'amdl;
bhald, t u apni Iman bagai r apne
a'amdl ke mujh par zdhir kar, aur
main apne frodn ko apuc a'amdl w
tujh par zahir karringd.
"IH Tn imdn ldtd hai ki Kbu-ld ek
hai; achchhd kartd hai: Shayatinbhi
vihi mdnte, aur tharlharaU' hain.
20 Par, ai wdhi ddnti, kab tujh ko
ma'him hogd ki imdn be a'amdl murda
hai?
21 Kyd liat nara bdp Abirahdm
a'amdl se rasfbais tiabin thabrdyd gaya,
298
jis waqt us ne apne beto Iz,haq_ ko
tjurbdngdh par charhdyd?
22 Tri dekhtd hai ki imdn no us
ke a'amdl ke sdth kdtn kiyd, aur a'a-
mdl so imdn kami) hud ?
23 Aur wuh navishta piird hua, jo
kahtd hai, Abimham Khudd par imdn
Idyd, aur yih us ke liyc rdstbdzf gini
gaya: aur wuh KhaM-UlUh kahldyd.
21 Pas tutn dekhte ho ki dd'mi
a'amiil se rastbaz thahrdyd jdtd hai,
aur sirf imdn se nahin.
25 Isf tarah Rdhab bhi jo fdhisha
thi, jab ua ne jdsusou ki niihmani ki,
aur unhen dusrf rih se bdhar kar diya,
kyd a'amiil se rastbaz na thahrf?
26 Pas jaisd badan l>e nih murda
hai, wbM hi imdri bhi bo a'amdl
murda hai.
III BA3.
A I mere bhdio, tum mon bubut se
untdd na banen ; kyunki jdnto
bo ki ham us sc ziydila saza p&wenge.
2 Ih wdste ki ham sab ke sab bdr
bdr taqsir karte hain. Agar kol bdton
men taqsir na kare, to wuhi kdmil
shauu hai, aur wuh apno sdro badan
ko tdbi' kar wakta hai.
3 Dekho, ki ham ghoron ke mimu
cn lagdiu dete hain, td ki we hamdre
iiilii' r:ilii>ri, aur un ke sdre badan ko
pherte bain.
4 Dckho, jabdz bhi, bdwiijudi: ki
lise bare bare hain, aiu- tez hawd se
urde jdte, chhoti clibotl patwdr Re,
jahdn kabin maiijhicbahtii hai.phirde
jdte haig ;
5 Waise hi zubdn bhi chho^d sd
^j hai, par bard hi bol bolti hai.
Dekho, thori si fig kaise bare jangal
ko jala deti hai!
6 So smbdn ek dg liai, aur shardrat
kft ek 'diam ; zuban hamdre angon
men aisi hai, ki sdre badan par ddg
hai, aur khilijat ke sdre ddira
ko jaldtl hai, aur khud jahamtam se
jalan ko pdtihai.
7 Kyunki jdnwaron ki aib tarah ki
Maijritri o b<vli/oi m YA'QTT'
tabi'at kyii urtc, kya rcngtc, kya sa-
mnndiir ke rahiiewalon ki, insdn ki
tabi'at se dabdi jati, baiki dabdi gnyij
H Par zubdn ko koi ddmi bas men
la nahin sakti ; ki wuh to f k bala hai,
jo tharati nahtvj ; zahr i qatil se bhari
hai.
9 Ham usi se Khudi ko, jo Bdp
hai, mubdrak kahto hain; aur usi se
■i : n ■■; ko, jo Khuda ki surat par
paidi liij-i, bad du'd karte hain.
10 Ek hi iiiunh bu mubdrakbadi aur
bad du'd Dikaiti hai. Ai intre bliaiu,
y ih niunasib nahin ki aiya lio.
11 Kya k>>i chiwliina ek M sbigaf
H inithdaur k hara [tani ucbhal deta
hai?
l'l Ai men hhaio, kya mumkhi hai
ki anjir nien zaitun, aur angiir men
anjir Isaan? m> hi koi chaahrua khara
aur mir.ha pani nahin deta,
13 Tum men kaun 'atjlmand aur
dana hai? wuh nek ch&l ae ddnai ke
hilm ko sdth apne a'amal Kabir kare.
14 Par jo tum apne dil men karwi
dan aur jhagrc rakhte ho, to fakhr
na kara, aur saebai ke khilaf jhuth na
bolo.
15 Yib wuh hikmat nahin jo uiiar
se ut.arti hai, baiki yih dunyawi, uaf-
Bani, shaitdni hai.
lti Is liye kl jahdri d a h aur jhagrd
hai, wahan hangdma, aur har tarah ka
bura kam hota hai.
17 Par wuh hikmat jo upar so hai,
so pahile pak hai, pbir milansar, mu-
laim, targib-panir, rahm se nur aehchho
phalon se liuii bui, na tarai'dar hai, na
makkar,
18 Aur wo jo sulb karte hain, rast-
bdzi ke phal sulli ke sath bote hain.
IV BA'B.
LARA'I'A'JJ aur jhagre tum men
kanan se ae? kya ynhdri se na-
hin, ya'nc, t umbari shabwaton se, jo
tumbare angon men larti hain?
2 Tum" khwdhish karte ho, aur na-
hin pate ; tum qatl kart.e ho, aur rashk
'B, IV. oaz rahnd.
karte ho, aur kuchh hasil nahin kar
sakte; tum jhagarte ho, aur lar&i
karte ho, par kuchh hath nahin lagtd,
is liye ki tum nahin inangtc.
3 Tum mdngte ho, aur nahin pdte ;
kyfjtiki tum bad-waz'ai se tnaugte ho,
ta ki apni shahwaton men kharch
karo,
4 Ai ziiia-karaewdlo aur zinakar-
newdlio, kya tum nahin jaute ki
dunya ki dosti Kbnda ki dushmani
lisi V pis jo koi dunyd ka dost hua
chdbta hai, wuh (p ko Khuda ka
dushman thahrata hai,
5 Ya tum gumaii karto lio, ki kitab
'abas kahti hai, Wuh Kuli jo ham
men Imuti hai, rashk ke darje tak bhi
ham par ragib hai ?
6 Par wuh to ziyadatar fazl bakhsh-
ta hai. Ohundnchi wuh knln.it hai, ki
Khuda magriiroii ka sanihna kartii,
par farotanon ko fazl bakbshtd hai.
7 Is Kye^Khuda ke tdbi' ho jao.
Shaitdn k& samhna karo, aur wuh
tum se bbag niklega.
8 Tum Khuda ke nazdik jao, tab
wuh tumhare nazdik awega. Ai gu-
imhgaro, tum apne hath dhoo; ai do-
dilo, apne dil ko pak karo.
9 AfsoB aur gam karo, aur roo :
tumhara hansni kurhne se badai jae,
aur kbusbi udiisi se.
10 Tum Khuddwand ke huziir fa-
rotaui karo, ki wuh tum ko burha-
wega.
11 Ai bhaio, tum dpas men ek diis-
ro ki badgoi ua karo. Jo apne bhai
ki badgoi karta, aur us par ilz.'nu
lagdtd hai, bo shari'at ki badgo! kartd,
aur shari'at par 'aib lagdtd hai ; lekin
agar td shari'at par 'aib lagde, to ni
Hhari'at par 'amal-karnewdid naliiri,
baiki us U hakim hai.
12 Shari'at kd denewdld ek bai,
jo bachane aur haldk karne par qadir
hai; tii kaun hai jo diisro par ikam
lagatd hai ?
13 Aro do, tum log jo kahte ho ki
Daulat mavdoH ko chitana. yA'QU'B, V. Du'A mangne fci nasihat.
A'j yd kal i'iddue shahr jdt'ngo, *ur| B So tua» bhi sabr karo, aur a
wahdn ek baras thahrenge, aur sau-
dagar! karenge, aur nafa pAwenge :
14 Aur nahin jAute ki kal kyd
hogd. Kyiinki "tumhAri zindagi kya.
hai? Kyunki wuh to ek bukhar htii,
j<i thori dor tak nazar Atd, aur pliir
gdib ho jdtd bal
15 Ia ki' barkliilAf tum ko kahnd
chAhiye, ki Jo khuddwand ki laarzi
bowe, aur bani jite rahen, to yih ya
w uh kira knrerjge.
10 Par ah tum apni ldfzauiog par
fakhr karte ho: aisd sab fakhr burd
hai.
17 Pas jo koi bhalA kar jdnta hai,
aur nahin. karla, us par gimdh hotd
hai.
V KAU
ARK do, ai daulatmandu, un dfaton
ke sabab -sc, jo tum par dncwAli
b ain, oli i U A chilldke roo.
2 Kyunki tnmbard m Al sar gal
gaya, aur tuinlidre kapro kire k'hi
(W» , .
3 lumhdre sone aur rupe ko nior-
iii;i taiii; aur im kA zang tum par
gawdbi degd, aur dg ki tarah turuharA
gosht khAwegd. Ydnhi tum no akhiri
ditiurj ke liye khazdua jam'a kiyd.
4 "bekho, un mazduron ki mazduti,
jinhon ne tumhdre khet kate, jo zulrn
m« di ua gayi, tumudre yahdn bo
chi liati hai; aur un kdtuowdlon kd
nala iasbkaron ke Khuddwand ke kdn
tak paliuuch gayd.
5 Tum ue zamiu par 'aish o 'ishrat
ki, aur sAro maza urdte do; tum ue
apne dilon ko jaise zabh ke din ki
khdtir mota kiyd.
6 Tum uo rastbdz par fatwd diyA,
aur uso quti kiyd; wuh tum ha rau-
qdbala nahin kartd.
7 Pas, ai bliAio, Khuddwand ke dnc
tak sabr kara. Dekfao, kisan /.amin
ke qimHti phal kd intiwlr kartd aur us
ke liye sabr kartd hai, jab tak ki
pahilo aur pichhlu mcnh ko ua pdwe.
300
ilil inazbiit rakho; kyiinki Khudd-
wand kd dua nazdik hai.
'j Ai bhaio, ek dusre par na kur-
kurio, td ki tum par ilzdm na lagayii
jAe: dekho, inadf-karacwdld darwazc
par khard hai.
10 Ai moro bhaio, jo nabi Khudd-
wand kd iiarn Uke hroite tho, un ko
duk b uthdne aur sabr kamu ko
namuna samjho.
11 Dekho, ham un ko Jo sabr karte
liain nckbakht pamajhte hain. Tum
ne Aiyub ki sabr kA hdl Buni hai,
aur Khuddwand ki taraf joanjAm hiie
jdntu ho. ki wuh bard dardmand aur
mihrbdn hai.
12 Pai- sab sc pahile, ai mere bhaio,
qasam mat kiah, na dsmdn ki, na
zamiu ki, na koi aur qasam ; baiki
tumbard bau hdn, aur tumhdrd nahin
nahin ho, ki tum sazd ke lAiq na
thahro.
ia Agar koi tum men gamgin ho,
wub du'A mange. Agar koi khushbdl
ho, to sitabih ko git gAwe.
14 Agar koi tum rnon bimAr pare,
to kalisiye ke buzurgon ko pas buid-
we ; aur we Khuddwand ke ndm se
us par tol dhalke us ke liye dua
mdngen :
15 Aur du'A, jo imdn ke adth ho,
us bimAr ko bachdwcgi, aur Khudi-
wand us ko u t ha khard karega ; aur
agar gunAh kiye hon, to usc mu'Afi
hogi.
11) Tum dpu men apni taqsiron kA
iqr;ir karo, aur s:k dusro ku livo du'A
mAngo, 1-d ki tum shifd pdo. Haatbaz
ki minnat jab istumidl ki jati liari
tasir rakhti hai.
17 Ilivda hamdrd ham-jins insdn
thi; uh ne du'd par du'd ki, ki pdtjf
na barae, so tin baraa aur chha ina-
Liuiiij tak zauun par pdni na pard.
18 Aur us ne phir du'd ki, to dsmdn
ne pdni barsdyd, aur zamiu apue phal
ugd ldi.
Najat U babat nabion ne I PATBUS, I,
19 Ai bhiio, jn lum men se koi
sachdi ki nih se gumrah bowe, aur
koi us ko phirawe ;
20 Wuh yih ma'liim karc ki jo koi
bari tahqig ki.
ok gunahgir ko uh ki gnmrahi ki rah
se phirita hai, to ek jan ko nmul. se
bachawega, aur babat gunahoii ko
PATEUS
KA' PAHLA' KHATT I 'A'MM.
I BA'B.
PATRUS ki taraf se, jo Yisu'
Masih kii rasul hai, uu mu-
safiron ko jo l'untus, (ralatiya, Kap-
padurjijra, Asia aur Bituniya ke mulk
men tittar bittar htie,
2 Jo Kluida Bap ke us 'ilm ke
muwafiq jo wuh pahlo ue rakhta thi
chune htie haig, ta ki Ruh ki paki-
zagi-bakhsh tasir so farmaubardtir
bon, aur Yisu' Masih ka kht'm un par
chhirki jawe ; l'azl aur salaniati timi-
harc liye ziyada hoti jao.
3 Hamaro Kliudawand Yisd' Masih
ka Khuua aur Bap mubarak h o, jia ne
h ain ko apui bap rahmat m Yisu'
Masih ke m union men se ji uthiie ko
bd'ia zinda ummed ke liye se
I'iiiil.i. kiyi,
4 Ta ki ham wuh be-zawdl, aur na-
alilda aurgair-faiii miras, joasm&npar
tumhare liyo rokhi gayi, pawen,
5 Jo Kanda ki qudrat ae iman ke
wasiie us uajat tak, jo akhiri waqt
:u'i_i zahir hone ko taiyar hai, mahdi*
kiye hiie haig ;
6 Jis waqt men tum bah'U khusli
ho, agarchi bilfi'al chaud roz, ba za-
rurat, tarah tarah ki azmaishon se gam
men pare iio :
7 Ta ki tumhare iman ki izmaish,
jo fani sono m, h&rchand ki wuh ag
men taya bh! jae, kitna hi beshqimat
301
iai, Yisti' Masih ke zahir hone ke din
ta'rif aur "i//.nt aur jalai ko laiq pai
jawe:
fct Use lo bin dekho tum piyir kar-
te ho; aur bawujudo ki tum ab us ko
naliin dekhte, tau lihi us par iman
lake aisi khushi o khurrami karte ho,
jo bayan se bahar, aur jalai se bliari
hai:
9 Aur apno iman ki garaz, ya'ne,
jancn ki uajat, hasil karto ho.
10 Isi najat ki babat nabion ne bari
talash aur tahqiq ki, jinhon ne us
ni'amat ki pcshingoi ki, jo tum par
zahir hone k» tlii : •
11 We us ki tahqiq men. the, ki
Masih ki Riih, jo un men thi, jab
Masih ki babat us ke dtikhorj ki, aur
ba'd un ke us ke jalai kf, age gawati!
deti thi, kis znuiane ya kis tarah ke
zarnauc ka bayan karti thi.
12 So un par yih zahir hiia, ki wo
na apui baiki haniari khidmat ke liye
ye baten kahte the, jin ki khabar ab
tum ko un ki ina'rifat mili, jinhon ne
Buh i Quds ke wasilc, jo isman par
se bheji gayi, tumben Injil ki khusb-
khabari di ; aur ia baton par mulalia/a
kanio ko liyo firishto shauq so jkukte
13 Ia wiste tum apne fahm ki ka-
mar bandbko, aur hosbyir hoke, us
fazl ki kami) ummed rakho, jo Yisu'
Pak chdi cJialne ha fa
Masih ke zdhir hote waqt tum par
mizil ln'ia chdhtd.
14 Tum larminbarddr farzandon ki
mdnind un buri k h w Ah isi ion ki taraf,
jin ruen. tum apni nadani ke waqt
giriftdr the, phir ntftt rujti' lio.
15 Usiki jis tarah tumhara bulane-
wala pak hai, lum bhi apni sah cbal
men pak bano ;
10 Kyunki likhd hai, ki Tum pik
bano, ki main pak Ini n.
17 Aur jis hal ki tum aise BAp ki
nira lete jo har ek ke kam ke muwd-
fiq bo-taraldir hofes insaf karta hai, to
apni musdfarat ke waqt ko dar ke sath
kito:
18 Kyonki tum yih jdiite ho, ki
wuli khaldsi jo lum no pdi un behrida
dastiiron ae jo tumhare bApdadon ki
taraf se chale Ae the, so fdni chfzon,
va'ne, MM rupekfl subab «e nahiii,
19 Baiki Masih ke beshqimat lahu
ke sababhui.jobe-dagaurbe-'aibbarre
ki mdnind bai ;
20 Jo dunyd ki paidaish se peshtar
muqanar hud tlia, lokin ia akhiri za-
mane mes tumhare liye zdhir hud,
21 Jo us ke &abab se KhudA par
iman lAe, jis ne us ku murdon men
ae jildyi, aur jalil bakhsha, ti ki tum-
hiri iman aur bharosi Khuda par
howe,
22 Cbnnki tum no haqq ki tahi'
diri karke Ruh ke wasilo apno dil ko
pak kiyi,yahAi\ tak ki tum mes bhii-
uri ki ht'-riyd muhabhat paidd hui, pas
pak dil se ek diisre ko bahut piyar
karo :
23 Kyunki tum na tukhm i fdnt
se, baiki «a se jo gair-fani hai, ya'ne,
Khuda ke kalam se, jo zinda aur abad
tak qaim rahta hai, sar i nau paidA
hde.
'21 Kyunki har ek bashar ghAs ki
mAnind hai, aur insan ki sari shdn ghds
ko phdl ki minimi hai. Ghds to sukh
gayt, aur phi.il jhar gavd hai ;
25 Lekin KlmdAwand ka k alim abad
302
T PATRUS, II. Masih korv k& patthar hal.
tak ralitii. Yihwuhi kaldm hai jis ki
khushkhabarf tumben di gayi.
II BA'B.
I S wiste tum sah badi, aur sab dagi,
aur niakron, aur dih, aur sdri
badgnion ko chhnrke,
2 Nau-jiaid bachehon ki miinind
kalam ke khalis dfidh ko muHhtaqho,
ti ki tum us se barhte jao :
3 Agar aisi ho ki tum ne nuift
hasil kiyi ki Khudiwand mihrban
hai ;
i Jis ke pas dkc, jo ki ek zinda pat-
thar hai, ddmion ki to nd-pasand kiya
hfii, par KhudA ki chima hud aur qi-
rnali jatta hiid,
5 Tum bhi zinda pattharon ki md-
nind ruhaiii (.'har banto, jitu lio, aur
muqaddas kahinon ka firqa hue jAte
ho, ti ki rtihani qurbani;in, Jo Vtsii'
Masih ke -wasilo Khuda ko pasand
ha i n, guzrdno.
6 Ia wiste kitAb men bhi mazkiir
hai, ki Dekh. main Saihiin mpn rk
patthar rak h detd hdn, jo kone ki siri,
aur ohund hdd, aur qimati hai ; aur jo
us par imdn liwe, liargiz sbarminda
na boga.
7 So tunihdro wiste, jo iman lae Iw,
wuh qimati hai : par jo imdn na lic,
un ke liye wulii patthar, jis" hanane-
wdlon ne radd kiya, kone Va sird hiii,
8 Aur thokar khildnewili pattliar,
aur thes dilanewdli cliaidn bdi : n ye
we hain, jo narkaKh hoke kalam se
thokar khite hain, jis ke liye we mu-
qarrar bhi hue.
& Lekin tum chund Inti khAndau,
badshdhi kahinou kd firqa, muqaddas
qaum, aur k bias log ho, td ki tum us
ki khiibian adhir karo, jis ne tumben
tdriki se apui 'ajib roshni men buldya.
10 Tum ige qaum na tho, par ah
Khuda ki qaum ho ; dge tum par rah-
mat na thl, par ab tum par rahmat
hiii.
11 Ai piyiro, main tum se yfinjaise
pardesion aur rausdnron se rainnai
ckdkaronkefariiz.l PATRUS, III. Jort. kha#ivi bi farz.
thi; aur dukli piko dhamkita na tba;
baiki upne ta,iri As ke, jo risti ke
Mtli 'iLiliilat karti hai, supurd kart;i
Hi'dyi
karti lnin, ki tum jisnnini khwahish-
on se, jo jin ke muqibil larai kaiti
luiiij, parhoz karo;
12 Aur apni chalan gair-qaunion
ke bic-h neki ko sith rakho i ti ki m
jo tutnhen badkar janko tunihari bad-
goi karto hairj, tumhire nek kimoii
par nazar karke, ua din, jab un par
nigah ho, Khudi ki jalai zahir karen.
13 Pas har ekhukiimat kojoinsan
ki taraf se bai, Khudawand ki; liye
tabi' raho ; badshih ke, is liye ki wtih
nab se bnzurg hai;
14 Ya hikimon ko, is liye ki we us
ke bhejo Liie h ain, ti ki badkaron
ko sazi den, aur nekokiron ki ta'rif
karey.
15" Kyunki Khudi ki niarat ydij
bai, ki tum uok kiim kpirki: alirnaijon
ki nadani ki laniih band kar rakho :
16 Aur apne ta.in. izid jino; par
apui azidi ko badi ka parda na karn,
baiki ap ko Khudi ka handa jano,
17 Sab ki hurmat kiiro. lihiion se
ulfat rakho. Khudi se daro. Badailah
ki 'v/./.^t karo,
lrt Ai chaknm, kamil adab se apne
khawindon ke tabi' raho; ua sirf nokon
nur halimun ko, baiki kaj-mizajon ke
.bhi.
19 Kyunki uar koi Khudi ke libiz
ko sabab be-insAfi se dukh ul.bskar aisi
taklifonki bavuasht kara, Lo yihi'a/.ilal
hai.
'JO Kyunki agar tum nc gunih
korko tamanehi kbae, aur sabr ki,
to kami si fakhr bai ? par agar neki
karke dukb pa'te, aur sabr karte ho, to
ns men Khudi ko nazdik tumhari
fazilat hai.
21 Kyunki tmn ini ke liye bulae
gaye ho : ki Masih bhi hamire wisto
iin.kl) pika ek natuuna hamire liye
chhor gaya bai, ti ki tuni us ke naqsh
i qadam par chale j&o.
22 Us ne guadh na kiya, aur na us
ke munh min ehoal bal paya gaya.
28 Wuh galian kliaku gali na detd
303
thi:
24 W uh ip hamiLro jumahon ko ap-
na badan par utbiko salib par charb
gnya, ti ki ham gunihon ko haqq
men marke nistbizi iiien jien ; un kor-
OB "ke sabab se jo us par pare tum
change hiio.
25 Kyiinki timi bhataki hiii bhorou
ki miniiid the; par ab «pol jinon ke
Garariye aurNiguhban pas phir ie ho.
III BA'B.
ISI' tarah, ai 'aurato, tum apne apne
shauharon ke tAbi* raho, ki agar
koi ini men so kalam ko na minte hop,
to wo bagair kalam ke apui auratog
ke ebalan so moho jiwen ;
2 Jis waqt turabtire pik chalan ko,
jo khauf ko sdth hai, dekhen ;
8 Aur tumhari llngfe wihirina ho,
jaise air gilndluii, aur sone lie zewar
barullma, ya tarah tarah ka kaprn
pahinni ;
4 Baiki cbihiye ki wuh oU ki
poshida insiniyat ho, ya'ne hilm aur
garib-miziji ki iraish jo gair-fini
hai, aur yihi Khuda ke dge besbqim*t
hai.
5 Kyunki isi tarah rauqaddag 'aura-
teu bhi, jo agle zamiuiu meri Khudi par
biijirosii rakhti tbin, ip ko sanwirti,
aur apue apuo shauharon ko tabi' raliii
thi n :
6" Chunanchi Sarah Abiraha.ni u i
fanniubardiri karti, aur usu kbuda-
wand kabti thi : bo tuai bhi us ki betiip
ho, agar nekiin karo, aur kisi khauf
se hairan na ho.
7 Waise hf, al sbaulmro, tum bhi
danai so un ke sath raho, aur 'aurat
ko uiauk pjiidiiisb Hamajhkar 'izzat do,
aur jino ki zindagi ki miras ke fazl
men tum donor, sharik ho, ta ki tuui-
liilri du'ien ruk na jien.
H Garaz, s:ib kesabek-dil ho; bani-
Thtkh ufhiint ki babat.
dard ho; birddjirdnamuhabbat rakho
rahm-dil aur kliiuih-kho hoo :
U Badi ke 'iwaz badi ua karo ; gdli
ke 'iwaz gali ua do ; baiki us ke bar-
khjlaf barakat chaho ; ki tum jdnte ho
ki tum barakat ko waria hoae ko bulde
gaye ho.
10 Jo kot ohAhc ki zindagi ae khush
ho, aur achehhe dinon ko dokhe, ao
afiii zuVdn ko badi se, aur apne hon-
thon ko dagi ki bit bolne se baz
rakho ;
11 Badi sc kindra kare, aurneki ko
'amal men Idwe; nulh kndhiindhe,aur
us ka pichhA kare,
12 Kyi'mki Khudd wand kf ankhen
rdsthazon pnr lagi hai n, aur ua ke kau
un ki minnat ]mr ; par Khuddwand
ka chihra badkdron ka muljhAlif bai.
13 Aur agar tum neki ki p&iraui
kiva karo, kaun hai jo tum so badi
kare?
14 l'ar agar tum rfilMri ke gabah
dukh bhi pao, to nekbakht ho, aur un
ke dardne se mat daro, aur na ghabrd
jao;
15 Baiki Khudawand Khudd ko
apue dilun men miiqaddaB jano : aur
hamesha musta'idd raho ki ha.rck ko,
10 tum se us umrord ki hibat jo tum-
nen hai plichhe, farotani aur adab se
jawab do :
16 Aur niyat nek rakho; tA ki we
jo tumhen hadkar jdnke tum ko bura
kahte, aur tumhdri M asi h i achchhi
chal par la'n ta'n karlc hain, ahar-
minda hon.
17 Kyiigki agar Khuda ki marzl
ytin hai ki tum bhalA karke dukh
pao, to yih uh se bihtar hai ki bura
karke dukh pao.
18 Kyi'mki Masih ne hhl ek bar
pmahou kewdsiedukh uthdyA, ya'nc,
rastbdz nc nd-raston ke liye; ta ki
wuh ham ko Khuda ku pas pabunchde,
ki wuh jism ke haqq men to mara
gaya, lokin Ruh men zinda kiya
gaya:
304
I PATPJJS, IV. M«tik ko *>amiti]'< j-'vmhi .
1!) Jis men hoke un rfhori kn pAs
Jo qaid thin j.ike mati adi ki :
10 Jo agu tia-farnidnbarddr thin,
jis waqt ki Khuda ki sabr Nuh ku
union, jab kishti taiydr hoti thi, iuii-
zdr karti raiii, jis men t.hori, ya'ue ath
jduen, pani se bach gayin.
21 Mutabiq us 'alamat ko baptisma
(jo badan kd mail chlmr&na nahin,
baiki nekniyati se Khudd ka tdlib
hond hai,) Tisu" Miwih ko jl uthne ko
wasile ab ham ko bhi bachdtA hai :
22 Wuh asman par jdke Khudd ko
dahino hai ; aur urishtn, nur hnkri-
maten, aur riydsaten, us ke tdbi' hain.
IV BA'B.
PAS chiinki Masih ne hamdre wistc
jism men dukh uthayd, to tum
bfal waisihi ta bi'ut ke hat'hydr bdndho ;
kyi'mki jis ne jism mun dukh uthayd,
so gutidli so faraj^at J»ai ;
2 'i'd ki tuin aiimititi ki buri khwdh-
islidu ka iiiiitabiq nabiij, lialki Khudd
ki marzi ko muwdfiq jism nun apni
I i:i-|i 'umr kdto.
3 Is wdate ki hamdri jitni 'umr
gair-qaumon ki inaiv.i ke muwdfiq
kiim kamu mcu guzri, wuhi hatudro
aste bas hai ki t ah bi ham hawd o-
hnwas, shahwatun, mai ki mastfon,
aubashiog, ahardb-khwdriL>n, makruh
Uuparatition. men waqt kdtte the :
i Is par we fei'njjub karto hain ki
tum us shuhddpnu ki fazuli men un ke
sdth nahin daur jdte, aur badgoi karte
hain.
n We ua ko, jo zindon aur murdon
kd insdf karne par taiyar hai, hisdh
denge
T; Ki miirdon ko bhi Injil ia liyc
sundi gayi, ki we ddmion ke Age jism
kf rdh ee gunahgdr thahreg, lekin .
Khudd ko dge rih se jiwen.
T Par sah ebizon kd Akhir nazdik
hai ; is liye hoshyar, aur du'A lodngne
ke liye jdgte raho.
B Sah se pahle ck ilusre ko shiddat
Buzurgon aur ja.wa.non ke I PATRUS, V. khtisnfaratz.
se piyir karo; kyunki m < 1! nuili.it ha- j 19 Pas jo Khuda ki marzi ke mu-
hut gunahon ko dhimp doti hai. ,wafiq dukh pate hain, n us ko Khali^
9 A'pas men be kurkurie musafir- 1 i amin jiukar nekokiiri kartehiie apui
dos t raho.
10 Har ek, jia qadr us ko ni'amat
tnili. »0 uso uu ki miiiind jo Khuda
ki tarah tarah ke faal ke achcli
kliaiisiiinan hain, ek diiare ki khidmat
men kharch kare.
11 Agar koi bole, to wuh Khuda
ke kalam ke rautibiq bole ; agar koi
khidmat kare, to it.ui kare, jitna use
Khuda DO maqdur diyi hai; ta ki
sali bdton nun Yiaii' Masih ke wauile
Khuda ka jalai icihir ho: jalai o
qudrat abad-ul-Abad us! ke liye hai.
A'min.
12 Al piydro, tum us tanewali ig se,
jo dzmiiic ke liyc tum jiarbharki hai,
ta'ajjub na karo, ki goyd tumhird
'ajab hal liiid hai :
13 Italki is sabab ?e khushl karo,
ki tum Masih ke dukhon men sharik
ho ; ta ki us ke jalai ke /.aliir hote
waqt tum be-nihayat kbush o khur-
ram ho.
li Agar Masih ke ndm ke sabab
tum par la 'n ta'n ho, to tum umljanik
ho ; kyunki jaldl ki aur Khuda ki
ruh tum par saya karti liai : unhin ki
taraf se ub ee kufrgoi hoti, par turuhiri
taraf se us ki buzurgi ki jali.
15 Khabardar, aisi na ho ki tum
men uu koi kbiiitl, ya chor, yi badkir,
ya amorj ke kara men dakhl karno-
wdU lioku dukh piwe.
16 Par agar koi Kristian hone ke
sabab se dukh piwe, to na sharmawe ;
baiki is sabab se Khuda ki buzurgi
kare.
17 Kyunki ab waqt pahunehi hai 10 Ab Kliudi jo kamal fazl kuna,
ki Khuda ke ghar par 'adalat shuru' jia ne ham ko ftpne jala! i abadi ke
ho : pas agai Lhu H shuni' hai, to un
ka, jo Khuda ki Injil ke labi' uabin,
kyA anjim lioga ?
18 Aur agar ras t bis doshwarf se
bacb jiwe, lo l>o-din aur guuahgir ki
thikind kabin?
305
jAuon ko us ke supiird kang.
V BA'B.
BUZURGON se jo tumharc bidi
hain, main jo uu ke uath buzurg
aur Mnwi'ii ki Mmtfog ka gawah, aur
us jalai men jo zahir hogl sharik hun,
iliiuifis karti Ini u ;
2 Ki tum Khuda ke us galle ki jo
tumhire duniiiyan hai, |.ianb:iui karo;
lachari so uahiij, baiki khushi »a; aur
nd-rawd uaf'a ke liye uabin, baiki dil-
khwihi se uigabuini karo;
3 Aur Khudawand ki niirds par
khudiwandf na karo, baiki gallo ke
liye namnna bauo.
4 Aur jab sardir Garariya zdhir
hoga, tab tum jalai ki aisi liar pdoge,
jo murjriiti nahin.
5 Ini tarah tum, ai jawatio, buzurg-
on ke tibi' raho. Baiki sah ko Hal) ek
dusre ke tibi' hoke farutani ki libas
pabino; kyunki Khudi ma.gniron ka
sdmhni karti, par farotunon ko fazl
bftkhshti hai.
6 So tum Khudd ke /.mawar hith
ke tale dabe raho, td ki wuh tumhfii
waqt par Rarfardz kare :
7 Aur apnl sdri tikr us par dai do ;
kyunki us ko tumhdri tikr liai.
8 Hwhyir aur bi'dir raho; kyunki
tumhdri niukrialifSliaitaii garajnewdlo
babar ki minind dbiiudbti phirti hai,
ki kis ko ph:ir kliiwe:
9 Tum iman imn mazbut hoka us
ki muqnbaln karo, yih jdnke ki yehi
'azlyateg tumhSre birddar jo dunyi
men hain piire andize lak uthitc haiu.
Dye Masih YU6 B6 buUyi hai, an hi
tum ko thordsi dukh salin- ke ba'd
taiyir, raasbdt, ustuwir, niodar kare,
11 Jalai aur rjodrat abad tak usl
ki hai. A'min.
12 Main no tumlien SilwfaWU ki
U
Apmi hivjitzulagi ko II PATEUS, L sahU karne kdfurz.
ma'rifat, jo mcri danist men divarjnt-lhAre sdth barguzida hui.nin* merd beta
ddr bhai hni, mukhtasar SUB likha, Maripis, tuinben salam kahtc hairi.
nasihat k&rke, aur gawdhi deke, ki 14 T uni a|ma mori mubftbbftt ka
yihi Khudikd aachchdfazl hai jis par bosa leke ek dusre ko salam karo.
tam qiim ho. Tum bb1> ki, jo Masih Ylatf men ho,
13 Wuh jo Babul men hai, jo tum-lsaldmati howe. A'min.
PATEUS
KA' DU'SEA' KHATT I 'A'MM.
I BA'B.
SHAMA'U'N Fatrua ki taraf se, Jo
Tisu' Masih k* banda aur ra-siil
bai, un ko jinhoii ne haru&re Khuda
aur Bachancwdle Yisii' Masih ki rast-
hazi se hamari sd hainqimat iman
paya hal :
L' Khuda aur hamaro Khuddwand
Yisc'" Masih ki pnhch&n ne, fazl aur
nal amati tumhdio liye ziydda hoti
jdwe.
3 CMnki tU ki khuddi ki qudrat
ne hamon sah chizen, jo zindagi aur
dinddri se ta'alluq rakhti hain, ub ki
pahelian se 'mayat ktn, jis ne bam ko
apno jalai aur ueki ae buldya ;
4 Jin ke wasile nibiyat bare aur
nimuti wa'de ham se kiyc gaye i ta ki
tum un ko wasilc us gandagi se, jo
dnnya men buri khwaiiish ke aabab
hai, chbiUkar, zat ilahi men siiarik bo
jio.
B Pas is waste tum apni taraf se
kamal koahish karke apne iman par
ueki, aur ueki par 'irlan ;
6 Aur 'irfan par parhczgdri, aur par-
Lczgslri par aabr, aur sabr |iar dinddri ;
T Aur ditulari par birad&rana ull'at,
aur binidarana ulfat par muhabbat
biirhao.
8 Ki ye chizen agar tum men hon,
306
aur barhti bhi jawen, to tum ko ba-
inare Khuddwand Yiau' Masih ki
kamil jiahohaa hasil karne ke liye
i?iilil aur be-plial ua hone deggi,
B l'ar jia ke pas yo chizen nahin
hain, wuh andha, aur an klien rnundtd
hai, aur apne agle gunaiion ke dhoe
jdne ko bhul bai t ha hai.
10 Is liye, ai 'bbaio, ziyddatar ko-
shish karo, ki tumhari bulahat aur
bargu/.idagi sabit ho : kyiinki'agar
tum aisd karo, to kabhi na giroge :
11 Baiki tum hamaro Khtid;i.w;iud
aur Bachanewale Yisii' Masih ki abadi
badahdliat men bari 'izzat ke sdth
«hamil kiye jaoge.
12 ls liye main yili baten tumben
hamosba ydd dilaue h gafil na hiinga,
agarebi tum w4qif ho, auris sachdi par
jo ab zahir hiii qaim ho.
13 Chunaiichi main tae wajib janta
hiin, ki jab tak is khairoe men hun,
tumhen yad dild diidke ubhdrui; ;
14 Kyi'mki imijhe ma'lum hai, ki
jaisa hainSre Khuddwand Yisd' Masih
ne mujh par zahir k iya, wuh waqt, jia
nira merd kliairaa jald girayi jdegi,
nazdik pahunehd hai.
15 So main koshiuh men bi'iii, ki
'i m i nun- kuch karne keba'din bdtog
ko hanieaha ydd rakbo.
Jhitthe mu'aniiuou
16 Kyunki bam ne, na fajlsiUi kf
k ah dn i cm kd pichhd kurke, baiki us ki
Imzurj^i koapiiidnkhori scdekhnewdle
hoke, apiic Khuddwarid Yisfi* Masih
ki q mirat aur dne ki khabar tumheg
di.
17 Ki us dc Khudd Bdp so 'izzat o
hurraat pdi, jin waqt nihdyat bare jaldl
so ua ko aisi dwds di, ki Yih rnerd
piyard lictd hai, jia se main tisA Mn ;
18 Aur bam ne, jab uh ke Bath mu-
qaddas pahdr par the, yib dwdz deitidn
se dti autii.
19 Aur hamard bhi itabion kd ka-
lam hai, jo ziydda qaim hai ; aur tum
achchlid karte bo, jo yih eaiiiajhkar it>
par nigdh rakhte ho ; ki WTih ek chirdg
hai, jo andhcri jogah men, jab tak
pau na pbate, aur mibh kd tdrd, tnro-
lidre dilon men zdhir na howe, roshnf
bakhshtd hai;
20 Yih Bab so pahle jdnke, ki kitdb
ki ki>t petihingoi dp so nahin klmlti.
21 Kyi'mki nubuwat ki liat idmi
kS khwdhwh Be kabhi nahin hi'ii' : bai-
ki Khudd ke muqaddas log Bdh i
Quds ke bulwae bolto tlie.
II IJA'B.
PAR jbuthe nabi bhi us oaurn men
the.jaiBe kijhutbomu'allim tum
men bhi horjge, jo haldk karnewdli
bidateu parde inen nik^Vngw, aur us
Khuddwand ka,jis ne unben mol liyd,
inkdr karenge ; aur dp apne par jald
haldkat Idwenga.
2 Aur bahutere nn ki shahwat-par-
asti ki pairam karenge: un ke eabab
ee rdb 1 rdsti ki Imdnami hogi.
3 Aur we ldlach ne baten banak:
tum kx> apne nafa kd sabab thahra-
wegge: jin parmuddat kdfatwdjobna,
so ane men drr nahin karta, aur un ki
haldkat liiighti nahin.
4 Kyunki jis hdl ki Khudd ne
firishron ko, jab unhnn ne gunah kiyd,
na chhord, baiki tdriki ki zanji'ron se
bdndhkar, aur iahanitam nun dalke,
307
II PATI1US, II. kdhdf.
kiyd, td ki 'ad&lat ke din tak
un ki njgahbdni ho;
G Aur agli dimya kobhi na chhord,
baiki tiifdn ke pdui ko be-dinon ke
'alam par bhejkar Kiih aamet, jn rdst-
bdzi ka manddi karnewdlii thd, dth ko
bachd liyd;
6 Aur Sadtim aur 'Amiirah ke
shahron ko kliak eiyiih karke, aur nest
o ndbud bone kd hukm farmake, un-
hen dyande ko be-dinnn ki 'ibrat ke
Uye namiina band rakbd ;
7 Aur rdstb&K Ldt ko, jo ehnrimn.
ki ndpik ebdUm se diqq hud, rihai
bakhebi ;
8 (Ki wuh rdut-Vw, un nwn rahkar
un ke be-shar'a 'amalon ko dskh f iinke
har 107. apne sachche di! ko ahikanje
men khinchtd thd ;)
9 Pa» Khudd wand dinddron ko
imtibdn ne chhurand, aur be-dinon ko
'iL'liilat ko din tak saaa ku liyu rakhnd,
jiiulil hai:
10 KhuKiisan un kn,j(i ndpdk shah-
watoTj Be jisru ki pairani karlo, aur
huki'nnat ko ndehi/. jdnte hairj. We
dhilh, o khudpasand hair, aur jaldl-
Alog ko badnam karne se nahin
darto hain.
11 Agarcbi firisbte, jo WM aur rp.id-
rat men un se barbkar hairj, Kbudd-
'iiiid ke dgo un jiar ndlish karke tiHia
nahin dete.
1^ Ltkin ye, un jdnwaron ki ma-
nind jo /ali be-'aql hain, nur whikdr
anr haldk hona ke liye paidd hne, un
chizon kl, jin ec we nd-\vdqif hain,
liadndml karko apni kbardbi meu
haldk honge;
13 W« A\mi badi kd riarlla pdiven«c,
ki we 'aiydshi kami, jo ek din ki hru,
khualii jdnte hain. Wo ddg baiij, aur
'aib liniij, ;inr tumhdrr lith khd" pike
apni dagdbd/.ion ee aieh o 'islirat karte
hain ;
14 Un ki dnkhen zind ee bliari
haiij, aur guuiih Be ruk naliin saktin ;
w a be-qiyain logon par jdl ddlte hain :
Masih ke din
un k&dil l&lachofl mcp meriuh iq hai ;
we lS'nat ki aulail hain :
15 We fiidhi rAh chhorkar bhatake
hfie hain, aur Unsur ke bete Bala'at»
ki rah par ho liye hain, jis ne ndrdsti
ki njazdiiri ko 'tzfl jilud ;
16 Magar us ne apni khatdbdri par
ilzam paya : ki Iw-zuban gadlie ne ad-
ui! ki tarah botkar us nabi ki diwdnagi
ko rok rakbd.
17 We sukhcktiohaig ; webadlidn
hairj, jinben dndhi daurdti hai ; abadi
tariki ki aiyahi un ke liye d hari lini.
18 Wa ghamaiui ki behiida bakwas
karke, unhen jo gunirdhon men se naf
bach nikli! uM, jNmam shahwaton aur
nipikion men pharm&te. hain :
19 We un se Azddagi ki wa'da
karte, par dp kharabi ku gulAra bante
hain: kyi'inki jia kd koi inaglub hfid,
ao usi kd gula m lini.
20 So agar we Khuddwand aur
Backdnewdle YisiV Masih ki pahchdn
ke sabab dunyd ki dludaglon se bach-
kar un mog phirke |.hansen, aur mag-
Ifib boo, fco un ki pwhatt lidi pable bc
badtar ho chukd.
131 Kyiiiiki rdsti ki rdh n jaima
un ke liye iu se bihtar thA, ki jiinkar
us muqnddfls hukm se, jo tinhrii sompa
gaya, phir jdwen.
22 Par yih. saohohi masai un par
tlnk :Ui hai, ki Kuttdapui i^ai ki taraf,
aur dhoi bui suami daldftl men lotne
ko pbiri hai.
111 iU'B.
II PATRrS, TIT. Mhiy&n,
wdle dweijge, joapni buri khwAhishon
ke mnwAtiq chalenge,
4 Aur kahenge, ki Us ke Ane kd
wa'da kahdn? kyiirjki jab sc bdpddde
sii gaye, siiti kuchli tam khilqat ke
*hur\V mwn tha, al> tak mim hi hai.
6 Kyriiiki we ise jan bujlike bbiil
gaye, ki Khudd ko kaldm ae asm a u
inuildat se hain, aur zamin pdni men
ao aur pdni ke wasile se bandi bui
thi;
C Jin pdnion ke wabah se wuh dun-
yd, jo us waqt tlii, bdrb men diibkar
haliik hiii :
7 Par dsmdn o zamin jo ab hain,
usi ke kaldm so mahfdz ham, aur us
din tak, ki be-dinnn ki adalat aur ha-
Idkat ho, jaldne ke liye bani rahenge.
8 Par, ai '-.v/S™, yih bat tum par
chbipi na rahe, ki Khuddwand ke
nazdik uk ilin bazAr barns, aur hazdr
baras ek din ke barabar hain.
9 Khuddwand apne wa'donki bAbat
susti nahin kartd, jaisA ba'zo Rusti sa-
majhte hain ; par is liye hamari
bdbat sabr kartd, ki kisi ki haldkat
nabin chahtd, baiki chdhtd hai ki sal.
tauba karen.
10 Lekin Khuddwand kd din, jis
tarah rdt ko ehor dtd hai, dwegd ; aur
usi mori asmdn sannate ke sdth jate
rahf-npc, aur KJritn i falak jalkargudda
ho jdenge, aur zainiu un kdrigarion
sauiet, jo us men hain, Lbasam hogi.
11 Pas jab ki yih sab chlwn guddz
hnnewali hairj, tu tum ko pak ulialan
aur dindari ram kaisd banuA Idzim
Al ';\7.\rx\ main tumlu-n ab yih ddsrd
khatt liklita hiin; aur donog H
hiuili;ir<' ]i(ik dil ke yaddilane ke taur
]i,ir abhdrti ban :
2 TA ki tum un bdton ko jo mu-
qaddas nabiou nc peshtnr kaiiin, aur
ua hukm ko jo ham ne, ki Kliuddwand
ke aur liachAnewale ku rasul hain,
kiya, ydd rakbo.
lini,
12 Aur ki tum Khudd ke us din
ke dne ke muntazir aur mushtdq ho,
jjh men asmdn jalkar guddz ho jaenge,
aur ajr~am i falak jalkar pighai jdenge ?
13 Par ham naye dsman aur nayi
zamta M, jin men rdstba>;i basti hai,
tas ke wa'd'e ke muwdfiq intizari karte
hain.
3 Aur yih pable jdn rakho, ki fl Ts wdste, ai 'azizo, un ohtzog k'
:hiri dinon men hansi tliattiii? kani(-'muntazir rahke Uosliisli karo ki tum
akhiri
Mati/i ki I VU'HA\
lifi-dag, aur bo-'aib, salamati ke sath
u a se pae jio.
16 Aur hamare ^!b\ic14wa.nd ki sahr
karna apni najat jano; ohuuiuchi
hama™ piydre bhai Bulus ne bhi ub
daual ke inuwafiq, jo use 'mayat bui,
tumben likha hai j
16 Aur sare khatton mim iu balon
ki zikr kiyi bai ; un "men kitni Mtsg
Lain, jin kisamajhna mushkil hai, aur
we jo jabj) aur beuiyam kain, un ke
rna'uon ko bhi dilari kitabon ke ma/,-
-VA', I, II.
hatjigaf
hal.
ruumm ki tarah apni hakikat ke liye
pherte bain.
17 Is waste, ai piyiro, cliunki tum
ige se igab bu gaye, apu i khabardari
kiiro, ta na howe ki shariron ki bhiil
ki taraf khinuko jake apui uatuwiri h
jite rabo.
18 Baiki hamare Khudawanil aur
Baeiiiuuwale Yisu' Masih ke fusJ «oi
pahchan men barhte jao, XJtA ka jahil
a b ho aur abad iak raht: A'iuhi,
IUHANNA'
KA' PAHLA' KHATT I 'A'MM.
I BA'B.
U S zindagi ke Kalam ki babat, Jo
shuni' se tha, jiso bam iie suni,
aur apni aufchon se dekhi, aur tak
rakhd, aur hamare hatbon ne chhua ;
2 (Kyunki wuh nirnlagi zahirnlti,
aur haru ne use dckha, aur bam gawa-
hi detehain,aurus haweaha ki undagi
ki khabar tum ko deto bom, jo Bap ke
l«i<s tbi, aur bam par zahir hfii;)
3 Ju kuciiii iiaiu ne dek ha aur sirna,
UB ki khabar tunihon dete bain [ ta ki
tata bhi hantari sath sharakat rakho;
aur lamari aharikat Bap ku sfttk, aur
as ke Bote Yisu7 Masih ke sath bal.
4 Aur ham yib bitoti tumben iu
Waste likbte hairj, ki tumbari kbuahi
puri hujawe.
5 Aur wuh khabar jo ham ne uu 80
Buai, aur phir'tunihon deto haig, so
yihihai, ki Kbuda mir hai, aur iimiiiiji
lariki mm bbi naluri.
^ Ajsu bam kabag, ki ham ua ke
satu sharakat rakhte bata. .uir lariki
309
men chalte Imiii, ta jhuih bolte, :
tach par 'amal uahin karte ;
7 Bar agar bani nur riiuri chalcn, j_
tarah wuh niir men hai, to Jiam ek
diiare ku a&tb aharakal rakkte kain,
aur us ke Betc Yisu* Masih ka tahu
ham kosareguuab no pak karta hai.
8 Agar kahtui, ki ham bc-gunah
bain, to hnm apne ta.in Jareb dete iiaiu,
aur saebai hain meu uahin.
9 Agarham apu gtiniihoii ii \qtix
karen, to wuh hauiare gumilmij ke
mu'af kanie, aur hameg diiri nirasti
se pak karue men watadac aur rast hai.
10 Agar bam kaheti, ki haru ne
guiiah naluri kiy:i, lu huni use jhutalte
bain, aur ua ka kalam ham men oabirj
II BA'B.
Al mere baohcho, main ye bitct
tumhen likhta hun,"ta ki tui*
guuali na karo. Aur agar koi gunai
kare, to Yiatj' Masih, jo Badiq hai, Bap
kt j.ni.; Lamari sliafi' hai;
Uaaq ko m&m*e, I YU'HANNA', II
2 Aur wuh h&mire guriahmj kd ka-
lira hni ; par faqat hamdre oundhoa kd
nahin, bklkl tamani dunya ke gunahon
k* tabl
3 Agar ham ub ke hukmon ko hifz
karen, to bam is m jinte hain ki ham
ne us ko jilid.
4 W uh jo kahta hni, ki Main use
jdnts hun, aur u» ko hukmon ko hifz
nahin karta, so jhtitkd !iai, aur uachdi
us men nahin.
o Par wuh jo us ke kalam par 'amal
kare,yaqimuius men K huddki muhab-
bat kdmil hai : liau» ia hi se jdute Lain
ki ham us men hain.
fi Wuh jo kali fa hai, ki main us men
bastd hdn, cbahiye ki jaisd wuh chalta
hai, waisd hi tip cbale.
7 Ai bhdio, main tumhen kol nayd
hukiti nabin likhta, magar purand
bukm, jo tum ko shuru' se mil».
Purdnd hukm wuh kalam hai, jo tum
ne shuru' se Mina hai.
8 Pliir ek nayd hukm tumhen likh-
ta hiin, jo us men aur tum men sach
hai: kyunki tariki «uzar gayi, aur
liaqiqi niir tib chaiiiakta bai.
y Wuh jo kahti hai, ki main rosh-
ni men hun, aur apne bhdi se dush-
mani rakhta hai, ah tak tariki men hai.
10 Wuh jo apne bhdi bo muhabbat
rakhta hai, ujale men ralita hai, aur ua
men thokar kd bd'ia nahin hai.
11 Par jo apne bhdi se dushraan!
rakhta, tariki men hai, aur tariki meti
elialtd hai, aur nahin janta ki kiuhar
chala jati hai ; kyunki tariki ne us ki
ankben andhi kar di hain.
12 Ai bachcho, main tumhen likhtd
hdn; kyunki tumbdre gunah na ke
nara ee mu'df hue.
13 Aidbd, uiain tumhen lifcht&htin,
k viinki uae, jo ahuru' se tha, tum ne
jdna. Ai jawdoo, main tumben likhta
hun, kyunki tum us suarir par gdlib
hue ho. Ai larko, main tumben likh-
ti hun, kyiinki tum ne Bap ko jdnd
hai.
310
ncu-ktiqq ko (ri/;ie,
14 Ai dbd, main no tumben likha
hai, kytirjki jo sburti' se thd, tum ne
use jdnd. Al jawdno, main ne tnmhen
likha hai, kyunki tum mazbiit ho,
aur Kbutla kd kalam tum men bastd
hai, aur tum uh sliarir par galib hue
ho.
15 Dunya ki muhabbat na rakho,
aur na un chi/.on ki jo dunya men
hain. Jo koi d'unyd ki muhabbat
rakhtd hai, us men Bap ki muhabbat
nahin.
Iri Kyiinki har ek chis, jo dunyd
men hai, ya'ne jism ki shahwat, aur
ankhun ki buri khwdhish, aur zindagi
ka jhuthi fnkbr, Bap so nahin, par
dunyd se hai.
17 Aur dunyd guzar jdti hai, aur
ki shah-wat bhi ; lekin jo Khuda ki
marzi par chaltd, wuh abad tak rahta
18 Ai bachcho, yih akhiri zamana
hai: aur jaisd tum ne suna hai, ki
ih ka nmkhalii' dtd hai, bo ab hi
bahut se Masih ke nmkhalii' hue hain;
is se ham jdnto hain ki yih akhiri za-
mana, hai.
19 We ham men se nikle, magar
ham men sa na the : kyunki agar we
ham men se hoto, to bamdre sdth
rahte; par wc nikle, td ki zahir howeij
ki we sab ham men se nahin hain..
20 Aur tum ne TTs Muqaddas sc
masuh paya, aur sab kuchh jdnt« ho.
21 Main nc tum ko na ia wdate
likha, ki rum sach ko nahin jdnte,
par is liye ki tum use jdnto ho, aur
yih, ki koi jbuth sach men se nahin
hai
22 Kann jhiUha hai, magar wuh jo
inkdr kartd hai ki Yisu' wuh Masih
nahin? JoBap aur Betokd inkdr karta
hai, wuhi Masih kd mukhdlif bai.
23 Jo koi Bete kd inkar kartd hai,
ao Bdp se us ko wasta nahin hai ; par
wuh jo Bete kd iqrir karta hai, Bdp se
bhi wuh wasta rakhtd hai.
24 Isi wdstejotuuinc shuru'se suna
UnasiJiat. I YU'HANNA', III. Khudakl muhabbat Hbahat.
hai, wnlri tum men baso. Agar wuh.jgunah naliin karta ; jo koi gunah
'k'kliil, aur u:i
BAp'jatd
7 Ai bachcho, tumben, koi fareb
ham detie na pawu; jo koi rastbAzl karta
kiya, ya'ue, hamesba ki ziudagi'hai, so rastbaz hai, jaisa wub rastbaz
jotuvn ne kIiuiu* n sumi hai, tum men | karta hai, ua ne uae 11.1
rahe, to tum bhi Bete inen aur Bap jana.
UU bhi rahoge.
2;) Aur yihi wa'da hai, jous r
26 Main ne ya b&ten tum ko un ki
babat jt> tumheg fareb dete hain likfairj.
27 Jo timah tumne ussepaya tuai
men. bahal rahta hai, aur tum ia h
muhtaj nahinkikoi tumben sikhawo;
baiki jaisa wuh masah. turnhen sah
batal wikhata hai, aur sauh hai, aur
jhiith nahin, aur jaiaa us ne tumben
si k baya, waisc tum us men qaim
mbagf .
28 Aur ab, ai bachcho, tum
raho, ta ki jab wuh zahir howe, to ham
l)c-bak bon, aur us ke atc waqt ua ke
age se aharm khake na usaren.
20 Agar jante ho ki wuh rastbaz
hai, to jante ho ki bar ek shakhs, jo
rastbazi karta hai, us se paiua bini
hai.
III BA'B.
DEKHO, kaisi mubabbat Bip ne
haru M ki, ki ham Khuda ke
farzand kailawenl ia waste duuya ham
ko nahin janti, ki us ne us ko nahin
jan£.
2 Piyaro.ab ham Khuda kefarzand
hain; aur hanoz zahir nahin hda ki
ham ky;i kuchh bogge ! par ham jautu
hain, ki jab wuh zahir hoga, ham to ua
ki manind honge; kyiinki ham uae
jaisa ki wuh hai wai*a dekhenge,
3 Aur jo koi us ho yih uuimed rakh-
ta bai, wuh apne ta,in, jaiaa wuh pak
hai, waisa hi pak karta liai.
4 liar ek jo gunab karta hai, bo
khilaf i ahar'a karta hai; kyunki
gunah khilaf i shar'a hai.
5 Aur tum yih jante ho ki wuh
'/ahir In'ia, ta ki hamare gunahon ko
utha le jawe; aur ub men gunah na-
Lti.
ti Har ek jo ub men a
311
8 Jo koi gunah karta Uai, so Shai-
tAn ka hai ; ki Shaitan shuru' se gunah
karta hai. Khuda ka Beta- ia liye za-
hir kiya gaya, ki Sliaitin ke kamon
k o nest karc.
0 Har ek jo Khuda «e paida hti«,
gunah nahin karta hai ; kyiinki OH
ka tukhm ua men rahta bai ; aur wuh
gunah kar nahin sakta, kyiinki Khu-
da se paida hda hai.
10 Isi so Khuda ke farzand aur
Shaitiu ke farzand zahir hain; jo koi
rastbazi nahin karta, aur wu!i jo apne
bhai se muhabbat nahin rakhta, Khu-
da ka nah iri.
11 Kyunki wuh paigam jo hara ne
shuru' se Buna, yihi hai ki ham ek
dusre se muhabhat rakhen. „
12 Qain ke manind nahin, jo ua
sbnrir ki tha, aur apne bhai ko qatl
kiya. Aur ub ne kyun uae qatl kiya?
Ia waste ki us ke kara bure the, par
us ke bhai ke kam riai.
19 Ai mero bhaio, agar dunyfi, tum
dufihmani kar«, ta'ajjub na karo.
14 Ham to jante hain ki ham maut
ae guzarke zindatd meri ao, kyiinki
ham bbaion ae muhabbat rakhto hain.
Jo apne bhai ae muhabhat nahin rakh-
ta, ao maut men rahta hai.
15 Har ek jo apne hliai se dushmani
rakhta hai, klirini hai: aur tum jante
ho ki koi ktuini hayat i abadi ko na-
hin rakhla, ki us tnen qaim rahe.
16 Ilam ne ia so muhabbat ko jani,
ki us ne hamare waatu ajini jiin de di ;
aur lazim hai ki ham bhi bhaion ke
a-sto apni jan dewen.
17 Par jia kisi pas dunyd ka mal
bo, aur wuh apne bhai ko muhtaj
mbta hai,'dtikhe, aur apne ta,in rahiu se Hz
Birad'i)
muhabhU I YrilANN.V, IV
rakhne ki
rakhe, to Khudd ki umbabbat ua meg
kyunkar qaim rahtf hai ?
18 Ai nicro baeheho, cbihiye ki
ham kiiliiin aur zubdu hb nahin, baiki
karo aur Baehai w ntulialiliat rakhey.
1!) Aur i* ae ii.iin iiLiiii- Uh i n ki
ii:iiii satradi ke liam, aur ua ke dge
apne dilari ko tnskin derjge.
30 Kyunki agar hanidvd di! hauien
ilzdm de.to Khuda hamdrc dil au bara
hai, aur nb kuclih jdtita liai.
21 Ai piyaro, agar hamdrd dil ham-
en ilzdra ua de, tu kain Kiiudi ke
hciEt'ir Didor rahte hain. ;
'22 Aur jo kuchh bam indngte, ua
se pdte hain ; kyunki laun us ke fauk-
inon ko hifz karte, aur 30 kuckh uae
khush ata baja latc hai».
28 Aur ua ka liukm yih hai, ki
Ham ua ke Betc Yiad' Masih ke nara
pol iu.iin Idwen, aur jaiai ua ue hara
ku hukm diyd, ham 6paj BMfl mu-
babbat ra klien.
24 Aur jo ub ke huknios ko bifz
kartd hai, yih us men, aur wuh. is men
rakld hai. Aur ua se, ya'ne, Kuli ae,
jo usne hameri di hai, baui jdnte hain
ki wuh ham men rrihtd hai.
1\' BA'B.
A I piyaro, tum bar ok ruh ko yaqin
ua karo, baiki ruhon ko azmao
ki we Khuda ki taraf ae nuin, ki ua-
hin. : kyunki bahut ae jlnitlie paigam-
bar dunyd men nikal de hain.
2 Isi se tura Khuda ki Bah ko pah-
ch&nOj ki Uar ek nih jo iqtar karti
Hai, ki Yiad' Masih jism 1 ui-ri hoke iya
bai, wuh Khuda ki taraf ae hai :
'6 Aur bar ek nih jo iqrar nahin
karti, ki Yisii' Maaiii jisrn mag ay;i,
Klnuiii ki taraf se nahin. : yibi Masih
ki mukimlif bal, jib ki khabar fcura ae
suni, kl dti hai ; aur wuh ab duuya
men a chuki.
4 Ai bachcho, tura to Khuda ae lio.
aur un pai galib iiue lio"; kyunki jo;bat ko jo ham ae hai j a mi, aur
tuni men hai, ao us se jo duuya moii t'atiqad kiya. Khudd muhabbat hai
5 Wo dnnyi ke hain: ia waste
dunyd ki boke hain, aur dunyd un ki
«unti hai.
(i Ham Khudd so hain: jo Khudd
ko lahchantd hai, haraari suuta hai :
jo Khudd mo nahin, ham&ri nahin
suntd hai. Isi ae hain sachdi ki nih
aur gumrdhi ki nih ki pahebau lutu
ba'm.
7 Ai piyaro, do, ham ek dusre se
muhabbat rnkbutj ; kyunki muliahlwit
Khudd ae hai ; aur liar ek jo muhab-
bat rakhti liai, n Khud& ae paidd. h6d
bai, aur Khudd ko pahchdiita hai,
8 Jis raon muhabbat nahin, ho Khu-
dd ko nahin jant-a; kyunki Khudd
.uha.bbat hai.
'.) Kbuda ki muhabbat, jo ham se
hai, ia ae zdhir bui, ki Khudd ne aptie
klauto Bete ko dunya men bhejd, td
ki ham ub ke gabah se ziudagi pawen.
10 Muhabbat ia men naliin, ki bani
ne Khuda eo muhabbat raklii, baiki
is men hai, ki ub ue ham ae muhabbat
rakhi, aur apuo Be$fl ko bhojd, ki ha-
mdre gundbun ka kafdra howe.
11 Ai piyaro, jali ki Khuda ne bara
ae aisi muhabbat rakhi, to lazim hai
ki ham LU i ek diisre se muhabbat va-
khen.
12 Kiai ue Khuda ko kabht nahin
dekhd. Agnr hara ek diisre ae mu-
habbat rakheii, to Khudd bam meu
rahtti hai, aur ua ki muhabbat bam
men kamil Iuii.
ia Ham iai se jante hain*ki ham
us men rahte hain, aur wuh bam men
ki ua ne apu i ltuh men se haraen diyd.
14 Aur ham ne dekhd bai aur ga-
wdhi dete hain ki Bdp 110 Bete ko
bhejd, iri dunyd~kd Bachinewald bo.
15 Jo koi iqrdr karo, ki Yiad' Khu-
da ka Beld hai, Khuda ua men, aur
Wuh Kbuu'i men, rahtd hai.
1G Aur ham ne Khuda ki inuliab-
par
bai, bar* hai
'312
I aur wuh jo muhabbat i
liihla hai,
dnkira nasihat. I YU'HANNA', V, Du'd mangut ki babat.
Khuda men rahti hai, aur Khuda usl 6 Yih wuM hai j» )<aui aur lahti so
mcn. aya, ya'ue, Yisii' Masih, Jo M !aq*t
17 Is se muhabbat ham men krimillparii men, baiki pani aur lahii men
hoti hai, ki ham 'adiilat ke diu nidarjlioke aya: aur Ruh wuh liai, jo gawahi
raherj ; kyntiki jnina wuh hai, wa&ae lii deti hai ; kyunki ttiih bar-haqq hai.
ham is dunya men hain. 7 Ki tin hain, jo [fisinau pir gawahi
18 Muhabbat men dahshat nahin, dete hain, Bap, aur Kalam, aur Kuli i
baiki kamil muhabbat dahshat ku Quds: aur ye tiuon ek hain.
likal deti hai ; kyiinki dahshat
'azab hai. Wuh jo darta hai, muhab-
bat inen kamil nahin Inia.
19 Ham uh Be muhabbat takhta
hain, 'k liye ki pahite ub ne ham se
niufiabbat rakhi.
20 Agar koi kahe, ki Main Kbuda
se muhabbat rakhta hun, aur apnc
bhai se dushmani rakhe, to jhutha hai ;
kyunki a<;ar wuh apnc buai sc, jis ko
us ne dokha, muhabbat nahin, rakhta
hai, to Khudfi se, jis ko us nc nahin
dekha, kyiinkar muhabbat rakh sakta
hai ? %
21 Aur ham ne us se yih hiikni
paya liai, ki Jo koi Khuda se muhab-
bat rakhta hai, so a'pne bhai se bhi
muhahbat rakhe.
V BAU.
HAR ek jo Iman lata hai ki Yisii*
wulii Masih hai, so Khuda
paida hua hai; aur jo koi walid se
imihabliat rakhta hai, wuh us se bhi
jti us su jiaid&hua hai muhabbat rakh-
ta hai.
2 Jab ham Khuda se muhabbat
rakhte hain, aur us ke hukmoo ku
hilz karle hain, to ia se jante hain ki
kara Khuda ke farzandon. se bhi mo-
habbat rakhte huin.
3 Kyiinki Khuda ki muhabbat yih
hai, ki ham us ke hukun.ii | u 'amal
karen : aur us ke hukm bhiiri nahin.
4 Jo ki Khuda se paida hua hai
dunya par galib hota hai: aur wuh
galba, jis se bara dunya par galib aU>
Eiaiij, hamara iman hai.
6 Katin hai jo dunya par ;j,ilih bai.
magar wuhi Jo iman fata hai ki Tisu'
Khuda ki Beta hai?
313
8 Aur tin hain, jo zainui pai] ga-
■ahi dete hain, Ituh, aur pani, aur
iahii: aur ye tinon ek par rmittaiitj
hain.
9 Agar ham admion ki gawahi qa-
bul kareii, to Khuda ki gawati i us aa
hari hai; kytiiiki Khuda ki gawahi
yihi hai, jo us uo apue Bete ke haqq
mcn di hai.
10 Jo ki Khuda ke Bete par iman
lata hai, gawahi ap mcn rakhta hai:
jo Kbuda par iman nahin lata, us ne
us ko jhutha kiya : kyunki us ne us
gawahi ko, jo Kbuda ne apne Bete ke
haqq men di hai, yaqhi nahin kiya.
11 Aur wuh gawahi yih hai, ki
Khuda ne hamen iiamesha ki /imhi^i
bakhhhi, aur ki yih zindagi us ke Bete
men hai.
12 Jis ke sath Beta hai, us ke sath
zindagi hai ■ jis ke sath Khuda ka
Beta nahin, us ke sath rfnifagt naliin.
13 Main ne tuni ko, jo Khuda ke
Bete ke nam par iman Jae ho, yih
baterj likhin; ta ki jano ki hauiesha
ki zindagi tumhare Bye hai, iur
Khuda ke. Bet.e ke nam par iroau lao.
14 Aur haiuara i'atkjad jo us ki
baliat hai so yilti hai, k i agar bam us
ki marzi ke muwaliu kuchh niAngorj,
wuh hantari sunla hai :
15 Aur agar bam jante hain ki jo
kuchh ham us se mangte hain, wuh
us ki babat hamari stmta hai, to ham
jante ki jo kuchh ham ne us se mftnga
tlii, so bam pitfl hain.
Ki Agar koi apne lihai ko ek gunah
karle dekhe, jo maut tak nahiii pabun-
chAia, to wuh mangc, aur use zindagi
bakhslii jiegl; yih un ko haqq men
'It&toa kd 11 YU'HANNA'.
lini, jo :iis:i. gunali nahin karte jo
tak pahuuchftti ho. Aisii gumih hai,
jo maut, tak pahunchata hai; main
nahin kahta ki wuh us ki bdbat
iliiiiiaa kare.
17 Har ek nd-rdsti guuah hai : par
aisd gunah hai jo maut tak nahio
pahuiich&UL
18 Ham jante hain ki har «k jo
Khuda se paida bila bal gunah nahin
karta; baiki wuh jo Khuda se paidd
hiia hai, apni bifazal karta hai, aur
wuh iharir un ko nabhi chhiita.
19 Ham jdnto hain ki ham Khuda
se hain, aur ki «Ari dunyd burai inen
pari rahti hai.
20 Par yih bhi jaute hain ki Khu-
da k i lietd dyd, aur hai nun yih
samajh baklishi ki us ko jo haqq hal
jancn; so ham ua men jo ha<p| hai
rnlitu hain, ya' m.', Tisil' Masih men, jo
ua ka Beta hai. Khuda e bariiaqq,
aur Lamesha ki zindagi yih hai.
21 Ai mero bacheho, tum buton, ee
ap ko bachae rakho. A'min.
YUHANNA
KA' DU'SEA' KHATT.
I S buzurg ki taraf ae barguzide bil>i
ko aur us ke BlHandog ko, jinhen
main sachai se piydr karta hun ; (ma-
ta-[* t main hi nahin, baiki sab jinhon
m sachai ko jdnd hai ;)
2 Us eachai ko sabab se jo ham
nn-n rahti hai, aur hanilre sdth
hnmeaha rahogi.
3 Faal, aur rahm, aur saldmati,
Dap Khuda, aur Bdp ke Hcto Khuria-
wand Yisd' Mnsih ki taraf se hamarc
sath saohat aur muhabbat se rahenge.
4 Main bahut khush hud ki main
no terc farBandon men so kai ek ko us
hukm ke mutdbiq jo ham ko Bdp ao
iijla, aaehiii so challe paya.
6 Aur ab, ai bibi, main tujh ko koi
nayA hukm nahin, baiki wuhi jo ham
Mmni' se takhta Turin, likhkar tujh sc
'ai'7, karta hiin, ki Ham ek diisre se
muhabbat raklun,
6 Aur muhabbat. yihi hai, ki ham
us ko hukmon par ckaleu. Yih wuhi
hukm hai, jaina tum oe shurii" se auud
hai, ki tum us par chalo.
314
7 Kyunki bahut se dagaban dunya
men ghus de hain, jo iqrar nahin karre
ki Yisii' Masih (foni men dyd. Daga-
ba/. aur Masih kd mukhdlif yihi hai.
S A'p khabarddr raho, td ki jo kain
hain M kiye hain, so lumen, kho na
den, baiki pura budJa pdwen.
i) Jo koi 'udul karta hai, aur Masih
ki ta'lim men nahin rahti, Khuda us kd
nahin. Jo Masih ki ta'Lim men rahtd
hai, Bdp bhi aur BetA hlif us ke hain.
10 Agar koi mmhdre pas Awe, aur
yih ta'lfm na ldwe, to usc ghar men
ace na do, aur uso salim na fcaro :
11 Kyunki jo koi use salam kartd
hai, us ko buro kdmon men sharik
hoLi hai.
Vi Mujho bahut si biten fumhen
likhni hai; par main ne na ehdhd ki
kagaz aur siydhi sc liklu'm: lekin
ummedwdr hiin ki tum ptit dun, aur
n'ibaru kahiin, td ki kuuari khushi
karuil lio.
13 Teri barguzide batin ke larke
tujho Biildni kahte hain. A'min.
YU'HANNA KA' TI'SRA KHATT.
I S buzurg ki taraf se piydre Gaius
ko, jis ko main sachai uien piyii
kartd bi'in.
'l Ai piydre, main yih du'i nidngtd
hun ki jin tarah teri jin khauiyat ko
sath hai, so tii eab bdton men khairi-
yat ko salh aur taudurunt rahe.
3 Kyiiiiki jab bhaion ne ilkar teri
sachai par gawahi di, jaisd ki tii sachai
men chalta hai, to main iiihiiyat khu.sh
boa.
i Mere liye is eo ban koi khuahi
nahin, ki main sumiri ki mere furzatid
sachai men chalte hain.
5 Ai piyare, jo kuchh tu bhaion
aur musafiron «e kartd bai, so diydnat
se kartd bai ;
6 Jinhon ne kaliaiye Ije age teri
muhabbat par gawahi di. A#ar tu
unhen us tarah par, jo Khudi ke
bandan ko laiq hai, age le chale, to
achchlia karega;
7 Kyunki wc us ko nim ke wiski
niklo, aur gair-qaumon se kuchh
nahin liya,
8 Is liye lazim hai, ki bam aison ko
qabiil karen, t» ki haru sachai mc-Q un
ke liaui- khidmat howen.
9 Mairj ne kalisiyo ko kuchh likhi
hal ; Tiiagur DiutrafeB, jo uu men
auwal darja chdhla hai, hamen uabiil
nahin karta.
10 So jab main diinga, to main Ufi
ke k&mon ko, jo wuh karta hai, yad
karungii, ki hamare haqq men buri
baten bakta bai : aur is par bhi qand'i
na karko bhaion -ko ap ciabnl Dahi]
karta, aur un ko jo tpibul k iya chaht
hain, rokta hai, aur kalisiyo se nikal
deta.
11 Ai piyare, budi kiipairau ruat ho,
baiki neki ka. Wuh jo neki karti hai,
Khudi ki hai; magar j" badi karta
hai, uh ue Khudd ko nahin dokbd.
12 DemetriuH ke haqq men eab ne,
aur sachai ne bhi, khuu gawahi di hai :
hain bhi gawahi dute hain, aur tum
jinte ho ki hamriri gawahi^sach hai.
13 Mujhe to hahut kuchh likhni
tbi; par main ne na ehaha ki siyahi
aur i |iU:<; n se tero liye likhun :
14 Magar uminedwir h/in ki jald
tujhe dekhiin, tab liam tabani kah
auri lenge. Teri salamati howe. Dost
tujhe «alim kahte hain. Tu dostci
ko u;im ba mim salam kab.
m
'a t
r-
.te
.11
KA'
YAHU'DA'H
KHATT I 'AMM.
YAHU'DA'H ki larai' n, Jo Yiail'
Masih ki bauila aur Ya'qub kd
bbal hni, un ko jo Uap Khuda men
muqaddas hiie, aur YisiV Masih men
mahfuz aur buld-j gaye hain :
315
- Rahm tum par ho, aur salamati
aur muhabbat bhi barliai jdwen.
3 Ai piyaro, jis waqt main us najjit
ki bibat, jo sab ke liye hai, tum ko
likbnemcnnibdyat kosliish kartd th:
Tm&n wi YAHU'DA'IT.
to main ne zardr jAnA ki tundii-n
Jikhke nasihat karun, ki tum ua iman
ke waste, jo ek lnkht muqaddason ko
n rupa ^uyn, jari-lishaui karo.
•I Kyi'mki ba'ze shakhs chupke ae
"Injil', jo ag« «j «jati i m zanidne men. is
sazd ke hukm ke wdste likhe gaye
ihe; we be-d(n hain, aur bauiarc
Khudd ke fazl ko sbaliwat-purasli mu
badai karte hain, aur Khuda ka, jo
alii'li malik bal, aur hamArc Khudd-
wand Yiaii Masih ka iiiksu- karie hain,.
6 Pas mahj ehdhtA hdn ki tumben
wuh bAt, ji&e tum ek lakht jAn chuke
bo, yad dilddn, ki Khudawand ne
qaum ko zamin i Misr se bachAyA,
pbir unlicn jo iitiAn na Uie halali ki\:i.
6 Aur un firishton ko, jo apnl agli
hdlatmen na rahe, baiki apne khaas
maqAni ko chiior diyA, uh ne saza ki
nlmdt zaujiron so [Ariki k<- andar roz i
'aziin ki 'adalat tak jakarke rakliA.
7 Isi tarali Sadi'nu anr'Amurali aur
un ke ird gird ke shahr, jinhon ne uu
ki mdriind Kina kiy.i, aur jism i liar A m
kd pichhA kiyA, harnesha ki Ag ke
'azab men gfriftaf hoka 'ibrat ke liye
nauidne bani.1 ralite hain.
8 Isi tarah ye khwAb-dekhnewAle
bhi jism koriApdk k arti:, aur buktimat
ko nachiz jAntu, aur jalil-ul-qadron ki
bAbat bura kahto hain.
9 JaVj MikAel ne, jo firitbtog nifn
'asini hai, SbaitAn se takrAr kurku
MusA ki ]Asb ki hAbat bah» ki, tab ua
ne jur,al ua ki ki la'n ta'n karke use
il/.Am do, baiki kahA, ki Khudawand
tujhe malamat kare.
10 Lekiu yo, jin chizon ko nahin
jAntu, uu par ta'tM kartu hain; aur jin ko
be-'acil janwur&n ki tarah ba zat jdnte
haiii, un meriap kokhardb karte hain.
11 Afsos un pat !' kyi'iyki ye Qain
ki rdh par ehale, aur Bala'dm ki ^um-
riilu aum rnazddri ke liye bah gaye,
aur Qurah ki si mukhdlaiat mefl bauk
hde.
12 Ye tnmhAn aK&abbat ki ziyA-
316
qaim rahnti cli<ihiyc
foton men dubi hdi chatinen hain ;
wetambaresath khatewaqtbe-dbarak
apnd pet bhar lete hain: we klmsbk
bada] hain, jiuhcn hawden har taraf
urd le jatin : we murjhAo hdu daraklit
hain, jin kd pliat naluri, do bir niare,
aur ukliare gaye hain:
13 We sainundar ki tund lahreri
hain, jo apnl bc-ahanni kd phen
£henkte hain : bhataknewdle sitdre
ain, jin ke liye tiiriki ki aiyahi haine-
sha ko dhari hai.
14 Baiki Hantik ne, jo A'dam ki
RAtwiri pusht tlia, uu ki bdbat pe&hin-
goi karke yih kaliA, Dokh, Khudawand
apne lAkhon rnuqaddason ke aath dta
hai,
15 TA ki Kibhon ki 'addlat karc,
aur sub l>u-dinor ko un ki be-dini ke
eab kamon par, jo unhon ne lie-dini we
kiye, aur sarf sakht baton par, jo be-
din gunahgAron ne us ki mukhdlaiat
iiicn kahi hain, ilzAru de.
lb' Ye kurkurAnewalc aur Bhikwa-
karnewAle hain, jo apui buri khwah-
ishon ke muwafiq chaltc, aur apue
uiunh se barA bol bolte, aur naPa ku
liye logon ki khuahAuiad karte hain.
17 Lekiu, ai piyAro, tum In baton
ko yftd rakhc, jo haiuare KlmdAwand
Visu' Masih ke rasiilon DO agu kahiij ;
18 Ki iinhon ne tumben, kahd, ki
A'khiri zamdue men fhattllMaroewile
honge, Jo apui be-dini ki buri khwali-
ishon par chalenge.
19 Ye we h i hain jo apne ta.in
alag karte hain ; ft nafeinl log hain,
aur Eun un mea nahin.
20 Pat, ai piyAro, tum apne pSk-
tarin inidn kA giuir bandkar, Huh i
PAk se du'A m&ngte hde,
"1 Apne tn,in KhudA ki muhabbat
men nmhfdz rakho, aur bamesha ki
/iudagi ko liye hamdre Khudawam:
Vi;-ii'i' HasCfa ki rahmat ke muntazir
raho.
22 Aur imtiydz karke ba'zon par
rahm karo :
Masih Hpkir dmi, MUKA'SHAFAT, I. qudrat o hishnaf be sith,
23 Aur bn'feog ko ilar Innttfa agl krt.mil klmshi se tumben be-'aib kJiara
raen sc uikalkc baohiio: aur poahak kar sakta hai,
ae bhi jo jism sc dagi bui 'adawat[
rakko.
24 Abtifi ke liyo, jo tum ko girnc hasbmat, qudrat «ur Ikhtiyi
se bacha sakti, aur apno jahil ke h uzur |ahad tak howeii, A'raiu.
25 Jo Khuda e wahid, hakim, a
ihamara Bacbanewala hai, jalai aur
bnsliiiiat,_ niiiirsit. nur iklitivnr. nli ««
YU'HANNA' FAQIH KE
MUKASHAFA'T KI' KITAB.
1 BA'B.
Y ISU" Masih ki. mukadiafa, jo
Khuda ne use diya, ta ki apno
baodon ko ne batin, jin ka jald homi
zarur hai, dikbawe : aur us nc apno
firishte ko bhejkar us ke wasile se apue
bande Yuhaiini* par stahir kiyii.:
2 Jia iio Khuda ke kalam aur Yisri'
Masih ki gawahi par, jo kuchb us ne
dekha, jawabi di.
3 Mubarak wuh jo is nubiiwat. ki
baten, parht» hai, aur we jo suntehain,
aur ju kuchb isumu liklia hai use hifz
karro hain; kyiliiki waqt uazdik hai,
4 "VTU'HAKNA'un eat kallsiyaon,
X ko jo Afia men hain : Pasi
aur aalimatS tumben ho, us ki taraf
se jo hai, aur jo tha, aur jo anewali
hai j aur un sat Kubon ki taraf se jo
us ke takht, ko, huzur hain ;
5 Aur YisiV Masih ki taraf se, jo
sacbeha' gawai.], aur un men jo niarku
ji iithe palautha, aur dunyi ke bad-
shabon ka sultan hai. Usi ko jis ne
haru ko piyar kiya, aur apno lahii w-
harn ko hairiar* ^utialion si? dlio dala,
K Aur haru ko badshih aur kabin
Khuda aur apno Bap ke banaya; jalai
aur qudrat abad tak usi ko hai.
A'llliD.
7 Dekho, wub badalou ke sita ata
317
hai ; aur hnr ek aiikh u s ko drkho^. .
aur wo bhi,jinln>n no usechheda: aur
zamin ke aare firqe ua ke liyo chhati
pitonpc. U±n, Amin.
8 Khudawatid yiin farmata hai, ki
Main All'rt. aur Oinaga,auwal aur akhir,
jo hai, aur jo tha, aur jo Anewala hai,
Qadir i mutlaq hi'tn.
9 Main Yuhanna, jo tumhara bhai,
aur YWP Masih ko iiukh, aur iig ki
badshahat aur sabr men bhi tuinhira
tbarik ln'iu, Khudi ko kalam aur Y isu-
Masih ki gawaiii ko wasto ub tipu
liirn lini, jo l'atiuus kahlata.
10 Main Khudawand ke din Riih
men shamil ho gaya, aur main ne tur-
M ki si ek bari awaz apno pichhe
suni ;
U Jo kahti thi, ki Main Alfa aur
Oiua»a, auwal o akhir hiin; mu, Jo
kuchh ti dekhi.a hai, kilah n
aur mi wit kabaiyaog ke
men, ya'ne, Afusus, aur Smurna, (
Pargamus, aur Thuatira, aur Sardis,
aur Filadalfid, aurLAudiqia inen. hain,
bhej.
12 Aur main pbira, ta ki us iwaz
k'iji. iiiujlie kahti hai dckhinj. Aur
phirkur siotie ke eit cliird^drin defchc;
13 Aur un Kit cliint^diiiinn ke hich
ok sliakha Ibu i A'daui ua dekha, jo
A/aans, Smurnd, MUKA'SHAFAT II. Panjarmu.
jiima pahino hiie, aureonekaainaband hai, ki tiine apniagli muh&bbat ehhoi
a par bAndhe h&e tha.
14 Ub ki sir o hdl flitfcd i'in kl
mAnind, biJki barf ki mAnind ujlA;
aur ua ki Artkbcn jaisc Ag kii shu'ala .
15 Aur ua ke pAnw khalis pital ke
se, jo tantir mcg dahkayA hiiA ho ; aur
us kf AwAz baru pAnl ki si thi,
16 Aur ub ke dahne hAth men efit
sitAre the; aurua ke raunhae do-dliAri
tez talwAr nikalti thi ; aur us ka
chihra aisi tha, jaisA Aftib jab hari
tezi sc chamke.
17 Aur jab main ne use dekhA, tab
ub ke pAnwon par murda aa gir para.
Tab us nc apu A dahinA hAth mujh par
rakhA, aur tnujh se kaha, ki Mat dar;
niaiij auwal o akhir hun,
IH Aur zindA hiin: aur main mfiA
tha, aur, dekb, main abad tak zinda
bi'nj, A'min; aur 'alam 1 gaib aur maut
ki kun jian mujh pas hain.
18 Jo tii ne dnkhfi, aur jo chfzen
nabi, aur jo ba'd in ke honewAK hain,
sab likh rakh j
20 Un sAt sitAmn kA, jinhen tu ne
mcm dahine bAth men dekhA, aur sone
ke uil sAt chirAgdAnorj ka bhcd jo hai.
We sAtsitarosAtkalisiyAnii ku Briiriie
hain : aur we aat 'cbirAgdAn jo tii ne
dekhc, sdt kalisiyacn bain.
II BA'B.
APASU6 ki kalisiye ke firisbte ko
yiljilikh; ki Wuh jaapncdahine
lidth men sAt sitare rakhtA, aur aone
ke aat "chir&gdAnon ke darmiyAn
phirtA, ye bAterj kahtA hai ;
2 Ki Mairj tere karn, aur teri ma-
nhaqqat, aur teri sabr, aur yih, ki tu
badon ki bardAsht kar nahirj sak t A,
jaiita"hiin; aur tu ne im ko.jo apne
u,iu rasul kahtc, aur nahin hain,
AzmAya, aur nnherj jhiitha pAyA:
3 Aur tu nc bardaaht ki, aur sabr
rakhtA hai, aur moro nara ke wAste
mihnat ki, aur thak naiiirj gayA :
4 Magar tujh ae mujh? kuchh. gila
318
di.
5 So yad kar ki tft kahdn so frirA
hai, aur taubn kar, aur agle kAm kar ;
nahln to main tujh pas jald AnngA;
aur agar tn tauba na kare, to main
tere cbirAg-dAn ko us ki jagah se diSr
kar durjgA.
6 Par tujh men, yih efe bAt hai, ki
to NfqulAtion ke kamon se 'adAwat
rakhtA hai, jin so main bhi 'adAwat
rakhtA hun.
7 Jin kA Uo hai, aime, ki Ruh
kalisiyaon ko kyA kahti hai ; Main
ua ko jo gAlib hotA hai, zindagi ke
darakht ee, jo KhudA ke firdaus ke
bicb o bich bai, phal kbAnc dilngA.
8 lf Aur SinurnA ki kalisiye ke fi-
rishte ko yun likh ; ki Wuh jo auwal
o Akhir bai, aur mnA thA, aur jiya
hai, yih bateri kahtA hai; ki
Main tere kfcm, aur musibat, aiir
muhtaji ko, (par tii daulatmand hai)
aur un ko la'n ta'n ko bhi, jo Ap ko
Yahiidl kahte, par nahin liairj, baiki
SbaitAn ki jama'at hain, jAutA hurj.
10 Jo aziyaten. tujh par hmifwali
hairj, uu men kisi se khauf na rakh :
dckhoj ShaitAn tum men ae ka( ek ko
qaid men dAlogA, tA ki tum AzmAe
jAo i aur tum das din tak musibat
uthAoge: tii mamc tak i m Andar rah,
tii main zindagi kA taj tujhe dnngA.
11 Jis kA kAn )m, sune, ki Buh
kulifiiyAon ko kya kahti hai : Jo gAlib
hotA hai, diisri maut ao nuqsAn na
uthAwegi
12 U Aur PaittMntU ki kalisiye ke
firishte ko yoo likh ; Wuh jo t«z do-
dbAri talwAr rakhtA hai kahtA hai;
13 Ki Main tere kAm, nur tere
rabneki jagah, jaliAn Sitai) anka tak h t
hai, jAutA lilin : aur tu mere nam ko
tMmbe rahtA hai, aur jin dinog ki
AntipAs mcrA imAndAr gnwdh tumhAre
hii'h, waliAri jahAg ShaitAn rah t A hai,
uiAragayA, un dinon men lilii mujh par
jo iman hai ua kA tu ne inkAr oa kifL
Tliudtira, aur MUKA'SjIAFAT, III. SardUwaltm ho natihat.
14 Lekin mujhe tujh eo kucbh gilai 24 Par tumhen aur Thuitiri ke
hai, ki tere yahan, we hain jo Bnla'Am bAqi logon ko, jitne uh ta'lim ko nahin
ki ta'lim ko mati lote hain, jis ne Ilalaq I miute, aur jinhon ne Skaitan ki gahri
ko sikiAyi, ki bani IsrAel ke age batuii ko, jaisa we kahtc kain, nahin
thokar-kkilanewilA patthar rakhe, ta
ki wo butorj. ki qurbAnSari khAwerj,
aur harAmkari karen.
15 Aur tere y» h Ari also hW hain jo
NiqulAtfon ki ta'lim ko min lute liaiij,
jis se main 'adawat rakhtA nun.
lrj Tauba kar; nahin to, main tujh
pan jald Aiinga, aur main un ke sAth
apne miujli ki talwar se Iariingd.
17 Jis ki kau hai, sune, ki Ruh
kalisiyaon ko kyti kahti hai : Jo galib
hota hai, main use poshida mumi
khdno dtingA, aur main use ck sufed
patthar diigga, aur us patthar par ek
nayi nam liklni hi'ti, jise us ke pane-
wAl? kesiwa koi nahin jdnta.
18 1 Aur ThuAtirA ki kalisive ke
firishte ko ynn likh; ki Khu.la ki
beta, jis ki aokhen Ag ke shu'ala ki
ma'nind hain, aur us ke pAriw kbalis
pital ke se, ye biton kahtA"hiu;
19 Ki main tere a'amal, aur mu-
habbat, aur khidmat, aur iman, aur
sabr, baiki tere kamon ko jAntA hiin,
ki yih pichhle aglon ae ziyada hain.
"0 Par roujh tujuo «e kuchh gila
bai, ki tu ub candi i'zabil ko, jo apne
ta,in nabi ya kahti hai, morc bandon
ko sikhldne aur gumrah karun deta
hai, td ki we haramkari karen, aur
buton par ki qurbAniin khawen.
21 Aur main ne us ko rmihlat di,
ki apni haramkari ae tauba ka re ; par
us ne tauba na ki.
22 Dekb, ki main us kr> ek bi»tar
par dalungA, aur un ko jo us ke aath
zina karic kain uari musfbat men, agar
we apne kamon se tauba ua karen.
23 Aur u.s ke farzamhin ko jin Ro
miriingA; aur hari kalisiyAou ko ma'-
li'nn kogi ki mu m wuhi hun jo dik
aur gurdon ka janchnewAla hai : ai
main tum men se har ek ko us ke
kamon ke arowanq badld diinga,
319
jini, yih kanta huQ, ki
kuchb. l>ojh tutu par na diliinga.
25 Magar jo tum pas hai, uso minta
ralio, jab tak ki main Aiin.
26 Aur wah Jo &iUib kutil, aur tnere
kimon ko akhir tak hifr. kar rakhtA
1 1=1.1 , main use qaumoQ par ikhtiyir
dungi :
27 Aur wuh lohe ke 'asi se un par
hukutnat karega, ki we kumhir ke
bartanon kl minind chaknAcktir ho
jacrjge ; jaise main ne bhi apne BAp se
payi hai.
28 Aur main use subh ki rutini
diingi.
29 Jis kA kAn hai, sune, ki Ruh
kalisiyaim ko kyA kahti hai.
III BA'B.
AUR Sardis ki kalisiye ku (irishte
ko yun likh; ki Wuh jis pas
KbudA ki sat Ruhen aur sAt sitare
hain, yih luiteii kahta hai ; ki Main
tere kain jdnta hun, ki tu ziiula kaii-
lita, par murda hai.
2 JAgtA rah, aur bAqf chizon ko jo
marne par hain mazbui kar; kyuriki
main no tere kauiuri ko Kliuda ku Age
puri nahin pdya.
3 Is wiste yid kar ki tii ne kiB
tarah paya aur sutiA, aur tbiut rakh,
aur tauba kar. Pas agar tu jAgtA na
rahe, to main tujh par c bor ki tarah
charh iurjgd, aur tujh ko hargiz ma'-
lilm na hogA ki kis ghan tujh par
ubarhdiingii.
4 Hardis men bhi tere ka( ek nam
hain, jinhuij nu Kini posbik diiida
nahin ki; aur wesufed poshak pahinke
mere sith sair karenge, ki we is liiq
hain.
5 Jo gilib hotA, use sufed posbik
pahinii jAegf, aur inain us ki ndm
zindagi ke daftar Be na kar.uijga, baiki
Ldudiqidwalon ko
apne Bap aur as ko firiehton ke age us
ke nAm kA i^rdr karungd.
6 Jis kd kia hai, sune, ki Ruh
kalisivdun se kyd kaliti hai.
'i f Aur FilAdalfiA ki kalisiye ke
Brishta ko ydn likh; W uh jo miuiad-
das hai, wuh jo bar-haqq hai, wuli Jo
Datid ki kunji rakhta, wuh jo kholta
hai, aur kol barui nahin kartA, aur
wuh band kartA hai, aur koi nahin
kholta, yih kahtA hai.
8 Ki Main tere kam jdntd lilin ;
dekh, main ne tere age ek khuld dar-
wii/.ii rakha hai, aur koi use liand
tv.uun kur sakti; kyuuki tujh inen
tborA bA zor hai, aur td ne mcre kalam
ko hifz kiyA hai, aur mere ndm ka
inkdr nahin kiya.
9 Dekh, main aisA karung» ki w e
jo Shaitan ki jamA'at ko haiu, aur
ap?ie ta,irj Yahudi kahte, agarchi
nahin haiii, baiki jhdth bolte, dekh,
main" aisa" karungd ki we Akc tere
pimvon par sijda karen, aur janur
ki main rio tujh *c muhabbat rakhi.
10 Ia Hye ki tu ne meri sabr ki bAt
ko hifz kiya hai, main bhi us imtihAn
ki ghari se jo tamani 'alam nicn
zamin ke rahnewAlon ki azniAiBh ke
liye AyA chAhtf hai, teri hifdzdt
karung».
11 Dekh, main jald ati hun : jo
terd hai U» tliam rakh, ki koi tera
tdj na le,
12 Main use, jo gdlib hot.A hai, ap-
ne KhudA ki haikal met) ck uituii
benidagfi w "'"" l'"'1' 1;a!>ni nalmr
aa uikk'gA: aur main apne KhudA kA
afm, ajme KhudA ke sbakr, ya'ne,
navi yaruaalam, ki nAm, jo mere
KhudA ke huzdr se aamdn par kg utar-
t\ Imi, aur apua nayd nAm, ua par
likhtSjjg*.
13 Jis kd kAn hai, sune, ki Mh
kaiisivdon se kya kaliti hai.
14 1 Aur IjdudiqiA ki kaltoyc ke
lirishte ko ydn likh : ki Wuh jo A 'min,
MUKASUAFAT, IV. tuaOtt,
Khudd ki khilqat kA mabdd hai, yiii
bdten kahtA hai ; ki
15~ Main tere kam jAntd hfin, ki td
na thanda, na gar m hai : kash ki tii
thandA.yi garm hota.
16 So is wdste ki td shir-garm, hai,
na thanda na garm, main tujhe radd
karlte apne niunh se nikal phenkne
par hun.
17 Kyunki ta kahtA hai, ki Maiij
daulatniand hnri.aur mAldAr hiii hiirj,
aur kisi chiz ka inuhtdj nahin | aur
nahin jantd ki tii 'aji/,, nur lAchAr,
aur garib, aur andha, aur uaugd hai :
18 Main tujhe y i h salib, detd hun,
ki tii bouA jo dg men tayd gayA mujh
so mol le, td ki daulatmaiid howe ;
aur sufed poshdk, td ki td pehine ho,
aur tere nangepan ki sharrn nAliir na
howe ; aur apni Anklinn men aiijan
laga, tA ki tii dekhne lage.
19 Mainjitnon. ko wyfc karta, un-
hen maldmat aur tamuih karta hun:
is wa.ste nargarm ho, aur tanba kar.
20 Dekh, main darwdze par kharA
hun, aur kliatkhatata hun: agar kui
mori awa/i sune, aur darwaza khole,
ni;iin u pai andar Adnga, aur ua ke
silih khaiingi, aur wuh mere aAth
kbiegd.
21 Jo gAlib hotA hai main use ap-
ne takut par apne sdr.h haithce dun-
gd; chuudnchi main bhi gtMb hda,
aur apne lidp ke sath us ke takht par
baittiA hiiri.
22 Jis kA kan hai, sune, ki Ruh
kalisi ydon se kyii kahti hai.
IV BA13.
Kachchi aur bar-haqq gawa]
seo
BA'T) ub ke jo main ne nigAh ki,
to dekho, ki AsinAn par ek dar-
wAza khull hai; aur pahli awaz ju
umin ne miui narsinge ki si thi, jo
mujh ho boltl thi; us ne kahii, k i
biliar lipar d, aur main tujhe we baten
dikhlAdngd ki is ke ba'd zarur hougi.
J Tali \Minhin main ruh mon Bha-
hai, aur mil ho gaya; phir kyd dekhta hdn,
Sat muhron MUKA'SIIAFAT, V.
ki asnian par ek takht. d hara lisi, aur
BI Ukiri par kui haithd hai.
3 Aur jo us par baithd tli;i, wnh
dekhnc men Btng i yasdiiii aur *aqiq sd
tha : aur ek dhanuk, jo dcklme mru
/Uiiiurrud sd iba, m takht ko gird tha".
4 Aur Qi t-akht ke aspas chaubis.
AUK main ne us ke dahine hath
men, jo takht par baitha tha,
ek kitab dekhi, jo andar aur bahar
likbi hiii, aur sat. uiuhroij ae band ki
2 Aur main ne ek zordwar firishte
takht the.' aui un takhton par mala ko dekhd, ki buland dwdz se yih
ne chauhis buzurg sufod posbak pabine
hue baithc dokhe; aur un ke siron
par sone ke taj the.
o Aurliijlian,aur<?irajpri,aurawazert,
us takht se nikahi thin : aur ag kr
sdt chirag us takht ke dge roshan the;
yo Khudd ki bu Ruhen ham.
G Aur us takht ke dge shishe ka
ek samuudar billaur ki miiiind tha,
aur takht ke bieh o bich aur takht ke
gird-a-'gird char janddr tbe, jo dge
pichhe a n k h o n se bharo tha
7 Aur pabla jandar babar ki md-
nind tha, aur dusra jandar Iwjhhre ki
mdnind, aur tisre jandar kd chihra
madu ka sd tha, aur chautha jandar
itrtc 'uqdb kd ad.
y Aur un cbdr jdnddron men se ek
ek ke chha chba par the : aur un ki
chdron taraf aur andar dnkhen hi
di iklim thin; aur we fardgat nahin
Takhte, rnagar rat din kahte rahte, ki
Quililus, Quddiis, CJuddiis, Khudawand
Khudd, Qadlr i mutlaq, jo tha, aur jo
hai, aur jo dnewdld hai.
9 Aur jab we jdndar US ki, |o takht
par baitha hai, aur abad-ul-dbad zinda
hai, buzurgi aur 'izzat aur shukrguzd-
ri karte hain,
10 Tab we chaubis bnzurg m ke
Harnhne, jo takht par baithd ti.-ii. ;:ir
parta huin, aur ua ko jo abad tak
zinda hai sijda karte hain, aur apne
tdj yih kahte hiie us takht ke dge ddl
ilete hain,
11 Ki Ai Khuddwand, Mi hi jaldl,
o 'iz/at, aur oudrat ke ldiq hai: kyiln-
ki ui hi ne sdri chizen paidd km, alir
we teri hf roarzi se hain, aur raidd
ln'ii hain.
321
manadi karta tha, Kaun is laiq hai
ki is kitdb ko khole, aur us ki muhmi
tore?
'.i Aur kisi ko maqdrlr na hnd, na
dsmdn par, na zamin par, na «amin
ke niche, ki us kitdb ko khole, yd use
daki*
4 Aur main bahu t royit, ki koi is
laiq na Ibahrd, ki kitab ko khole, aur
parbe, yd use dekhe.
5 Tab un buBUrgon men se ek ne
mnjhe kahd, ki Mat ro; dekh wnh
Babar, jo flrqa i Yahfiddh se bai, aur
Dduil ki Asi hai, gdlib liua hal ki us
kitab ko khole, aur us ki saton muhr-
on ko tore.
6 Aur main ne ni^ah ki, aur de-
kho, ki us takht aur chdron jdnddnm
ke darmiydn, aur un huzurgon ke
bich, ek Itarra yiin khard hai, ki goyi
Kabh kiyd gayd hai, jis ke sdt siug,
aur sdt dnklien thin, jo Kliudd ki
,=iton Riihen hain, aur tamdm ni r
zamin par bheji gayi hain.
7 Chunduchi wuh dya, aur us ke
dahine hath se, jo takht par baitha
hai, us kitdb ko livd.
8 Aur jab us ne kitdb li tht, tab
wo cbdr jdndar aur chaubis bnzurg us
Harre ke dge gir pare, aur liar ek ke
hath men barbat aur bakhur se bhare
biio sono ke piydlc the ; ye muqad-
doson ki du'dcn hain.
Aur we ek nayd rdg yih kahte
hiie gdte, ki Tii hi is laiq hai ki is
kitdb ko lewe, aur us ki muhren tore ;
kyi'mki tii «abh hi'ia, aur apne laini
se ham ko har ek firqe aur ahl i mb&n
aur uinmat aur qaum men se, Khuda
| ke wdate mol liya;
Mvhrtni M tornd, MUKA'SHAFAT, VI. Chhuthi muhr M tornA,
10 Aur ham ko hanidrc Khuda kelghord, aur jo us par sawdr tlia tari-ni
liye bddshdh aur kabin bandyd ; aur' hati. iiihii liye thd :
ham zamin par badshahat karengc j 6 Aur main ne ini charon jd.rjdar.nj
H Phir main ne nigdh ki, aurjke bfch nioij se ek awaz yih kulit i
takht, aur un jdndaron aur buzurgon suni. ki Gebui] dinar kd ser bhar, aur
ko' gird-d-gird batmt ~hc fiiiahtog ki \va ilimlr ke tiu ser; par tel aur mai
iwta mol, jin ka Hhiimar ldkh-b.a-ldkh ' ko zarar niat pahunchd.
aur hazdr-hd-hazdr thd ; I 1 Aur jab us ne ohiuitln m'ilir tari,
12 Aur we bari &ivdz se kahte lho, to main nc chaut'ue jandir ko yili
ki Barra jo zabh hiia is laiq hai ki kahte auiia, ki A' aur dekh.
qudrat, aur daulat, nur hikmat o ti-
qat, aur 'izzat o jalai, aur barakut
pdwe.
13 Aur main nc bar ek makhluq
ko, jo deraan par, aur zamin par, aur
zamin ko niche hai, aur un ko jo
umandtf mes bain, aur sari chizon
ko jo un men kain, yih kahte suna, ki
U» ke liye jo takht par haitlul hai,
aur Barre ke liye, harakat, aur 'i/.zat,
aur jalai, aur quwat abad tak hai.
14 Aur charon jandar A'miu bola.
Aur cb.nu.bts btizurgon ne ritkfl use,
jo abad tak ziuda hai, sijda kiya.
VI BA'B.
AUR jab Barre ne un muhrori men
se ek ko tord, tab main ne de-
khd, aur un charon jauddrori men
ck ki awaz badai ke garajne ki mduiud
suni, jo bold, ki A' aur dekh.
2 Aur main ne nazar ki, aur dekho,
ki ek BwjpV ghord, aur uh par ek
sawdr kuman liye thd ; aur ek tdj use
diya gaya : aur wuh i'ath karta hiidt
aur fathmand hone ko, nikla.
3 Aur jab u s ne diiuri mubr turi,
tab main ne dusre jandar ko yih kali-
le suna, ki A' aur dekh.
4 Tab ek dusra surang ghord nikla:
aur us ke sawdr ko yih diya gaji, ki
sitlh ko zamin u chhin le, aur yih ki
Ing ek dusre ko uatl karen. ; aur ck
bari talwar us ko di gayi.
fi Aur jab uh ne tisri mnbr tori,
tab main ne tiure jandar ko yih kahte
■uni, ki A' aur dekh. Pliir main w
nazar ki, aur, dekho, ki ek uiushk
322
8 Phir main ne BUAI ki, aur, de-
kho, ki ek gherd pbike raut; k,i, attr
ok ua par sawdr jis ka ndm Maut hai,
aur 'A'lam i gaib us ko pichlio rawan
Aur unhen zamin ki chautbai
par yih ikhtiydr diyd gayd, ki w«
talwdr, aur bhukh, aur maut, aur za-
in ke darindon ro haldk karun.
9 Jali us ne pAnchwin muhr tori, to
ain ne qurhdiijrdh ke niche un ki
rnhon ko dekhrt, jo Kliudd ke kaldin
aur us gawdhi ke liye, jo uuhon ne di
thi, m a re gaye :
10 Aur unhorj ne buland dw&K n
chilldke kahd, ki Ai Mdlik, pdk aur
baihaqq, t u kab tak 'addlat na karegd,
aur zamin ko nihuewdlon. se hamaro
khi'iu ka lw.Ua na legd?
1 1 Tab un men se har ek ko snfed
pairdlian diya «yi, aur uulien kahd
gayd, ki aur thori muddat tak habr
karerj, jab tak ki un k(! ham-WlWmat
aur un ke bhai.jo un ki tarah maro
jine par the, tauidm hoij.
12 Aur main nc nazar ki ki jab us
ne chhathi muhr tori, aur, dekho, to
bara bhaurjcM! dyd, aur 6uraj bdlon ke
kammal ki nidnind kdld, aur chdud
lahfi sd ho gaya ;
13 Aur aamdn ke sitiire isi tarah
zamin par gir pare, jis tarah anjir ke
darakht se us ke kachclie phal liir
jite i.ain, jab use hari dndbi hildti hai.
11 Aur dsmdu tumdr ki tarah, jab
;ip se lajietd jae, Barak gayd, anr liar ok
pahdr, aur tdpii, apni apu jagab se b3 -
gayd.
15 Aur danya ke bid^Inihon, aur
Muhr kuje h&c MUKA'SHAFA'T, VII. Isrdeti
aiiiimn, nur ma-ldarnn, aur hazArion, I ke firqe se bArah haair par m uli r k:
zorwAlon, aur hnr ek gulAm aur gayi.
H Zabuhm ke firqe sc bArah bazAr
har ek AzAd uc apne ta,in gAron
pahAron ki chuta-non ke darmiyAn
i'hhipaya;
16 Aur pahamu nur chatanon se
yili kahd, ki Ham par gir», aur haru ko
uh ke chihro w, jo takht par baltba
hai, aur Barre ke gazab uc, chhipao !
17 Kyunki us ke qahr kd roz 'azim
a pahunchA; ab k:
hai?
VII BA'B.
AUR ba'd us ke main ue onii ke
chArori konon par i'tiAr firishte
khare deklie, ki zaruin par chArog
hawAon ko thamtfl ttie, (j u howe n
hawA aimin par, ya samundar par, yA
kiai darakht par chale.
L' l'hir main BS ek aur firislite ko
pura b se uthtc dckhA, jis ke pas zinda
KhudA ki muhr liii; aur ua ne im
charon firisbtoti se, jinben yib diyA
gaya tbi ki zamin aur saiuundar ko
zarar pahuuchawen, buland AwAz ae
pukatku r,
■i Kain,, Jali lak ki bam apno
KhudA ke butdoQ ke mathe par uiuhr
na kar len, tuni zamin, aur darya, aur
iarakhton ko, Bftrar na pahunchduA.
4 Aur main ue un kA shnniAr, jia
par muhr ki gayi tbi, suna, ki bani
Israel ke sal) ungon mon .se ek sau
chaaali* bazar par muhr ki gayl.
5 Ynhudah ke firqe se baraii bazar
pai muhr ki gayi. Riibin ke firue ae
bahar hazar par muhr ki gayi. Jadd
ke tirqe se baraii bazar pur muhr ki
gayi.
6 A'shar ke firqo sc bArah bazar
par rnnbr ki gayi. Naftali ke firqti so
■ Mu-
par muhr ki gayi. Yusuf ko firqe s
bArah bazar par muhr ki gayi. Binja-
imu ke rirqe sc bArah bazar par mubr
ki gayi.
B Ba'd ua ke main ne nazar ki, aur,
dekhii, ki bar ek ({aum, aur firue, nur
log, aur ah I i zuban men bq ok bati
thahar sakta jama'al, jinc koi sbuinar naliin kar
aakta, sufed jduia pabine aur klninna
ki daliAn hatbon men liye, us takbt ke
Age aur liarrc ke huziir k hati bai ;
10 Aur buland AwAz se cbillake
yun kaiti bai, ki Najat haruan K hadi
ko, jo takht par baitha, aur Barro ko
hai.
11 Aur eare firiahte takht, aur mi
buzurgon, aur uu diaron j'andaron ke
gird kharo the; phir takbt ke'&ge
auiidhe gir pare, aur Khuda ko sijda
kiyA,
12 Aur bole, Amin: harakat, aur
jalai, aur dAnish, aur shukrguzAri, aur
'izzat, aur qudrat, aur tAqat, abad tak
£i;iih;'li-.' KhudA ke liye hon. A 'min.
18 Aur un baswgo)] "1<JD He ('k "e
jawAbdeke niujh «e pudiha~ki We ,jo
sufed jama pahine bjJfjj kaun hain, aur
kalian ne Ae 'i
lt Aur main ne us «e kahA, ki Ai
khudawand, tii jdutA hai. 'fa b us ne
mujbe kahi, Ye we hi hain j<. i-nii
niuMibat uien se nikal Ao, aur unhog ne
aptie j&mon ko Barrc ke labu se dhoyi,
aur uulicn sufed kiyA.
15 Isi waste we Khuda ke takht ko
dge hain, aur ua ki haikal men r.d din
us ki wndagi karte : aur wuh jo takht
par baith.i hai un ko danaiyaii suku-
nat karegu.
16 We phir bhikhc na horjge, aur
na (lli uji na koi
bArah bazar par muhr ki gayi.
nassi ke iirqe se bArah bazar par mubr , na piyase
^i Sftyf- gamif utiiAerge.
7 8ama'un ke firqe se bArah bazdt i 17 K yunki Barra, jo takbt ke bicli
par muhr ki gayi. L.Awi ke firqu se o hieh bai, uu ki gallaMni karegA, aur
bArah ba/Ar par iiuihr ki gayi. I.sliiLkAr.unhen pAniorj &o ainda aoton pas
8atwmmuhrto\;<cbi'>t MUKA'SEIAFAT, VilT, IX. mtrsinge phinke jal*.
pahurichacgd : aur KhndA un ki ankh
<a\ se har vk Ansrt jioiM'hhegA.
VIII BA'B.
Al /.' j.'ih us ne sAtu-in raehr loft,
an men narib Adhi
ki kliSnmsIii luii.
2 Aur main ne un sAton firishton
ko.jo KhudA ke Agc kharo the, dekha,
ki ttnheg mt oaninge dlyo gaye.
3 Phir ek aur firishta aya, nur sono
ka bakhimlan liye ln'ie iptrbiTigAb. ke
ripark'harAhM; aurbahut bakhiiruse
diyA gaya, tA ki use saru rauqaddason
ki du'aon ke Mth NUufaU cpurbAngAh,
par, jo takht ko Age hai, gu/.rAue.
4 Aur lis baklmr k;t dhunwAn, mu-
qaddason ki du'aon men milkc, firisht*
ke hAtli se KhudA ke pU i'ipar gayA.
3 Phir im'firishte ne bakhtirdtin ko
liya, aur ua men qurbAngAn ao Ag leko
boaii, aur samin par phenki; tab
awazen hiiin.aur garjen, aur bijliAn,
aur bhauiiclnil.
d Aur "iin sAt firishton no jin ke pas
sat narsinge tlio, phiinkno ke liye Ap ko
taiyAr k iya.
7 Aur pahiie firishte ne narsinga
phunkii, tab olo aur ag khun-Amez
maujud Mi, aur wuh zamin par dali
gayi : aur tihAf darakht jal gaye, aur
tamani hari glias jal gayi,
5 Phir diisre liris h te no nareiaga
ptuinkA, tab jaise ok bani pahAr Ag ae
jalti huA sammidar men t i AIA gayA, aur
■ftmundar ka Eteri bina Iriluilio guyA;
M Aivr makhli'iqAt ki lihai, jitni-
samundar men jAn rakhte the, mar
gaye; aurjahAzorj kA tiarAhisaa tabah
ho gayA.
10 Phir tisre nmhtc tie naraingA
pln'inkA, tab biirA sitAra chirAg if jaltA
IniS AamAn ne 'tnld, aur nadiori aur
jiAtii ke eoton ki'ti'liAi par jA girA ;
U UasUaro k A mm NagdauriA hai;
«ur'pAnion ki tihAi nagdauni ho gayi ;
aur bahu t se Ailmi un p&nion ke sabab
se inar gayo, ki we karwe lio gaye the.
12 Phirchautlie firUiite nenaraingA
324
phdnka, ty tihai wiraj, aur tihai chaiid,
aur tihai si tar e niire gaye, yahAn tak
ki un ki tihai tarik ho gayi, aur din
ki tihA/, aur waiae hi rit ki tiliAi hhf,
rOShaa na thi.
13 Phir jo main no nazar ki, t» ek
firishte ko AsmAn ke liieh o bich une
hiie aur bari AwAz ho yih kahte suua,
ki 'Aivn'm ko ralmewalon par, un tin
firishton ko narsinge ki bAqi Awaauo
ke wtbab jo phunknc par hain, afsos,
afrtos, afsoBl
IX BA'B.
A U J l pAtchwcn iirinhty no phimka,
tah mairj ne ek ritAra AsmAn se
aaintu par girA hliA dekhti, aur Ufl kue
ki kuriji, jin ki thAh uahiQ, use di
gayi.
2 Aur ur ne us kiio ko, jis ki thah
nahin, kholA; to us kuo ae ban> Umir
UA «A dhunwAn uthA; aur us fetic ke
dhi5nwen so suraj aur hawa tdrik ho
gayi"
3 Aur us dhunwcri so zamm par
^iddiAn nikliTj ; aur unhen waisA hi
maqdur diyA gayA, jaisA zatnin ke
bichc'hfuji.iij ka hai.
4 Aur uuiwiii yih kaha gayA, ki
Zamiri ki ghAa, yA kisi sahzi, yA kisi
damkht ko zarar na i>ahunchAen, ma-
g>ir s'irf un Admion ko jin ko inAthon
par KhudA ki muhr nahin.
5 Aur unhen yih diyA gayA, ki we
un ko jan «o na mAren, baiki yih ki we
Admi pAnch mahina tak aziyat uthA-
wen; aur un ki aalyftt luehchhn ke
dank ki si thi.jab wuh Admion ko
mArtA hai,
G Aur un dinon adrai maut dhiin-
dhengo, aur vtse na piwengc ; aur
rnftrnc ke mU8htAq bonge, aur maut
7 Aur un tiddion ki auraten un
gborog ki ai thi'n, jo larai k» liye
taiyAr kiye gaye hain ; aur un ko siron
par goyA sono ke tAj, aur un ko chihre
lidititon ke se chibre the.
B Aur un ka bal 'auraton ke VAlorj
Ekflriahta kitab MUKA'SIIAFA'T, X.
ki mdnind, aur uu ke dant bubar kose ki minimi i
liyt /iiie zahir ho!a.
raklitin ;uir ve un ae
the.
0 Aur un ke baktar lohe ke baktar-
nij ki mdnind: nur uu ko paron ki
dwn/. rathon aur b:ihut ghoron ki si
awdz, jo larai wen dauren.
10 Aur un ki dumen bichchhiion. ki
«i thin, aur dan k uu ki durnon men
Ihe; aur onherj iklitiydr thd ki panel
mahinon tak adim'on ko y.arar pakun-
ehawen.
11 Aur un athih kde kA firishta un
ke iipar Mdahah thd; us kA nAm
'Ibrani mon. Abaddou, aur Ytindiif
nien Apulliuii hai
12 Ek afaoa gu/ar gaya ; dekho, di
aur afsoa uu balon ke ha 'd dnewdle
Lain.
13 Phir ekliallie firiahtc ne phunka,
aur main lo aohabli qurbdngAb
charon tiugon men ae, jo Khudd ku
huziir hai, ek dwdz
14 Jo lis L-iili;<the firialite ae, jiake
l>as narsingi iki, kaliti thi, ki Un
elidron finali ton ko, jo Furat ki bari
nadi par band hain, klml de.
15 Phir WC clidr tirishte cbhute, jo
ek ghari, aur ek din, aur ek rnahine,
aur ek baraatak taiyur the, U ddmion1
merj ae tihdi ko mar daien.
lf} Aur faujon ku suwir shumdr
men bis karor the : nur main tu un
ka ahumar waisa suni.
17 Aur we ghoro aur un ke sawdr
dekhne inen mujhfl yiiii Dasar ae, ki
un ke hakku- ag ke mdnind surkh, aur
dhanwen ke minimi nila, aur gandhak
ke mdnind pile the ; aur un ke ghoron
ke air babar ke sirou ki mdnind; aur
un ke munhon se Ag aur dhunwdn aur
gandhak nikalti thi.
18 Aur ua Ag, aur dliunwen, aur
gandhak M, jo un ke munh se nikalti
thi, ya'ne, in tinon, Afaton se tihAi
ddmi maro gaye.
l!l Ki un ghoron ke maqdrir un ke
namh merj, aur un ki dumon men dinon merj, jal. wuli phiiukne par bfc.
hain ; kyi'inki un ki dunien simpan Khuai ki posbida matlab, jaisa ua ne
825
larar pahunohtte hain.
20 Aur ba\]i ddmion w, jo un Afat-
on so mdre na gaye the, apne hltbon
ke kdinog se tauba na ki, ki dewog ki
aur sono aur riipe aur pital aur pnt-
tbar aur lakri ki mriraton kl, jo na
dekh aur oa suu aur na elial aaktin,
pujA na karerj:
21 Aur uuhon no apni kufinrcKion,
aur apni jAduganon, aur apni ziai, aur
apni choriori ae, jo we karte Ibc,
tauba na ki.
X BA'B.
P Ulll main nc ek aur zordwar li-
rishtc ko auman se utarte dekhA,
jo ek badli ko orhc, anr ua ke air par
dhauuk thd; aur us ka enihra Aftab
si, aur us ke pin w ag ke lattuoB ki
mAnind the :
2 Aur U8 ke hath men ek elihnti .si
kitdb kbuli hili thi : aur us ne apnri
dalih ia panwsamuudar par, aur bdydn
kliushki par dbard,
'■& Aur bari dudz se, jaiae liabar
garajtd hai, poUtil aur jab ua ne
pukani, lab badai ne garajne ki apni
hdt dwazeg din.
4 Aur jab bidai apne sdt ra'don k i
dwdzeri de cbukA Ibd, to main likhne
par tbd: tab main ne asmau ^e ek
AivAz suni, jo inujhe farmdti thi, ki
Liadal ke un ndt ra"don sg jo bAt In'ii,
us par niuhr kar mkh, aur niat iikh.
5 Tab us tirishte ne, jise main nn
samuudar aur khualiki par khara
dekliA, apnd hAth Aamin ki taraf
u t baya,
Aur ua ki jn abad tak zinda hai,
i danian ko aur jo kuchb ua merj
aur zamin ko aur jo kuchh ua
iiKiin liai, aur samundar ko aur jo
kuchh ua men hai, paidd k iy-i, q:isam
kl ]iliir aur muddat na hu-gi :
Ihilki adtiven firiahte ki dwtfi ke
Do ;;-<tVAJhon lea mara
apne khidmat-guzar nablon ko khush-
khabari di, pura hoga.
H Aur usawazne jomairj ne asman
so suni, phir nmjb ne bat ki, nur kalia,
.T:i, wuh clilii.it] khuli rii'ii kitab, .joua
firishte ke, jo Aaryi. aur khunhki par
kliari hai, InUh meij hai. le.
9*Tab raain uh firishte. ke pas gaya,
aur uh hb kaha, ki Wuh chlioti kitab
mujh ko de. Aur us ne mujhe kaha,
I,r, E»t ott kbii ja; wah terft pet kar-
wa kardegi, jwir tere untnbnicn ahahd
si mitlii lagegi.
lOTabmain nc wuh chhoti kitab
ua firishto ke hath «a li, aur uae khil
gaya; aur wuh mere munh men ahahd
ki tarah mithi thi; par jab main use
khA chuka, inerit pet karwa ho gaya._
11 Aur us ne mujhe kaha, Zan'ir
hai ki tu babut se logon, aur uaumon,
aur ahl i tubin, aur liadahahon ki
babat phir mibuwat kare.
XI BA'B.
AUE ek sarkanda jarlb ki mnnind
mujhe diyi gaya ; aur wuh firisli-
ta kbara hoke kahta- tha, ki Vth, aur
Khuda' ki haikal, aur u urban gali, aur
ua ko Jo M men 'ibadat karte hain,
audaza kai'.
'J Ma^ar ua dalan ko, jo haikal ke
babar hai, chhor de, aur use niat nap ;
kyunki wuh gair-cpuimon ko dlya
gavAhai ! aur we muqadda* ahahr M
bayalte mahinorj tak pamal karengi.
3 Aur main apne do gawahnn ko
ikJitivar dnjjga, aur we tat pahiukar
ek bazar do aau sath diri tak nubiiwat
kuense.
i Vili wo do ilarakht zaitun ke, aur
do i'hinigd;lri barn, jo' zarnin ke Khuda
ke buziir khare bain.
8 Aur agar kol enaho ki unhen
zarar pahuncblie, to un ke munh ae
iig nikalti, aur un ke dushrasnog kr
kha jati hai: bo agar koi chahe k
unhen zarar pBhimohte, to zan'ir ha
k i wuh isi tarah marajawe.
6 Vn ko ikhtivAr l.ai ki asman ko
32G
MllKA'STTAFA'T, XI. jYu.d, aur phir ji uth.a.
band karen, ki un ki nubiiwat kedinon
men pan i na barso : aur paninn par
bhi Ikhtiyfc rakhte, ki unhen lubii
banii dalen, aur jab jah chahen, zamin
par bar tarah ki afat lawcn.
7 Aur we jab apni gawah! <3o cbuk-
engo, to wub daritida janwar, jo athah
kue ae nikalta hai, un'ae larega, aur u n
par galib hoga, aur unhen mar dalega.
8 Aur un kf Ustwi us bare aliahr
ke bazar men, jo tasbbib ke taur par
Sadiira aur Miar kahlita hai, jaban
liamaia Khudawand bhi salib par
kbineha gaya, pari rabengi.
9 Aur logon, aur firqon, aur ahl i
zuban, aur qaumou ke ba'ze un ki
laahon ko aarhc tin diri Uik dekha
karenlre, aur un ki laahorj ko qabron
men rakline na denge.
10 Aur /.amiu ke rahnewale un par
khuahi o khurraoii kareiige, aur ek
t'bWe ko saugaten bhej'-nge; kynnki
un do nabion ne zaruin ke l-ahnewaloii
ko sat&ya tha.
11 Aur sarhe tin din ke Im'd zindagi
ki Ruh Khuda ki taraf se un rneij d:ir
ai, aur we apne panwon par khare ho
gaye; tab jinhon ne unhen dckba,
unhen bara khaui'aya.
12 Aur u abon ne asinan ae ek bari
awaz auui, jo unhen kahti thi, ki Idhar
tipar ao. Aur we badai men ake aa-
man par cbale gaye ; aur un ke dush-
ukuioi] n« un ko dekha.
13 Phir uai ghftfi ek bara bhaun-
chal aya, aur uaahahr kadaswan hiaaa
gir gayd: aur us bhaunchal men aat
hazar admi jan se mare gaye, aur baqi
jo the liiniain bo gaye, aur unhon ne
auman ke Khuda ki buzurgi ki.
14 Dusra afsos guzar gaya; dekho,
tisni ai'aos jald iti hai.
15 Aur satwen firiabte no phiinka,
aur asmdn par hari awazen yih kahti
ln'ii -lin, ki Dunyi ki badahahaU^n
hamare Khudawand aur ua ke Masih
ki bo gayin, aur wub abad tak bad-
alnibat karega.
Ttulhh/a azhduhe se MUKA'SHAFA'T, XII. mtAynjata.
16 Aur chiuibls buzurg, jo apne' 6 Aur wuli 'aurat baydbdn moa,
apne takht par Khuda k*1 hiizarbaitlii! jahili! un ki jajal hal jo Khudd
the, murjh ke bal gire, aur Khudii ko
sljda kiyd,
17 Aur bole, ki Ai Khudawaiid
Khudd, Qadir i mutlaa, jo hai, aur jo
Ihd, aur jo anewala hai, haru tcrd
shukr kartc hain ; kyi'mki tii ne apni
kiri qii<\rat ikhtiydr kar ii, aur bad-
«hahat ki.
18 Aur qaumen gussa hunj, nur
teri qahr aya-, aur murdon kd waqt
pahmichd, ki uu ki 'addlac ki jae, aur
ki tii apne khidniat-guzdr nabfon, aur
imiqad<ias logon ku, aur un kn jo tere
nam bu darte hain, kyd chhote k ya
ha re, ajr bakhsho, aur un ko jo samin
ko khardb karte hain, kbarab kare.
19 Aur Khuda ki haikal aaman
men kholi gayi, aur ub ki haikal mon
ua ke'ahd ka sanduq tkkhnemendyd,
aur bijlian, aur awazcii, aur garajeg,
aur bhaunchal ia, aur liare ole pare,
xn isa' a
AtJIl ek bara nishan asman par
nazar aya; uk 'aurat auraj ko
orhc hue, aur cbdnd ub ke paywoii
tale, aur o* ke air par bdrah sitdron
ka taj tha:
2 Aur wuh 'aum t hdmila thi, aur
dard h chillafi, aur jaiine ko ainthti
thi.
3 Phir ek aur nishan asman par
•likhai diyd : aur, dekho, ek bard
nurkh azhdahAj j'ih ko s;it sir aur das
sing, aur uh ke sirna par si t tdj the,
zdhir h u d.
4 Aur ub ki dum n e dsmdn ki tihdi
sitare khinchc, nur unimu zainin par
ildla: aur wuh azhdaha UI 'aurat ke
asre, jo janne par thi, ja khard hud, ta
ki jab wuh janu, to uh ke bachcho ko
n igal jdwe.
5 Aur wuh farznnd i narina jani, jo
ki lohti ka 'and It-ke sab uaumon par
hukumat knrega : aur us kd larkd
Khudd ke aur us ke takht ke dge uthd
Jiyd gavd.
327
taiyar ki thi, bhdg gayi, ta ki wahdn
we ek hazdr do sau sath din tak us
ki nrwarilb karen.
t l'hir dsmdu par lardi hi'ii : Mikdel
aur ub ko Iirisbte azhdahe ae laro ; aur
azhdtihd aur us ke firiahtc lare.
Lekin galib na hiic ; nur na isramu
par un ki phir jagah nrili.
9 8o liard azhdahd oikdid gayd,
wuh! purdnd sainpjo Iblis aur Shaitan
kahlita hai, aur jo siire jahdn ko dagd
detil hai : wuh zamin par giraya gayi,
aur us ke firishte blii us ke satli girae
10 Phir main nc ek hari awasi ko
Aamdn sc yili kahte sund, ki Ab najat,
aur qudrat, aur saltanat bamdre
Kliuda ki ;ii, aur ua ke Masih kd
ikhtiyar bhi ; kyiinki hamare bhdi'oa
p,ir tuhmat lagAuowdld, jo rdt din
hamdre Khudd ke dge un par tuhmat
la^ratd tlid, j;irjiyd gayd.
11 Aur unherj ne Barrn ke lalui ke
aabab, aur apni gawdhi ki bdt ke bd'is,
us ko jii Hya ; aur unhoTi nc apni jiViu'tj
ko marne tak 'azi« na jdnd.
12 la wdute, tum, ai dgraano, aur
un par ko rahnuwdlo, khushi karo.
l&Jboa un jiar jo kbushki aur tari ke
rahnewdle hain ! ia liye ki Iblis hare
guaHe se tuna pas utrd, ki wuh jiinta
hai ki ua ke liye thnri muhlat bdqi hai.
13 Aur jab ub azhdnhe ne dokhd
ki main zatnin par giraya gaya, to us
ne ua 'aurat ko, jo farzand i narina
jani thi, sataya.
14 Aur us 'aurat ko bare 'uqdb ke
do par diye gaye, td ki wuh ua adnip
ke sdmbne ae baydbdn ko apne rnaqdm
tak uf jde, jahdn ek zamdn, aur do
mainan, aur niru zamdn tak uh ki
jMrwariah muqarrar ki gayi.
15 Phir us aduip ne apne murjh se
pdni nadi ki mdnind us 'aurat ke
plchbo bahdyd, td ki aiad howe ki
nadi use baha le jawe,
Ek darinda janwar
10 l'ar zaroin ne Ub 'aurat ki madad
ki, ki zaniin ne apnd munli kkoli, aur
uh undi ko, jo azhdahe nc apue uiunh
ae bahdi thi, pi liyd.
17 Aur azlidaha 'aurat par giissa
liiii, aur ub ki baqi aulfid se, jo Kbuda
MUKA'SHAFAT, XIII. mmundar se nikhi.
8 Aur zamin ke wo sab rahnewale,
jin ke ndm us Barre ke daftar i hayat
ju bina e 'alam H qatl huu, likhi;
nahin gayu, ua ki puja karenge.
Agar kisi ka kau bo, to sune.
ke hukm mantu, aur Yiaii' Masih ki
gawdbi rakhtc baia, lamo gaya.
XIII I3A'B.
AUR main sainundar ki reti par
khati thd, aur dekha k:
dari rida jan war aarnuiidar i
ke «at sir, aur das sing elu
aingon par das taj, aur us ke siron jmr
kulr ke iii'uu.
2 Aur wuh darinda janwar jo main
ne dekhd, tomiud ki shakl thd, aur ua
ke panw bhaiii ke se, aur murjh us ka
babar k:i sa; us a/didahe ne apnd
iqliddr, aur apnd takht, aur bara
ikhtiyar use diya.
" 6 Aur main nu dekhd ki u» ke airon
nicu se ek par goya ek scakhiri kari
lagi hai; par uh ka kari zukhm
cbangii kiya gaya tba ; aur uari zamin
us janwar ke picbhe ta'ajjub karti
cbali.
i Aur unhon. ne ub azhdahe ki, jis
ne us janwar ke ta.in ikhtiyar diya,
paraslish ki, aur us janwar ki parastish
ki, aur we bolo, Kau» ub janwar ki
uiauind luii 'i kauu us «e lar sakti
bui?
5 Aur ek munh bafi bol-bolnewdld
aur kufr-kahjiowdld use diya gaya, aur
bayalis mahine tak larai kamu ko use
ikhtiyar bakhshii gaya.
' b Aur ua ne Kbuda ki babat kufr
kahne meg apn* munh kholi, ki ua
ke nain, aur us ke kiiaime, aur un ke
baqq mon jo asmdn par rahte hain,
kul'r liake.
7 Aur use yih diya gaya, ki mu-
tpiddas logon, ae muiidbala kare, aur
n par galib howe, aur sah firqon
10 Agar koi qaidion ku ikatthd kar
le ;it;i liai, K 'iaid map puregd ; agar
koi talwdr se qatl knrtd hai, bo talwdr
bi se qatl hoga. Muoaddas logon ki
sabr aur Iman isi men hai.
11 JVhir maiQ iio dekha ki ek aur
darinda jinwar zamin men se utha;
nikla, jis aur barra ki nuiiiind ua ko do siog tba,
r kihdane ki tarah bolti tha.
12 Yih jaihle janwar ka «ini
ikhtiyar rakhke us ke dge 'amal
karti hai, aur zamin aur us ke raboe-
walon se pahle janwar ko jis ka zakhm
kari ehangd kiyd gaya tha, pujwata
bai.
13 Aur wuh bari kardmdt karti
hai, yahin tak ki logon ki nazar ine»
danian se zamin par dg na/.il kartd.
14 Aur un kardmdt n, jinben uh
darinde ko sdmbne ub ko kamu ki>
diyd gayd zamin ke rabncwdion ko
dagd un. i hai ; ki zamin ke rabnowd-
lon se kahta hai, ki Tuin ua jaunar
ki, jia men talwdr kd jrhdo Lhd, aur
tau bhi wub jiya, ek inurat bauao.
15 Aur uae yih diyd gaya, ki us
janwar ki niiirat ko jan bakhsho, ki us
janwar ki wuh luurut bdten bhi kare,
aur un aab ko, jo us jdnwar ki murat
ko na pujen, qatl karwae.
16 Aur wuh aub chhote bare, dau-
latmand aur garib, azad aur guldiu,
sabhon ke dahine hdth, ya mdtne par
ek ek uishan karwd detd :
17 Tii ki koi kharid iarokht na kar
eake, magar wuhi jis men wuh nhshdu,
yd us janwar ka nam, ya ua ko nam
k.i shumdr ho.
18 Hikmat is men hai. Wub jo
aamajh rakbtd bai, ns jdnwar kd 'adad
ginjde; kyiinki wuh iusiin ka 'adad
abl i zuhdn, aur qaumon par, usejbai; aur us kd 'adad Ohha sau chld-
ikbtiydr 'indvat hud.
32»
^vasath hai.
Barre ki purai M
MUKA'SHAFAT XIV.
Baihtm par lAarA koni,
m« kath par honc doti
XIV BA'Jf. mdtho ya
PHIR jo main ne nigdh ki, aur, hai,
dekho, ki Barra Sailiiiu pahdr| 10 Wuli Khudd ko qahr ki us inai
par klmra thd, aur us ke sdth ek lakli ko, jo uh ke qahr ke piydlo meri be
cliaualis bazar Llie, jin ke luatlioa par inilae dhdli gayi, pio#£; aur wuh
s ke BAp ki mim likhd thd.
'I P bir main 110 dsmau ae c
suui,jo lahut pautan, ke shor.aur bare 'azdb uthdegd
muqaddas firishton ke sdmkne, aur
awdz liarra ke age, ag aur gamlliak men
guftjne ki awaz ki m&nind thi ;
11 Aur un ke 'azab ka dliiinwaii
ain ne barbat-nawdzon ki dwaz, jo abad tak uthta rahli hai, aur
apni barbat bujdte the,
3 Aur we takht ke sdmhne, aur un
chdrou j&udanin aur busurgDfl ka age
guvA uayd >*it ga r.die Uie ; aur kd
uu ek lakh chaualis hazdr ke siwa jo
zamiu hb kbaride gaye the, u» git ko
si k h mi Maka.
4 Ye we log hain jo 'aura ton ke
sdth gandagi men na pare; ki kun-
wdre hain. Ye wc hain jo Barre ke
piehhe jdte hain jahiin kahirj wuh jdtd
hai. Ye Khudd aur P.arre ke liye
l'iiili' pbal liuke admion men se mol
liye gaye hain,
5 Aur un ke munh men makr pdyd
ua gayd, kyi'mki we Khudd ke takht
ke dge be-'aib hain.
6 Aur main ne ek aur lirislilr ki)
Injil abadi liye bue dek ha, ki dan ia n
ke hich u bit b u r raba ibd, td ki zamin
ke rahnewdluri, aur sab qanmon, aur
liiqui_i, aur abl i zubdn, aur logon ko
kliiifTiikliabarl aundwe.
T Aur us ne bari dwaz se kaha,
Khudd se daro, nur us ka jaldl zdhir
karo ; kyiiiiki us ki 'addlat ki ghapi
di ; aur ua ki paruatisli karo, jis ne
tanin, mu zainin, aur samundar,
pani ke chaahme jiaidd klye.
8 Aur us ke piehhe ek dusrdiirifUita
akar yiin bold, ki Babul, wuli
shahr, gir pard, gir para; kytiuki us
ne apni haramkdri ki gazabi mui sdri
qaumoii ko ]iildi.
9 Plnr ek tiara firishta un ke pichlie
iya, aur bari dwdz se bold, ki Jo koi
us darinde janwar aur ua ki nrnrat ki
puja karti hai, aur uh kd ni&hin apne
329
i ko
jo ua darinde jauwar, aur us ki Hidrat.
ki puji kartu hain, nur us fco ju ua ke
ndin ka nishdu liye hai, rat din kabhi
drain ualiiu.
VA Muqadda3 logon ki sabr isi men
bai; yandn we liain. jo Khudd ke
hukmon aur Yisu' ke imdu ko liye
rahte hain.
13 Pbir main ne dsmdu m- v.k ;Lwa>;
suni, jo mujh ac kahti thi, ki Likh :
Mubdrak we murde hain, Jo Khmla-
waud men boke ab ho niartu' hain;
lliih kahti bui, ki han, td ki we apni
mihnaton sc driin pdwen ; aur un k<
d'amal un ke bdth pieblie uhale ate
hain.
M Pbir main ne nazar ki, aur dekho,
ek Bufed badli, aur ua badli par koi
Ibu i A'dam aa baithd thd, jis ke sir
par aono kd tdj, aur us ke bith men
ek tes hanaud tha.
io Aur ek aur firishta haikal se
nikla, aur use jo badli par baithd thd
bari awaz ae pukdrd, ki Apnd haiiwua
laga, aur kat: kydnki tam kdtne kd
waqt dyd; ki zainiu ki zird'at pak
gayi.
Iti Aur us ne, jo badli par bai tha
thd, apud han.sii.i zamin par lagdya,
aur /.iiriiin dirau ki gayi.
17 Phir ek aur firishta us haikal se,
JO tandu imu hai, nikla; ua pas blii
ek tez hanadd thd.
18 Phir ek aur firishta, jis kd ikh-
tiydr ag par thd, qurhangah se nikla,
aur us ko, jis kaue tez banana thd,
bar c shor w pukarkc kaha, ki Apud
tez hagsiid lagd, aur /.u.uiia ke angtiri
Fichhli «U ofakn, MUKA'SIIAFAT
darakht ke guchchhe kat| kyiinki
ke angiir i^ak chuke.
lit Phir uh flrifllito re apna harjsud
ramin pw dlmra, ;mr nmfa ke augur
ke darnkht ke pbn] ko kjirii, aur KJiu-
da ke gazab ke bare kolku men dai
diyi,
90 Aur wah kolha nun sh&hr ke
bahar pera Kaya, aur uh kolhu se labu
ek nazar cbha Kau stadius tak aiwa
baU, ki ghoron ki bag'in lak pahun-
cha.
XV BA' B.
PHIR main ne ek aur nisdian asmati
men dekhd, jo bara aur aehani-
bhe ka tha, ki Hat firishte piohhli
sdt dfaton ko liyc huo hain ; kyiinki
Khudd ka gazab un men hliard hiia
bai.
2 Aur main ne goyd ihlflfcfl ka ok
BUMmdu ag se roild hrvd dekhd, aur
un ko bhl, jo lis darinde janwar, aur
us ki miirat, aur us ke nishdn, aur ns
ke ndm ke 'adad par galib dc the, us
ahishe ke samutular par Khudd ki bar-
bat liye khare the.
3 Aur wo Khudd ke bande Musa
kd git aur Barrc ka gtt yih kahke
§ite hain, ki Ai Khudawand Khuda,
:adir i mutlar], tore kam bare aur
XV, XVL l'iy<5k uiidrle jiUc.
ek ne none ke sdt piyalr Khuda ke
qahr ae hltare bne, jo abad ul Abtid
rindu dai, un Siit firiuhton ku diye,
8 Aur wuh baikal Khuda ke jalai
aur us ki qudrat ke sabab dliiinwen
se bhar gayi ; aur jab tak un aaUm
fi riah ton ki wat dfnten anjdm tak na
jiahunchin, koi haikal men d&khil na
ho saka.
pun
X a
XVI BA'B.
IU main ne h&iknl se ek hari
dwaz suni, jo un sdt firishton M
yi'm kabti thi, ki Rawdna ho, aur
Khuda ke qaht ko un plyalos ko za-
inin par undelo.
2 Chunanchi pahld chald Raya, aur
apnd piyiila Kamit! pur nndelit ; tah un
logon meg jin par us darinda janwar
ka nishdn tha, a.ur un men. jo ub ki
miirat ki puja karte the, bura aur ra-
bun pbori paidd had.
3 Phir dusre nrishte ne apmi piyala
samundar men undela ; tob wuh raurde
ka sd lahti ho gayd : aur har ek jandar
jo eamimdar men tha miia.
4 Phir tisre liri&hte ne apna piyala
nadion aur pdnion ke chashmon men
unddd ; aur we lahri ho gaye.
5 Aut main ne piininn ke firislitc
hambbe ke hain: ai miupiddason'ko yih kahte suni, ki Ai Khuddwand.
raniini
ki Ai 1
ke Badehah, teri rdhen rist aur durust
hain.
4 Ai Khudawand, kaun tiijh M DJ
daregd? aur tere nam ka W& /;iliir
nakaregd? kyilnki lu bi sirf rptddi'is
hai : ki sari qaumen awengi, aur tere
age sijda karengi, ki U^ri "adalaten Ba-
bi bui hain. "
5 Aur ba'd us ke jo maiu U DWI
ki, to dekho, ki gawahi ke khaime ki
h.iikal asnian (iar kholi gayi.'
6 Aur we sat firishte un sdtog afat-
■-iTi ko liye sdf *ut barraq poeUk
ymhine liue, aur swie ke sinabatid
sinon par lagie huo, haikal se nikal
ae.
7 Aur un charon jiindaron men se
330
jo hai, aur jo tha, tri hi 'ilil :mr qud-
dtis hai, ki tfi ne yiin 'adalat ki.
8 Kytinki nubrm ne muqaddason
aur nabiori ka klinn bahaya hai; so
tii ne pine ku ludien laltu iliya, ki WC
isi liliq hain.
7 Phir main ne ek aur ko qurban-
gah men se yih kahte Bima, ki Hati,
ai KhudawaudKhudd, Qddir i muthiq,
teri 'adalaten sachchi aur rist liain.
8 Phir chautho firishte ne apna
piydla siiraj par imdeld ; aur usc ikh-
tiyir diyd gayd ki ddmioii ko dg se
:illll-;ii'.
'.I Aur admi Rakbt garmi se jlnilas
gaye, aur Khudd ke ndm par, jo in
liliitiit; par iklitiydr rakhtd hai, k u f r
V«tt k» <i*e U taw. MUKA'SHAFAT, XVII
bakte the : aur nnhon ne tauba na k!,
ki iis ki jali! zahir karen.
10 Phir pincnwen firishte tic UB
darinda janwar ke takht par apna
piy&Ia undcla; aur us ki bddshahi
meri tariki ehha gayi ; aur we maro
daid ke apni zulianen chabato the;
11 Aur apne dardon aur apne phor-
0]J ke ba'is ibmau ke Khudi par kul'r
bakte the, aur apne kanion se tauba
ua ki.
12 Phir chhathc firishte ne apnd
piyftla us bare daryd men, jo Furdt
hai, undeid; nur us ka pnni siikh
gayi, ta ki piirab ke badshihon ke
liye rih taiyar bowo.
13 Phir main uu us azfidahe ko
munh se, aur us dnrinde janwar ke
munh se, aur jhiitlie nabi ke miinli IB,
lin napak rdhon ko meudakon ki shakl
nikalte dcklii.
14 Ki we achambhe dikhdnewdle
dewon ki nihen lipiti, jo zamin ke,
baiki siri dunyi ke, bidshihon pas
jatin, ki uribeti Qadir i mullaq Khudd
ke roz 'azim ki larai ke waste jam'a
kang.
15 Oekh, mairj chor ki minimi fi-tA
h dn. Mulnirak hai wub jo jdgti, aur
apni poshak ki khabardari kara hai ;
aiai na howe ki wuh nangi pbire, aur
log us ki eharm dekhen.
16 Phir us ne un kr> ek makan men,
i'is kd nim 'Ibrani men Armajiddon
mi, jam'a kiya.
17 Phir Hatwen firishte tio apni
piyala bawa men undcla ; tab dsmdu
ki haikal ke takht ki taraf ne ek
liari Awiz yih kuhti btii cikli', ki Ho
eh tiki.
18 Tab iwdzen, aur garajen, aur
bijlian huin; aur bara bhaunehil iyi,
aisd ki jab se admi samin par liain,
aisd bara aur sak b t bhaunchdl kabhi
aya na thi.
19 Aur wuh bari slialir tiu tukiv
ho gaya, aur qaumon ke shahr gir
gaye; aur bari Bdbul Khuda ke hu-
331
liari tatbi H roya.
«lir yad di, ta ki use apne shiddat i
qahr ki mai ka piyi-Ia dewe.
20 Tab bar ek t&pn falke gdib ho
gaya, aur pahar kabin pae na gaye.
21 Aur auman se idmiorj par man
mau bhar ke ole gire ; aur olon ki afat
so admSoti Iie Khuda par kni'r baki;
kyiinki us ole ki nihaynl hi sakht afat
thi.
XVII BAT3.
AUR ek un sat liriahton merj sejin
ke pas sit piydlc the aya, aur
mujh se baten kin, aur k ah d, k') Idhar
a; main tujh ko us bari kasb! ki saza,
jo bahut panion jjar hai thi hai, dikh-
liiinga :
2 Jis ke sath zamin ke badshah.in
ne hardmkiri kl, aur jis ki haramkdn
ki mai se zamin ke bishinde matwale
hue.
3 Phir wuh mujhe riih men slniiui!
karke bayibin men le gaya ; aur wa-
han main ne ek 'aurat ko, qirmizi rang
ke ek darinde janwar par, jo kufr ko
namun se bhara tha, aur jis ke si t sir
aur das sing the, baithe dekha.
4 Aur yih 'aurat argawani aur qir-
mizi jora pahtne, aur sone aur jawahir
aur motion se arasta thi ; aur ek sone
ka piyala, makniliat se aur us ki ha-
ramkan ki gandari se bhara hai, apne
li.i.i ii men liye thi :
5 Aur jib ke mathc par ek tiaui
Hkha thi, RA'Z : BA'IJUL I BU-
ZURG: CHHIXA'LON AUIt ZAM-
I'N Kl' MAKRU'HA'T K l' MA'.
6 Aur main ne dekha ki wub 'aurat
muq:uldas logon ke khun se, aur Yisi'i'
ko shahidon ke lalui sc, matwili ho
rahi thi; aur inain us ko dekhkar
sak h t hairani se dang ho gaya.
7 Tab us firishte ne mujhe kahi,
Tu kyiin dang hai? Main us 'aurat
aur ua dnrinde janwar ki raz, jis par
wuh sawar hai, aur jis ke sit sir aur
dai afa| ham, tujh se kahringa.
B Wuh darinda jinwar, jo td ne
dekhi, so thi, aur ab nahin hai; aur
Biilul kegtrnefar MUKA'SHAFA'T, XVIII.
iis athah kfifl n nikaluc aur haldkat
men jdne par hai ; aur zamiu ko rak-
newale jin ke ndin zindagi ku daftar
men bin'd e 'alam so likho na gaye, ue
haiwdn ko dekhke, jo thd, aur naliiij
hai, agarchi hai, ta'ujjub karcnge.
9 Ib ki wuh samajli yulian hai, jis
men danai hai. We sal air sal paliar
hairj, jin ]>ar wtili 'aurat hai Uli hai.
10 Aur adt badahdh lmin ; pducli to
j^ir gaye, ck hai, dusra ab tak uahin
.iya ; aur jah dwegd, thori inuddat tak
us kd rahnd kogd.
11 Aur wuli dariuda janwar jo thd,
aur naiiiri hai, athwan wulii hai, aur
mi ndton men se hai, aur haldkat ineri
jata hai.
12 Aur das sing, jo tt'i ue dckhc, das
badshah hairi, jiubon ue ah tak bdd-
hhahat nahin pai ; lekiu us duriiide
jaiiwar ke sdtli ck ad'nt tak badslialio»
ki .-;i ikktiydr pdwenge.
13 Un aab ki ck lii rae Lai, aur m
apud iqtiddr aur ikhtiyar U haiu du ku
denge.
14 We Barre se lardi karenge, aur
Barra u» par galib hogd ; kyunki wuh
kkudiwandon kd Khuddwand, aur
bddah&bon kd Bddshdh hai ; aur we y>
ua ko sith hai», so hulde hde, aur
cka&e hi'ic, aur diydnatdar hai n.
15 l'bir us uc mujbe kahd, W o ]iaiii
jo tu ne dekhc, jahdrj wuhkasbi baithi
hai, so log, aur guroheg, aur qamuen,
aur ahl i zubdn hain.
16 Aur ua haiwdn ke u par we daa
Bing, jo tu nu dekhe, us kaabi se 'ada-
wat karcnge, aur usc be-feas aur
baralma karcnge, aur us ki gosht
khfempi nur us* ag Be jalderige.
17 Kyiinki Khudd ne un Ke dilon
men yih ddld, ki we us ki imirdd bar
Idwcn, aur tik lii rae hon, aur apni
bddshahl us haiwdn ko den, jah tak ki
Khudd ki bdten puri na hon.
IH Aur wuh 'aurat, jise tunedekhd,
N wuh bara shahr hai, jo zamfn ke
bddshdhou par bat'shfthat kartd hai, |
XVIII BA'B.
BA'D un chizoii ke main ne ek
firishte ko dsnidn jiar se utarte
dekhdjiso bara ikhtiyar mili; aur za-
min us ke jalai ku rosliau ho gayi.
2 Aur us ne zor se pukdrke unehi
dwdz s.j yih kaki, ki Bari Bdbul gir
pari, gir pari', wuh dowrm'ka ghar, aur
bar ek gandi ruh ki chauki, aur bar
ek ndpdk aur makruh pariude ki
basera ho gayi.
3 Kyuiiki adri qaumon ne us ki
haramkan ke gazab ki mal pi li, aur
/.amin ke bddslidhoj] ne us ke aath
hardmkdrf ki, aur zaniin ke sauddgar
us ko 'aisih ki ziyddali su daulatmand
hde.
■i Thir main nc ismdn se ek aur
dwd/, yih kahti hiii suni, ki Ai mere
logo, us men se nikal do, td ki tum us
ke gmiahuy men sharik na ho, aur us
ki afaton men "se kuchh tum pai oa
]mru.
D Kyunki us ke gundh dsmdn tak
pahunehe, aur Khudd ue us ki badkd-
rian yad kiri. >
6 Jaisd ns ne tum se suluk kiyd,
waisd hi tum bhlus se suluk kan>, tue
ke kAmon ke muwdl3q do-chand
do; us piyale incti, jise ua lc bhari,
us ke liye'dund bhar do.
7 Jitnd ua ne dp ko nhariddr btt~
ndyd, aur 'aiydshi ki, itne hi us ko
'azab aur gam men dilo : kyunki wuh
apno dil mes kahti hai, ki MaTti mali-
ka bau baithi, aur main to rdud naliiij
hiin, aur kabhi gaui na dckln'mgi.
H Is liye ek hi din men us par
afaten (twengt, ya'ne, maut, aur gam,
aur kdl ; aur wuh a« Be jaldi jaegi ;
kyunki Khuddwand Khudd jo us ki
'addlat kartd liai lorivar hai.
9 Aur zamin ke hddslidb, jinhonnc
us ke £.dth hardmkari aur 'aiyashi ki
hai, jab us ke jaiue kd iihurjwdn
dekhen, us par rne pitenge, aur
10 Ub ke 'azdb ke dur se diir kharc
hue kahonge, Ode ! hde ! Bdbul, wuh
jo honctodh tke. MUKA'SIIAF.
bara shahr, wuh mazbiit ahahr! ek lii
ghari mori teri 'adai at i pahunchi.
11 Aur zamin ke saudagar UI par
roengof aur garu karenge, ki nb koi ud
lii ajnds mol nahig Iet* :
12 Yih jinaen BOM aur rupc ki, aur
jawahinit, aur nioti.aur mlbin kat.tdn,
aur argaw&ni aur rcshmS aur qirmizi
kapre, aur har ok khushbuddr lakri,
aur 'tarah taruh ke hdthi-ddnt ke bar-
tin, aur har ck tarah ki beah-qimat
cho'b ke, aur tambo ke aur lolic nur
sang i marnmr ke b&san,
13 Aur darchini, aur khushbuiiiii,
aur 'itr, aur luban, aur mai, aur tel,
aur saf tnuiila, aur gehiir., aur chdr-
pac, aur bheren, aur ghore, aur gariiirt,
aur guldrn, aur admiun ki jdnen liain.
14 Ab tere dilehasp nie.wi' nijli u
alag ho gaye ; aur sari nafia aur khdssi
khassi cliisen tujhe chhor gayin, aur
tii un ko phir kabht na pawegi.
16 Un cliizon ke saudagar jo us ke
sabab malddr bane the, us ke 'azab ke
khauf so rote aur gam karte luie diir
k ha re rahenge,
ih Aur kahenge, Hie 1 Mo! wuh
bara shahr, jo mihin kapre aur arga-
wa'ni aur qirraizi poshdk pahine, aur
sone aur jawaliir aur motiun ko draara
thil
17 Kyilnki itni bari daulat ek hi
«hari men barbad ho gayi. Aur har
ek na-khuda, aur jabaa par ke «ah
musdfir, nur ddndi, aur jitne ki sa-
mundar eekam rakhte haiii, diir kharc
rahe,
IH Aur us ke jalno kd dhunwAn
dekhkar yiiri pukiir uthe, Kaun dialir
is bare shahr ki manind hai?
19' Aur unhon re apno sirop pai
khak urai, aur ro TO aur gam karke
yiin pukar uthe, Hae I hae 1 aisa bara
shahr, jin nien wo sal) jo Kamnndar
men jahdz ehalato ua ke bare kuaran
se daulatmand ho gayo! wuh ek hi
ghari meu ujar gaya.
20 Ai dsmdn, aur oi muoaddas ra-
833
\T, XIX. Aamanion kn, shukr karnd.
ai'ilo aur paigamharo, ub par khushi
karo; kvdnki Khuda ne us se bom-
hara badld liyi. '
2\ Phir ek zordwar firishte ne ek
patthar, bari chakki kepat ki lnamnit,
uthaya, aur yih kahtc huc samuiular
rn'en" phenki, ki Babul, wuh bara
shahr, yun ?.or ao phenkd jdegd, aur
phir kabhi paya na jaega.
22 Aur barbat-nawaz.m, aur mut-
ribon, aur bdrisli-bajanewaloii, aur nar-
ainga-phnnkuewdbn ki dwdz tujh
uien phir na suni jaegi ; aur kiwi tarah
kd pesha-wdld, koi peslia kyiiii na lio,
tujh men phir paya na jiuga ; aur
chakki ki awaz tujh men phir ua mni
jaegi;
29 Aur phir tujh men kabhi chirig
rothaa na huga; aur phir tujh men
dulha dulhin ki awax kailhi suni na
jaegi ; kyunki tere saudagar zamin ke
asiliraf tho ; aur teri jadilgari se zamin
ki sab qaumen dagA kha gayin.
24 Aur nabion aur muq»ddas logon
ka, aur jitne zamin par qatl hue un
ka lahu us men paVA gaya.
X"IX BA'B.
U N chizon ke ba'd main no asmdn
par liari bhir ki buland si awaz
yih kahti hui hutii, ki Ilallilu-Yah ;
najat, aur jalai, aur 'izzat, aur aodmt,
Khudawand lianiiro Khuda, ki hain ;
2 kyunki ua ki 'adiilaten riat aur
barhnq<| hain : i» liye ki uh iio us bari
kasbi ki, jis ne apni zinakiiri so zamin
ko kharab kiya, 'adalat ki, aur apne
banuon ko lahu kd, badla uh ke hath
ae liya.
3 Phir diisri bar unhon na kahd,
Haltilu-Ydh. Aur ua kd dhdnwdr]
abad-nl-abad uthta rahtd hai.
4 Aur we chaubia bu^urg aur we
chdr jdnddr aundhc muuh gire, aur
Khuda ko, jo takht par baitlia hai,
s'ijda kiyd, aur kahd, A'min; Hallilii-
Ydh.
5 Anr takht se ek awiz yih kahto
hiie nikli, ki Tum sab jo ub ke bando
Uar r f- kd
ho, aur jo us se darte ho, kyi chhote
kya bttM, hamare Khuda ki sitalah
karo.
6 Aw main ne ek hari bhfr ki ef
Awas, aur bahu t piuion ki si iwftji,
nur bare garaj ki si iwiz, yih kahti
Mi «uni, ki Ilallihi-Yih, kyrtnki
Kliudiwand Khuda, Qadir i mutla^,
bidahihut karti hai.
7 A'o, ham khushi o khurrami
karerj, aur us ko 'izzat dewen, is liyc
ki Barn ka byah i palumeba, aur ub
ki dulhin re ap ko sanwAri hai.
8 Aur ubb yih diya gaya ki wuh
naf aur shafta'f railiin kattini kapri
pahine, ki mihiri kattini kapri mu-
qaddas logon ki rastian hai.
9 Aur us m; mujh se kalut, ki
Likh: Mubarak wc haig jo Barre ki
^ 1 1 . i ■- H ke jaalm men. bnlae gayo hnm.
Aur wuh mujh se kahti hai, ki m
Klmdd ki biteij barhiiqq hain.
10 Aur naifi us ke pinwon par UM
nijda kame ko liyo giri. Aur us ne
iiiujlif kaiti, Khabardir aisi na kar ;
ki main tera avir tere bbiion ka, jin
Dia Yi.<i' ki gawihi hai, bun-fUdiStt
i!i,i_i; Khuda ko sijda kar; kynnki
gawihi jo Yisi'i' par hai, uubuwat ki
ri.lj hai,
11 Phir main ne dsnian ko khula
hria dekhi; aur, dekiio, ki ek nuqrtti
ghori; aur jo ua par aawftr haj Aman-
atditr aur Sacheni kahlati hai, aur
wuh l'istise'adalat karti, aur larta hai.
12 Aur ub ki inkhcn Ag ke shua'le
ki minimi, aur us ke Kir yar bahut
sc taj ; aur uska ek nam likhi bui hai
Jtw u» ke eiwa kisi ne na jana.
13 Aur wuh khdn mag diiba lnid
libas pahino thi;' aur us ki nira Ka-
lam i Khuda hai.
14 Aur we faujen jo ismin mCQ
hain, saf aur sufed nur kattini libas
pahine hue, nuqrni ghorog par us ke
piehhe ho Jin.
15 Aur us ke mu n h sc ek tes talwar
nikuHi hai, ki wuh ua se q»umon ko
334
MUKA'SUAFAT, XX.
inire : aur wuh lohe ke 'asi se un par
hukmrani knregi: aur wuh khud
(Jadir i imitlaq Kliudi keqnhro gazab
ki mai ke kolhii men raundti hai.
16 Aur us ke libas aur us ke r;ii:
par vih mim likhi hai, BA'DSHA'H-
ONKA'BA'r)SHA'H,ATJRKHLI>A'.
WANI'ON KA' KHUDA'WAND.
17 l'hir main ne ek firiahte ko
Htiraj men. khare dekhi; aur us tus
buland Awaz se pukira, aur tamim
[lariudou se jo tfsman ko bieh o bieli
tirta hain yih kaha, A'o, aur buaurg
Khudii kojashn meu jam'a lioo;
18 Ta ki tuin badshahon ka gosht,
aur hazarion ki gosht, aur zoriwaron
ki gosht, aur ghonm aur un ko sawir-
tm ki gosht, aur azddoii aur gulitnog
aur chhoton aur baron hab ki gosht
khao.
19 Phir main ac dekhi, ki wuh
darinda jinwar, aur nmfn ke bidshiili,
aur un ki faujen ikat t h i hiiin.ti ki us
wjo ghore par sawar thd aur us ke
Jashkar se lareg.
20 Aur Wlih darinda jinwar pakni
gayi, aur us ke nith jluitlii nabi, /ia
ue us ke hnzur we karfimaten dikhain,
jin bq us ne un ko, jinhoij ne us di»riud;\
jiuwur ki ubhin npne pM i|iibiil kiyi,
aur un ko jo us ki murat ko ptSjta tbe,
gumnih kiyi. Ye donon us aa ki jbil
men, jo gandhak se j:d rabi Imi, jiti-
dilo gaya.
21 A"ur jo bi«p the, so us ghore ke
sawar ki tahvir se, jo UB ke niunh se
nikaltl thi, qatl kiyc gayi-; aur sire
i>arinde uu ku gosht se iar ho gayo.
iX BA'B.
PIIIR main ne ek firishte ko asmau
bo utarte dekhi, jis ke hith men
athdh kue ki kunji, aur ek hari zarijir
thi.
2 Aur us ne us azhdahc ko, jo pu-
rini simp hai, ya'ne. Iblis aur Snaitiu
ko, j':L'i;ni, nir bazar baras Lak jakii.r
rakhi,
3 Aur us ko us athdh ktie uieu
P'ildi Qiyaiu i/,
daki, aur use band kar diyi,
tar Liiuiir ki, t* ki wul ftge ksgpn ku
dagi as d», kb tak buir nma tamani
na bon; ba'd us ko chdhiyc ki wuh
iliuri muddat tak chhuja rahc.
4 Phir main no takht dokho, nur
WO uu par baithe the, aur 'uddlat
uiihen di gayi ; aur mi ki nihon ko
bhl dflkhi, jiuhon ne STisu' ki gawdhi
aur Khudii ke kulim ke wastB RpnA
gir di'yi, aur jinhon. ne na us darinde
janwar, na us ki murat ko pi'ijii, aur
na us ka niahdu apne niithonaurapne
bithorj pai tjtbul kiyi thd; we zinda
hoo, aur Masih ke sdth bazar baras
tak bddahdhi karto rabo.
5 Par Mqi nnmli*, jab tak bazar
baras piirc na htie, na jic. "V il» panil
qiydmat bai.
B Mubarak aur muqaddas wuh jo
panil aiyirMt ineri ihank hai: lisorj
[tar diiuri maut ka kuclih ikhtiydr
naliin, baiki wc Khuda aur Masih ke
kahiii honge, aur us ke satu bazar
baras tak badshahat sangga.
7 Aur jab hazar sal ho ehukcngc,
Shaitan aj'iii q_aid M dihuh'ga,
8 Aur niklegd, td ki un qaumon ko,
jo Kantin ke chdron konon men Lain,
ya'ne, Juj o Maju j ku, l'areb de, aur
uiihen larai ke Ilye jam'a kare: wc
shuniar men, sain undur ki rct ki
maujud liaig.
9 Aur we zamin ki was'at par charh
gaye, aur unhon no muqadaasoTj ktj
chh&oui, aur 'atta Bbahi ko.gher ny»i'
tab asmdn par ne Klnuhl ke p»s Be ftg
utri, aur un ko kha gayi
10 Aur Shaitiiu, jiB no uriheri Candi
diya thd, dg aur gandbak ki jhil nien
dald gaya, jahin wub darinda jdnwar
aur jlnHIid nabi hai n, aur wc rit di u
abad-ul-dbdd 'azih men rahenge.
11 I'hir main ne ek bari safcd
taklif-, aur ua ko, jo uh par baitlia, tha,
dekha, jis ko huzur ne /.amin aur
asiudu buago, aur unben kabin jaga h
ua miii.
ass
MCKA'SHAFAT, XXI. Dusri Qiyamat.
13 Phir main ne dekhd ki murdo,
kya chhfjfc kyd bara, Kbudi ke liuziir
kharohain; aur kiiaben kboli gayi»,
aur ek diisri kitab, Jo /indagi ki hai,
klioll gayi ; aur murdon ki 'adalat, jis
tarah m un kitabon mon likhd thd,
uu ke a'amal ko mufjibiq ki gayi,
13 Aur samundar nc un mnraorj k>i
jo uh men the uelihal phenkd; aur
maut o Hddca B6 un murdon ko jo un
men tba hirir kiya; aur un men le
liar ek ki 'adalat us ko kamon ke
muwafiq ki gayi.
14 Phir maut aur Hadas Ag ki jhil
men dile gaye. Ylh ddtfri maut hai.
15 Aur bar ok jis kd zikr zindagi ki
kitdb men na mila, wuh dg ki jhil
men ddla gayi.
XXI BA'B.
PHIR main ne ek naye asmdu aur
nayi zamin ko dekhi; kyunki
agld dsmdn auragli zamlnjdti rahi thi ;
aur samundar bhl mutlaq na rabi.
2 Aur mujh Yuliunnd no shahr
mutjftddas, nayi Ya.ruBn.lam, ko ismdn
bo dulhm ki minimi, jis ne apne
shauhar ke liye ip ko singdr kiyd,
irista huo Knudd ko pas ho utarte
dekhi.
3 Aur main ne ek bari iwdz yih
kahti bui dsmdn ko suni, ki Dekh,
Kliudd kd khiiima idmion ko sitli hai,
aur wuh uu ke sath niktfnat ktcegi,
ir we us ke log honge, aur Khuda,
i kd Khuda, dp un ke satu rahegd.
i Aur Khuda un ki irtkhoj U bu
«k ansii poneUhc-gd; aur jihir uiaut ita
hogi i *ur na jeiil|1> aiir DA u«-la, aur na
plnr dukli hogftj kyiinki agli chizen
guzar gayin.
o Aur us ne jo takht par baitha thd
kaba, Dekh, main 'sftb kuohb nayd
kuti lu'in. Aur us ne mujh ne kalin,
fjikh, kyiinki yo bdton sach aur
barhaqq haln.
6 Aur u» ne mujhe kahd, ki Ho
cbuUi. Main Alfa aur Otiuv^i, it>t\ .ia
aur intihd hun. Main ub ko, jo piyama
Naya&fman,onmtiz<im,\n. Ml'KA'SrTAFA'T, XXII. A'tmani Yar&mJam,
hai. Ah hHyAt kechashme H ninft pinc 17 Phir ub ne m ki dtwar ko ndpA,
duggd. to us admi ke hdth sn, jo firishla thA,
7 Jo gAlib hotA hai, «o sah chizon ok sini chaudlis h Aib. paya.
k A waria hogd ; aur main iis kA Khudi
hiingA, aur wuh tuerA hetA hoga.
8 Par dAruewdkm, aur be-imdnon,
aur tiafratii.iTi, aur kJu'inion, aur har-
Atiikdrorj, aur jAdiipiron, aur but-
panutan, aur s&n jhiithn!) k.ihissa usi
jhil men hoga, jo Ag aur gandhak Ke
jaili ; yih dnsri maut hai.
9 Aur ek nn sdt firishton rnen se,
jin ke pAs w« sat piyilo pichhli sdt
Afaton hc bbare t!ie, mujh pasaya, aur
mujh se y uli kaliko bola, ki Iilhar A,
main tujherfuihiu, ya'ueBarrc ki joni,
uikhAuugd.
10 Aur raujhe ba waz'a ruhdiii ek
liare aur tinchc pakar par !c gaya, aur
ub ne us buzurg shahr ko, auwgddM
Yarrisrdam ko, dsman par n KhudA
ke pas ee utorte dikhAyA;
11 Ub men Kbudd ki jalai thA:
aur us ki roshni bo-nihAyat qimati
jawdhir ki si, us yashm ki minind tlii,
jo billaur ki tarah shaffdf bo ;
12 Aur us ki ban aur iinc)?i diwdr
thi, aur us ke bdrnh darwdze, aur un
darwAznn par birah firishto the, aur
un par nira likhe the, jo bani Israel
ke bArah. firqon ke hain :
13 Purab ko tin darwiize ; u Uar ko
tin darwdze ; dakhin ko tin darwdze ;
aur pachclihim ko tin darwize the.
14 Aur ub Bbahr ki diwar ki barah
neweg thfn, aur un par Darre ke
bArah rasiilon ke nAra the.
16 Aur jo mujh se bol raba thA, ua
ko hdth uieg sono ki ek jarib thi, IA
ki us shahr, aur us ko darwdzon, aur
us ki diwAr ko nApe.
16 Aur 0* shahr ki ihdta chaukoni
hai, aur us kA lamban itnd hai, jitni
as ki chauriu : aur us ne shahr ko ua
jarib se nspkar barai hazir sladins
(ya'ne, sArhe sat sau kos.) payA. Aur
us kd JambAn, aur cbauran, aur i'in-
chdn eksAn hain.
336
18 Aur ua ki diwdr yashm ki baui
ini: aur wuh shahr k halia sono ka,
shaiTdl shishe ki minind, thA.
10 Aur uh shahr ki diwdr ki newen
bar tarah ke jawihir so Arasta timi.
Pahli neo, yashm ki thi : diiuri, nilniu
ki ; tiari, shab-chmljr, ki ; chautbi,
zumurrud ki ;
20 PAnchwin, 'aqiq ki; chhathi',
la'l ki ; sAtwiu, sunalire patthar ki ;
athwin, firoze. ki ; nawiri, zabarjad ki ;
dnswig, yamani ki ; gyiraliwin, sang
sumbuli ki; birahwiri, yaaiit kf.
21 Aur bArali darwAze bArah moti
the; har darwaza ek ck moti kA; aur
shahr ki sarak khalia sone ki,
sbatlaf shishc ki inAuiud, thf.
22 Aur main ne us nien koi haikal
na dekhi : is liye ki KhuilAwand Khu-
dA QA<Iir i mutlaq aur Barra us ki
haikal bain.
13 Aur Wuh shahr siiraj ki muhtij
nahiij, aur ria eh And kA, ki we us ko
roshon karen ; kydiiki KhudA ke jalAl
ne uso roshan kar rakhd hai, aur
Barra us ki roshni hai.
24 Aur we qainuen jiuhon ne najdt
i us ki roshni rnen phiren^i; aur
zamin ke badshAhapnd jaldlaur'iz/.at
us men lAte hain,
25 Alir us ke darwaze kabhi dfa ko
band na hongo : ki rAt wahdn na hogi.
26 Aur we /[«union ke jalai aur
lg»t ko us meg lAwenge.
27 Aur koi chia jo ndpdk, ya naf-
rat-anpei!, j i jhi'ith hai, us meg kisi
tarah dar na Awegi ; magar sirf we hl
jo Barrc ki kitib i hayAt men likhe
h do h&in.
XX TI BA'B.
PHIR us ue AT> i hayat ki ek saf
nnddf miijhe dikliAi, jo billaur
tara]] ib&ffaf, nur Khuda aur Barre
ke takut se nikalti Uli.
2 Aur us ki saruk ke bicb, aur us
A'siiniiti YartUitfruii
naddi ko .warpir y.iudagi ki dilabili
tlui, jo biraii en'sm ku pbal lita, aur
har ck mahine inen opini (ibai deti
tlui ; aur uh davakhl ke patte qauincm
ki siliri ke waste the.
S Aur phir koi la'nat na kogi : aur
Khudi aur ISarre ki taklit us mag
■ hoga ; aur us ko bande us ki bandagi
karenge :
4 Aur wo us ki munh dekheuge ;
aur us ki ndm uu ke mithon, par
iiogi.
5 Aur wahin. l-it na hogi : aur wa
'birig aur siiraj ki roskni ke lmiktij
nali'm; ky iriki Kbudiwaud Klnidii mi
ko roshau kurti hal ; aur W8 abad-ul-
abad bddshalmt karenge,
6 I'hk us ne ruujno kahi, ki Ye
biten sach ani- barhaqq liain
inuqnddas nabion ke Khudiwand
Khudi nc apnc firishte ko bbeji, ki
un chizon ko, jin ki jald hona ztinir
hai, apne bandon pnr zihir karc.
7 Dekii, main jald ati lilin : niubi-
-,ik wuli jo is kitib ki imbiiwat U
biton ko liifn karti hai.
8 Aur m uj h Yihauni ne un chizon
ko deklia, aur suni. Aur jab main ne
Mini aur dekhi, fab uh Brishte ke
pinwori par, jis nc mujhe ya ehi/.eu
dikhiiij, bijua kamu ko giri.
9 Tab us ne niujh se kaki, KJmb-
ardir, ftisi ne kur ; kyiinki main teri,
aur nabion ki jo tere bliai hain, aur un
ki jo is kitib ki titer hii'z karte- hain,
ham-khidmat hun : Khudi ko uijd~a
10 Phir us ne mujh se kaki, ki Tu
us kitib ki nuMwat ki biton pai
imlii- ruat rakh : kyi'ujki waqt ruuraik
hai.
11 Jo na-rist hai, ao ni-rast lii
rahe : aur j" najis liiii, so najis hi rabe :
aur jo rastljiz hai, so ristbaz hi ruhe :
MUKA'SHAFAT, XXII. h hUM H ihdtima.
turjo ui.u|nilikis hai, ao mngaddaa hi
rahe.
12 Aur, dekil, main jald iti bin ;
aur mori air uioro sith hai, ti ki har
ck ko un ke kini ke mmviliq bauli
ildn.
13 Main Alfi aur Omagi, ibtida
aur infiha, auwal 0 akhir hun.
14 Muliirak vre hain jo us ko
hukmen par 'amal karte bain, ti ki
zindagi ko darakht par un ki ibirtiyar
lio, aur wo un darwiwn ae Bhahr men
dikail howen,
i". Uagur kiif.iv, aur jadigar, aur
harimkir, aur kMni, ihit butpamsr.,
aur jo kol jiiith ko ciibti aur bolti
hai, aab bahar linin.
1(3 Mujh YifiiV nc npne flriaht* ko
biiejd, ki ttuu ko kalisivion ke dar-
niiyin in bateg ki gawlai de. Sfaln
Daad ki asi o nasi, aur aneh ki nii-
i;ini altin hun.
17 Aur Hub aur dulhin kabti hain,
A'. Atu jo sunti bai, kahe, A'. Aur
jo piyisi hai, iwe. Aur jo kol cliilii',
ib i hayit mufL le.
18 Kyunki uiaiii har ek fthakha ke
liye, jo is kitib ki nubuwat ki biten
anuti hai, yih gawahl data hun, ki
Agar koi in biton men kuclih hai .riv.--,
to Kliu<ii un ill'akiii k" Jo is kitib
men likhi bain, us par bariiiwegi :
lit Aur agar koi is nubiiwat kt
kitab ki baum inen so l;uehh nikil
daJe, to Kluidi us ki bisaa kitib i
hayat se, aur sindir i inu.jadikis sr, aur
i i |> is kitib men likhi hain,
nikil dilema.
20 Wub jo in chizon ki gawihl
deti liai, yih kahti hai, ki Main
ya(|ina.u jald iti hiin. A'min. Hiri,
i Kbudiwand Yisii', i.
l'l Hamire ^hudiwaiidYiau'Mafilh
ki fazl tum sah ke sith hoive. A'min.
KATE 'aHD-NaMI: K.V KilATiUA IR.\
20 seconds for Fellow Christians - Dear Lord,
Thank you thatthis PDF Ebook
has been released s o that we are able
to learn more about you and wiser versions.
Please help itto have wide circulation
Please help the people responsible for
making this Ebook available.
Please help them to be able to have more
resources available to help others.
Please help them to have all the resources,
the funds, the strength and the time that they
need and ask for in order to be able
to keep working for You.
I pray that you would encourage them and
that you protect them physically and
spiritually, and the work & ministry that
they are engaged in.
I pray that you would protect them from the
Spiritual or other Forces that could harm them
or their work and projects, or slowthem down.
Please help them to find Godly friends who
are able to help. Provide helpful transportation
for their consistent use.
Remind me to pray for them often as this
will help and encourage them.
Please give them your wisdom and
understanding sothey can better followyou,
and I ask you to do
these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,
Prayers
a Few Resources
Ideas and Ebooks (Livres / Libros)
For your Consideration
Glad to have this New Testament ?
Help us by PRAYING for us !!
Invest in your own Eternity
Spend time praying !
(thank you)
SHARE THIS PDF (E-Book) with your Friends
So thatthey will have a stronger
Spiritual Life ALSO
Concerning Christians and Christianity
1. Christians are those who follow the teachings
ofJesusChrist.
2. The Teachings of Jesus Christ are explained in the
book called the Gospel (Injil) or the New Testament.
3. The New Testament is the First Place to find and record
the teachings of Jesus Christ, by those who actually knew Him.
4. The New Testament has never been disproved
archeologically or historically. It has and remains accurate.
5. The New Testament P redicts thatcertainevents will happen in the
Future,
7. The ReliabilityoftheOld Testament and the New Testa menta re
clear indications of the accuracy ofthe New Testament,
8. J esus C hrist did Notfail in His missionon Earth.
9. Jesus Christ P re-existed, This means thatHeexisted BEFORE
the Creation ofthe World.
10. When C hristians worship J esus C hrist, they are NOT worshiping
another Human being,
11. J esus C hrist did notbecomeGod by performing good works,
12. Christians cannotperform good works in order to go to Heaven. Those
who wantto find God mustadmit they are notable to be PerfectorHoly,
and that they need the helpofGod to helpthemgetridoftheirSins,
14, More than 500 M illion Christians around the world todayare NOT
Roman Catholic, The Vaticandoes NOT speakfor C hristianity in many
situations.
Concerning Christians and Christianity (2)
1 5. Judas did NOT die in the place of Jesus Christ on
the cross.
16. Jesus Christ had no motive to escape his fate. Jesus Christ
was born to communicate His message of Hope and
Redemption for mankind.
1 7. Without the Blood of Jesus, it would be impossible for those
who believe in Jesus Christ to be saved, to have Eternal Life.
18. Christians worship ONE God, NOT three Gods,
19. InTrue Christianity, Historically, the Trinity is =
a) God the Father
b) God the Son
c) God the Holy Spirit
20. The worship of Angels orCreated Beings, orCreatures oranything
exceptGod (God the Father, God the Son [Jesus Christ],
and God the Holy Spirit, isforbidden.
21. The Trinity IS NOT = Mary, J oseph and J esus
22. The Trinity is NOT = J esus, J oseph and God the Father
23. Gabriel is NOTanothernameforJesus Christ.
24. Anyone can become a Christian if they wantto.
25. Christianity IS notsomething thatcan bedone EXTERNALLY.
A person is a Christian becauseof whatthey believe in theirHeart,
inside of them.Theirown sincerity before God is the true test.
26. Those who acceptan electronic mark[666] forthe purchaseofgoods,
in their right hand orforehead are NOT able to become Christians.
Concerning Christians and Christianity (3)
Peopleare innocent if they do not know and have no wayofknowing that
theyaredoing wrong.The Christian God places theknowledgeofgood
and bad in the hearts of each and every individual.
NooneexceptGod is Holy.
Itis wrong to murder innocent people.
It is wrong to kill Christians who have notactively harmed anyone.
People are NOT Christians simply because theirfamily is "Christian".
Peopleare NOT Christian because they are born INTO a "Christian"family.
Apersoncannotbecomea Christian "AUTOMATICALLY".
Noonecan beBORN a Christian, butbecominga true Christian will guarantee
Eternal Life, in Heaven and with God.
ThePresumptionthata person is a Christian simply because they are
going into a Church and sitting there is False.
Churches have people inside of them thatare NOT Christian, butthey
wantto learn more aboutGod.
A Church, or a Church Official CANNOT MAKE anyone a Christian.
Christians do NOT convertanyone by Force, because this action is a
violationoftheCHOlCES thatGOD alone is abletomake.To force others would
suggestthatGod is weak, and cannotdothis by H imself. The Christian God has
much Strength butuses ittoshow loveand help in this life, notunkindness.
OnlyGod could FORCE someone to do something againsttheir will, and
the C reator of the Universedoes NOT behavein thatmanner.
The Choice of whatto believe or notto believe is up to Each individual,
who mustmake uptheirown mind, oftheirfree will.
There is no way to impose Christianity on anyone by Force.
Conversions by Force to Islam are NOTrecognized byGOD or Christians.
Concerning Christians and Christianity (4)
Those who are converted from Christianity to Islam by Force
or coercion, are Still Christian, AND STILL considered Christian.
Once a person is recognized by God as a genuine Christian, they are
"sealed" permanently. There is no way for any Human to change this.
Forcing any Christian to say that they convert or accept Islam simply
makes that Christian to state something which is FALSE. There is
no such thing as Genuine conversion that God can recognize
OUT of Christianity, if that person was a Christian.
To suggest that Christians could be converted by Force, actually
means (signifies) that there are actions that humans can take that can
FORCE God somehow to UNDO or ALTER what He has done. This is
not the case. Actions that Humans Force other Humans to take are
not recognized by God as a true Change of Mind, ora Change of Heart
Once a person becomes a Christian, Ali of their sins (past, present,
and future) are forgiven. They are reconciled to God for Eternity, and
nothing can change this. Forced Conversionsto Islam are not considered
Valid eitherby God or Christians. No one can undo in the Heart of
a person, what God can do. The link between a Christian and God
is a link that Cannot be broken. Saying anything to the contrary
will not alter or change this.
Christians do not Depend on their sanctuaries or Church buildings
in order to meet with God. Harming a building againsttheGod who made
the Universe is not a genuine sign of success or progress. Christians
simply make use of any buildings. Christians are able to meet and
pray and talk to God by themselves, wit a Church building and
without a Priest or Pastor. God is always with them.
Harming a Church building simply proves that some people are afraid
of Church Buildings. That is all. The Earliest Christians did not have
Churches or Buildings for Hundreds of Years.
Harming a Church Building does not harm God, and itdoes not harm
Christians. It simply makes them go and use a different building, or
to meet without one.
Concerning Christians and Christianity (5)
Some people have not examined churches very much. MANY are
very simple and do NOT have decorations or much inside of them.
In Christianity, this is intentional. This symbolism is on purpose,
intending to signify that the INNER LIFE of the Christian, is what is
importantto God, and NOT the building in which people worship.
Man looks on the external and outward appearance. GOD looks on
the inner heart of each individual.
There would be no reason for anyone to become upset, if they did
not think that Christianity was making progress. Those who are upset
are upset because Christianity has answers, reasons and arguments
that do not seem to be defeated. God is big enough to defend himself.
If Christianity is false, it should be possible to explain to Christians
why and how Christianity is false. Killing or harming Christians is only
an excuse, a method of hiding from the reality that intellectual
conversation and explanations of those who are violent do NOT have
the answers to defend with kindness or reason what they believe.
Christians believe that almost all violence is a waste of time. It does
not accomplish what it is "supposed" to accomplish. Those who
have arguments are able to advance those and explain them to others
Those who do not use violence instead. This method does not
convince Christians or others to adopt methods of violence.
People become like the God they serve. If the God they serve is
unkind and unmerciful, that is what the followers become. If the God
being worshiped is cruel and mean to women and children, then that
is what the followers of that God usually will become.
Jesus Christ is love. Christians try to be loving.
People have the option of accepting to believe in the Teachings of
Jesus Christ in the New Testament or rejecting those teaching. The
choice in this life is up to each person. God is the one who makes
His own rules. Thankfully, the God of this world decided to use
Love and kindness to explain Himself so that all of us would have
a chance to learn and to experience the unconditional love of Jesus
Christ. (books are listed in this Ebook. Those who want to refute
Christianity may want to start by refuting the books listed in this PDF)
Concerning Christians and Christianity (6)
True Christians are NOT afraid to have conversations with those who are not
Christians. Christians are NOT afraid to have conversations with those who are
islamic or from any other faith.
Christians are NOT afraid to talk aboutthe weakness of Christianity, ifthatis a topic
someone else wants to discuss.
Christians willnotstoneyou orharmyou becauseyou disagree with them.
Christian will notmakeyouslave IF you do NOT convertto Christianity.
Those who truly believe in theTRUTH ofwhattheyclaim to believe are NOT afraid
to discuss the contentof whatthey believe with other people.
Christians mayshare with you thatyou are not 100% perfectand Holy, and Christians
will Admitand acknowledge thatTHEY are NOT perfectorHoly.
Christians admitthattheyneed asavior, thattheycannotbegoodenough on their
own.andthattheycannotperform ENOUGH good and HOLY actions to pleaseGod.
Thatis thestarting pointforanyonetobecomea Christian.
Those who engage Christians in discussions aboutreligion should be willing to look
atthe history, the archeology, the science and all of the aspects of religion and the
books thattheyuseordefend. Thatis simplybeing honest. And those who seek
spiritual truth are NOT afraid to discuss honestiy issues of religion.
IF GOD is GOD, then GOD will STILL be GOD after a conversation takes place.
Those who follow God should be willing to think and use the mind thatGod gave to
them. IF God gave people a mind, HE expects them to use it. Discussions are part
of the use of the mind.
There is a lot of history about OTHER religions thatcan befound in the West. In
other nations, FEAR ofbeing wrong induces and provokes censorship. But history
can be proven and demonstrated. The Dead Sea Scrolls were found in 1947-48.
Those scrolls contained the J ewish Old Testament. They were dated scientifically
tobe 200yearsOLDER than the time of J esus Christ. The J ewish Old Testament
has NOTbeenchangedoraltered.This issimplya scientific and historic Fact.
God Preserves His Word. His word is the Old and New Testament. IF you are
seeking truth, what do you have to fear from Truth ?
Concerning History and the Early Church
Christians do NOT pray to MARY. The Bible never teaches to Pray
to Mary. Mary was born a human sinner, and became a Christ-follower.
Prayers to ANY Human (Except Jesus Christ, who was God
who became Human for a short time) is IDOLATRY
Christians do not pray To Statues, which is IDOLATRY
Christians do not pray To Icons, which is a Graven Image,
which is ALSO IDOLATRY.
The Early Church and the Early Christians did NOT pray to Mary.
The Early Church and the Early Christians did NOT pray to Saints,
as this would be blasphemy, and taking worship and adoration
away from God.
It is the Mediation of Jesus Christ alone which serves to
communicate between God and Man, and NOT any other Human.
Christians know which books of the Bible are part of the Bible and
belong in the Bible. There is a great deal of evidence and
documentation over the whole world for the conclusion, about
which books belong in the Bible.
Some books mav help to clarifv or explain (these are Free Books):
Forthose who read English:
1) The Seventh General Council (held 787 AD) in which the
Worship of Images was established, by John Mendham - 1850
2) Image worship in the Church of Rome by James Endell Tyler
3) Primitive Christian Worship by James Endell Tyler
4) The worship of Mary [proven to be Unbiblical]
by James Endell Tyler
THESE BOOKS are AVAILABLE For FREE ONLINE
Concerning History and the Early Church
We recommend, foryour potential consideration,
the following books:
1) The Seventh General Council (held 787 AD) in which the
Worship of Images was established, with copious notes
from the Caroline books compiled by order of
Charlemagne by Rev John Mendham - 1850
2) Image worship in the Church of Rome by James Endell Tyler
The image-worship of the Church of Rome : proved to be contrary
to Holy Scripture and the faith and discipline of the primitive church
and to invoive contradictory and irreconcilable doctrines within the
Church of Rome itself (1847)
3) Primitive Christian Worship by James Endell Tyler
Primitive christian worship, or, The evidence of Holy Scripture and
the church, concerning the invocation of saints and angels, and the
blessed Virgin Mary (1840)
4) The worship of Mary by James Endell Tyler
5) The Pope of Rome and the popes of the Oriental Orthodox
Church
by Caesarious Tondini (1875) also makes for interesting reading,
even though it is a Roman Catholic work which was approved
with the Nihil Obstat (not indexed by the inquisition) notice.
THESE BOOKS are AVAILABLE For FREE ONLINE
Concerning History and the Roman Catholic Church
Historic Information on the Roman Catholic Church
can be found - in online searches - under the words:
papai, roman catholic, papist, popish,
romanist, vatican, popery, romish,
There are many free Ebooks available
online and at Google that cover these topics.
There is of course the Standard
works on the proven history of the Vatican:
The Two Babylons by Alexander Hislop, which uses
more than 200 ancient Latin and Greek sources.
The Roman Schism illustrated from the Records
of the Earlv Roman Catholic Church
by Rev. Perceval.
Those who have trouble with Vatican documents concerning
early Church Councils should conduct their own research
into a document called the "Donation of Constantine",
which was the false land grant from the Roman Emperors
to the Vatican.
Saved - How To become a
Christian
how to be saved
A Christian is someone
who believes the
following
Steps to Take 'm order to become a
true Christian, to be Saved & Have a
real relationship & genuine
experience with the real God
Read, understand, accept and
believe the following verses from
the Bible:
1. AM men are sinners and fail short
of God's perfect Standard
Romans 3: 23 states that
For all have sinned, and come short of
the glory of God;
2. Sin - which is imperfection in our
lives - denies us eternal life with
God. But God sent his son Jesus
Christ as a gift to give us freely
Eternal Life by believing on Jesus
Christ.
Romans 6: 23 states
For the wages of sin is death; but the
gift of God is eternal life through Jesus
Christ our Lord.
3. You can be saved, and you are
saved by Faith in Jesus Christ. You
cannot be saved by your good
works, because they are not "good
enough". But God's good work of
sending Jesus Christ to save us,
and our response of believing - of
having faith - in Jesus Christ, that is
what saves each of us.
Ephesians 2: 8-9 states
8 For by grace are ye saved through
faith; and that not of yourselves: it is
the gift of God:
9 Not of works, lest any man should
boast.
4.God did not wait for us to become
perfect in order to accept or
unconditionally love us. He sent
Jesus Christ to save us, even
though we are sinners. So Jesus
Christ died to save us from our sins,
and to save us from eternal
separation from God.
Romans 5:8 states
But God commendeth his love toward
us, in that, while we were yet sinners,
Christ died for us.
5. God loved the world so much that
He sent his one and only Son to die,
so that by believing in Jesus Christ,
we obtain Eternal Life.
John 3: 16 states
For God so loved the world, that he
gave his only begotten Son, that
whosoever believeth in him should not
perish, but have everlasting life.
6. If you believe in Jesus Christ, and
in what he did on the Cross for us,
by dying there for us, you know for a
fact that you have been given
Eternal Life.
I John 5: 13 states
These things have I written unto you
that believe on the name of the Son of
God; that ye may know that ye have
eternal life, and that ye may believe on
the name of the Son of God.
7. If you confess your sins to God,
he hears you take this step, and you
can know for sure that He does hear
you, and his response to you is to
forgive you of those sins, so that
they are not remembered against
you, and not attributed to you ever
again.
I John 1 : 9 states
If we confess our sins, he is faithful and
just to forgive us our sins, and to
cleanse us from all unrighteousness.
If you believe these verses, or want
to believe these verses, pray the
following:
" Lord Jesus, I need you. Thank you
for dying on the cross for my sins. I
open the door of my life and ask you
to save me from my sins and give
me eternal life. Thank you for
forgiving me of my sins and giving
me eternal life. I receive you as my
Savior and Lord. Please take control
of the throne of my life. Make me the
kind of person you want me to be.
Help me to understand you, and to
know you and to learn how to follow
you. Free me from all of the things in
my life that prevent me from
following you. In the name of the
one and only and true Jesus Christ I
ask all these things now, Amen".
Does this prayer express your desire to
know God and to want to know His love
? If you are sincere in praying this
prayer, Jesus Christ comes into your
heart and your life, just as He said he
would.
It often takes courage to decide to
become a Christian. It is the right
decision to make, but It is difficult to
fight against part of ourselves that
wants to hang on, or to find against
that part of our selves that has
trouble changing. The good news is
that you do not need to change
yourself. Just Cry out to God, pray
and he will begin to change you.
God does not expect you to become
perfect before you come to Him. Not
at alL.this is why He sent Jesus...so
that we would not have to become
perfect before being able to know
God.
Steps to take once you have asked
Jesus to come into you r life
Find the following passages in the
Bible and begin to read them:
1. Read Psalm 23 (in the middle of
the Old Testament - the 1st half of
the Bible)
2. Read Psalm 91
3. Read the Books in the New
Testament (in the Bible) of John,
Romans & I John
4. Tell someone of your prayer and
your seeking God. Share that with
someone close to you.
5. Obtain some of the books on the
list of books, and begin to read
them, so that you can understand
more about God and how He works.
6. Pray, that is - just talk to and with
God, thank Him for saving you, and
tell him your
fears and concerns, and ask him for
help and guidance.
7. email or tell someone about the
great decision you have made today
m
Does the "being saved"
process only work for those
who believe ?
For the person who is not yet
saved, their understanding of
1) their state of sin and 2) God's
personal love and care for
them, and His desire and
ability to save them....is what
enables anyone to become
saved.
So yes, the "being saved"
process works only for those
who believe in J esus Christ
and Him only, and place their
faith in Him and in His work
done on the Cross.
■ ■■and if so , then how does
believing save a person?
Believing saves a person because of
what it allows God to do in the Heart
and Soul of that person.
But it is not simply the fact of a
"belief". The issue is not having
"belief" but rather what we have a
belief about.
IF a person believes in Salvation by
Faith Alone in Jesus Christ (ask us
by email if this is not clear), then
That belief saves them. Why ?
because they are magical ?
No, because of the sovereignty of
God, because of what God does to
them, when they ask him into their
heart & life. When a person decides
to place their faith in Jesus Christ
and ask Him to forgive them of
their sins and invite Jesus Christ
into their life & heart, this is what
saves them - because of what God
does for them at that moment in
time.
At that moment in time when they
sincerely believe and ask God to
save them (as described above),
God takes the life of that person,
and in accordance with the will of
that human, having requested God
to save them from their sins through
Jesus Christ - God takes that
person's life and sins [all sins past,
present and future], and allocates
them to the category: of "one of
those people who Accepted the Free
Gift of Eternal Salvation that God
offers".
From that point forward, their sins
are no longer counted against them,
because that is an account that is
paid by the shed blood of Jesus
Christ. And there is no person that
could ever sin so much, that God's
love would not be good enough for
them, or that would somehow not be
able to be covered by the penalty of
death that Jesus Christ paid the
price for. (otherwise, sin would be
more powerful than Jesus Christ -
which is not true).
Sometimes, People have trouble
believing in Jesus Christ because of
two extremes:
First the extreme that they are not
sinners (usually, this means that a
person has not committed a "serious"
sin, such as "murder", but God says that
all sins separates us from God, even
supposedly-small sins. We - as humans
- tend to evaluate sin into more serious
and less serious categories, because we
do not understand just how serious
"small" sin is).
Since we are all sinners, we all have
a need for God, in order to have
eternal salvation.
Second the extreme that they are
notgood enough for Jesus Christ to
save them. This is basically done by
those who reject the Free offer of
Salvation by Christ Jesus because
those people are -literally - unwilling
to believe. After death, they will
believe, but they can only chose
Eternal Life BEFORE they die.
The fact is that all of us, are not
good enough for Jesus Christ to
save them. That is why Paul wrote in
the Bible "For all have sinned, and
come short of the glory of God"
(Romans 3:23).
Thankfully, that is not the end of the
story, because he also wrote " For the
wages of sin is death; but the gift of God
is eternal life through Jesus Christ our
Lord. "(Romans 6: 23)
That Free offer of salvation is
clarified in the following passage:
John 3: 16 For God so loved the
world, that he gave his only
begotten Son, that whosoever
believeth in him should not perish,
but have everlasting life.
17 For God sent not his Son into the
world to condemn the world; but
that the world through him might be
saved.
Prayers that count
The prayers that God hears
We don't make the rules any more
than you do. We just want to help
others know how to reach God, and
know that God cares about them
personally.
The only prayers that make it to
Heaven where God dwells are those
prayers that are prayed directly to
Him "through Jesus Christ" or "in
the name of Jesus Chrisf.
God hears our prayers because we
obey the method that God has
established for us to be able to
reach him. If we want Him to hear
us, then we must use the methods
that He has given us to
communicate with Him.
And he explains - in the New
Testament - what that method is:
talking to God (praying) in
accordance with God's will - and
coming to Him in the name of Jesus
Christ. Here are some examples of
that from the New Testament:
(Acts 3:6) Then Peter said, Silver and
gold have I none; but such as I have give
I thee: In the name of Jesus Christ of
Nazareth rise up and walk.
(Acts 16:18) And this did she many days.
But Paul, being grieved, turned and said
to the spirit, I command thee in the
name of Jesus Christ to come out of her.
And he came out the same hour.
(Acts 9:27) But Barnabas took him, and
brought him to the apostles, and
declared unto them how he had seen the
Lord in the way, and that he had spoken
to him, and how he had preached boldly
at Damascus in the name of Jesus.
(2 Cor 3:4) And such trust have we
through Christ to God-ward: (i.e.
toward God)
(Gal 4:7) Wherefore thou art no more a
servant, but a son; and if a son, then an
heir of God through Christ.
(Eph 2:7) That in the ages to come he
might show the exceeding [spiritual]
riches of his grace in his kindness toward
us through Christ Jesus.
(Phil 4:7) And the peace of God, which
passeth all understanding, shall keep
your hearts and minds through Christ
Jesus.
(Acts 4:2) Being grieved that they taught
the people, and preached through Jesus
the resurrection from the dead.
(Rom 1:8) First, I thank my God
through Jesus Christ for you all, that
your faith is spoken of throughout the
whole world.
(Rom 6:11) Likewise reckon ye also
yourselves to be dead indeed unto sin,
but alive unto God through Jesus Christ
our Lord.
(Rom 6:23) For the wages of sin is death;
but the gift of God is eternal life through
Jesus Christ our Lord.
(Rom 15:17) I have therefore whereof I
may glory through Jesus Christ in those
things which pertain to God.
(Rom 16:27) To God only wise, be glory
through Jesus Christ for ever. Amen.
(1 Pet 4:11) ...if any man minister, let
him do it as of the ability which God
giveth: that God in all things may be
glorified through Jesus Christ, to whom
be praise and dominion for ever and
ever. Amen.
(Gal 3:14) That the blessing of Abraham
might come on the Gentiles through
Jesus Christ; that we might receive the
promise of the [Holy] Spirit through
faith.
(Titus 3:6) Which he shed on us
abundantly through Jesus Christ our
Saviour;
(Heb 13:21) Make you perfect in every
good work to do his will, working in you
that which is wellpleasing in his sight,
through Jesus Christ; to whom be glory
for ever and ever. Amen.
Anyone who has guestions is encouraged to contact us bv
email, with the address that is posted on our website.
Note for Foreign Language and
International Readers & Users
Foreign Language Versions of the
Introduction and Postcript/Afterword
will be included (hopefully) in future
editions.
IF a person wanted to become a Christian, what would they pray ?
God, I am praying this to you so that you will help me. Please help
me to want to know you better. Please help me to become a Christian.
God I admit that I am not perfect. I understand that you cannot allow
anyone into Heaven who is not perfect and Holy. I understand that
if I believe in Jesus Christ and in what He did, that God you will
see my life through the sacrifice of Jesus Christ, and that this will
allow me to have eternal life and know that I am going to Heaven.
God, I admit that I have sin and things in my life that are not perfect.
I know I have sinned in my life. Please forgive me of my sins.
I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God, that He came to Earth
to save those who ask Him, and that He died to pay the penalty for
all of my sins.
I understand that Jesus physically died and physically arose from the
dead, and that God can forgive me because of the death and
resurrection of Jesus Christ. I thank you for dying for me, and for
paying the price for my sins. I accept to believe in you, and I thank
you Lord God from all of my heart for your help and for sending
your Son to die and raise from the Dead.
I pray that you would help me to read your word the Bible. I
renounce anything in my life, my thoughts and my actions that is
not from you, and I do this in the name of Jesus Christ. Help me
to not be spiritually deceived. Help me to grow and learn how to have
a strong Christian walk for you, and to be a good example, with your
help. Help me to have and develop a love of your word the Bible, and
please bring to my life, people and situations that will help me to
understand how to live my life as your servant. Help me to learn
how to share the good news with those who may be willing to learn
or to know. I ask these things in the name of Jesus Christ, and
I thank you for what you have done for me, Amen.
Please Remember: Christianity is NEVER forced. No one can
force anyone to become a Christian. God does NOT recognize
any desire for Him, unless it is genuine and motivated from
the inside of each of us.
Prayers for help to God
In MANY LANGUAGES
For YOU, for US, for your Family
Dear God,
Thank you that this New Testament has been released so
that we are able to learn more about you.
Please help the people responsible for making this
Electronic book available. Please help them to be able to
work fast, and make more Electronic books available
Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the
strength and the time that they need in order to be able to
keep working for You.
Please help those that are part of the team that help them on
an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue
and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the
work that you want them to do. Please help each of them to
not have fear and to remember that you are the God who
answers prayer and who is in charge of everything.
I pray that you would encourage them,
and that you protect them, and the work & ministry that they
are engaged in. I pray that you would protect them from
the Spiritual Forces or other obstacles that could harm them
or slow them down.
Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think
of the people who have made this edition available, so that I
can pray for them and so they can continue to help more
people
I pray that you would give me a love of your
Holy Word (the New Testament), and that you would give
me spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better
and to understand the period of time that we are living in.
Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that
I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want
to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in
my area and around the world.
I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and
those who work on the website and those who help them
your wisdom.
I pray that you would help the individual members of their
family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but
to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in
every way. and I ask you to do these things
in the name of Jesus,
Amen,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
5 minutos a ayudar excepto otros - diferencie eterno
Dios querido,
gracias que se ha lanzado este nuevo testamento
de modo que poder aprender mas sobre usted.
Ayude por favor a la gente responsable de hacer este Ebook disponible.
Ayudele por favor a poder trabajar rapidamente, y haga que
mas Ebooks disponible por favor le ayuda a tener todos los recursos,
los fondos, la fuerza y el tiempo que necesitan
para poder guardar el trabajar para usted.
Ayude por favor a los que sean parte del equipo que
les ayuda sobre una base diaria. Por favor deles la fuerza para continuar
y para dar a cada uno de ellos la comprension espiritual para el trabajo
que usted quisiera que hicieran. Ayude por favor a cada uno de
ellos a no tener miedo y a no recordar que usted es el dios que contesta
a rezo y que esta a cargo de todo.
Ruego que usted los animara, y que usted los proteja,
y el trabajo y el ministerio que estan contratados adentro.
Ruego que usted los protegiera contra las fuerzas espirituales
que podrian danarlas o retardarlas abajo. Ayudeme por favor cuando
utilizo este nuevo testamento tambien para pensar en ellas de modo
que pueda rogar para ellas y asi que pueden continuar ayudando a mas
gente Ruego que usted me diera un amor de su palabra santa,
y que usted me daria la sabiduria y el discernimiento espirituales
para conocerle mejor y para entender los tiempos que estamos
adentro y como ocuparse de las dificultades que me enfrentan con cada dia.
Senor God, me ayuda a desear conocerle mejor y desear ayudar
a otros cristianos en mi area y alrededor del mundo. Ruego que usted
diera el Web site y los de Ebook el equipo y los que trabajan en
que les ayudan su sabiduria. Ruego que usted ayudara a los miembros
individuales de su familia (y de mi familia) espiritual a no ser engahado,
pero entenderle y desear aceptarle y seguir de cada manera.
y pido que usted haga estas cosas en el nombre de Jesus, amen, i
(por que lo hacemos tradujeron esto a muchas idiomas?
Porque necesitamos a tanto rezo como sea posible,
y a tanta gente que ruega para nosotros y el este ministerio
tan a menudo como sea posible. Gracias por su ayuda.
El rezo es una de las mejores maneras que usted puede ayudarnos mas)
Hungarian
Hungary, Hungarian, Hungary Hungarian Maygar PrayerJ ezus Krisztus
Imadsag hoz Isten Hogyan viselkedni Imadkozik hoz tud hall az en m
viselkedni kerdez ad segitszamomra
Hungarian - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God
- explained in Hungarian Language
Beszelo -hoz Isten , a Alkoto -bol Vilagegyetem , a Lord :
1. amit 6n akar ad szamomra a batorsag -hoz imadkozik a
dolog amit Vennem kell imadkozik
2. amit 6n akar ad szamomra a batorsag -hoz hisz 6n es
elfogad amit akrsz fgy csinalni eletemmel , helyett en
felemel az en -m sajat akarat ( szandek ) fenti one.
3. amit 6n akar add nekem segit -hoz nem enged az en -m
fel -bol ismeretlen -hoz valik a kifogas , vagy a alap ertem
nem -hoz szolgal you.
4. amit 6n akar add nekem segit -hoz lat es -hoz megtanul
hogyan viselkedni volna a szellemi ero Szuksegem van (
atmeno -a szo a Biblia ) egy ) reszere a esemeny elore es b
betii ) reszere az en -m sajat szemelyes szellemi utazas.
5. Amit 6n Isten akar add nekem segit -hoz akar -hoz szolgal
On tobb
6. Amit 6n akar emlekeztet en -hoz -val beszel 6n
prayerwhen ) En csalodott vagy -ban nehezseg , helyett
kiprobalas -hoz hatarozat dolog en magam egyetlen atmeno
az en -m emberi ero.
7. Amit 6n akar add nekem Bolcsesseg es egy sziv toltott -
val Bibliai Bolcsesseg azert EN akar szolgal 6n tobb
hatekonyan.
8. Amit 6n akar adjon nekem egy -t vagy -hoz dolgozoszoba
-a szo , a Biblia ,( a Uj Vegrendelet Evangelium -bol Budi ),
-ra egy szemelyes alap
9. amit 6n akar ad segitseg szamomra azert En kepes -hoz
eszrevesz dolog -ban Biblia ( -a szo ) melyik EN tud
szemelyesen elmond -hoz , es amit akarat segitsen nekem ert
amit akrsz en -hoz csinal eletemben.
10. Amit 6n akar add nekem nagy itelokepesseg , -hoz ert
hogyan viselkedni megmagyaraz -hoz masikak ki 6n , es
amit EN akar kepesnek lenni megtenni megtanul hogyan
viselkedni megtanul es tud hogyan viselkedni kiall mellett
6n es en -a szo ( a Biblia )
1 1 . Amit 6n akar hoz emberek ( vagy websites ) eletemben
ki akar -hoz tud 6n es en , ki van eros -ban -uk pontos
megertes -bol 6n ( Isten ); es Amit 6n akar hoz emberek (
vagy websites ) eletemben ki lesz kepes -hoz batorit en -hoz
pontosan megtanul hogyan viselkedni feloszt a Biblia a szo -
bol igazsag (2 Komocsin 215:).
12. Amit 6n akar segitsen nekem -hoz megtanul -hoz volna
nagy megertes korulbelul melyik Biblia valtozat van legjobb
, melyik van a leg— bb pontos , es melyik birtokol a leg— bb
szellemi ero & ero , es melyik valtozat egyeztet -val a
eredeti kezirat amit 6n ihletett a froi hivatas -bol Uj
Vegrendelet -hoz fr.
13. Amit 6n akar ad segit szamomra -hoz hasznal idom -ban
egy jo ut , es nem -hoz elpusztit idom -ra Hamis vagy iires
modszer kozelebb keriilni -hoz Isten ( de amit van nem
hiisegesen Bibliai ), es hol azok modszer termel nem hosszu
ideje vagy tartos szellemi gyiimolcs.
14. Amit 6n akar ad segitseg szamomra -hoz ert mit tenni
keres -ban egy templom vagy egy istentisztelet helye , mi
fajta -bol kerdes -hoz kerdez , es amit 6n akar segitsen
nekem -hoz talai hivok vagy egy lelkesz -val nagy szellemi
bolcsesseg helyett konnyii vagy hamis valaszol.
15. amit 6n akar okoz en -hoz emlekszik -hoz memorizal -a
szo a Biblia ( mint Romaiak 8), azert EN tud volna ez
szivemben es volna az en -m torodik elokeszitett , es lenni
kesz ad egy valaszol -hoz masikak -bol remel amit Nekem
van koriilbelul 6n.
16. Amit 6n akar hoz segit szamomra azert az en -m sajat
teologia es tetelek -hoz egyeterteni -a szo , a Biblia es amit
6n akar folytatodik segiteni neki en tud hogyan az en -m
megertes -bol doktrina lehet kozmiivesitett azert az en -m
sajat elet , eletmod es megertes folytatodik -hoz lenni zaro -
hoz amit akrsz ez -hoz lenni ertem.
17. Amit 6n akar nyit az en -m szellemi bepillantas (
kovetkeztetes ) tobb es tobb , es amit hol az en -m megertes
vagy eszrevetel -bol 6n van nem pontos , amit 6n akar
segitsen nekem -hoz megtanul ki Jezus Krisztus hiisegesen
van.
18. Amit 6n akar ad segit szamomra azert EN akar kepesnek
lenni megtenni szetvalaszt akarmi hamis ritusok melyik
Nekem van fiigges -ra , -bol -a tiszta tanitas -ban Biblia , ha
akarmi mibol En alabbiak van nem -bol Isten , vagy van
ellenkezo -hoz amit akrsz -hoz tanit minket koriilbelul
alabbiak 6n.
19. Amit akarmi kenyszerit -bol rossz akar nem eltesz
akarmi szellemi megertes melyik Nekem van , de elegge
amit EN akar megtart a tudas -bol hogyan viselkedni tud 6n
es en nem -hoz lenni tevedesben lenni ezekben a napokban -
bol szellemi csalas.
20. Amit 6n akar hoz szellemi ero es segit szamomra azert
EN akarat nem -hoz lenni resze a Nagy Eses El vagy -bol
akarmi mozgalom melyik akar lenni lelkileg utanzott -hoz
6n es en -hoz -a Szent Szo
21. Amit ha van akarmi amit Nekem van megtett eletemben
, vagy barmilyen modon amit Nekem van nem alperes -hoz
6n ahogy ettem kellet volna volna es ez minden
megakadalyozas en -bol egyik gyaloglas veled , vagy
birtoklas megertes , amit 6n akar hoz azok dolog / valasz /
esemeny vissza bele az en -m torodik , azert EN akar
lemond oket neveben Jezus Krisztus , es mind az osszes -uk
hat es kovetkezmeny , es amit 6n akar helyettesit akarmi
uresseg ,sadness vagy ketsegbeeses eletemben -val a Orom -
bol Lord , es amit EN akar lenni tobb fokuszalva tanulas -
hoz kovet 6n mellett olvaso -a szo , a Biblia
22. Amit 6n akar nyit az en -m szemek azert EN akar
kepesnek lenni megtenni vilagosan lat es felismer ha van
egy Nagy Csalas korulbelul Szellemi tema , hogyan
viselkedni ert ez jelenseg ( vagy ezek esemeny ) -bol egy
Bibliai perspektiva , es amit 6n akar add nekem bolcsesseg -
hoz tud es lgy amit EN akarat megtanul hogyan viselkedni
segit barataim es szeretett egyek ( rokon ) nem lenni resze it.
23. Amit 6n akar biztosit amit egyszer az en -m szemek van
kinyitott es az en -m torodik ert a szellemi jelentoseg -bol
idoszerii esemeny bevetel hely a vilagon , amit 6n akar
elokeszit szivem elfogadtatni magam -a igazsag , es amit 6n
akar segitsen nekem ert hogyan viselkedni talai batorsag es
ero atmeno -a Szent Szo , a Biblia. Neveben Jezus Krisztus ,
En kerdezek mindezekert igazol kivansagom -hoz lenni -ban
megallapodas -a akarat , es En kerdezes reszere -a
bolcsesseg es kocsit berelni szerelem -bol Igazsag Amen
Tobb alul -bol Oldal
Hogyan viselkedni volna Orokelet
Vagyunk boldog ha ez oldalra dol ( -bol imadsag kereslet -
hoz Isten ) van kepes -hoz tamogat 6n. Mi ert ez majus nem
lenni a legjobb vagy a leg— bb hatasos forditas. Mi ert amit
vannak sok kiilonbozo ways -bol kifejezheto gondolkodas es
szoveg. Ha onnek van egy javaslat reszere egy jobb forditas
, vagy ha tetszene neked -hoz fog egy kicsi osszeg -bol idod
-hoz kiild javaslatok hozzank , lesz lenni eteladag ezer -bol
mas emberek is , ki akarat akkor olvas a kozmiivesitett
forditas. Mi gyakran volna egy Uj Vegrendelet elerheto -ban
-a nyelv vagy -ban nyelvek amit van ritka vagy regi. Ha 6n
latszo reszere egy Uj Vegrendelet -ban egy kulonleges nyelv
, legyen szives fr hozzank. Is , akarunk hogy biztosak
legyiink es megprobal -hoz kommunikal amit neha ,
megtessziik felajanl konyv amit van nem Szabad es amit
csinal ar penz. De ha 6n nem tud ad nehanyuk elektronikus
konyv , mi tud gyakran csinal egy cserel -bol elektronikus
konyv reszere segit -val forditas vagy forditas dolgozik.
Csinalsz nem kell lenni profi munkas , csak keves szabalyos
szemely akit erdekel eteladag. Onnek kellene volna egy
szamitogep vagy onnek kellene volna belepes -hoz egy
szamitogep -on -a helyi konyvtar vagy kollegium vagy
egyetem , ota azok altalaban volna jobb kapcsolatok -hoz
Internet.
Tudod is altalaban alapft -a sajat szemelyes SZABAD
elektronikus posta szamla mellett halado mail.yahoo.com
Legyen szives fog egy pillanat -hoz talai a elektronikus
posta cim elhelyezett alul vagy a veg ebbol oldal. Mi remel
lesz kiild elektronikus posta hozzank , ha ez -bol segit vagy
batoritas. Mi is batorit 6n -hoz kapcsolat minket
vonatkozolag Elektronikus Konyv hogy tudunk felajanl amit
van nelkiil ar , es szabad.
MegtessziAk volna sok konyv -ban kiAlfoldi nyelvek , de
megtesszuk nem mindig hely oket -hoz kap elektronikusan (
letolt ) mert mi egyetlen csinal elerheto a konyv vagy a tema
amit van a leg— bb kereslet. Mi batorit 6n -hoz folytatodik -
hoz imadkozik -hoz Isten es -hoz folytatodik -hoz megtanul
rola mellett olvaso a Uj Vegrendelet. Mi szivesen lat -a
kerdes es magyarazat mellett elektronikus posta.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Italian
Italian- Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God -
explained in Italian Language
italian prayer jesus Cristo Preghiera come pregare al del dio il dio puo
sentirsi preghiera come chiedere dio di dare allaiuto me
Parlando al dio, il creatore dell'universo, il signore:
1. che dareste me al coraggio pregare le cose di che ho
bisogno per pregare
2. che dareste me al coraggio crederli ed accettare che cosa
desiderate fare con la mia vita, anziche me che exalting il
miei propri volonta (intenzione) sopra il vostro.
3. che mi dareste l'aiuto per non lasciare i miei timori dello
sconosciuto transformarsi in nelle giustificazioni, o la base
per me per non servirlo.
4. che mi dareste l'aiuto per vedere ed imparare come avere
la resistenza spiritosa io abbia bisogno (con la vostra parola
bibbia) di a) per gli eventi avanti e b) per il mio proprio
viaggio spiritoso personale.
5. Che dio mi dareste l'aiuto per desiderare servirli di piu
6. Che mi ricordereste comunicare con voi (prayer)when io
sono frustrati o in difficolta, invece di provare a risolvere le
cose io stesso soltanto con la mia resistenza umana.
7. Che mi dareste la saggezza e un cuore si e riempito di
saggezza biblica in modo che li servissi piu efficacemente.
8. Che mi dareste un desiderio studiare la vostra parola, la
bibbia, (il nuovo gospel del Testamento di John), a titolo
personale,
9. che dareste ad assistenza me in modo che possa notare le
cose nella bibbia (la vostra parola) a cui posso riferire
personalmente ed a che lo aiutera a capire che cosa lo
desiderate fare nella mia vita.
10. Che mi dareste il discernment grande, per capire come
spiegare ad altri che siate e che potrei imparare come
imparare e sapere levarsi in piedi in su per voi e la vostra
parola (bibbia)
1 1 . Che portereste la gente (o i Web site) nella mia vita che
desidera conoscerla e che e forte nella loro comprensione
esatta di voi (dio); e quello portereste la gente (o i Web site)
nella mia vita che potra consigliarmi imparare esattamente
come dividere la bibbia la parola della verita (2 coda di todo
2:15).
12. Che lo aiutereste ad imparare avere comprensione
grande circa quale versione della bibbia e la cosa migliore,
che e la piu esatta e che ha la resistenza & l'alimentazione
piu spiritose e che la versione accosente con i manoscritti
originali che avete ispirato gli autori di nuovo Testamento
scrivere.
13. Che dareste l'aiuto me per usare il mio tempo in un buon
senso e per non sprecare il mio tempo sui metodi falsi o
vuoti di ottenere piu vicino al dio (ma a quello non sia
allineare biblico) e dove quei metodi non producono frutta
spiritosa di lunga durata o durevole.
14. Che dareste l'assistenza me capire che cosa cercare in
una chiesa o in un posto di culto, che generi di domande da
chiedere e che lo aiutereste a trovare i believers o un pastor
con saggezza spiritosa grande anziche le risposte facili o
false.
15. di che lo indurreste a ricordarsi per memorizzare la
vostra parola la bibbia (quale Romans 8), di modo che posso
averlo nel mio cuore e fare la mia prepararsi mente ed e
aspetti per dare una risposta ad altre della speranza che ho
circa voi.
16. Che portereste l'aiuto me in modo che la mie proprie
teologia e dottrine per accosentire con la vostra parola, la
bibbia e che continuereste a aiutarli a sapere la mia
comprensione della dottrina puo essere migliorata in modo
che la miei propri vita, lifestyle e capire continui ad essere
piu vicino a che cosa lo desiderate essere per me.
17. Che aprireste la mia comprensione spiritosa
(conclusioni) di piu e piu e che dove la mia comprensione o
percezione di voi non e esatta, che lo aiutereste ad imparare
chi Jesus Christ allineare e.
18. Che dareste l'aiuto me in modo che possa separare tutti i
rituali falsi da cui ho dipeso, dai vostri insegnamenti liberi
nella bibbia, se c'e ne di che cosa sono seguente non e del
dio, o e contrari a che cosa desiderate per insegnarli - circa
quanto segue.
19. Che alcune forze della malvagita non toglierebbero la
comprensione affatto spiritosa che abbia, ma piuttosto che
mantennrei la conoscenza di come conoscerli e non essere
ingannato dentro attualmente di inganno spiritoso.
20. Che portereste la resistenza spiritosa ed aiutereste a me
in modo che non faccia parte del ritirarsi grande o di alcun
movimento che sarebbe spiritual falsificato a voi ed alla
vostra parola santa.
21. Quello se ci e qualche cosa che faccia nella mia vita, o
qualsiasi senso che non ho risposto a voi come dovrei avere
e quello sta impedendomi di camminare con voi, o avere
capire, che portereste quei things/responses/events
nuovamente dentro la mia mente, di modo che rinuncerei
loro in nome di Jesus Christ e tutte i loro effetti e
conseguenze e che sostituireste tutta la emptiness, tristezza o
disperazione nella mia vita con la gioia del signore e che di
piu sarei messo a fuoco sull'imparare seguirli leggendo la
vostra parola, bibbia.
22. Che aprireste i miei ocehi in modo che possa vedere e
riconoseere chiaramente se ci e un inganno grande cirea i
soggetti spiritosi, come capire questo fenomeno (o questi
eventi) da una prospettiva biblica e che mi dareste la
saggezza per sapere ed in modo che impari come aiutare i
miei amici ed amavo ones (parenti) per non fare parte di
esso.
23. Che vi accertereste che i miei ocehi siano aperti una
volta e la mia mente capisce l'importanza spiritosa degli
eventi correnti che avvengono nel mondo, che abbiate
preparato il mio cuore per accettare la vostra verita e che lo
aiutereste a capire come trovare il coraggio e la resistenza
con la vostra parola santa, la bibbia. In nome di Jesus Christ,
chiedo queste cose che confermano il mio desiderio essere
nell'accordo la vostra volonta e sto chiedendo la vostra
saggezza ed avere un amore della verita, Amen.
Piu in calce alla pagina
come avere vita Eterna
Siamo felici se questa lista (delle richieste di preghiera al
dio) puo aiutarli. Capiamo che questa non puo essere la
traduzione migliore o piu efficace. Capiamo che ci sono
molti sensi differenti di esprimere i pensieri e le parole. Se
avete un suggerimento per una traduzione migliore, o se
voleste occorrere una piccola quantita di vostro tempo di
trasmettere i suggerimenti noi, aiuterete i migliaia della
gente inoltre, che allora leggera la traduzione migliorata.
Abbiamo spesso un nuovo Testamento disponibile in vostra
lingua o nelle lingue che sono rare o vecchie.
Se state cercando un nuovo Testamento in una lingua
specifica, scriva prego noi. Inoltre, desideriamo essere sicuri
e proviamo a comunicare a volte quello, offriamo i libri che
non sono liberi e che costano i soldi. Ma se non potete
permettersi alcuni di quei libri elettronici, possiamo fare
spesso uno scambio di libri elettronici per aiuto con la
traduzione o il lavoro di traduzione.
Non dovete essere un operaio professionista, solo una
persona normale che e interessata nell'assistenza. Dovreste
avere un calcolatore o dovreste avere accesso ad un
calcolatore alla vostra biblioteca o universita o universita
locale, poiche quelli hanno solitamente collegamenti
migliori al Internet. Potete anche stabilire solitamente il
vostro proprio cliente LIBERO personale della posta
elettronica andando al ### di mail.yahoo.com prego
occorrete un momen to per trovare l'indirizzo della posta
elettronica situato alla parte inferiore o all'estremita di
questa pagina. Speriamo che trasmettiate la posta elettronica
noi, se questa e di aiuto o di incoraggiamento. Inoltre vi
consigliamo metterseli in contatto con riguardo ai libri
elettronici che offriamo quello siamo senza costo e
che libero abbiamo molti libri nelle lingue straniere, ma
non le disponiamo sempre per ricevere elettronicamente
(trasferimento dai sistema centrale verso i satelliti) perche
rendiamo soltanto disponibile i libri o i soggetti che sono
chiesti. Vi consigliamo continuare a pregare al dio ed a
continuare ad imparare circa lui leggendo il nuovo
Testamento. Accogliamo favorevolmente le vostre domande
ed osservazioni da posta elettronica
Preghiera al dio Caro Dio, Grazie che questo gospel o
questo nuovo Testamento e stato liberato in modo che
possiamo impararvi piu circa. Aiuti prego la gente
responsabile del rendere questo litaro elettronico disponibile.
Conoscete che chi sono e potete aiutarle.
Aiutile prego a potere funzionare velocemente e renda i libri
piu elettronici disponibili Aiutili prego ad avere tutte le
risorse, i soldi, la resistenza ed il tempo di che hanno
bisogno per potere continuare a funzionare per voi.
Aiuti prego quelli che fanno parte della squadra che le aiuta
su una base giornaliere. Prego dia loro la resistenza per
continuare e dare ciascuno di loro la comprensione spiritosa
per il lavoro che li desiderate fare. Aiuti loro prego ciascuno
a non avere timore ed a non ricordarsi di che siete il dio che
risponde alla preghiera e che e incaricato di tutto. Prego che
consigliereste loro e che li proteggete ed il lavoro & il
ministero che sono agganciati dentro.
Prego che li proteggereste dalle forze spiritose o da altri
ostacoli che potrebbero nuoc o ritardarli giu. Aiutilo prego
quando uso questo nuovo Testamento anche per pensare alla
gente che ha reso questa edizione disponibile, di modo che
posso pregare per loro ed in modo da puo continuare a
aiutare piu gente.
Prego che mi dareste un amore della vostra parola santa (il
nuovo Testamento) e che mi dareste la saggezza ed il
discernment spiritosi per conoscerli meglio e per capire il
periodo di tempo ou stiamo vivendo. Aiutilo prego a sapere
risolvere le difficolta che sono confrontato con ogni giorno.
II signore God, lo aiuta a desiderare conoscerli piu meglio e
desiderare aiutare altri cristiani nella mia zona ed intorno al
mondo.
Prego che dareste la squadra elettronica e coloro del libro
che le aiuta la vostra saggezza.
Prego che aiutereste i diversi membri della loro famiglia (e
della mia famiglia) spiritual a non essere ingannati, ma
capirli e desiderare accettarli e seguire in ogni senso. Inoltre
diaci la comodita ed il consiglio in questi periodi ed io vi
chiedono di fare queste cose in nome di Jesus, amen,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
PORTUGUESE PORTUGUESE
Portuguese PrayerCristo Pedidoa DeusComoorara Deus
podemouvirmy pedido perguntar Deus darajuda a me
Portuguese - Prayer Requests (praying / Talkin g) to God
- explained in Portugues (Portugues) Language
Falando ao deus, o criador do universo, senhor:
1 . que voce daria a mim a coragem pray as coisas que eu
necessito pray
2. que voce daria a mim a coragem o acreditar e aceitar o
que voce quer fazer com minha vida, em vez de mim que
exalting meus proprios vontade (intencao) acima de seu.
3. que voce me daria a ajuda para nao deixar meus medos do
desconhecido se transformar as desculpas, ou a base para
mim para nao lhe servir.
4. que voce me daria a ajuda para ver e aprender como ter a
forca espiritual mim necessite (com sua palavra o bible) a)
para os eventos adiante e b) para minha propria viagem
espiritual pessoal.
5. Que voce deus me daria a ajuda para querer lhe servir
mais
6. Que voce me lembraria falar com voce (prayer)when me
sao frustrados ou na dificuldade, em vez de tentar resolver
coisas eu mesmo somente com minha forca humana.
7. Que voce me daria a sabedoria e um coracao encheu-se
com a sabedoria biblical de modo que eu lhe servisse mais
eficazmente.
8. Que voce me daria um desejo estudar sua palavra, o bible,
(o gospel do testament novo de John), em uma base pessoal,
9. que voce daria a auxflio a mim de modo que eu pudesse
observar coisas no bible (sua palavra) a que eu posso
pessoalmente se relacionar, e a que me ajudara compreender
o que voce me quer fazer em minha vida.
10. Que voce me daria o discernment grande, para
compreender como explicar a outro que voce e, e que eu
poderia aprender como aprender e saber estar acima para
voce e sua palavra (o bible)
1 1 . Que voce traria os povos (ou os Web site) em minha
vida que querem o conhecer, e que sao fortes em sua
compreensao exata de voce (deus); e isso voce traria povos
(ou Web site) em minha vida que podera me incentivar
aprender exatamente como dividir o bible a palavra da
verdade (2 timothy 2: 15).
12. Que voce me ajudaria aprender ter a compreensao
grande sobre que versao do bible e a mais melhor, que sao a
mais exata, e que tem a forca & o poder os mais espirituais,
e que a versao concorda com os manuscritos originais que
voce inspirou os autores do testament novo escrever.
13. Que voce me daria a ajuda para usar meu tempo em uma
maneira boa, e para nao desperdicar minha hora em metodos
falsos ou vazios de comecar mais perto do deus (mas
daquele nao seja verdadeiramente biblical), e onde aqueles
metodos nao produzem nenhuma fruta espiritual a longo
prazo ou duravel.
14. Que voce me daria o auxflio compreender o que
procurar em uma igreja ou em um lugar da adoracao, que
tipos das perguntas a pedir, e que voce me ajudaria
encontrar believers ou um pastor com sabedoria espiritual
grande em vez das respostas faceis ou falsas. 15. que voce
faria com que eu recordasse memorizar sua palavra o bible
(tal como Romans 8), de modo que eu pudesse o ter em meu
coracao e ter minha mente preparada, e estivessem pronto
para dar uma resposta a outra da esperanca que eu tenho
sobre voce.
16. Que voce me traria a ajuda de modo que meus proprios
theology e doutrinas para concordar com sua palavra, o
bible e que voce continuaria a me ajudar saber minha
compreensao da doutrina pode ser melhorada de modo que
meus proprios vida, lifestyle e compreensao continuem a ser
mais perto de o que voce a quer ser para mim.
17. Que voce abriria minha introspeccao espiritual
(conclusoes) mais e mais, e que onde minha compreensao
ou percepcao de voce nao sao exata, que voce me ajudaria
aprender quem Jesus Christ e verdadeiramente.
18. Que voce me daria a ajuda de modo que eu possa
separar todos os rituals falsos de que eu depender, de seus
ensinos desobstruidos no bible, se alguma de o que eu sou
seguinte nao sao do deus, nem sao contrarias a o que voce
quer nos ensinar - sobre o seguir.
19. Que nenhumas forcas do evil nao removeriam a
compreensao espiritual que eu tenho, mas rather que eu
reteria o conhecimento de como o conhecer e nao ser iludido
nestes dias do deception espiritual.
20. Que voce traria a forca espiritual e me ajudaria de modo
que eu nao seja parte da queda grande afastado ou de
nenhum movimento que fosse espiritual forjado a voce e a
sua palavra holy.
21. Isso se houver qualquer coisa que eu fiz em minha vida,
ou alguma maneira que eu nao lhe respondi como eu devo
ter e aquela esta impedindo que eu ande com voce, ou ter a
compreensao, que voce traria aqueles
things/responses/events para tras em minha mente, de modo
que eu os renunciasse no nome de Jesus Christ, e em todas
seus efeitos e consequencias, e que voce substituiria todo o
emptiness, sadness ou desespero em minha vida com a
alegria do senhor, e que eu estaria focalizado mais na
aprendizagem o seguir lendo sua palavra, o bible.
22. Que voce abriria meus olhos de modo que eu possa ver e
reconhecer claramente se houver um deception grande sobre
topicos espirituais, como compreender este fenomeno (ou
estes eventos) de um perspective biblical, e que voce me
daria a sabedoria para saber e de modo que eu aprenderei
como ajudar a meus amigos e amei (parentes) nao ser parte
dela.
23. Que voce se asseguraria de que meus olhos estejam
abertos uma vez e minha mente compreende o significado
espiritual dos eventos atuais que ocorrem no mundo, que
voce prepararia meu coracao para aceitar sua verdade, e que
voce me ajudaria compreender como encontrar a coragem e
a forca com sua palavra holy, o bible. No nome de Jesus
Christ, eu peco estas coisas que confirmam meu desejo ser
no acordo sua vontade, e eu estou pedindo sua sabedoria e
para ter um amor da verdade, Amen.
Mais no fundo da pagina
como ter a vida eternal
Nos estamos contentes se esta lista (de pedidos do prayer ao
deus) puder lhe ajudar. Nos compreendemos que esta nao
pode ser a mais melhor ou traducao a mais eficaz. Nos
compreendemos que ha muitas maneiras diferentes de
expressar pensamentos e palavras. Se voce tiver uma
sugestao para uma traducao melhor, ou se voce gostar de
fazer exame de um pouco de seu tempo nos emitir
sugestoes, voce estara ajudando a milhares dos povos
tambem, que lerao entao a traducao melhorada. Nos temos
frequentemente um testament novo disponivel em sua lingua
ou nas linguas que sao raras ou velhas. Se voce estiver
procurando um testament novo em uma lingua especifica,
escreva-nos por favor.
Tambem, nos queremos ser certos e tentamos comunicar as
vezes isso, nos oferecemos os livros que nao estao livres e
que custam o dinheiro. Mas se voce nao puder ter recursos
para alguns daqueles livros eletronicos, nos podemos
frequentemente fazer uma troca de livros eletronicos para a
ajuda com traducao ou trabalho da traducao. Voce nao tem
que ser um trabalhador profissional, only uma pessoa
regular que esteja interessada na ajuda.
Voce deve ter um computador ou voce deve ter o acesso a
um computador em sua biblioteca ou faculdade ou
universidade local, desde que aqueles tem geralmente
conexoes melhores ao Internet.
Voce pode tambem geralmente estabelecer seu proprio
cliente LIVRE pessoal do correio eletronico indo ao ### de
mail.yahoo.com faz exame por favor de um momento para
encontrar o endereco do correio eletronico ficado situado no
fundo ou na extremidade desta pagina. Nos esperamos que
voce nos emita o correio eletronico, se este for da ajuda ou
do incentivo. Nos incentivamo-lo tambem contatar-nos a
respeito dos livros eletronicos que nos oferecemos a isso
somos sem custo, e
que livre nos temos muitos livros em linguas extrangeiras,
mas nos nao as colocamos sempre para receber
eletronicamente (download) porque nos fazemos somente
disponivel os livros ou os topicos que sao os mais pedidos.
Nos incentivamo-lo continuar a pray ao deus e a continuar a
aprender sobre ele lendo o testament novo. Nos damos boas-
vindas a seus perguntas e comentarios pelo correio
eletronico.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Estimado Dios , Gracias aquel esto Nuevo Testamen to has
estado disparador a fin de que nosotros estamos capaz a
aprender mas acerca de usted. Por favor ayudeme la gente
responsable por haciendo esto Electronica litaro disponible.
Por favor ayudeme esten capaz de obra ayuna , y hacer mas
Electronica libros mayor disponible Por favor ayudeme
esten haber todo el recursos , el dinero , el potencia y el
tiempo aquel ellos necesidad para poder guardar laboral para
ti. Por favor ayudeme esos aquel esta parte de la equipo
aquel ayuda ellas en un corriente base.
Por favor dar ellas el potencia a continuar y dar cada de ellas
el espiritual comprension por lo obra aquel usted necesidad
esten hacer. Por favor ayudeme cada de esten no haber
miedo y a acordarse de aquel usted esta el Dios quien
respuestas oracion y quien es el encargado de todo.
Oro aquel usted haria animar ellas , y aquel usted amparar
ellas , y los trabajadores & ministerio aquel son ocupado en.
Oro aquel usted haria amparar ellas desde el Espiritual
Fuerzas o otro obstaculos aquel puedes dano ellas o lento
ellas down.
Por favor ayudeme cuando YO uso esto Nuevo Testamento
a tambien creer de la personas quien haber hecho esto
edicion disponible , a fin de que YO lata orar por ellas y asi
ellos lata continuar a ayuda mas personas Oro aquel usted
haria deme un amor de su Santo Palabra ( el Nuevo
Testamento ), y aquel usted haria deme espiritual juicio y
discernimientos saber usted mejor y a comprender el tiempo
aquel nosotros estamos viviente en.
Por favor ayiideme saber como a tratar con el dificultades
aquel Estoy confrontar con todos los dias. Senor Dios ,
Ayiidame querer saber usted Mejor y querer a ayuda otro
Cristianos en mi area y alrededor del mundo. Oro aquel
usted haria dar el Electronica libro equipo y esos quien obra
en la telas y esos quien ayuda ellas su juicio.
Oro aquel usted haria ayuda el individuo miembros de su
familia ( y mi familia ) a no estar espiritualmente enganado ,
pero a comprender usted y querer a aceptar y seguir usted en
todos los dias camino. y YO preguntar usted hacer estos
cosas en nombre de Jesus , Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Kjsere God , Takk skal du ha det denne Ny Testamentet
er blitt befridd i den grad at vi er dugelig a h0re flere om du.
Behage hjelpe folket ansvarlig for gj0r denne Elektronisk
bestille anvendelig. Behage hjelpe seg a bli kj0pedyktig
arbeide rask , og lage flere Elektronisk b0ker anvendelig
Behage hjelpe seg a ha alle ressursene , pengene , det styrke
og klokken det de n0d for at vsere i stand til oppbevare
arbeider til deres.
Behage hjelpe dem det er del av teamet det hjelpe seg opp
pa en hverdags basis. Behage gir seg det styrke a fortsette og
gir hver av seg det sprit forstaelse for det arbeide det du
0nske seg a gj0re.
Behage hjelpe hver av seg a ikke ha rank og a erindre det du
er det God hvem svar b0nn og hvem er i ledelsen av alt. JEG
be det du ville oppmuntre seg , og det du beskytte seg , og
det arbeide & ministerium det de er forlovet inne. JEG be
det du ville beskytte seg fra det Sprit Presser eller annet
obstacles det kunne skade seg eller langsom seg ned.
Behage hjelpe meg nar JEG bruk denne Ny Testamentet a
likeledes tenke pa folket hvem ha fremstilt denne opplag
anvendelig , i den grad at JEG kanne be for seg hvorfor de
kanne fortsette a hjelpe flere folk JEG be det du ville gir
meg en kjserlighet til din Hellig Ord ( det Ny Testamentet ),
og det du ville gir meg sprit klokskap og discernment a vite
du bedre og a oppfatte perioden det vi lever inne.
Behage hjelpe meg a vite hvor a beskjeftige seg med
problemene det JEG er stilt overfor hver dag. Lord God ,
Hjelpe meg a vil gjerne vite du Bedre og a vil gjerne hjelpe
annet Kristen inne meg omrade og i nserheten verden.
JEG be det du ville gir det Elektronisk bestille lag og dem
hvem arbeide med det website og dem hvem hjelpe seg din
klokskap. JEG be det du ville hjelpe individet medlemmer
av deres slekt ( og meg slekt ) a ikke vsere spiritually narret ,
bortsett fra a oppfatte du og a vil gjerne godkjenne og f0lge
etter etter du inne enhver vei. og JEG anmode du a gj0re
disse saker inne navnet av Jesus , Samarbeidsvillig ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
SWEDISH - SUEDE - SUEDOIS
Swedish - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God -
explained in Swedish Language
Swedish Prayer Bon till Gud Jesus Hur till Be Hur kanna
hora min Hur till fraga Gud till ger hjalp finna ande Ledning
Talande till Gud , skaparen om Universum , den Var Herre
och Fralsare :
1 . sa pass du skulle ger till jag tapperheten till be sakerna sa
pass Jag nod till be
2. sa pass du skulle ger till jag tapperheten till tro pa du och
accept vad du vilja till gor med min liv , i stallet for jag
upphoja min aga vilja ( avsikt ) over din.
3. sa pass du skulle ge mig hjalp till inte lata min radsla om
okand till bli den ursakta , eller basisten for jag inte till tjana
you.
4. sa pass du skulle ge mig hjalp till se och till lara sig hur
till har den ande styrka Jag nod ( igenom din uttrycka bibeln
) en ) for handelsen fore och b ) for min aga personlig ande
resa.
5. Sa pass du Gud skulle ge mig hjalp till vilja till tjana Du
mer
6. Sa pass du skulle paminna jag till samtal med du
prayerwhen ) JAG er frustrerat eller i svarigheten , i stallet
for forsokande till besluta sakerna mig sjalv bara igenom
min mansklig styrka.
7. Sa pass du skulle ge mig Visdom och en hjartan fyllt med
Biblisk Visdom sa fakta at JAG skulle tjana du mer
effektivt. 8. Sa pass du skulle ge mig en onska till studera
din uttrycka , bibeln , ( den Ny Testamente Evangelium av
John ), pa en personlig basis 9. sa pass du skulle ger hjalp
till jag sa fakta at JAG er kopa duktig marka sakerna inne
om Bibel ( din uttrycka ) vilken JAG kanna personlig beratta
till , och den dar vill hjalpa mig forsta vad du vilja jag till
gor i min liv.
10. Sa pass du skulle ge mig stor discernment , till forsta hur
till forklara till sjalvaste vem du er , och sa pass JAG skulle
kunde lara sig hur till lara sig och veta hur till lopa upp for
du och mig din uttrycka ( bibeln )
1 1. Sa pass du skulle komma med folk ( eller websites ) i
min liv vem vilja till veta du och mig , vem de/vi/du/ni ar
stark i deras exakt forstandet av du ( Gud ); och Sa pass du
skulle komma med folk ( eller websites ) i min liv vem vilja
kunde uppmuntra jag till ackurat lara sig hur till fordela
bibeln orden av sanning Timothy 215:).
12. Sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till lara sig till har stor
forstandet om vilken Bibel version ar bast , vilken ar mest
exakt , och vilken har mest ande styrka & formaga , och
vilken version samtycke med det original manuskripten sa
pass du inspirerat forfattarna om Ny Testamente till skriva.
13. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag till anvanda min tid i
en god vag , och inte till slosa min tid pa Falsk eller tom
metoderna till komma narmare till Gud ( utom sa pass
blandar inte sant Biblisk ), och var den har metoderna
produkter ingen for lange siden tid eller varande ande frukt.
14. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag till forsta vad till blick
for i en kyrka eller en stalle av dyrkan , vad slagen av
sporsmalen till fraga , och sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till
finna tro pa eller en pastor med stor ande visdom i stallet for
latt eller falsk svar.
15. sa pass du skulle orsak jag till minas till minnesmarke
din uttrycka bibeln ( sadan som Romersk 8), sa fakta at JAG
kanna har den i min hjartan och har min sinne beredd , och
vara rede till a ger en svar till sjalvaste om hoppa pa att Jag
har omkring du.
16. Sa pass du skulle komma med hjalp till jag sa fakta at
min aga theology och doktrin till samtycke med din uttrycka
, bibeln och sa pass du skulle fortsatta till hjalpa mig veta
hur min forstandet av doktrin kanna bli forbattrat sa fakta at
min aga liv , livsform och forstandet fortsatt till vara nojer
till vad siut du vilja den till vara for jag.
17. Sa pass du skulle oppen min ande inblicken (
sluttningarna ) mer och mer , och sa pass var min forstandet
eller uppfattningen av du ar inte exakt , sa pass du skulle
hjalpa mig till lara sig vem Jesus Christ sant ar.
18. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag sa fakta at JAG skulle
kunde skild fran nagon falsk ritual vilken Jag har bero pa ,
fran din klar undervisning inne om Bibel , eventuell om vad
JAG foljer ar inte av Gud , eller ar i strid mot vad du vilja
till undervisa oss omkring foljande du.
19. Sa pass nagon pressar av onda skulle inte ta bort nagon
ande forstandet vilken Jag har , utom hellre sa pass JAG
skulle halia kvar kunskap om hur till veta du och mig inte
till bli lurat i den har dagen av ande bedrageri.
20. Sa pass du skulle komma med ande styrka och hjalp till
jag sa fakta at Jag vill inte till bli del om den Stor Stjarnfall
Bort eller av nagon rorelse vilken skulle bli spiritually
forfalskad till du och mig till din Helig Uttrycka
21. Sa pass om dar er nagot sa pass Jag har gjort det min liv
, eller nagon vag sa pass Jag har inte reagerat till du sa JAG
skulle har och den dar er forhindrande jag fran endera
vandrande med du , eller har forstandet , sa pass du skulle
komma med den har sakerna / svaren / handelsen rygg in i
min sinne , sa fakta at JAG skulle avsaga sig dem inne om
Namn av Jesus Christ , och all av deras verkningen och
konsekvenserna , och sa pass du skulle satta tillbaka nagon
tomhet ,sadness eller fortvivlan i min liv med det Gladje om
Var Herre och Fralsare , och sa pass JAG skulle bli mer
focusen pa inlarningen till folja du vid lasande din uttrycka ,
den Bibel
22. Sa pass du skulle oppen min oga sa fakta at JAG skulle
kunde klar se och recognize om dar er en Stor Bedrageri
omkring Ande amnena , hur till forsta den har phenomenon
( eller de har handelsen ) fran en Biblisk perspektiv , och sa
pass du skulle ge mig visdom till veta och sa sa pass Jag vill
lara sig hur till hjalp min vannerna och alskat en ( slaktingen
) inte bli del om it.
23. Sa pass du skulle tillforsakra sa pass en gang min oga
de/vi/du/ni ar oppnat och min sinne forstar den ande mening
av strom handelsen tagande stalle pa jorden , sa pass du
skulle forbereda min hjartan till accept din sanning , och sa
pass du skulle hjalpa mig forsta hur till finna mod och styrka
igenom din Helig Uttrycka , bibeln. Inne om namn av Jesus
Christ , JAG fraga om de har sakerna bekraftande min onska
till vara i folje avtalen din vilja , och JAG fragar till deras
visdom och till har en karlek om den Sanning
Samar betsvillig
Mer pa botten av Sida
Hur till har Oandlig Liv
Vi er glad om den har lista over ( bon anmoder till Gud ) ar
duglig till hjalpa du. Vi forsta den har Maj inte bli den bast
eller mest effektiv oversattning. Vi forsta det dar de/vi/du/ni
ar manga olik vag av yttranden tanken och orden. Om du har
en forslagen for en battre oversattning , eller om du skulle
lik till ta en liten belopp av din tid till sanda forslag till oss ,
du vill bli hjalpande tusenden av annan folk ocksa , vem
vilja da lasa den forbattrat oversattning. Vi ofta har en Ny
Testamente tillganglig i din sprak eller i spraken sa pass
de/vi/du/ni ar sallsynt eller gammal. Om du er sett for en Ny
Testamente i en bestamd sprak , behaga skriva till oss.
Ocksa , vi behov till vara saker och forsok till meddela sa
pass ibland , vi gor erbjudande bokna sa pass blandar inte
Fri och sa pass gor kostnad pengar. Utom om du kan icke
har rad med det nagot om den har elektronisk bokna , vi
kanna ofta gor en byta av elektronisk bokna for hjalp med
oversattning eller oversattning verk.
Du hade inte till vara en professionell arbetaren , enda et par
regelbunden person vem er han intresserad i hjalpande. Du
borde har en computern eller du borde ha ingang till en
computern pa din lokal bibliotek eller college eller
universitet , sedan dess den har vanligtvis har battre
forbindelserna till Internet. Du kanna ocksa vanligtvis
grunda din aga personlig FRI elektronisk sanda med posten
redovisa vid gar till mail.yahoo.com
### Behaga ta en stund till finna den elektronisk sanda med
posten adress lokaliserat nederst eller sluten av den har sida.
Vi hoppas du vill sanda elektronisk sanda med posten till
oss , om den har er av hjalp eller uppmuntran. Vi ocksa
uppmuntra du till komma i kontakt med oss angaande
Elektronisk Bokna sa pass vi erbjudande sa pass de/vi/du/ni
ar utan kostnad , och fri.
Vi gor har manga bokna i utlandsk spraken , utom vi inte
alltid stalle dem till ta emot elektronisk ( data overfor )
emedan vi bara gora tillganglig bokna eller amnena sa pass
de/vi/du/ni ar mest begaret. Vi uppmuntra du till fortsatta till
be till Gud och till fortsatta till lara sig omkring Honom vid
lasande den Ny Testamente. Vi valkomnande din
sporsmalen och kommentarerna vid elektronisk sanda med
posten.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Anwylyd Celi , Ddiolch 'eh a hon 'n Grai
Destament gollyngwyd fel a allwn at ddysg hychwaneg
amdanat. Blesio chyfnertha 'r boblogi 'n atebol achos yn
gwneud hon Electronic llyfr ar gael.
Blesio chyfnertha 'u at all gweithia ymprydia , a gwna
hychwaneg Electronic llyfrau ar gael Blesio chyfnertha 'u at
ca pawb 'r adnoddau , 'r arian , 'r chryfder a 'r amsera a hwy
angen er all cadw yn gweithio atat. Blesio chyfnertha hynny
sy barthu chan 'r heigia a chyfnertha 'u acha an everyday
sail.
Blesio anrhega 'u 'r chryfder at arhosa a anrhega pob un
chanddyn 'r 'n ysbrydol yn deall achos 'r gweithia a 'eh
angen 'u at gwna.
Blesio chyfnertha pob un chanddyn at mo ca arswyda a at
atgofia a ach 'r Celi a atebiadau arawd a sy i mewn
chyhudda chan bopeth. Archa a anogech 'u , a a achlesi 'u , a
'r gweithia & gweinidogaeth a ]n cyflogedig i mewn. Archa
a achlesech 'u chan 'r 'n Ysbrydol Grymoedd ai arall
rhwystrau a could amhara 'u ai arafa 'u i lawr.
Blesio chyfnertha 'm pryd Arfera hon 'n Grai Destament at
hefyd dybied chan 'r boblogi a wedi gwneud hon argraffiad
ar gael , fel a Alla gweddi'o am 'u a fel allan arhosa at
chyfnertha hychwaneg boblogi Archa a anrhegech 'm
anwylaeth chan 'eh 'n gysegr-lan Eiria ( 'r 'n Grai Destament
), a a anrhegech 'm 'n ysbrydol callineb a ddirnadaeth at
adnabod gwellhawch a at ddeall 'r atalnod chan amsera a ]m
yn bucheddu i mewn. Blesio chyfnertha 'm at adnabod fel at
ymdrin 'r afrwyddinebau a Dwi wynebedig ag ddiwedydd.
Arglwydd Celi , Chyfnertha 'm at angen at adnabod
gwellhawch a at angen at chyfnertha arall Cristnogion i
mewn 'm arwynebedd a am 'r byd. Archa a anrhegech 'r
Electronic llyfr heigia a hynny a gweithia acha 'r website a
hynny a chyfnertha 'u 'eh callineb. Archa a chyfnerthech 'r
hunigol aelodau chan 'n hwy deulu ( a 'm deulu ) at mo bod
'n ysbrydol dwylledig , namyn at ddeall 'eh a at angen at
chymer a canlyn 'eh i mewn 'n bob ffordd. a Archa 'eh at
gwna hyn bethau i mewn 'r enwa chan lesu , Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Iceland -\ Icelandic
Icelan d
Icelandic Icelandic - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking)
to God - explained in Icelandic Language
Prayer Isceland Icelandic Jesus Kristur Baen til Guo
Hvernig til Bioja Hvernig geta spyrja gefa hjalpa andlegur
Leiosogn
Tal til Gu5 the Skapari af the Alheimur the Herra :
1 . bessi bu vildi gefa til mig the hugrekki til biSja the hlutur
pessi EG porf til bi9ja
2. pessi pu vildi gefa til mig the hugrekki til trua pu og
piggja hva5a pu vilja til komast af me5 minn lif , i staSinn af
mig upphefja minn eiga vilja ( asetningur ) yfir pinn.
3. pessi pu vildi gefa mig hjalpa til ekki lata minn ogurlegur
af the opekktur til verSa the afsokun , e5a the undirstaSa
fyrir mig ekki til bera fram you. 4. J)essi J)u vildi gefa mig
hjalpa til sja og til lsera hvernig til hafa the andlegur styrkur
EG J)6rf ( i gegnum J)inn or5 the Biblia a ) fyrir the atburSur
a undan ) og b ) fyrir minn eiga personulegur andlegur fer5.
5. E>essi J)u Gu5 vildi gefa mig hjalpa til vilja til bera fram
M fleiri 6. E>essi J)u vildi minna a mig til tala me5 f)u
prayerwhen ) EG er svekktur e5a i vandi , i staSinn af
erfiSur til asetningur hlutur eg sjalfur eini i gegnum minn
mannlegur styrkur.
7. E>essi J)u vildi gefa mig Viska og a hjarta fiskflak me5
Bibliulegur Viska svo bessi EG vildi bera fram J)u fleiri a
ahrifarikan hatt.
8. l^essi bu vildi gefa mig a longun til nema binn or5 the
Biblia the Nyja testamentiS GuSspjall af Klosett ), a a
personulegur undirstaSa
9. J)essi J)u vildi gefa a5sto5 til mig svo J)essi EG er fser til
taka eftir hlutur i the Biblia ( binn or5 ) hver EG geta
personulega segja fra til , og J)essi vilja hjalpa mig skilja
hvaSa pu vilja mig til gera ut af vi5 minn lif.
10. J>essi J)u vildi gefa mig mikill skarpskyggni , til skilja
hvernig til litskyra til annar hver J)u ert , og J)essi EG vildi
vera fser til lsera hvernig til lsera og vita hvernig til standa
me5 J)u og f>inn or5 the Biblia )
1 1 . f>essi bu vildi koma me5 folk ( e5a websites ) i minn lif
hver vilja til vita bu , og hver ert sterkur i beirra nakvsemur
skilningur af J)u ( gu5 ); og E>essi J)u vildi koma me5 folk (
e5a websites ) i minn lif hver vilja vera fser til hvetja mig til
nakvsemur lsera hvernig til deila the Biblia the or5 gu5s
sannleikur (2 HrseSslugjarn 215:).
12. J>essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til lsera til hafa mikill
skilningur 65ur i hver Biblia utgafa er bestur , hver er
nakvsemur , og hver hefur the andlegur styrkur & mattur , og
hver utgafa samj)ykkja me5 the frumeintak handrit J)essi J)u
biasa i brjost the ritstorf af the Nyja testamentiS til skrifa.
13. l>essi J)u vildi gefa hjalpa til mig til nota minn timi i g65
kaup vegur , og ekki til soa minn timi a Falskur e5a tomur
a5fer5 til fa loka til Gu5 ( en J)essi ert ekki hreinskilnislega
Bibliulegur ), og hvar bessir a5fer5 avextir og grsenmeti
neitun langur or5 e5a varanlegur andlegur avoxtur.
14. E>essi J)u vildi gefa a5sto5 til mig til skilja hvaSa til leita
a5 i a kirkja e5a a staSur af dyrkun , hvaSa g65ur af
spurning til spyrja , og J)essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til finna
trumaSur e5a a prestur me5 mikill andlegur viska i staSinn
af J)segilegur e5a falskur svar.
15. J)essi J)u vildi orsok mig til muna til leggja a minniS J)inn
or5 the Biblia ( svo sem eins og Latneskt letur 8), svo J)essi
EG geta hafa ba5 i minn hjarta og hafa minn hugur tilbuinn ,
og vera tilbuinn til gefa oakveSinn greinir i ensku svar til
annar af the von bessi EG hafa 65ur i J)ii.
16. E>essi J)u vildi koma me5 hjalpa til mig svo pessi minn
eiga guSfrseSi og kenning til vera i samrsemi vi5 J)inn or5
the Biblia og bessi bu vildi halda afram til hjalpa mig vita
hvernig minn skilningur af kenning geta vera bseta svo bessi
minn eiga lif lifestyle og skilningur halda afram til vera loka
til hvaSa bu vilja ba9 til vera fyrir mig.
17. J>essi bu vildi opinn minn andlegur innsyn ( endir ) fleiri
og fleiri , og bessi hvar minn skilningur e5a skynjun af bu er
ekki nakvsemur , J)essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til lsera hver Jesus
Kristur hreinskilnislega er.
18. J>essi J)u vildi gefa hjalpa til mig svo pessi EG vildi vera
fser til aSskilinn allir falskur helgisiSir hver EG hafa
6sjalfstse5i a , fra J)inn bjartur kennsla i the Biblia , ef allir af
hvaSa EG er hopur stuSningsmanna er ekki af Gu5 , e5a er
gegn hvaSa bu vilja til kenna okkur 65ur i hopur
stuSningsmanna J)u.
19. E>essi allir herafli af vondur vildi ekki taka burt allir
andlegur skilningur hver EG hafa , en fremur J)essi EG vildi
halda the vitneskja af hvernig til vita J)u og ekki til vera
blekkja i bessir sem minnir a gomlu dagana) af andlegur
blekking.
20. E>essi bu vildi koma me5 andlegur styrkur og hjalpa til
mig svo pessi EG vilja ekki til vera hluti af the Mikill Bylta
Burt e5a af allir hreyfing hver vildi vera andlegur folsun til
J)u og til J)inn Heilagur Or5
21. E>essi ef there er nokkuS J)essi EG hafa buinn minn lif ,
e5a allir vegur J)essi EG hafa ekki sa sem svarar til J)u eins
og EG 6x1 hafa og bessi er sem koma ma i veg fyrir e6a
afstyra mig fra annar hvor gangandi me9 J)u , e6a having
skilningur , J)essi J)u vildi koma me5 J)essir hlutur / svar /
atbur9ur bak inn i minn hugur , svo bessi EG vildi afheita ba
i the Nafn af Jesiis Kristur , og ekki minna en beirra ahrif og
aflei9ing , og bessi bii vildi skipta um allir tomleiki ,sadness
e9a orvsnting i minn lff me9 the Gle9i af the Herra , og
pessi EG vildi vera fleiri brennidepill a lserdomur til fylgja
bu vi9 lestur binn or9 the Biblia
22. J>essi bu vildi opinn minn augsyn svo pessi EG vildi vera
fser til greinilega sja og bekkjanlegur ef there er a Mikill
Blekking 65ur i Andlegur atri9i , hvernig til skilja this q (
e9a pessir atbur9ur ) fra a Bibliulegur yfirsyn , og bessi bii
vildi gefa mig viska til vita og svo bessi EG vilja lsera
hvernig til hjalpa minn vinatta og ast sjalfur ( settingi ) ekki
vera hluti af it.
23. E>essi bii vildi tryggja J)essi einu sinni minn augsyn ert
opnari og minn hugur skilja the andlegur merking af
straumur atbur<3ur hrifandi sta5ur i the verold , J)essi J)u vildi
undirbiia minn hjarta til biggja binn sannleikur , og J)essi J)ii
vildi hjalpa mig skilja hvernig til finna hugrekki og styrkur i
gegnum J)inn Heilagur Or9 the Biblia. I the nafn af Jesiis
Kristur , EG spyrja fyrir J)essir hlutur staSfesta minn longun
til vera i samkomulag J)inn vilja , og EG er asking fyrir J)inn
viska og til hafa a ast af the Sannleikur Mottsekilegur
Fleiri a the Botn af Bla9si9a
Hvernig til hafa Eilifur Lif
Vi5 ert gla5ur ef this listi ( af bsen bei9ni til Gu9 ) er fser til
a5sto9a J)ii. Vi9 skilja this mega ekki vera the bestur e9a
arangursrikur J)y9ing. Vi9 skilja J)essi there ert margir olikur
lifha9arhaettir af tjaning hugsun og or9. Ef J)ii hafa a
uppastunga fyrir a betri J)y9ing , e9a ef J)ii vildi eins og til
taka a litill magn af binn timi til senda uppastunga til okkur ,
pu vilja vera skammtur pusund af annar folk einnig , hver
vilja pa lesa the bseta bySing.
Vi5 oft hafa a Nyja testamen ti5 laus i binn tungumal e5a i
tungumal pessi ert sjaldgsefur e5a gamall. Ef pu ert utlit fyrir
a Nyja testamentiS i a serstakur tungumal , poknast skrifa til
okkur. Einnig , vi5 vilja til vera viss og reyna til miSla J)essi
stundum , vi5 gera tilboS bok J)essi ert ekki Frjals og J)essi
gera kostnaSur peningar. En ef J)u geta ekki hafa efni a
sumir af J)essir raftseknilegur bok , vi5 geta oft gera
oakveSinn greinir i ensku skipti af raftseknilegur bok fyrir
hjalpa me5 pySing e5a pySing vinna. M gera ekki ver5a a5
vera a faglegur verkamaSur , eini a venjulegur manneskja
hver er ahugasamur i skammtur. M 6x1 hafa a tolva e5a bii
6x1 hafa aSgangur til a tolva a J)inn heimamaSur bokasafn
e5a haskoli e5a haskoli , siSan bessir venjulega hafa betri
tengsl til the. M geta einnig venjulega stofnsetja binn eiga
personulegur FRJALS raftseknilegur postur reikningur vi5
a5 fara til mail.yahoo.com
E>6knast taka a augnablik til finna the raftseknilegur postur
heimilisfang staSgreina a the botn e5a the endir af this
bla5si5a. Vi5 von bu vilja senda raftseknilegur postur til
okkur , ef this er af hjalpa e5a hvatning. Vi5 einnig hvetja
pu til snerting okkur viSvikjandi Raftseknilegur Bok J)essi
vi5 tilbod bessi ert an kostnaSur , og frjals.
Vi5 gera hafa margir bok i erlendur tungumal , en vi5 gera
ekki alltaf staSur J)a til taka a moti electronically ( ssekja
skra af fjarlsegri tolvu ) J)vi vi5 eini gera laus the bok e5a the
atri5i J)essi ert the beiSni. Vi5 hvetja bu til halda afram til
bi5ja til Gu5 og til halda afram til lsera 65ur i Hann vi5
lestur the Nyja testamenti9. Vi9 velkominn J)inn spurning og
athugasemd vi9 raftseknilegur postur.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Danish - Danemark
Danish - Prayer Requests (praying / T alking) to God -
e x p I a i n e d in Danish Language
Prayer Danish Dannish Denmarkjesus Bon hentilGod HvorBed
kunne hore mig Hvoropfordre indromme haelp hen mig
Taler hen til God , den Skaberen i den Alt , den Lord : 1. at
jer ville indr0mme hen til mig den mod hen til bed den sager
at JEG savn hen til bed
2. at jer ville indr0mme hen til mig den mod hen til tro jer
og optage hvad jer ville gerne lave hos mig liv , istedet for
mig ophoje mig besidde vil ( hensigt ) ovenfor jeres.
3. at jer ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til ikke lade mig
skrsek i den ubekendt hen til blive den bede om tilgivelse ,
eller den holdepunkt nemlig mig ikke hen til anrette you.
4. at jer ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til se efter og hen til
laere hvor hen til nyde den appel krsefter JEG savn (
igennem jeres ord den Bibel ) en ) nemlig den begivenheder
foran og b ) nemlig mig besidde personlig appel rejse.
5. At jer God ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til ville gerne
anrette Jer flere
6. At jer ville erindre mig hen til samtale hos jer prayerwhen
) Jeg er kuldkastet eller i problem , istedet for pr0ver hen til
l0se sager selv bare igennem mig human krsefter.
7. At jer ville indr0mme mig Klogskab og en hjerte fyldte
hos Bibelsk Klogskab i den grad at JEG ville anrette jer
flere effektive.
8. At jer ville indr0mme mig en lyst hen til lsese jeres ord ,
den Bibel , ( den Ny Testamente Gospel i John ), oven pa en
personlig holdepunkt
9. at jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig i den grad at Jeg er
k0bedygtig mserke sager i den Bibel ( jeres ord ) hvilke JEG
kunne jeg for mit vedkommende henh0re til , og at vil hjselp
mig opfatte hvad jer savn mig hen til lave i mig liv.
10. At jer ville indr0mme mig stor discernment , hen til
opfatte hvor hen til forklare hen til andre hvem du er , og at
JEG ville vaere i stand til laere hvor hen til laere og kende
hvor hen til rage op nemlig jer og jeres ord ( den Bibel )
1 1 . At jer ville overbringe folk ( eller websites ) i mig liv
hvem ville gerne kende jer , og hvem er kraftig i deres
n0jagtig opfattelse i jer God ); og At jer ville overbringe
folk ( eller websites ) i mig liv hvem vil vaere i stand til give
mod mig hen til akkurat lasre hvor hen til skille den Bibel
den ord i sandhed Timothy 215:).
12. At jer ville hjaelp mig hen til laere hen til nyde stor
opfattelse hvorom Bibel gengivelse er bedst , hvilke er h0jst
n0jagtig , og hvilke har den h0jst appel kraefter & kraft , og
hvilke gengivelse indvilliger hos den selvstasndig
handskreven at jer inspireret den forfatteres i den Ny
Testamente hen til skriv.
13. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig hen til hjselp mig
gang i en artig made , og ikke hen til affald mig gang oven
pa Falsk eller indholdsl0s metoder hen til komme nsermere
hen til God ( men at er ikke sandelig Bibelsk ), og der hvor
dem metoder opf0re for ikke sa lsenge siden periode eller
varer appel fruit.
14. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig hen til opfatte
hvad hen til kigge efter i en kirke eller en opstille i
andagts0gende , hvad arter i sp0rgsmal hen til opfordre , og
at jer ville hjselp mig hen til hitte tro eller en sidst hos stor
appel klogskab istedet for nemme eller falsk svar.
15. at jer ville hidf0re mig hen til huske hen til lsere udenad
jeres ord den Bibel ( sasom Romersk 8), i den grad at JEG
kunne nyde sig i mig hjerte og nyde mig indre forberedt , og
vsere rede til at indr0mme en besvare hen til andre i den
habe pa at Jeg har omkring jer.
16. At jer ville overbringe hjselp hen til mig i den grad at
mig besidde theology og doctrines hen til samtykke med
jeres ord , den Bibel og at jer ville fortssette hen til hjselp
mig kende hvor mig opfattelse i doctrine kan forbedret i den
grad at mig besidde liv lifestyle og opfattelse fortssetter at
blive n0jere hvortil jer savn sig at blive nemlig mig.
17. At jer ville lukke op mig appel indblik ( afslutninger )
flere og flere , og at der hvor mig opfattelse eller
opfattelsesevne i jer er ikke n0jagtig , at jer ville hjselp mig
hen til lsere hvem Jesus Christ sandelig er.
18. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig i den grad at
JEG ville vsere i stand til selvstsendig hvilken som helst
falsk rituals hvilke Jeg har afhsenge oven pa , af jeres slette
lserer i den Bibel , eventuel hvoraf Jeg er nseste er ikke i God
, eller er imod hvad jer ville gerne belsere os omkring nseste
jer.
19. At hvilken som helst tvinger i darlig ville ikke holde
bortrejst hvilken som helst appel opfattelse hvilke Jeg har ,
men nsermest at JEG ville beholde den kundskab i hvor hen
til kende jer og ikke at blive narrede i i denne tid i appel
bedrag.
20. At jer ville overbringe appel krsefter og hjselp hen til mig
i den grad at Ja ikke at blive noget af den Stor Nedadgaende
Bortrejst eller i hvilken som helst bevsegelse som kunne
vsere spiritually counterfeit hen til jer og hen til jeres Hellig
Ord
2 1 . At selv om der er alt at Jeg har skakmat mig liv , eller
hvilken som helst made at Jeg har ikke reageret hen til jer
nemlig JEG burde nyde og det vil sige afholder mig af enten
den ene eller den anden af omvandrende hos jer , eller har
opfattelse , at jer ville overbringe dem sager / svar /
begivenheder igen i mig indre , i den grad at JEG ville afsta
fra sig i den Bensevne i Jesus Christ , og al i deres effekter
og f0lger , og at jer ville skifte ud hvilken som helst tomhed
,sadness eller opgive habet i mig liv hos den Glsede i den
Lord , og at JEG ville vsere flere indstille oven pa indlasring
hen til komme efter jer af lsesning jeres ord , den Bibel
22. At jer ville lukke op mig ojne i den grad at JEG ville
vsere i stand til klart se efter og anerkende selv om der er en
Stor Bedrag omkring Appel emner , hvor hen til opfatte
indevaerende phenomenon ( eller disse begivenheder ) af en
Bibelsk perspektiv , og at jer ville indr0mme mig klogskab
hen til kende hvorfor at Ja laere hvor hen til hjaelp mig
bekendte og elske ones ( slasgtninge ) ikke vaere noget af it.
23. At jer ville sikre sig at nar f0rst mig 0jne er anlagde og
mig indre forstar den appel vsegt i indevserende
begivenheder indtagelse opstille pa jorden , at jer ville lsegge
til rette mig hjerte hen til optage jeres sandhed , og at jer
ville hjselp mig opfatte hvor hen til hitte mod og krsefter
igennem jeres Hellig Ord , den Bibel. I den bensevne i Jesus
Christ , JEG anmode om disse sager bekrseftende mig lyst at
blive overensstemmende jeres vil , og Jeg er bede om
nemlig jeres klogskab og hen til nyde en kserlighed til den
Sandhed Amen
Flere forneden S ide
Hvor hen til nyde Evig Liv
Vi er glad selv om indevserende liste over ( b0n anmoder
hen til God ) er kan hen til hjselpe jer. Vi opfatte
indevserende ma ikke vsere den bedst eller hojst effektiv
gengivelse. Vi er klar over, at der er mange anderledes veje i
gengivelse indfald og ord. Selv om du har en henstilling
nemlig en bedre gengivelse , eller selv om jer ville gerne
hen til holde en ringe bel0b i jeres gang hen til sende
antydninger hen til os , jer vil vsere hjalp tusindvis i andre
ligeledes , hvem vil sa er der ikke mere lsese den forbedret
gengivelse.
Vi ofte nyde en Ny Testamente anvendelig i jeres sprog eller
i sprogene at er sjselden eller forhenvserende. Selv om du er
ser ud nemlig en Ny Testamente i en specifik sprog , behage
henvende sig til os. Ligeledes , vi ville gerne vsere sikker og
pr0ve hen til overf0rer at engang imellem , vi lave pristilbud
b0ger at er ufri og at lave omkostninger penge. Men selv om
jer kan ikke afgive noget af dem elektronisk b0ger , vi
kunne ofte lave en udveksle i elektronisk b0ger nemlig
hjselp hos gengivelse eller gengivelse arbejde. Jer som ikke
har at blive en professional arbejder , kun fa sand
pagseldende hvem er interesseret i hjalp.
Jer burde nyde en computer eller jer burde have adgang til
en computer henne ved jeres lokal bibliotek eller kollegium
eller universitet , siden dem til hverdag nyde bedre
slsegtskaber hen til den indre. Jer kunne ligeledes til hverdag
indrette jeres besidde personlig OMKOSTNINGSFRIT
elektronisk indlevere beretning af igangvserende hen til
mail.yahoo.com
###
Behage holde for et ojeblik siden hen til hitte den
elektronisk indlevere henvende placeret nederst eller den
enden pa legen indevserende side. Vi hab jer vil sende
elektronisk indlevere hen til os , selv om indevserende er i
hjaslp eller ophjaelpning. Vi ligeledes give mod jer hen til
henvende sig til os med henblik pa Elektronisk B0ger at vi
pristilbud at er uden omkostninger , og omkostningsfrit.
Vi lave nyde mange b0ger i udenlandsk sprogene , men vi
lave ikke altid opstille sig hen til byde velkommen
elektronisk ( dataoverf0re ) fordi vi bare skabe anvendelig
den b0ger eller den emner at er den h0jst anmodede.
Vi give mod jer hen til fortssette hen til bed hen til God og
hen til fortssette hen til laere omkring Sig af laesning den Ny
Testamente. Vi velkommen jeres sp0rgsmal og
bemaerkninger af elektronisk indlevere.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Norway - Norway - Norwegian -
Norway - Prayer Requests (praying ) to God - explained
in Norwegian Language
Norway Norwegian Nordic Prayer Jesus Christ a God Hvor Be
kanne hore meg bonn anmode gir hjelpe meg finner sprit Som kan
ledes
Snakker a God , skaperen av det Univers , det Lord :
1. det du ville gir a meg tapperheten a be tingene det JEG
n0d a be
2. det du ville gir a meg tapperheten a mene du og
godkjenne hva du vil gjerne gj0re med meg livet , istedet for
meg opph0ye meg egen ville ( hensikten ) over din.
3. det du ville gir meg hjelpe a ikke utleie meg rank av det
ubekjent a bli det be om tilgivelse , eller grunnlaget for meg
ikke for a anrette you.
4. det du ville gir meg hjelpe a se og a hore hvor a har den
sprit styrke JEG n0d ( igjennom din ord bibelen ) en ) for
begivenhetene for ut og b ) for meg egen personlig sprit
reise.
5. Det du God ville gir meg hjelpe a vil gjerne anrette Du
flere
6. Det du ville minne meg a samtalen med du prayerwhen )
JEG er frustrert eller inne problemet , istedet for pr0ver a
l0se saker meg selv bare igjennom meg human styrke.
7. Det du ville gir meg Klokskap og en hjertet fylte med
Bibelsk Klokskap i den grad at JEG ville anrette du flere
effektivt.
8. Det du ville gir meg en 0nske a studere din ord , bibelen ,
( det Ny Testamentet Gospel av John ), opp pa en personlig
basis
9. det du ville gir assistanse a meg i den grad at JEG er
kj0pedyktig legge merke til saker inne bibelen ( din ord )
hvilke JEG kanne personlig fortelle til , og det vill hjelpe
meg oppfatte hva du 0nske meg a gj0re inne meg livet.
10. Det du ville gir meg stor discernment , a oppfatte hvor a
forklare a andre hvem du er , og det JEG ville vsere i stand
til h0re hvor a h0re og vite hvor a sta opp for du og din ord (
bibelen )
1 1 . Det du ville bringe folk ( eller websites ) inne meg livet
hvem vil gjerne vite du , og hvem er kraftig inne deres
akkurat forstaelse av du God ); og Det du ville bringe folk (
eller websites ) inne meg livet hvem ville vsere i stand til
oppmuntre meg a akkurat h0re hvor a dividere bibelen ordet
av sannhet (Timothy 215:).
12. Det du ville hjelpe meg a h0re a ha stor forstaelse om
hvilken Bibel versjon er best , hvilke er h0yst akkurat , og
hvilke har de fleste sprit styrke & makt , og hvilke versjon
avtaler med det original manuskriptet det du inspirert
forfatternes av det Ny Testamentet a skrive.
13. Det du ville gir hjelpe a meg a bruk meg tid inne en fint
vei , og ikke for a sl0seri meg tid opp pa False eller tom
emballasje metoder a komme naermere a God ( bortsett fra
det er tkke virkelig Bibelsk ), og der hvor dem metoder
tilvirke for ikke sa lenge siden frist eller varer sprit fruit.
14. Det du ville gir assistanse a meg a oppfatte hva a kikke
etter inne en kirken eller en sted av -tilbeder , hva arter av
sp0rsmal a anmode , og det du ville hjelpe meg a finner
mene eller en fortid med stor sprit klokskap istedet for lett
eller false svar.
15. det du ville anledning meg a erindre a huske din ord
bibelen ( som Romersk 8), i den grad at JEG kanne ha den
inne meg hjertet og ha meg sinn ferdig , og vsere rede til a
gir en svaret a andre av det hape pa at JEG ha om du.
16. Det du ville bringe hjelpe a meg i den grad at meg egen
theology og doctrines a vsere enig i din ord , bibelen og det
du ville fortsette a hjelpe meg vite hvor meg forstaelse av
doctrine kan forbedret i den grad at meg egen livet lifestyle
og forstaelse fortsetter a bli n0yere hvorfor du 0nske den a
bli for meg.
17. Det du ville apen meg sprit innblikk ( konklusjonene )
flere og flere , og det der hvor meg forstaelse eller
oppfattelse av du er ikke akkurat , det du ville hjelpe meg a
h0re hvem Jesus Christ virkelig er.
18. Det du ville gir hjelpe a meg i den grad at JEG ville
vsere i stand til separat alle false rituals hvilke JEG ha
avhenge opp pa , fra din helt lserer inne bibelen , eventuell
av hva JEG f0lger er ikke av God , eller er i motsetning til
hva du vil gjerne lsere oss om fulgte du.
19. Det alle presser av darlig ville ikke ta fjerne alle sprit
forstaelse hvilke JEG ha , bortsett fra temmelig det JEG
ville selge i detalj kjennskapen til hvor a vite du og ikke for
a vsere narret inne i disse dager av sprit bedrag.
20. Det du ville taringe sprit styrke og hjelpe a meg i den
grad at Jeg vil ikke for a vsere del av det Stor Faller Fjerne
eller av alle bevegelse hvilket kunne vsere spiritually
counterfeit a du og a din Hellig Ord
21. Det hvis det er alt det JEG ha gjort det meg livet , eller
alle vei det JEG ha ikke reagert a du idet JEG burde ha og
det er forhindrer meg fra enten den ene eller den andre av
gaing med du , eller har forstaelse , det du ville bringe dem
saker / svar / begivenheter rygg i meg sinn , i den grad at
JEG ville renonsere pa seg inne navnet av Jesus Christ , og
alle av deres virkninger og konsekvensene , og det du ville
ombytte alle tomhet ,sadness eller gi opp hapet inne meg
livet med det Glede av det Lord , og det JEG ville vsere flere
fokusere opp pa innlsering a f0lge etter etter du av lesing din
ord , det Bibel
22. Det du ville apen meg eyes i den grad at JEG ville vsere i
stand til klare se og anerkjenne hvis det er en Stor Bedrag
om Sprit emner , hvor a oppfatte denne phenomenon ( eller
disse begivenheter ) fra en Bibelsk perspektiv , og det du
ville gir meg klokskap a vite hvorfor det Jeg vil h0re hvor a
hjelpe meg venner og elsket seg ( slektningene ) ikke vsere
del av it.
23. Det du ville sikre det en gang meg eyes er apen og meg
sinn forstar det sprit vekt av aktuelle begivenheter tar sted
pa jorden , det du ville forberede meg hjertet a godkjenne
din sannhet , og det du ville hjelpe meg oppfatte hvor a
finner tapperheten og styrke igjennom din Hellig Ord ,
bibelen. Inne navnet av Jesus Christ , JEG anmode om disse
saker bekreftende meg 0nske a bli i f0lge avtalen din ville ,
og JEG sp0r til deres klokskap og a har en kjserlighet til det
Sannhet Samarbeidsvillig
Flere pa bunnen av S ide
Hvor a ha Evig Livet
Vi er glad hvis denne liste over ( b0nn anmoder a God ) er
dugelig a hjelpe du. Vi oppfatte denne kanskje ikke vsere det
best eller h0yst effektiv oversettelse. Vi forsta det der er
mange annerledes veier av gjengivelsen innfall og ord. Hvis
du har en forslag for en bedre oversettelse , eller hvis du
ville like a ta en liten bel0pet av din tid a sende antydninger
a oss , du ville vsere hjalp tusenvis av andre mennesker
likeledes , hvem ville sa lese det forbedret oversettelse. Vi
ofte har en Ny Testamentet anvendelig inne din
omgangssprak eller inne sprakene det er sjelden eller gamle.
Hvis du er ser for en Ny Testamentet inne en spesifikk
omgangssprak , behage skrive til oss. Likeledes , vi vil
gjerne vsere sikker og pr0ve a meddele det en gang imellom
, vi gj0re tilbud b0ker det er ufri og det gj0re bekostning
pengene.
Bortsett fra hvis du kan ikke by noen av dem elektronisk
b0ker , vi kanne ofte gj0re en bytte av elektronisk b0ker for
hjelpe med oversettelse eller oversettelse arbeide. Du som
ikke har a bli en profesjonell arbeider , kun fa stamgjest
personen hvem er interessert i hjalp. Du burde har en
computer eller du burde ha adgang til en computer for din
innenbys bibliotek eller universitet eller universitet , siden
dem vanligvis ha bedre forbindelser a det sykehuslege. Du
kanne likeledes vanligvis opprette din egen personlig
LEDIG elektronisk innlevere regningen av gar a
mail.yahoo.com
Behage ta en 0yeblikk a finner det elektronisk innlevere
henvende seg lokalisert nederst eller utgangen av denne
side. Vi hape du ville sende elektronisk innlevere a oss ,
hvis denne er av hjelpe eller oppmuntring. Vi likeledes
oppmuntre du a sette seg i forbindelse med oss angaende
Elektronisk B0ker det vi tilbud det er uten bekostning , og
ledig.
Vi gj0re ha mange b0ker inne utenlandsk sprakene , bortsett
fra vi ikke alltid sted seg a fa elektronisk ( dataoverf0re )
fordi vi bare lage anvendelig b0kene eller emnene det er de
fleste anmodet. Vi oppmuntre du a fortsette a be a God og a
fortsette a h0re om Seg av lesing det Ny Testamentet. Vi
velkommen din sp0rsmal og kommentarer av elektronisk
innlevere.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Modern Greek
IlpooetOT oto 0e6 Aya7mx6c; 0e6<;, Eac; et)xapioxorjLie 6xt
aox6 to Erjayyeko f) ao-cf) r) vea 5ia9f)Kn exet
oaieXerj9epco9ei exot cboxe eiuaoxe oe 9eor| va ud9ot)ue
7ieptoo6xepcflv yta oa;. ITapaKaM) Por|9f|oxe xovq
av9pd)7iorj<; apuoStorjc; yta va Kaxaoxf|oei aox6 xo
rjIeKipoviKo Pipiio 5ta9eotuo. Eepexe 710101 eivat Koa eioxe
oe 9eor) va xovq Por|9f|oexe. ITapaKaM) xovq Por|9f|oxe yta
va eioxe oe 9eor) va a7taoxoXr|9ei ypf)yopa, Kat va
KaraoTrioei oe 7ieptoo6xepa r|XeKxpoviKd Pipiia 5ta9eot|ia
ITapaKaM) xovq Por|9f|oxe yta va exexe olouc; xovq 7t6porj<;,
ia xpTHiaxa, xn 5i3vaur| Kat xo xpovo 6xt xp£tdCovxai
7tpoiceiuevorj va eivat oe 9eor) va oi)vexioot)v yta oa;.
ITapaKaM Por|9f|oxe eKeivot 7torj eivat uepoc; xnc; oudSac;
7tot) xovq Por)9d oe Ka9r|uepivr| pdor). ITapaKaM xovq
5cboxe xn 5i3vaur| yta va ouvexioexe Kat va 5cboexe oe Kd9e
evav ajco xovq xo O7upixoorjal kov> KoraMpaivet yta xnv
epyaoia 6xi xox>q 9eXexe yia va K&veie. riapaKaM) Por|9f|oxe
Kd9e evac; oaio xovq yia va lit|v exexe xo (p6(3o Kai yia va
9i)Lir|9eixe 6xi eioxe o ©eoc; ran) ajiavid oxr|v 7tpooeuxii Kai
7iou eivai iwiei)9i)voc; yia 6Xa.
npooei3xo(iai 6xi 9a xovq ev9appi3vaxe, Kai 6xi xouc;
7tpooxaxei)exe, Kai r) epyaoia & xo raoupyeio 6xi
(Tumieieyouv.
llpooeDxoLiai 6xi 9a xorx; 7tpooxaxeDaxe ajt6 tt? 7rvei)LiaxiKec;
SuvdLieic; f) dXXa eLira>5ia ran) 9a Lutoporjoav va zovc,
pXdv|/ouv f) va xouc; emPpaSwouv. IlapaKaM) Lie Por|9f|oxe
6xav xpT)oi|i07ioicb ao-ciiv xnv vea 5ia9f|KT| yia va oKecprcb
87iiori<; xovq av9pcbran)c; ran) exouv Kaxaoxf|oei auxf|V xnv
8k5ooti 5ia9eoiLir|, exoi cboxe Lutopcb va 7tpooer|9cb yia xouc;
Kai exoi Lutoporjv va oi)vexioouv va Por|9oi3v 7iepioo6xepouc;
av9pcbran>c
npooei)xo(iai 6xi 9a liou 5ivaxe Liia ayd7tr| xou iepoi3 Word
oac; (r) vea 5ia9f|KT|), Kai 6xi 9a liou 5ivaxe xnv 7rveuLiaxiKec;
(ppovr|OT| Kai xn 5idKpior| yia va oac; ^epexe Kalurepa Kai
yia va KaxaXdpexe xn xpoviKf) 7iepio5o 6xi (^ouLie Lieoa.
IlapaKalcb Lie Por|9f|oxe yia va ^epexe rak; va e^exdoei xicj
SuoKoMec; 6xi epxoLiai avxiLiexcora)c; Lie Kd9e rpepa. O
A6p5ocj God, Lie Por)9d yia va 9eXf|oei va oacj ^epei
Kalrjiepa Kai va 9eXf|oei va Por|9f|oei dlloucj Xpioxiavoucj
oxr|v 7iepioxT) uou Kai oe 6X0 xov koolio.
ITpooeuxoLiai 6xi 9a 5ivaxe xnv r|XeKxpoviKf| OLidSa Pipiicov
Kai eKeivoi ram xoucj Por|9ouv r) (ppovr|of| oacj. ripooeuxoLiai
6xi 9a Por|9ouoaxe ia LieLiovcoLieva Lielr) xncj oiKoyeveidcj
xoucj (Kai xr|<; oiKoyeveidcj liou) yia va e^a7taxr|9eixe 6x1
7tvei)uaxiKd, dkla na va oac KaialaPeie Kai na va
9eXf|oexe va oac 5exxeixe Kai va aKoXou9f|oexe Lie Kd9e
xpo7io. Eraoric raxpexexe lio; xnv dveor) Kai o5r|yiec oe
aurouc xouc xpovouc Kai oac (^rrccb yia va kovco auxd xa
7tpdyLiaxa 0x0 ovoLia xou Inoou, Amen,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
German - Deutch - Allemand
German Prayers Gebet zum Gott wie man wie horen kann
dass meinem Gebet wie bittet Hilfe zu mir zu geben wie
man geistige Anleitung
German - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God -
explained in German Language
Mit Gott sprechen, der Schopfer des Universums, der Lord:
L, die Sie zu mir dem Mut, die Sachen zu beten geben
wiirden, die ich benotige, um 2. zu beten, die Sie zu mir dem
Mut, Ihnen zu glauben und anzunehmen geben wiirden, was
Sie mit meinem Leben tun mochten, anstelle von mir meine
Selbst erhebend Wille (Absicht) uber Direm.
3., denen Sie mir Hilfe geben wiirden, um meine Furcht vor
dem Unbekannten die Entschuldigungen nicht werden zu
lassen oder die Grundlage fur mich, zum Sie nicht zu
dienen.
4., der Sie mir Hilfe, um zu sehen geben wiirden und zu
erlernen, wie man die geistige Starke ich hat, benotigen Sie
(durch Ihr Wort die Bibel) A) fur die Falle voran und B) fur
meine eigene personliche geistige Reise.
5. DaB Sie Gott mir Hilfe geben wiirden, um Sie mehr
dienen zu wiinschen
6. DaB Sie mich erinnern wiirden, mit Ihnen zu sprechen
(prayer)when mich werden frustriert oder in der
Schwierigkeit, anstatt zu versuchen, Sachen selbst nur durch
meine menschliche Starke zu beheben.
7. DaB Sie mir Klugheit und ein Herz geben wiirden, fullten
mit biblischer Klugheit, damit ich Sie effektiv dienen wiirde.
8. DaB Sie mir einen Wunsch geben wiirden, Ihr Wort, die
Bibel zu studieren, (das neues Testament-Evangelium von
John) auf personlicher Ebene
9. das Sie Unterstutzung zu mir geben wiirden, damit ich
bin, Sachen in der Bibel (Ihr Wort) zu beachten der ich auf
und der personlich beziehen kann mir hilft, zu verstehen,
was Sie mich in meinem Leben tun wunschen.
10. DaB Sie mir groBe Einsicht geben wiirden, um zu
verstehen wie nian anderen erklart, die Sie sind, und daB ich
sein wiirde, zu erlernen, wie nian erlernt und kann fiir Sie
und Ihr Wort (die Bibel) oben stehen
11. DaB Sie Leute (oder Web site) in meinem Leben holen
wiirden, die Sie kennen mochten und die in ihrem genauen
Verstandnis von Ihnen stark sind (Gott); und das wiirden Sie
Leute (oder Web site) in meinem Leben holen, das ist, mich
anzuregen, genau zu erlernen, wie nian die Bibel das Wort
der Wahrheit (2 Timotheegras 2: 15) teilt.
12. DaB Sie mir helfen wiirden zu erlernen, groBes
Verstandnis uber, welche Bibelversion zu haben am besten
ist, die am genauesten ist und die die geistigste Starke u. die
Energie hat und dem Version mit den ursprunglichen
Manuskripten ubereinstimmt, daB Sie die Autoren des neuen
Testaments anspornten zu schreiben.
13. DaB Sie mir Hilfe, um meine Zeit in einer guten Weise
zu verwenden geben wiirden, und meine Zeit auf den
falschen oder leeren Methoden nicht zu vergeuden, naeher
an Gott (aber dem, zu erhalten nicht wirklich biblisch seien
Sie) und wo jene Methoden keine lange Bezeichnung oder
dauerhafte geistige Frucht produzieren.
14. DaB Sie mir Unterstiitzung geben wiirden, was zu
verstehen, in einer Kirche oder in einem Ort der Anbetung
zu suchen, welche Arten der Fragen zum zu bitten und daB
Sie mir helfen wiirden, Glaubiger oder einen Pastor mit
groBer geistiger Klugheit anstelle von den einfachen oder
falschen Antworten zu finden.
15. den Sie mich veranlassen wiirden, mich zu erinnern, um
sich Ihr Wort zu merken die Bibel (wie Romans ist 8), damit
ich es in meinem Herzen haben und an meinen Verstand
sich vorbereiten lassen kann, und bereit, eine Antwort zu
anderen der Hoffnung zu geben, die ich uber Sie habe.
16. DaB Sie mir Hilfe damit meine eigene Theologie und
Lehren holen wiirden, um mit Ihrem Wort, die Bibel
ubereinzustimmen und daB Sie fortfahren wiirden, mir zu
helfen, zu konnen, mein Verstandnis der Lehre verbessert
werden kann, damit mein eigenes Leben, Lebensstil und
Verstehen fortfahrt, zu sein naeher an, was Sie es fur mich
sein wunschen.
17. DaB Sie meinen geistigen Einblick
(Zusammenfassungen) mehr und mehr offnen wiirden und
daB, wo mein Verstandnis oder Vorstellung von Ihnen nicht
genau ist, daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, zu erlernen, wem
Jesus Christ wirklich ist.
18. DaB Sie mir Hilfe geben wiirden, damit ich in der
LageSEIN wiirde, alle falschen Rituale zu trennen, denen
ich von, von Hirem freien Unterricht in der Bibel, wenn
irgendwelche abgehangen habe von, was ich folgend bin, ist
nicht vom Gott, oder ist kontrar zu, was Sie uns unterrichten
wiinschen - uber das Folgen Sie.
19. DaB keine Krafte des Ubels nicht irgendwie geistiges
Verstandnis wegnehmen wiirden, das ich habe, aber eher,
daB ich das Wissen behalten wiirde von, wie man Sie kennt
und nicht an diesen Tagen der geistigen Tauschung betrogen
wird.
20. DaB Sie geistige Starke holen und zu mir helfen wiirden,
damit ich nicht ein Teil von groBen weg fallen oder
irgendeiner Bewegung bin, die zu Ihnen und zu Ihrem
heiligen Wort Angelegenheiten nachgemacht sein wiirde.
21. Das, wenn es alles gibt, das ich in meinem Leben getan
habe oder irgendeine Weise, daB ich nicht auf Sie reagiert
habe, wie ich haben sollte und die mich entweder am Gehen
mit Ihnen hindert oder Haben des Verstehens, daB Sie jene
things/responses/events zuriick in meinen Verstand, damit
ich auf sie im Namen Jesus Christ verzichten wiirde, und
alle ihre von und von Konsequenzen holen wiirden und daB
Sie jede mogliche Leere, Traurigkeit oder Verzweiflung in
meinem Leben mit der Freude am Lord ersetzen wiirden und
daB ich mehr auf das Lernen, Ihnen zu folgen gerichtet
wiirde, indem man Ihr Wort las, die Bibel.
22. DaB Sie meine Augen offnen wiirden, damit ich in der
LageSEIN wiirde, offenbar zu sehen und zu erkennen, wenn
es eine groBe Tauschung uber geistige Themen gibt, wie
man dieses Phanomen (oder diese Falle) von einer
biblischen Perspektive und daB Sie mir Klugheit geben
wiirden, um zu wissen und damit ich erlernt versteht, wie
man meinen Freunden und liebte eine (Verwandte) ein Teil
von ihm nicht zu sein hilft.
23 DaB Sie sicherstellen wiirden, daB einmal meine Augen
und mein Verstand geoffnet sind, versteht die geistige
Bedeutung der gegenwartigen Falle, die in der Welt
stattfinden, daB Sie mein Herz vorbereiten wiirden, um Ihre
Wahrheit anzunehmen und daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, zu
verstehen, wie man Mut und Starke durch Ihr heiliges Wort,
die Bibel findet. Im Namen Jesus Christ, bitte ich um diese
Sachen, die meinen Wunsch bestatigen, Ihr Wille
iibereinzustimmen, und ich bitte um Hire Klugheit und eine
Liebe der Wahrheit zu haben, Amen.
Mehr an der Unterseite der Seite
wie man ewiges Leben u.
Hat
Wir sind froh, wenn diese Liste (der Gebetantrage zum
Gott) in der LagelST, Sie zu unterstutzen. Wir verstehen,
daB diese moglicherweise nicht die beste oder
wirkungsvollste Ubersetzung sein kann. Wir verstehen, daB
es viele unterschiedliche Weisen des Ausdriickens von von
Gedanken und von von Wortern gibt. Wenn Sie einen
Vorschlag fiir eine bessere Ubersetzung haben oder wenn
Sie etwas Ihrer Zeit dauern mochten, Vorschlage zu
schicken uns, werden Sie Tausenden der Leute auch helfen,
die dann die verbesserte Ubersetzung lesen. Wir haben
haufig ein neues Testament, das in Ihrer Sprache oder in den
Sprachen vorhanden ist, die selten oder alt sind.
Wenn Sie nach einem neuen Testament in einer spezifischen
Sprache suchen, schreiben Sie uns bitte. Auch wir mochten
sicher sein und versuchen, das manchmal mitzuteilen, bieten
wir Biicher an, die nicht frei sind und die Geld kosten.
Aber, wenn Sie nicht einige jener elektronischen Biicher
sich leisten konnen, konnen wir einen Austausch der
elektronischen Biicher ftir Hilfe bei der Ubersetzung oder
bei der Ubersetzung Arbeit haufig tun. Sie miissen nicht ein
professioneller Arbeiter sein, nur eine regelmaBige Person,
die interessiert ist, an zu helfen.
Sie sollten einen Computer haben, oder Sie sollten Zugang
zu einem Computer an Ihrer lokalen Bibliothek oder
Hochschule oder Universitat haben, da die normalerweise
bessere Anschliisse zum Internet haben. Sie konnen Ihr
eigenes personliches FREIES Konto der elektronischen
Post, indem Sie zum mail.yahoo.com
auch normalerweise herstellen gehen dauern bitte einen
Moment, um die Adresse der elektronischen Post zu finden
befunden an der Unterseite oder am Ende dieser Seite.
Wir hoffen, daB Sie uns elektronische Post schicken, wenn
diese hilfreich oder Ermutigung ist. Wir regen Sie auch an,
mit uns hinsichtlich der elektronischen Biicher in
Verbindung zu treten, die wir dem sind ohne Kosten und
freies
anbieten, die, wir viele Biicher in den Fremdsprachen haben,
aber wir nicht sie immer setzen, um elektronisch zu
empfangen (Download) weil wir nur vorhanden die Biicher
oder die Themen bilden, die erbeten sind. Wir regen Sie an
fortzufahren, zum Gott zu beten und fortzufahren, uber ihn
zu erlernen, indem wir das neue Testament lesen. Wir
begriiBen Dire Fragen und Anmerkungen durch
elektronische Post.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Caro Deus , Obrigada que esta Novo Testamento tem sido
lancado de modo a que nos somos capaz aprender mais
sobre a ti. Por favor ajudar a gente responsavel por fazendo
esta Electronico livro disponivel.
Por favor ajudar eles estarem capaz de trabalho rapidamente
, e fazer mais Electronico livros disponivel Por favor ajudar
eles haverem todos os recursos , o dinheiro , a forca e as
horas que elas precisar a fim de ser capaz de guardar
trabalhando para si.
Por favor ajudar aquelas esse are parte da equipa essa ajuda
lhes num todos os dias base. Por favor dar lhes a forca
continuar e dar cada deles o espiritual comprendendo para o
trabalho que voce quer eles fazerem. Por favor ajudar cada
um deles para nao ter medo e lembrar que tu es o deus o
qual respostas oracao e quem e encarregado de todas as
coisas.
EU orar que a ti would encorajar lhes , e que voce protege
lhes , e o trabalho & ministerio que elas sao comprometido
em. EU orar que voce protegeria lhes de o Espiritual Forcas
ou outro barreiras isso podeia ser maleficio lhes ou lento
lhes abaixo.
Por favor ajudar a mim quando Eu uso esta Novo
Testamento para tambem reflectir a gente o qual ter feito
esta edicao disponivel , de modo a que eu possa orar para
eles e por conseguinte eles podem continuar ajudar mais
pessoas EU orar que voce daria a mim um amar do seu
Divino Palavra ( o novo Testamento ), e que voce daria a
mim espiritual sabedoria e discernment conhecer a ti melhor
e para comprender o periodo de tempo que nos somos
vivendo em.
Por favor ajudar eu saber como lidar com as dificuldades
que Eu sou confrontado com todos os dias. Lorde Deus ,
Ajudar eu querer conhecer a ti Melhor e querer ajudar outro
Christian no meu area e pelo mundo. EU orar que voce daria
o Electronico livro equipa e aquelas o qual trabalho no
Websters e aqueles que ajudar lhes seu sabedoria. EU orar
que voce ajudaria o individuo membros do seu familia ( e a
minha familia ) para nao ser espiritual enganar , mas
comprender a ti e querer aceitar e seguir a ti em todos
bastante. e Eu pergunto voce fazer estas coisas em nome de
Jesus , Amen ,
Dear God,
Thank you that this New Testament
has been released so that we are able
to learn more about you.
Please help the people responsible for making this
Electronic book available. Please help them to be able to
work fast, and make more Electronic books available
Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the
strength and the time that they need in order to be able to
keep working for You.
Please help those that are part of the team that help them on
an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue
and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the
work that you want them to do. Please help each of them to
not have fear and to remember that you are the God who
answers prayer and who is in charge of everything.
I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect
them, and the work & ministry that they are engaged in.
I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces
or other obstacles that could harm them or slow them down.
Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think
of the people who have made this edition available, so that I
can pray for them and so they can continue to help more
people
I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word
(the New Testament), and that you would give me spiritual
wisdom and discernment to know you better and to
understand the period of time that we are living in.
Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that
I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want
to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in
my area and around the world.
I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and
those who work on the website and those who help them
your wisdom.
I pray that you would help the individual members of their
family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but
to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in
every way.
and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus,
Amen,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Croatian Croatian Croatian
Croatian - Prayer Requests (praying ) to God - explained
in Croatian Language
Croatian Croatia Prayer Isus Krist Moljenje to Bog Kako to
Moliti moze cuti moj pitati popustanje ponuditi mene
Govorenje to Bog , Stvoritelj dana Svemir , Gospodar :
1. taj te ce popustanje meni u hrabrost to moliti predmet taj
Trebam to moliti
2. taj te ce popustanje meni u hrabrost to vjerovati te i
prihvatiti sto koji zelite za napraviti sa mojim zivot ,
umjesto mene uznijeti moj posjedovati htijenje ( namjera )
iznad tvoj.
3. taj te ce popustanje mene ponuditi ne pustiti moj
strahovanje dana nepoznat postati isprika , ili baza za mene
ne to posluzitelj you.
4. taj te ce popustanje mene ponuditi vidjeti i nauciti kako to
imati duhovni snaga Trebam ( preko tvoj rijec Biblija ) ) za
jedan dan dogadaj ispred i b ) za moj posjedovati osobni
duhovni putovanje.
5. Taj te Bog ce popustanje mene ponuditi istanje to
posluzitelj Te vise
6. Taj te ce podsjetiti mene to pricati sa te prayerwhen ) Ja
sam frustriran ili u problemima , umjesto tezak to odluka
predmet ja osobno jedini preko moj covjecji snaga.
7. Taj te ce popustanje mene Mudrost i srce ispunjen sa
Biblijski Mudrost tako da JA ce posluzitelj te vise efektivno.
8. Taj te ce popustanje mene zelja to studirati tvoj rijec ,
Biblija , ( novim Oporuka Evandelje od John ), na osobni
baza
9. taj te ce popustanje pomoc meni u tako da Ja sam u
mogucnosti to obavijest predmet in Biblija ( tvoj rijec ) sto
Ja mogu osobni povezivati se , i da htijenje pomoc mene
shvatiti sto koji zelite mene za napraviti u mojem zivot.
10. Taj te ce popustanje mene velik raspoznavanje , to
shvatiti kako to objasniti to ostali tko ti si , i da JA bi bilo u
mogucnosti nauciti kako nauciti i znati kako to pristajati uza
sto te i tvoj rijec ( Biblija )
1 1 . Taj te ce donijeti narod ( ili websiteovi ) u mojem zivot
tko istanje to znati te , i tko jesu jak in njihov tocnost
sporazum od te ( bog ); i da te ce donijeti narod ( ili
websiteovi ) u mojem zivot koji ce biti u mogucnosti to
hrabriti mene to precizan naucite kako podijeliti Biblija rijec
od istina (2 Plasljiv 215:).
12. Taj te ce pomoc mene nauciti to imati velik sporazum o
sto Biblija inacici je najbolji , sto je vecina tocnost , i sto je
preko duhovni snaga & Power PC , i sto inacici sporazum sa
izvorni rukopis taj te nadahnut autorstvo dana Nov Oporuka
to pisati.
13. Taj te ce popustanje ponuditi mene koristenje moj
vrijeme in dobar put , i ne to prosipati moj vrijeme na
Neistinit ili prazan Metodije da biste dobili Zatvori to Bog (
ali koji nisu vjerno Biblijski ), i gdje svi oni Metodije
stvarajuci nijedan ceznuti uvjeti ili trajan duhovni voce.
14. Taj te ce popustanje pomoc meni u to shvatiti sto uciniti
traziti in Churchill ili mjesto od moliti se , sto rod od pitanje
to pitati , i da te ce pomoc mene pronaci onaj koji vjeruje ili
pastor sa velik duhovni mudrost umjesto lahak ili neistinit
odgovoriti.
15. taj te ce nanijeti mene to sjecati se to sjecati se tvoj rijec
Biblija ( kao sto je Rumunjski 8), tako da Ja mogu imati
Internet u mojem srce i imati moj imati sto protiv spreman ,
i biti spreman to popustanje odgovoriti to ostali dana
uzdanica taj Imam o te.
16. Taj te ce donijeti ponuditi mene tako da moj posjedovati
teologija i doktrina to poklapati se tvoj rijec , Biblija i da te
ce nastaviti to pomoc mene znati kako moj sporazum od
doktrina moze poboljsati tako da moj posjedovati zivot , stil
zivota i sporazum nastaviti biti Zatvori to sto koji zelite
Internet biti za mene.
17. Taj te ce OpenBSD moj duhovni unutar ( zakljucak )
vise i vise , i da gdje svi moj sporazum ili percepcija od te
nije tocnost , taj te ce pomoc mene nauciti tko Isus Krist
vjerno je.
18. Taj te ce popustanje ponuditi mene tako da JA bi bilo u
mogucnosti to odijeljen bilo koji neistinit ritualni sto Imam
zavisnost na , from tvoj jasan pomoc u ucenju in Biblija ,
ako postoje od sto Ja sam sljedece nije od Bog , ili je ugovor
to sto koji zelite to vas nauciti nas o sljedece te.
19. Taj bilo koji sila od zlo ce ne oduteti bilo koji duhovni
sporazum sto Imam , ali radije taj JA ce cvrsto drzati znanje
kako to znati te i ne biti lukav in te dani od duhovni varka.
20. Taj te ce donijeti duhovni snaga i ponuditi mene tako da
JA nece biti dio ognjevit Jesen Daleko ili od bilo koji pokret
sto bi bilo produhovljeno krivotvoren novac vama i u vas
S vet Rijec
21. Da ako ima je ista taj Imam ispunjavanja u mojem zivot
, ili bilo koji put taj Imam ne odgovaranje vama kao JA
trebaju imati i da je koji se moze sprijeciti mene sa ili
hodanje sa te , ili vlasnistvo sporazum , taj te ce donijeti oni
predmet / reakcija / dogadaj leda u moj imati sto protiv ,
tako da JA ce odreci se njima in ime od Isus Krist , i svi od
njihov efekt i posljedica , i da te ce opet staviti bilo koji
praznina ,sadness ili izgubiti nadu u mojem zivot sa Ono sto
pruza uzitak dana Gospodar , i da JA bi bilo vise fokusirati
na znanje to udarac te mimo citanje tvoj rijec , Biblija
22. Taj te ce OpenBSD moj oci tako da JA bi bilo u
mogucnosti to jasno vidjeti i prepoznati ako ima Velik
Varka o Duhovni tema , kako to shvatiti ovaj fenomen ( ili
te dogadaj ) from Biblijski perspektiva , i da te ce
popustanje mene mudrost to znati i tako dalje taj JA htijenje
naucite kako pomoc moj prijatelj i voljen sam sebe (
odnosni ) ne biti dio it.
23. Taj te ce osigurali da jedanput moj oci jesu OpenBSD i
moj imati sto protiv shvatiti duhovni izrazajnost od tekuci
dogadaj uzimanje mjesto u svijetu , taj te ce pripremiti moj
srce to prihvatiti tvoj istina , i da te ce pomoc mene shvatiti
kako pronaci hrabrost i snaga preko tvoj Svet Rijec , Biblija.
In ime od Isus Krist , JA traziti te predmet potvrditi moj
zelja biti slozno tvoj htijenje , i Ja sam iskanje tvoj mudrost i
to imati hatar dana Istina Da
Vise podno Stranica
Kako to imati Vjecan Zivot
Mi jesu veseo ako ovaj rub ( od moljenje molba to Bog ) je
u mogucnosti to pomoci te. Mi shvatiti ovaj mozda nece biti
najbolji ili vecina djelotvoran prevodenje. Mi shvatiti koji su
mnogobrojan razlicit putevi od istiskivanje misao i rijec.
Ukoliko imati sugestija za bolji prevodenje , ili ukoliko ce
voljeti uzeti malolitrazan iznos od tvoj vrijeme to poslati
sugestija nama , te htijenje biti pomoc tisuca od ostali narod
isto tako , koji ce onda citanje oplemenjen prevodenje. Mi
vise puta imati Nov Oporuka raspoloziv u vas jezik ili in
jezik koji su rijedak ili star. Ako ste oblicje za Nov Oporuka
in specifican jezik , ugoditi korespondirati nas. Isto tako , mi
istanje istinabog i pokusati komunicirati taj katkada , mi
obaviti ponuda knjiga koji nisu Slobodan i da obaviti trosak
novac.
Ali ukoliko ne moci priustiti neki od oni elektronski knjiga ,
mi moze vise puta obaviti izmjena od elektronski knjiga za
pomoc sa prevodenje ili prevodenje funkcionirati. Nemate
biti koji se odnosi na zvanje radnik , samo jedan dan
pravilan osoba tko je zainteresirana za pomoc. Te trebaju
imati racunalo ili te trebaju imati pristup to racunalo at tvoj
lokalni knjiznica ili fakulteti ili sveucilista , otada oni obicno
imati bolji povezivanje to Internet. Mozete isto tako obicno
utemeljiti tvoj posjedovati osobni SLOBODAN elektronicka
posta racun odlaskom na mail.yahoo.com
Ugoditi uzeti tren pronaci elektronicka posta adresa smjestiti
na dnu ili kraj od ovaj stranica. Nadamo se te htijenje poslati
elektronicka posta nama , ako ovaj je od pomoc ili
hrabrenje. Mi isto tako hrabriti te to kontakt nas zabrinutost
Elektronski Knjiga koju nudimo koji su sa trosak , i
slobodan.
Mi obaviti imati mnogobrojan knjiga in stran jezik , ali mi
ne uvijek mjesto njima to primiti elektronski ( preuzimanje
datoteka ) jer mi jedini izraditi raspoloziv knjiga ili tema
koji su preko molba. Mi hrabriti te to nastaviti to moliti to
Bog i to nastaviti nauciti o Njemu mimo citanje novim
Oporuka. Mi dobrodosli na tvoj pitanje i komentirajte mimo
elektronicka posta.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
CZECH CZECH TCHEK
Czech Prayer Modlitba Kristian jezuita Kristus az k Buh Jak
Modlit Buh pocinovat slyset modlitba k ptat Buh darovat
pomoci mne
Czech - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God -
explained in Czech Language
Mluveni az k Buh , clen urcity Stvof itel of clen urcity
Soubor , clen urcity Hospodin :
1 . aby tebe chtel bych darovat az k mne clen urcity kuraz az
k modlit clen urcity majetek aby Nemusim az k modlit
2. aby tebe chtel bych darovat az k mne clen urcity kuraz az
k domnivat se tebe a pfijmout jaky tebe potfeba az k jednat
ma duch , misto mne povysit ja sam vule ( cfl ) nad tvuj.
3. aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k ne dovolit
ma bat se of clen urcity neznama az k stat se clen urcity
odpustit , ci clen urcity baze do mne rozchazet se v nazorech
slouzit you.
4. aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k videt a az k
dostat instrukce jak? az k mit clen urcity duchovni sfla
Nemusim ( docela tvuj slovo clen urcity Bible ) jeden ) do
clen urcity pfihoda vpfed a b ) do ja sam osobni duchovni
cesta.
5. Aby tebe Buh chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k
potfeba az k slouzit Tebe vice 6. Aby tebe chtel bych
pfipomenout komu mne az k rozmlouvat s tebe prayerwhen
) JA am zmafeny ci do nesnaz , misto trying az k analyzovat
majetek ja sam ale docela ma lidsky sfla.
7. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne Moudrost a jeden srdce
nakyp s Biblicky Moudrost tak, ze JA chtel bych slouzit
tebe vice efektivni. 8. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne
jeden porucit az k uceni tvuj slovo , clen urcity Bible , (
Novy zakon Evangelium of Jan ), dale jeden osobni baze
9. aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoc az k mne tak, ze J A
am schopny az k oznameni majetek do clen urcity Bible (
tvuj slovo ) kdo Dovedu co se me tyce byt v pomeru k sem
tam , to postaci pomoci mne dovidat se jaky tebe potfeba
mne az k zavrazdit ma duch.
10. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne celek bystrost , az k
dovidat se jak? az k jasne se vyjadf it az k jini kdo tebe ar , a
aby JA chtel bych byt schopny az k dostat instrukce jak? az
k dostat instrukce a vRdRt jak? az k postavit se za tebe a
tvuj slovo ( clen urcity Bible )
1 1 . Aby tebe chtel bych nest lid ( ci websites ) do ma duch
kdo potfeba az k vRdRt tebe , a kdo ar silny do jejich pfesny
dohoda of tebe ( buh ); a Aby tebe chtel bych nest lid ( ci
websites ) do ma duch kdo vule byt schopny az k dodat
mysli mne az k pfesny dostat instrukce jak? az k delit clen
urcity Bible Pismo svate pravda (2 Bazlivy 215:).
12. Aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne az k dostat instrukce az
k mit celek dohoda kolem kdo Bible liceni is nejlepe , kdo is
nejcetnejsi pfesny , a kdo 3sg.prez.od have clen urcity
nejcetnejsi duchovni sila & mnozstvi , a kdo liceni souhlasi
jit s duchem casu original rukopis aby tebe dychat clen
urcity spisovatele of Novy zakon az k psat.
13. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoci az k mne az k
cviceni ma cas do jeden blaho cesta , a rozchazet se v
nazorech zpustosit ma cas dale Chybny ci hladovy metody
az k brat blizky az k Buh ( kdyby ne ar ne opravdu Biblicky
), a kde those metody napsat ne dlouha hlaska cas ci
{lastingllstalylltrvaly} } duchovni nest ovoce.
14. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoc az k mne az k
dovidat se jaky az k hledat do jeden cirkev ci jeden bydliste
of uctivani , jaky rody of otazky az k ptat se , a aby tebe
chtel bych pomoci mne az k nalez vef fci ci jeden duchovni s
celek duchovni moudrost misto bezstarostny ci chybny
odpovida.
15. aby tebe chtel bych byt pficinou mne na pametnou az k
memorovat tvuj slovo clen urcity Bible ( jako takovy Riman
8), tak, ze Dovedu mit ono do ma srdce a mit ma mysl
pfipraveny , a byt hbity az k darovat neurc. clen byt v
souhlase s jini of clen urcity nadeje aby Mam u sebe tebe.
16. Aby tebe chtel bych nest pomoci az k mne tak, ze ja sam
bohoslovi a doktrina az k souhlasit s tvuj slovo , clen urcity
Bible a aby tebe chtel bych stale byt pomoci mne vRdRt
jak? ma dohoda of doktrina pocfnovat byt opravit tak, ze ja
sam duch lifestyle a dohoda odrocit az k byt blizky k
jakemu licelu tebe potfeba ono az k byt pro mne.
17. Aby tebe chtel bych nechraneny ma duchovni jasnozfenf
( konec ) cim dale, tim vice , a aby kde ma dohoda ci
chapavost of tebe is ne pfesny , aby tebe chtel bych pomoci
mne az k dostat instrukce kdo Jezuita Kristus opravdu is.
18. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoci az k mne tak, ze JA
chtel bych byt schopny az k oddeleny jakykoliv chybny
obfad kdo J A mit duvera dale , dle tvuj cely doktrina do clen
urcity Bible , jestli vubec of jaky JA am nasledujici is ne of
Buh , ci is proti cemu jaky tebe potfeba az k ucit us kolem
nasledujici tebe.
19. Aby jakykoliv dohnat of nestesti chtel bych ne odebrat
jakykoliv duchovni dohoda kdo JA mit , aby ne dosti aby JA
chtel bych drzet clen urcity znalost ceho jak? az k vRdRt
tebe a rozchazet se v nazorech byt kiamat do tezaury days of
duchovni klam.
20. Aby tebe chtel bych nest duchovni sila a pomoci az k
mne tak, ze JA vule rozchazet se v nazorech byt cast of
notablove Klesani Pryc ci of jakykoliv pohyb kdo chtel bych
byt duchovo falsovat az k tebe a az k tvuj Svaty Slovo
21. Aby -li tam is cokoli aby JA mit utahany ma duch , ci
jakkoli aby JA mit ne dotazovana osoba az k tebe ackoliv
Sel bych mit a to jest opatfeni mne dle jeden nebo druhy
kraceni s tebe , ci having dohoda , aby tebe chtel bych nest
those majetek / citlivost pfistroje / pfihoda bek do ma mysl ,
tak, ze JA chtel bych nectit barvu je jmenem koho Jezuita
Kristus , a celek of jejich dojem a dosah , a aby tebe chtel
bych dat na dfivejsi misto jakykoliv emptiness ,sadness ci
beznadejnost do ma duch jit s duchem casu Radost of clen
urcity Hospodin , a aby J chtel bych byt vice lozisko dale
ucenost az k doprovazet tebe do cetba tvuj slovo , Bible
22. Aby tebe chtel bych nechraneny probuh tak, ze J A chtel
bych byt schopny az k jasne videt a pochopit -li tam is jeden
Celek Klam kolem Duchovni namet , jak? az k dovidat se
tato pfechodny ( ci tezaury pfihoda ) dle jeden Biblicky
perspektiva , a aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne moudrost az
k vRdRt a tak, ze JA vule dostat instrukce jak? poslouzit
jidlem ma druh a Amor sam ( pfibuzni ) ne byt cast of it.
23. Aby tebe chtel bych pojistit aby druhdy probuh ar
nechraneny a ma mysl dovidat se clen urcity duchovni
vyznam of beh pfihoda dobyti bydliste do clen urcity svet ,
aby tebe chtel bych chystat se ma srdce az k pfijmout tvuj
pravda , a aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne dovidat se jak?
az k nalez kuraz a sila docela tvuj Svaty Slovo , clen urcity
Bible. Jmenem koho Jezuita Kristus , JA tazat se na tezaury
majetek bifmovat ma porucit az k bjH; doma souhlas tvuj
vule , a JA am ptani se do tvuj moudrost a az k mit jeden
laska ke komu clen urcity Pravda Amen
Vice v clen urcity Dno of Blok
Jak? az k mit Nekonecny Duch
My ar rad -li tato barevny pruh of modlitba dotaz az k Buh
is schopny az k pomahat tebe. My dovidat se tato moci ne
byt clen urcity nejlepe ci nejcetnejsi efektivni desifrovani.
My dovidat se tamhleten ar mnoho neobvykly cesty of
interpretace domneni a slova. -li tebe mit jeden navrh do
jeden lepe desifrovani , ci -li tebe chtel bych do teze mfry az
k brat jeden maly cinit of tvuj cas az k poslat navrhy az k us
, tebe vule byt porce jidla tisic of druhy lid rovnez , kdo vule
nekdy cist clen urcity opravit desifrovani. My casto mit
jeden Novy Posledni vule pfistupny do tvuj jazyk ci do
jazyk aby ar nedovafeny ci davny. -li tebe ar hledet do jeden
Novy Posledni vule do jeden specificky jazyk , byt pfijemny
psat az k us. Rovnez , my potfeba az k jiste a namahat az k
byt ve styku aby nekdy , my cinit nabidka blok aby ar ne
Drzy a aby cinit cena penize.
Aby ne -li tebe delostfelectvo pfitok nejaky of those
elektronicky blok , my pocinovat casto cinit neurc. clen
burza of elektronicky blok do pomoci s desifrovani ci
desifrovani prace. Tebe cinit ne mit az k bjH; jeden odborny
delnik , ale jeden pofadny osoba kdo is obchod do porce
jidla. Tebe pozadovat mit jeden pocitac ci tebe pozadovat
mit pfistup az k jeden pocitac v tvuj lokalka knihovna ci
akademie ci univerzita , od te doby those obvykly mit lepe
klientela az k clen urcity internovana osoba. Tebe pocinovat
rovnez obvykly upevnit tvuj drahy osobni DRZY
elektronicka posta ucet do existujici az k mail.yahoo.com
BjH; pfijemny brat jeden dulezitost az k nalez clen urcity
elektronicka posta adresovat nalezt v clen urcity dno ci clen
urcity cfl of tato blok. My nadeje tebe vule poslat
elektronicka posta az k us , -li tato is of pomoci ci podpora.
My rovnez dodat mysli tebe az k dotyk us pokud jde o
Elektronicky Blok aby my nabidka aby ar bez cena , a drzy.
My cinit mit mnoho blok do cizi jazyk , aby ne my cinit
nekdy bydliste je az k dostat electronically ( zavadeni )
ponevadz my ale delat pfistupny clen urcity blok ci clen
urcity namet aby ar clen urcity nejcetnejsi dotaz. My dodat
mysli tebe az k stale byt modlit az k Buh a az k stale byt
dostat instrukce kolem Jemu do cetba Novy zakon. My vftat
tvuj otazky a poznamky do elektronicka posta.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Drogi Bog , Dzigkujg 6 w ten Nowy Testament
ma byl zwolniony byle tylko jestesmy able wobec nauczyc
si§ liczniejszy okolo ty. Prosz§ mi pomoc ludzie
odpowiedzialny pod katem wykonaniem ten Elektroniczny
ksiazka rozporzadzalny.
Prosz§ mi pomoc im zostac wyplacalny praca umocowany ,
i zrobic liczniejszy Elektroniczny ksiazki rozporzadzalny
Prosz§ mi pomoc im wobec miec wszystko ten zasoby , ten
pieniadze , ten sila i ten czas 6w oni potrzebowac w klasa
zostac wyplacalny utrzymywac dzialanie pod k^tem Ty.
Prosz§ mi pomoc 6w 6w jestescie obowi^zek od ten druzyna
6w wspolpracownik imuan codzienny podstawa.
Podobac si§ dawac im ten sila wobec kontynuowac i dawac
kazdy od im ten duchowy zgoda pod katem ten praca 6w ty
potrzeba im wobec czynic. Prosz§ mi pomoc kazdy od im
wobec nie miec strach i wobec zapamietac 6w jestes ten
Bog ktory odpowiedzi modlitwa i ktory jest w koszt od
wszystko. JA blagac 6w ty bylby zach^cac im , i 6w ty
ochraniac im , i ten praca & ministerstwo 6w oni sa^ zaj^ty.
J A blagac 6w ty bylby ochraniac im z ten Duchowy Sily
zbrojne albo inny przeszkody 6w kulisy szkoda im albo
powolny im w dol. Prosz§ mi pomoc podczas JA uzywac
ten Nowy Testament wobec takze pomyslec od ludzie ktory
miec wykonane ten wydanie rozporzadzalny , byle tylko JA
puszka metalowa modlic si§ za im i tak oni puszka
metalowa robic w dalszym ciaj>u wspolpracownik
liczniejszy spoleczeristwo JA blagac 6w ty bylby dawac mi
pewien milosc od twoj Swi^ty Wyraz ( ten Nowy Testament
), i 6w ty bylby dawac mi duchowy madrosc i orientacja
wobec znac ty polepszyc i wobec rozumiec ten okres 6w
jestesmy zyjacy w. Prosz§ mi pomoc wobec znac jak wobec
zawierac z transakcj^ ten trudnosci 6w JA jestem
skonfrontowany rezygnowac codziennie.
Lord Bog , Wspolpracownik mi wobec potrzeba wobec znac
ty Polepszyc i wobec potrzeba wobec wspolpracownik inny
Chrzescijanie w moj powierzchnia i wokolo ten swiat.
JA blagac 6w ty bylby dawac ten Elektroniczny ksiazka
druzyna i 6w ktory praca od pajeczyny i 6w ktory
wspolpracownik im twoj madrosc. JA blagac 6w ty bylby
wspolpracownik ten indywidualny czlonki od ich rodzina ( i
moj rodzina ) wobec nie byc duchowo zwodzil , oprocz
wobec rozumiec ty i ja wobec potrzeba wobec uznawac i
nastepowac po ty w na wszelki sposob. i JA zapytac ty
wobec czynic tych rzeczy na Boga Jezus , Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Slovenian
Slovenian
Slovenian - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God -
explained in Slovenian Language
slovenian prayer jezuit Kristus molitev Bog kako prositi kako moci
slisati svoj zaprositi podati ponuditi komu kaj mi
pri aparatu imeti se za boga , tvorec od vsemirje , bog :
1 . to vi hoteti izrociti mi pogum prositi stvari to rabim
prositi
2. to vi hoteti izrociti mi pogum v vernik vi ter uvazevati
kaksen hoces vzdrzati svoj zivljenje , namesto mi
navdusenje svoj lasten hoteti ( namen ) zgoraj vas.
3. to vi hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj ne pustiti svoj
grozen od neznano v postati opravicilo , ali osnova navzlic
ne streci you.
4. to vi hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj zagledati ter
zvedeti kako imeti bozji zakon cvrstost rabim ( skozi vas
izraziti z besedami biblija ) a ) zakaj pripetljaj spredaj ter b )
zakaj svoj lasten oseben netelesen potovanje.
5. to vi Bog hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj biti brez
streci vi vec
6. to vi hoteti spomniti se mi pogovarjati se vi prayerwhen )
jaz sem unicen ali v tezava , namesto tezaven odlociti stvari
sebi sele skozi svoj cloveski cvrstost.
7. to vi hoteti izrociti mi modrost ter a srcika poin Biblical
modrost tako da jaz hoteti zacetni udarec z zogo vi vec
razpolozljiv.
8. to vi hoteti izrociti mi a zahteva studirati vas izraziti z
besedami , biblija , ( novi testament evangelij od John ),
naprej a oseben osnova
9. to vi hoteti izrociti pomoc mi tako da morem opaziti
stvari v biblija ( vas izraziti z besedami ) kateri morem
osebno tikati se cesa , ter to zadostuje pomoc mi razumeti
kaksen vi biti brez mi uganjati v svoj zivljenje.
10. to vi hoteti izrociti mi velik bistroumnost , v razumeti
kako razlagati drugim kdo vi ste , ter to jaz domisljavec
zmozen zvedeti kako zvedeti ter znanje kako stati pokoncu
zakaj vi ter vas izraziti z besedami ( biblija )
1 1. to vi hoteti privleci narod ( ali websites ) v svoj zivljenje
kdo biti brez znati vi , ter kdo ste krepek v svoj natancen
razumeven od vi ( Bog ); ter to vi hoteti privleci narod ( ali
websites ) v svoj zivljenje kdo hoteti obstati zmozen v
podzigati mi v natancen zvedeti kako razpreti biblija izraziti
z besedami od resnica (2 plasljiv 215:).
12. to vi hoteti pomoc mi zvedeti imeti velik razumeven
priblizno kateri biblija prevod je najprimernejsi , kateri je
najvec natancen , ter kateri has najvec netelesen cvrstost &
sila , ter kateri prevod strinjati se s samorasel rokopis to vi
vdihniti pisec od novi testament pisati.
13. to vi hoteti izrociti ponuditi komu kaj mi rabiti svoj cas
v a dober izuriti za hojo ali jezo po cesti , ter ne v
razsipavati svoj cas naprej napacen ali puhel metoda
zadobiti sklepnik v Bog ( ce ze ne ste ne resnicno Biblical ),
ter kraj oni metoda predelki ne dolg pogoj ali trajen
netelesen sadje.
14. to vi hoteti izrociti pomoc mi v razumeti kaksen iskati v
a cerkvica ali a mesto od castiti , kaksen milosten od
vprasanje zaprositi , ter to vi hoteti pomoc mi najti vernik ali
a pastor s velik netelesen modrost namesto neprisiljen ali
napacen odgovor.
15. to vi hoteti vzrok mi spomniti se nauciti se na pamet vas
izraziti z besedami biblija ( kot na primer retoromanski 8),
tako da morem zivljati to v svoj srcika ter zivljati svoj srce
pripravljen , ter obstati radovoljen podati odgovor drugim
od upanje to imam priblizno vi.
16. to vi hoteti privleci ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da svoj
lasten teologija ter nauk ujemati se s vas izraziti z besedami
, biblija ter to vi hoteti vzdrznost v pomoc mi znanje kako
svoj razumeven od nauk moci obstati izpopolniti tako da
svoj lasten zivljenje lifestyle ter razumeven vzdrznost to live
at warefare with s. o. sklepnik eemu vi biti brez to v obstati
navzlic.
17. to vi hoteti plan svoj netelesen vpogled ( sklep ) bolj in
bolj , ter to kraj svoj razumeven ali zaznavanje od vi ni
natancen , to vi hoteti pomoc mi zvedeti kdo jezuit Kristus
resnicno je.
18. to vi hoteti izrociti ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da jaz
domisljavec zmozen razstati se poljuben napacen cerkveni
obredi kateri imam odvisnost naprej , s vas veder
poucevanje v biblija , ce sploh kateri od kaksen jaz sem
sledec ni od Bog , ali je nasprotno eemu kaksen hoces uciti
nas priblizno sledec vi.
19. to poljuben vojna sila od zlo hoteti ne odvzeti poljuben
netelesen razumeven kateri imam , sele precej to jaz hoteti
obdrzati znanost od kako znati vi ter ne v obstati goljufati
dandanes od netelesen prevara.
20. to vi hoteti privleci netelesen cvrstost ter ponuditi komu
kaj mi tako da nocem v obstati del od velika gospoda
padanje stran ali od poljuben tok kateri domisljavec
netelesen ponarejen vam na uslugo ter v vas svet izraziti z
besedami
21. to ce je nic to imam velja v svoj zivljenje , ali vsekakor
to imam ne odgovor vam na uslugo kot jaz should zivljati
ter to je preprecljiv mi s vsak izmed obeh pesacenje z vami ,
ali imetje razumeven , to vi hoteti privleci oni stvari /
odgovor / pripetljaj prislon v svoj srce , tako da jaz hoteti
odreci se jih v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit Kristus ,
ter prav do svoj vrednostni papirji ter posledica , ter to vi
hoteti nadomestiti poljuben puhlost ,sadness ali obup v svoj
zivljenje s veselje od bog , ter to jaz domisljavec vec zarisce
naprej ucenje slediti vi z citanje vas izraziti z besedami ,
biblija
22. to vi hoteti plan svoj oci tako da jaz domisljavec zmozen
v jasno zagledati ter pred sodiscem se pismeno obvezati ce
je a velik prevara priblizno netelesen predmet , kako v
razumeti to fenomen ( ali od this pripetljaj ) s a Biblical
perspektiven , ter to vi hoteti izrociti mi modrost znati ter
tako da bom se ucil kako v pomoc svoj prijateljstvo ter
ljubezen sam sebe, sebi, se ( zlahta ) ne obstati del od it.
23. to vi hoteti zavarovati to nekoc svoj oci ste odpirac ter
svoj srce razumeti bozji zakon pomen od tok pripetljaj
taking mesto na svetu , to vi hoteti pripraviti se svoj srcika
vzeti vas resnica , ter to vi hoteti pomoc mi razumeti kako
najti pogum ter cvrstost skozi vas svet izraziti z besedami ,
biblija. v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit Kristus , jaz
prositi od this stvari potrditi svoj zahteva v biti znotraj
pogodba vas hoteti , ter vprasam zakaj vas modrost ter imeti
a ljubezen od resnica Amen.
vec pravzaprav od stran
kako imeti vecen zivljenje
mi smo vesel ce to zapisati v seznam ( od molitev prosnja v
Bog ) je zmozen pomagati vi. mi razumeti to maj ne obstati
najboljsi ali najvec uspesen prevod. mi razumeti to so veliko
razlicen ways od iztisljiv mnenje ter izraziti z besedami. ce
vi zivljati a nasvet zakaj a rajsi prevod , ali ce vi hoteti vsec
biti zavzeti a tesen znesek od vas cas posiljati nasvet v nas ,
bos pomaganje tisoc od drugi narod tudi , kdo hoteti torej
citanje izpopolniti prevod. mi pogosto zivljati a nova zaveza
pri roki v vas jezik ali v jezik to ste redek ali star. ce isces a
nova zaveza v a poseben jezik , prosim napisati rabiti. tudi ,
mi biti brez v obstati varen ter zaceti v biti obhajan to vcasih
, mi delati oferirati knjiga to ste ne prost ter to delati strosek
penez.
sele ce vi ne morem privosciti si nekaj tega oni elektronski
knjiga , mi moci pogosto delati mena od elektronski knjiga
zakaj pomoc s prevod ali prevod opus. vi nikar ne zivljati to
live at warefare with s. o. a poklicen delavec , sele a reden
oseba kdo je zavzet v pomaganje. vi should zivljati a
racunalo ali vi should zivljati postranski v a racunalo v vas
tukajsnji knjiznica ali visja gimnazija ali univerza , odkar
oni navadno zivljati rajsi vez v stazist v bolnisnici. vi moci
tudi navadno ustanoviti vas lasten oseben prost elektronski
verizna srajca racun z tekoc v mail.yahoo.com
prosim zalotiti a vaznost za odkriti elektronski verizna srajca
ogovor poiskati pravzaprav ali prenehati od to stran. mi
upanje bos poslal elektronski verizna srajca v nas , ce to je
od pomoc ali encouragement. mi tudi podzigati vi v zveza
nas zadeven elektronski knjiga to mi oferirati to ste ce ne
strosek , ter prost.
mi delati zivljati veliko knjiga v tuji jeziki , sele mi nikar ne
zmeraj mesto jih sprejeti electronically ( travnato gricevje )
zato ker mi sele izdelovanje pri roki knjiga ali predmet to ste
najvec prosnja. mi podzigati vi v vzdrznost prositi v Bog ter
v vzdrznost zvedeti priblizno njega z citanje novi testament.
mi izreci dobrodoslico vas vprasanje ter razloziti z
elektronski verizna srajca.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
srckan Bog , the same to to nova
zaveza has been izpusttakodamismo
zmozen zvedeti vec priblizno vi. prosim pomoc preprosti
ljudje odgovoren zakaj izdelava to elektronski knjiga pri
roki.
prosim pomoc jih premoci opus nagel , ter izdelovanje vec
elektronski knjiga pri roki prosim pomoc jih imeti vsi
sredstvo , penez , cvrstost ter cas to oni potreba zato da
obstati zmozen vzdrzevati ki dela zakaj vi.
prosim pomoc oni to ste del od skupina to pomoc jih naprej
vsakdanji osnova. prosim izrociti jih cvrstost v vzdrznost ter
izrociti vsakteri od jih bozji zakon razumeven zakaj opus to
vi biti brez jih uganjati. prosim pomoc vsakteri od jih v ne
zivljati strah ter spomniti se to vi ste Bog kdo odgovor
molitev ter kdo je v ukaz od vse.
jaz predlagati da vi hoteti podzigati jih , ter to vi zavarovati
jih , ter opus & ministrstvo to oni so zaposlen s cim. jaz
predlagati da vi hoteti zavarovati jih s netelesen vojna sila
ali drugi zapreka to strjena lava skoda jih ali pocasi vozite
jih niz. prosim pomoc mi cas jaz raba to nova zaveza v tudi
pretehtati od preprosti ljudje kdo zivljati narejen to naklada
pri roki ,
tako da morem prositi za jih ter tudi oni moci vzdrznost v
pomoc vec narod jaz predlagati da vi hoteti izrociti mi a
ljubezen od vas svet izraziti z besedami ( novi testament ),
ter to vi hoteti izrociti mi netelesen modrost ter bistroumnost
znati vi rajsi ter v razumeti epoha od cas to mi smo zivljenje
v.
prosim pomoc mi znati kako v obravnavati tezek to jaz sem
soociti s vsak dan. lord Bog , pomoc mi hoteti znanje vi rajsi
ter hoteti pomoc drugi krscanski v svoj area ter po svetu.
jaz predlagati da vi hoteti izrociti elektronski knjiga skupina
ter oni kdo opus naprej tkalec ter oni kdo pomoc jih vas
modrost. jaz predlagati da vi hoteti pomoc poedinec
clanstvo od svoj rodbina ( ter svoj rodbina ) v ne obstati
netelesen goljufati , sele v razumeti vi ter hoteti uvazevati
ter slediti vi v sleherni izuriti za hojo ali jezo po cesti. ter jaz
zaprositi vi uganjati od this stvari v imenu ljudstva,
usmiljenja itd. jezuit , Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
llltlhal diyOS , pasalamatan ka atipan ng pawid ito
bago testamento may been pakawalan pagayon atipan ng
pawid tayo ay able sa mag-aral laling marami buongpaligid
ka. masiyahan tumulong ang mga tao may pananagutan
dahil sa making ito Electronic book makukuha. masiyahan
tumulong kanila sa maaari able sa gumawa ayuno , at gawin
laling marami Electronic books makukuha masiyahan
tumulong kanila sa may lahat ang mapamaraan , ang salapi ,
ang lakas at ang takdaan ng oras atipan ng pawid sila
mangilangan di iutos sa maaari able sa tago gumawa dahil
saka.
masiyahan tumulong those atipan ng pawid ay mahati ng
ang itambal atipan ng pawid tumulong kanila sa isa pang-
araw-araw batayan. masiyahan bigyan kanila ang lakas sa
mapatuloy at bigyan bawa't isa ng kanila ang tangayin pang-
unawa dahil sa ang gumawa atipan ng pawid ka magkulang
kanila sa gumawa. masiyahan tumulong bawa't isa ng kanila
sa hindi may katakutan at sa gunitain atipan ng pawid ka ay
ang diyos sino sumagot dasal at sino ay di pagbintangan ng
lahat ng bagay.
ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would palakasin ang loob
kanila , at atipan ng pawid ka ipagsanggalang kanila , at ang
gumawa & magkalinga atipan ng pawid sila ay kumuha di.
ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would ipagsanggalang
kanila sa ang tangayin pilitin o iba sagwil atipan ng pawid
could saktan kanila o slow kanila itumba.
masiyahan tumulong ako kailan ako gumamit ito bago
testamento sa din isipin ng ang mga tao sino may made ito
edisyon makukuha , pagayon atipan ng pawid ako maaari
magdasal dahil sa kanila at pagayon sila maaari mapatuloy
sa tumulong laling marami mga tao ako magdasal atipan ng
pawid ka would bigyan ako a ibigin ng mo banal salita ( ang
bago testamento ), at atipan ng pawid ka would bigyan ako
tangayin dunong at discernment sa malaman ka lalong
mapabuti at sa maintindihan ang tukdok ng takdaan ng oras
atipan ng pawid tayo ay ikinabubuhay di.
masiyahan tumulong ako sa malaman paano sa makitungo
kumuha ang mahirap hindi madali atipan ng pawid ako ay
confronted kumuha bawa't araw. panginoon diyos ,
tumulong ako sa magkulang sa malaman ka lalong mapabuti
at sa magkulang sa tumulong iba binyagan di akin malawak
at sa tabi-tabi ang daigdig. ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka
would bigyan ang Electronic book itambal at those sino
gumawa sa ang website at those sino tumulong kanila mo
dunong.
ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would tumulong ang isang
tao pagkakasapi ng kanila mag-anak ( at akin mag-anak ) sa
hindi maaari spiritually dayain , datapuwa't sa maintindihan
ka at sa magkulang sa tanggapin at sundan ka di bawa't
daan. at ako humingi ka sa gumawa tesis bagay di ang
pangalanan ng heswita , susugan ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Armas Jumala , Kiittaa te etta' nyt kuluva
Veres Jalkisaados has esittamislupa joten etta me
aari eteva jotta kuulla enemman jokseenkin te.
Haluta auttaa ihmiset edesvastuullinen ajaksi ansaitseva nyt
kuluva Elektroninen kirjanpidollinen saatavana. Haluta
auttaa heidat jotta olla eteva jotta aikaansaada paastota , ja
ehtia enemman Elektroninen luettelossa saatavana Haluta
auttaa heidat jotta hankkia aivan varat , raha , kesto ja aika
etta he kaivata kotona aste jotta olla eteva jotta elatus
tyoskentely ajaksi Te.
Haluta auttaa ne etta aari erita -lta joukkue etta auttaa heidat
model after by jokapaivainen kivijalka. Haluta kimmoisuus
heidat kesto jotta jatkaa ja kimmoisuus joka -lta heidat
henki- ymmartavainen ajaksi aikaansaada etta te haluta
heidat jotta ajaa.
Haluta auttaa joka -lta heidat jotta ei hankkia pelata ja jotta
muistaa etta te aari Jumala joka tottelee nimea hartaushetki
ja joka on kotona hinta -lta kaikki. I-KIRJAIN pyytaa
hartaasti etta te edistaa heidat , ja etta te suojata heidat , ja
aikaansaada & ministerikausi etta he aari varattu kotona. I-
KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te suojata heidat polveutua
Henki- Joukko eli toinen este etta haitta heidat eli hitaasti
heidat heittaa. Haluta auttaa we jahka I-KIRJAIN apu nyt
kuluva Veres Jalkisaados jotta kin ajatella -lta ihmiset joka
hankkia kokoonpantu nyt kuluva painos saatavana , joten
etta I-KIRJAIN kanisteri pyytaa hartaasti ajaksi heidat ja
joten he kanisteri jatkaa jotta auttaa enemman ihmiset I-
KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te kimmoisuus we lempia -lta
sinun Pyha Sana ( Veres Jalkisaados ), ja etta te kimmoisuus
we henki- viisaus ja arvostelukyky jotta osata te vedonlyoja
ja jotta kasittaa aika -lta aika etta me aari asuen kotona.
Haluta auttaa we jotta osata kuinka jotta antaa avulla
hankala etta I-KIRJAIN olen asettaa vastakkain avulla joka
aika. Haltija Jumala , Auttaa we jotta haluta jotta osata te
Vedonlyoja ja jotta haluta jotta auttaa toinen Kristitty kotona
minun kohta ja liepeilla maailma.
I-KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te kimmoisuus Elektroninen
kirjanpidollinen joukkue ja ne joka aikaansaada model after
kudos ja ne joka auttaa heidat sinun viisaus. I-KIRJAIN
pyytaa hartaasti etta te auttaa yksilo jasenmaara -lta heidan
heimo ( ja minun heimo ) jotta ei olla henkisesti eksyttaa ,
ainoastaan jotta kasittaa te ja jotta haluta jotta hyvaksya ja
harjoittaa te kotona joka elamantapa. ja I-KIRJAIN anoa te
jotta ajaa nama tavarat kotona maine -lta Jeesus ,
Vastuunalainen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Raring Gud , Tack sjalv sa pass den har Ny
Testamente er blitt befriaren sa fakta at vi er
duglig till lara sig mer omkring du. Behag hjalpamig
folk ansvarig for tillverkningen den har Elektronisk bok
tillganglig.
Behag hjalpa mig dem till vara kopa duktig verk fort , och
gora mer Elektronisk bokna tillganglig Behag hjalpa mig
dem till har alla resurserna , pengarna , den styrka och tiden
sa pass de behov for att kunde halia arbetande till deras.
Behag hjalpa mig den har sa pass de/vi/du/ni ar del om
spannen sa pass hjalp dem pa en daglig basis. Behaga ger
dem den styrka till fortsatta och ger var av dem den ande
forstandet for den verk sa pass du vilja dem till gor. Behag
hjalpa mig var av dem till inte har radsla och till minas sa
pass du er den Gud vem svar bon och vem er han i lidelse av
allting.
JAG be sa pass du skulle uppmuntra dem , och sa pass du
skydda dem , och den verk & ministaren sa pass de er
forlovad i.
JAG be sa pass du skulle skydda dem fran den Ande Pressar
eller annan hinder sa pass kunde skada dem eller langsam
dem ned. Behag hjalpa mig nar JAG anvanda den har Ny
Testamente till ocksa tanka om folk vem har gjord den har
upplagan tillganglig , sa fakta at JAG kanna be for dem och
sa de kanna fortsatta till hjalp mer folk JAG be sa pass du
skulle ge mig en karlek om din Helig Uttrycka ( den Ny
Testamente ), och sa pass du skulle ge mig ande visdom och
discernment till veta du battre och till forsta den period av
tid sa pass vi er levande i.
Behag hjalpa mig till veta hur till ha att gora med
svarigheten sa pass JAG er stillt overfor var dag. Var Herre
och Fralsare Gud , Hjalpa mig till vilja till veta du Battre
och till vilja till hjalp annan Kristen i min areal och i
omkrets det varld. JAG be sa pass du skulle ger den
Elektronisk bok sla sig ihop och den har vem arbeta pa den
spindelvav och den har vem hjalp dem din visdom.
JAG be sa pass du skulle hjalp individuellt medlemmen av
deras familj ( och min familj ) till inte bli spiritually lurat ,
utom till forsta du och mig till vilja till accept och folja du i
varje vag. och JAG fraga du till gor de har sakerna inne om
namn av Jesus , Samarbetsvillig ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Allerkserest God , Tak for lan at indevaerende Ny
Testamente er blevet l0st i den grad at vi er kan hen til lasre
flere omkring jer. Behage hjaelp den folk ansvarlig nemlig
g0r indevaerende Elektronisk skrift anvendelig. Behage
hjselp sig at blive k0bedygtig arbejde holdbar , og skabe
flere Elektronisk b0ger anvendelig Behage hjaslp sig hen til
nyde en hel ressourcer , den penge , den krasfter og den gang
at de savn for at vaere i stand til opbevare i orden nemlig Jer.
Behage hjaelp dem at er noget af den hold at hjaslp sig oven
pa en hverdags holdepunkt. Behage indr0mme sig den
krasfter hen til fortsastte og indr0mme hver i sig den appel
opfattelse nemlig den arbejde at jer savn sig hen til lave.
Behage hjaelp hver i sig hen til ikke nyde skrask og hen til
huske at du er den God hvem svar b0n og hvem star for
arrangementet i alt.
JEG bed at jer ville give mod sig , og at jer sikre sig , og
den arbejde & ministerium at de er forlovet i. JEG bed at jer
ville sikre sig af den Appel Tvinger eller anden hindring at
kunne afbrask sig eller sen sig nede.
Behage hjaelp mig hvor JEG hjaelp indevaerende Ny
Testamente hen til ligeledes hitte pa den folk hvem nyde
skabt indevaerende oplag anvendelig , i den grad at JEG
kunne bed nemlig sig hvorfor de kunne fortsastte hen til
hjaelp flere folk JEG bed at jer ville indr0mme mig en
kserlighed til jeres Hellig Ord ( den Ny Testamente ), og at
jer ville indr0mme mig appel klogskab og discernment hen
til kende jer bedre og hen til opfatte den periode at vi er
nulevende i.
Behage hjselp mig hen til kende hvor hen til omhandle den
problemer at Jeg er stillet over for hver dag. Lord God ,
Hjselp mig hen til ville gerne kende jer Bedre og hen til ville
gerne hjselp anden Christians i mig omrade og omkring den
jord.
JEG bed at jer ville indr0mme den Elektronisk skrift hold og
dem hvem arbejde med den website og dem hvem hjselp sig
jeres klogskab. JEG bed at jer ville hjselp den individ
medlemmer i deres slsegt ( og mig slsegt ) hen til ikke vsere
spiritually narrede , men hen til opfatte jer og hen til ville
gerne optage og komme efter jer i al mulig made. og JEG
opfordre jer hen til lave disse sager i den bensevne i Jesus ,
Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
MojiHTBa k 6ory ,3,oporoii Bor, Bm hto Swjih
BbinymeHbi oto Gospel hjih otot hobmh testament TaK,
^rro Mbi GyaeM BbiyHHTb 6ojrbiiie o Bac. Ilo5KajryHCTa
noMorHTe jikwim OTBercTBeHHbiM ajih /jenaTb OTy
3jieKTpoHHyio KHHry HMeiomeiica. Bbi 3HaeTe ohh h bm
M05KeTe noMOHb hm. rio5KajryHCTa noMorHTe hm MOHb
pa6oTaTb 6bicrpo, h c/tejiaiiTe 6onee aneKTpoHHbie khhth
HMeiomeiica rio5KajryHCTa noMorHTe hm HMerb Bce
pecypcbi, AeHbr, npoHHOCTb h BpeMa Koropbie ohh ajih roro
^rroGbi MOHb #ep>KaTb pa6oTaTb ajih Bac. ItoKanyiiCTa
noMorHTe tcm dyjjyr nacTbio KOMaimM noMoraeT hm Ha
e5KeAHeBHoe ocHOBamie. nroicajiyHCTa Rawre hm npoHHOCTb
jxm roro MTo6bi npo^oiDKaTb h /jaBaTb KaayjOMy H3 hx
AyxoBHoe BHHKaHne jxm pa6oTbi mto bm xothtc hx
c^enaTb. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe KaayjOMy H3 hx He HMeTb
crpax h He BcnoMHHaTb mto bm oy^eTe 6oroM OTBeHaiOT
MOJiHTBe h in charge of bcc il mojho mto bm o6oaphjih hx,
h mto bm 3amHmaeTe hx, h pa6oTa & MHHHcrepcTBO mto
OHH BKJUOHeHM BHyTpH.
il MOJIK) MTO BM 3aiHHTHJIH HX OT #yXOBHMX yCHJIHH HJIH
Apyrnx npenoH CMornn noBpeAHTb hm hjih 3aMeAJnrrb hm
bhh3. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe MHe Kor/ia a Hcnojib3yio stot
hobmh testament raioKe jxm roro mto6m /jyMaTb mo^eH
AenajiH stot BapnaHT HMeiomeHca, TaK, mto a CMory
noMOJiHTb jxm hx h no3TOMy hx CMorHTe npoAOJDKaTb
noMOHb 6onbHie mo/ieH.
JI Momo mto bm ziajiH MHe Bjno6jieHHOCTb Baniero
CBaTeHHiero cnoBa (HoBbraa 3aBeT), h mto bm /iaJiH MHe
AyxoBHbie npeMy/ipocTb h pacno3HaHHe jxm roro mto6m
3HaTb Bac 6onee jryHine h noroiTb nepno/io BpeMeHH
kotopom mm 5KHBeM b. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe MHe cyMerb
KaK o6maTbca c 3arpyAHeHHHMH mto a confronted c
KaayiMM /iHeM. JlopA Bor, noMoraeT MHe xoTerb 3HaTb Bac
6onee nyHHie h xoTeTb noMOHb /ipyrHM xpHcraaHKaM b
Moen o6nacTH h BOicpyr MHpa.
il MOJIK) MTO BM /lajIH 3JieKTpOHHyK) KOMaH/iy H Te KHHrH
noMoraiOT hm Bania npeMy/ipocTb. il mojho mto bm
nOMOrjIH HH^HBH/iyajIbHMM HJieHaM HX CeMbH (h Moen
ceMbn) /iyxoBHOCT 6biTb o6MaHyTMM, ho noHaTb Bac H
xoTeTb npHHaTb h nocneAOBaTb 3a Bac b icaawH ^opore.
TaK5Ke Aanre HaM komiJiopt h HaBe^eHKe b sth BpeMeHa h a
cnpaniHBaeM, mto bm jiejiaere oth Bemji in the name of
CbfflOK 6ora, jesus christ, aMHHb,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
,3,par Bor , Ejiaroaapa th to3h to3h Hob
3aBemaHne has p.p. ot be ocBoSoacaaBaM TaKa
to3h Hne CTe cnocoSeH kbm yna ce noBene
HaOKOJiO th. XapecBaM noMaraM onpeflejiHrejieH hjich
xopa OTroBopeH 3a npnroTBaHe to3h Electronic KHHra
HajiineH.
XapecBaM noMaraM rax ki>m 6i>Aa cnoco6eH kt>m pa6oTa
nocra , h npaBfl noBene Electronic KHiDKapHHHa HainmeH
XapecBaM noMaraM rax ki>m HMaM uhji onpeAejiHrejieH
HjieH cpeACTBO , onpeAejiHTejieH hikh napn ,
onpeAejiHTeneH hjich ycTOHHHBOCT h onpeAejiHrejieH hjich
BpeMe to3h Te wyama in pe# ki>m 6i>Aa cnoco6eH ki>m
/rbp5Ka /TBH5KeHHe 3a Th. XapecBaM noMaraM ot that to3h
cre nacT Ha onpeAejiHrejieH hjich Birpar to3h noMaraM rax
Ha an BceKH^HeBeH 6a3a.
XapecBaM ^aBaM rax onpe/tejiHreneH hjich yctohhhboct
ki>m npo^tiDKaBaM h /laBaM BceKH Ha rax onpe/tejinTeneH
HjieH /ryxoBeH cxBamaHe 3a oirpeaejiHTejieH hjkh pa6oTa
TO3H th jnmca Tax ki>m npaBa.
XapecBaM noMaraM BceKH Ha Tax ki>m He HMaM crpax h ki>m
noMHH to3h th cre onpeAejiHrejieH HjieH Bor koh OTroBop
MOJiHTBa h koh e in m>jiHH Ha bchhko. A3 mojih to3h th yac
Haci>pHaBaM Tax , h to3h th 3aiHHraBaM Tax , h
onpe^ejnrreneH hjich pa6oTa & MHHHcrepcrBO to3h Te cre
3am>iDKaBaM in. A3 mojih to3h th yac 3amHTaBaM rax ot
onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH ,HyxoBeH Cnna hjih /ipyr npenKa to3h
p.t. ot can Bpe^a rax hjih 6aBeH rax rono Bi>3BHiiieHHe.
XapecBaM noMaraM me Kora A3 ynoTpe6a to3h Hob
3aBemaHHe kt>m cbiho mhcjih Ha onpeAejnrrejieH hjich xopa
KOH HMaM p.t. H p.p. OT make T03H H3£aHHe HajIHHeH , TaKa
TO3H A3 Mora mojih 3a rax h TaKa Te Mora npo^tJCKaBaM
kt>m noMaraM noBene xopa A3 mojih to3h th yac AaBaM me
a jho6ob Ha your Cbot JfyMa ( onpe^ejinTeneH HjieH Hob
3aBemaHHe ), h to3h th yac /jaBaM me /ryxoBeH Mi>/rpocT h
pa3JiHHaBaHe ki>m 3Haa th no-Ao6i>p h ki>m pa36npaM
onpe^ejiHreneH HjieH nepno/i Ha BpeMe to3h HHe cre 5khb
in. XapecBaM noMaraM me ki>m 3Haa Kaic ki>m pa3AaBaM c
onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH MbHen to3h A3 cbm ronpaBaM npeA c
BceKH Ren.
JlopA Bor , IloMaraM me kt>m jnmca ki>m 3Haa th no-Ao6i>p
h ki>m jnmca ki>m noMaraM /ipyr Xphcthhhckh in my iuiom
h HaoKono onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH cbot.
A3 MOJiH to3h th yac ^SBaM onpeAejnrrejieH HjieH Electronic
KHHra Bnpar h ot that koh pa6oTa Ha onpeAejnrrejieH HjieH
website h ot that koh noMaraM Tax your Mi>/rpocT. A3 mojih
to3h th y5K noMaraM onpe^ejiHreneH HjieH jnmeH HjieHCTBO
Ha TexeH ceMeiicTBO ( h my ceMeiicTBO ) ki>m He 6i>Aa
/ryxoBeH H3MaMBaM , ho ki>m pa36npaM th h ki>m jnmca kt>m
npneMaM h cjie^BaM th in BceKH m>T. h A3 mrraM th ki>m
npaBa Te3H Hemo in onpeflejnrrejieH hjich HMe Ha He3yHT ,
Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
sevgili mabut , eyvallah adi. §u bu Incil bkz.
have be serbest brrakmak taki biz are giiclii -e dogru
ogrenmek daha hakktnda sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek
belgili tanimlik insanlar -den sorumlu icin yapim bu
elektronik kitap elde edilebilir. mutlu etmek yardim etmek
onlan -e dogru muktedir i§ hizli , ve yapmak daha elektronik
kitap elde edilebilir mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlan -e
dogru -si olmak tiim belgili tanimlik kaynak , belgili
tanimlik para , belgili tanimlik gue ve belgili tanimlik zaman
adi.
su onlar liizum icin muktedir almak calisma icin sen. mutlu
etmek yardim etmek o adi. su are boliim -in belgili tanimlik
takim adi. su yardim etmek onlan ustunde an her temel.
mutlu etmek vermek onlan belgili tanimlik gue -e dogru
devam etmek ve vermek her -in onlan belgili tanimlik
ruhani basiret icin belgili tanimlik i§ adi.
su sen istemek onlan -e dogru yapmak. mutlu etmek yardim
etmek her -in onlan -e dogru degil -si olmak korkmak ve -e
dogru animsamak adi. su sen are belgili tanimlik mabut kim
yanit dua ve kim bkz. be icinde fiyat istemek -in her sey. I
dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti ylireklendirmek onlan , ve adi.
su sen korumak onlan , ve belgili tanimlik i§ & bakanlik adi.
su onlar are me§gul icinde. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti
korumak onlan —dan belgili tanimlik ruhani gue ya da diger
engel adi.
su -ebil zarar onlan ya da yava§ onlan asagi. mutlu etmek
yardim etmek beni ne zaman I kullanma bu Incil -e dogru da
dusun belgili tanimlik insanlar kim -si olmak -den yapilmi§
bu baski elde edilebilir , taki I -ebilmek dua etmek icin
onlan vesaire onlar -ebilmek devam etmek -e dogru yardim
etmek daha insanlar I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek
beni a ask -in senin kutsal kelime ( belgili tammlik Incil ),
ve adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni ruhani akillihk ve
discernment -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru
anlamak belgili tanimlik dondiirmemem adi. su biz are canh
iginde. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni -e dogru bilmek
nasil -e dogru dagitmak ile belgili tammlik muskulat adi.
su I am kar§i koymak ile her giin. efendi mabut , yardim
etmek beni -e dogru istemek -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve
-e dogru istemek -e dogru yardim etmek diger Hristiyan
icinde benim alan ve cevrede belgili tanimlik diinya. I dua
etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek belgili tammlik elektronik
kitap takim ve o kim i§ iistiinde belgili tanimlik website ve o
kim yardim etmek onlari senin akilhlik.
I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yardim etmek belgili tammlik
bireysel aza -in onlarin aile ( ve benim aile ) -e dogru degil
var olmak ruhani aldatmak , ama -e dogru anlamak sen ve -e
dogru istemek -e dogru almak ve izlemek sen icinde her yol.
ve I sormak sen -e dogru yapmak bunlar e§ya adma Isa ,
amin ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
sevgili mabut , eyvallah adi. su bu Incil bkz. have be serbest
brrakmak taki biz are gu^lii -e dogru ogrenmek daha
hakkinda sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek belgili tanimlik
insanlar -den sorumlu icin yapim bu elektronik kitap elde
edilebilir. mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlari -e dogru
muktedir i§ hizli , ve yapmak daha elektronik kitap elde
edilebilir mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlari -e dogru -si
olmak timi belgili tanimlik kaynak , belgili tanimlik para ,
belgili tanimlik gue ve belgili tanimlik zaman adi.
su onlar liizum icin muktedir almak calisma icin sen. mutlu
etmek yardim etmek o adi. su are boliim -in belgili tanimlik
takim adi. su yardim etmek onlari ustiinde an her temel.
mutlu etmek vermek onlari belgili tanimlik gue -e dogru
devam etmek ve vermek her -in onlari belgili tanimlik
ruhani basiret icin belgili tanimlik i§ adi.
su sen istemek onlari -e dogru yapmak. mutlu etmek yardim
etmek her -in onlari -e dogru degil -si olmak korkmak ve -e
dogru animsamak adi. su sen are belgili tanimlik mabut kim
yanit dua ve kim bkz. be icinde fiyat istemek -in her sey. I
dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yureklendirmek onlari , ve adi.
su sen korumak onlari , ve belgili tanimlik i§ & bakanlik adi.
su onlar are me§gul icinde. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti
korumak onlari —dan belgili tanimlik ruhani gue ya da diger
engel adi.
su -ebil zarar onlari ya da yava§ onlan asagi. mutlu etmek
yardim etmek beni ne zaman I kullanma bu Incil -e dogru da
dusun belgili tanimlik insanlar kim -si olmak -den yapilmi§
bu baski elde edilebilir , taki I -ebilmek dua etmek icin
onlan vesaire onlar -ebilmek devam etmek -e dogru yardim
etmek daha insanlar I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek
beni a ask -in senin kutsal kelime ( belgili tanimlik Incil ),
ve adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni ruhani akillihk ve
diseernment -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru
anlamak belgili tanimlik dondurmemem adi. su biz are canh
icinde. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni -e dogru bilmek
nasil -e dogru dagitmak ile belgili tanimlik muskulat adi.
su I am kar§i koymak ile her giin. efendi mabut , yardim
etmek beni -e dogru istemek -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve
-e dogru istemek -e dogru yardim etmek diger Hristiyan
icinde benim alan ve cevrede belgili tanimlik diinya. I dua
etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek belgili tanimlik elektronik
kitap takim ve o kim i§ iistiinde belgili tanimlik website ve o
kim yardim etmek onlari senin akillilik.
I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yardim etmek belgili tanimlik
bireysel aza -in onlarin aile ( ve benim aile ) -e dogru degil
var olmak ruhani aldatmak , ama -e dogru anlamak sen ve -e
dogru istemek -e dogru almak ve izlemek sen icinde her yol.
ve I sormak sen -e dogru yapmak bunlar e§ya adina Isa ,
amin ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Serbia - Servia - Serbian
Serbia Serbian Servian Prayer Isus Krist Molitva Bog Kako
Moliti moci cuti moj molitva za pitati davati ponuditi mene
otkriti duhovni Vodstvo
Serbia ■ Prayer Requests (p r a y in g ) to G od ■ e x p la in e d in
Serbian (servian) L anguage
Molitva za Bog ## Kako za Moliti za Bog
Kako Bog moci cuti moj molitva
Kako za pitati Bog za davati ponuditi mene
Kako otkriti duhovni Vodstvo
Kako za naci predaja iz urok Raspolozenje
Kako za zasluga odredeni clan istinit Bog nad Nebo
Kako otkriti odredeni clan Hriscanin Bog
Kako za moliti za Bog droz Isus Krist
JA imati nikada molitva pre nego
Vazan za Bog
Bog zeljan ljubavi svaki osoba osoba
Isus Krist moci pomoc
Se Bog Biti stalo moj zivot
Molitva Trazenju
stvar taj te moc oskudica za uzeti u obzir govorenje za Bog
okolo Molitva Trazenju kod te , okolo te
Govorenje za Bog , odredeni clan Kreator nad odredeni
clan Svemir , odredeni clan Gospodar :
1 . taj te davati za mene odredeni clan hrabrost za moliti
odredeni clan stvar taj JA potreba za moliti 2. taj te davati za
mene odredeni clan hrabrost za verovati te pa primiti sta te
oskudica raditi s moj zivot , umjesto mene uznijeti moj
vlastiti volja ( namera ) iznad vas.
3. taj te davati mene ponuditi ne career moj bojazan nad
odredeni clan nepoznat za postati odredeni clan isprika ,
inace odredeni clan osnovica umjesto mene ne za sluziti
you.
4. taj te davati mene ponuditi vidjeti pa uciti kako za imati
odredeni clan duhovni sway JA potreba ( droz tvoj rijec
Biblija ) jedan ) umjesto odredeni clan dogadaj ispred pa P )
umjesto moj vlastiti crew duhovni putovanje.
5. Taj te Bog davati mene ponuditi oskudica za sluziti Te
briny
6. Taj te podsetiti mene za razgovarati sa te prayerwhen ) JA
sam frustriran inace u problemima , umjesto tezak za odluka
stvar ja sam jedini droz moj ljudsko bice sway.
7. Taj te davati mene Mudrost pa jedan srce ispunjen s
Biblijski Mudrost tako da JA sluziti te briny delotvorno.
8. Taj te davati mene jedan zelja za ucenje tvoj rijec , Biblija
, ( odredeni clan Novi Zavjet Evandelje nad Zahod ), na
temelju jedan crew osnovica 9. taj te davati pomoc za mene
tako da JA sam u mogucnosti za obavestenje stvar unutra
Biblija ( tvoj rijec ) sta JA moci osobno vezati za , pa taj
volja pomoc mene shvatiti sta te oskudica mene raditi unutra
moj zivot.
10. Taj te davati mene velik raspoznavanje , za shvatiti kako
za objasniti za ostali tko te biti , pa taj JA moci uciti kako
uciti pa knotkle kako za pristajati uza sto te pa tvoj rijec (
Biblija )
11. Taj te donijeti narod ( inace websites ) unutra moj zivot
tko oskudica za knotkle te , pa tko biti jak unutra njihov
precizan sporazum nad te ( Bog ); pa Taj te donijeti narod (
inace websites ) unutra moj zivot tko ce biti u mogucnosti za
ohrabriti mene za tocno uciti kako za podeliti Biblija rec nad
istina (2 Timotej 215:).
12. Taj te pomoc mene uciti za imati velik sporazum okolo
sta Biblija prikaz 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu najbolji , sta
3. lice od TO BE u prezentu vecina precizan , pa sta je preko
duhovni sway & snaga , pa sta prtkaz sloziti se s odredeni
clan izvorni rukopis taj te nadahnut odredeni clan autorstvo
nad odredeni clan Novi Zavjet za pisati.
13. Taj te davati ponuditi mene za korist moj vrijeme unutra
jedan dobar put , pa ne za uzaludnost moj vrijeme na
temelju Neistinit inace prazan metod za dobiti zaglavni
kamen za Bog ( ipak taj nisu vjerno Biblijski ), pa kuda tim
metod proizvod nijedan dug rok inace trajan duhovni voce.
14. Taj te davati pomoc za mene za shvatiti sta za traziti
unutra jedan crkva inace jedan mjesto nad zasluga , sta rod
nad sumnja za pitati , pa taj te pomoc mene za naci vernik
inace jedan parson s velik duhovni mudrost umjesto lak
inace neistinit odgovor.
15. taj te uzrok mene za secati se za sjecati se tvoj rijec
Biblija ( takav kao Latinluk 8), tako da JA moci imati pik na
moj srce pa imati moj pamcenje spreman , pa biti spreman
za davati dobro odgovarati ostali nad odredeni clan nadati se
taj JA imati okolo te.
16. Taj te donijeti ponuditi mene tako da moj vlastiti
teologija pa doktrina za slagati tvoj rijec , Biblija pa taj te
nastaviti za pomoc mene knotkle kako moj sporazum nad
doktrina moci poboljsati tako da moj vlastiti zivot , stil
zivota pa sporazum nastavlja da bude zaglavni kamen za sta
te oskudica to da bude umjesto mene.
17. Taj te otvoren moj duhovni uvid ( zakljucak ) sve vise ,
pa taj kuda moj sporazum inace percepcija nad te nije
precizan , taj te pomoc mene uciti tko Isus Krist vjerno 3.
lice od TO BE u prezentu.
18. Taj te davati ponuditi mene tako da JA moci za odvojen
iko neistinit obredni sta JA imati zavisnost na temelju , iz
tvoj jasan poucavanje unutra Biblija , ako postoje nad sta JA
sam sledece nije nad Bog , inace 3. lice od TO BE u
prezentu u suprotnosti sa sta te oskudica za poucavati nama
okolo sledece te.
19. Taj iko sile nad urok ne oduteti iko duhovni sporazum
sta JA imati , ipak radije taj JA zadrzati odredeni clan znanje
nad kako za knotkle te pa ne da bude lukav unutra ovih dan
nad duhovni varka.
20. Taj te donijeti duhovni sway pa ponuditi mene tako da
JA volja ne da bude dio nad odredeni clan Velik Koji pada
Daleko inace nad iko pokret sta postojati produhovljeno
krivotvoriti za te pa za tvoj Svet Rijec
21. Taj da onde 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu bilo sto taj J A
imati ispunjavanja unutra moj zivot , inace iko put taj JA ne
imate odgovaranje za te ace JA treba imati pa taj 3. lice od
TO BE u prezentu sprjecavanje mene iz oba hodanje s te ,
inace imajuci sporazum , taj te donijeti tim stvar / odgovor /
dogadaj leda u moj pamcenje , tako da JA odreci se njima u
ime Isus Krist , pa svi nad njihov vrijednosni papiri pa
posledica , pa taj te opet staviti iko praznina ,sadness inace
ocajavati unutra moj zivot s odredeni clan Radost nad
odredeni clan Gospodar , pa taj JA postojati briny
usredotocen na temelju znanje za sledii te kod citanje tvoj
rijec , odredeni clan Biblija
22. Taj te otvoren moj oci tako da JA moci za jasno vidjeti
pa prepoznati da onde 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu jedan
Velik Varka okolo Duhovni tema , kako za shvatiti danasji
fenomen ( inace ovih dogadaj ) iz jedan Biblijski
perspektiva , pa taj te davati mene mudrost za knotkle i tako
taj JA volja uciti kako za pomoc moj prijatelj pa voljen sam
sebe ( rodbina ) ne postojati dio nad it.
23. Taj te osigurati taj jednom moj oci biti otvoreni pa moj
pamcenje shvatiti odredeni clan duhovni izrazajnost nad
trenutni zbivanja uzimanje mjesto unutra odredeni clan svet
, taj te pripremiti moj srce prihvatiti tvoj istina , pa taj te
pomoc mene shvatiti kako za naci hrabrost pa sway droz
tvoj Svet Rijec , Biblija. U ime Isus Krist , JA traziti ovih
stvar potvrdujuci moj zelja da bude slozno tvoj volja , pa JA
sam iskanje tvoj mudrost pa za imati jedan ljubav nad
odredeni clan Istina Da
Briny podno Stranica
Kako za imati Vjecan Zivot
Nama biti dearth da danasji foil ( nad molitva trazenju za
Bog ) 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu u mogucnosti za pomoci
te. Nama shvatiti danasji ne moze biti odredeni clan najbolji
inace vecina delotvoran prevod. Nama shvatiti taj onde biti
mnogobrojan razlicit putevi nad izraziv misao pa reci. Da te
imati jedan sugestija umjesto jedan bolji prevod , inace da te
slican za uzeti jedan malen kolicina nad tvoj vrijeme za
poslati sugestija nama , te ce biti pomaganje hiljadu nad
ostali narod isto , tko volja onda citanje odredeni clan
poboljsan prevod. Nama cesto imati jedan Novi Zavjet
raspoloziv unutra tvoj jezik inace unutra jezik taj biti redak
inace star.
Da te biti handsome umjesto jedan Novi Zavjet unutra jedan
specifican jezik , ugoditi pisati nama. Isto , nama oskudica
da bude siguran pa probati za komunicirati taj katkada ,
nama ciniti ponuda knjiga taj nisu Slobodan pa taj ciniti
kostati novac. Ipak da te ne moci priustiti neki od tim
elektronicki knjiga , nama moci cesto ciniti dobro razmena
nad elektronicki knjiga umjesto pomoc s prevod inace
prevod posao.
Te ne morati postojati jedan strucan radnik , jedini jedan
pravilan osoba tko 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu zainteresiran
za pomaganje. Te treba imati jedan racunar inace te treba
imati pristup za jedan racunar kod tvoj mestanin biblioteka
inace univerzitet inace univerzitet , otada tim obicno imati
bolji spoj za odredeni clan Internet. Te moci isto obicno
utemeljiti tvoj vlastiti crew SLOBODAN elektronski posta
racun kod lijeganje mail.yahoo.com
Ugoditi uzeti maloprije otkriti odredeni clan elektronski
posta adresa smjesten podno inace odredeni clan kraj nad
danasji stranica. Nama nadati se te volja poslati elektronski
posta nama , da danasji 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu nad
pomoc inace hrabrenje. Nama isto ohrabriti te za dodir nama
u vezi sa Elektronicki Knjiga taj nama ponuda taj biti van
kostati , pa slobodan.
Nama ciniti imati mnogobrojan knjiga unutra stran jezik ,
ipak nama ne uvijek mjesto njima za primiti elektronski (
skidati podatke ) zato nama jedini napraviti raspoloziv
odredeni clan knjiga inace odredeni clan tema taj biti preko
zatrazen. Nama ohrabriti te za nastaviti za moliti za Bog pa
za nastaviti uciti okolo Njemu kod citanje odredeni clan
Novi Zavjet. Nama dobrodosao tvoj sumnja pa primedba
kod elektronski posta.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Draga Dumnezeu , Multumesc that this Nou Testament
has been released so that noi sintem capabil la spre learn
mai mult despre tu.
Te rog ajuta-ma oamenii responsible pentru making this
Electronic carte folositor. Te rog ajuta-ma pe ei la spre a fi
capabil la spre work rapid , §i a face mai mult Electronic
carte folositor Te rog ajuta-ma pe ei la spre have tot art.hot.
resources , art.hot. bani , art.hot. strength §i art.hot. timp that
ei nevoie inauntru ordine la spre a fi capabil la spre a pastra
working pentru Tu.
Te rog ajuta-ma aceia that esti part de la team that ajutor pe
ei on un fiecare basis. A face pe plac la a da pe ei art.hot.
strength la spre a continua §i a da each de pe ei art.hot. spirit
understanding pentru art.hot. work that tu nevoie pe ei la
spre a face.
Te rog ajuta-ma each de pe ei la spre nu have fear sj la spre
a-§i aminti that tu esti art.hot. Dumnezeu cine answers
prayer §i cine este el inauntru acuzatie de tot. I pray that tu
trec.de la will encourage pe ei , §i that tu a proteja pe ei , §i
art.hot. work & ministru that ei sint ocupat inauntru. I pray
that tu trec.de la will a proteja pe ei de la art.hot. Spirit
Forces sau alt obstacles that a putut harm pe ei sau lent pe ei
jos.
Te rog ajuta-ma cind I folos this Nou Testament la spre de
asemenea think de la oameni cine have made this a redacta
folositor so that I a putea pray pentru pe ei §i so ei a putea a
continua la spre ajutor mai mult oameni I pray that tu trec.de
la will da-mi o dragoste de al tau Holy Cuvint ( art.hot. Nou
Testament ), §i that tu trec.de la will acorda-mi spirit
wisdom §i discernment la spre know tu better §i la spre
understand art.hot. perioada de timp that noi sintem viu
inauntru.
Te rog ajuta-ma la spre know cum la spre deal cu art.hot.
difficulties that I sint confronted cu fiecare zi. Lord
Dumnezeu , Ajuta-ma help la spre nevoie la spre know tu
Better §i la spre nevoie la spre ajutor alt Crestin inauntru
meu arie §i around art.hot. lume. I pray that tu trec.de la will
a da art.hot.
Electronic carte team §i aceia cine work pe website §i aceia
cine ajutor pe ei al tau wisdom. I pray that tu trec.de la will
ajutor art.hot. individual members de lor familie ( §i meu
familie ) la spre nu a fi spiritually deceived , numai la spre
understand tu §i eu la spre nevoie la spre accent §i a urma tu
inauntru fiecare way. §i I a intreba tu la spre a face acestia
things in nume de Jesus , Amen ,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Russian - Russe - Russie
Russian Prayer Requests -
MojIHTBa K
6ora KaK noMOJiHTb k
6ora KaK 6or mtokct ycjibmiaTb MoeMy
MOJiHTBe KaK cnpocHTb, mto 6or min noMomb k MHe
KaK HaiiTH ;ryxoBHoe naBejieime
KaK Hairra deliverance ot 3Jieiiniero
;ryxoB KaK noKjiOHHTbca noncTHHe 6or
paa KaK Hairra xpHCTHaHCKoe
6ora KaK noMOJiHTb k 6ory ro
jesus christ a mncorjia He MOJinna nepeA
BaacHbiM k Bino6jieHHOCTaM 6ora
6ora KajK^oe HHAHBH/ryajibHoe
jesus, kotop nepcoHbi christ M05KeT noMOHb
AenaeT BHHMaTenbHOCTb 6ora o mohx Bemax
3anpOCOB MOJiHTBe
5KH3HH Bbl MOrjIH XOTeTb JJJIH paCCMOTpeHHH nOrOBOpHTb K
6ory o 3anpocax MOJiHTBe
BaMH, o mc
ToBopam k 6ory, co3/jaTejib BcejieHHoro, jiop/j:
1. bbi /jajiii 6bi k MHe CMejiocTii noiviojiHTfc itemn h /jjih
TOrO HT06bI nOMOJIHTfc
2. Bbl JjaJIH 6bl K MHe CMejIOCTH BepHTb BaM H npHHHMaTb
bm xoTHTe CAenaTb c Moen >KH3Hbio, BMecTO MeHa exalting
moh bojih (HaMepne) Han tbohm.
3. bm jjaJiH 6bi MHe noMOHjb jxm roro mtoGm He
npenaTCTBOBaTb mohm CTpaxaM HencBecTHa craTb
OTrOBOpKaMH, HJIH OCHOBa JlJUl MeH3, KOTOp Hy5KHO He
cjry5KHTb bm. 4. bm jjajiH 6m MHe noMomb jxm roro mtoGm
yBjmeTb h BbiyHHTb KaK HMeTb /ryxoBHyio npoHHOCTb a
(nepe3 Banie cjiobo 6h6jihh) a) /via cjiynaeB Bnepea h 6)
jxm Moero co6cTBeHHoro jnmHoro /ryxoBHoro
nyTeniecTBHH.
5. ^to bm 6or ziajiH MHe noMomb jxm toto hto6m xoTeTb
cny5KHTb bm 6onbnie
6. ^to bm remind, mto a pa3roBapHBan c BaMH (prayer)when
a ce6a paccrpobre hjih b 3aTpy/nieHHH, bmccto m>rraTbca
pa3peniHTb Benin TOJibKO nepe3 mok> jnoACKyio npoHHOCTb.
7. ^to bm AajiH MHe npeMy/ipocTb h cepaue 3anojiHHjio c
6h6ji6hckoh npeMy/ipocTbio Taic HOIT a cjiy>KHji 6m bm
3(J)(J)eKTHBHO.
8. ^to bm ziajiH MHe 5KenaHHe royHHTb Bame cjiobo,
6h6jihk>, (HoBbina 3aBeT Gospel john), on a personal basis,
9. Bbl flaJIH 6bl nOMOIHH K MHe TaK, MTO a 6y/Ty 3aMeTHTb
Benin b 6h6jihh (BameM cnoBe) a Mory jihhho orHecra k, h
KOTopoH noM05KeT MHe noHaTb bm xoTHTe MeHa c/ienaTb b
MOeH 5KH3HH.
10. ^to bm /jajiH MHe 6ojibmoe pacno3HaHHe, jxm roro
MTo6bi noHaTb KaK o6i>acHHTb k /ipyrHM KOTopbie bm, h mto
a Mor BbiyHHTb KaK BbiyHHTb h cyMeTb KaK croaTb BBepx
AJia Bac h Bamero cnoBa (6h6jihh)
1 1 . ^to bm npHHecjiH moAeH (hjih websites) b Moen 5kh3hh
XOTaT 3HaTb BaC, H KOTOpbK CHJIbHM B HX TOHHOM
BHHKaHHH Bac (6or); h to bm npHHecjiH 6m jnoAen (hjih
websites) b Moen 5kh3hh dyjier 060/rpHTb MeHa tohho
BbiyHHTb KaK pa3AejiHTb 6h6jihk> cjiobo npaB/rbi (2 timothy
2:15).
12. ^to Bbi noMorjiH MHe BbiyHHTb HMeTb 6onbnioe
BHHKaHne o KOTopbiH BapnaHT 6h6jihh caMbie jryHHrae,
KOTOpbIH CaMbIH TOHHbIH, H KOTOpbIH HMeeT CaMbK
AyxoBHbie npoHHOCTb & cnny, h KOTopaa BapnaHT
cornaniaeTca c nepBOHanajibHO pyKonncaMH mto bm
BOOAynieBHjiH aBTopbi HoBbina 3aBeT HanncaTb.
13. ^to bm p,ajm noMomb k MHe jxm Hcnojib30BaHiui Moero
BpeMeHH b xopomeH Aopore, h jxm roro mtoGm He
paCTOHHTejIbCTBOBaTb MOe BpeMfl Ha JK»KHbIX HJIH nyCTbK
MeTOAax nonyHHTb closer to 6or (ho to He 6y/rbre
noHCTHHe 6h6ji6hck), h rae Te MeroAbi He npoH3BOAflT
HHKaKOH AOJirOCpOHHbIH HJIH lastillg /iyXOBHbIH
njiOAOOBom.
14. ^to bm /jajiH noMomb k MHe noHHTb look for b nepicoB
HJIH MeCTe nOKJIOHeHHa, HTO BH/Tbl BOnpOCOB, KOTOp Hy5KHO
cnpocHTb, h mto bm noMorjiH MHe HaHTH BepyiomHx HJIH
pastor c 6ojibHiOH /ryxoBHOH npeMy/rpocTbio bmccto jierKHx
HJIH JI05KHbIX OTBeTOB.
15. Bbi npHHHHHJIH 6bl MeHH BCnOMHHTb /TJIH TOrO MT06bI
3anoMHHTb Bame cjiobo 6h6jihh (such as Romans 8), Taic,
mto a CMory HMeTb ero b MoeM cep/me h HMeTb moh pa3yM
6biTb noAroTOBjieHHbiM, h totobo #aTb otbct k /ipyroMy H3
ynoBaHHa KOTopoe a HMeio o Bac.
16. ^to bm npHHecjiH noMomb k MHe TaK HOn MOH
co6cTBeHHbie Teojioraa h ^OKrpHHbi jxm roro mto6h
corjiacHTbca c BaniHM cjiobom, 6n6jiHeH h mto bm
npoAOJDKajiHCb noMOHb MHe cyvieTb KaK Moe BHHKaHne
AOKTpHHbl M05KHO yjiyHHIHTb TaK, MTO MOH C06CTBeHHbie
5KH3Hb, lifestyle h noHHMaTb 6y/ryT npoAOJDKaTbca 6biTb
closer to Bbi xoTHre hx 6biTb jxm measi.
17. ^TO Bbl paCKpbIJIH MOK) flyXOBHyK> npOHHIjaTejIbHOCTb
(3atcjiK)HeHHJi) 6onbnie h 6onbnie, h mto rae moh BHHKainie
hjih BoenpHHaTHe Bac He tohhm, mto bm noMornn MHe
BbiyHHTb jesus christ noncTHHe.
18. ^to bm p,ajm noMomb k MHe Taic HOI1 a Mor 6m
OT/iejiHTb ino6bie jio>KHbie pHTyanbi a 3aBHceji Ha, ot BaniHx
acHbK npenoAaBaTenbCTB b 6h6jihh, ecnn jno6oe H3, to a
following He 6ora, hjih npoTHBonoji05KHbi k bm xoTHTe jxm
Toro MTo6bi HayHHTb HaM - o cne^OBaTb 3a BaMH.
19. ^to jno6bie ycHjma 3Jia take away HHCKOJibKO /ryxoBHoe
BHHKaHne a HMeio, ho aobojh>ho mto a coxpaHHji 3HaHHe
KaK 3HaTb Bac h 6biTb o6MaHyTbiM BHyTpn these days
AyxoBHoro o6MaHa.
20. ^to bm npHHecjiH /ryxoBiryio npoHHOCTb h noMorjiH k
MHe TaK HOn a He oy/ry Hacrbio 6ojh>hioh nanaTb nponb
hjih jno6oro ABiDKeHHa 6bijio 6m /ryxoBHOCT counterfeit k
BaM h k BanieMy CBaTeraiieMy cjiOBy.
21. To ecjiH MTO-HH6bmb, to a ^ejiaji b Moen 5kh3hh, hjih
jno6aa ^opora mto a He OTBenaji k BaM no Mepe roro KaK a
AOjraceH HMeTb h to npeAOTBpamaeT MeHa ot hjih ryjiaTb c
BaMH, HJIH HMeTb nOHHMaTb, MTO Bbl npHHecjiH Te
things/responses/events back into moh pa3yM, TaK HOI1 a
OTpenbjica 6bi ot hx in the name of jesus christ, h Bce H3 hx
BJIHaHHH H nOCJieACTBHH, H MTO Bbl 3aMCHHJIH jno6bie
emptiness, TOCKjiHBOCTb hjih despair b Moen 5KH3HH c
yTexoii jiopaa, h mto a 6ojibnie 6mji c<J)OKyciipoBaH Ha
yHHTb nocjieAOBaTb 3a BaMH nyreM HHraTb Bame cjiobo,
6n6jiHa.
22. ^to bm pacKpbijiH moh rjia3a TaK HOn a Mor 6m acHO
yBH/ieTb h y3HaTb ecjiH 6y#eT 6ojh>hioh o6MaH o /ryxoBHbix
TeMax, to KaK noHaTb 3to aBjieHHe (hjih 3th cjrynaH) ot
6H6neiiCKOH nepcneKTHBM, h mto bm muai MHe
npeMy/ipocTb ajih roro hto6m 3HaTb h TaK HOn a Bbiyny
KaK nOMOHb MOHM ^py3b3M H nOJIK)6HJI OAHH
(poACTBeHHHKH) £jih roro MTo6bi He 6biTb HacTbio ee.
23 ^to bm o6ecneHHjiH mto pa3 moh raa3a pacicpbiHbi h moh
pa3yM noHHMaeT #yxoBHoe 3HaneHHe TeKymHe co6mthji
npHHHMaa Mecro b Mnpe, mto bm ikwotobhjih Moe cep/me
jxm roro MTo6bi npn3HaBaTb Bamy npaB/iy, h mto bm
noMorjiH MHe noiwTb KaK Hairra CMenocTb h npoHHOCTb
nepe3 Banie CBaTeraiiee cjiobo, 6h6jihio. In the name of
jesus christ, a npomy 3th BemH noATBep5K/iaa Moe jKejiamie
6biTb b cooTBeTCTBHH Banieii BOJien, h a npomy Bania
npeMy/ipocTb h HMeTb Bjno6jieHHOCTb npaB/iM, AMHHb.
Bojibine Ha /me cTpaHHHM
KaK HMeTb BeHHaaa }KH3Hb
Mbl paUOCTHM eCJIH 3TOT CnHCOK (3anpOCOB MOJIHTBe K
6ory) M05KeT noMOHb BaM. Mbi noHHMaeM sto He mtokct
6biTb caMMH nyHHiHH hjih caMMH 3(J)(J)eKTHBHMH nepeBOA.
Mbi noHHMaeM mto 6y#yT MHoro no-pa3HOMy ^opor
BbipaacaTb mmcjih h cnoBa. Ecjih bm HMeeTe npeAJi05KeHHe
jxm 6onee jryHiiiero nepeBOAa, hjih ecjin bm xoTen 6mjih 6m
npHHHTb Manoe KOjnmecTBO Baniero BpeMeHH nocnaTb
npeAJi05KeHHa k HaM, to bm oy^eTe noMoraTb TbionaM
jnoAax TaioKe, KOTopbie nocne 3Toro npoHHraiOT
yjryHHieHHMH nepeBOA. Mbi nacTO HMeeM hobmh testament
HMeiomHHca b BanieM a3bnce hjih b a3bncax pe/pco hjih
CTapo. Ecjih bm CMOTpHTe jxm hoboto testament b
cneijHiJiHHecKH a3bnce, to nwKajryHCTa HanHHiHTe k HaM.
Taioice, mm xothm 6biTb yBepeHbi h nbiraeMca CBa3MBaTb to
HHor/ia, mm npeAJiaraeM khhfh KOTopbie He cbo6oaho h
KOTOpbK CTOHT /KJHbr. Ho eCJIH Bbl He M05KeTe n03BOJIHTb
HeKOTOpbK H3 Tex 3JieKTpOHHbIX KHHr, TO Mbi M05KCM MaCTO
ZienaTb o6mch 3jieKrpoHHbix KHHr ajih noMOimi c
nepeBOAOM hjih pa6oTOH nepeBOAa. Bbi He aojdkhm 6biTb
npoiJieccHOHajibHbiM pa6oTHHKOM, TOJibKO peryjiapHO
nepcoHa KOTopaa 3aHHTepecoBaHa b noMoraTb.
Bbl AOJDKHbl HMeTb KOMnblOTep HJIH Bbl /K)JI5KHbI HMCTb
AOCTyn k KOMnbiOTepy Ha BaniHx MecTHbix apxHBe hjih
KOJiJie5Ke hjih yHHBepcHTeTe, b Bimy Toro mto Te oGhhho
HMeiOT 6ojiee jryHHine coe/niHeHiDi k HHTepHeTy.
Bbi M05KeTe TaK5Ke oGhhho ycTaHaBjiHBaTb Bani
co6cTBeHHbiH jnpiHbiH CBOBO^HO yner sjieKipoHHaaa
noHTa nyTeM h^th k mail.yahoo.com no5KajryHCTa
npHHHMaeTe momcht ajih Toro hto6m CHHraTb a/ipec nocjie
Toro KaK 3jieKTpoHHaaa noHTa Bbi pacnojKraceHM Ha /me
HJIH KOHIje 3T0H CTpaHHHM.
Mbi HaneeMca bm nonuieT ajieKipoHHaaa noHTa k HaM, ecjni
3to noMOHjH hjih noompeHiui. Mbi Taioice oGo^paeM Bac
CB33aTbCa Mbi OTHOCHTejIbHO 3JieKTpOHHbIX KHHr Mbi
npeAJiaraeM TOMy 6e3 ijeHbi, h cbo6oaho, kotop mm HMeeM
MHoro KHHr b HHoerpaHHbK a3MKax, ho mm Bcer/ia He
ycTaHaBjiHBaeM hx ajih Toro mto6m nojryHHTb sjieKTpoHHO
(download) noTOMy mto mm TOJibKO ^eJiaeM HMeiomeca
KHHrH hjih TeMM KOTopbie cnpaniHBaTb. Mbi o6oApaeM Bac
npOAOJDKaTb nOMOJIHTb K 6ory H npOAOJDKHTb BbiyHHTb o
eM nyTeM HHraTb HoBbina 3aBeT. Mbi npHBeTCTByeM Baiira
BonpocM h KOMMeHTapHH ajieKipoHHaaa noHTa.
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
ARABIC -LANGUEARABE
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
l(_£»l ljjt_l i
IJjd* ^I^jcjoI ^iXs I j ^!jj JjlAJ* tA-S It^fd mj^j^5 '
I Jjd* ^I^jcjoI ^iXs £?afc_ I 4>jUj j' Jj*y <J ' jl3js jl Jjj1-^ l<-!\?
J j i lP '<-!<J> 'd\s i^jm» i Ji^J» J Jf>L>"jj<-! £j 4J Jkjs*.
i^j I JJs i j Cj-i^Jcjf ^yb^Caj, ? j I JjjlCJ I Jjj^l£° Ij £l£J»I f j
lj£ji_j|cj I Jc^ L^f^j I j igo^jp? 'j M^>* ft>l 'cis L>*-*i
Ijjrl* ^jJ^JCJ^ ^ j^l l(j*l£jf oil £oJ £A,£J Jj— *^J 'l£i><='
'^MJ f j ' Jj'lK
I^j IJ<J> I j liljCJ C^-ia^ j_£ ^i_j Jd! liljf* IJfjJ^ia (IJ^oJ 'J^A,^)
' jlj^ Lyj-* ^£^t£ jl£ '<Jjj^l£° j'<-t^f>s jlJUijo Ij C^jUi Ijtii
IlJ^J J— ay jl JljCJJS Ijjf j_£o l<_K^_£ tl^l/L^ M^0'.
I JjtI* ^I^JCJ^ L-q_£ f£j-£ *4;5M^S I J^lfJ (£ I Jo^jM^
I Ji^_£ Cjjl^o I jj_£ ii!J ^j^. I JJjjJ I J<J> lSi^'^JLS ^JL^ 'j
CI^JLJ I ji! IlJ^J JjjLf^ 'j jjJ£^ ' J'^JlS j '<JfL>uL5C'^'^'J ^-^S
MiJ^ 'JfjKj5 J^jJ '<-fe.'<Jf.
I^j I J<J> Jii!j> I j l£^-H,£ I Jii!cj|i_j I Jl Jii!cjjj j_£ IJ^ jC£i_j jl Ji^ j
I^j I JJs Jii!j> I j lSijJ£„j lUijb I^jCjsI (j^I^Jcj^) Jl lSC^S-
^.1 ^Ja^ jl I Jj»C^O jl JcJjtlJO L-q_£ sio I JjjlCJ 4 jUaJlJ j» j^j> 'j
IU£-J sio I Jijiki* U)^ Ijj^ l£i>"j£. ' '(>l£ j
Prayer to God
Dear God,
Thank you that this Gospel or this New Testament has
been released so that we are able to learn more about
you.
Please help the people responsible for making this
Electronic book available. You know who they are and
you are able to help them.
Please help them to be able to work fast, and make
more Electronic books available
Please help them to have all the resources, the
money, the strength and the time that they need in
order to be able to keep working for You.
Please help those that are part of the team that help
them on an everyday basis. Please give them the
strength to continue and give each of them the spiritual
understanding for the work that you want them to do.
Please help each of them to not have fear and to
remember
that you are the God who answers prayer and who is
in charge of everything.
I pray that you would encourage them, and that you
protect them, and the work & ministry that they are
engaged in.
I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual
Forces or other obstacles that could harm them or
slow them down.
Please help me when I use this New Testament to
also think of the people who have made this edition
available, so that I can pray for them and so they can
continue to help more people.
I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word
(the New Testament), and that you would give me
spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better
and to understand the period of time that we are living
in.
Please help me to know how to deal with the
difficulties that I am confronted with every day. Lord
God, Help me to want to know you Better and to want
to help other Christians in my area and around the
world.
I pray that you would give the Electronic book team
and those who help them your wisdom. God, help me
to understand you better. Please help my family to
understand you better also.
I pray that you would help the individual members of
their family (and my family) to not be spiritually
deceived, but to understand you and to want to accept
and follow you in every way.
Also give us comfort and guidance in these times and I
ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus ,
Amen,
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
A FEW BOOKS for NEW CHRISTIANS
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
King James Version - The best and ideal would be the
text of the 1611, [referring to the 66 books of the Old and
New Testaments] as produced by the original
translators.
Geneva Bible - Version of the Old Testament and New
Testament produced starting around 1560. Produced
with the help of T (Beza)., who also produced an
accurate LATIN version of the New Testament, based on
the Textus Receptus.
The Geneva Bible (several Editions of it) are available -
as of this writing at www.archive.org in PDF
Bible of Jay Green - Jay Green was the Translator for
the Trinitarian Bible Society. His work is based on the
Ancient Koine Greek Text (Textus Receptus) from
which he translated directly. His work encompasses both
Hebrew as well as Koine Greek (The Greek spoken at
the time of Jesus Christ).
The Translation of the New Testament [of Jay Green]
can be found online in PDF for Free
R-La grande charte d'Angleterre ; ouvrage precede d'un
Precis - This is simply the MAGNA CHARTA, which
recognizes liberty for everyone.
Gallagher, Mason - Was the Apostle Peter ever at Rome
Cannon of the Old Testament and the New Testament
or Why the Bible is Complete without the Apocrypha and
unwritten Traditions by Professor Archibald Alexander
Princeton Theological Seminary
1851 - Presbyterian Board of Publications. [available online
Free ]
Historical Evidences of the Truth of the Scripture Records
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE DOUBTS AND
DISCOVERIES OF MODERN TIMES, by George
Rawlinson - Lectures Delivered at Oxford University
[available online Free ]
The Apostolicity of Trinitarianism - by George Stanley
Faber - 1 832 - 3 Vol / 3 Tomes [available online Free ]
The image-worship of the Church of Rome : proved to be
contrary to Holy Scripture and the faith and discipline of the
primitive church ; and to involve contradictory and
irreconcilable doctrines within the Church of Rome itself
(1847)
by James Endell Tyler, 1789-1851
Calvin defended : a memoir of the life, character, and
principles of John Calvin (1909) by Smyth, Thomas, 1808-
1873 ; Publish: Philadelphia : Presbyterian Board of
Publication. [available online Free ]
The Supreme Godhead of Christ, the Corner-stone of
Christianity by W. Gordon - 1855[available online Free ]
A history of the work of redemption containing the outlines
of a body of divinity ...
Author: Edwards, Jonathan, 1703-1758.
Publication Info: Philadelphia,: Presbyterian board of
publication, [available online Free ]
The origin of pagan idolatry ascertained from historical
testimony and circumstantial evidence. - by George Stanley
Faber - 1816 3 Vol. / 3 Tomes [available online Free ]
The Seventh General Council, the Second of Nicaea, Held
A.D. 787, in which the Worship of Images was established
- based on early documents by Rev. John Mendham - 1850
[documents how this far-reaching Council went away from
early Christianity and the New Testament]
Worship of Mary by James Endell Tyler [available online
Free ]
The Papai System from its origin to the present time
A Historical Sketch of every doctrine, claim and practice of
the Church of Rome by William Cathcart, DD
1 872 - [available online Free ]
The Protestant exiles of Zillerthal; their persecutions and
expatriation from the Tyrol, on separating from the Romish
church - [available online Free ]
An essay on apostolical succession- being a defence of a
genuine ministry - by Rev Thomas Powell - 1846
An inquiry into the history and theology of the ancient
Vallenses and Albigenses; as exhibiting, agreeably to the
promises, the perpetuity of the sincere church of Christ
Publish info London, Seeley and Burnside, - by George
Stanley Faber - 1838 [available online Free ]
The Israel of the Alps. A complete history of the Waldenses
and their colonies (1875) by Alexis Muston (History of the
Waldensians) - 2 Vol/ 2 Tome - Available in English and
Separately ALSO in French [available online Free ]
Encouragement for Women
Amy Charmichael
AMY CARMICHAEL - From Sunrise Land
[available online Free ]
AMY CARMICHAEL - Lotus buds (1910)
[available online Free ]
AMY CARMICHAEL - Overweights of joy (1906)
[available online Free ]
AMY CARMICHAEL -Walker of Tinnevelly (1916)
[available online Free ]
AMY CARMICHAEL -After Everest ; the experiences of a
mountaineer and medical mission (1936)
[available online Free ]
AMY CARMICHAEL -The continuation of a story ([1914
[available online Free ]
AMY CARMICHAEL -Ragland, pioneer (1922)
[available online Free]
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
HISTORY OF HUNGARIAN CHRISTIANS
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
fflSTORY OF THE PROTESTANT CHURCH IN
HUNGARY By J. H. MERLE D'AUBIGNE -
1 854 [available online Free ]
Hungary and Kossuth-An Exposition of the Late Hungarian
Revolution by Tefft
1852 [available online Free ]
Secret history of the Austrian government and of its ...
persecutions of Protestants By Joseph Alfred Michiels -
1859 [available online Free ]
Sketches in Remembrance of the Hungarian Struggle for
Independence and National Freedom Edited by Kastner
(Circ. 1853) [available online Free ]
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
HISTORY OF FRENCH CHRISTIANS
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
La Bible Francaise de Calvin V 1
[available online Free ]
La Bible Francaise de Calvin V 2
[available online Free ]
VAUDOIS - A memoir of Felix Neff, pastor of the High
Alps [available online Free ]
La France Protestante - ou, Vies des protestants francais
par Haag - 1 856 - 6 Tomes [available online Free ]
Musee des protestans celebres
Ftude sur les Academies Protestantes en France au xvie et
au xviie siecle - Bourchenin - 1 882 [available online Free ]
Les plus anciennes melodies de l'eglise protestante de
Strasbourg et leurs auteurs [microform] (1928) [available
online Free ]
L'Israel des Alpes: Premiere histoire complete des Vaudois
du Piemont et de leurs colonies
Par Alexis Muston ; Publie par Marc Ducloux, 1 85 1
(2 Tomes) Lavailable online Free J
GALLICA - http://gallica.bnf.fr
Histoire ecclesiastique - 3 Tomes - by Theodore de Beze,
[available online Free ] |
][
]
BEZE-Sermons sur l'histoire de la resurrection de Notre-
Seigneur Jesus-Christ [available online Free ]
DE BEZE - Confession de la foy chrestienne [available
online Free ]
Vie de J. Calvin by Theodore de Beze, [available online
Free ]
Confession d'Augsbourg (francais). 1550-Melanchthon
[available online Free ]
La BIBLE-1'ed. de, Geneve-par F. Perrin, 1567 [available
online Free ]
Hobbes - Leviathan ou La matiere, la forme et la puissance
d'un etat ecclesiastique et civil [available online Free ]
L'Eglise et l'Etat a Geneve du vivant de Calvin
Roget, Amedee (1825-1883).
[available online Free ]
LUTHER-Commentaire de l'epitre aux Galates [available
online Free ]
Petite chronique protestante de France [available online Free
]
Histoire de la guerre des hussites et du Concile de Basle
2 Tomes [recheck for accuracy]
Les Vaudois et l'Inquisition-par Th. de Cauzons (1908)
[available online Free ]
Glossaire vaudois-par P. -M. Callet [available online Free ]
Musee des protestans celebres ou Portraits et notices
biographiques et litteraires des personnes les plus eminens
dans l'histoire de la reformation et du protestantisme par une
societe de gens de lettres [available online Free ]
( publ. par Mr. G. T. Doin; Publication : Paris : Weyer : Treuttel et Wurtz :
Scherff [et al.], 1821-1824 - 6 vol./6 Tomes : ill. ; in-8
Doin, Guillaume-Tell (1794-1854). Editeur scientifique)
Notions elementaires de grammaire comparee pour servir a
l'etude des trois langues classiques [available online Free ]
Thesaurus graecae linguae ab Henrico Stephano constructus.
Tomus I : in quo praeter alia plurima quae primus praestitit
vocabula in certas classes distribuit, multiplici derivatorum
serie...
( Estienne, Henri (1528-1598). Auteur du texte Tomus I, II, III, IV : in quo
praeter alia plurima quae primus praestitit vocabula in certas classes
distribuit, multiplici derivatorum serie; Thesaurus graecae linguae ab
Henrico Stephano constructus ) [available online Free ]
La liberte chretienne; etude sur le principe de la piete chez
Luther ; Strasbourg, Librairie Istra, 1922 - Will, Robert
[available online Free ]
Bible-N.T.(francais)-1523 - Lefevre d'Etaples [available
online Free ]
Calvin considere comme exegete - Par Auguste Vesson
[available online Free ]
Reuss, Rodolphe - Les eglises protestantes d'Alsace pendant
laRevolution (1789-1802) [available online Free ]
WEBBER-Ethique_protestante-L'ethique protestante et
l'esprit du capitalisme (1904-1905) [available online Free ]
French Protestantism, 1559-1562 (1918)
Kelly, Caleb Guyer -[available online Free ]
History of the French Protestant Refugees, from the
Revocation of the Edict of Nan tes 1 854 [available online
Free ]
The History of the French, Walloon, Dutch and Other
Foreign Protestant Refugees Settled in 1846 [available
online Free ]
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Italian and/or Spanish/Castillian/ etc
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Historia del Concilio Tridentino (SARPI) [available online
Free ] [
rm
Aldrete, Bernardo Jose de - Del origen, y principio de la
lengua castellana 6 romace que oi se usa en Espana
SAVANAROLA-Vindicias historicas por la inocencia de
Fr. Geronimo Savonarola
Biblia en lengua espanola traduzida palabra por palabra de
la verdad hebrayca-FERRARA
Biblia. Espanolll602-translaciones por Cypriano de Valera
( misspelled occasionally as Cypriano de Varela ) [available
online Free ]
Reina Valera 1602 - New Testament Available at
www.archive.org [available online Free ]
La Biblia : que es, los sacros libros del Vieio y Nuevo
Testamento
Valera, Cipriano de, 1532-1625
Los dos tratados del papa, i de la misa - escritos por
Cipriano D. Valera ; i por el publicados primero el a. 1588,
luego el a. 1599; i ahora fielmente reimpresos [Madrid],
1 85 1 [available online Free ]
Valera, Cipriano de, 15327-1625
Aviso a los de la iglesia romana, sobre la indiccion de
jubileo, por la bulla del papa Clemente octavo.
English Title = An answere or admonition to those of the
Church of Rome, touching the iubile, proclaimed by the
bull, made and set foorth by Pope Clement the eyght, for the
yeare of our Lord. 1600. Translated out of French [available
online Free ]
Spanish Protestants in the Sixteenth Century by Cornelius
August Wilkens French [available online Free ]
Historia de Los Protestantes Espanoles Y de Su Persecucion
Por Felipe II - Adolfo de Castro - 1 85 1 (also Available in
English) [available online Free ]
The Spanish Protestants and Their Persecution by Philip II
- 1851 - Adolfo de Castro [available online Free ]
Institvcion de la religion christiana;
Institutio Christianae religionis. Spanish
Calvin, Jean, 1509-1564
Instituzion religiosa escrita por Juan Calvino el ano 1536 y
traduzida al castellano por Cipriano de Valera.
Calvino, Juan.
Catecismo que significa: forma de instrucion, que contiene
los principios de la religion de dios, util y necessario para
todo fiel Christiano : compuesto en manera de dialogo,
donde pregunta el maestro, y responde el discipulo
En casa de Ricardo del Campo, M.D.XCVI [1596] Calvino,
Juan.
Tratado para confirmar los pobres catiuos de Berueria en la
catolica y antigua se, y religion Christiana: y para los
consolar con la Palabra de Dios en las afliciones que
padecen por el evangelio de lesu Christo. [...] Al fin deste
tratado hallareys un enxambre de los falsos milagros, y
illusiones del Demonio con que Maria de la visitacion priora
de la Anunciada de Lisboa engano a muy muchos: y de
como fue descubierta y condenada al fin del ano de .1588
En casa de Pedro Shorto, Ano de. 1594
Valera, Cipriano de,
Biblia de Ferrara, corregida por Haham R. Samuel de
Casseres
The Protestan t exiles of Madeira (c 1860) French [available
online Free ]
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
HISTORY OF VERSIONS of the NEW TESTAMENT
PartA - Foryour consideration
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
For Christians who want a serious, detailed and
historical account of the versions of the New Testament,
and of the issues involved in the historic defense of
authentic and true Christianity.
John William Burgon [ Oxford] - 1 The traditional text of the
Holy Gospels vindicated and established (1896) [available
online Free ]
John William Burgon [ Oxford] -2 The causes of the
corruption of the traditional text of the Holy Gospel
[available online Free ]
John William Burgon [ Oxford] - The Revision Revised
(A scholarly in-depth defense of Ancient Greek Text of the
New Testament) [available online Free ]
Intro to Vol 1 from INTRO to MASSORETICO CRITICAL
by GINSBURG-VOL 1 [available online Free ]
Intro to Vol 1 from INTRO to MASSORETICO CRITICAL
by GINSBURG-VOL 2 [available online Free ]
Horse Mosaicse; or, A view of the Mosaical records, with
respect to their coincidence with profane antiquity; their
internal credibility; and their connection with Christianity;
comprehending the substance of eight lectures read before
the University of Oxford, in the year 1801; pursuant to the
will of the late Rev. John Bampton, A.M. / By George
Stanley Faber -Oxford : The University press, 1801
[Topic: defense of the authorship of Moses and the
historical accuracy of the Old Testament] [available online
Free ]
TC The English Revisers' Greek Text-Shown to be
Unauthorized, Except by Egyptian Copies Discarded
[available online Free ]
CANON of the Old and New Testament by Archibald
Alexander [available online Free ]
An inquiry into the integrity of the Greek Vulgate- or,
Received text of the New Testament 1815 92mb [available
online Free ]
A vindication of 1 John, v. 7 from the objections of M.
Griesbach [available online Free ]
The Burning of the Bibles- Defence of the Protestant
Version - Nathan Moore - 1 843
A dictionarie of the French and English tongues 1611
Cotgrave, Randle - [available online Free ]
The Canon of the New Testament vindicated in answer to
the objections of J. T. in his Amyntor, with several additions
[available online Free ]
the paramount authority of the Holy Scriptures vindicated
(1868)
Histoire du Canon des Saintes-ecritures Dans L'eglise
Chretienne ; Reuss (1863) [available online Free ]
Histoire de la Societe biblique protestante de Paris, 1818 a
1 868 [available online Free ]
L'academie protestante de Nimes et Samuel Petit
Le manuel des chretiens protestants : Simple exposition des
croyances et des pratiques - Par Emilien Frossard - 1 866
Jean-Frederic Osterwald, pasteur a Neuchatel
David Martin
The canon of the Holy Scriptures from the double point of
view of science and of faith (1862) [available online Free ]
CODEX B
H. Hoskier
E
ALLIES by
1914)2Vol[
Jniversity of M
vailable online 7ree ]
chigan Scholar
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
HISTORY OF VERSIONS of the NEW TESTAMENT
Part B - not Recommended
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Modern Versions of the New Testament, most of which
were produced after 1910, are based upon a newly invented
text, by modern professors, many of whom did not claim to
believe in the New Testament, the Death and Physical
Resurrection of Jesus Christ, or the necessity of Personal
Repentance for Salvation.
The Translations have been accomplished all around the
world in many languages, starting with changeover from the
older accurate Greek Text, to the modern invented one,
starting between 1904 and 1910 depending on which
edition, which translation team, and which publisher.
We cannot recommend: the New Testament or Bible of
Louis Segond. This man was probably well intentioned, but
his translation are actually based on the 8th Critical edition
of Tischendorf, who opposed the Reformation, the
Historicity of the Books of the Bible, and the Greek Text
used by Christians for thousands of years.
For additional information on versions, type on the Internet
Search: "verses missing in the NIV" and you will find more
material.
We cannot recommend the english-language NKJV, even
though it claims to depend on the Textus Receptus. That is
not exactly accurate. The NKJV makes this claim based on
the ecclectic [mixed and confused] greek text collated
officially by Herman von Soden. The problem is that von
Soden did not accomplish this by himself and used 40
assistants, without recording who chose which text or the
names of those students. Herman Hoskier [Scholar,
University of Michigan] was accurate in demonstrating the
links between Sinaiticus, Vaticanus, and the Greek Text of
Von Soden. Thus what is explained as being "based on" the
Textus Receptus actually was a departure from that very
text.
The Old Testaments of almost all modern language Bibles,
in almost all languages is a CHANGED text. It does NOT
conform to the historic Old Testament, and is based instead
on the recent work of the German Kittel, who can be easily
considered an Apostate by historic Lutheran standards.
(more in a momen tf).
The Old Testament of the NKJV is based on the New
Hebrew Translation of Kittel. [die Biblia Hebraica von
Rudolf Kittel ] Kittel remains problematic for his own
approach to translation.
Kittel, the translator of the Old Testament [for almost all
modern editions of the Bible]:
1. Did not believe that the Pentateuch he translated was
accurate.
2. Did not believe that the Pentateuch he translated was the
same as the original Pentateuch.
3. Did not believe in the inspiration of the Old Testament or
the New Testament.
4. Did not believe in what Martin Luther would believe
would constitute Salvation (salvation by Faith alone, in
Christ Jesus alone).
5. Considered the Old Testament to be a mixture compiled
by tribes who were themselves confused about their own
religion.
Most people today who are Christians would consider Kittel
to be a Heretical Apostate since he denies the inspiration of
the Bible and the accuracy of the words of Jesus in the New
Testament. Kittel today would be refused to be allowed to
be a Pastor or a translator. His translation work misleads
and misguides people into error, whenever they read his
work.
The Evidence against Kittel is not small. It is simply the
work of Kittel himself, and what he wrote. Much of the
evidence can be found in:
A history ofthe Hebrews (1895) by R Kittel - 2 Vol
Essentially, Kittel proceeds from a number of directions to
undermine the Old Testament and the history of the
Hebrews, by pretending to take a scholarly approach. Kittel
did not seem to like the Hebrews much, but he did seem to
like ancient pagan and mystery religions. (see the Two
Babylons by Hislop, or History of the Temple by
Edersheim, and then compare).
His son Gerhard Kittel, a "scholar" who worked for the
German Bible Society in Germany in World War II, with
full aproval of the State, ALSO was not a Christian and
would ALSO be considered an apostate. Gerhard Kittel
served as advisor to the leader of Germany in World War II.
After the war, Gerhard Kittel was tried for War Crimes.
On the basis of the Documentation, those who believe in the
Bible and in Historic Christianity are compelled to find
ALTERNATIVE texts to the Old Testament translated by
Kittel or the New Testaments that depart from the historic
Ancient Koine Greek.
Both Kittel Sr and Kittel Jr appear to have been false
Christians, and may continue to mislead many. People who
cannot understand how this can happen may want to read a
few books including :
Seduction of Christianity by Dave Hunt.
The Agony of Deceit by Horton
Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by C. Cumbey
The Battle for the Bible by Harold Lindsell (Editor of
Christianity Today)
Those who want more information about Kittel should
consult:
1) Problems with Kittel - Short paper sometimes available
online or at www.archive.org
2) The Theological Faculty of the University of Jena during
the Third .... in PDF [can be found online sometimes]
by S. Heschel, Professor, Dartmouth College
3) Theologians under .... : Gerhard Kittel, Paul Althaus, and
Emanuel Hirsch / Robert P. Ericksen.
Publish info New Haven : Yale University Press, 1985.
(New Haven, 1987)
4) Leonore Siegele - Wenschkewitz, Neutestamentliche
Wissenschaft vor der Judenfrage: Gerhard Kittels
theologische Arbeit im Wandel deutscher Geschichte
(Miinchen: Kaiser, 1980).
5) Rethinking the German Church Struggle
by John S. Conway [online]
http://motlc.wiesenthal.com/resources/books/annual4/chapl8.html
6) Betrayal: German Churches and the Holocaust
by Robert P. Ericksen (Editor), Susannah Heschel (Editor)
Questions about (PDF) Ebooks:
I notice that you have lists of Ebooks here.
I understand that you may want others to know about
the books, but why here ?
There are several reasons why this was done.
1) so that people who know nothing about Christianity have
a place to start. There are now thousands of books about
Christianity available. Knowing where to begin can be
difficult. These books simply represent ideas and a
potential starting place.
2) so that people can learn what other Christians were like,
who lived before. We live in a world that still
concentrates on the tasks of the moment, but pays little
attention to the past. Today, many people do not know
HOW other Christians lived their daily lives, in centuries
past. Some of these books are from the past. They offer
the struggles and the methods of responding through their
Christian faith, in their own daily lives, some from
hundreds of years ago. In addition, many of those books
are documented and have good sources. This seems to be
a good way for Christians from the past to encourage
those in the present.
3) Histories of certain Christians DO belong to those who
are those who are native to those churches, those
geographic areas, or who speak those languages.
But although that is true, many churches today have
communities or denominations that have transcended
and surpassed the local geographic areas from
where they initially or originally arose. It is good for
believers who are from OTHER geographic areas, to
learn more about foreign languages and foreign cultures.
Anything that can help to accomplish this, is movement
in the right direction.
4) It is normal for people to believe that if their church or
their denomination is in one geographic location, that The
history of that place is best expressed by those who are
LOCAL historians. Unfortunately, today, this is often
NOT accurate.
The reason is that many places have suffered
from wars and from local disasters. This is especially true
in Africa and the Near and Middle East. The Local
historic records and documents were destroyed. Those
documents that have survived, has survived OUTSIDE
of those Areas of conflict. Much of their earlier history
of the Eastern portion of the Roman Empire, is mostly
known because of the record keepers of the West, and
because of the travelers from the areas of Western
Christianity. In many ways, Western Christianity is often
still the record keeper of those from the East.
There is a great deal of historical records in the West,
about the Near East. Those who live there today in the
near East and Middle East know almost nothing about.
We suggest some sources that may be of assistance.
- So you want to bring people closer, and that is a good
answer, but why include records or books from England
or from French speaking authors ?
1) Much of the material dealing with Eastern Orthodoxy OR
dealing with the matters of Syria, The Byzantine Empire,
Africa or Asia, were written about, in French. Please
remember that until very recently, FRENCH was the language
of the educated classes around the world, AND that it was the
MAIN language for diplomats, consuls and ambassadors
and envoys. As a result, there is value in helping those who
have an interest in French ALSO know where to start,
concerning matters of Faith and History.
Some of the material listed in French simply gives people a
starting point for learning about Christianity in Europe, from a
non-English point of view. Other books are listed so that
people can read some of those sources firsthand, for
themselves and come to their own conclusions.
English Christians should be happy that they have a great
spiritual heritage and examples, and rejoice also that the
French can say the same. The examples of the strong and good
Christians that have come before belong to everyone to all
Christians, to all those who aspire to have good examples.
About the materials that deal with England, most of the world
STILL does not realize that the records in England are usually
MUCH older than the ecclesiastical records of OTHER areas
of the world. England was divided up into geographic areas
and Churches had great influence in the nation. That had not
changed in England until the last few decades. Some of the
records about Christianity in England
Go back for more than one thousand years, in an
UNBROKEN line. One can follow the changes to the diocese
through the different languages, through the different or
changing legal documents and through the
Rights confirmed to the churches.
Other areas of the world are claimed to be very ANCIENT in
dealing with Christianity, but there is very little of actual
documentation, of actual agreements, of actual legal
descriptions, of actual records of local ceremonies, of actual
local church councils, of the relationship between the secular
State law, and the guidelines or rules of the Church. England
was never invaded by those who posed a direct
threat to its church institutions. The records were kept, so the
records and documentation are in fact a much stronger
Basis for the documenting of Christianity in earlier times.
Most Christians from the East do not know about this, and it
would be good for them to learn more. In addition, there are
also records in the Nations and Provinces of Europe, that have
been kept where Roman Catholic Records demonstrate the
authenticity of earlier Christian groups that pre-date the
authority of the Bishop of Rome, even in the Western half of
the Roman Empire. Some of those sources are listed herein
also.
Finally, in the matter of suggesting books about Christianity
and Other languages, please remember that each group likes to
learn about its own past, and its own progress.
The French should be humbly proud of those Christians who
were in France and who were brave and wise and
demonstrated courage and a strong faithfulness to God. The
Germans should learn and know the same thing about their
history, as should the Spaniards and the Germans, and each
and every other Nation and People-group. No matter who we
are or where we are from, we can find something positive and
good to encourage us and be glad that there were some who
came before us, to show us a better way to live, by their faith
and their Godly examples.
In closing it would be good perhaps to state what is
obvious:
This ebook is likely to travel far and wide. Feel free to post
online and use and print.
In many parts of the world, Christianity is deliberately falsely
represented. It is represented as IF faith in God would make
someone "anti-intellectual" or somehow afraid of ideas or
thinking. Nothing could be further from the truth.
Many people today do not know that the history of science
today is edited to leave out the deep Christianity that most of
the top scientists have held until very recent times.
Since God created the World and the scientific laws that
govern it, it makes sense that God is the designer. No one is
more scientific than God.
Many of the great scientists in the World are still Active
Christians, with a consciously DEEP faith in God. Christians
are not afraid of thinking for themselves. There are many
secularists today who attempt to suggest that Christianity is for
those who are feeble. The truth is that many of those are too
feeble and too intellectually unprepared to answer the
questions that Christianity asks of each man and each woman.
Those who do not have faith in Jesus Christ and who are
secular simply often worship themselves, under the disguise
of the theory of Evolution. But the chaos of the world today
leaves most who are secular WITHOUT a guide or a method
to explain either purpose in life, or the events that are taking
place across the planet. Christianity with its record of 2000
years - (and please do not confuse the Vatican with
Christianity, they are often not the same) - has
a record of helping people navigate in difficult times.
Christianity teaches leaders to be humble and accountable, it
helps merchants to trade honestly, and fathers to love their
children and their wife. Christianity finds no value in doing
harm to others for the purpose of self-interest. Usually doing
harm to others is a method of expressing that ones faith in God
is insufficient, therefore [the logic goes, that] harm must be
done to others.
Behaving in that wrong manner is simply a Lack of faith in
God, and therefore those who harm others from Other faiths
and other religions are usually demonstrating a Lack of Faith
in the God that THEY worship.
If God is all powerful, and if God can change the minds of
others, and if God can reveal himself, then WHY harm anyone
else who does not agree ? During THIS lifetime, it seems that
each of us has the right to be wrong ,and the right to make up
his own mind. Is it not up to God to deal with others in the
afterlife ?
We provide answers, and help for those who seek truth (yes
actual truth can be actually found and discovered, which is a
shocking statement to many people who thought this was not
genuinely possible).
God is a loving God. He offers Eternal Life to those who
repent and believe in his message in the New Testament. But
God also allows each individual to decide for themselves. This
does not allow any of us to change or decide the rules. God is
still God. We all are under his rules every time we are
breathing, with each pulse that continues to beat in our heart.
God does not convince people against their Will. That annoys
some people also, because they would like God to make
decisions for them. But if people want to be Free, let them
demonstrate this by exercising their own Freedom of choosing
whether to follow God or not. (being able to chose to accept or
reject God is not the same as being able to chose the
consequences. Only the choice of which direction to Go is up
to us. The consequences are whatever God has
Actually declared them to be. Agreeing with Him or not will
not change this.
Christianity is a source of internal strength and provides
answers that almost no other religious system even claims to
provide or attempts to provide.
Something usually happens to those who are intellectually
honest and investigate Christianity. Many times, they find that
Christianity is the most authentic, accurate and historic
account of the history of the world.
It is the genuine answers and the genuine internal peace and
help that Christians can find through their God which bothers
those who are afraid to search for God. We only hope that
each person will embrace their spiritual j ourney
And take the challenge upon themselves to ask the question
about how to find Truth and accurate answers.
The answers CAN be found. Some of these books are simply
provided to help people find a few of the pieces that will serve
as a means to encourage them in thinking and in having their
inner questions answered.
We continue to find more answers every day. We have not
arrived and we certainly are not perfect. But if we have helped
others to proceed a bit farther on their own journeys, certainly
the effort will not have been in vain.
Psalm 50:15
15 And call upon me in the day of trouble: I will deliver
thee, and thou shalt glorify me.
Psalm 90
91:1 He that dwelleth in the secret place of the most High
shall abide under the shadow of the Almighty.
2 I will say of the LORD, He is my refuge and my fortress:
my God; in him will I trust.
3 Surely he shall deliver thee from the snare of the fowler,
and from the noisome pestilence.
4 He shall cover thee with his feathers, and under his wings
shalt thou trust: his truth shall be thy shield and buckler.
5 Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the
arrow that flieth by day;
6 Nor for the pestilence that walketh in darkness; nor for
the destruction that wasteth at noonday.
7 A thousand shall fail at thy side, and ten thousand at thy
right hand; but it shall not come nigh thee.
8 Only with thine eyes shalt thou behold and see the reward
of the wicked.
9 Because thou hast made the LORD, which is my refuge,
even the most High, thy habitation;
10 There shall no evil befall thee, neither shall any plague
come nigh thy dwelling.
1 1 For he shall give his angels charge over thee, to keep
thee in all thy ways.
12 They shall bear thee up in their hands, lest thou dash thy
foot against a stone.
13 Thou shalt tread upon the lion and adder: the young lion
and the dragon shalt thou trample under feet.
14 Because he hath set his love upon me, therefore will I
deliver him: I will set him on high, because he hath known
my name.
15 He shall call upon me, and I will answer him: I will be
with him in trouble; I will deliver him, and honour him.
16 With long life will I satisfy him, and show him my
salvation.
Psalm 23
23: 1 A Psalm of David. The LORD is my shepherd; I shall
not wan t.
2 He maketh me to lie down in green pastures: he leadeth
me beside the still waters.
3 He restoreth my soul: he leadeth me in the paths of
righteousness for his name's sake.
4 Yea, though I walk through the valley of the shadow of
death, I will fear no evil: for thou art with me; thy rod and
thy staff they comfort me.
5 Thou preparest a table before me in the presence of mine
enemies: thou anointest my head with oil; my cup runneth
over.
6 Surely goodness and mercy shall follow me all the days
of my life: and I will dwell in the house of the LORD for
ever.
With My Whole Heart - With
all my heart
"with my whole heart"
lf we truly expect God to respond to us, we must be
willing to make the commitment to Him with our
whole heart.
This means making a commitment to Him with our
ENTIRE, or ALL of our heart. Many people do not
want to be truly committed to God. They simply want
God to rescue them at that moment, so that they can
continue to ignore Him and refuse to do what they
should. God knows those who ask help sincerely and
those who do not. God knows each of our thoughts.
God knows our true intentions, the intentions we
consciously admit to, and the intentions we may not
want to admit to. God knows us better than we know
ourselves. When we are truly and honestly and
sincerely praying to find God, and wanting Him with all
of our heart, or with our whole heart, THAT is when
God DOES respond.
What should people do if they cannot make this
commitment to God, or if they are afraid to do this ?
Pray :
Lord God, I do not knowyou well enough, please help
me to know you better, and please help me to
understand you. Change my desire to serve you and
help me to want to be committed to you with my whole
heart. I pray that you would send into my life those
who can help me, or places where I can find accurate
Information about You. Please preserve me and help
me grow so that I can be entirely committed to you. I n
the name of Jesus, Amen.
Here are some verses in the Bible that demonstrate
that God responds to those who are committed with
their whole heart.
(Psa 9:1 KJV) To the chief Musician upon Muthlabben,
A Psalm of David. I will praise thee, O LORD with my
whole heart; I will show forth all thy marvellous works.
(Psa 111:1 KJV) Praise ye the LORD. I will praise the
LORD with my whole heart, in the assembly of the
upright, and in the congregation.
(Psa 1 19:2 KJV) Blessed are they that keep his
testimonies, and that seek him with my whole heart.
(Psa 119:10 KJV) With my whole heart have I sought
thee: O let me not wander from thy commandments.
(Psa 1 19:34 KJV) Give me understanding, and I shall
keep thy law; yea, I shall observe with my whole heart.
(Psa 1 19:58 KJV) I entreated thy favour with my whole
heart: be merciful unto me according to thy word.
(Psa 1 19:69 KJV) The proud have forged a lie against
me: but I will keep thy precepts with my whole heart.
(Psa 119:145 KJV) KOPH. I cried with my whole heart;
hear me, O LORD: I will keep thy statutes.
(Psa 138:1 KJV) A Psalm of David. I will praise thee
with my whole heart: before the gods will I sing praise
unto thee.
(Isa 1 :5 KJV) Why should ye be stricken any more? ye
will revolt more and more: the whole head is sick, and
the whole heart faint.
(Jer 3:10 KJV) And yet for all this her treacherous
sister Judah hath not turned unto me with her whole
heart, but feignedly, saith the LORD.
(Jer 24:7 KJV) And I will give them an heart to know
me, that I am the LORD: and they shall be my people,
and I will be their God: for they shall return unto me
with their whole heart.
(Jer 32:41 KJV) Yea, I will rejoice over them to do
them good, and I will plant them in this land assuredly
with my whole heart and with my whole soul.
I Peter 3:15 But sanctify the Lord God in your hearts:
and be ready always to give an answer to every man
that asketh you a reason of the hope that is in you with
meekness and fear:
II Timothy 2: 15 Study to show thyself approved unto
God, a workman that needeth not to be ashamed,
rightly dividing the word of truth.
Christian Conversions - According to the Bible -
Can NEVER be forced.
Any Conversion to Christianity which would be
"Forced" would NOT be recognized by God. It is in
His True and KIND nature, that those who come to
Him and choose to believe in Him, must come to
Him OF THEIR OWN FREE WILL.
Don't Let anyone tell you that Christians support
Forced Conversions.
That is False. True Christianity is NEVER forced.
Co re Universal Rights
The right to believe, to worship and witness
The right to change one's belief or religion
The right to join together and express one's
belief
PROPHECY, THE END of DAYS, and the WORLD
the Next Few Years.
What you may need to know
There is much talk these days in the Islamic world
about the Time of Jacob, also known as the End
Times or the End of Days'.
The records of Christianity and the records of Islam
both seem to speak about the End Times. But the
records of the Old and New Testaments have a record
in the area of prophecy of events that are predicted to
occur hundreds of years before they happen, and that
record is 100% accurate.
According to Christianity, in order for a prophet or a
writer or an author to truly be a prophet of God, that
individual must be 1 00% correct 1 00% of the time.
This Standard is applied to the Old and New
Testaments (the Bible), and the verdict is that the Bible
is 1 00% accurate, 1 00% of the time. History and
Archeology confirms this, for those with the patience
And courage to seek truth and accuracy.
What has been done sometimes in the name of
Christianity, is not always good. But true Christians
and Christian examples remain strong, solid and
encouraging. True Christians have nothing to regret
nor be ashamed of. Offereing help to others is not
wrong.
There are many perspectives on the return of Jesus
Christ. The New Testaments seems to predict the
return of Two Messiahs BOTH of whom both claim to
be Jesus Christ.
The first Messiah who returns to help those who
believe in Him actually does not come to Earth. His
feet do NOT touch Jerusalem at that point in time.
That first Messiah calls his followers (Christ-followers)
to Him, and they are caught up or meet Jesus Christ in
the air, where their time with God starts at that
moment.
The second Messiah is the one who announces that
"He" is the one who has returned to Earth to establish
His Kingdom. He establishes a Temple in the location
of the Dome of the Rock [Temple Mount] in Jerusalem,
also re-institutes the jewish sacrifices of the Old
Testament, and proclaims that He is going to rule on
Earth. Only this Messiah who will call himself "Christ"
will be a false Messiah, in other words the False
Christ, the Wrong Christ.
During this time, Christians believe that they are to
continue to be kind to their friends and neighbors,
whether those neighbors and friends are Christians or
Moslems or Hindus or anything else. This remains true
in the End Times.
In the End Times according to Christianity, Christians
are mostly the observers of the greatness of God,
explaining to those who want to know, what is taking
place in the world and why these things are
happening.
In every generation of humans, there are many who
claim that they WANT to live in a world without God.
For that reason, God is going to give them what they
want. Those people will have 1) a world without God,
but where 2) a false Messiah arrives claiming to be
Christ, and only an understanding of accurate
Christianity will be able to help and show those people
how to have Eternal Life.
The false Messiah comes onto the world stage and
exercises power and dominion [over the entire world],
ruling from the geographic location of the Ancient
Roman Empire.
The false Messiah (obviously) denies that he is false,
and institutes a system of global economic domination
of a global economic system of money.
That money is a "symbolic" currency. As Christians
today understand this, the currency of the False
messiah is not based on Gold or Silver.
The currency that the False messiah establishes is
"cashless". It does not require paper currency. In fact,
the new currency will be global, and it is expected to
be cashless, without actual currency.
But it will be based on banking principles in the West,
and this False Messiah will cause those who are
jewish to believe that their Messiah has returned. Like
much of the rest of the world, many will be deceived by
the False Messiah who will accomplish many miracles
and will institute his system of global economic
domination.
The False Messiah will cause that the entire world and
governmental structure will cause the implementation
of his false economic system of currency.
That economic system is a system of global
dominance and global slavery. The global bankers will
endorse this plan, believing that they will reap even
greater profits than they currently do based on their
system of unjust usury.
This global currency will depend on computers to
work, and computers will be used to keep records of
all economic transactions all over the world. This will
be a closed economic system, one that can only be
used by those who have accepted the false currency
of the False Messiah.
The False Messiah will cause each person to be
obligated to accept to use the new currency, and each
individual will be required to give homage, or attention,
or reverence or adoration or some kind of worship, or
allegiance or loyalty to the false messiah, in order to
be able to use the new cashless currency.
The new cashless currency will have one feature that
those "who have wisdom" will recognize: the new
cashless system in order to be used will require each
human to have a particular mark or "identifier" or
system of individual identification for each and every
single separate person on the planet.
That may seem impossible. But even now, there are
millions and billions of computer records that are kept
on the populations of all nations that are already using
modern banking. Therefore it is not difficult to
understand that keeping track of 7 billion humans
around the world is not anything that is difficult, even
at this moment.
This system may seem impossible to establish
especially for those not familiar with the details of
power inside the European Union or the West. But
then if all of this is only fiction, then it should not harm
anyone to read this, and then prove many years from
now that all of these concerns were false.
The new cashless system will incorporate a number
within itself, as part of its numbering system. That
number has been identified and predicted for two
thousand years: it is the number "six hundred and sixty
six" or 666.
That may seem impossible, but actually this number is
already used as a primary tracking number within the
computer inventory systems of the world, long before
you have read these few pages.
The number is already incorporated in almost all
goods and products that are sold around the world: the
number is within something called the Bar Code that
can be found on all products for sale around the world.
Please remember that in order for all of this to be
significant, it must be part of an economic system that
requires each human to receive or accept their own
numbering on their right hand or their forehead. The
mark could be visible, but it is likely to be invisible to
the eyes, but visible to machines, scanners and
computers.
This bar code has a formal name: it is called the UPC
or Universal Product Code.
An individual UPC number is assigned to each
physical product that is sold on this planet. The UPC
or Universal Product Code already does incorporate
that number 666 in all products.
The lines [vertical lines] and the spacing between
them, and the lines themselves, their own symetry
determine the numbers and how those lines [the UPC
bar code] are read or scanned by the computers used
today.
The UPC has 666 built within it, and it is simply the two
long lines on the left of the bar code, the two long lines
on the right of the bar code, and the two long lines in
the middle of the bar code. The two long lines on the
left are read by computers and scanners as the
number "six" [ 6 ], and so are the two long lines in the
middle and the right side. Together, they form a part of
the bar code that in fact is 6 - 6 - 6 or six hundred and
sixty six.
Well it will not take long for some to dispute this. Even
some theologians have taken to dispute the disclosure
of the number 666, suggesting instead that the correct
number to watch for prophetically is not 666 but 61 6.
That is simply foolishness and a distraction. When this
economic system is implemented, one of the signs that
will accompany this will be the leaders of all faiths and
all religions who will falsely state that there is no
problem and no risk in accepting the mark of the slave,
the mark of those who accept to worship the False
Messiah.
These events were discussed a long time ago in the
Old Testament book of Daniel, and in the Final and
last book of the New Testament which is also called
the Revelation of the Apostle Saint John, or simply
"Revelation".
The Apostle John was the last living apostle of Jesus
Christ. He lived until around the year 95 A. D. and he is
the one who taught the early church and the early
Christians which books of the Bible were written by his
fellow Apostles (and remember he wrote five books of
the New Testament himself, the gospel of John, the
small Epistles of 1 John, 2 John and 3 John, and the
book of Revelation), and could be used and trusted.
The early Christians knew which books were to be
included in the Bible and which books were not.
] :
: [
A modern book has explained much of this. It was
simply called "Jesus is coming" and was written by
W. E. B Blackstone.
It is easy to dismiss Christians as zionists. (Not all
Christians are zionists in anycase). [ and obviously,
being pro-jewish is NOT the same thing as being in
favor of the official government of israel. And one can
be a Christian and desire good for both Jews and
Arabs]. But Christian Zionists are not perceived friends
of the jews when they are warning the Jews, even
about their Jewish state, that the Messiah who comes
to tell them that he is their Messiah, will be the False
Messiah.
The Ancient Book of Daniel is in the Old Testament. It
must be read alongside the New Testament book of
Revelation, in order to give understanding to those
who want to understand prophecy and the events
predicted in the End Times or the End of this Age.
Christians understand that God is the one who is God,
and He brings about the End Times because the
planet does not belong to itself. The planet does not
belong to Humans, or to the false [demonic] beings
who pretend to come from other planets.
The planet belongs to God and He is the one who
causes everyone rich and poor, to understand through
the events in the End of Days, that God is serious
about being God, and humans do not have much time
to get their own life in order, and to give an account to
God who is going to return and require that account of
each Human, on a personal and individual basis.
That task is so impossible to understand that all that
humans can do is understand and come to God, with
the understanding that God may or may not require
their sacrifice, but He does require those who seek
Him to read and understand and follow the words and
doctrines of Jesus Christ as explained in the New
Testament. [The Gospel of John is a good place to
start].
All those who have come before can do, is leave a few
things around, for those who will be left to try to
understand these events in a very short period of time.
The literal understanding of the Times of the End is
that they will last seven years, and that much of
humanity will perish during that time through a variety
of catastrophes and disasters, all of which God refuses
to stop for a planet that has been saying that they do
not need Him anymore.
If they do not need Him, then they should not complain
when these events occur. If they Do need God, then
they should be honest enough to admit this, try to find
God, pray to find God and that they will not be
deceived and that God would help them to find Him.
The economic system that requires a mark may have
a different formulation for the number 666. It may stay
the same as it is now, or it may change. But at this
current time, no one is [yet] required to have this mark
personally on their mark or forehead, though if the
dollar dies or is replaced by a new currency, the new
currency may be the one that is either an interim
currency, or the new currency of the mark, to be used
only by those who accepted to be marked
[electronically branded], so they can then use their
mark along with the mark of the new economic
system.
A "beast" is a monster, but one that at the same time is
usually both 1 ) ferocious and \
2) evil in addition to being overpowering and strong.
The new economic system will be ferocious and
overpowering. It will be directed by the False Messiah
and the Beast. (There are 3 Evil guys described in the
book of Revelation). The economic system using the
mark, becomes the "mark of the beast", because of
two factors:
1) the one who runs and directs the system is a beast
who is ruled by Evil and by Satan
2) the economic system of the mark of the beast takes
on those characteristics of the beast also.
[the system for those who refuse to go along will not
be kind nor tolerant, but more likely a combination of
the worst of the roman empire, the worst of stalinist
soviet communist USSR, and the worst of the the time
under Hitler.]
It will be impossible to buy anything without the mark
of the beast. Most likely, it may start out as optional
and quickly become mandatory. As soon as the
economic mark will be made mandatory, itwill become
a crime of life or death to try to conduct economic
transactions without the official government
permission, from the millions and millions of people
who have foolishly already decided to consent to
accept the mark. It will also be a capital crime to help
or assist anyone who would refuse to accept the mark.
Therefore the system of the beast will prevent
neutrality: it will prevent people from having the choice
of being able to "not make a choice". For that reason,
all humans will chose, and then God will classify each
person according to the choice that they have made,
that choice having Eternal consequences.
You can be assured that there will be billion dollar
contracts by public relations firms to convince you that
accepting your individual mark on your right hand or
forehead will help you, will save civilization, will help
mother earth, will help us all work collectively, will
allow to work, and oh yes, would allow you,
incidentally to be able to buy food to eat.
The book of Revelation says those who accept the
mark undergo a "deception", the implication being that
those who accept the mark are spiritually deceived into
acceptance of the upside-down universe: where evil is
viewed as good, and good is viewed as evil.
At that point, the new Messiah would be perceived as
real and genuine by those who have accepted the
mark, until later on when they will realize that they
have been deceived, but at that point it will be
impossible for them to change their mind or their
commitment to the false Messiah, and this would have
Eternal Consequences for them. The time to decide
therefore is before that time. Now would probably be a
good time, in case these things matter to you, who are
reading this.
Didyoujustlaugh ?
Those sillly bar codes...
That was pretty funny ...
But seriously... What does your laughter tell you about yourself ?
Does it tell you that the idea of tracking you is so strange,
that you have really never thought about it before ?
Do you think that other people may have thought about it,
even though you might not ?
England has more than 2 Million cameras right now.
Do they track everything because all things are a strong danger ?
Or. . .do the cameras track people. . just in case ?
So what do you think would happen if someone
could track you 1) 100% of the time 2) with 100% certainty
3) with 100% accuracy 4 ) with 100% of all that you do ?
If Tracking with a mark on your right-hand or forehead
becomes mandatory by law, and it will be a crime to not
have that mark, and it will also be impossible to buy or
sell without it, do you know how you would respond ?
What would you do if your eternal destiny largely depended
on your answer to this question ?
If you are still here when these questions are valid, you
should know your eternal destiny (after death. . .for eternity)
does depend on your answer.
Satan-worship on a Planetary Scale: When ?
The Characteristics of the First Beast
How Ali humans will be the ones Deceived and
actually ALL Humans [with one exception] Worship the Beast
The Power of the Beasi comes from Satan
Satan
Revelation 13:1
2 And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard,
and his feet were as the feet of a bear,
and his mouth as the mouth of a lion: and the dragon gave him
his power, and his seat, and great authority.
Oops: Satan-worship is not a good idea
Revelation 13:
4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power
unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast,
saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?
Revelation 13: The Beast
6 And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God.jd blaspheme
his name, and his tabernacle, and them thatdwell in,>reaven.
7 And it was given unto him to make war with the#aints, and
to overcome them: and power was given him **
over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations.
5 minutes of Information to change
vourEtemal destination ?
Revelation 13:
The Beast
8 And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship himfr
whoseriames are not written
in tbe book of life of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world.
Evefy single human worships the beast, infesstheir individual name is written in God's book of life
Revelation 13:
9 If any man have an ear, let him hear.
IttzkBsaspecialirdsrslancfrglDLrd&stardwhBtisbeirgsaid.
Note: The First Beast is the Anti-C hrist
666 and YOUR taking the Mark || QQQ^ Qf Revelation
The C haracteristics of the Second Beast and 666
rhe False Prophet
Revelation 13: ▼
13:11 And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth
and he had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.
Revelation 13J
False Prophet
The AntiChrist
1 2 And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him,
and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship
the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed.
Revelation 13:
13 And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down
from heaveSvon the earth in the sight of men,
^
Revelation 13:14 And dfeeeiveth them that dwell on the earth by
the means of those miracIeVvuhich heJjad power to do in the sight
of the beast; saying to them thaSoIwerism the earth, that they should
make an image to the beast, which nBdtne wound by a sword,
and did live.
Revelation 13:15 And he had power t^give life unto the image
of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak,
and cause that as many as would/fot worship the image of the beast
should be killed.
Image of the beast may bea R obotor Computer image,or a hologram, Butit
isanerip'tvthrouori which the Beast [Antj-C hristl exterids power overmankind
Revelation 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great,
rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark
in their right hand, or in their foreheads:
1 7 And that no man might buy or sell, save [except] he that had the mark,
or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.
"Man" = Mankind, menAND women
Revelation 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding
count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man;
and his number is Six hundred threescore and six. [GGvj
The Book of Revelation needs to
understanding on E
c alono with the O.T. Book of Daniel in order to make sense. r or
n R-ive 5:inn m the bu: T-s "woEicylorisbyH ;l:p
What is the "Book of Life" ? Is YOUR name in it ?
(Phil 4:3 KJV) [Saint Paul Knewofthe Book of Life:] And I entreat [ask] thee also,
true yokefellow, [fellow-worker] help those women which laboured
with me in the gospel, with Clement also, and with other my
fellow labourers, whose names are in the boc
(Rev 3:5 KJV) He that overcometh, the same shall be clothed in
white raiment; and I will not blot out his name out of the book of Mfe,
but I will confess his name before my Father, and before his angels.
(Rev 13:8 KJV) And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship him*
whose names are not written in the book of Mfe of the Lamb slain
from the foundation of the world.
(Rev 17:8 KJV) The beast that thou sawest was, and is not;
and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition:
and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder^zz
whose names were not written in the book of Mfe
of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and i
and the books were opened: and another book was opened,
which is the book of I ife: and the dead were judged out of those things
which were written in the books, according to their works.
(Rev 20:15 KJV) And whosoever was not found written in the
book of Mfe was cast into the lake of fire.
(Rev 21 :27 KJV) And there shall in no wise enter into it any thing
defileth, neither whatsoever worketh abomination. or maketh a lie:
but they which are written in the Lamb's book of Mfe
(Rev 22: 19 KJV) And if any man shall take away from the words
of the book of this prophecy, God shall take away his part
out of the book of I ife, and out of the holy city, and from the things
Which are Written in thiS bOOk. ™Sw.rnlr<,lnRe,!2:19referStoln!lUmiorTran!J.tDni«l»[)vi»,Bme»Dr«oriheBDIe
Note:The Lamb slain f:o" jj ; I Fthe i ■ i is I esus Christ lesus Christwas the pre-existen: C-eator of the L.r.ivefse (lohn II
God claims that He knows each of our hearts. God
also claims to know everything about us, all of our
accomplishments and all of our sins also. But God
sends Jesus Christ to save us through His words in
the New Testament. Those who ignore them take a
heavy risk to themselves, especially where this risk is
one of Eternity.
As the saying goes, Eternity is a long time to be
wrong. For that reason, it is important to understand
who Jesus Christ truly is and who He actually claimed
to be.
Here is where all of this connects back to the End of
Days: Those who accept to take and participate in the
economic system that incorporates the use of the
number "six hundred and sixty six" on their right-hand
or their forehead forfeit [give u p] their opportunity for
Eternal Life and Heaven, and Eternity with God.
According to the Bible, Satan is not some clever guy
meant to give people just " a little bit of harmless fun".
Satan is not your budy. Satan is not your friend, simply
out to help you have a "good time".
Satan is a real being, who is one of the most powerful
and intelligent beings ever created.
He used to be an Angel, but turned against God.
Satan is the one who will be in charge of the planet
during the time of the false Messiah.
This is Standard historic Christian doctrine, and this is
the doctrines that have been proclaimed since the
Early Christians. These are NOT innovations, these
are not anything new. [sources - Free - provided at the
of this for those who want to know more in PDF
Download]
You may ask: Well, what does this have to do with the
End of Days and the Economic System ?
God wants people to worship him Freely, but if they
want to oppose God, God will allow them to make that
choice. But making a choice, is not the same thing as
being able to chose the consequences of that choice.
There is no one in Christianity who will convince
anyone against their Will to worship God. God tells
each person they are responsible. From that point on,
the burden is on them, they can respond to God or not,
and their own response determines their own fate and
consequences, especially for Eternity.
The nature of a God is that He makes the rules and is
not required to explain anything to anyone. However
because God loves each person and wants them to
chose Him (and not chose to follow Satan), God wrote
roughly 1500 pages of material in the Old and New
Testament (the Bible) to help people make their own
choice.
The specific characteristic of accepting to use the
Economic [most likely cashless] system is that those
humans who use it must agree to accept the False
messiah as their own savior.
The Bible refers to this as worship. Let us not loose
track of definitions: It does not matter whether the
person will admit this or not. Worship consists of doing
the actions that a deity, such as God, would
understand worship to be.
God says that those who accept to take the economic
mark in their right-hand or their forehead will forfeit
their Life with Him, and will never be able to be saved.
From that point on, those who have accepted to use
the economic system by the mark on their right hand
or forehead have declared themselves - by their action
- to be the enemy of God.
But God is the one who deals with those who are His
enemies. The presumption is also that those who have
agreed to accept the new economic cashless system
which uses the mark have undergone an internal
change. By their action, they have agreed to be under
the dominion of evil (just like those who accepted
Sauron in the Lord of the Rings) and this new
allegiance to the False Messiah, His economic system
of the mark, and the acceptance of the ruler of the
False Messiah who will accomplish many false
miracles (through the power of the fallen angel Satan)
has consequences: it will change the person who
takes this mark, even while they will deny that inner
transformation to the willing acceptance of evil has
taken place.
In anycase, it will not be enough to reject the Mark.
People who decide to reject the mark, and there will be
millions, are hardly okay or alright. They will have very
little time to actually decide and accept to believe the
words of Jesus Christ in the New Testament. if they
can find New Testaments that are accurate.
The New Testament that is accurate is that which has
been used by the Historic Christian Church for
thousands of years. If it was good enough for the
Earlier Christians, it remains good enough today.
This would be the New Testaments that are based on
the received text of the Koine Greek New Testament.
This would include the Scrivener Version of 1860 [FH A
Scrivener] [do not use versions of his, published after
his death], and the Standard Koine Greek version of
the New Testament published by Cura. P. Wilson,
such as the version of 1833.
These two Ancient Koine Greek Testaments are based
on the {western calendar} 1550-51 greek textof
Robert Estienne, sometimes called Stephens or
Stephanus.
The False Messiah in the New Testament has another
name. He is not the true Christ, therefore by falsely
claiming to be the true one, he reveals himself to be
the AntiChrist. But rem ember at that point in time
where He rules, he will not be officially claiming to be
evil. On the contrary, he will claim to be the true
Messiah of love, miracles and peace.
These facts then are what missionaries may share.
Missionaries do not work for any government of the
West, as this is prohibited and illegal in the West.
[Missionaries in Islam often ARE funded by their own
islamic republic].
Christian Missionaries have only one goal which is to
inform and acquaint you with facts that you may find
interesting and that may save your Eternal life for you
and your family.
Listening to any missionary will not make you a
Christian. Missionaries are ordinary people. They have
decided that they will try to help others by presenting
truth and kindness to others. Those who hear what
they have to say are free to accept or reject what they
say. That is all.
Missionaries are usually very educated and devote
much time (often many years) to learning about other
people and about other cultures. They do not try to do
this in order to gain their Eternal Life. By definition,
Christians already have accepted and received
Eternal Life.
Christians do not need to worry about Salvation by
doing good works. For the true Christian, there is no
relationship between good works and obtaining
salvation. Salvation for each individual on the planet is
Free, Christians are those who have understood and
accepted to believe this. They already possess this
from the instant that they become Christians and
accept the words of Jesus in the New Testament.
Missionaries do NOT earn their way to heaven by
saving or converting other people.
Missionaries agree to share the good news of
Christianity, because of the individual and personal
good that this same message has accomplished for
them, on the inside of who they are. Missionaries risk
a lot to communicate the Love of God to others. Most
people cannot even understand this. Many people
today have lives that are without hope and without
purpose. Millions are aimless and without goals on the
larger scale. But Christians will risk much to share the
gospel with others, because that is what God
commands them to do and wants them to do.
In England the challenge is not that people are
ignorant of how to be saved and have Eternal life.
Many are, but the challenge is for those who have
already heard this to understand that this is really true,
genuinely accurate. It is easy to hide doubts behind
the walls of the propaganda that is falsely called
"science" these days.
People think they must not admit to being religious,
since this might not be "sophisticated". But God is the
most sophisticated one of all. As the saying goes: He
is no fool to give up that which cannot keep, in
order to gain that which he cannot loose [referring
to Eternal Life offered by God through Christ].
As they will admit, Missionaries are sinners also. If you
do not believe this, ask them. Then ask them what
they have done about their own sins, and listen to their
answers. Missionaries do not claim to be better than
others. They only claim that the mercy of God that has
been given to them, can be given to everyone else
also.
Missionaries could be anywhere else in the world.
They may not have to come to your area of the planet.
But if God sends them there, maybe you should thank
God that he cares enough to send those who risk
hardship and difficulty for being brave enough to try to
obey God and give you information that may save your
Eternal life.
Most missionaries have given up a life of comfort and
riches that they could have had in their own nations.
They have made this choice to try to show the love of
God to others. This example is worthy of kindness and
respect.
Christians usually are there to help, or to establish
schools or hospitals. Christians do not do these things
in order to earn or merit their eternal life. They do
these things as a result of being transformed and
changed for the betterment [amelioration] of others, by
God
Christians are not a witness to themselves, but to the
God that they serve. Those who worship a mean and
cruel God will become mean and cruel. Those who
worship a God of love and help and mercy and
kindness will demonstrate love, help, mercy and
kindness to others. People become like the God they
serve.
Some people say that if a person has harmed a
Christian, that they cannot become a Christian. But
that is NOT true. Saint Paul, even before he became a
Christian persecuted Christians. Then God showed
Him how Paul was acting against God. Paul became a
Christian.
Jesus Christ came to save everyone including
murderers and prostitutes. No one is holy enough to
be allowed into Heaven with any sins or imperfection
in their life. God is too Holy to allow this. God can
regenerate and change anyone if they are sincere
when they repent, and if they are seeking God with all
of their heart. Read it for yourself in the New
Testament gospel of John.
There is no need to be afraid, or to allow fear to be in
control. Christianity teaches a life of inner peace, not
a life ruled by fear.
No one in true Christianity will ever convert you by
force, since that would be disrespectful to God, and an
infringement upon His dominion. There are many
people in religions that are very rich because they try
to censor and keep information from reaching those
who would benefit most by it.
Many of those same people are rich, and do not want
their positions to be affected. They would rule by fear
and the threat of force and violence. Humans who try
these methods bring greatcurses upon themselves.
Ouestions that have been raised legitimately require
answers. The events which have been predicted will
occur. They cannot be stopped by humans (though
they may be delayed by prayer).
There are some books listed along with this New
Testament. We would urge you to consider them so
that you may find the answers you are seeking:
Historic Mainstream Books that may be of use:
Jesus is Corning by W. E. B. Blackstone
available online for Free [PDF] at www.archive.org
How to study the Bible by R.A. Torrey
available online for Free [PDF]
The Canon of the Old and New Testaments by
Archibald Alexander - available online for Free [PDF]
Pilgrim's Progress - An explanation of the life as a
Christian, in narrative. Very good, Other language
versions are known to exist in French, German; Dutch,
Arabic, and Chinese. Available online for Free Pdf and
maybe from Google Books.
an explanation of the number 666 = " Recapitulated
apostasy the true rationale of the concealed" name of
the Roman empire by George Stanley Faber - best for
those Christians and/or for those who know English
language well Available for Free online at Archive.org or with
Google books
Versions of the Bible that are sound and accurate
include:
Ethiopic New Testament - 1 857
Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Italian Diodati Edition - Original
Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books
Spanish - 1 602 Reina Valera Edition - Original
Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books
The Arabic Bible - 1869 Cornelius Van Dyke [We
recommend the original editions of 1 867 and 1 869
only] - Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Sanskrit / Sanscrit Bible - Yes, Sanskrit is still used
today in India. The Sanscrit 3dition that is accurate is
the version by Wenger. Available forFree online [PDF] atArchive.org
or with Uoogle books
Tamil - (Tamou)
Edition of 1859 (India)
Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Karen - The Karen New Testament (Sgau Karen)
Available for Free o iline [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Burmese - Myanmar - Burma - New Testament
avaiiabie. Edition of i 650.
Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Hindi - The New Testament in Hindi, also called
Hindustani. Editions preferable before 1881 .
Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Le Nouveau Testament - Ostervald - 1 868-72
(be cautious as many Ostervald and David Martin
versions in French have been altered). The french
version of Louis Segond is popular but is actually
based on the text of Westcott and Hort.
Accurate Osterval version available for Free online at Archive.org or
with Google books
Hungarian Bible - 1 692 - Original
Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books
The Persian New Testament - 1 837 version of Henry
Martyn - Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books
Ali the Messianic Prophecies of the Bible by Lockyer.
The Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by C. Cumbey.
The Case for Christ - Strobel
Eines Christen reise nach der seligen ewigkeit :
welche in unterschiedlichen artigen sinnbildern, den
gantzen zustand einer bussfertigen und
gottsuchenden seele vorstellet in englischer sprache
beschrieben durch Johann Bunjan, lehrer in Betford,
um seiner furtrefflichkeit willen in die hochteutsche
sprache ubersetzt
Le voyage du Chretien vers l'eternite bienheureuse :
ou l'on voit representes, sous diverses images, les
differents etats, les progres et l'heureuse fin d'une ame
Chretienne qui cherche dieu en Jesus-Christ
Auteur(s) : Bunyan, John (1 628-1 688). Auteur du
texte
Le pelerinage d'un nomme Chretien - ecrit sous
l'allegorie d'un songe / [par John Bunyan] ; trad. de
l'anglais avec une pref. [par Robert Estienne]
Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books
Baxter, Richard Title Die ewige Ruhe der Heiligen.
Dargestellt von Richard Baxter.
Pilgerreise zur seligen Ewigkeit. Von Johann Bunyan.
Aus dem Englischen neu ubersetzt
Der himlische Wandersmann : oder Eine
Beschreibung vom Menschen der in Himmel kommt:
Sammt dem Wege darin er wandelt, den Zeichen und
der Spure da er durchgehet, und einige Anweisungen
wie man laufen soli das Kleinod zu ergreifen /
Beschrieben in Englischer Sprache durch Johannes
Bunyan.
II pellegrinaggio del cristiano / tradotto da.ll' inglese di
John Bunyan dai Stanislao Bianciardi
Firenze : Tipografia e. Libr. Claudiana
Author Bunyan, John, 1 628-1 688
Title Tian lu li cheng
[China] : Mei yi mei zong hui, 1857
El viador, bajo del simil de un sueno por Juan Bunyan
"Everyone has the right to freedom of
thought, conscience and religion; this right
includes freedom to change his religion or
belief, and freedom, either alone or in
community with others and in public or
private, to manifest his religion or belief in
teaching, practice, worship and observance."
- Article 18 of the U. N. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights -
Christian Conversions - According to the Bible
Can NEVER be forced.
Any Conversion to Christianity which would be
"Forced" would NOT be recognized by God. It is in
His True and KIND nature, that those who come to
Him and choose to believe in Him, must come to
Him OF THEIR OWN FREE WILL.
Don't Let anyone tell you that Christians support
Forced Conversions.
That is False. True Christianity is NEVER forced.
Co re Universal Rights
The right to believe, to worship and witness
The right to change one's belief or religion
The right to join together and express one's
belief
The subject of the End Times in the west is called Biblical
Prophecy. For more information on this topic, feel free to consult
the Standard books on this including: The Late Great Planet Earth
(Lindsey), and the Charts of Clarence Larkin may give someone a
quick overview. Things to come by Dwight Pentecost is interesting
though technical. Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by Cumbey will
offer a quick read to those who are able to obtain a rare copy. The
Christian in Complete Armor by Gurnall [Free Online] will offer a
source of spiritual strength to those who have the courage and
wisdom to read it.
Some of Larkin's Material is available for Free online.
Remedv and Help for Occult & Demonic Forces
We include this short section for those who would like to
take immediate action, in order to help their life or the life
of someone that they care about.
The following covers a topic called the topic of "disembodied
spirits" or the topic of Spirits in the world around us.
Christianity teaches that there are 1) spiritual forces that are
created by Him, and that work with God, and 2) that there are
spiritual forces that rebelled against God, and try to use their
influence to harm the good that God accomplishes.
Christianity does NOT recognize that there are neutral
spiritual forces. Christianity does not recognize that there are
spirits thatroam the earth with no destination or purpose.
Christianity teaches that spiritual forces may attempt to
contact or respond those who seek them, and that those forces
are evil and will do harm to humans.
The reason is that Humans can be deceived by spiritual forces
that would claim to be good, but are not. The Christian
solution is to simply have nothing to do with forces that are
not part of the Kingdom of God and of Jesus Christ.
Those who disagree have the right to chose, but should not
complain if they find out that the spiritual forces they contact
truly are evil and deceive them. Most people do NOT find this
out for many years, until their life is wasted and it is too late to
do much for God. THAT is exactly the purpose of those
forces, to cause humans to spend their life and their time
chasing things which do not matter instead of investing in
their own spiritual future, in the afterlife.
Some people think that life is to be lived on Earth, while
others understand that life here is simply a down-payment.
Life here is simply time to prepare for the next thousands of
years, with God and others who serve Him.
Christianity does NOT recognize the category of spiritual
entities (spirits) that are full of Mischief, or mischievous.
Christianity would conclude that those spirits, where they
actually exist, are causing mischief as a trick to prompt
humans to become involved with them, in the same manner
as a human will puli a piece of string in front of a CAT in
order to watch the cat react.
There are humans who have ALREAD Y found out that certain
spiritual forces are Evil. These people have tried to get rid of
them but do not know how. There is no solution thatexists
other than to genuinely become a Christian and then take the
steps that the Bible instructs.
Incantations and rituals do not "force" any spiritual entity to
do anything. No ritual by a priest was ever effective
BECAUSE it was a ritual, or because it contained certain
words. However, spirits DO respond to those who are truly
Chrsitians, and THEY can certainly tell those who are
genuinely Christians (followers of the true Jesus Christ), and
those who are faking this or are insincere. It is a BAD idea to
attempt to fool or deceive a Demon. THAT does not work,
AND humans who try this only end up with much
ensnarement by those demonic forces.
There are solutions to these dilemmas. None of them will
work for those who are not saved or for those who are NOT
Christian. Try it if you want, but be prepared for the
consequences.
Demonic Spirits play by the rules that GOD lays down and
NOT by the rules that you may have been mis-led into
believing by some slick occult publishing company.
Witches have precious little power in fact, and the few that do
are under such oppression and such personal bondage that they
have no freedom, but they will not speak this truth to others.
The price of their freedom (they have been told) is the
ensnarement or seduction of others. The following prayers are
provided in case they are of assistance. Those who use them
must be true Christians, and recognized by God as such.
Having said that, spiritual warfare and spiritual conflict (since
this IS that area: the conflict in spiritual realms between
spiritual forces) is very much like running or any other long
distance task: it is long term preparation that makes the
difference.
A new Christian is NOT to be dealing with demonic forces,
and would be well advised to seek advice from those who
are serious, sober, and committed genuine Christians for many
years, before dealing with these areas.
Many books have been written on this topic. Many of them are
written by those who are occultists who are possessed and
seeking to mislead others. We will recommend OTHER
Christian books at the end of this section for those who wish
to pursue these matters with the seriousness they deserve.
Most of the books available in these areas for Christians are
written in English or German.
Also, it may not be enough to pray these prayers once. It may
take much time to have the impact desired. In order to have
personal victory in these areas over demonic spirits:
1) One must be a Genuine Christian
2) One must seek to actively follow God
3) One must spend much TIME reading the Bible, and
4) One must spend much TIME praying and learning HOW
to pray to God in the name of Jesus Christ, in accordance
(agreement) with the information and principles explained
in the New Testament.
prayer of renunciation of Demonic Forces
Prayer to renounce witchcraft and/or any spiritual
practice contrary to God and His given instructions
{Whether you have decided to become a Christian 20 years
ago or five minutes ago, you can still pray this prayer. If you
are not a Christian believer, or if you are confused about what
this means, no problem. Just go to the section on how to
become a Christian, pray that prayer, and then come back and
pray this one}
Lord God, I do not come always to talk with you when I
should Lord, I find this prayer difficult and I pray that you
would give me the grace, strength and courage that I need to
pray it and mean it.
Lord, I come to you because I am a true Christian believer, I
(your name here) , being under the Blood of Jesus,
claiming the Mind of Jesus, and the Spirit of Jesus, do hereby
present my request to you boldly before your Throne of Grace
(Ephesians 2:3/Hebrews 4:14-16/Philippians 2: 1-1 1). I ask
that you would neutralize and prevent any force or evil
presence from acting that might try to keep me from praying
this prayer, in the name of Jesus and in the power of your
blood. I pray that you would give me your spiritual strength
and your spiritual protection. I thank you for what you did for
me by dying on the cross for me.
I come before you in prayer today In the name of Jesus Christ
because I want to renounce any and all practices that are
contrary to you or to your teachings. I come before you today
in the name of Jesus Christ.
I come before you today because I want to renounce any
contact or seeking of any spirit or spiritual entity other than
the Christian Triune God or the Son of God, Jesus Christ. I
want to renounce any and all of my behaviors and practice of
allowing myself to contact the spiritual world or pray to/
through spiritual entities or people, that are not Jesus Christ.
I recognize that the Bible states that we can only come to God
through Jesus Christ, and through no other persons or spirits.
I come before you today because I want to renounce any and
all of my spiritism, spirit-contact, witchcraft and occult
practices, as well as any spiritual or other practice which is
against you or contrary to you, and I ask for your favor and
help to help me renounce these activities.
At this moment, I choose by my own will to renounce and
reprove all works of darkness in my life and the lives of the
generations of those whom I have joined. I include blood
relatives as well as adoptive relatives and any mates, or any
others whom I have joined such as lovers, seducers whether
these were my (whichever applies to you - if you are not
sure... include them all) wife/wives, husband/husbands, and
children/grand-children/great-grandchildren. In the name of
Jesus Christ, I hereby renounce any and every oath,
commitment, covenant, decision, curse, fetish, decision,
intention, word or thought, or gesture, and I hereby renounce
any and every fleshly and immoral intimacies and unions that
encouraged or brought about iniquity in my own life, or
anyone meeting the above stated requirements for bringing
works of darkness to my own life.
Lord God, in the name of Jesus Christ, I hereby choose to
renounce all unfruitful works of darkness, and have no further
fellowship with them from this time forth (Romans 13:
12/Ephesians 5: 11)
I do this through the Name of Jesus Christ, my Savior,
through His Blood that was shed for me,
through his precious Body given for me,
through his Mind that suffered beyond anything I could ever
suffer,
I do this so that my whole being - body, mind, soul and spirit,
may be completely set free from every sinful work of the past
brought about by the sins of those before me.
I do this so that no Luciferian, Satanic, Spiritually wrong
promise, or evil covenant, curse, action, word, or deed or
attitude - from my actions or my past be laid against my
account - in heaven or in or on the earth. By this action today,
I hereby serve notice that the handwriting of ordinances
written against me and my generations are blotted out in my
life - effective as far back as needs be to the very first though,
word, deed or gesture. (Ephesians 2: 13-14).
I do this so that from this day forward, I may go about serving
You God, in reverence of You and seeking your counsel in
everything I do. I submit my life unto You as a living sacrifice
- holy and acceptable in Your sight, which is my reasonable
service. (Romans 12:1)
Dear Heavenly Father, and Judge of the Universe, as I present
this petition before you today, I thank You that You have
heard me this day, and granted my every expression in
accordance with Your will. I know that You have done this
solely because of what Your Son, the true and only Jesus
Christ, accomplished for me, by dying and paying the price for
my sins on the cross.
Thank You from the depth of all of my being, for hearing my
prayers and granting my petition. Please remind me of your
grace and love on a daily basis. Please help me to seek to
serve and follow you, and help me to continue to remember
that you have forgiven me, and that I can take you at your
word and trust what you have given to me in your Bible. I
pray that you would help me to not do wrong, and to decide to
do what is right, and to take active steps to follow you. I pray
that you would fiil me with joy, comfort and hope and bring
true Christian friends in my life who will strengthen my walk
with You and encourage me to grow in the right spiritual path
with you. You know Lord that I have asked all of these things
in the name of Jesus, and I thank you that I am now free in
deed, according to what you have shared with you in the Bible
(Romans 6:22, Galatians 5:1, Romans 8:1, Romans 7:24, 8:1,
John 8:36, 1 Corinthians 12:27).
(Note: take time to look up these verses in the Bible which can
be found in the Bible. You may want to write them down, and
memorize them as well. It is good practice and will serve you
well).
I pray Lord that you would help me to remember that each
time I am tempted, that I can come back and talk with you,
and read the Bible for strength and encouragement.
In the name of Jesus Christ I have asked all of these things,
and I thank you for giving them to me, Amen.
The Spiritual Problems caused by Spiritual Explorations
of Witchcraft & Dark Spirituality - HereditaryWitchcraft
There is such a thing as occult forces that try to force families
to serve them, for many decades, and for many generations.
Some families did not KNOW how to fight the demonic
spirits. Therefore they gave in to them, and serve those forces,
and try to force their other family members to do this.
This needs to be resisted, but true freedom and true resistance
can only be found in those who truly accept and believe the
message of Jesus Christ as the New Testament confirms and
explains. This is only ONE book of many portions of the New
Testament. The New Testament is comprised of 27 books.
Prayer to be forgiven for sins committed while exploring
darkness and/or evil and prayers to be forgiven for sins
committed in & during witchcraft
Some people will wrongly tell you that this prayer cannot or
will not have a good impact on your life. Whether they
consciously know it or not, those who say that are people who
are trying to trick you. But if this prayer would really have no
effect on your life, then it certainly cannot hurt to pray it.
Lord God, I do not come always to talk with you when I
should. Lord, I find this prayer difficult and pray that you
would give me the grace, strength and courage that I need to
pray it and be totally sincere. Lord, I come to you because I
am now a true Christian believer, and because I, (your name
here) . being under the Blood of Jesus, claiming the Mind of
Jesus, and the Spirit of Jesus, do hereby present my request to
you boldly before your Throne of Grace (Ephesians
2:3/Hebrews 4:14-16/Philippians 2: 1-11).
I ask that you would neutralize and prevent any force or evil
presence that might try to keep me from praying this prayer, in
the name of Jesus and in the power of your blood. I pray that
you would strengthen me as I pray this and that my mind
would be clear, and that I would be able to concentrate on
talking with you and on what I would like to pray. I thank you
for coming to my help as you said you would in the Bible, and
despite the tricks of any evil forces to convince me of the
opposite. I thank you that you Love me Lord, even if I do not
always feel as though you do because I am notperfect.
I thank you for what you did for me by dying on the cross for
me. I thank you Lord, because I know that you are more
powerful than the forces which may have been controlling my
life, and which were exercising influence in my life that I want
to be sure is terminated and over. I come to you in prayer
today Lord, because I want to be delivered from all
consequences of hereditary involvement in the occult or any
occult curses which have impacted my life and/or hereditary
witchcraft and all of the sins and curses which have come
from those activities. I choose by my own will and I do now
renounce and reprove all works of darkness in my life and the
lives of the generations of those past and present whom I have
joined.
Choosing by my own will Lord Jesus Christ, I renounce any
and all curses or effects of my past actions, habits, thought
processes and any other activity or intention contrary to your
character and contrary to your word the Bible. any relatives of
mine who have been in the occult which you know about
Lord, and whereby I am or have been affected by any of their
actions, thoughts, words or deeds. In your name and by my
will with your help and depending upon you, I renounce all
occult blessings, all occult heritage and all occult
consequences, as well as any demonic spirits or inspiration,
which have a basis for interference or influence in my life,
either because of my own actions or because of the actions of
any of my ancestors or relatives which has an effect on me-
whatever evil effect that might be.
In this renunciation Lord, I include blood and adoptive
relatives and any mates, such as lovers, seducers andrapists
wife/wives, husband/husbands, and children/grand-
children/great-grandchildren. I hereby renounce any and every
oath, commitment, covenant, decision, action, curse, fetish,
gesture, and fleshly and immoral intimacies and unions that
encouraged or brought about iniquity in my own life, or
anyone meeting the above stated requirements for bring works
of darkness to my own life.
[ you should take time out at this point, recalling to your mind
any known names or circumstances - especially if there have
been rapes or seductions that you know about, from or towards
you, or that you participated in or witnessed. Take each
situation and person individually and ask the Lord to forgive
you of your involvement and participation in each of these
situations. Where the situation applies instead to others, ask
that they would come to realize the wrongness of their action,
and that they would be drawn to the Lord and that they would
repent and be saved ]
Lord, I hereby choose to renounce all unfruitful works of
darkness, and have no further fellowship with them from this
time forth (Romans 13: 12/Ephesians 5: 11) I do this through
the Name of Jesus Christ, my Savior, through His Blood that
was shed for me, through his precious Body given for me,
through his Mind that suffered beyond anything I could ever
suffer. I do this so that my whole being - body, mind, soul and
spirit, may be completely set free from every sinful work of
the past brought about by my sins or the sins of those before
me. I do this so that no Luciferian, Satanic, or evil covenant,
curse, or fetish from the past be laid against my account - in
heaven or in or on the earth.
By this action right now today, I hereby serve notice that the
handwriting of ordinances written against me and my
generations are blotted out - effective as far back as needs be
to the very first though, word, deed or gesture. (Ephesians 2:
13-14).I do this so that from this day forward, I may go about
serving You, Father, in reverence of You and seeking your
counsel in everything I do. I submit my life unto You here and
now as a living sacrifice - holy and acceptable in Your sight,
which is my reasonable service. (Romans 12:1) Dear
Heavenly Father, and Judge of the Universe, as I present this
petition before you today, I thank You that You have heard me
today, and granted my every expression in accordance with
Your will.
I know that You have done this solely because of what Your
Son, the true and only Jesus Christ, accomplished for me, by
dying and paying the price for my redemption on the cross.
Thank You from the depth of all of my being, for hearing my
prayers and granting my petition. Please remind me of your
grace and love on a daily basis. Please help me to seek to
serve and follow you, and help me to continue to remember
that you have forgiven me, and that I can take you at your
word and trust what you have given to me in your Bible. I
pray that you would help me to not do wrong, and to decide to
do what is right, and to take active steps to follow you.
I pray that you would fiil me with joy, comfort and hope and
bring friends in my life who will strengthen my walk with You
and encourage me to grow in the right spiritual path with you.
I ask Lord that you would give me spiritual discernment so
that I would not be deceived by others, and so that I would
follow you in the ways that you want me to. I pray that you
would help me to understand you and know you better and
that you would help me be an effective messenger of yours to
communicate the truths of the Gospel and live and stand up for
You. You know Lord that I have asked all of these things in
the name of Jesus Christ, and I thank you that I am now free in
deed, according to what you have shared with me in the Bible
(Romans 6:22, Galatians 5:1, Romans 8:1, Romans 7:24, 8:1,
John 8:36, 1 Corinthians 12:27). In the name of Jesus Christ,
Amen.
LIST OF ACCURATE BOOKS on the OCCULT /
DEMONIC SPIRITS for those who are CHRISTIANS
and who sincerely want to know more to help
themselves, and their family members
These books are available at a bookstore online at
www.amazon.com . They MAY be available through
other places online (on the internet).
Demonology Past and Present by Kurt Koch- Available
ALSO in German
Occult ABC by Kurt Koch - Available ALSO in German
Other Books by Kurt Koch - Available ALSO in German
Demons in the World Today: A Study of Occultism in the
Light of God's Word by Merril Unger
The Beautiful Side of Evil by J. Michaelsen
Inside the New Age Nightmare: For the First Time Ever...a
Former Top New Age Leader Takes You on a Dramatic
Journey by Baer
Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by Constance Cumbey
Die sanfte Verfiihrung (Cumbey Constance)
Book Description: 1987. Die Autorin beschreibt in diesem
Standardwerk Entstehung, Lehren, Ziele und okkulte Wurzeln
der New-Age-Bewegung. Sie enthiillt beklemmende
Parallelen zur ....biblischer Endzeitprophezeiungen.
Hardcover, guter Zustand, Verlag Schulte & Gerth,
Taschenbuch Neues Zeitalter (Geheimwissen), Religiose
Zeitfragen S. 300,
A Planned Deception: The Staging of a New Age Messiah
(ISBN: 0935897003 / 0-935897-00-3) Cumbey, Constance
Pointe Publishers
The Adversary by Marc Bubeck
Overcoming the Adversary by Marc Bubeck
Destroying the Works ofWitchcraft Through Fasting &
Prayer by Ruth Brown
Orthodoxy & Heresy: A Biblical Guide to Doctrinal
Discernment by Robert Bowman
Beyond Seduction: A Return to Biblical Christianity by D.
Hunt
Pilgrim's Progress by John Bunyan - The most widely
translated Christian book after the Bible. (Yes, an edition in
German, Dutch, French, Italian, Spanish, Portugues, and
Arabic have all been made). Note: Pilgrim's Progress by John
Bunyan is available for FREE online.
The Christian in Complete Armour, or, A treatise of the
Saints by Pastor (Rev.) William GURNALL - in One Volume
or in Three Volumes - available for FREE online
(the term "saints" used here simply means Christians).
i i'"> ' 'iiifiiii siM
*r ^«rg «O ^ tf*y
Bgg®5r
J?V
' -
'*=*->;-:
lesa®**
5=T** ■'■■■
0_S fl_i_e © P.
\^>W?i ijcj xj.A iybSJiJi 4^.1
|
1 "* ■
uoV:»|r*
■ ilo'^1
!
1
I
i
j
i
1
i
i
l*&?r n
o
irV^
* ■
u-Wirs-
'
^>J^
i ,
1 *
o^ifi
•
fc-*J*'
IT
* Ojtf l^j**
TA
•
^JW
0
n
ir
v?j
e
U-> '
ii
r
U-Jr-J? '
r
UV*! >
w;
■
Lr>L>.r f
0
' ^°"_r. *
"
*
tfcfe
\
Uji r
i
r
u— Jl
\
U-j, r
t
*
^
\
***
i
•
&lf
rr ■
o
■
iQ^ L; i
J'* Ojj—s'3 *■*— < 4*^.?
V
w
^j^i i-j r
i
!
1
^ y- i 1 ■ v> -^ c W. ^ ■ f *>jt ■£> Buiijfj . waa^ Jj uTj * . v_T '&>%% 3£\
4~^ fp. V' ^S ty {.J' J^-i-JK ^JS^^J^-vijfiij SSj^'-uS ^j
JAS £„ J! *,& &y.*fe'jif W/ j£b til ^o* J WV\ j^i iv*g~M Jp_J
^■'.A* *?.s g~vl ci^ J^S t?- o'j ■ asv1* **'.y
,-^j tjtgt i.1, ^ ^.'Ai . i2S i-\Sj «-w *,_, siV, u >
W^ii.u
■ U" **' £>>' ^_7' J» V S J;- t^-^^ o"^ ■ 2tfc)j«l (.j' Jo-fe iSl v-ii ^ i^b afl
J» L^*; (T, r»* i"\^\ j.i\, ^,J\ ihKi. '^.\ ^J«» fjp\ 0. 'JL.J, iii:U»\ \Jj rt
»*<J
</> </-' e^ ^ -^
. urv
->-rtV'^"'V
(J~A * "T
503 . ^'-.ubuLujJ r»i*» *J)^ *!^
507
516
522
526
528
552
561
570 . u^lj* o^,L=j ^JjJ |»lc J<tiL,
576 . i_SjJ_y»- ^yU»-^ J}' j»* *A\mj
585 . i^)l^ t^^-y. (_s^ /x **N«*|
586 . l£|Ijs>- u*^3-^ f^"1 (•** ^""V
587 .. . !_£;'_)=- ^Ii^vi #(* *<Jwy
590 ..^1 i_s'^>-y. CUUiliU L-jUi"
1 ***&?*
83 u^lr* JsWF'
135 Isj! JjustI
221 iL-jj Jjjk-'I
288 ... . ^V.;^ lM Sr>^
371 . j»j i (J"*V i-S/^*- l/"k"-V> *«";
405 . |-/w-«r> t>-»'u lJjI}*- c/*"JV '*'(->a7
9
437 U~-^y
459 . . jjUHL i^lja- (jJjJ *<db;
470 . ^luw^ilj '-S''^ \J^3i ^"J
481 ui^. <J-&Ij ^Ija» ,jjjj 'aSL,
489 . ujLuAaj i^Ijjs» (jJ^J; J<KlUy
- / - j
496 . ^UhjJLjJo |j*>Ijj J;l <*!L>
II nnn
-&LA-
mi iiii.ii imiiiei'ii
IHOCA XPII€TA,
BtpHO h tomho nptseAeH'B OTT. ntpEOC6pa3H0-TO.
Bi KiiHroneraTnmi^s-Ts Ha A. X. Eomariiraa.
1ST4.
ii-^° •= =
1" l>jj J&jiSgfr Js*fl
76 s^l i/S^i ^~i^ J^*
124 5^1 t/i^jU B^'y J^'
204 iijj,! ^jb eeli^ J**M
266 Jl^f'd/Jj-;
34 5 . . . . • jujdjlwo j a Jjj los , ^iJj**»! (V*y ?i
377 Li"^ *<ft*> s^jL-jl^js CilJj^ u-y!#
407 >*aJ\j ''iiUj, sJjl-jjni.js WjM. (j^jj
428 ^..JLj, s^jJa-L!^ ffiUj-j, ijijijj
438 ^jjiiL», s^lJLy^il isJJy-, (j-y!j)
449 ^uJU, i^LLi isJJj^ u^JJ
457 * *»*aJI**>i 5y«LwJ«9 i^Uj«*jj (^j^^i
464 l*"^' *A\mj a^jL&jILJ (itllj-^ (j^jj
471 ^jaJ\j •'aIU., 5^jLxJj!L-j isuj-i, (j^jijJ.
475 i*?"^ **^"»i *-<jljy*A> eUj->, (j-j!_>5
484 , ^Ajlj ■'aIL., 4-jjIjj*1j l£l!j-Jj u"J^JJ
49 1 -oiJLii iWLJ isUj-^ L^iJyi
495 juajLj, ii^i-J ("ilJyu, fj»yjl
496 ^»>a!1-, s^LjL^c isJJj-jj (j-yijj
521 ^)u«j? ''aIL^ i£l!j-^ tjj"i
530 jj-Vjl ***•$? *4W> isUj-; (j^u
539 ,j»^ '*i*>?'*^ dJy-, ,j-^u
544 ^Vjl *a?>j? 'JU; «sU}-, l$5
553 ^^ **J^) <^_r^ ^
534 ^AilU'JU, eUU, ^«s
555 ^i~»jf- ^JL-, idj^-, \±jV,
558 ^^-a-j <*l*,jS€
1 ...Evangile seion Matthieu */jj\ ^^i ^^» Jrf^
76 ...Evangile seion Marc t/jj^ t&^h ^~L^ J-~?^
1 24.., Evangile seion Luc ijjy\ ^oijU eli^ J-sM
904 .. Evangile seion Jean s^jjl l?1-^ ^L?* lW1'
266,. les Actes des Apotres, JLfl bKUyu,
345.. Epitre auxRomains .«aJU, s^Ujj CsU».-, (j-j!jj
377 * . Premiere epitre aux Corinthiens . . . ^mA«1 AJU*». 8 J oImjb&J . ifi (£tUa>*J, , uiojaJ
407. Deuxreme epitre aux Corinthiens. ^wA-JJ iJW, 8 >i r.lwj ojlj j «9 £)JewJ, (yjjjj
428.. Epitre aux Galates ~>a)Lj, s^liJj^c (sUj»», (j"j!j{
438..Epitreaux Ephesiens -jaIU, sJJUj^il l£)Jj-, (_>-y!jJ
449., Epitre aux Philippiens -.aIU, s^LJL» eUj-, (j-jljj
457. . Epitre aux Colossiens ^>a)L-, s^jL.-jJjii dJ^u, (j^Ji
464 Premiere epitre aux Thessaloniciens jmJbI ^aJLai. II j r J* tf jtwi (!iJJ***i r wijo
471 Deux'emeepitre-Thessaloniciens, ^AJIJ ^AjL*»» sJoLX-Jfl]L*J (£U«*j, /jrfjJV.
■i i O . Premiere epitre a Timothee -u* J «I jJw, AuU^be^Ot? (iiija*u, (Uji!»)
484. Deuxieme epitre a Timothee j^A*JU AJu*i. Am^Ua^Oo (£a]*-j, ^ujaja^
49 1 . .Epitre a Tite ^»a!Lu, *-yio eMj-^, (j^J_ji
495..Epitrea Philemon ^.aIUj. AJji-J l£)Jw, <j*j!jJ
49e,.L'EpttreauxHebreux >*a!L^ s^J^ dJ^-, y-j5j>
52 1 . . Epitre de Jacques ^i^^f- *a1Lj. uAlj»,. uji«
530.. Premiere epitre de Pierre.. Ji^'^jf- *a!L, (sl)j«^ ^-^o
539. Deuxieme epitre de Pierre. ,uAJt) sa~oj£ ''aJLj, miiyj \j»Ja\
544. .Premiere epitre de Jean «"^j' f**»jSi 'J^j isljvui .ts;
553_>Deuxieme epitre de Jean ^uajIj ^aSL», Uillj-». ,,•*;
554..Troisieme epitre de Jean ^uasTC *a1U>, e)JLj, ,£*■•
555.. Epitre de Jude ^fi^j? *A*| ^j^j^jH
558 •• l'Apocalypse. nommte parfois Revelations, ,.,,,,,,- •(•..■••••*•••• m*>5>h 1!£aJ . £*£".
Neues Testament / New Testament / Le Nouveau Testament
JOt^s- J^S-
■/"*
,ur
0 0 -'t,-**
jJkk* i (jjlj |^lj ^ (j^1 jV- JJ1
^y.^-1 I Al. J *_—>
IN THE
HINDUSTAN! LANGUAGE.
jfjf-n 3 -«j j^c / - - - - - - <*><*
ffjf-n ^ -«j c^fc^-n ^ _.---•«
?fjf~o o (ifp/f -c^ tm^f-r\ / - - - - - s"°l
*flf-n a ^ -^ f^"0 f - - - - - <■'*
ff!f"n fl ^ jpr^0 / - - - - ' - kv-i
ff^n ^ -^ jjrffn ^ - - - - -
jCjT»n ^ pf^ -pj j^vrfP / " " " " " alaW
fflf"n 3 ^ "^ f^°f - - - " " MJ
ffjf«n ^ -«^ T»rfn ^ ^J
'W1 F l**lr ------ -"J
«Wi /^ ir^ff ------- ,AI
fa f' \rv - - - - - - ~"'
^n p l(iffi . . - - - - ji
•/* Z1 ic*T - - - - '
re**
^
w, - - - - - - - la*- K y^e
^^ - . - - - ki- 11^ K i_r^;:
ji:1t,_ _ .. - - - iai- 1wj«i) o ij^jis^
fw - - - - - - s*=- ir^ ^ ^*-y.
i«vi - - - - " " 1==- j/"^ » V°-}t
is», - - - - - - " lai- £ 'i^j-yi
P, 3 - - - - i_>U/ ^ CiAai&o J_ ^y.
INJIL I MUQADDAS,
YA NE,
HAMARE KHUDAWAND AUR NAJAT-DENEWALE
YISIJ' MASIH
KA NAYA 'AHD-NAMA.
IS KA TARJUMA YUNANI ZUBAN SE ZUBAN I URDU MEN
BANA.RAS TRANSLATION COM1IITTEE SE K1YA GAYA, J1SE
TAS.HIH KARKE AB TISRI'bAR CHHAPWATE.
U
LONDON:
PRINTED FOR THE
BRIT1SH AND FOREIGN BIBLE SOCIETY,
INSTITUTED IJST THE YEAR 1804.
MDCCCLX.
THE
NEW TESTAMENT
OF OUB
LORD AND SAVIOUR
lE'SUS CHR'IST.'
isr SGAU KAREJV.
II CoS OO5) 33l£ cSl S c8l 93 S »
2d Edition.— 4000.
Translated by Francis Mason
MAULMAIN,
AMERICAN MISSION PRESS,
THOS. S. RANNEY.
1850.
«coSs»
ul«
«scib
u'iojs
ojioof> • •
\S\oop . . .
oo^«i8«ioo^
801 • • • •
C06JSoj8iiou . . .
oo^pojsuji . . .
O3C0100 . .
<SSS<980S • •
ISCOIOS . •
cocSab • •
008BlCOJf»On . .
oosbico^djo . .
ooiooo8«o« . .
o
00100088 j n . .
00008 - • • •
oicoSS . .
ai(3i . - - ■
ooicBS . -
0800 0813» . -
OtOOfflglJl • •
oSioo^oSjSoAo»
oSlCofSoSfoO^g j d
«SlOO^oS^aA^n
0J31 .'.'.,
OjfcSptf) . . .
. «3 . . . . • ■ o
. u^ ..... . <IJ
C01 . . . • - • 03E
. tSi • s°n
«100^ . • . . JjS
. 8 3=1
• oo^ao . . . . qj<>
- ro^«j . . . . <?<>j
cocoi 9°J
038 9 = 3
o
13COI 9J9
COc88 9?J
008110 95°
ODSHJ 991
O0l»0 > • • • 98'
O0X«J • • ■ 9G3*
00 ■ -
131 .
ai •
9
ooi .
o8«o .
o8nj •
081» o
cSnj
d8i«5
°8 •
c8p .
9G0*
i
■ 9«
9Jo*
9<15
9»P.
96J
9«<l
jos
30E
500
930
I
■coSsoC
«u
«soc-
«Sojs
OOlCOp • • .
oo^oiSwioo^ .
«jol
CD^SojSlOii . . .
ooe^ojsijo . . .
rocoioo . .
OESC3508 . .
(SCOIOS . .
cocSsb • •
oo!eicol»o» . .
C03©TCO|dJ1 . .
001BOD8I1O1I . .
o
O31«0088_/n . ■
OOOJ! . . •
oicoSS . .
ffii^t ...
ooifSS . . .
O800ffl8o 3« • .
caco ^8j j » • •
oSioojSoSfjoD^oa
o8icof>o9£cctf« J n
oSlCO^oSfioo^i
Cg3t . . .
o&SPfll . . .
tf} . , Matthew . 3
«S. . Marc- . w
cm . Luke - . , 33g
c8i . John ' . . ooo
BlCoS Acts of APostles J9S
Q . . Romans ,
roqS«0 ICorinthians .
COQp0 I l' Corinthians
COCOl . Galatians, .
Ephesians
Phlippians
, Colossians .
93C1
990
<3"J
5°J
9==.
9J9
S3J
99°
991
93°
9 Co
9G0
9«
9S»
919
9»o,
osnj . ",'8ter . . . 9£j
COl « O I [ Epistle I Letter of] John 511
cSlHj " 1 Epistle - Letter of] John go^
c8l«3 '" t Epistle-Letter of] John «0g
CO . JHde • • • ■ *8on
CO p , Revelation ■ • * 330
008 .
O
13C01
oocSs
COSH O ' Thessalonians .
a
CO 2 D I 1 1' Thessalonians
__»
COIO ITimothy •
OOIbJ "Timothy
00 • - Titus
QX • Philemon , .
(21 • Hebrews
001 . .James ,
OSfiO . I Peter . .
II Peter . _
«coSaafitt
OOaSoosnon . . •
OO^^C^Haj» . . •
OOCOICO . .
nivv • • •
.00
OC01OS . .
cocSsb . •
008ST.CO|iOn . •
C08ST.CO|l J « • •
OO1UOO80O» . .
o
ooiacos» jn . •
0O0O8 • • • ■
csicgSS . .
si(9)i ... . -
ooicBS ...
0800 080 O» . .
0100 08» J U • •
c8ioo|3c8r>oAoi
o8icojSc8£atfi j ■
oSioo^oS^oo^i
casi . . . .
a&s^ . . .
iyg v Evangile seion Matthieu 3
«y5| , .Evangile seion Marc <1J
C01 .Evangile seion Luc • ^^E
f\Ri ,, Evangile seion Jean , o o o
(2X001 , Actes des Apotres. J 5 B
8 , Epitrs aux Romains , ^0*X
OOG) S« O P^mtere opltre alJ. Crin.hiens 39 "
OOQpO /Douniimoipitro Corinthlens 9°J
QQQ31 m EpitreauxGalates, £oj
<}Qg # Epttre aux Ephesiens $d^
o
(3 COl Epltre aux Philippiens pjc
G3COS EpTtre aux ColossienscOl
00 "U O Promi4ra api*™ Thessalonlclens CCO
**\T°fl I ^euK'^me ^P'_tre Thessaloniciens
001 'l O prem,J"? ^P"*6 iTIniotluSe,
OOlll I Deux^'rB_6f,ttrB «Timothee ,
qj . Epttre a Tite , m
<31_ BEpitre a Philemon ,
/•■^ -L'Epttreaux Hebreux £93
001 . Epitre de Jacques , 919
OS«0 • * epitredePierre pa^
OSflJ Deuxieme -dePierre pgj
fKjT B D premiere epltre de Jean # CffO
tfVjltf I Oeuxiemc cpitrc- dc Jean* 9^9
/jH^K^ Troisieme epltre de Jean • f)OQ
EpTtre de Jude' • 900
'ApNatypse. nommae pirfois Rsvelations 430
9J1
93 =
pEos
SEo*
M**
Neues Testament / New Testament / Le Nouveau Testament
THE
NEW TESTAMEN!
OF 01- K
LORD AND SAVIOUR JESUS CHRIST,
IN TAMIL:
WBH REFERENCES, CONTEKTS 0E III E CHAPTEES AND CHRONOLOGY,
FROM THE EKGLISH.
e_*«5 faJiTL-jj^.TaiiU
fip go su rr 3, & iu ih ^Giresfliti&s.jiuurTGb
& f& JZ5! IU Q <5iJ <£ dF/Bdfi^^TJTSU U ffl Q & T $ ^ ^
MADRAS:
THE MADRAS AUXILIARY BIBLE SOCIETY.
PRINTEDATTHE AMERICAN ttlMIOH PRESS.
1859.
oo©£gco5)S)G|8(S oooo6oq|5sn
THE NEW TESTAMENT
IN BURMESE.
oo©£cco^3G|S(^i ogco8oqj5sr»
THE
New
Testament
OF
OTTR
LORD AED SAVIOTJR
JESUS OHRIST:
.■SEransIatrti into tfjc Butmesc, tam tljt ©ciginiil ffimft,
E
y Rev. A. JUDSON, D. D.
ANU EDITED, WITH CONTENTS 0» CHAPTERS ANU REFERENCES,
B
r Rev. E. A. STKVRNS, D. I).
-^^^3=^^=
R A. N GO 0 N:
2PUBL1SHED BY
:Seeond Edition,-5,000.
1-HE AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONAEV VStOK,
AT THEIR MISSION PRESS.
F. D. PHINNEV, SUPT.
l885.
ogGooo£scq|5s ^>g cq]5sc§dJ330gS^ooi^)os
ooSgcpojSe
OOGp8GOOOGpCO]&8
GOOooBoSeo . . .
ODSp80J^8JoSsD
sgcpoioSogoGSoS
OgCpfflioS^cSoDKSoS
ogGpoioSooc8c»ci>o8
Qg£peioS©opcoc©oS
ept>ioSg"]£ogyG©:>S
G^Oo8qo5©0
aoooSogSs . .
G0OD^Draj&8
GJ|DCO<f^c8gS8
GCOjpooos^oocBrajjSa
GO3Qu9S^0Oc8cq)&8
GCK>E[8ggSoD£8©ro3! . . .
GOD0l>GCqj<X>C»^3Oj^CI3j58
OGt»OOOB^OO^C(J)tS8 . . .
GOSOGjos^ooj^rag&a
onraSsnSecigtSsojSi aj]58^o«uo)c4 oao|a:x>oSjje!»5i ocraJpjS
■ic58|£oj8(:)§8c5]£l Q^e^C3008D£BD£|l S»3C0?8(t^8r^ iijScfjS
=O^llC^33OJI053lc^£80cSs|6c^8C0^!»3CT?8^8t^^aigSl1 OCloSp
sSSJoScoeoos (i) §e:»5i (cgf&e^ec03c»3a>5'8(o§8§ c^5coSc^^c^
CD^II^oSjf§8 (l) C»gS(§S^oSlSoOS^8n^(3COgSl[
QgooSoqj<5s j \ oq]<Ssc§(i32»g5$o«
5l£aoi)3C|goS .... Matthew ....
5l£«Dr^sc|go6 .... Marc -
jSojodoosjEoS .... Luke-- ■■•■
5)Eeco3co^3G|So£. . John - ....
«D
Gt.VSS
•oow^GODSoggj .... Acts of Apostles ....
OD
GGp«(3 c03©9 .... Romans ....
GGp
Eroo&j^-lgcflgeoogueeDS .... J Corinthians
0 GCOO>
efDO^^lSoIsso^cStOCBoS . . II Corinthians
ocdDo8gol38D .... .... Galatians . .
J GC03>
oco
GisoS|3ol383 .... .... Ephesians
c
ScS8[oqo1o§)D .... .... Phlipplans .
8
Gro3GCODob(oDOl3©D ' .... Colossians
sodo
0300COOeCOD§oSSorlo©0030e©o£ ' Thessalonians
3 COoS
CX>o530:>GCOD§o5|o3cn3809c8eoc©D£ " Thessalonians
J 030§
c8GWDCCOjo3ol96)OOC«G©^£ .... 1 Timothy . ,
o o9
cBGGOGCcgdlgSD^cfiuOGSoS . . II Timothy
j c8
cfiojgdloeo .... .... Titus . . .
8gCO(^S(3o)q©0 . . .... Philemon
c8
8cco-
GOOgS5ol3©^ .... .... Hebrews. , .
GOO
5|£a50trjiyffiol3SO .... James. .
COO
C|£G0ro<j)[3dl380OgUG8DS .... IPeter . . .
0 GO
J|£GOOD^jffiol3S0qc8o0Ge3S .. MPeter.
J GCi
n 3 GO>3
G)£GOD0COS[Scn3©0OM«G©D£ .. 1 [ Epistle / Letter of] Joh
a£G030coEScno©03c8oDG©o£ " [Epistle-Letterof] Joh
5|£GO53C0ifficn3B0ODcS(X)SSD£ I" [Epistle-Letterof] John ^ c<a3
5j£a^rj(p3cf)3B3 .... .... Jude ....
<g03cr$ag&8 .... . . Revelation ....
ca>3coc»po£§ag&8 . .
g«8o3po£§reg& . ,
«°33?°83l
8cgDDS^ooc8ra]&
GGiS^i03^0od3oDj&8 . .
UDCo8oS^DO£§r>3j&8 . .
33Wp5^DUC^p;ii
scOdoo
§
C033^>
8
p
(»0
e»
•*>%
0)0
«OCO
THE
NEW TESTAMENT
OF OUE
LORD AND SAVIOUR JESUS CHRIST
TBANSLATED INTO TELDGU
FROM THE ORIGINAL GREEK.
§T_g $ » o ■ # tf.
e8s6 ^ So ^rsler^A&o-O H 33 76 «T* tf -O o -iS w <S tf 8.
J?,;» ^sio oO"E_o tSoII
MADRAS:
PEINTED AT THE AMEKICAN MISSION
PBESS
FOE
THE
MADKAS
AUIHIAET
BIBLE
S 0 C I E T T,
And sold at their
Depository, 155 Popham's Broadway
18 60.
THE BOOKS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT.
^°3& ,jf,o&>S&>, 3{£sSue>aMS'jr_ "3tfR>.
5o"g
&*&(,_
-W"^ ...- ...
:3Sr-tf«Sb
5^S^
O §"8o§
J> §"8o§
K'aScK)
^lsl>
pS&i
S"eS"^\ ...
O •^Sj«5>"6j • • •
. . . -30~
oa.
. . . -stf
jn
. . .s><y
ClSL
. . . Oe_
o3
_9 ^^tf^S^
-s 8"»»q5c55cD.
©e&> . . .
^"A • • •
z»
3 Serasi
s5SCsk>.
b'
3
n
o3
>«
3
n
o
ftEjIiTUP'
XCIV9":
pa:fnr : P «»» R3\,t ¥l!
ppi>fi:Ticntfi«
0>TVA ! VX.fl:
PitiTCPWP» : ooj(Ai£*::
These texts conforms to the T. R.
as far as we know. Anyone having questions about this
text should compare it to the Stephens / Estienne Version
in Koine (Ancient) Greek of 1 550/1 551 , which is the root
Standard historic Ancient Greek text of the New Testamen t
LE
NOUVEAU TESTAMENT
D E
NOTRE SEIGNEIffi JESTJS-CHBIST
d'apres la veesion revce
Par J. F. OSTERVALD
PARIS
SOCIETE BIBLIQUE DE FRANCE
41, RUE LA BRUYBRE
1872
One of the Reliable copies of the French New Testament - Une Bible fidele.
Available sometimes [and Free (gratis) ] atwww.archive.org
TABLE DES LIVRES
DU NOUVEAU TESTAMENT
Evangile seion saint Matthieu .
EVanfrile seion saint Marc . . .
Evangile seion saint Lue . . . .
Evaiigile seion saint Jean . . .
Les Actes des Apotres
Epitre de saint Paul aux Ko-
mains
I" E-pttre aux Corinthiens . . .
II* Epitre aux Corinthiens . . .
Epitre aux Galates
Epitre aux Ephesiens
Epitre aux Philippiens
Epitre aux Colossiens
I" fipitre aux Thessalonicieus.
rlcd
chap.
P»6e»
28
1
1G
52
24
85
21
139
23
179
18
232
16
253
13
277
6
292
6
300
4
307
4
313
5
318
Itc Epitre aux Thessaloniciens.
£re Epitre a Timothee
H* Epitre k Timothee
Epitre a Tite
Epitre a Philemon
Epitre aux Hebreux
Epitre de saint Jaeques
lre Epitre de saint Pierre ....
IIe Emtre de saint Pierre ....
Irt Epitre de saint Jean
He fipitre de saint Jean
III1 Epitre de saint Jean
Epitre de saint Jude
Apoealypse de saint Jean . ... 22
Nombre
d»
chap.
3
Page*
323
6
326
4
332
3
336
1
339
13
340
5
357
5
362
3
369
5
37-3
1
379
1
380
1
381
Le signe f indique la division du texte en paragraphes.
La Bible la plus fidele = Texte Recu - Grec Koine - d'Estienne (1550-51)
BOOKS OF THE SBW TESTAMENT.
Matthew 28
Mark ... 16
Luke 24
John 21
The Acts 28
Epistle to the Eomans ... 16
I. Corinthians ... ... ... 16
II. Corinthians... ... ... 13
Galatians ... ... ... 6
Ephesians 6
Philippians ... ... ... 4
Colossians 4
I.'Thessalonians ... ... 5
II. Thessalonians ... ... 3
L Timothy ... 6
II. Timothy 4
Titus 3
Philemon ... ... ... 1
Hebrews ... 13
Epistle of James ... ... 5
I. Peter 5
II. Peter 3
I. John ... 5
II. John 1
Ht. John 1
Jude 1
Kevelation .. 22
imMmt
mA+ntt
3|£>\"Tpf
.PT
SHtr
SHft
^5ft
'W'—' pT
stii^a»
■SLjfj-jji. n ..
«Alfjgii
FfJA£#ff&
«a«».hs
mA&Mm
ftAjfeEBSttiH
■&Aae£&«ttii
•gAmmm
m:
mmmm
Chinese Simplified - Request to God
isgw±ifr, wms&mmT ummnm^^M^^^
m%mij]miMmm^mnmm«y3Xft,immi
t.
«at^jf#^#,{nsiHjtt#,{nfgii^ftBas#AR a»f«f, /s
Chinese Traditional - Talking to the Lord of Heaven
mm, Mtmmmi mEjmmMi mj.x^& §m«5#
tm&mi£mmmmtmmmmmMmm^A&, &
immtmmmmmmmmmmmm^A& mm, t
Chinese Traditional - Request to God
ss«±#, mmmmmmmjtmmm^
mm, i&mmtMi mRimm^n M_ax#& mwm&
n0 mm, Mtimm mmm^m^msLimTM^
tm&mismmmmimmmmMmm^A&, &
immtm^m^mmmmmmmmm^A& mm, m
God mr, mmmmmM^mMMmintMmfcfen
'-A4
•ff
Bii
;?«KfPSP*
^Jl«;m«*Wi?P»W«*, HP1,
Korean - Request to God
5
J
, &
9
5 ?
5
(
)
1
.God
(
)
•
1
5
5
,Amen
)
Gebet zum Gott
Lieber Gott, Danke, daB dieses Evangelium oder dieses neue Testament
freigegeben worden ist, damit wir in der LageSIND, mehr uber Sie zu erlernen.
Helfen Sie bitte den Leuten, die fiir das Zur Verfiigung stellen dieses
elektronischen Buches verantwortlich sind. Sie wissen, daB wem sie sind und
SieSIND in der Lage, ihnen zu helfen.
Helfen Sie ihnen bitte, in der Lage zu SEIN, schnell zu arbeiten, und stellen Sie
elektronischere Biicher zur Verfiigung Helfen Sie ihnen bitte, alle
Betriebsmittel, das Geld, die Starke und die Zeit zu haben, die sie zwecks sein
miissen fiir, Sie zu arbeiten zu halten.
Helfen Sie bitte denen, die ein Teil der Mannschaft sind, das ihnen auf einer
taglichen Grundlage helfen. Geben Sie ihnen die Starke bitte, um jedem von
ihnen das geistige Verstandnis fiir die Arbeit fortzusetzen und zu geben, daB
Sie sie tun wiinschen. Helfen Sie bitte jedem von ihnen, Furcht nicht zu haben
und daran zu erinnern, daB Sie der Gott sind, der Gebet beantwortet und der
verantwortlich fiir alles ist.
Ich bete, daB Sie sie anregen wiirden und daB Sie sie schiitzen und die Arbeit u.
das Ministerium, daB sie innen engagiert werden. Ich bete, daB Sie sie vor den
geistigen Kraften oder anderen Hindernissen schiitzen wiirden, die sie
schadigen oder sie verlangsamen konnten.
Helfen Sie mir bitte, wenn ich dieses neue Testament benutze, um an die Leute
auch zu denken, die diese Ausgabe zur Verfiigung gestellt haben, damit ich fiir
sie und also, sie beten kann kann fortfahren, mehr Leuten zu helfen.
Ich bete, daB Sie mir eine Liebe Ihres heiligen Wortes (das neue Testament)
geben wiirden und daB Sie mir geistige Klugheit und Einsicht, um Sie besser zu
kennen geben wiirden und den Zeitabschnitt zu verstehen, dem wir in leben.
Helfen Sie mir bitte, zu konnen die Schwierigkeiten beschaftigen, daB ich mit
jeden Tag konfrontiert werde.
Lord God, helfen mir Sie besser kennen und zu wiinschen anderen Christen in
meinem Bereich und um die Welt helfen wiinschen. Ich bete, daB Sie die
elektronische Buchmannschaft und -die geben wiirden, die ihnen Ihre Klugheit
helfen. Ich bete, daB Sie den einzelnen Mitgliedern ihrer Familie (und meiner
Familie) helfen wiirden nicht Angelegenheiten betrogen zu werden, aber, Sie
zu verstehen und Sie in jeder Weise annehmen und folgen zu wiinschen. Geben
Sie uns Komfort auch und Anleitung in diesen Zeiten und ich bitten Sie, diese
Sachen im Namen Jesus zu tun, amen,
Prayer to God
Dear God,
Thank you that this Gospel or this New Testament has been released
so that we are able to learn more about you.
Please help the people responsible for making this Electronic book
available. You know who they are and you are able to help them.
Please help them to be able to work fast, and make more Electronic
books available
Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the strength
and the time that they need in order to be able to keep working
for You.
Please help those that are part of the team that help them on an
everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue and give
each of them the spiritual understanding for the work that you want
them to do.
Please help each of them to not have fear and to remember
that you are the God who answers prayer and who is in charge of
everything.
I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect them, and
the work & ministry that they are engaged in.
I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces or other
obstacles that could harm them or slow them down.
Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think of the
people who have made this edition available, so that I can pray for
them and so they can continue to help more people.
I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word (the New
Testament), and that you would give me spiritual wisdom and
discernment to know you better and to understand the period of time
that we are living in.
Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that I am
confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want to know you
Better and to want to help other Christians in my area and around the
world.
I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and those who
help them your wisdom.
I pray that you would help the individual members of their family
(and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but to understand you
and to want to accept and follow you in every way.
Also give us comfort and guidance in these times and I ask you to do
these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,
Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these
books can be obtained [downloaded] for Free and without
cost
Nfiw Tfistamfint
E
Arabic New Testament - P d lt # 1
B
Arabic New Testament - P d lt # 2
CT
Arabic New Testament - Pait #3
GREEKNEWTESTAMENT
NOUVEAU TESTAMENT GRECQUE
New Testament- CLASSIC KOINE - GREC ANCIENT -
ISEWTESTAlVENr in LATIN
NOUVEAU TESTAMENT -LATIN
Telecharaez d o u r en a r r i v e r au oaaes IGratuit-evidement)
Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these
bookscan beobtained [downloaded] [telecharaer] forFreeand withoutcost
PERSIAN - PERSE - IRANIAN - FARSI
Nfiw Tfistamfint
Nouveau Testament persan [Perse - Iran] -
Farsca Yeni Ahit- Nuevo Testamento pers a
Persisch Neuen Testament -Testamento Novo persa
Persian Farsi New Testament - P art # 1
Persian Iranian New Testament - P art #2
i
Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #3
i Z
Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #4
Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #5
Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #6
Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #7
Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #8
Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #9
ETHIOPIC - AMHARIC
Nfiw Tfistamfint
EthiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt # 1
Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #2
E thiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #3
EthiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #4
Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #5
Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #6
Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #7
C licking on these links will take you to pages where these
bookscan be obtained fdownloadedlfor Free and withoutcost
■URKISH NEWTESTAMENT
Neuen Testaments in turkischer
Classic Turkish in ARABIC Scrio
New Testament - TURKISH in Arabic Scrip
Turkish New Testament (Arabic Scrip / Scriptj-Tiirk Yeni Ahit -
Neuen Testaments in turkischer- Nuevo Testamento en turco-
Nouveau Testament en turc ■ Nieuwe Testament in hetTurks
Classic Turkish New Testament -
1 Classic
Turkish New Testament -
I Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic
Turkish New Testament -
1 Classic
Turkish New Testament -
1 Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic
Turkish New Testament -
Classic Turkish New Testament -
Part#1
Part#2
Part#3
Part#4
Part#5
Part#6
Part#7
Part#8
Part# 9
Part# 1
U
Part#11
Part# 12
NOUVEAU TESTAMENT HONGROIS - HONGRIE
HUNGARIAN N.T. Matthew - #1
hungarian - II Thes saloiiians - #14
HUNGARIAN N.T. Marc
HUNGARIAN- 1 Timothy-* 15
HUNGARIAN N.T. Luke
HUNGARIAN N.T. J ohn
-#4
HUNGARIAN N.T. Acts
-#5
HUNGARIAN N.T. Romans -#6
HUNGARIAN- 1 Corinthians -#7
HUNGARIAN- II Corinthians - #8
HUNGARIAN- Galatians - #9
■
HUNGARIAN- E phesians -#10
■
HUNGARIAN -Philippians -#11
HUNGARIAN -Colossians -#12
■
HUNGARIAN - 1 Thessalonians - # 13
HUNGARIAN- II Timothy- #16
HUNGARIAN N.T.TITUS -#17
HUNGARIAN -Philemon-* 18
HUNGARIAN -Hebrews- #19
HUNGARIAN -James - #20
HUNGARIAN- 1 Peter -#21
HUNGARIAN- II Peter -#22
HUNGARIAN- 1-3 J ohn -#23
HUNGARIAN N.T. J ude
HUNGARIAN -Revelation -#25
Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these
books can beobtained [downloaded]forFreeand withoutcost
C licking on these links will take you to pages where these
bookscan be obtained fdownloadedl for F ree and without
Classic Tamil New Testament
Neues Testament des Tamil -Tamil dilinde yeni vasiyetname
Nieuwe Testament in het Tamil-taal -
An accurate & lasting translation
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
Part#l
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testam
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament
TAMIL NT-Part#13
TAMIL NT-Part#15
TAMIL NT-Part#14
TAMIL NT-Part#16
Clickto goto pages where books can beobtained [downloaded]- Free
i
KAREN (Sgau)NEWTESTAMENT
New Testament
3
URDU - PAKISTAN / INDIA
'ew Testament
URDU New Testament- P art#l
H
rt#2 [T
URDU New Testament - P a
H
URDU New Testament- P art #3
E
URDU New Testament
-Part#4
HINDI ■ HINDUSTANI New Testament
O
B
TELEGU New Testament
n
TAMIL New Testament
KAREN New Testament
BURMA MYANMAR New Testament
ASSAMESE New Testament
Chinese New Testament
GUI ARAT NewTestamenl
Sanscrit Sanskrit New Testament
Anc ient G reek New Testament
Indonesia New Testament
Arabic New Testament
T
I I
izerbanan Azan Azen New Testamen
Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these
bookscan be obtained fdownloadedl for F ree and without
BURMA MYANMAR Part#13
BURMA MYANMAR Part#15
BURMA MYANMAR \M Part#14
BURMA MYANMAR
FJ Part#16
Click to goto pages where books can be obtained [downloaded]-Free
Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these
books can beobtained [downloaded]forFreeand withoutcost
MODERN GREEKNEWTESTAMENT
Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these
books can beobtained [downloadedl for F ree and without cost
20 seconds for Fellow Christians - Dear Lord,
Thank you thatthis PDF Ebook
has been released s o that we are able
to learn more about you and wiser versions.
Please help itto have wide circulation
Please help the people responsible for
making this Ebook available.
Please help them to be able to have more
resources available to help others.
Please help them to have all the resources,
the funds, the strength and the time that they
need and ask for in order to be able
to keep working for You.
I pray that you would encourage them and
that you protect them physically and
spiritually, and the work & ministry that
they are engaged in.
I pray that you would protect them from the
Spiritual or other Forces that could harm them
or their work and projects, or slowthem down.
Please help them to find Godly friends who
are able to help. Provide helpful transportation
for their consistent use.
Remind me to pray for them often as this
will help and encourage them.
Please give them your wisdom and
understanding sothey can better followyou,
and I ask you to do
these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11